Technical Specification PDF

CONTENTS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
BID DOCUMENT NO.: REC-138 VOLUME-II
FOR 220 kV SUB-STATION MATERIAL

SECTION-1
GENERAL
SECTION-2 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION-3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF POWER TRANSFORMER
Chapter-1 100 MVA, 220/132 kV Power Transformer
Chapter-2 100 MVA, 220/33 kV Power Transformer
Chapter-3 20/25MVA, 132/33kV Power Transformer
SECTION-4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF SWITCH-GEAR
Chapter-1 245 &145, KV SF-6 Circuit Breakers
Chapter-2 245, 145 & 36 KV Isolators & L&E Switches
Chapter-3 198, 120, 30 & 9 KV Gapless Surge Arrestor
Chapter-4 36 kV VCB 2000A/630A
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF PROTECTIVE GEAR
SECTION-5
Chapter-1 245, 145, 36kV CT & 245,145, 36kV & 12kV NCT
Chapter-2 245 &145 kV CVT/245 & 36kV PT
Chapter-3 220 kV, 132 kV & 33kV C& R PANELS for substations having substation
automation system
Chapter-4 Sub-Station Automation System
Chapter-5 Inter-utility Metering System
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF ELEC. AND MECH. AUX.
SECTION-6
Chapter-1 Bus post insulators
Chapter-2 220V and 48V VRLA DC Battery
Chapter-3 220V DC Battery charger
Chapter-4 DCDB
Chapter-5 415 V LT MCCB board
Chapter-6 Fire fighting equipments
Chapter-7 200KVA 33/0.4KV Station T/F
Chapter-8 33KV Shunt Capacitor
Chapter-9 Air Conditioning System
Chapter-10 LT Power Cable
Chapter-11 100 KVA DG Set
Chapter-12 Unarmored copper control cable
Chapter-13 Armored copper control cables
Chapter-14 Marshalling Kiosks
SWITCHYARD ERECTION AND INSTALLATION
SECTION-7
STEEL STRUCTURE
SECTION-8
CIVIL WORKS
SECTION-9
SECTION-10 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF PLCC EQUIPMENT

Chapter-1
PLCC Equipment & Protection Coupler
Chapter-2
Line Traps
1
Chapter-3
Coupling Device
Chapter-4
48 V Battery Charger
Chapter-5
HF Cable 150 Ohm (Balanced)
LIST OF DRAWINGS
2
SECTION -1 (GENERAL)
1.1 INTRODUCTION:
The scope of this specification covers construction of following 220kV Substations on supply cum
erection (turnkey) basis as per Annexure-I on single source responsibility basis:
1.2 SCOPE
The detailed scope of work shall be as under:
1. Scope of work for 220 kV Substation Mehna Khera is as under:-
Providing 2x100MVA, 220/132 kV Transformer and 1x100MVA, 220/33 kV Transformer, its bays
along with allied switchgear and protective equipments, 4Nos. 220 kV line bays along with allied
switchgear and protective equipments to accommodate LILO of both circuits of 220 kV
Fatehabad- Rania line at proposed 220kV S/Stn. Mehna Khera and 1 no. bus coupler bay along
with allied switchgear and protective equipments and provision of space for additional 2No.
220kV line bays in future (Total 12 No. bays including 4 No. spare bays), 2 No 132kV I/C bays
along with allied switchgear and protective equipments, creation of 3 No. 132kV line bay at 220kV
Mehna Khera to accommodate 132kV Mehna Khera-Ellanabad S/C line on D/C tower and
creation of 132kV Mehna Khera-Madhosinghna- Ram Nagaria D/C line with 1 no. bus coupler bay
along with allied switchgear and protective equipments (Total 9 No. 132kV Bays including 3 No.
spare bays) and 33 kV Bays including allied switchgear and protective equipments for
accommodating 2 No 33/0.4 kV Transformers (in one bay) for auxiliary supply, 1No I/C
Transformer bay, 4 No O/G feeder bays, 1 No. 33kV bay for 5MVA, 33/11kV T/F for local load
and 1 No Capacitor bank bay (Total 12 No. 33kV bays including 4 spare bays) as per detailed
in drawing No. HGD-1/3247. .
Design, Engineering, manufacture, testing, supply on CIP basis, transportation to site,
insurance, storage, testing and commissioning of following items:-
a) 2x100 MVA, 220/132kV & 1x100 MVA, 220/33 kV Transformers along with mandatory spares.
b) 220 kV & 132kV SF-6 Circuit Breakers and 33kV VCBs, Isolators, All type of Current
Transformers, Neutral CTs, Surge Arrestors, Bus Post Insulators, L&E switches, CVTs, bus PTs
along with their terminal connectors & mandatory spares.
c) Complete Sub-Station automation including Hardware & Software.
d) Complete 220 kV, 132 kV& 33 kV C&R Panels with S/Stn. having SAS.
e) Air Conditioning system.
f) Associated mechanical & electrical auxiliaries.
g) 1.1kV grade power & Armoured/Un-armoured control copper cables along with complete
accessories for switchgear and protection equipments
h) Substation structures for sub-station towers & beams and equipment structures.
i) Insulator strings, hardware clamps and connectors, junction box, copper lug, AC Kiosks, glands &
PVC ferrules for control cabling, wooden cleats, aluminum clamps, bolts, nuts, washers etc. for
fixing control cables in trenches, galvanized iron trays & clamps, AAC Tarantula conductor, GS
earth wire, spares. Cables supporting angles/channels, buried cable trenches & outdoor channels
with trenches alongwith trench covers
j) C-wedge connector & equipment interconnections shall be suitable for Single/Twin Tarantula
Conductor.
k) Complete switchyard lighting.
l) Complete Earth mat lying. The earth mat will be designed / quoted for soil resistivity of 50m. In
case soil resistivity is more than 50m then the earth mat will be designed for actual soil
resistivity. The payment of extra material to be used for earth mat shall be made on pro rata
basis.
m) Complete fire - fighting equipment.
n) 220V, 200AH, DC battery with battery charger & DCDB along with associated accessories.
o) 415V LT A.C. MCCB Board 500A along with associated accessories.
p) 2X200 KVA 33/0.4 kV station Transformers for auxiliary supplies with complete self protected
(CSP) features.
q) 1X 100 KVA DG Set along with associated accessories & mandatory spares.
r) Providing 1 No. 2x10.872 MVAR 33 kV rating Capacitor Bank with 33 kV Capacitor Breaker, L&E
Switch, Isolator, CT, PT, LA, NCT & C&R Panel etc. as per specification.
s) Complete PLCC equipments.
t) Any other equipment/material required to complete the specified scope.
3
CIVIL WORKS
220 kV Substation Mehna Khera
The work shall be included but not limited to the following: -
a) Foundation for S/Stn main gantry/steel structures and equipments as per drawings attached. For
breaker, the Design/Drawing of foundation shall be submitted by successful bidder for approval
before execution.
b) Foundation for 2 No. 100 MVA, 220/132 kV & 1 No. 100MVA MVA, 220/33 KV Transformers
complete. The plinth of 100MVA T/F foundations shall be designed for weight and other
parameters suitable for 160MVA T/F. The successful bidder shall submit foundation design for
160MVA T/F & drawings for 100MVA Transformers as per technical specifications for approval
before execution.
c) Foundation for 1No. 2x10.872MVAR 33kV Capacitor Bank complete Design/Drawing shall be
submitted by the successful bidder for approval before execution.
d) Foundation for 2 No. 200 KVA 33/0.4 kV station Transformers and 1 No. 100 KVA DG Set. The
successful bidder shall submit foundation designs & drawings for approval before execution.
e) Foundation for lighting poles, junction box, panels, control cubicles & AC Kiosks of equipments
(wherever required) without any extra cost to HVPNL.
f) Out door cable trenches along with covers, cable racks, drainage system including drainage
pipes, manholes, rain water harvesting system, sum pit cum pump chamber and installation of
pump, etc. including cable trench crossings the road. The layout drawing shall be evolved by the
successful bidder and got approved from employer before execution.
g) Laying of concrete roads leading to switch yard and switch house building from main PWD (B&R)
road including earth filling for road and berms if required and PCC in front & rear and of the
switch house building for parking as per drawings attached and GELO/CLO.
h) Provision of pipe culvert as per technical specifications on road leading to switch yard near main
PWD (B&R) road & yard wherever required.
i) Fencing & Boundary wall for the Substation along with gates as per drawings attached.
j) Site surfacing including leveling and dressing, lean concrete/PCC in areas under scope of
contract wherever required in the switchyard area.
k) Construction of Switch House building including indoor cable trenches, all services, laying of
drainage pipes & RW Pipes, collecting tank & soakage pit, rain harvesting system and all other
services as per drawings/specifications to complete the building in all respect and making it
functional.
l) Construction of rain harvesting systems (rechargeable bores/wells) one each for control room
building and switch yard as per HVPNL drawings. The disposal scheme/drainage system for
draining rain water including material for collection of water from switch house building and
Substation area including manholes, covers wherever essential (complete) shall be evolved by
the successful bidder and got approved from HVPNL before execution.
2. Scope of work for 220 kV Substation Neemwala is as under (with SAS):-
Providing 2x100MVA, 220/132 kV Auto Transformer and 1x20/25MVA, 132/33 kV Power
Transformer, its bays along with allied switchgear and protective equipments, 2Nos. 220 kV line
bays along with allied switchgear and protective equipments to accommodate 220 kV Kaithal-
PGCIL-Neemwala D/C Line. 1 No. bus coupler bay along with allied switchgear and protective
equipments. (Total 11 No. bays including 6 No. spare bays), 2 No 132 I/C bays along with
allied switchgear and protective equipments, 3 No. 132kV line bay to accommodate 132kV
Neemwala- Nautch line, 132kV Neemwala-Sewan and 132kV Neemwala-Bhagal line at 220kV
S/Stn. Neemwala and 1 no. bus coupler bay along with allied switchgear and protective
equipments (Total 14No. 132kV Bays including 7 No. spare bays) and 33 kV Bays including
allied switchgear and protective equipments for accommodating 2 No 33/0.4 kV Transformers (in
one bay) for auxiliary supply, 1 No I/C Transformer bay, 2 No O/G feeder bays and 1 No
Capacitor bank bay (Total 12 No. 33kV bays including 7 No. spare bays) as per detailed in
drawing No. HGD-1/3248.
Design, Engineering, manufacture, testing, supply on CIP basis, transportation to site,
insurance, storage, testing and commissioning of following items:-
2x100
a) 2x100 MVA, 220/132kV Auto Transformer & 1x20/25 MVA, 132/33 kV Power Transformer along
with mandatory spares.
b) 220 kV & 132kV SF-6 Circuit Breakers and 33kV VCBs, Isolators, All type of Current
Transformers, Neutral CTs, Surge Arrestors, Bus Post Insulators, L&E switches, CVTs, bus PTs
along with their terminal connectors & mandatory spares.
4
c) Complete Sub-Station automation including Hardware & Software.
d) Complete 220 kV, 132 kV& 33 kV C&R Panels with S/Stn. having SAS.
e) Air Conditioning system.
f) Associated mechanical & electrical auxiliaries.
g) 1.1kV grade power & Armoured/Un-armoured control copper cables along with complete
h) Substation structures for sub-station towers & beams and equipment structures.
i) Insulator strings, hardware clamps and connectors, junction box, copper lug, AC Kiosks, glands &
PVC ferrules for control cabling, wooden cleats, aluminum clamps, bolts, nuts, washers etc. for
fixing control cables in trenches, galvanized iron trays & clamps, AAC Tarantula conductor, GS
earth wire, spares. Cables supporting angles/channels, buried cable trenches & outdoor channels
with trenches along with trench cover.
j) C-wedge connector & equipment interconnections shall be suitable for Single/Twin Tarantula
Conductor.
k) Complete switchyard lighting.
l) Complete Earth mat lying. The earth mat will be designed / quoted for soil resistivity of 50m. In
case soil resistivity is more than 50m then the earth mat will be designed for actual soil
resistivity. The payment of extra material to be used for earth mat shall be made on pro rata
basis.
m) Complete fire - fighting equipment.
n) 220V, 200AH, DC battery with battery charger & DCDB along with associated accessories.
o) 415V LT A.C. MCCB Board 500A along with associated accessories.
p) 2X200 KVA 33/0.4 kV station Transformers for auxiliary supplies with complete self protected
(CSP) features.
q) 1X 100 KVA DG Set along with associated accessories & mandatory spares.
r) Providing 1 No. 1X10.872 MVAR 33 kV rating Capacitor Bank with 33 kV Capacitor Breaker, L&E
Switch, Isolator, CT, PT, LA, NCT & C&R Panel etc. as per specification.
s) Complete PLCC equipments.
t) Any other equipment/material required to complete the specified scope.
CIVIL WORKS
220 kV Substation Neemwala
before execution.
b) Foundation for 2 No. 100 MVA, 220/132 kV & 1 No. 20/25 MVA, 132/33 KV Transformers
complete. The plinth of 100MVA T/F foundations shall be designed for weight and other
parameters suitable for 160MVA T/F. The successful bidder shall submit foundation design for
160MVA T/F, 20/25MVA. T/F and drawings for 100MVA Transformers and 20/25MVA
Transformers as per technical specifications for approval before execution.
c) Foundation for 1No. 1x10.872MVAR 33kV Capacitor Bank complete Design/Drawing shall be
submitted by the successful bidder for approval before execution.
d) Foundation for 2 No. 200 KVA 33/0.4 kV station Transformers and 1 No. 100 KVA DG Set. The
successful bidder shall submit foundation designs & drawings for approval before execution.
e) Foundation for lighting poles, junction box, panels, control cubicles & AC Kiosks of equipments
(wherever required) without any extra cost to HVPNL.
f) Out door cable trenches along with covers, cable racks, drainage system including drainage
pipes, manholes, rain water harvesting system, sum pit cum pump chamber and installation of
pump, etc. including cable trench crossings the road. The layout drawing shall be evolved by the
successful bidder and got approved from employer before execution.
g) Laying of concrete roads leading to switch yard and switch house building from main PWD (B&R)
road including earth filling for road and berms if required and PCC in front & rear and of the
switch house building for parking as per drawings attached and GELO/CLO.
h) Provision of pipe culvert as per technical specifications on road leading to switch yard near main
PWD (B&R) road & yard wherever required.
i) Fencing & Boundary wall for the Substation along with gates as per drawings attached.
j) Site surfacing including leveling and dressing, lean concrete/PCC in areas under scope of
contract wherever required in the switchyard area.
k) Construction of Switch House building including indoor cable trenches, all services, laying of
drainage pipes & RW Pipes, collecting tank & soakage pit, rain harvesting system and all other
5
services as per drawings/specifications to complete the building in all respect and making it
functional.
l) Cutting/Filling of earth to required depth including compaction etc. in Substation including
switchyard and roads wherever required to achieve required formation level as decided by
employer.
m) Construction of rain harvesting systems (rechargeable bores/wells) one each for control room
building and switch yard as per HVPNL drawings. The disposal scheme/drainage system for
draining rain water including material for collection of water from switch house building and
Substation area including manholes, covers wherever essential (complete) shall be evolved by
the successful bidder and got approved from HVPNL before execution.
3. Scope of work for 220 kV Substation Fatehabad is as under (without SAS):-
The detail scope of the work includes providing 1 No. 220kV line bays at 220kv existing S/Stn.
Fatehabad for accommodating 2nd ckt. of 220kV Fatehabad-Rania D/C line alongwith with allied
switchgear and protective equipments, as per detailed in drawing No. HGD-1/2091 (R-11).
The scope covers Design, Engineering, manufacture, testing, supply on CIP basis, transportation
to site, insurance, storage, testing and commissioning of following items:-
a) 220 kV SF-6 Circuit Breakers, Isolators, Current Transformers, Lightening Arrestors, Bus Post
Insulators, L&E switches, shifting of CVTs and wave traps along with their terminal connectors &
mandatory spares.
b) Integration of existing bus bar protection scheme.
c) 220 kV C&R Panels.
d) Associated mechanical & electrical auxiliaries.
e) 1.1kV grade power & Armoured/Un-armoured control copper cables along with complete
f) Substation structures for sub-station towers & beams and equipment structures.
g) Insulator strings, hardware clamps and connectors, marshalling kiosks, copper lug, glands & PVC
ferrules for control cabling, wooden cleats, aluminum clamps, bolts, nuts, washers etc. for fixing
control cables in trenches, galvanized iron trays & clamps, AAC Tarantula conductor, GS earth
wire, spares. Cables supporting angles/channels, buried cable trenches & outdoor channels with
trenches alongwith trench covers for the scope specified above.
h) C-wedge connector & equipment interconnections shall be suitable for Single/Twin
Tarantula/Zebra Conductor as per site requirement for the scope specified above.
i) Switchyard lighting and fire fighting for the bay mentioned above as per BOQ.
j) Earthing Material for connecting the allied equipment with existing main earthmat & risers as per
technical specification.
k) Shifting of one no. CVTs and Wave Traps from one ckt. to another ckt. (for 220kV Fatehabad and
220kV Rania both ends) and commissioning of PLCC equipments for both ends for 220kV D/C
Fatehabad-Rania line .
l) Any other equipment/material required to complete the specified scope.
CIVIL WORKS
220 kV Substation Fatehabad
before execution. The dismantlement of existing foundation if any will be in the scope of bidder.
b) Foundation for lighting poles, MKs, panels & control cubicles of equipments (wherever required)
without any extra cost to HVPNL.
c) Out door cable trenches along with covers, cable racks and interconnection with existing drainage
rain water harvesting system.
4. Scope of work for 220 kV Substation Rania is as under (without SAS):-
The detail scope of the work includes providing 1 No. 220kV line bays at 220kv existing S/Stn.
Rania for accommodating 2nd ckt. of 220kV Fatehabad-Rania D/C line alongwith with allied
switchgear and protective equipments, as per detailed in drawing No. HGD-1/2098 (R-11).
mandatory spares.
b) Integration of existing bus bar protection scheme.
6
g) Insulator strings, hardware clamps and connectors, MKs, copper lug, glands & PVC ferrules for
control cabling, wooden cleats, aluminum clamps, bolts, nuts, washers etc. for fixing control
cables in trenches, galvanized iron trays & clamps, AAC Tarantula conductor, GS earth wire,
spares. Cables supporting angles/channels, buried cable trenches & outdoor channels with
j) Earthing Material for connecting the allied equipment with main earth & risers as per technical
specification.
k) Any other equipment/material required to complete the specified scope.
CIVIL WORKS
220 kV Substation Rania
before execution.
5. Scope of work for 220 kV Substation Bhiwani is as under (without SAS):-
The detail scope of the work includes providing 2 No. 220kV line bays at 220kV existing S/Stn.
Bapora (Bhiwani) for accommodating 220kV D/C line from 765kV S/Stn. PGCIL Bhiwani to 220kV
S/Stn. Bapora (Bhiwani) alongwith with allied switchgear and protective equipments, as per
detailed in drawing No. HGD-1/1742 (R-23).
mandatory spares.
b) Integration of bus bar protection scheme.
g) Insulator strings, hardware clamps and connectors, marshalling kiosks, copper lug, glands & PVC
ferrules for control cabling, wooden cleats, aluminum clamps, bolts, nuts, washers etc. for fixing
control cables in trenches, galvanized iron trays & clamps, AAC Tarantula conductor, GS earth
wire, spares. Cables supporting angles/channels, buried cable trenches & outdoor channels with
j) Earthing Material for connecting the allied equipment with existing main earthmat & risers as per
k) Complete PLCC equipments for 220 kV line.
Any other equipment/material required to complete the specified scope.
CIVIL WORKS
220 kV Substation Bhiwani
before execution. The dismantlement of existing foundation if any will be in the scope of bidder.
7
1.2.1 SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES
The detailed description of various items/equipment and civil works are indicated at Annexure - AI
to EI. The bill of quantity of major equipment is also indicated and wherever the quantities are
not indicated the bidder is required to compute the quantity. Bidder is required to indicate unit
rate and total price of the items under a particular head in bid proposal sheets. Bidder should
include all such items in the bid proposal sheets, which may not be specifically mentioned but are
essential for the execution of the contract.
1.3 GENERAL ELECTRICAL LAYOUT
The GELOs for 220kV Substations Mehna Khera, Neem Wala, Fatehabad, Rania and Bhiwani
are enclosed as indicated at Annexure-IV.
1.4 LOCATIONS OF THE SUBSTATION
The location of the substation along with the nearest Railhead is indicated at Annexure-II.
1.5 METEOROLOGICAL DATA.
The meteorological data of the substation is indicated at Annexure-III. However, for design
purpose, ambient temperature should be considered as 50 C.
1.6 SOIL DATA
The earth resistivity for 220kV Substations shall be ascertained by the bidder himself.
1.7 DRAWING
The bidder shall maintain inter equipment distances, bay length, bay width etc. in accordance
with the enclosed general/electrical layouts of the respective substations while doing so the
bidder will ensure that the statutory electrical clearances required for substation are maintained.
(Annexure-IV)
The drawing enclosed gives the basic scheme, layout of substation, substation buildings,
associated service etc. In case of any discrepancy between the drawing and text of specification
the bidder is advised to get these clarified before submission of bid. No claim what-so-ever on
this score shall be entertained after award of contract.
The bidder shall adopt HVPNL design of galvanised steel structure for tower, beam and
equipment supporting structures for 220kV Substations. However, HVPNL design of beam CB-6
and CB-7 shall be used for manufacturing 33 kV beams DD-1 and DD-2 respectively but with a
change in length of beam as per requirement in 33kV system.
1.8 SPARES
1.8.1 MANDATORY SPARES
The spare parts and maintenance accessories shall be included in the bid proposal by the bidder.
The prices of these spares shall be given by the bidder in the relevant schedule of BOPS and
shall be considered for evaluation of bid. It shall not be binding on the Purchaser to procure all
these mandatory spares.
The bidder is clarified that no mandatory spares shall be used during the commissioning of the
equipment. Any spares required for commissioning purpose shall be a part of the equipment only.
Further all the mandatory spares will be consigned to AEE dedicated store, Hisar/Khera/Panipat.
1.8.2 OPTIONAL SPARES
The Bidder shall identify and recommend the list of optional spare parts required together with
their quantity to meet the specified performance for a period of three years. The item schedule
and prices of these shall be given by the Bidder in relevant schedule of BOPS and shall not be
considered for evaluation of the bid. The Bidder must also indicate the basis for recommendation
of optional spares. The Bidder shall also recommend their source of availability and technical
particulars. The Bidder may also suggest addition or deletion of spare items over this list. It will be
the option of employer to buy the spares quoted by the bidder in his bid at the time of finalisation
of contract.
1.8.3 The Contractor shall advise the Purchaser of the required lead time for ordering of spares and the
minimum re-order quantities
1.9 In addition to meeting the qualification requirement stipulated in Volume-IA the bidder of its own
or his manufacturer sub vendor/fabricator shall also meet the qualifying requirement set forth for
all the equipments in the relevant sections of the technical specification, failing which the bid is
liable to be rejected
8
1.10 SPECIAL TOOLS AND TACKLES
The bidder may include in his proposal the deployment of all such special tools and tackles
required for erection testing, commissioning and maintenance of equipment. The Contractor
would be free to take these back at the end of work or sell to employer at a negotiated price. At
the completion of job, the contractor will hand over a separate set of tools and tackles required for
routine maintenance of S/Stn equipment erected by him as a part of contract. The details of tools
and tackles (which will be reviewed by employer at the time of award of contract) will be furnished
in attachment 4A Volume-IB.
1.11 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
The contractor shall organise and conduct complete and thorough training programmers (to be
conducted in English language) for two engineers & two technicians for a period of two weeks
providing necessary training material, at no extra cost to the Owner. However, the traveling and
living expenses of Owner's engineers/technicians, if any shall be borne by Owner (HVPNL). The
training shall be carried out at the place of manufacturer of circuit breakers & C&R panels or as
the case may require and as agreed by Owner so as to ensure complete adequacy of the
programme and imparting of detailed knowledge of system/equipment design, engineering,
operation and maintenance aspects.
The PLCC equipments will be in the scope of the bidder for 220kV Substations (Both ends)
including supply, Erection and commissioning.
Notes:
1. The bidder or his authorised representative should visit the site of works and its surroundings to
obtain himself at his responsibility and expenses, all information regarding general site
characteristics, accessibility, infrastructure details and factual position in respect of scope of work
vis--vis GELO drawing attached with the bid document. Any alteration/addition envisage in the
document must be got clarified before submission of the bid.
2. No extra payment shall be made on account of any change in the layout drawings required for
providing DSLP as per Rezvik method.
3. Any other items not specifically mentioned in the specification but which are required for erection,
testing, commissioning and satisfactory operation of Substation are to be included in the scope of
the specification unless specifically excluded
4. The location of 220 kV CVT shown in GELO drawing is tentative and for BOQ purpose, however
location of CVT should be coordinated with the other end before casting foundations.
9
ANNEXURE-I
220 kV SUB-STATIONS
Sr. Name of Scope of Work Scheme Remarks
No Sub-
station
1. 220 kV Providing 2x100MVA, 220/132 kV Transformer and Double bus
Sub- 1x100MVA, 220/33 kV Transformer, its bays along with allied bar (220 kV,
station switchgear and protective equipments, 4Nos. 220 kV line bays 132 kV with
Mehna along with allied switchgear and protective equipments to Bus coupler
Khera accommodate LILO of both circuits of 220 kV Fatehabad- and 33 kV
Rania line at proposed 220kV S/Stn. Mehna Khera and 1 no. without Bus
bus coupler bay along with allied switchgear and protective coupler)
equipments and provision of space for additional 2No. 220kV
line bays in future (Total 12 No. bays including 4 No. spare
bays), 2 No 132kV I/C bays along with allied switchgear and
protective equipments, creation of 3 No. 132kV line bay at
220kV Mehna Khera to accommodate 132kV Mehna Khera-
Ellanabad S/C line on D/C tower and creation of 132kV
Mehna Khera-Madhosinghna- Ram Nagaria D/C line with 1
no. bus coupler bay along with allied switchgear and
protective equipments (Total 9 No. 132kV Bays including 3
No. spare bays) and 33 kV Bays including allied switchgear
and protective equipments for accommodating 2 No 33/0.4 kV
Transformers (in one bay) for auxiliary supply, 1No I/C
Transformer bay, 4 No O/G feeder bays, 1 No. 33kV bay for
5MVA, 33/11kV T/F for local load and 1 No Capacitor bank
bay (Total 12 No. 33kV bays including 4 spare bays)as per
detailed in drawing No. HGD-1/3247.
2 220kV Providing 2x100MVA, 220/132 kV Auto Transformer and Double bus
S/Stn. 1x20/25MVA, 132/33 kV Power Transformer, its bays along bar (220 kV,
Neem- with allied switchgear and protective equipments, 2Nos. 220 132 kV with
Wala kV line bays along with allied switchgear and protective Bus coupler
equipments to accommodate 220 kV Kaithal-PGCIL- and 33 kV
Neemwala D/C Line. 1 No. bus coupler bay along with allied without Bus
switchgear and protective equipments. (Total 11 No. bays coupler)
including 6 No. spare bays), 2 No 132 I/C bays along with
allied switchgear and protective equipments, 3 No. 132kV line
bay to accommodate 132kV Neemwala- Nautch line, 132kV
Neemwala-Sewan and 132kV Neemwala-Bhagal line at
220kV S/Stn. Neemwala and 1 no. bus coupler bay along with
allied switchgear and protective equipments (Total 14No.
132kV Bays including 7 No. spare bays) and 33 kV Bays
including allied switchgear and protective equipments for
accommodating 2 No 33/0.4 kV Transformers (in one bay) for
auxiliary supply, 1 No I/C Transformer bay, 2 No O/G feeder
bays and 1 No Capacitor bank bay (Total 12 No. 33kV bays
including 7 No. spare bays) as per detailed in drawing No.
HGD-1/3248.
3 220kV Providing 1 No. 220kV line bays at 220kv existing S/Stn.
S/Stn. Fatehabad for accommodating 2nd ckt. of 220kV Fatehabad-
Fateha- Rania D/C line alongwith with allied switchgear and protective
bad equipments, as per detailed in drawing No. HGD-1/2091 (R-
(Line 11).
Bay)
4 220kV Providing 1 No. 220kV line bays at 220kv existing S/Stn.
S/Stn. Rania for accommodating 2nd ckt. of 220kV Fatehabad- Rania
Rania D/C line alongwith with allied switchgear and protective
(Line Bay) equipments, as per detailed in drawing No. HGD-1/2098 (R-
11).
10
Sr. Name of Scope of Work Scheme Remarks
No Sub-
station
5 220kV Providing 2 No. 220kV line bays at 220kV existing S/Stn.
S/Stn. Bapora (Bhiwani) for accommodating 220kV D/C line from
Bhiwani 765kV S/Stn. PGCIL Bhiwani to 220kV S/Stn. Bapora
(Bhiwani) alongwith with allied switchgear and protective
equipments, as per detailed in drawing No. HGD-1/1742 (R-
23).
For detailed BOQ refer Annexure A I, B I, C I, D I, E I & F I (for 220kV S/Stn. Mehna Khera,
Fatehabad, Rania and Bhiwan) and A II, B II, C II, D II, E II & F II (for 220kV S/Stn. Neemwala).
11
ANNEXURE-II
LOCATION OF SUB-STATIONS
Sr. No. Name of Substation Nearest Rail Head

1. 220 kV Substation Mehna Khera Fatehabad/Sirsa
2. 220 kV Substation Neemwala Kaithal/Kurukshetra
3. 220 kV Substation Fatehabad Fatehabad
4. 220 kV Substation Rania Fatehabad/Sirsa
5. 220kV Substation Bhiwani Bhiwani
ANNEXURE-III
METEOROLOGICAL DATA
1.1 Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory
continuous operation under the following tropical conditions:
i) Location In the state of Haryana

ii) Max. Ambient air temp. (deg. C) 50
iii) Min ambient air temp. (deg. C) -2.5
iv) Daily average air temp. (deg. C) 35
v) Average no. of Thunder storm days per Annum 45
vi) Maximum Relative Humidity (%) 100
vii) Minimum Relative Humidity (%) 26
viii) Average annual rain fall (mm) 900
ix) Max. wind pressure (kg/sq m) 195
x) Max. altitude above mean sea level (meters) 1000
xi) Isoceraunic level (days/year) 45
xii) Seismic level (horizontal acceleration) 0.3 g
xiii) Average no. of rainy days per Annum 120
NOTE: Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conductive to rust and fungus growth.
The climate conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient condition.
Smoke is also present in the atmosphere. Heavy lightening also occurs during
June to October.
ANNEXURE-IV
Sr. No. NAME OF SUB STATION GELO DRAWING NO.

1. 220 kV Substation Mehna Khera HGD-1/3247
2. 220 kV Substation Neemwala HGD-1/3248
3. 220 kV Substation Fatehabad HGD-1/2091 (R-11)
4. 220 kV Substation Rania HGD-1/2098 (R-11)
5. 220kV Substation Bhiwani HGD-1/1742 (R-23)
12
BILL OF QUANTITIES ANNEXURE-AI
Sr. DESCRIPTION UNIT 220kV 220kV 220kV 220kV Total
No. S/Stn. S/Stn. S/Stn. S/Stn.
Mehna Fateha- Rania Bhiwani
Khera bad
1. a 100 MVA 220/132 kV Power No. 2 - - 2
Transformer along with 10%
extra T/F oil
b NIFPES for 100 MVA T/F No. 2 - - 2
2. a 100 MVA, 220/33 kV Power No. 1 - - 1
Transformer along with 10% extra
T/F oil
b NIFPES for 100 MVA T/F No 1 - - 1
3. 220 kV SF-6 Breaker along with 20% No. 8 1 1 2 12
extra SF-6 Gas
4. 220 kV Isolator with E/Switch No. 4 1 1 2 8
5. 220kV Isolator without E/Switch No. 16 2 2 4 24
6. 220 kV Surge Arrestor No. 21 3 3 6 33
7. 220 kV Post Insulator No. 16 2 2 4 24
8. 220 kV CTs for line & bus coupler No. 15 3 3 6 27
(1200-800-400/1-1-1-1-1A)
9. 220 kV CT for Transformer (450- No. 9 - - - 9
300/0.577-1-1-1-1A)
10. 220 kV CVT No. 4 - - 6 10
11. 220kV C&R Panels
a) Ckt breaker control Panel with auto Set 4 1 1 2 8
reclose & line Protection Panel
b) Ckt breaker control Panel without auto Set 3 - - - 3
reclose and Transformer protection
panel (for both HV & LV side)
c) Ckt breaker control Panel without auto Set 1 - - - 1
reclose and Bus Coupler cum Bus Bar
Protection panel(Double Bus bar)
12. 220 kV NCT (450-300/1A) No. 3 - - - 3
13. 220 kV PT No. 6 - - - 6
14. Marshalling Kiosk (300 Nos. TB) No. - 1 1 2 4
including Mounting Structures
15. 132 kV SF-6 Breaker with 20% extra No. 6 - - - 6
SF-6 Gas
16. 132 kV Isolator with E/SWITCH No. 3 - - - 3
17. 132 kV Isolator without E/SWITCH No. 12 - - - 12
18. 132 kV Surge Arrestor No. 15 - - - 15
19. 132 kV Post Insulator No. 12 - - - 12
20. 132 kV CT For Line & Bus Coupler No. 12 - - - 12
(600-300-150/1-1-1A)
21. 132 kV CT For Transformer I/C (750- No. 6 - - - 6
500/0.577-1-1-1A)
22. 132 kV CVT For Line No. 9 - - - 9
a) Ckt breaker control panel without auto No. 3 - - - 3
reclose & line protection Panel
13
Khera bad
b) Ckt breaker control panel without auto No. 2 - - - 2
reclose for Transformer I/C
c) Ckt breaker control panel without auto No. 1 - - - 1
reclose & Bus coupler protection panel
24. Time synchronization equipment No. 1 - - - 1
25. 33 kV VCB 2000A No. 1 - - - 1
26. 33 kV VCB 630A No. 5 - - - 5
27. 33 kV Capacitor VCB No. 1 - - - 1
28. 33 kV LAs No. 27 - - - 27
29. 33 kV Ckt breaker control panel No. 1 - - - 1
without auto reclose for Transformer
I/C with one no. of SEM
30. 33 kV Ckt. Breaker control panel No. 4 - - - 4
without auto reclose and line
Protection Panel
31. 33kV Ckt. Breaker control panel for No. 1 - - - 1
33/11kV T/F
32. 33 kV Ckt. Breaker control Panel No. 1 - - - 1
without auto reclose and capacitor
protection Panel
33. 33 kV Isolator 630A No. 16 - - - 16
34. 33 kV Isolator (with incomer) 2000A No. 2 - - - 2
35. 33 kV L&E Switch No. 4 - - - 4
36. 33 kV PT No. 6 - - - 6
37. 33 kV Line cum capacitor CT 400- No. 15 - - - 15
300/5-1A
38. 33kV T/F CT for 5MVA T/F 100-50/5- No. 3 - - - 3
5A
39. 33 kV I/C Transformer CT 2000- No. 3 - - - 3
1000/0.577-5-5-1A
40. 33 kV NCT (2000-1000/5A) No. 1 - - - 1
41. 33kV NCT (100-50/5A) No. 1 - - 1
42. 2x10.872 MVAR 33 kV Capacitor Bank Set 1 - - - 1
along with Str. & allied equipment
(L&E, NCT, Series Reactor etc.,) as
per Annexure-1 Section-6, Chapter-9 .
43. 220V 200 AH Battery No. 1 - - - 1
44. 220 V Battery charger (20A F/30A No. 1 - - - 1
Boost AH)
45. 220 V D.C.D.B. suitable for 200AH No. 1 - - - 1
Battery
46. 415 V LT AC MCCB Board 500 A No. 1 - - - 1
47. 33/0.4 kV Station Transformer 200 No. 2 - - - 2
KVA with CSP.
48. 100 KVA DG Set along with associated No. 1 - - - 1
accessories
14
Khera bad
49. 1.1 kV Copper Control Cable Armoured Lot Lot Lot Lot Lot Lot
for 220 kV bays of size 2CX6mm2,
7CX4mm2, 4CX4mm2, 2CX4mm2,
2 2
16CX2.5mm , 10CX2.5mm ,
7CX2.5mm2, 3CX2.5mm2 including
Junction box (as per section-6 of copper
control cables specifications and
Section-7, switchyard erection).
50. 1.1 kV Copper Control Cable Lot Lot - - - Lot
unarmoured for 132 kV bays of size
2CX4mm , 16CX2.5mm , 10CX2.5mm2,
2 2

51. 1.1 kV Copper Control Cable Lot Lot - - - Lot
unarmoured for 33 kV bays of size
2CX4mm , 16CX2.5mm , 10CX2.5mm2,
2 2

52. 650/1100 Volts 3.5 core 240 mm2 Lot Lot - - - Lot
aluminium power cable from Aux.
Transformer to ACDB
53. 650/1100 Volt 3.5 core 70 mm2 Lot Lot - - - Lot
aluminium cable for oil filtration set.
54. 650/1100 Volt 4 core 16 mm2 armoured Lot Lot Lot Lot Lot Lot
copper power cable for MLDB and other
cable required as per contract for 220kV
bays.
55. 650/1100 Volt 4 core 16 mm2 Lot Lot - - - Lot
unarmoured copper power cable for
MLDB and other cable required as per
contract for 132kV bays.
56. 650/1100 Volt 4 core 16 mm2 Lot Lot - - - Lot
unarmoured copper power cable for
MLDB and other cable required as per
contract for 33kV bays.
57. Earthing Mat Material. The earth mat will Lot 54227 - - - Lot
be designed / quoted for soil resistivity of sq meter
50m. In case soil resistivity is more than (approx)
50m then the earth mat will be designed
for actual soil resistivity. The payment of
extra material to be used for earth mat
shall be made on pro rata basis. The
approximate area of earth mat to be laid is
given in the corresponding columns of the
substations. However, item will remain a
Lot item.
15
Khera bad
58. Earthing Material for connecting the Lot - Lot Lot Lot Lot
equipment with existing main earthmat
with risers & allied equipment as per
59. Fire Fighting equipments as per
section-6
(a) 22.5 Kg Capacity FE CO2 type, Trolley No 6 - - - 6
Mounted
(b) 25 Kg Capacity FE DCP type, Trolley No 6 - - - 6
Mounted
(c) DCP 10 Kg Capacity, Wall mounted No 11 1 1 2 15
(d) FE CO2 6.5 Kg Capacity, Wall No 10 - - - 10
mounted
(e) DCP 5 Kg Capacity, Wall mounted No 2 - - - 2
(f) Foam Type 9 Litre Capacity, Wall No 1 - - - 1
mounted
(g) Water CO2 9 Litre, Wall mounted No 1 - - - 1
(h) Fire Buckets (12 Nos. with stand in Set 3 - - - 3
one set)
60. Supply and installation of 2x400 watt No 60 2 2 3 67
HPSV lamps with all accessories for
Complete lighting of outdoor Switch
yard area as per clause 16.0 of section
7 of the specifications.
61. Complete lighting of road and street by No 40 - - - 40
providing 1x150W HPSV lamps on
tubular steel poles at a distance of
15meter along the roads and streets
as per as per clause 16.0 of section 7
of the specification.
62. Supply and installation of fluorescent No 20 - - - 20
tube fitting (2 x 4 feet) on tubular steel
poles along with the fencing at a
distance of 30 meter as per as per
clause 16.0 of section 7 of the
specification.
63. High wall type split AC unit of 2 Ton Nos. 2 - - - 2
capacity (as per technical
specification)
64. Testing of IUM System at site by NABL Lot Lot - - - Lot
accredited lab
65. Digital Earth resistance meter. No. 1 - - - 1
66. 5 kV Automated insulation resistance No. 1 - - - 1
tester.
67. Complete Substation automation system for 220/132/33 kV substations including hardware
(for present bays) and software (for present and future bays) along with associated
equipments and Kiosks including foundation of kiosks for the following bays (bays as
defined in technical specification sec-Substation Automation System) as per technical
specifications:-.
16
Khera bad
(i) 220kV (presently A bays & B for Nos. A=8 - - - -
future) B=4
(ii) 132 kV (presently A bays & B for Nos. A=6 - - - -
future) B=3
(iii) 33 kV (presently A bays & B for Nos. A=8 - - - -
future) B=4
Note: 11kV I/C, O/G Panel, 11kV Power Cable and 5MVA T/F (for local load) will be arranged by
Discoms as per prevailing practice. However, 33kV NCT mentioned which is to be provided by
HVPN is in scope of bidder and placed at Sr. No. 41 (at 220kV S/Stn. Mehna Khera) is
incorporated in BOQ.
17
ANNEXURE B-I
Sr. DESCRIPTION UNIT 220kV S/Stn. 220kV 220kV 220kV TOTAL
No. Mehna Khera S/Stn. S/Stn. S/Stn.
Fatehabad Rania Bhiwani
1. Bolted type 220 kV single No. 54 - - - 54
tension string assembly with
Silicone Rubber Polymer
Composite Insulators (E&M
strength 9000 kg) with all
hardware accessories including
ball & socket connection and
tension clamp set suitable for
twin Tarantula (string).
suspension string assembly with
ball & socket connection suitable
for twin Tarantula (string).
3. Bolted type 220 kV Single No. 42 6 6 12 66
ball & socket connections and
tension clamp sets suitable for
single Tarantula (string).
4. Bolted type 220 Single No. 42 6 6 12 66
suspension clamp sets suitable
for single Tarantula conductor.
ball & socket connection and
tension clamp set suitable for
twin Tarantula (string).
18
Sr. DESCRIPTION UNIT 220kV S/Stn. 220kV 220kV 220kV TOTAL
No. Mehna Khera S/Stn. S/Stn. S/Stn.
Fatehabad Rania Bhiwani
strength 9000 kg) per string with
all hardware accessories
including ball & socket
connection suitable for twin
Tarantula (string).
7. Bolted type 132 kV Single No. 42 - - - 42
tension clamp sets suitable for
single Tarantula (string).
8. Bolted type 132 Single No. 30 - - 30
9. Bolted type 33 kV single tension No. 48 - - 48
string assembly with Silicone
Rubber Polymer Composite
Insulators (E&M strength 9000
kg) with all hardware
accessories including ball &
socket connection and tension
clamp set suitable for twin
Tarantula (string).
10. Bolted type 33 kV single No. 24 - - 24
ball & socket connection suitable
for twin Tarantula (string).
11. Bolted type 33 kV Single tension No. 36 - 36
string assembly with Silicone
Rubber Polymer Composite
Insulators (E&M strength 9000
kg) with all hardware
accessories including ball &
socket connections and tension
clamp sets suitable for single
Tarantula (string).
19
Sr. DESCRIPTION UNIT 220kV 220kV 220kV 220kV TOTAL
No. S/Stn. Mehna- S/Stn. S/Stn. S/Stn.
Khera Fatehabad Rania Bhiwani
12. Bolted type 33 kV Single No. 36 - - 36
13. C-Wedge connectors matching No. 1100 - - 1100
with conductor size.
14. Copper lugs glands, PVC L/S L/S - L/S
ferrules for control cabling.
15. Wooden cleats, Aluminium L/S L/S - - L/S
clamps, bolts, nuts, washers etc
for fixing control cables in
trenches
16. Galvanised iron perforated tray L/S L/S - - L/S
with side coupler plate bolts,
nuts, washers and clamps etc. of
size 150x25x2 mm, 100x25x2
mm and 75x25x2 mm and G.I
conduits of 50/100mm diameter
from equipment to main trench
as per Section-7 for Switchyard
erection.
17. 2.5 dia HDD/PVC pipe for Lot Lot - - - Lot
4Cx4mm2 control cable from
CT, VT to metering system as
per Section-5, Chapter-5.
18. AAC Tarantula Conductor Mt 7410 200 200 400 8210
19. 7/3.15 GS Earth wire Lot Lot Lot Lot Lot Lot
20. Spacers for Twin Tarantula No. 519 - - - 519
conductor
21. U-bolt 20mm dia Lot Lot Lot Lot Lot Lot
Note: The quantities given in Annexure B-I is approx. and for evaluation purpose, however, the
payment shall be made as per actual on the basis of unit price.
20
ANNEXURE C-I
Schedules of items for associated steel structure works to be quoted for each substation as applicable.
The bidder is required to estimate the quantities and furnish the unit rate for each item/ works and the
total price for each item in the bid proposal sheets. The list may not be exhaustive, and the bidder may
modify/ append the same as required.
Item for associated structure work
Lattice type steel structure for 220 kV Substations Mehna Khera and 220kV Bays at Fatehabad, Rania
and Bhiwani. Supply of material, preparation of fabrication drawing, galvanizing and delivery of lattice
type steel structure for tower and beams for 220/132/33 kV switchyard fabricated from steel conforming
to IS: 2062 including nuts-bolts gusset plates foundation bolts and other accessories as per drawings
supplied by the owner.
Sr. No. DESCRIPTION UNIT 220kV 220kV 220kV 220kV TOTAL
S/Stn. S/Stn. S/Stn. S/Stn.
Mehna Fatehabad Rania Bhiwani
Khera
Main Substation tower and
A.
beam
a) Tower type AT-1 No. 9 - - 2 11
b) Tower type AT-3 No. 10 1 1 1 13
c) Tower type AT-4 No. 5 - - - 5
d) Tower type AT-6 No. 10 - - - 10
e) Beam type AB-1 No. 16 1 1 2 20
f) Beam type AB-2 No. 10 - - - 10
g) Tower type BT-1 No. 6 - - - 6
h) Tower type BT-3 No. 6 - - - 6
i) Tower type BT-4 No. 3 - - - 3
j) Tower type BT-6 No. 6 - - - 6
k) Beam type BB-1 No. 12 - - - 12
l) Beam type BB-2 No. 6 - - - 6
m) Tower type CT-4 No. 9 - - - 9
n) Tower type CT-5 No. 11 - - - 11
o) Tower type CT-6 No. 4 - - - 4
p) Tower type CT-8 No. 8 - - - 8
q) Beam type DD-1* No. 19 - - - 19
r) Beam type DD-2* No. 8 - - - 8
B. Equipment Structure
1. 220 kV CT drawing No. HTD/ST- No. 24 3 3 6 36
147
2. 220 kV NCT drawing No. No. 3 - - - 3
HTD/ST-150
3. 220 kV PT/CVT drawing No. No. 10 - - 6 16
HTD/ST-147
4. 220 kV surge arrestor drawing No. 21 3 3 6 33
No.HTD/ST 93R
5. 220 kV Bus Post Insulator No. 16 2 2 4 24
drawing No. HTD/ST-116
6. 220 kV Isolator/L&E drawing No. No. 20 3 3 6 32
HTD/ST-170
7. 132 kV CT drawing No. No. 18 - - - 18
HHW/ST-67
8. 132 kV CVT drawing No. No. 9 - - - 9
HHW/ST-67
21
Sr. No. DESCRIPTION UNIT 220kV 220kV 220kV 220kV TOTAL
S/Stn. S/Stn. S/Stn. S/Stn.
Mehna Fatehabad Rania Bhiwani
Khera
9. 132 kV Surge Arrestor drawing No. 15 - - - 15
No. HSW/ST- 63R
10. 132 kV Bus Post Insulator No. 12 - - - 12
drawing No.HTD/ST144
11. 132 kV Isolator/L&E drawing No. No. 15 - - - 15
HTD/ST-90R
12. 33 kV LA No. 18 - - - 18
13. 33 kV CT drawing HTD/ST-88 No. 21 - - - 21
14. 33 kV Isolator/L&E No. 21 - - - 21
15. 33 kV NCT drawing HTD/ST-88 No. 2 - - - 2
16. 33 kV PT drawing HTD/ST-88 No. 6 - - - 6
* HVPNL design of beam CB-6 and CB-7 shall be used for manufacturing 33kV beams DD-1 and DD-2
respectively but with a change in length of beam as per requirement in 33kV system.
Note: The quantity given above are as approximate in case of variation of quantities at the time of
detailed engineering, actual quantities shall be payable as per quoted price.
22
Bill of quantities in respect of PLCC equipment
Annexure D-I
Sr. Line sections PLC PLC terminal EPAX 8x24 Tele. Set PB Wave trap LTU (P/P) 48V Battery HF
No terminals with Prot. Sw Un type (set) (Set.) & Battery cable
(No.) Coupler (No.) (No.) Charger (kms)
1250A 300 AH
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
1. LILO of 220kV 2 6 1/Mehna 10/Mehna 4 Nos for 220kV 2 1/Mehna 2.0
Fatehabad-Rania Khera Khera Substation Mehna Khera
D/C Line at 220kV Khera
Substation Mehna
Khera
2. 220kV line bay at - - - - - - - -
220kV Fatehabad &
Rania to
accommodate 2nd
ckt. of existing
220kV Fatehabad -
Rania S/C line on
D/C tower.
3. 220kV Bhiwani 1/Bhiwani 2/Bhiwani - - 2/Bhiwani HVPN 1/Bhiwani - -
PGCIL-Bapora HVPN & 1 HVPN & 2 for HVPN &
(Bhiwani) D/C at for PGCIL PGCIL 1 for
220kV S/Stn. Bhiwani PGCIL
Total 4 10 1 10 6 4 1 2.0
Note: - Testing, Erection Commissioning and matching (if required) of PLCC equipments will be in the scope of bidder for the above said
work. The Shifting of PLCC equipment, wave trap/CVT etc., (if required for matching purpose at any end) will also be in scope of bidder and
no extra payment shall be made on this account. Further, the shifting of one no. CVTs, one no. Wave Traps and PLCC equipments from one
ckt. to another ckt. (for 220kV Fatehabad and 220kV Rania both ends) and testing & commissioning of PLCC equipments for both ends
(220kV S/Stn. Fatehabad & Rania) shall be in the scope of bidder and no extra payment shall be made on this account.
23
Annexure-EI
Furniture Description UNIT 220 kV S/Stn. Total
Mehna Khera
i) Executive Executive Table: No. 1 1
Room (1800mmx900mm) (Wooden)
Executive Chair: (Revolving mid back No. 1 1
type)
Visitors Chair No. 4 4
ii) Control Executive Table: (1650mm x750mm) No. 1 1
Room (Wooden)
type)
Visitors Chair: No. 4 4
Steel Almirah LengthxWidthxHeight in No. 1 1
mm (1016x560x1980)
iii) Computer Recta work station of size 1200mmx No. 1 1
Room 600 mm, 25 mm thick work top with 3
drawer pedestal alongwith keyboard
tray and CPU trolley. And partitions of
thickness 53 mm and of height 1200
mm.
BILL OF QUANTITIES ANNEXURE-A-II
Sr. DESCRIPTION UNIT 220kV S/Stn. Total
No. Neem-wala
1. a 100 MVA 220/132 kV Auto Transformer along with 10% extra No. 2 2
T/F oil
b NIFPES for 100 MVA T/F No. 2 2
2. 20/25 MVA, 132/33 kV Power Transformer along with 10% extra No. 1 1
T/F oil
3. 220 kV SF-6 Breaker along with 20% extra SF-6 Gas No. 5 5
4. 220 kV Isolator with E/Switch No. 2 2
5. 220kV Isolator without E/Switch No. 10 10
6. 220 kV Surge Arrestor No. 12 12
7. 220 kV Post Insulator No. 10 10
8. 220 kV CTs for line & bus coupler (1200-800-400/1-1-1-1-1A) No. 9 9
9. 220 kV CT for Transformer (450-300/0.577-1-1-1-1A) No. 6 6
10. 220 kV CVT No. 2 2
d) Ckt breaker control Panel with auto reclose & line Protection Panel Set 2 2
e) Ckt breaker control Panel without auto reclose and Transformer Set 2 2
protection panel (for both HV & LV side)
f) Ckt breaker control Panel without auto reclose and Bus Coupler Set 1 1
cum Bus Bar Protection panel(Double Bus bar)
12. 220 kV NCT (450-300/1A) No. 2 2
13. 220 kV PT No. 6 6
14. 132 kV SF-6 Breaker with 20% extra SF-6 Gas No. 7 7
15. 132 kV Isolator with E/SWITCH No. 3 3
16. 132 kV Isolator without E/SWITCH No. 14 14
17. 132 kV Surge Arrestor No. 18 18
18. 132 kV Post Insulator No. 14 14
19. 132 kV CT For Line & Bus Coupler (600-300-150/1-1-1A) No. 12 12
20. 132 kV CT For Transformer I/C (750-500/0.577-1-1-1A) No. 6 6
21. 132 kV CT For Transformer (250-150-100/0.577-1-1-1A) No. 3 3
22. 132kV NCT(250-150-100/1A) No. 1 1
23. 132 kV CVT For Line No. 9 9
a) Ckt breaker control panel without auto reclose and line protection No. 3 3
Panel
b) Ckt breaker control panel without auto reclose for Transformer I/C No. 2 2
c) Ckt breaker control panel without auto reclose and transformer No. 1 1
protection panel ( for both HV & LV side)
d) Ckt breaker control panel without auto reclose and Bus coupler No. 1 1
protection panel
25. Time synchronization equipment No. 1 1
26. 33 kV VCB I/C 1250A No. 1 1
27. 33 kV VCB 630A Line No. 2 2
28. 33 kV Capacitor VCB No. 1 1
29. 33 kV LAs No. 18 18
30. 33 kV Ckt breaker control panel without auto reclose for No. 1 1
Transformer I/C with one no. of SEM
No. Neemwala
31. 33 kV Ckt. Breaker control panel without auto reclose and line No. 2 2
Protection Panel
32. 33 kV Ckt. Breaker control Panel without auto reclose and No. 1 1
capacitor protection Panel
33. 33 kV Isolator (630A) No. 8 8
34. 33 kV Isolator (with incomer) (1250A) No. 2 2
35. 33 kV L&E Switch No. 2 2
36. 33 kV PT No. 6 6
37. 33 kV Line cum capacitor CT 400-300/5-1A No. 9 9
38. 33 kV I/C Transformer CT 1000-600-400/0.577-5-5-1A No. 3 3
39. 33 kV NCT (1000-600-400/0.577-5-5-1A) No. 1 1
40. 1x10.872 MVAR 33 kV Capacitor Bank along with Str. & allied Set 1 1
equipment (L&E, Series Reactor, NCT etc.,) as per specification.
41. 220V 200 AH Battery No. 1 1
42. 220 V Battery charger (20A F/30A Boost AH) No. 1 1
43. 220 V D.C.D.B. suitable for 200AH Battery No. 1 1
44. 415 V LT AC MCCB Board 500 A No. 1 1
45. 33/0.4 kV Station Transformer 200 KVA with CSP. No. 2 2
46. 100 KVA DG Set along with associated accessories No. 1 1
47. 1.1 kV Copper Control Cable Armoured for 220 kV bays of size Lot Lot Lot
2CX6mm2, 7CX4mm2, 4CX4mm2, 2CX4mm2, 16CX2.5mm2,
10CX2.5mm2, 7CX2.5mm2, 3CX2.5mm2 including Junction box
(as per section-6 of copper control cables specifications and
48. 1.1 kV Copper Control Cable unarmoured for 132 kV bays of size Lot Lot Lot
49. 1.1 kV Copper Control Cable unarmoured for 33 kV bays of size Lot Lot Lot
50. 650/1100 Volts 3.5 core 240 mm2 aluminium power cable from Lot Lot Lot
Aux. Transformer to ACDB
51. 650/1100 Volt 3.5 core 70 mm2 aluminium cable for oil filtration Lot Lot Lot
set.
52. 650/1100 Volt 4 core 16 mm2 armoured copper power cable for Lot Lot Lot
MLDB and other cable required as per contract for 220kV bays.
53. 650/1100 Volt 4 core 16 mm2 unarmoured copper power cable for Lot Lot Lot
54. 650/1100 Volt 4 core 16 mm2 unarmoured copper power cable for Lot Lot Lot
55. Earthing Mat Material. The earth mat will be designed / quoted for Lot 49330 Lot
soil resistivity of 50m. In case soil resistivity is more than 50m sq meter
then the earth mat will be designed for actual soil resistivity. The (approx)
payment of extra material to be used for earth mat shall be made
on pro rata basis. The approximate area of earth mat to be laid is
given in the corresponding columns of the substations. However,
item will remain a Lot item.
No. Neem wala
56. Fire Fighting equipments as per section-6
a) 22.5 Kg Capacity FE CO2 type, Trolley Mounted No 6 6
b) 25 Kg Capacity FE DCP type, Trolley Mounted No 6 6
c) DCP 10 Kg Capacity, Wall mounted No 9 9
d) FE CO2 6.5 Kg Capacity, Wall mounted No 8 8
e) DCP 5 Kg Capacity, Wall mounted No 2 2
f) Foam Type 9 Litre Capacity, Wall mounted No 1 1
g) Water CO2 9 Litre, Wall mounted No 1 1
h) Fire Buckets(12 No.s with stand in one set) Set 3 3
57. Supply and installation of 2x400 watt HPSV lamps with all No 50 50
accessories for Complete lighting of outdoor Switch yard area as
per clause 16.0 of section 7 of the specifications.
58. Complete lighting of road and street by providing 1x150W HPSV No 25 25
lamps on tubular steel poles at a distance of 15meter along the
roads and streets as per as per clause 16.0 of section 7 of the
specification.
59. Supply and installation of fluorescent tube fitting (2 x 4 feet) on No 40 40
tubular steel poles along with the fencing at a distance of 30
meter as per as per clause 16.0 of section 7 of the specification.
60. High wall type split AC unit of 2 Ton capacity (as per technical No. 2 2
specification)
61. Testing of IUM System at site by NABL accredited lab Lot Lot Lot
62. Digital Earth resistance meter. No. 1 1
63. 5 kV Automated insulation resistance tester. No. 1 1
64. Complete Substation automation system for 220/132/33 kV substations including hardware
(for present bays) and software (for present and future bays) along with associated
equipments and Kiosks including foundation of kiosks for the following bays (bays as
defined in technical specification sec-Substation Automation System) as per technical
specifications:-.
i) 220kV (presently A bays & B for future) Nos. A=5
B=6
ii) 132 kV (presently A bays & B for future) Nos. A=7
B=7
iii) 33 kV (presently A bays & B for future) Nos. A=5
B=7
ANNEXURE B-II
Sr. DESCRIPTION UNIT 220kV TOTAL
No. S/Stn.
Neemwala
1 Bolted type 220 kV single tension string assembly with Silicone No. 30 30
Rubber Polymer Composite Insulators (E&M strength 9000 kg)
with all hardware accessories including ball & socket connection
and tension clamp set suitable for twin Tarantula (string).
2 Bolted type 220 kV single suspension string assembly with No. 18 18
Silicone Rubber Polymer Composite Insulators (E&M strength
9000 kg) with all hardware accessories including ball & socket
connection suitable for twin Tarantula (string).
3 Bolted type 220 kV Single tension string assembly with Silicone No. 24 24
with all hardware accessories including ball & socket connections
and tension clamp sets suitable for single Tarantula (string).
4 Bolted type 220 Single suspension string assembly with Silicone No. 24 24
and suspension clamp sets suitable for single Tarantula
conductor.
6 Bolted type 132 kV single suspension string assembly with No. 24 24
Silicone Rubber Polymer Composite Insulators (E&M strength
9000 kg) per string with all hardware accessories including ball &
socket connection suitable for twin Tarantula (string).
8 Bolted type 132 Single suspension string assembly with Silicone No. 36 36
conductor.
10 Bolted type 33 kV single suspension string assembly with Silicone No. 18 18
suitable for twin Tarantula (string).
12 Bolted type 33 kV Single suspension string assembly with Silicone No. 30 30
conductor.
Sr. DESCRIPTION UNIT 220kV TOTAL
No. S/Stn.
Neemwala
13 C-Wedge connectors matching with conductor size. Lot Lot Lot
14 Copper lugs glands, PVC ferrules for control cabling. L/S L/S L/S
15 Wooden cleats, Aluminium clamps, bolts, nuts, washers etc for L/S L/S L/S
fixing control cables in trenches
16 Galvanised iron perforated tray with side coupler plate bolts, nuts, L/S L/S L/S
washers and clamps etc. of size 150x25x2 mm, 100x25x2 mm
and 75x25x2 mm and G.I conduits of 50/100mm diameter from
equipment to main trench as per Section-7 for Switchyard
erection.
17 2.5 dia HDD/PVC pipe for 4Cx4mm2 control cable from CT, VT to Lot Lot Lot
metering system as per Section-5, Chapter-5.
18 AAC Tarantula Conductor Mt 7200 7200
19 7/3.15 GS Earth wire Lot Lot Lot
20 Spacers for Twin Tarantula conductor No. 508 508
21 U-bolt 20mm dia Lot Lot Lot
Note: The quantities given in Annexure B-I is approx. and for evaluation purpose, however, the
payment shall be made as per actual on the basis of unit price.
ANNEXURE C-II
Schedules of items for associated steel structure works to be quoted for each substation as applicable. The
bidder is required to estimate the quantities and furnish the unit rate for each item/ works and the total price for
each item in the bid proposal sheets. The list may not be exhaustive, and the bidder may modify/ append the
same as required.
Item for associated structure work
Lattice type steel structure for 220 kV Substations Neemwala. Supply of material, preparation of fabrication
drawing, galvanizing and delivery of lattice type steel structure for tower and beams for 220/132/33 kV
switchyard fabricated from steel conforming to IS: 2062 including nuts-bolts gusset plates foundation bolts and
other accessories as per drawings supplied by the owner.
Sr. No. DESCRIPTION UNIT 220kV S/Stn. TOTAL
Neemwala
A. Main Substation tower and beam
a) Tower type AT-1 No. 5 5
b) Tower type AT-3 No. 6 6
c) Tower type AT-4 No. 3 3
d) Tower type AT-6 No. 6 6
e) Beam type AB-1 No. 10 10
f) Beam type AB-2 No. 6 6
g) Tower type BT-1 No. 8 8
h) Tower type BT-3 No. 11 11
i) Tower type BT-4 No. 5 5
j) Tower type BT-6 No. 10 10
k) Beam type BB-1 No. 14 14
l) Beam type BB-2 No. 10 10
m) Tower type CT-4 No. 3 3
n) Tower type CT-5 No. 6 6
o) Tower type CT-6 No. 6 6
p) Tower type CT-8 No. 9 9
q) Beam type DD-1* No. 11 11
r) Beam type DD-2* No. 9 9
B. Equipment Structure
1. 220 kV CT drawing No. HTD/ST-147 No. 15 15
2. 220 kV NCT drawing No. HTD/ST-150 No. 2 2
3. 220 kV PT/CVT drawing No. HTD/ST-147 No. 8 8
4. 220 kV surge arrestor drawing No.HTD/ST 93R No. 12 12
5. 220 kV Bus Post Insulator drawingNo.HTD/ST-116 No. 10 10
6. 220 kV Isolator/L&E drawing No. HTD/ST-170 No. 12 12
7. 132 kV CT drawing No. HHW/ST-67 No. 21 21
8. 132 kV CVT drawing No. HHW/ST-67 No. 9 9
9. 132 kV Surge Arrestor drawing No. HSW/ST- 63R No. 18 18
10. 132 kV Bus Post Insulator drawing No. HTD/ST144 No. 14 14
11. 132 kV Isolator/L&E drawing No. HTD/ST-90R No. 17 17
12. 33 kV LA No. 18 18
13. 33 kV CT drawing HTD/ST-88 No. 12 12
14. 33 kV Isolator/L&E No. 12 12
15. 33 kV NCT drawing HTD/ST-88 No. 1 1
16. 33 kV PT drawing HTD/ST-88 No. 6 6
* HVPNL design of beam CB-6 and CB-7 shall be used for manufacturing 33kV beams DD-1 and DD-2
respectively but with a change in length of beam as per requirement in 33kV system.
Note: The quantity given above are as approximate in case of variation of quantities at the time of
detailed engineering, actual quantities shall be payable as per quoted price.
Bill of quantities in respect of PLCC equipment
Annexure D-II
Sr. Line sections PLC PLC terminal EPAX 8x24 Tele. Set PB Wave trap LTU (P/P) 48V Battery HF
No terminals with Prot. Sw Un type (set) (Set.) & Battery cable
(No.) Coupler (No.) (No.) Charger (kms)
1250A 300 AH
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
1. 220 kV Kaithal-PG- 1/220kV 2/220kV 1/Neemwala 10/Neemwala 2* Nos. for 220kV 1/Neemw 1/Neemwala 1.0
Neemwala D/C Line Neemwala Neemwala & Substation. ala & 1
at 220kV Substation & 1 No. 2 No. for Neemwala No. for
Neemwala for PGCIL PGCIL PGCIL
end
Total 2 4 1 10 2 2 1 1.0
Note: Testing, Erection Commissioning and matching (if required) of PLCC equipments will be in the scope of bidder. The Shifting of PLCC
equipment, wave trap/CVT etc., (if required for matching purpose at any end) will also be in scope of bidder and no extra payment shall be
made on this account.
Annexure-E-II
Furniture Description UNIT 220 kV S/Stn. Total
Neemwala
i) Executive Executive Table: No. 1 1
Room (1800mmx900mm) (Wooden)
type)
Visitors Chair No. 4 4
ii) Control Executive Table: (1650mm x750mm) No. 1 1
Room (Wooden)
type)
Visitors Chair: No. 4 4
Steel Almirah LengthxWidthxHeight in No. 1 1
mm (1016x560x1980)
iii) Computer Recta work station of size 1200mmx No. 1 1
Room 600 mm, 25 mm thick work top with 3
drawer pedestal alongwith keyboard
tray and CPU trolley. And partitions of
thickness 53 mm and of height 1200
mm.
G:\REC-138 New\Technical specification 21.04.15.doc CT-9

SECTION 2
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIRMENTS
1. GENERAL
1.1 This section stipulates the general technical requirements under the contract and
will form integral part of the technical specification.
1.2 The provisions under this specification are intended to supplement requirement
for the materials, equipments and services covered under this specification and
is not exclusive. However, in case of conflict between requirements specified in
this section and requirements specified in other sections the requirements
specified- under respective sections shall hold good.
2.0 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
2.1 The bidders shall submit the technical requirements, data and information as per
the technical data sheets provided in the Volume III of bid documents.
2.2 The bidders shall furnish catalogues, engineering data, technical information,
design document, drawings etc fully in conformity with the technical specification.
2.3 It is recognised that the contractor may have standardised on the use of certain
components, materials, processes or procedures different than those specified
herein. Alternate proposals offering similar equipment based on the
manufacturer's standard practice will also be considered provided such proposals
meet the specified designs, standard and performance requirements and are
acceptable to the employer. Unless brought out clearly, the Bidder shall be
deemed to conform to this specification scrupulously, All deviations from the
specification shall be clearly brought out in the respective schedule of deviations.
Any discrepancy between the specification and the catalogues or the bid, if not
clearly brought out in the schedule, will not be considered as valid deviation.
2.4 Wherever a material or article is specified or defined by the name of a particular

brand, manufacturer or vendor, the specific name mentioned shall be understood
as establishing type, function and quality and not as limiting competition.
2.5 Equipment furnished shall be complete in every respect with all mountings,
fittings, fixtures and standard accessories normally provided with such equipment
and/or needed for erection, completion and safe operation of the equipment as
required by applicable codes though they may not have been specifically detailed
in the technical specifications unless include in the list of exclusions. Materials
and components not specifically stated in the specification but which are
necessary for commissioning and satisfactory operation of the switchyard shall
be deemed to be included in the scope of the
specification. All similar standard components/parts of similar standard
equipment provided, shall be inter changeable with one another.
2.6 Unless brought out clearly in the respective schedule of deviations, it will be
considered that, the bid proposal scrupulously conforms compliance to the
specification. The bidder must bring out all the deviations in the bid proposal.
2.7 In case there is a discrepancy between the data offered equipment and
catalogue furnished, and unless the deviations are brought out clearly in the
Technical Deviation Schedule, the equipment will be deemed to conform
compliance to the specification scrupulously.
3.0 STANDARDS
3.1 The works covered by the specification shall be designed, engineered,

manufactured, built tested and commissioned in accordance with the Acts, Rules,
Laws and Regulations of India.
3.2 The equipment to be furnished under this specification shall conform to latest
issue with all amendments of standard specified under Annexure B of this section
as well as under respective Sections/Chapters of the specification.
3.3 In addition to meeting the specific requirement called for in the respective
sections of the Technical Specification, the equipment shall also conform to the
general requirement of the relevant standards and shall form an internal part of
the specification.
3.4 The Bidder shall note that standards mentioned in the specification are not
mutually exclusive or complete in themselves, but intend to compliment each
other.
3.5 The Contractor shall also note that list of standards presented in this specification
is not complete. Wherever necessary the list of standards shall of the
specification shall take precedence.
3.6 When the specific requirements stipulated in the specification exceed or differ
than those required by the applicable standards, the stipulation of the
specification shall take precedence.
3.7 Other internationally accepted standards which ensure equivalent or better

performance than that specified in the standards referred shall also be accepted.
3.8 In case governing standards for the equipment is different from IS or IEC, the
salient points of difference shall be clearly brought out in additional information
schedule of Vol. III alongwith English language version of standard or relevant
shall be subject to Employer's approval.
4. SERVICES TO BE PERFORMED BY THE EQUIPMENT BEING FURNISHED
4.1 The 220/132/33 kV system is being designed to limit the switching surge over
voltage and the power frequency over voltage within limits of IEC. The equipment
furnished under this specification shall perform all its functions and operate
satisfactorily with out showing undue strain, re-strike etc. under such over voltage
conditions and in system where line lengths would extend up to 200 km.
4.2 All equipments shall also perform satisfactorily under various Electro-mechanical
and meteorological conditions of the site of installation.
4.3 All the Equipment shall be able to withstand all external and internal mechanical,
thermal and electromechanical forces due to various factor like wind load,
temperature variation, short circuit etc for the equipment.
4.4 The bidder shall design the various forces for terminal connectors of the
equipment are required to withstand.
4.5 The equipment shall also comply to the following:
a) All outdoor EHV equipments shall be suitable for hot line washing.
b) To facilitate erection of equipment, all items to be assembled as site shall

be "match marked".
c) All piping, if any between equipment control cabinet operating mechanism

to marshalling box of the equipment shall bear proper identification to
facilitate the connection at site.
5.0 ENGINEERING DATA
5.1 The furnishing of engineering data by the Contractor shall be in accordance with
the schedule for each set of equipment as specified in the technical
specifications.
5.2 The review of these data by the Employer will cover only general conformance of
the data to the specifications and documents, interfaces with the equipment
provided under the specifications, external connections and of the dimensions
which might affect substation layout. This review by the Employer may not
indicate a through review of all dimensions, quantities and accuracy of the
information submitted. This review and/or approval by the Employer shall not be
considered by the Contractor, as limiting any of his responsibilities and liabilities
for mistakes and deviation from the requirements, specified under these
specifications and documents.

5.3 All engineering data submitted by the Contractor after final process including
review and approval by the Employer shall from part of the Contract Document
and the entire works performed under these specifications shall be performed in
strict conformity, unless otherwise expressly requested by the Employer in
Writing.
6.0 DOCUMENTS
6.1 LIST OF DOCUMENTS
6.1.1 The bidder must furnish a detailed list of drawings/documents along with the bid
proposal which he intends to submit to the Employer after awarded of the
contract.
6.1.2 The supplier shall necessarily submit all the drawings/ documents unless
anything is waived.
6.1.3 The supplier shall submit 6 (six) sets of drawings/design documents/test reports
as may be required for the approval of the Employer.
6.2 All engineering data submitted by the Contractor after final process including
review and approval by the Employer shall from part of the Contract Document
and the entire works performed under these specifications shall be performed in
strict conformity, unless otherwise expressly requested by the Employer in
Writing.
6.3 DRAWINGS
6.3.1 All drawing submitted by the Contractor including those submitted at the time of
bid shall be in sufficient detail to indicate the type, size, arrangement, material
description, Bill of Materials, weight of each component, break-up for packing
and shipment, the external connections, fixing arrangement required, the
dimensions required for installation and interconnections with other equipments
and materials, clearances and spaces required for installation and
interconnection between various portions of equipments and any other
information specifically requested in the specifications.
6.3.2 Each drawing submitted by the Contractor shall be clearly marked with the name
of the Employer, the unit designation, the specifications title, the specification
number and the name of the Project. If standard catalogue pages are submitted,
the applicable items shall be indicated therein. All titles, noting, markings and
writings on the drawing shall be in English. All the dimensions should be in metric
units.

6.3.3 Further work by the Contractor shall be in strict accordance with these drawing
and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the Employer
if so required.
6.4 All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to
the approval of the drawing shall be at the Contractor's risk. The Contractor may
make any changes in the design which are necessary to make the equipment
conform to the provisions and intent of the Contract and such changes will again
be subject to approval by the Employer. Approval of Contractor's drawing or work
by the Employer shall not relieve the contractor of any of his responsibilities and
liabilities under the Contract.
6.5 APPROVAL PROCEDURE
The scheduled dates for the submission of these as well as for, any
data/information to be furnished by the Employer would be discussed and
finalised at the time of award. The supplier shall also submit six (6) copies of all
drawings/design documents/test report for approval of the Employer. The
following schedule shall be followed generally for approval.
i) Approval/comments/by Within 4 weeks of receipt.

employer on initial submission
ii) Resubmission Within 3 (three) weeks

(whenever from date of
comments required)
including both ways postal
time.
iii) Approval or comments Within 3 weeks of receipt of

resubmission
iv) Furnishing of distribution 3 weeks from the date of last

copies approval.
Note: The contractor may please note that all resubmission must incorporate all
comments given in the submission by the Employer failing which the
submission of documents is likely to be returned.
6.6 The drawing which are required to be referred frequently during execution should
be submitted on cloth lined paper.
6.7 OTHER REQUIREMENTS OF DOCUMENTATION

6.7.1 One set of 4microfilm and 8 sets of all drawing per substation plus one set and
four sets of all drawing for HVPN head office shall be furnished after approval of
drgs. Microfilms submitted should be compatible with 35 mm microfilming
system.
6.7.2 The manufacturer shall also submit one video cassette (VHS-PAL) per substation
and one for HVPN head office highlighting installation and maintenance
techniques/requirements of Circuit Breaker & Isolators.
6.7.3 On completion of the entire works, the supplier shall also furnish eight bound sets
of all as built drawings, duly signed by the site in-charge along with 1 set of
microfilms. Computer floppy (jes) for each substation and HVPN head office
containing all "as-built drawing in Auto-Cad version 12 or better shall also be
submitted".
6.7.4 8 copies of instruction/operation manuals per sub station and HVPN head office
shall also be furnished. The instruction Manuals shall contain full details of
drawing of all equipment being supplied under this contract, their exploded
diagrams with complete instruction for storage, handing, erection,
commissioning, testing, operation, trouble shooting, servicing and overhauling
procedures.
6.7.5 After approval of test reports, 6(six) bound sets containing all drawings/manuals,
type and routine test report etc. along with sub-vendors test reports for all bought
out assemblies/components/parts including internal wiring diagrams and
exploded diagrams of assemblies/ parts, shall be furnished.
6.8 If after the commissioning and initial operation of the substation, the instruction
manuals require any modifications/additions/changes, the same shall be
incorporated and the updated final instruction manual in the form of one (1)
reproducible original and twelve( 12) copies shall be submitted by the Contractor
to the Employer.
The Contractor shall furnish to the Employers, twelve(12) sets of spare part
catalogue.
7.0 COLOUR SCHEME AND CODES

7.1 The contractor shall propose parts a color scheme for the those equipments
/Items for which the colour scheme has not been specified in the specification, for
the approval of Employer. The decision of Employer shall be final. The scheme
shall include:
- Finishing colour of Indoor equipment.
- Finishing colour of Outdoor equipment.
- Finishing colour of all cubicals.
- Finishing colour of various auxiliary system equipment including piping.
- Finishing colour of various building items.

7.2 All steel structures, plates etc shall be hot dip galvanised or painted with non-
corrosive paint on a suitable primer as per the provisions of the respective
Section. It may be noted that normally all Employer's electrical equipment in
Employer's switchyard are painted with shade 631 of IS-5 and Employer will
prefer to follow the same for this project also. All the indoor cubicles shall be of
same colour scheme and for other miscellaneous items colour scheme will be
approved by the Employer.

8.0 MATERIAL/ WORKMANSHIP
8.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
8.1.1 Where the specification does not contain characteristics with reference to
workmanship, equipment, materials and component of the covered Equipment, it
is understood that the same must be new, of highest ,grade of the best quality of
their kind, conforming to the best engineering practice and suitable for the
purpose for which they are intended.
8.1.2 The equipment must be new, of highest grade, the best quality of their kind, to
best engineering practice and latest state of ardent in accordance with purpose
for which they are intended and to ensure satisfactory performance throughout
the service life.
8.1.3 Incase where the equipment, material or components are indicated in the
specification as "similar" to any special standard, the employer shall decide upon
the question of similarly. When required by the specification or required by the
employer the supplier shall submit, for approval, all the information concerning
the material or components supplied, installed or used without such approval
shall run the risk of subsequent rejection, it being understood that the cost as
well as the time delay associated with the rejection shall be borne by the
Supplier.
8.1.4 The design of the work shall be such that installation, future expansions,
replacement and general maintenance may be undertaken with a minimum of
time and expenses. Each component shall be designed to be consistent with its
duty and suitable factors of safety, subject to mutual agreements and shall be
used throughout the design. All joints and fastenings shall be devised;
constructed and documented so that the component part shall be accurately
positioned and retained to fulfil their require function. In general, screw threads
shall be standard metric threads. The use of other thread forms will only be
permitted when prior approval has been obtained from the Employer.
8.1.5 Whenever possible, all similar part of the works shall be made to gauge and shall
also be made interchangeable with similar parts. All spare parts shall be
interchangeable with, and shall be made of the same material and workmanship
as the corresponding parts of the equipment supplied under specification. Where
feasible, common component units shall be Employed in different pieces of the
equipment in order to minimize spare parts stocking requirements. All equipment
of the same type and rating shall be physically and electrically interchangeable.
8.1.6 All material and equipment shall be. installed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendation(s). Only first-class work in accordance with the
best modern practice will be accepted. Installation shall be constructed as being
the erection of equipment at its permanent location. This, unless otherwise
specified, shall include unpacking, cleaning and lifting into position, grouping,
leveling, aligning, coupling of or bolting down to previously installed equipment
bases/ foundation, performing the alignment check and final adjusting prior to
initial operation, testing and commissioning in accordance with the
manufacturer's tolerances and instruction and the specification. All factory
assembled rotating machinery shall be checked for alignment and adjustments
made as necessary to re-establish the manufacturer's limits suitable guards shall
be provided for the protection of personnel on all exposed rotating and/or moving
machine parts and shall be designed for easy installation and removal for
maintenance purpose. The spare equipment( s) shall be installed at designated
location and tested for healthiness.
8.1.7 The Supplier shall apply oil and grease of the proper specification to suit the
machinery, as is necessary for the installation of the equipment. Lubricants used
for installation purpose shall be drained out and the system flushed through
where necessary for applying the lubricant required for operation. The Supplier
shall apply all operational lubricants to the equipment installed by him.
8.1.8 All oil, grease and other consumable used in the Works/Equipment shall be
purchased in India unless the Supplier has any special requirement for the
specific application of a type of oil or grease not available in India. In such is the
case he shall declare in the proposal, where such oil or grease is available. He
shall help Employer in establishing equivalent India make and Indian supplier.
The same shall be applicable to other consumable too.
8.1.9 A cast iron or welded steel base plate shall be provided for all rotating equipment
which are to be installed on a concrete base unless otherwise agreed to by the
Employer. Each base plate shall support the units and its drive assembly, shall
be of design with pads for anchoring the units and shall have a raised up all
around and shall have threaded in air connections, if so required.
8.2 PROVISION FOR EXPOSURE TO HOT HUMID CLIMATE
Outdoor equipment supplied under the specification shall be suitable for service
and storage under tropical conditions of high temperature, high humidity, heavy
rainfall and environment favorable to the growth of fungi and mildew. The indoor
equipments located in non-aircollditioned areas shall also be same type.
8.2.1 SPACE HEATERS
8.2.1.1 The heater shall be suitable for continuous operation at 240 V as supply
voltage. On-off switch and fuse shall be provided.
8.2.1.2 One or more adequately rated permanently or thermostatically connected

heater'shall be supplied to prevent condensation in any compartment. The
heaters shall be installed in the lower portion of the compartment and electrical
connection shall be made from below the heaters to minimize deterioration of
supply wire insulation. The heaters shall be suitable to maintain the compartment
temperature to prevent condensation. This shall be demonstrated by tests.
8.2.1.3 The heaters shall be suitably designed to prevent any contact between the
heater wire and the air and shall consist of coiled resistance wire centered in a
metal sheath and completely encased in a highly compacted powder of
magnesium oxide or other material having equal heat conducting and electrical
insulation properties, or they shall consist of resistance wire wound on a ceramic
and completely covered with a ceramic material to prevent any contact between
the wire and the air. Alternately, they shall consist of a resistance wire mounted
into a tubular ceramic body and embedded in vitreous gale. The surface
temperature of the heater shall be restricted wire is wound on a tubular ceramic
body and embedded in vitreous glaze. The surface temperature of the heaters
shall be restricted to a value which will not shorten the life of the heater sheaths
or that of insulated wire or other component in the compartments.
8.2.2 FUNGISTATIC VARNISH
Besides the space heaters, special moisture and fungus resistant varnish shall
be applied to parts which may be subjected or predisposed to the formation of
fungi due to the presence or deposit of nutrient substances. The varnish shall not
be applied to any surface of part where the treatment will interfere with the
operation or performance of the equipment. Such surfaces or parts shall be
protected against the application of the varnish.
8.2.3 VENTILATION OPENING
In order to ensure adequate ventilation, compartments shall have ventilation

openings provided with fine wire mesh of brass or galvanized steel to prevent the
entry if insects and to reduce to a minimum the entry of dirt and dust. Outdoor
compartment openings shall be provided with shutter type blinds.
8.2.4 DEGREE OF PROTECTION
The enclosures of the control cabinets, junction boxes and marshalling boxes to
be installed shall provide degree of protection as detailed here under:
a) Installed outdoor: 1 55
b) Installed indoor in air conditioned area :1-31
c) Installed in covered are : 1 52
d) Installed indoor in non-airconditioned area where possibility of entry of

water is limited: 1-41

The degree of protection shall be in accordance with IS: 13947(Part-l) or IEC-947
(part-I). Type test report for degree of protection test, on each type of the box
shall be submitted for approval.

9. RATING PLATES, NAME PLATES AND LABELS
9.1 Each main and auxiliary item of substation is to be permanently attached to it in a

conspicuous position a rating plate of non-corrosive material upon which is to be
engraved manufacturer's name, year of manufacture, equipment name, type or
serial number together with details of the loading condition under which the item
of substation in question has been designed to operate, and such diagram plates
as may be required by the employer. The rating plates of each equipment shall
be according to IEC requirement.
9.2 All such nameplates instruction plates, rating plates shall be bilingual with Hindi
inscription first followed by English. Alternatively two separate plates one with
Hindi and the other English Instruction may be provided.
10. FIRST FILL OF CONSUMABLE, OIL AND LUBRICANT

All the first fill consumable such as oil, lubricant, filling compounds, touch
up paints, soldering/brazing material for all copper piping of circuit
breakers and essential chemicals etc. which will be required to put the
equipment covered under the scope of the specifications, into successful
operation, shall be furnished by the Contractor unless specification
excluded under the exclusions in these specifications and documents
11. DESIGN IMPROVEMENTS
11.1 The bidder may note that the equipments offered by him in the bid only shall be
acceptable, however, the Purchaser or the Supplier may propose changes in the
specification of the equipment or quality thereof and if the parties agreed upon
any such changes, the specification shall be modified accordingly.
11.2 If any such agreed upon change is such that if affects the price. and schedule of
completion, the parties shall agree in writing as to the extent of any change in the
price and/or schedule of the completion before the contractor proceeds with the
change. Following such agreement, the provision thereof, shall be deemed to
have been amended accordingly.
12. QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME
12.1 To ensure that the equipment and services under the scope of this contract
whether manufactured or performed within the contractor's Work or at his
Subcontractor's premises or at the Employer's site or at any other place of work
are in accordance with the specification, the Contractor shall adopt suitable
quality assurance programme to control such activities at all points necessary.
Such programme shall be outlined by the contractor and shall be finally accepted
by the employer after discussions before the award of contract. A quality
assurance programme of the contractor shall generally covered the following:

a) His Organization structure for the management and implementation of the
proposed quality assurance programme:
b) Qualification data for bidder's key personnel:
c) Documentation control System:
d) The procedure for purchases of material, parts components and selection

of subcontractors services including vendor analysis,. source, inspection,
incoming raw material inspection, verification of material purchases etc:
e) System for shop manufacturing and ,site erection control including

process controls and fabrication and assembly control:
f) Control and non-conforming items and system for corrective actions:
g) Inspection and test procedure both for manufacture and field activities:
h) Control of calibration and testing of measuring instruments and field

activities:
i) System for indication and appraisal of inspection status:
j) System for quality audits:
k) System for authorising release of manufactured product to the Purchaser:
l) System for maintenance of records:
m) System for handling storage and delivery: and
n) A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control measures and
procedures adopted for controlling the quality characteristics relevant to
each item of equipment furnished and/or services ordered.
The Employer or his duly authorised representative reserves the right to

carry out quality audit and quality surveillance of the system and
procedure of the Contractor/his vendor's quality management and control
activities.
12.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE DOCUMENTS
The contractor shall be required to submit the following quality Assurance

Documents within three weeks after despatch of the equipment.

a) All Non-destructive Examination procedures, stress relief and weld repair
procedure actually used during fabrication and report including
radiography interpretation reports.
b) Welder identification list, listing welders and welding operator qualification

procedure and welding identification symbols.
c) Welder and Welding operator qualification certificate.
d) Raw material test reports on components as specified by the specification

and lor agreed to in the quality plan.
e) Stress relief time temperature chart/oil impregnation til)1e temperature

chart.
f) Factory test results for testing required as per applicable codes/ mutually
agreed quality plan/ standards referred in the technical specification.
g) The quality plan with verification of various customer inspection

points(CAP) as mutually agreed and methods used to verify the inspection
and testing points in the quality plan were performed satisfactory.
13. INSPECTION, TESTING & INSPECTION CERTIFICATE

13.1 The Employer his duly authorised representative and/or outside inspection
agency acting on behalf of the Employer shall have at all reasonable times free
access to the Contractor's premises or Works and shall have the power at all
reasonable times to inspect and examine the material and the Workmanship of
the Works during its manufacture or erection and if part of the works during its
manufacturing or erection and if the part of works being manufactured or
assembled at other premises or works, the contractor shall obtain for the
Engineer and for his duly authorised representative permission to inspect as if
the work were manufactured or assembled on the Contractor own premises or
works, Inspection may be made at any stage of manufacture, despatch or at site
at the option of the Employer and equipment if found unsatisfactory due to bad
workmanship or quality, material is liable to be rejected.
13.2 All equipment being supplied shall conform to type tests and shall be subject to
routine tests in accordance with relevant standards.
13.3 The Contractor shall give the Employer/Inspector thirty(30) days written notice of
any material being ready for testing alongwith work test certifi!:ate. Such tests
shall be to the Contractor's account except for the expenses of the Inspector. The
Engineerllnspector, unless witnessing of the tests is virtually waived, will attend
such tests with thirty(30) days of the date of which the equipment is notified as
being ready for tests/inspection, failing which the contractor may proceed with
the test which shall be deemed to have been made in the Inspector's presence
and he shall forthwith forward to the Inspector duly certified copies of tests in
triplicate.

13.4 The Employer or Inspector shall, within fifteen (15) days from the date of
inspection as defined here in give notice in writing to the contractor, of any
objection to any drawings and all any equipment and workmanship which in his
opinion is not in accordance with the contract. The Contractor shall give due
consideration to such objections and shall either made the modifications that may
be necessary to meet the said objections or shall confirm in writing to the
Engineer/Inspector giving reasons therein, that no modifications are necessary to
comply with the Contract.
13.5 When the, factory tests have been completed at the Contractor's or Sub-
contractor's Works the Employer/Inspector shall issue a certificate to this effect
within fifteen (15) days after completion of tests but if the tests are not witnessed
by the Employer/Inspector, the certificate shall be issued within fifteen(15) days
of receipt of the contractor's Test certificate by the Engineer/Inspector. Failure of
the Engineer/Inspector to issue such a certificate shall not prevent the Contractor
from proceeding with the Works. The completion of these tests or the issue of the
certificate shall not bind the employer to accept the equipment should, it, on
further tests after erection be found not to comply with the Contract. The
equipment shall be dispatched to site only after approval of test reports and
issuance of MICA by the Employer.
13.6 In all cases where the Contract provides for tests whether at the premises or at
the works of the contractor or of any Sub-Contractor. The Contractor except
where otherwise specified shall provide free of charge such items as labour,
material electrically, field water, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be
reasonably demanded by the Employer/Inspector or his authorised
representative to carry out effectively such tests of the equipment in accordance
with the contractor and shall give facilities to the Employerllnspector or to his
authorised representative to accomplish testing.
13.7 The inspection by Employer and issue of Inspection Certificate thereon shall in
no way limit the liabilities and responsibilities of the Contractor in respect of the
agreed quality assurance programme forming a part of the contractors.
13.8 The Employer will have the right of having at his own expenses any other test(s)
of reasonable nature carried out at Contractor premises or at site of in any other
place in addition of aforesaid type and routine tests, to satisfy that the material
comply with the specification.
13.9 The Employer reserves the right for getting any field tests conducted on the
completely assembled equipment at site.

14. TESTS
14.1 CHARGING
On completion of erection of the equipment and before charging, each item of the
equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and then inspected jointly by the
Employer and the Contractor for correctness and completeness of installation
and acceptability for charging, leading to initial pre-commissioning tests at site.
The list of pre-commissioning tests to be performed are given in section-7 and
shall be included in the Contractor's quality assurance programme.
14.2 COMMISSIONING TESTS
14.2.1 The available instrumentation and control equipment will be used during such
tests and the Employer will calibrate, all such measuring equipment and devices
as far as practicable. However un measurable parameters shall be taken into
account in a reasonable manner by the Employer for the requirement of these
tests. The tests will be conducted at the specified load points and as near the
specified cycle condition as practicable. The employer will apply proper
corrections in calculation, to take into account conditions which do not
correspond to the specified condition.
14.2.2 Any special equipment, tools and tackles required for the successful completion
of the Commissioning Tests shall be provided by the Contractor, free of cost.
14.2.3 The specified tests to be conducted on equipment have been brought out in the
respective chapters of the technical specification.
14.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining statutory clearances from the
concerned authorities for commissioning the equipment and the switchyard.
However, necessary fee shall be paid by employer.
15. PACKING AND SHIPPING
All the equipment shall be suitably protected, coated, covered or boxes and
crated to prevent damage or deterioration during transit, handling and storage at
site till the time of erection. While packing all the materials, the limitation from the
point of view of availability of Railway wagon sizes in India should be taken
account. The Contractor shall be responsible for any loss or damage during
transportation, handling and storage due to improper packing. Employer takes no
responsibility of the wagons.

16. PROTECTION
All coated surfaces shall be protected against abrasion, impact, discoloration and
any other damages. All exposed threaded portions shall be suitably protected
with either a metallic or a non-metallic protecting device. All ends of all valves
and pilings and conduit equipment connections shall be properly sealed with
suitable devices to protect them form damage. The parts which are likely to get
rusted, due to exposure to weather should also be properly treated and protected
in a suitable manner.
17. PAINTING AND FINISHING OF METAL SURFACES
17.1 GENERAL
All metal surfaces shall be subjected to treatment for anti-corrosion protection. All
ferrous surfaces for external use shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
High tensile steel nuts and bolts and spring washers shall be electro-galvanized
to service condition. All steel conductors including those used for
earthing/grounding (above ground level) shall also be galvanized according to
1S: 2629.
17.2 HOT DIP GALVANIZING
17.2.1 The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 610g/sq.m and minimum
thickness of coating shall be 85 microns for all items thicker than 6mm. For items
lower than 6mm thickness requirement of coating thickness shall be as per
relevant A5TM.
17.2.2 The galvanized surfaces shall consist of a continuous and uniform thick coating
of zinc, firmly adhering to the surface of steel;. The finished surfaces shall be
clean and smooth and shall be free from defects liked is colour patches, are
spots, unevenness of coating, plate which is loosely attached to the steel
globules, spiky deposits, blistered surface, flaking or peeling off, etc. The
presence of any of these defects notices on visual or microscopic inspection shall
render the material liable to rejection.
17.2.3 After galvanizing, no drilling or welding shall be performed on the galvanized

parts of the equipment excepting that nuts may be threaded after galvanizing.
Sodium dichromate treatment shall be provided to avoid formation of white rust
after hot dip galvanization.
17.2.4 The galvanized steel shall be subjected to six one minute dips in copper sulphate
solution as per IS-2633.

17.2.5 Sharp edges with radii less than 2.5mm shall be able to withstand four
immersions of the standard price test. All other coating shall withstand six
immersions. The following galvanizing tests should essentially be performed as
per relevant Indian Standards.
- Coating
- Uniformity of zinc
- Adhesion test
- Mass of Zinc
17.2.6 Galvanized material must be transported properly to ensure that galvanized

surfaces are not damaged during transit. Application of zinc rich paint at site shall
not be allowed.
17.3 PAINTING
17.3.1 All sheet steel work shall be digressed, pickled, phosphated in accordance with
the IS-6005 "code of practice for phosphating iron and sheet". All surfaces which
will not be easily accessible after shop assembly shall before hand to be treated
and protected for the life of the equipment. The surface which are to be finished
painted after installation, shall be shop painted with atleast two coats of primer.
Oil, grease, dirt and swart shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning.
Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with dilute acid followed by washing
with running water, rinsing with slightly alkaline hot water and drying.
17.3.2 After phosphating, thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water followed
by final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and over drying. The phosphate
coating shall be sealed with application of two coats may be "flash dried" while
the second coat shall be stoved.
17.3.3 After application of the primer, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall
be applied, each coat followed by stoving. The second finishing coat shall be
applied after inspection of first coat of painting.
17.3.4 The exterior color of the paint shall be as per shade No.:631 of IS-5 and inside
shall be glossy white. Each coat of primer and finishing paint shall be of slightly
different shade to enable inspection of the painting. A small quantity of finishing
paint shall be supplied for minor touching up required at site after installation of
the equipments.
17.3.5 In case the bidder proposes to follow his own standard surface finish and
protection procedures or any other established painting procedures, like
electrostatic painting etc. the procedure shall be submitted alongwith the bids for
employer's review & approval.
18. HANDILING, STORING AND INSTALLTION

18.1 In accordance with the specific installation instructions as shown on
manufacturer's drawings or as directed by the employer or his representative, the
contractor shall unload, store, erect, install, wire test and place into commercial
use all the electrical equipment included in the contract. Equipment shall be
installed in a neat, workmanlike manner so that it is level, plumb, square and
properly aligned and oriented. Commercial use of switchyard equipment means
completion of all site tests specified and energisation at rate voltage.
18.2 Contractor may engage manufacturer's engineer to supervise the unloading,

transportation to site, storing, testing and commissioning of the various
equipment being procured by them separately. Contractor shall unload, transport,
store, erect, test and commission the equipment as per instructions of the
manufacturer's supervisory Engineer(s) and shall extend full cooperation to
them,.
18.3 In case of any doubUmisunderstanding as to the correct interpretation of

manufacture's drawing or instruction, necessary clarifications shall be obtained
from the Employer: Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage to the
equipment consequent to not following manufacturer's drawing/instructions
correctly.
18.4 Where assemblies are supplied in more than one section, Contractor shall make
all necessary mechanical and electrical connections between section including
the connection between buses. Contractor shall also do necessary
adjustments/alignments necessary for proper operation of circuit breakers,
isolators and their operating mechanisms. All components shall be protected,
testing and commissioning. Any equipment damaged due to negligence or
carelessness or otherwise shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own
expense.
18.5 Supplier shall be responsible for examining all the shipment and notify the
Employer immediately of any damage, shortage, discrepancy etc. for the purpose
of Employer's information only. The supplier shall submit to the Employer every
week a report detailing all the receipts for any shortages or damages in transit,
handling and/or in storage and erection of the equipment at Site. Any demurrage,
wharfage and other such charges claimed by the transporters, railways etc. shall
be to the account of the Supplier.
18.6 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the equipment material unit the
same is handed over to the Employer in an operating condition after
commissioning. Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the
equipment material while in storage as well as after erection unit taken over by
Employer, as well as protection of the same against theft, element of nature,
corrosion, damages etc.
18.7 Where material/equipment is unloaded by Employer before the Contractor arrives

at site or even when he is site. Employer by right can hand over the same to
Contractor and there upon it will be the responsibility of Contractor to store the
material in an orderly and proper manner.
18.8 The Supplier shall be responsible for making suitable indoor storage facilities, to
store all equipment which require indoor storage.
18.9 The words 'erection' and 'installation' used in the specification are synonymous.
18.10 Exposed live parts shall be placed high enough above ground to meet the
requirements of electrical and other statutory safety codes.
18.11 The minimum phase to earth, phase to phase and section clearance for the
various 132 kV, 66 kV and 33 kV sections of the switchyard are given below:
220 kV 132 kV 33 kV
Phase to earth (mm) 2100 1300 320
Phase to Phase (mm) 2100 1600 350
Section clearance (mm) 5000 4000 2800
The design and workmanship shall be in accordance with the best engineering
practices to ensure satisfactory performance throughout the service life.
19. PROTECTIVE GUARD
Suitable guards shall be provided for protection of personnel on all exposed

rotating and/ or moving machine parts. All such guards with necessary spares
and accessories shall be designed for easy installation and removal for
maintenance purpose.
20. DESIGN CO-ORDINATION
20.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the selection and design of appropriate
equipments to provide the best co-ordinate performance of the entire system.
The basic design requirements are detailed out in this Specification. The design
of various components, sub-assemblies and assemblies shall be so done so that
it facilitates easy field assembly and maintenance.

20.2 The Contractor has to coordinate designs and termination with the agencies (If
any)who are Consultants/Contractor for the Employer. The names of agencies
shall be intimated to the successful bidders.

21. DESIGN CO-ORDINATION MEETING
The Contractor will be called upon to attend design co-ordination meeting with
the Engineer, other Contractor's and the Consultants of Employer (If any) during
the period of Contract. The Contractor shall attend such meeting at his own cost
as and when required and fully cooperate with such person and agencies
involved during those discussions.
22. TOOLS AND TACKELS
The Contractor shall supply with the equipment one complete set of all special
tools and tackles for the erection, assembly,dis-assembly and maintenance of
the equipment. However, these tools and tackles shall be separately, packed and
brought on to Site.
23. EQUIPMENT BASES
A cast iron or welded steel base.plate shall be provided for all rotating equipment
which is to be installed on a concrete base unless otherwise agreed to by the
Employer. Each base plate shall support the unit and its drive assembly, shall be
of a neat design with pads for anchoring the units, shall have a raised lip all
around, and shall have threaded drain connections.
24. FACILITIES TO BE PROVIDED BY THE EMPLOYER
24.1 The sub-station auxiliary supply is met through a system indicated under Section-
5 having the following parameters. The auxiliary power for station supply
including the equipment drive, cooling system of any equipment, air-conditioning,
lighting etc shall be designed for the specified Parameters as under. The DC
supply for the instrumentation and PLCC system shall also conform the
parametres as indicated in the following.
Normal Variation Frequency Phase Neutral

Voltage In Voltage In Hz / Wire Connection
415 V + 10% 50:1:5% 3 Solid

- 15% 4 wire Earthed
240 V + 10% 50:1:5% 1 Solid

- 15% 2 wire Earthed
220 V 190 to DC - Isolated

220 2 wire System

Combined variation of voltage and frequency shall be limited to +/- 10%. Fault
level for AC and DC system shall be 20 kA for 1 sec and 4 kA for 1 sec
respectively.
25. SUPPORT STRUCTURE
25.1 The support structures should be hot dip galvanised with minimum 610 gram/m2
net of Zinc.
25.2 In case of any deviation in this regard the bid is liable to be rejected.
25.3 Support structure shall meet the following mandatory requirements.
25.4 The minimum vertical distance from the bottom of the lowest porcelain part of the
bushing, porcelain enclosures or supporting insulators to the bottom of the
equipment base, where it rests on the foundation pad shall be 2.55 meters.
25.5 The design calculations taking into account the environmental conditions of the
substations shall be furnished for sizing of the structures.
26. CLAMPS AND CONNECTORS INCLUDING TERMINAL CONNECTORS
26.1 All power clamps and connectors shall conform to IS:5561 & NEMA CC1 and
shall be made of materials listed below:
a) For connecting ACSR Aluminium alloy casting

conductors conforming to designation A6
of IS:617 and shall be tested
for all test as per IS:617
b) For connecting equipment Bimetallic connectors made

terminals made of copper from aluminium alloy casting,
with ACSR conductors conforming to designation A6
of IS 617 with 2mm thick
bimetallic liner and shall
tested as per IS:617
c) For connecting GI shield wire Galvanised mild steel
d) i) Bolts, nuts & plain washer i) Electro galvanisation for

galvanised sizes Plain, washers below
ii) Spring washers for items M12, for others hot dip
'a' to 'c' galvanised.
ii) Electro-galvanised mild
steel suitable for at least
service condition-3 as per IS:
1573

26.2 Each equipment shall be supplied with the necessary terminals and connectors,
as required by the ultimate design for the particular installation. The conductor
termination of equipment shall be suitable for Twin/ single Zebra/ Moose ACSR
Conductor with 330 mm SubConductor spacing. The requirement regarding
external RIV as specified for any equipment shall include its terminal fittings and
the equipment shall be factory tested with the connectors in position.
26.3 Where copper to aluminium connections are required, are required, bi-metallic
clamps shall be used, which shall be properly designed to ensure that any
deterioration of the connection is kept to a minimum and restricted to parts which
are not current carrying or subjected to stress. The design details of the joint
shall be furnished to the employer by the supplier.
26.4 Low voltage connectors, grounding connectors and accessories for grounding all
equipment as specified in each particular case, are also included in the scope of
work.
26.5 No current carrying part of any of any clamp shall be less than 12 mm thick. All
ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised. Copper alloy liner of minimum 2 mm
thickness shall be cast integral with aluminium body for Bi-metallic clamps.
26.6 Lateral load deflection test shall be carried out as an acceptance test. The test
procedure and accepted norms shall be mutually discussed and agreed to.
26.7 All casting shall be free blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All
sharp edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
26.8 Clamp shall be designed to carry the same current as the conductor and the
temperature rise shall be equal or less than that of the conductor at the specified
with respect to the specified reference ambient temperature, shall also be
indelibly marked on each component of the clamp/connector, except on the
hardware.
26.9 All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have minimum
contact resistance.
26.10 Clamps and connectors shall be designed to be corona controlled. RIV level for
220 kV/ 132 kV system shall not be more then 1000/ micro volts respectively at
the specified test voltage as per IS/NEMA.
26.11 TESTS
Clamps and connectors shall conform to type tests and shall be subjected to
routine tests as per IS:5561.
27. CONTROL CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, TERMINAL BOXES &
MARSHALLING BOXES FOR OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT
27.1 All type of boxes, cabinets etc. shall generally conform to & be tested in
accordance with IS-5039/IS-8623, IEC-439, as applicable, and the clauses given
below.
27.2 Control cabinet, junction boxes, Marshalling boxes & terminal boxes shall be
made of sheet steel or aluminium and shall be dust, water and vermin proof.
Sheet used shall be least 2.0 mm cold rolled or 2.5 mm hot rolled. The box shall
be properly braced to prevent wobbling. There shall be sufficient reinforcement to
provide level surfaces, resistance to vibrations and rigidity during transportation
and installation. In case of aluminum enclosed box the thickness of aluminum
shall be such that it provides adequate rigidity and long life as comparable with
sheet of specified thickness.
27.3 The enclosures of the control cabinets, junction boxes, terminal boxes
&marshalling boxes shall provide a degree of protection of not less than Ip 55 as
per IS: 2147 . The bidder shall offer type tested (IP:55) Marshalling kiosk and
type test report for degree of protection test each type of box shall be furnished
for arrival. After protection degree test of marshalling kiosk, 2.0 kV r.m.s for 1
(one) minute, insulation resistance and functional test should have been
conducted. In case these tests have not been carried out during IP55 test, then
the contractor shall carry out the IP-55 test alongwith these tests, at his cost.
27.4 Cabinet/boxes shall be free standing floor mounting type, wall mounting type or
pedestal mounting type as per requirements.
27.5 All door, removable covers and plates shall be gasketed all around with suitably
profiled EPDM gaskets. The gasket shall be tested in the presence of Employers
representative. The quality of gasket shall be such that it does not get
damaged/cracked during the years of the equipment or its major overhaul
whichever is earlier. All gasketed surfaces shall be smooth straight and
reinforced of necessary to minimize distortion and to make a tight seal.
Ventilating Louvers, if provided, shall have screen and filters. The screen shall be
fine wire mesh made of brass or GI wires.
27.6 All boxes/cabinets shall be designed for the entry of cables from bottom by
means of weather proof and dust-proof connection. Boxes and cabinet shall be
designed with generous clearances to avoid interference between the wiring
entering from below and any terminal blocks or accessories mounted within the
base of the marshalling kiosk/box shall be provided for this purpose along with
the proper blanking plates. Necessary number of cable glands shall be supplied
and fitted on this gland plate. The gland shall project at lest 25mm above gland
plate to prevent entry of moisture in cable crutch. Gland plate shall have
provision for some future glands to be provided later, if required. The Nickel
plated glands shall be dust proof, screw on & double compression type and
made of brass. The gland shall have provision for securing armour of the cable
separately and shall be provided with earthing tag. The glands shall conform to
BS:6121.
27.7 A 240V, single phase, 50Hz, 15 amp AC plug and socket shall be provided the
cabinet with ON-OFF switch for connection of hand lamps. Plug and socket shall
be of industrial grade.
27.8 For illumination of control cabinet a 20 Watts fluorescent tube or 15 Watts CFL
shall be provided.
27.9 All control switches shall be of rotary switch type and Toggle/piano switches shall
not be provided.
27.10 EARTHING
Positive earthing of the cabinet shall be ensured by providing two separate

earthing pads. The earth wire shall be terminated on to the earthing pad and
secured by the use of star of self etching washer. Earthing of hinged door shall
be done by using a separate earth wire.
27.11 TESTS
a) The marshalling kiosks shall be subject to routine tests as per 18:5039

b) The following routine tests shall also be conducted:
i) Check for wiring
ii) Visual and dimension check
Marshalling kiosks shall be provided with danger plate and a diagram showing
the numbering/connection/ferruling by pasting the same on the inside of the door.
28. AUXILIARY SWITCHES
The auxiliary switch shall confirm to the following type tests:
a) Electrical endurance test -A minimum of 2000 operation for 2A DC with a

time constant examination of mV drop/visual defects/temperature rise test.
b) Mechanical endurance test. A minimum of operations as specified in the

relevant ISS with a subsequent checking of contact pressure tesUvisual
examination.
c) Heat run test on contacts.
29. TERMINAL BLOCKS AND WIRING

29.1 Control and instrument leads from the switchboards or from other equipment will
be brought to terminal boxes or control cabinets in conduits. All inter-phase and
external connections to equipment or to control cubicles will be made through
terminal blocks.
29.2 Terminal blocks shall be 1100 v grade and have continuous rating to carry the
maximum expected current on the terminals. Those shall be of moulded piece
complete with insulated barriers stud type terminals, washers, nuts and lock nuts.
Screw clamp, overall insulated, insertion type, rail mounted terminals can be
used in place of stud type terminals. But preferably the terminal blocks shall be
non-disconnecting stud type equivalent to Elmex type CATM4, Phoenix cage
clamp type of Wedge or equivalent. The insulating material of terminal block shall
be nylon 6.6 which shall be free of halogens, fluorocarbons etc.
29.3 Terminal block for current transformer and voltage transformer secondary leads
shall be provided with test links and isolating facilities. The current transformer
secondary leads shall also be provided with short circuiting and earthing facilities.
29.4 The terminal shall be that maximum contact area is achieved when a cable is
terminated. The terminal shall have a locking characteristic to prevent cable from
escaping from the terminal clamp unless it is done intentionally.
29.5 The conducting part in contact with cable shall preferably be tinned or silver
plated however Nickel plated copper or zinc plated steel shall also be acceptable.
29.6 The terminal blocks shall be of extensible design.
29.7 The terminal blocks shall have locking arrangement to prevent its escape from
the mounting rails.
29.8 The terminal blocks shall be fully enclosed with removable covers of transparent,
non deteriorating type plastic material. Insulating barriers shall be provided
between the terminal blocks. These barriers shall not hinder the operator from
carrying out the wiring without removing the barriers.
29.9 Unless otherwise specified terminal blocks shall be suitable for connecting the
following conductors on each side.
a) All circuits except CT Minimum of 2.5 sq.mm

circuits copper flexible
b) All CT circuits copper Minimum of 4 sq.mm.

flexible.

29.10 The arrangements shall be in such a manner so that it is possible to safely
connect or disconnect terminals on live circuits and replace fuse links when the
cabinet is live.
29.11 At least 20 % spare terminals shall be provided on each panel/cubicle/box and
these spare terminals shall be uniformly distributed on all terminals rows.
29.12 There shall be a minimum clearance of 250 mm between the FirsUbottom row of
terminal block and the associated cable gland plate. Also the clearance between
two rows of terminal blocks shall be a minimum of 150 mm.
29.13 The Supplier shall furnish all wire, conduits and terminals for the necessary inter-
phase electrical connection (where applicable) as well as between phases and
common terminal boxes or control cabinets. The wiring required in these items
shall be run in metallic ducts or shielded cables in order to avoid surge over-
voltage either transferred though the equipment or due to transients induced from
the EHV circuits.
29.14 All input and output terminals of each control cubicle shall be tested for surge
withstand capability and transverse modes. The supplier shall also provide all
necessary to achieve an impulse withstand level at the cable interfaces of the
cable interfaces of equipment.
30. LAMPS AND SOCKETS
30.1 LAMPS
All incandescent lamps shall use a socket base as per IS-1258, except in the
case of signal lamps.
30.2 SOCKETS
All sockets (convenience outlets) shall be suitable to accept both 5 A &15 A pin
round Standard Indian plugs. They shall be switched sockets with shutters.
30.3 HAND LAMP
A 240 Volts, single phase, 50 Hz AC plug point shall be provided in the interior of
each cubicle with ON-OFF Switch for connection of hand lamps.
30.4 INTERIOR LIGHTING
Each panel shall be provided with a fluorescent lighting fixture of Standard

Indian type or compact fluorescent tube rates for 240 Volts, single phase,
50 Hz supply for the interior illumination of the panel during maintenance.
The Fitting shall be controlled by the respective panel door switch.
30.5 SWITCHES AND FUSES

30.5.1 Each control panel shall be provided with necessary arrangements for receiving,
distributing, isolating and fusing of DC and AC supplies for various control,
signaling, lighting and space heater circuits. The incoming and sub-circuits shall
be separately provided with switch fuse units. Selection of the main and Sub-
circuit fuse rating shall be such as to ensure selective clearance of sub-circuit
faults. Potential circuits for relaying and metering shall be protected by fuses.
30.5.2 All fuses be of HRC cartridge type conforming to IS:9228 mounted on plug-in
type fuse bases. Miniature circuit breakers with thermal protection and alarm
contacts will also be accepted. AII'accessible live connection to fuse bases shall
be adequately shrouded. Fuses shall have operation indicators for indicating
blown fuse condition. Fuses carrier base shall have imprints of the fuse rating
and voltage.
31. BUSHINGS, HOLLOW COLUMN INSULATORS, SUPPORT INSULATORS:
31.1 Bushing shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS:2099 &IEC: 137
while hollow column insulators shall manufactured and tested in accordance with
IEC 233/18 5621. The support insulators shall be manufactured and tested as
per IS 2544/1EC 168 and IEC 273. The Insulators shall also conform to IEC 815
as applicable.
The bidder may also offer composite silicon insulator, conforming to IEC-11 09.
31.2 Support insulators, bushings and hollow column insulators shall be manufactured
from high quality porcelain. Porcelain used shall be homogeneous, free from
lamination, cavities and other flaws or imperfections that might affect the
mechanical or dielectric quality and shall be thoroughly vilified tough and
impervious to moisture.
31.3 Glazing of the porcelain shall be uniform brown in colour, free from blisters, burrs
and similar other defects.
31.4 Support insulators/bushings/hollow column insulators shall be designed to have

ample insulation ,mechanical and rigidity for the conditions under which they will
be used.
31.5 When operating at rated voltage there shall be no electric discharge between the
conductors and busing which would causes corrosion or injury to conductors,
insulators or supports by the formation of substances produced by chemical
action. No radio interference shall be caused by the insulators/bushings when
operating at the normal rated voltage.
31.6 Bushing porcelain shall be robust and capable of withstanding the internal
pressures likely to occur in service. The design and location of clamps and the
shape and the strength of the porcelain flange securing the bushing to the tank
shall be such that there is no risk of fracture. All portions of the assembled
porcelain enclosures and support other than gaskets, which may in any way be
exposed to the atmosphere shall be composed of completely non hygroscopic
material such as metal as metal or glazed porcelain.
31.7 All iron parts shall be hot dip galvanised and all joints shall be air tight. Surface of
joints shall be trued up porcelain parts by grinding and metal parts by machining.
Insulator/bushing design shall be such as to ensure a uniform compressive
pressure on the joints.
31.8 TESTS
Bushing hollow column insulators and support insulators shall conform to type
tests and shall be subjected to routine tests in accordance with IS:2099 & IS:
2544.
31.9 Technical parameters of bushing/Hollow column insulators/support

insulators:
220 kV 132 kV 66 kV 33 kV
System System System System
a) Rates Volatge (kV) 245 145 72.5 36
b) Inpulse withstand voltage (dry 1050 650 325 170

and wet) (kVp)
c) Power frequency with stand 460 275 140 75

volatge (dry and wet (kV) (rms))
d) Total creepage distance (mm) ----------------25 mm per KV---------------
e) Pollution Class III heavy (as per IEC 71) and

as specified in section 2 for all class of
equipment.
f) Insulator shall also meet requirement of and IEC-815 as applicable

having alternate long and short sheds.
32. MOTORS
Motors shall be "Squirrel Cage" three phase induction motors of sufficient size
capable of satisfactory operation for the application and duty as required for the
driven equipment and conform to type tests and shall be subjected to routine
tests as per applicable standards. The motors shall be of approved make.

32.1 ENCLOSURES
a) Motor to be installed outdoor without enclosure shall have hose proof
enclosure equivalent to IP 55 as per IS:4691. For motors to be installed
indoor Le, inside a box, the motor enclosure, shall be dust proof
equivalent to IP 44 as per IS: 4691.
b) Two independent earthing points shall be provided on opposite sides of
the motor for bolted connection of earthing conductor.
c) Motors shall have drain plugs so located that they will drain water resulting
from condensation or other causes from all pockets in the motor casing.
d) Motor weighing more than 25 kg. shall be provided with eyebolts, lugs or
other means to facilitate lifting.
33. RATING PLATES, NAME PLATES AND LABELS

a) Each main and auxiliary item of equipment is to have permanently
attached to it in a conspicuous position a rating plate of non-corrosive
material upon which is to be engraved manufacturer's name, year of
manufacture, equipment, type or serial number together with details of
loading conditions under which the item of equipment in question has
been designed to opera'te and such diagram plates as may be required by
the Employer. The rating plate shall conform to lEG requirement.
b) All such name plates, instruction plates rating plates etc. shall be in
bilingual with Hindi inscription first followed by English. Alternatively, two
separate plates one with Hindi & the other with English inscription may be
provided.

RADIO INTERFERENCE VOLTAGE (RIV) TEST
1. GENERAL
Unless otherwise stipulated, all equipment together with its associated

connectors, Where applicable, shall be tested for measurement of radio
interference voltage (RIV).
2. TEST LEVELS
The test voltage levels for measurement of external RIV are listed under the
relevant clauses of the specification.
3. TEST METHOD FOR RIV
3.1 RIV tests shall levels for according to measuring as per International Special-
Committee on ratio Interference (CISPR)Publication 16-1 (1993) Part-1. The
measuring circuit shall preferably be tuned to frequency with 10 % of 0.5 MHz but
other frequency being recorded. The results shall be in microvolts.
3.2 Alternatively, RIV tests shall be in accordance with NEMA standard Publication
No.107-1964, except otherwise noted herein.
3.3 In measurement, RIV, temporary additional external shielding may be provided.

In measurements of RIV only standard fitting of identical type supplied with the
equipment and a simulation of the connections as used in the actual installation
will be permitted in the vicinity within 3.5 meters of terminals.
3.4 Ambient noise shall be measured before and after each series of tests to ensure
that there is no ambient noise level. If variation is present, the lowest ambient
noise level will form basis for the measurements. RIV levels shall be measured at
increasing voltages 85%, 100%, 115% and 130% of the specified RIV test
voltage for all equipment unless otherwise specified.
3.5 The metering instruments shall be as per CISPR recommendation or equivalent

device so long as it has been used by other testing authorities.
3.6 The metering instruments shall be as per CISPR recommendation or equivalent

device so long as it has been used by other testing authorities.

LIST OF STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL STANDARDS
INDIAN ELECTRICITY RULES
Colors for Ready Mixed Paints and Enamels

IS-5
IS-335 Insulating Oil for Transformers and 8witchgear
IS-375 Marketing and Arrangement for Bus-bars, Main Connection &

Auxiliary Winding
IS-617 Aluminium and Aluminium alloy & Ingots and Castings for General
Engineering Purposes
IS-1448 Methods of Test for Petroleum and its Products.
IS-2071 Measuring Devices
IS-2147 Degree of Protection Provided by Enclosures of for Low voltage

switch gear and control Gear
IS-2165 Phase-to-Phase Insulation Co-ordination, Principles and Rules
IS-2362 Determination of Water by the Karl fisher Method
IS-3043 Codes of practice for earning
IS-3202 Code of Practice for climate proofing of electrical equipment
IS-3637 Gas Operated Relays
IS-6103 Methods of Test for specific resistance (Resistivity) of Electrical

Insulating Liquids
IS-6104 Method of Test for Interfacial Tension of Oil against Water by the
Ring Method.
IS-6262 Method for Determination of Electric strength of insulating liquids.
IS-6792 Method for Radio interference Tests on High Voltage Insulators
IEC-214 On-Load Tap-Changers

IEC-289 Reactors
IEC-354 Loading Guide for Oil Immersed power transformers.
IEC-551 Determination of Transformer and reactor Sound levels
ANSI-C57, 12, 80 General requirements for Distribution, Power and Regulating

Transformers.
ANSI-C57, 12, 90 Test Code for Distribution, Power and Regulation Transformers.
ANSI-C57, 16 Terminology & Test Code for current limiting Reactors.
ANSI-C57,21 Requirements Terminology and Test Code for Shunt Reactors

Rates over 500 KVA.
ANSI-C57, 92 Guide for loading Oil-Immersed Power Transformer upto and

including 100 MVA with 55oC or 65oC Winding Rise
ANSI-CG, IEEE-4 Standard Techniques for high Voltage Testing
NEMA-TR-1 Transformers, Regulators and Reactors
IS-4379 Identification of the Contents of Industrial Gas Cylinders
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
IEC-56 High Voltage Alternating Currenrt Circuit Breakers IS 13118
IEC-427 Synthetic Testing of high voltage alternating current circuit

breakers
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS AND COUPLING

CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
IS-2705 Current Transformers
IS-3156 Voltage Transformers
IS-7311 Coupling capacitor and capacitor divider
IEC-185 Current transformers

IEC-186A Voltage Transformers
IEC-186B Coupling capacitors and capacitor dividers
IEC-44 Instrument Transformers measurement of Partial discharges
IEC-481 Requirements for instrument transformers
ANSI-C93.1 Requirements for power line carrier coupling capacitor
BUSHING
IS-2099 Bushing for alternating Voltages above 1000V
IEC-137 Insulated Bushings for Alternating voltages above 1000 V
SURGE ARRESTERS
IS-3070 Lightning arrestors for alteranting current systems: Metal (part-3) oxide
lightning arrestors without gaps.
IEC 99-4 Metal oxide urge arresters without gaps
CUBICLES AND PANELS & OTHER RELATED EQUIPMENTS
IS:722 AC Electricity Meters (P1 to P9)
IS 1248 Direct acting indicating anaogne electrical measuring instruments

their accessories.
IS-722, IS-1248, (PO-3) Electrical relays for power system protection.

IS-3231, 3231
IEC-68.2.2 Basic environmental testing proceduresPart 2: Test B: Dry heat
IEC-529 Degree of Protection provided by enclosures
IEC-158 Low Voltage control gear, contractors
IEC-439 Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies
ANSI-C37.20 Switchgear assemblies, incluidng metal enclosed bus.

ANSI-C37.50 Test Procedures for low voltage alternating current power circuit
breakers
ANSI-C39 Electric Measuring instrument.
ANSI-C83 Components for electric equipment
IS:8623 Specification for sugar NEMA-AB-Molded Case circuit and systems
LT SWITCHGEAR
IS:8623 Specification for factory built assemblies of Switchgear & Control gear for
voltages upto and including 1000 V AC/ 1200V DC
IS:4237 General requirements for switchgear and control gear for ves not
exceeding 1000 V.
IS-2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosuers for low voltage switchgear

and control gear.
IS:3202 Conde of practice for climate proofing of electrical equipment.
IS:3072 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of switchgear
IS:8544 AC motor starters of voltage not exceeding 1000 Volts
IS:4064 Air-break switches, air break dis-connctorsm air break dis-connectors

and fuse combination unit for voltages not exceeding 1000V AC or
1200V DC.
IS:3231 Electrical relays for power system protection.
IS:1248 Electricity indicating instruments
IS:722 AC Electricty meters.
IS:375 Marking and arrangements of bus bars.
IS:9224 HRC Cartridge fuses (Part II)
IS:6875 Switches and push-buttons
IS:6005 Code of practice of phosphating iron and steel

IS:5082 Wrought Aluminium and Aluminium alloys for elctrical purposes.
DISCONNECTING SWITCHES
IEC-129 Alternating Current Dis-connectors (Isolators) and Earthing switches
IS-9921 Isolators
IEC-265 High voltage switches
ANSI-C37.32 Schedule of prefered Ratings, manufacturing specification and

application guide of high voltage air swicthes, bus supports and
switch accessories.
ANSI-C37.34 Test code for high voltage air switches
NEMA-SG6 Power switching equipment.
PROTECTION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT
IEC-51 Recommendations for Direct acting indicating analogue electrical

measuring instruments and their accessories.
IEC-255 Electrical relays
IEC-297 Dimensions of mechanical structures of the 482.6mm (19 inches) series.
IEC-359 Expression of the performance of electrical & electronic measuring

equipment.
IEC-387 Symbols for Alternating-Current Electricity meters
IEC-447 Man machibne interface/ MM-Alternating principles
IEC-521 Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating current wall hour meters
IEC-547 Modular plug-in unit and standard 19-inch rack mounting unit based on
NIM standard (for electronic nuclear instruments)
ANSI-81 Screw threads.
ANSI-B18 Bolts and Nuts

ANSI-C37.1 Relays, Station controls etc.
ANSI-C37.2 Manual and automatic station control, supervisory and associated
telemetering equipment.
ANSI-C37.2 Relays and relay system associated with electric power apparatus.
ANSI-C39.1 Requirements for electrical analog indicating instrumnets.
MOTORS
IS-325 Three phase induction motors

IS-4691 Degree of protection provided by enclsoure for rotating
electrical machinery
IEC-34 Rotating electrical machines
IEC-68 (P1 to P5) Environmental testing
IEC-326 (P1 to P2) Printed boards.
MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS
IS-1363 Hexagon headbolts, screws and nuts of product grade C.
IS-1364 Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of products grades A and B
IS-3138 Hexagonal Bolts and nuts (M42 to M150)
IS-898 Fasteners: Bolts, screws and studs
CLAMPS AND CONNECTORS
IS:2121 Fitting for aluminium and steel cored aluminium conductors for
overhead power lines.
IS:731 Porcelain insulators for overheadpower line with a nominal voltage

than 1000 V
IS:2486 Insulator fitting for overhead power lines with a nominal voltage
greater than 1000 V
IEC-120 Dimensions of Ball and socket couplings of string insulator units.
IEC-137 Insulated turning for alternating voltages above 1000 V.
IEC-168 Tests on indoor and outdoor post insulators of glass for system with
nominal voltages greater than 1000 V.
IEC-233 Tests on Hollow insulators for use in electrical equipment.
IEC-273 Characteristics of indoor and outdoor post insulators for systems with
nominal voltage greater than 1000 V.
IEC-305 Insulators for overhead lines with nominal volt above 1000 V-ceramic
or glass mull units for AC system characteristics of string insulator
units of the cap and pin type.
IEC-372 Locking devices for ball and socket couplings of string insulator units
dimensions and tests
IEC-383 Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage above 1000 V.
IEC-433 Characteristics of string insulator units of the long rod type.
IEC-471 Dimensions of Clevis and tongue coupling of string insulator units
ANSI-C29 Wet Process procelain insulators
ANSI-C29.1 Test Methods for electrical power insulators
ANSI-C29.2 For insulators, wet-process procelain and toughened glass suspension

type.
ANSI-C29.8 For wet-process porcelain insulators apparatus, post-type.
ANSI-G.8 Iron and steel hardware
ASTM A-153 Zinc Coatring (Hot-Dip) on iron and steel hardware
STRAIN AND RIGID BUS-CONDUCTOR
IS-2678 Dimensions & tolerances for wrought aluminium and aluminium

alloys.

IS-5082 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bars, Roads, tubes and
sections for electrical purposes.
ASTM-B 230-82 Aluminium 1350 H19 Wire for eletrical purposes
ASTM-B 221-81 Concentric lay stranded, aluminium 1350 conductors
ASTM-B 221 Aluminium Alloy extruded bard, road, wire shape.
ASTM-B 236-83 Aluminium bars for electrical purpose (Bus-bars)
ASTM-B 317-83 Aluminium Alloy extruded bar, rod, pipe and structural shapes for
electrical purposes (Bus Conductors)
BATTERY CHARGERS
IS:3895 Mono-Crystaline Semiconductor Rectifier Cells and stacks
IS:4540 Mono-crystalline semiconductor rectifier assemblies and equipment
IS:6619 Safety code for semiconductor rectifier equipment.
IS:2026 Power Transformer
IS:2959 AC Contractors for voltage not exceeding 1000 Volts
IS:1248 Indicating Instruments
IS:2208 HRC Fuses
IS:4064 Air break switches, air break disconnectors & fuse combination
units for voltage not exceeding 1000V Ac or 1200V DC.
IS:2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage

switchgear and controlgear.
IS:6005 Code of practice for phosphating of Iron and steel.
IS:3231 Electrical relays for power system protection
IS:3842 Electrical relay for AC systems.
IS:5 Colors for ready mix paints.

BATTERY
IS:1651 Stationary Cella and Batteries, Lead-Acid Type (with Tubular

Positive Plates).
IS:1652 Stationary Cella and Batteries, Lead-Acid Type (with Plant Positive
Plates).
IS:1146 Rubber and plastic containers for Lead-Acid Batteries
IS:6071 Synthetic separators for Lead-Acid batteries.
IS:266 Specification for Sulphuric Acid.
IS:1069 Specification of water for storage batteries
IS:3116 Specification for sealing compound for lead-acid batteries
IS:1248 Indicating Instruments
WIRE AND CABLES
IS-694 PVC insulated cables for working voltages upto and including 1100
Volts.
IS-1255 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of power cables

upto and including 33 kV rating.
IS-1554 PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables (part 1) for working
voltage upto and including 1100 V Part (2) for working voltage from
3.3 upto including 11 kV.
IS-1753 Aluminium conductors for insulated cables
IS-2982 Copper conductors in insulated cables and cords.
IS-3961 Recommended current rating for cables.
IS-3975 Mild steel wires, formed wires and tapes for armouring of cables
IS-5831 PVC insulated and sheath of electric cables

IS-6380 Elastomeric insulating and sheath of electric cables.
IS-7098 Cross linked polythylene insulated PVC sheathed cables for

working voltage upto and including 1100 volts.
Part (2) Cross-linked polythyle insulated PVC sheathed cables for

working voltage from 3.3 kV upto and including 33 kV.
IS-8130 Conductors for insulated electrical cables and flexible cords.
IS-10418 Specification for drums for electrical cables.
IEC-96 Radio Frequency cables
IEC-183 Guide to the selection of High Voltage Cables.
IEC-189 Low frequency cables and wires with PVC insulation and PVC
Sheath
IEC-227 Polyvinyl Chloride insulated cables of rated voltages upto and

including 450/750 V.
IEC-228 Conductors of insulated cables.
IEC-230 Implulse tests on cables and their accessories.
IEC-287 Calculation of the continuous current rating of cables (100% load

factor).
IEC-304 Standard colors for insulation for low frequency cables and wires.
IEC-331 Fire resisting characteristics of Electric cables.IEC-332
IEC-332 Tests on electric cables under fire conditions
IEC-502 Extruded solid dielectric insulated power cable for rates voltages
from 1 kV upto 30 kV.
IEC-754 Tests on gases evolved during combustion of eledtric cables.
NEMA-WC1 Asbestos and asbestos-varnished cloth and asbestos-

thermoplastic insulated wire and cable
NEMA-WC2 Steel armour and associated covering for impregnated paper

insulated cables

NEMA-WC3 Rubber insulated wire and cable for transmission and distribution of
electrical energy.
NEMA-WC5 Thermoplastic insulated wire and cable for the transmission and
distribution of electric energy.
NEMA-WC7 Cross linked thermo setting polyethylene insulated wire and cable
for the transmission and distribution of electrical energy.
NEMA-WC8 Ethylene-propylene-rubber insulated wire and cable for the

transmission and distribution of electrical energy.
NEMA-W67 Cross linked thermo setting polyethyle
IS-659 Safety code for air conditioning
IS-1391 Room air conditioners.
IS-6272 Industrial cooling fans.
GALVANIZING
IS-209 Zinc Ingot.
IS-2629 Recommended practice for Hot-Dip galvanizing on iron and steel.
IS-2629 Methods for testing uniformity of coating of zinc coating articles.
ASTM-a-123 Specification for zinc (Hot galvanizing) coatings on prodicts

fabricated from rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates,
bars and strips.
ASTM-A-153 Speciufication for Zinc coating (Hot Dip) on iron and steel hardware
ASTM-A-239 Test method for locating the thinnest. Spot in a Zinc (galvanised)
coating on iron and steel articles by the preece test (Copper
sulfated dip).
FIRE PROTECTION
IS-554 Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure tight joints are
required on the threads.

IS-638 Sheet rubber jointing and rubber insertion jointing.
IS-778 Copper alloy gate, globe and check values for water works
purposes.
IS-780 Sluice valves for water-works purposes(50 to 300 mm size)
IS-1536 Centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for water gas and
sewage.
IS-1538(1993) Cast iron fitting for pressure pipes for water gas and sewage.
IS-1703(1989) Copper aloy bar values (horizontal plunger type) for water supply
fittings.
IS-2379(1990) Colour code for identification of pipe lines.
IS-2643 (P1 to Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes.
P3 : 1990)
IS-2685(1992) Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of
sluice valves.
IS-2906(1990) Specification for sluice valves for water works purposes (350 to
1200 mm size)
IS-3589(1991) Seamers or eclectically welded steel pipes for water, gas and
sewage (168.3 to 2032 mm outside diameter).
IS-4038(1990) Foot valves for water works purposes
IS-4927(1991) Unlined flax canvas hose for fire fighting.
IS-5321-(P1 and Swing check type reflux (non-return) valves

P2 1991) -
13095 (1991) Butterfly valves for general purposes
STEEL STRUCTURES
IS-228 Method of chemical analysis of pig iron, cast iron and plain carbon
and low alloy steels.
IS-802 Code of practice for use of structural steel in overhead

transmission line towers.
IS-806 Code of practice for use of steel tubes in general building

construction.
IS-808 Dimensions for hot rolled steel beam column channel and angle
sections.
IS-814 Covered electrodes for manual arc welding of carbon manganese

steel
IS-816 Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for general
construction in mild steel.
IS-817 Code of practice for training and testing of metal arc welders. Part
1 : Manual metal arc welding
IS-875 Code of practice for design loads (other than earthquake) for
buildings and structures.
IS-1161 Steel tube for structural purposes.
IS-1182 Recommended practice for radiographic examination of fusion

welded but joints in steel plates.
IS-1363 Hexagonal head bolts, screws and nuts of products grade C.
IS-1364 Hexagon head bolts, screw & nuts of products grade A and B.
IS-1367 Technical supply condition for threaded steel fasteners
IS-1599 Method for bend test.
IS-1608 Method for tensile testing of steel products.
IS-1893 Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures
IS-1978 Line pipe
IS-2062 Steel for general structural purposes
IS-2595 Code of practice for Radiographic testing
IS-3063 Single built rectangular section spring washers for bolts, nuts and
screws.
IS-3664 Code of practice for ultra sonic pulse echo testing by contact and
immersion methods.
IS-7205 Safety code for erection of structural steel work.

IS-9595 Recommendations for metal arc welding of iron and carbon
managese steels.
ANSI-B18.2.1 Inch series square and Hexagonal bolts and screws.
ANSI-B18.2.2 Square and hexagonal nuts
ANSI-G8.14 Round head bolts
OTHER CIVIL WORKS STANDARDS
IS-269 33 grade ordinary portland cement
IS-2721 Galvanized steel chain link fence fabric.
IS-278 Galvanized steel barbed wire for fencing
IS-383 Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete.
IS-432 Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-dawn steel wire
for concrete reinforcement
IS-456 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
IS-516 Method of test for strngth of concrete
IS-800 Code of practice for general construction in steel
IS-806 Steel tubes for structural purposes
IS-1172 Basic requirements for water supply, drainage and sanitation
IS-1199 Method of sampling and analysis of concrete
IS-1566 Hard-dawn steel wire fabricated concrete reinforcement
IS-1742 Building drainage
IS-1785 Plain hard-drawn steel wire for pre stressed concrete
IS-1786 High strength deformed and wires for concrete reinforcement

IS-1811 Method of sampling Foundry sands.
IS-1893 Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures.
IS-2062 Steel for general structural purposes
IS-2065 Code of practice for water supply in buildings
IS-2090 High tension steel bars used in prestressed concrete
IS-2140 Standard galvanised steel wire for fencing
IS-2470 Code of practice for installation of septic tanks
IS-2514 Concrete vibrating tables
IS-2645 Integral cement waterproofing compounds
IS-3025 Method of sampling and test physical chemical for water waste
water.
IS-4091 Code of practice for design and construction of foundations for

transmission line tower and poles
IS-4111 Code of practice for ancillary structure in sewerage system
IS-4990 Plywood for concrete shuttering work
IS-5600 Seweage and drainage pimps

SECTION-3
CHAPTER-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR
100 MVA, 220/132 kV AUTO TRANSFORMER
1.00 SCOPE:
a) This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly testing at
manufacturers works before despatch, supply and delivery at site as per
schedule of Requirement of 100 MVA, 220/132 kV AUTO TRANSFORMER.
b) All drawings, schedules and annexures appended to this specification
shall form part of the specification and supplement the requirements specified.
The equipment/materials offered by the Bidder shall be complete in all respects
and, whether called for specifically or not, all accessories, hardware and services
required for normal satisfactory operation of the system shall be deemed to be
included in unit rates quoted. Design and manufacture shall also be such that
equipment/ accessories of the same type and rating would be interchangeable.
Specific reference in this specification and documents to any material by trade
name, make or catalogue number shall be construed as establishing standard of
quality and performance and not as limiting competition. All equipment/
accessories offered shall also be of proven design and manufacture. The make
of all accessories and hardware shall be subject to employers approval.
2.00 CODES & STANDARDS:
All standards, specifications and codes of practice referred to herein shall be the latest
editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions as on date of opening
of bid.
IS:5 Colour for ready mix paints.
IS:325 Three phase induction motors.
IS:335 New insulating oils for transformer.
BS:148/IEC:296
IS:375 Marking & arrangement of Switch-gear Bus-bars main connections and
auxiliary wiring.
IS:1866 Code of practice for maintenance of insulation oil
IS:2026 Specification for Power Transformers.
&IEC:76
IS:2099 Bushing for alternating voltages above 1000 volts
& 3347
switchgear & control gear.
IS:2705 Current transformer
IS:3637 Gas operated relay.
IS:3639 Fittings and accessories for Power Transformers.
IS:6600 Guide for loading of oil immersed transformers.
&IEC-354
IS:8468 On load tap changer.

&IEC:214
IS:5561 Electricity power connectors.
IS:617 Aluminium Alloy grade.
IS:2629 Recommended practice for hot-dip Galvanising.
IS:8478 On load tap changer application guide.
IS:8603 : Dimensions for porcelain transformer bushings for use in heavily polluted
atmosphere (36 kV Class). Dimensions for oil filled porcelain transformer
bushings for use in medium polluted atmosphere.
IS:9434 Guide for sampling and analysis of free and dissolved gas in oil filled
equipment.
IS:10028 Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of
transformers.
IS:12676 Dimensions for OIP insulated condenser bushings.
CBIP Manual on transformer.
Equipment complying with other internationally accepted standards would also be
considered if these ensure performance and constructional features equivalent or
superior to standards listed above. In such a case the Bidder shall clearly indicate the
standards adopted, furnish a copy in English of the latest revision of standard alongwith
copies of all official amendments and revisions in force as on date of opening of bid and
clearly bring out the salient features for comparison.
3.00 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:
The transformers are required to operate satisfactorily under the following site
conditions:
3.1 Max. temperature 50 C
3.2 Min. temperature -2.5 C
3.3 Max. relative humidity 100%
3.4 Min. relative humidity 26 %
3.5 Average number of rainy days per annum Nearly120 days
3.6 Average annual rain fall 900mm
3.7 Average number of dust storm days per annum. 35
3.8 Isoceraunic level 45
3.9 Max. Wind pressures 195 kg/sqmt.
3.10 Altitude above mean sea level Less than 1000 mt.
4.00 TYPE AND RATING:
4.1 The transformer shall be of 3 phase oil immersed core type with
ONAN/ONAF/OFAF cooling suitable for outdoor service as step down
transformer. The transformer shall not be provided with the tertiary delta winding.
4.2 The ratings and other characteristics which are not covered elsewhere
shall be, as detailed in following clauses:
4.2.1 Max. Continuous capacity:
a) ONAN 50 MVA
b) ONAF 75 MVA
c) OFAF 100 MVA
4.2.2 Number of phases 3
4.2.3 Frequency 50 Hz (5%)
4.2.4 Rated Voltage:
a) HV side 220 kV
b) LV side 132 kV
4.2.5 Connections:
a) HV side Star auto with neutral solidly earthed
b) LV side
4.2.6 Vector group YaO
4.2.7 %age Impedance 12.5% at 100MVA base
4.2.8 Tapping On load tappings for variation -
5% to +15% in steps of 1.25%
each on 132 kV side
4.2.9 HV LV Neutral
a) Insulation level 220 kV 132 kV 33 kV
i) Lightning impulse voltage 950 kV 550 kV 170 kV
ii) Power frequency withstand voltage 395 kV 230 kV 70 kV

(rms) (rms) (rms)
b) Insulation level of Bushings
i) Lightning impulse voltage 1050 650 kV 170 kV
ii) Power frequency voltage 460 275 kV 70 kV
(rms) (rms) (rms)
4.2.10 Creepage:
a) Total 25mm per kV corresponding to
highest system voltage i.e. 245
kV, 145 kV and 36 kV.
b) Protected 50% of the total creepage
distance
5.00 GENERAL DESIGN OF TRANSFORMER:
5.1 The transformer and accessories shall be so designed as to facilitate
inspection, cleaning and repairs. The requirement of Indian Electricity Rules
shall be kept in view.
5.2 The design shall ensure satisfactory operation under severe working
conditions due to fluctuating load of steel furnaces and voltage variations in the
system including those, due to short circuits. The transformer shall be designed
as to minimize the risk of accidental short circuits caused by animals, birds or
vermins.
The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the
safety of all those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the equipment
keeping in view the requirements of Indian Electricity Rules.
5.3 All material used shall be of the best quality and of class most suitable for
working under specified conditions and shall withstand the atmospheric
conditions and temperature variations without undue deterioration or distortion or
setting up of undue stress in any part thereof.
5.4 Cast iron shall not be used for any parts other than the radiator valve bodies.
5.5 Corresponding parts liable to replace shall be interchangeable.
5.6 All taper pins to be used in the mechanism shall be split types as per latest
edition of IS: 2393.
5.7 All mechanism should be rust and corrosion proof. Means shall be provided for
lubrication of moving parts not immersed in oil.
5.8 The construction shall be such as to avoid air or water pockets. Special care
shall be exercised to reduce noise and vibration to the minimum level.
5.9 Steel bolts of suitable finish will be used for diameters above 6mm. Brass bolts
or studs used for electrical connections shall not be of less than 6mm diameter.
On outdoor equipment, all bolts, nuts & washers in contact with current carrying
non-ferrous parts shall be phosphor bronze.
5.10 All nuts, bolts and pins shall be locked except those, which are external to the
transformer. If bolts and nuts are so placed as to be inaccessible by means of
ordinary spanners, the contractor shall provide suitable special spanners.
5.11 Labels shall be provided for all apparatus like relays, switches, fuses, etc.
housed in any cubicle or marshalling kiosks. These shall be of incredible material
with matt/satin finish and permanent lettering. Labels mounted on black surface
shall have white letters and danger notices shall have red lettering on a white
background. The labels shall be secured by means of brass screws or rust
protected steel screws.
5.12 Surface in contact with oil shall not be galvanized or cadmium plated.
5.13 Before painting, all un-galvanised parts shall be cleaned, made free from rust,
scale and grease and external rough surfaces smoothened (filled with metal
deposition). The interior of the tank and other oil filled chambers shall be cleaned
by shot blasting or any other suitable method.
5.14 All external surfaces shall be given three coats of paints except for nuts, bolts
and washers which may be given one coat after assembling of transformer at
works. The final coat shall be a glossy oil and weather proof, non-fading paint of
shade 631 of IS: 5
5.15 The interior of mechanism chambers and kiosks shall be given 3 coats of paint,
the final coat being of a light coloured anti-condensation mixture.
5.16 The outer most radial spacers of the winding shall be locked in position by means
of vertical strips so that the same cannot fall off/get displaced.
5.17 The manufacturers must ensure proper & complete tightening of the nuts of the
coil clamping bolts. The nuts of all the coil clamping bolts will be tightened to
designed value & the job be carried out with torque spanners.
The devices used for locking the nuts of coil clamping bolts must be of such a
quality and such care should be taken first in tightening. The nuts and next in
locking them in position that the arrangement does not become loose due to
stresses caused by short circuits and fluctuating loads etc.
5.18 The noise level shall not be more than 80 db.
5.19 The transformers shall be designed to have short circuit rating of five
seconds as per IS: 2026. The thermal ability to withstand short circuit shall be
judged by calculation to be supplied above in the tender. The dynamic ability to
with stand short circuit shall be demonstrated by test and their calculation will
also be supplied with drawings.
5.20 Foundation bolts and nuts shall be supplied alongwith the transformer (Preferably
at the time of call for inspection) so that transformer plinth is ready by the time
transformer is received by the consignee.
6.00 INSULATING OIL:
Sufficient insulating oil of Napthenic type (made from Napthenic crude) in which
paraffinic content should be less than 50% and aromatic content 4 to 12%
conforming to BS: 148/IEC: 296 class-1 shall be supplied for first filling of
eachtransformer. Particular attention shall be paid to deliver the oil at site free
from moisture and of uniform quality through out in non-returnable steels drums.
The quantity of oil for first filling of each transformer shall be stated in tender
along-with trade mark of the oil to be supplied. Use of inhibitors in oil shall not be
resorted to. 10% extra oil of the total quantity of oil shall be supplied along with
the transformer.
7.00 LIMIT OF TEMPERATURE RISE
7.1 With the above climatic conditions, given in clause-3 each transformer
shall be capable of operating continuously on any tap at their normal rating
without exceeding following temperature rises:
i) 50o C in oil by thermometer.
ii) 55o C in winding by resistance.
iii) Temperature of hot spot in winding not to exceed 98oC when calculated
over max. annual weighted average temperature of 32o C.
7.2 The limits of temperature rise mentioned above will have to be satisfied by the
manufacturer by carrying out the heat run test at the lowest negative tap. This
test shall be carried out by feeding 1.1 times the total losses at 75o C at highest
current tap.
7.3 OVERLOAD CAPACITY & CONTINUOUS RATING.
The safe over load capacity of the transformer and the duration of overload under
maximum temperature conditions without any damage to the winding or harmful
effects on the insulation shall be clearly stated in the tender which must be as per
IEC-354/IS: 6600, guide for loading of oil immersed transformer.
8.00 IMPEDANCE:
The transformer shall have 12.5% impedance on 100 MVA base with tolerance as per
IS: 2026/Part-1 (1983). Impedance shall include positive and zero sequence and shall
be expressed in terms of the branches of the star connected equivalent diagram, all on
the same KVA base and range shall be given for each branch of the equivalent circuit in
turn. Percentage tolerance allowed at extreme tap should be as applicable to normal tap.
9.00 FREQUENCY:
The transformer shall be suitable for continuous operation with a +/- 5% frequency
variation from a normal of 50 Hz without exceeding the temperature rise as specified in
Clause 7.1 above.
10.0 FLUX DENSITY, CORE CONSTRUCTION AND INSPECTION
10.1 The transformer should be so designed that the working flux density should
not exceed1.60 Tesla at normal voltage, frequency.
10.2 Tenders with higher flux density than specified limit shall not be considered.
10.3 The core shall be built up with thin laminations of high grade. non-ageing, low
loss, high permeability cold rolled super grain oriented silicon steel. Known as
MOH High B Grade or superior grade CRGO steels of maximum 0.27 mm or
low lamination thickness especially suitable for transformer core.
10.4(a) (i)Bidder should have in house core cutting facility for proper monitoring & control
on quality and also to avoid any possibility of mixing of prime material with
defective/second grade material. The purchaser may witness the core-cutting
operation. In case the in house core cutting facility for core cutting is not
available then the same shall be carried out in the presence of the representative
of HVPN.
(ii)Inspection call notice for the purpose should be accompanied with the
following documents as applicable as a proof toward use of Prime core
materials:-
a) Invoice of supplier.
b) Mills test certificates.
c) Packing list.
d) Bill of loading.
e) Bill of entry certificates by customs.
Core material shall be directly procured either from the manufacturer or

through their accredited marketing organisation of repute and not through any
agent.
10.4(b) After being sheared, the laminations shall be treated to remove all burrs. They
shall be coated with a baked enamel insulation coating. The insulation shall be
inert to the action of hot transformer oil and shall be perfectly adhesive. Paper
and varnish insulation shall not be accepted. Particulars of proposed
insulation shall be stated in the tender. Laminations shall be checked for burrs
during stage inspection.
10.5 The core shall be rigidly clamped and/or bolted to ensure adequate mechanical
strength and to prevent vibrations during operation. The bolts used in the
assembly of the core shall be suitably insulated and the clamping structure shall
be constructed that the eddy currents will be minimum.
10.6 Construction of the core shall be such that number of steps in the limb and
yoke shall be matching and dimensionally identical to minimize the effect of
cross fluxing and better mechanical strength.
10.7 The core shall be provided with Lugs suitable for lifting the complete core and
coil assembly of transformer. The Core & coil shall be fixed in the tank such
that its shifting will not occur when the transformer is moved or when a short
circuit occurs.
10.8 The design of magnetic circuit shall be such as to avoid static discharge
development of short circuit paths within itself or to the earthing clamping
structure and the production of flux components at right angles to the
plane of the lamination which may cause local heating.
10.9 Every care shall be exercised in the selection treatment and handling of core
steel to ensure that the laminations are flat and that finally assembled core is
free from distortions.
10.10 The supporting frame work of the core shall be so designed as to avoid the
presence of pockets which would prevent complete emptying of the tank
through the drain valve or cause trapping of air during filling.
10.11 Oil ducts where necessary should be formed across the plane of the
lamination and be given a suitable slope to assist oil circulation. The overall
design of core and winding should be such that free flow of oil is not
obstructed.
10.12 The frame work and clamping arrangement shall be earthed by connecting to the
tank body through a copper strip. Yoke bolt area should be compensated if bolts
are used for fastening of the core.
10.13 The insulation of core to bolts and core to clamp plates shall be able to
withstand a voltage of 2 KV RMS for one minute.
10.14 Core and windings shall be capable of withstanding shocks during transport,
installation, service and adequate provision shall be made to prevent
movement of core and winding relative to tank during these conditions.
10.15 All steel sections used for supporting the core shall be thoroughly sand blasted
after cutting drilling and welding.
10.16 All the CRGO vendors having BIS certification and approval from PGCIL shall be
considered.
10.17 The tenderers should indicate the maximum flux density allowable continuously
as well as for time intervals of 1 minute and 5 seconds and the limit of flux density
at which core material used by them saturates.
10.18 The name of the core material must be mentioned in the tender. The
successful tenderer shall be required to furnish magnetization curves of the
core material/design calculations and such other data/documents deemed fit
by the Purchaser for being satisfied that flux density is as desired.
10.19 Purchaser shall inspect the built-up core for verification of flux density for which
all facilities shall be provided. The purchaser shall inspect/test the core material
for various tests as per relevant IEC/IS to ensure quality. Core may also be
inspected during horizontal assembly, built-up assembly.
NOTES :
i) The above flux density has been specified to meet with the over fluxing of the
core due to temporary over voltage of the order of 31% for l min, 44% for 5
seconds that may appear abnormal conditions such as those following sudden
loss of large loads.
ii) Yoke bolt area and flitch plate areas shall not be counted in the net core area
if these are provided for fastening core.
iii) The design of limb and yoke shall be so co-ordinate that there is no cross fluxing
at the joints.
iv) The tenderer shall ensure that the CRGO supplier should have BIS certification.
11.00 SUPPRESSION OF HARMONICS:

The transformer shall be so designed as to suppress the harmonics voltage specially the
3rd & 5th, to eliminate wave form distortion and interference with communication circuits
due to high frequency disturbances. Limiting percentage of harmonics at normal voltage
and at maximum system voltage shall be stated in the tender.
The transformer shall be so designed as to withstand thermal and electro-magnetic
stress under severe short-circuits where the fault level on 220 kV and 132 KV bus are of
the order of 20,000 and 10,000 MVA respectively.
12.00 WINDING:
12.1 The 220/132 kV windings shall have graded insulation whereas the
neutral points shall be insulated as amended in IS: 2026.
12.2 The transformers shall be capable of operation without danger on any particular
tapping at the rated KVA when the voltage may vary by 10% of the voltage
corresponding to the tapping.
12.3 The windings and connections as well as the insulating material shall not soften
ooz, shrink or collapse during service.
12.4 No strip conductor wound on edge shall have a width exceeding six times its
thickness. The conductors shall be transposed at sufficient intervals to minimize
eddy currents and equalize the current and temperature distribution along the
windings.
12.5 The windings and connections shall be properly brazed to withstand shocks
during transportation or transient conditions during service.
12.6 Adequate pre-shrinkage of the coil assembly using pre-compressed press board
material having low moisture content for the radial spacer blocks shall be
ensured by the manufacturers so that there is no displacement of the radial
spacer blocks due to frequent short circuits on the transformers.
12.7 All windings after being wound and all fibrous hygroscopic materials used in the
construction of the transformer shall be dried under vacuum and impregnated
with hot oil.
In addition to this the drying process be sufficiently extended for proper
stabilization of the coil assembly. More than one cycle of soaking in oil followed
by retightening of the coil assembly should be adopted.
12.8 The coil clamping rings wherever used shall preferably be of flat insulated steel
laminations. Axial laminated material except bakelised paper shall not be used.

12.9
The clamping arrangement shall exert equal pressure on all columns of spacers
of the transformer windings built of sections or disc-coils separated by spacers.
In no case, spiral winding will be used either for HV or LV windings.
12.10 The radial spacer blocks must be made of pre-compressed pressboard
material, which will not soften while in contact with oil or fray out into fibers or
edges. The slots should be so dimensioned that the blocks will not come out of
the slots.
Uniform distribution of coil clamping force shall be designed by using an
adequately large number of coil clamping bolts and by transferring the clamping
force from clamping bolts to the clamping plates through intermediate members
which can spread the clamping force over a large area.
12.11 All joints shall be brazed/crimped considering the vibrations due to short circuits
and load fluctuations.
13.00 CURRENT DENSITY:
The employer shall be at liberty to inspect built-up winding for its quality, weight
of copper, insulation and overall weight of coil assembly. The size of conductor
used for different windings shall also be checked during stage inspection to
check the current density. The transformer shall be so designed that the current
density of all the windings and the regulating winding at the lowest tap should not
exceed 250 A/cm.Sq.
14.1 TANK CONSTRUCTION
14.1.1 The tank shall be fabricated of a suitable grade steel and strong enough to allow
the lifting of complete transformer with oil by means of a crane or jacks and
transported to site without over-straining the joints etc.
14.1.2 The main tank body shall be capable of withstanding a vacuum of 100.64 kN/m2
(760mm of Hg.)
14.1.3 The base shall be so designed as to allow the transformer to be moved by
skidding without any injury.
14.1.4 All channeled constructions and stiffeners shall be designed to avoid retention of
water.
14.1.5 The transformer shall preferably be of bell type tank with the joint 500 mm above
the bottom of tank.
14.1.6 The tank construction shall be free of air pockets. Where such pockets cannot be
avoided, vent pipes of 15 mm internal diameter shall be provided to vent gases
into the main expansion pipes. In case of short branch pipes, however, minimum
diameter may be taken as 6mm.
14.1.7 All joints other than those, which may have to be broken, shall be welded. When
required they shall be double welded. All bolted joints to the tank shall be fitted
with suitable oil tight gaskets, which shall give satisfactory service under the
operating conditions and guaranteed temperature rise conditions. Special
attention shall be given to the methods of making hot oil tight joints between the
tank and the cover and also, between the cover and the bushings and all other
out-lets to ensure that the joints can be remade satisfactorily at site and with
ease by semi-skilled labour.
14.1.8 Suitable lifting lugs for lifting the transformer filled with oil shall be provided on
the tank.
14.1.9 Four jacking lugs shall be provided to enable the transformer complete with oil to
be lifted or lowered by means of jacks. The lugs shall be fitted at a minimum
height (excluding under base if detachable) of 300mm for transformer upto 10
tons weight and of 500mm for transformer above 10 tons weights.
14.1.10 The transformer shall be provided with detachable steel flanged wheels of
380mm diameter and suitable for moving transformer complete with oil. These
shall be suitable for 2 rails of 1676 mm gauge alongwith longer axis and 2 rails of
3353 mm alongwith shorter axis.
14.2 TANK COVER
142.1 The tank cover shall be of bolted type and of adequate strength so as not to
distort, when lifted. Suitable inspection cover shall be provided with lifting
arrangements to give access to bushings, winding connections or testing the
earth connections. The weight of each inspection cover shall not exceed 25 Kg.
14.2.2 Pockets shall be provided in the position of Max. oil temperature at CMR for
fitting a thermometer and for bolts of oil and winding temperature indicators. The
thermometer pockets shall be fitted with a captive screwed cap to prevent
ingress of water.
14.2.3 Suitable No. of jacking bolts shall be provided on tank cover, inspection
covers/windows including OLTC.
14.3 CONSERVATOR TANK, OIL GAUGE AND BREATHER
14.3.1 An adequate conservator tank of air cell type complete with sump and drain
valves shall be provided in such a position as not to obstruct the electrical
connections to the transformer.
14.3.2 If the sump is formed by extending the feed pipe inside the conservator, this
extension shall be atleast 25mm.
14.3.3 One end of the conservator shall be bolted type to facilitate cleaning.
14.3.4 The conservator shall be provided with a magnetic oil level gauge.
14.3.5 The oil connections from the transformer tank to the conservator shall be at rising
angle of 3 to 9 degrees to the horizontal upto Buchholz relay. The inside
diameter of the pipe shall be 80mm. The Buchholz relay will have suitable valves
on its both side so as to facilitate its testing at site as well as cut off oil supply to
the transformer.
14.3.6 The conservator shall be provided with oil preservation system, which may not
allow direct contact of atmospheric air with oil during operation, in addition to
silicagel-breather.
14.4 VALVES:
14.4.1 The transformers shall be provided with 2 No. filter valve each of 50 mm size one
mounted close to the top of the main tank & the other close to bottom of the tank
oil circulation and one drain valve of 80mm size with plug. The conservator shall
have drain plug of 25mm size.
14.4.2 Two robust sampling valves with spouts suitable for taking samples of top, and
bottom oil. The top sampling valves shall be brought down by internal pipe
connections. Suitable name plates shall be affixed to the sampling valves. The
sampling device shall not be fitted on the filter valve.
14.4.3 Two air release plug of 15mm shall be provided.
14.4.4 Plugs shall be supplied for all valves opening to atmosphere.
14.4.5 All valves shall be of gun metal and comply with the latest edition of IS:3639.
14.5 PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES:
A suitable pressure relief device shall be provided for rapid release of any pressure in
transformer which may endanger the equipment. The device (s) shall operate at static
pressure less than hydraulic test pressure for transformer tank of OLTC chamber. If
the device is mounted on tank cover, it shall be fitted with a skirt projecting 25mm
inside the tank and of such construction as to avoid gas accumulation.
In addition to pressure relief device(s) the provision of explosion vent should also be
made and the diaphragm shall be situated above max. oil level or second PRD on the
opposite side of first PRD be provided.
14.6 EARTHING TERMINALS:
Two earthing pads suitable for connecting 50x8mm mild steel flat shall be provided at
positions close to the two diagonally opposite bottom corners of tank. These grounding
terminals shall be suitable for bolted connection. Two earthing terminals shall also be
provided each on marshalling box and any other equipment mounted separately. The
earthing terminal should be suitable of carrying full low voltage short circuit current of
transformer for 4 seconds.
14.7 JOINTS AND GASKETS: -
All gaskets used for making oil tight joints shall be of granulated cork bonded with
synthetic rubber. Metal tops shall be provided for preventing over compression
wherever compressible gaskets are provided.
14.8 RATING AND DIAGRAM PLATES:
14.8.1 Each transformer shall carry a diagram plate showing internal connections, voltage
vector relationship of different windings, plan view of the transformer showing
physical relationship of the terminals and no load voltage and corresponding
current for each tap.
14.8.2.1 Each transformer shall be provided with a rating plate data as specified in IS: 2026
or equivalent international standard.
14.8.3 The transformer shall carry a valve schedule plate shorting the location and
function of all values and air release cock on plugs. This plate shall warn
operators to refer to the maintenance instructions before applying the vacuum
treatment for drying.
14.8.4 I.R. values along-with oil temperature at the time of testing at manufacturer's
works shall be indicated on rating plate or separate plate, to be provided on
transformer.
14.9 THERMOSYPHON FILTER ARRANGEMENT

Thermosyphon filter arrangement shall be provided on the transformer for
preserving the quality of Transformer Oil. The filter assembly shall be mounted
on the Transformer as well as ground supported and connected with pipes and
shut off valves. Suitable instructions required to be followed for commissioning,
dismantlement & maintenance of the filter arrangement, re-generation and
storage of the adsorbent etc. must be included in the instruction manual. A
detailed drawing showing internal arrangement shall also be required to be
submitted. Suitable capacity pump (alongwith motor) shall also be provided to
boost circulation of oil. The pump and motor should not be in main pipe line. It
should be in bypass pipe line having suitable valve to isolate from main pipe line.
The main pipe line should have two shut off valves at the bottom.
NOTE: - The pump and motor should be weather proof (Flow well Type).
The oil & absorbent capacity required in the Thermosyphon Filter is as under: -
(i) Quantity of oil 2.0% of total oil by weight.

(ii) Quantity of absorbent 1.25% of total oil by weight.
15.0 NITROGEN INJECTION FIRE PROTECTION CUM EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM

FOR 100 MVA TRANSFORMER
The contractor shall provide the nitrogen injection fire protection cum
extinguishing system. The fire protection system using nitrogen as fire quenching
medium is required for the 100 MVA 220/132 kV T/F NIFPES shall act as fire
preventer by preventing transformer oil tank explosion and possible fire in case of
internal faults. In the event of fire by external causes such as bushing fire, OLTC
fires, fire from surrounding equipment etc, it shall act as a fast and effective fire
fighter. NIFPES shall accomplish its role as fire preventer and extinguisher
without employing water and/or carbon dioxide. Fire shall be put out within max.
3 minutes of system activation and within max. 30 seconds of commencement of
nitrogen injection.
15.1 Activation of NIFPES

Mal-functioning of fire prevention/extinguishing systems is their major shortcoming
which leads to interruption in power supply. The contractor shall ensure that the chances
of malfunctioning of NIFPES are practically nil. To achieve this objective, the contractor
shall work out his scheme of activating signals which, while preventing mal-operation,
should not be too rigorous to make the operation of NIFPES impracticable in case of
actual need. Transformer isolation shall be the mandatory pre-requisite for activation of
the system in automatic mode or remote mode in the control room. In addition, at least
following electrical-signals shall be provided in series for activating NIFPES.
15.1.1 Auto Mode

a) For prevention of fire:
i) Differential relay operation
ii) Buchholz relay paralleled with pressure relief valve
iii) Tripping of all connected breakers is a pre-requisite for initiation of system
activation.
b) For extinguishing fire:

i) Fire detector
activation.
15.1.2 Manual Mode (Local/Remote): Tripping of all connected breakers is

pre- requisite for initiation of system
activation.
15.1.3 Manual Mode (Mechanical) : Tripping of all connected breakers is

a
activation.
15.2 General description of NIFPES
15.2.1 Schematic of the system
NIFPES should be a stand alone dedicated system for oil filled transformer. It should have a fire
extinguishing (F.E.) cubicle placed on a plinth at a distance of 6-10 mtrs. from the transformer.
The F.E. cubicle may be connected to the transformer oil tank (near its top) and to the oil pit (of
capacity approx. equal to 10% of transformer oil tank) from its bottom through oil pipes with gate
valves. The F.E. cubicle should house a pressurised nitrogen cylinder connected to the
transformer oil tank (near its bottom). Cable connections are to be provided from signal box
placed on the transformer to the control box in the control room and from control box to F.E.
cubicle. Fire detectors placed at the top of transformer are to be connected in parallel to the signal
box. The signal box may be connected to a pre-stressed non-return valve fitted between the
conservator tank and Buchholz relay. Control box is also to be connected to relay panel in control
room for system activation signals.
15.2.2 Operation
On receipt of all activating signals, drain of pre-determined quantity of oil commences
thus removing high temp. top oil layer. Simultaneously nitrogen is injected under high
pressure at a pre-fixed rate, stirring the oil thus bringing the temperature of top oil layer
down. Nitrogen occupies the space created by oil drained out and acts as an insulating
layer between the tank oil and fire on top cover. Pre-stressed non-return valve blocks oil
flow from conservator tank, thus isolating it & preventing aggravation of fire.
15.2.3 System components
Broadly, NIFPES shall consist of the following components. It is emphasized that

all components, irrespective of their exclusion in the details given below, necessary for
fast reliable and effective working of NIFPES shall be considered within the scope of
supply.
15.2.4 Fire Extinguishing cubicle
it shall be made of 3 mm thick steel sheet, painted dark red from inside and outside with
hinged split doors fitted with high quality tamper proof lock. It shall be complete with the
base frame and the following:-
Nitrogen gas cylinder with regulator and falling pressure electrical contact
manometer.
Oil drain pipe with mechanical quick drain valve.
Electro mechanical control equipment for oil drain and pre-determined regulated
nitrogen release.
Pressure monitoring switch for back-up protection for nitrogen release.
Limit switches for monitoring of the system.
Flanges on top panel for connecting oil drain and nitrogen injection pipes for
transformer.
Panel lighting (CFL type)
Oil drain pipe extension of suitable sizes for connecting pipes to oil pit.
15.2.5 Control box
Control box for monitoring system operation, automatic control and remote operation,
with following alarms indication, light switches, push buttons, audio signal, line fault
detection suitable for tripping and signaling on 110V DC/220V DC supply.
System on*
PNRV open*
Oil drain valve closed*
Gas inlet valve closed*
PNRV closed^
Fire detector trip^
Buchholz relay trip^
Oil drain valve open^
Extinction in progress^
Cylinder pressure low^
Differential relay trip^
PRV operated^
Transformer trip^
System out of service
Line fault fire detector
Line fault differential relay
Line fault buchholz relay
Line fault PRV
Line fault transformer trip
Line fault PNRV
Auto / Manual/Off
Extinction release on
Extinction release off
Lamp test
Visual/Audio alarm
Visual/Audio alarm
Visual/audio alarm for DC supply fail
The signals marked (*) shall be in the top most row of control box panel. The
signals marked (^) shall follow next.
15.2.6 Pre-stressed non return valve (PNRV)

PNRV is to be fitted in the conservator pipe line between conservator and Buchholz
relay. It shall have the proximity switch for remote alarm, indication and with visual
position indicator. The PNRV should be of the best quality because malfunction of PNRV
shall be of serious consequence as its closing leads to stoppage of breathing of
transformer.
15.2.7 Fire detectors

The system shall be complete with adequate number of fire detectors fitted on the top of
oil tank, OLTC/OFF ckt. tap changer rated for 141 degree C for heat sensing each fitted
with two no. cable glands (water proof/weather proof).
15.2.8 Signal box

It shall be fitted on the transformer for terminating cable connections form PNRV and fire
detectors and for further connection to the control box.
15.2.9 Cables
Fire survival cables, able to withstand 750 degree C , 4 core x 1.5 mm sq. for connection
of fire detectors in parallel shall be used.
Fire retardant low smoke (FRLS) cable 12 core x 1.5 mm sq. for connection between
transformer signal box/marshalling box to control box and control box to fire
extinguishing cubicle shall be used.

Fire retardant low smoke cable 4 core x 1.5mm sq. for connection between control box to DC
supply source and fire extinguishing cubicle to AC supply source, signal box/marshalling box to
pre-stressed non return valve connection on transformer shall be used.
15.2.10 Pipes
Pipes, complete with connections, flanges, bends tees etc. shall be supplied alongwith
the system.
15.3 Other items

a. oil drain and nitrogen injection openings with gate valves on transformer tank at suitable
locations.
b. Flanges with dummy piece in conservator pipe between Buchholz relay and conservator
tank for fixing PNRV.
c. Fire detector brackets on transformer top cover.
d. Spare potential free contacts for system activating signals i.e. differential relay buchholz
relay, pressure relief valve, transformer isolation (master trip relay).
e. Pipe connections between transformer to fire extinguishing cubicle and fire extinguishing
cubicle to oil pit.
f. Cabling on transformer top cover for fire detectors to be connected in parallel and inter
cabling between signal box to control box and control box to fire extinguishing cubicle.
g. Mild steel oil tank with moisture proof coating and sheet thickness of minimum 5 mm,
with watertight cover, to be placed in the oil pit. This tank shall be provided with the
manhole, air vent pipe through silica gel breather, drain valve and a spare gate valve at
the top.
The capacity of tank shall be 10,000 ltrs. and shall be provided as each S/Stn. The
location of the tank shall be approved by the employer. All the Transformers to be fitted
with NISPEF at that S/Stn. shall be connected through suitable piping arrangement to
this common tank.
h. DC-DC converter 220-110V DC (optional, incase 110V, supply is not available.)
i. Gate valves on oil drain pipe and nitrogen injection pipe should be able to withstand full
vacuum. A non-return valve shall also be fitted on nitrogen injection pipe between
transformer and gate valve.
j. The F.E. cubicle shall be painted with post office red colour (shade 538 of IS-5). All the
exposed parts i.e. pipes, supports, signal box etc shall be painted with enameled paint.
k. Civil works of F.E.Cubicle and oil pit are not in the scope of bidder.
15.4 Interlocks
It shall be ensured that once the NIFPES gets activated manually or in auto
mode, all the connected breakers shall not close until the system is actually put in OFF
mode. Also PNRV shall get closed only if all the connected breakers are open.

15.5 Technical particulars
15.5.1 Fire extinction period
On commencement of nitrogen injection : Max. 30 secs.

From the moment of system activation to : Max. 3 mins.
Complete cooling.
Fire detectors heat sensing temperature :1410C
Heat sensing area :800mm radius
Pre-stressed non return valve setting for :minimum 60 ltr. Per operation.min.
Capacity of nitrogen cylinder :minimum 68 ltr. water cap.
and shall hold minimum 10 cubic mete gas
to 150 bar pressure.
Power Source :
Control Box :110V DC/220V DC
Fire extinguishing cubicle for lighting : 230V AC
16.00 COOLING PLANT:

16.1 The cooling equipment shall consist of the following:
a. 2-50 percent tank
b. 2-100% pumps one of these being stand by
c. 2-stand by fans one in each 50% Bank
16.2 In case separate cooler banks are used, they shall be suitable for mounting on a flat
concrete base. These shall be provided with a valve (25 mm) at each point of
connection to the transformer tank, removable blanking plates to blank off main oil
connections to each cooler. Thermometer pockets with captive screwed cap at inlet
and outlet of each separate cooler, filter valve at top and bottom and air release plug of
15mm.
16.3 The motor blowers shall be direct driven suitable for continuous out door operation and
complete with necessary air dusting. These shall be mounted independently from the
radiator and in the case, these are radiator mounting type, use shall be made of some
anti-vibration means. Care shall be taken that the blower unit is capable of being
removed without disturbing the radiator structure. The blades shall be suitably painted
and shall not be of hollow sections. Suitably painted wire mesh guards with mesh not
greater than 25mm shall be provided to prevent accidental contact with the blades.
16.4 MOTORS:
16.4.1 The motor shall be squirrel cage totally enclosed weatherproof type suitable for direct
starting and for continuous running from 415/240 volts, three-phase/single phase 50
HZ supply. The motors shall comply with IS as applicable for continuous rated
machine.
16.4.2 All motors shall be capable of continuous operation at frequency 50Hz with variation of
5% and 415/240 V AC 10% variation of the normal voltage without injurious over
heating.
16.4.3 All motors shall have ball or roller bearing with hexagonal nipples for greasing. In case
of vertical spindle, motor shall have bearing capable of withstanding thrust, due to
weight of the moving parts.
16.4.4 Varnished cambric or glass insulator shall be used for connections from stator winding
to the terminal suitable for external wiring. The motor terminals shall be of stud type
and totally enclosed.
16.5 COOLER CONTROL:
16.5.1 Each motor or group of motors shall be provided with a 3 pole electrically operated
connector with control gear for motor operation by hand and automatically through
winding temperature indicator. Provision shall be made for over load protection but no
volt release shall not be provided.
16.5.2 All connection shall be so arranged as to allow either individual or collective operation
of the motors. Alarm indication (audio and visual) for failure of fans and to indicate
failure of power supply shall be provided.
16.5.3 The control equipment shall be installed in the marshaling box as specified in Cl.22 in
a readily accessible position.
16.5.4 The alarm indication for failure of power supply and failure of individual fans be
provided through independent non trip alarm scheme to be wired on the remote tap
charger control cubicle conforming to the following. : -
i) The closing of an initiating contact shall actuate a buzzer and will be
accompanied by a flag indication on the concerned auxiliary relay.
ii) The closing of an initiating contact shall glow a lamp, which will not reset until
the fault has been cleared.
iii) It shall be possible to silence the buzzer by pressing 'Accept' push button. If,
after canceling the alarm but before resetting the visual signal, the same fault
persists the buzzer shall be suppressed.
iv) If after canceling the alarm but before resetting the visual signal, some other
fault takes place, the alarm accompanied by flag indication on appropriate
auxiliary relay shall take place.
v) If after canceling the alarm and after resetting the visual signal, the same
fault appears or some other fault takes place, the alarm, flag indication and
non-trip lamp indication shall reappear as usual.
vi) The non-trip alarm acceptance shall be by means of push button and resetting
of visual signal may also preferably be done through a push button.
vii) Means shall be provided for test checking the lamp and alarm circuit at
frequent intervals.
viii) The equipment shall be suitable for 220 Volts DC operation.
Static facia aunnuciator conforming to the foregoing requirements of non-trip
alarm scheme too would be acceptable.
17.00 VOLTAGE CONTROL (ON LOAD TYPE):
17.1 The transformer shall by provided with OLTC which apart from being suitable for local
manual/electrical operation & remote electrical operation.
17.2 Equipment for 'local' and 'remote' electrical and 'local' manual operation shall be
provided and shall comply with the following conditions. Local/ remote switch may be
housed in remote control panel or in tap changer drive mechanism.
17.2.1 It shall not be possible to operate the electric drive when the manual operating gear is
in use.
17.2.2 It shall not be possible for any two electric controls to be in operation at the same time.
17.2.3 The equipment suitable for supervisory control and indication on a multi way switch,
make-before break, having one fixed contact for each tap position, shall be provided
and wired to the tap changer drive gear. This switch shall be provided in addition to
any, which may be required for remote tap change position indication purpose.
Supervisory indication shall also be provided in the form of contacts to close on. "Tap
change incomplete" condition. All other components of the supervisory gear if required
be specified separately.
17.2.4 Operation from the local or remote control switch shall cause one tap movement only.
The control switch shall be returned to the 'neutral' position between successive
operations.
17.2.5 All Electrical control switch on the local operation gear shall be clearly labeled in a
suitable manner to indicate the direction of tap changing.
17.2.6 The local control switches shall be mounted, in the drive gear housing.
17.3 The equipment shall be so arranged as to ensure that when a tap change has
commenced, it shall be completed independent of the operation of the control relays or
switches. In case of failure of the auxiliary supply while tap change is in progress or
any other contingency such as stuck tap changer, adequate means shall be provided
to safe guard the transformers and its auxiliary equipment.
17.4 Suitable apparatus shall be provided for each transformer to give indications as
follows: -
17.4.1 To give indication, mechanically at the transformer and electrically at the remote
control cubicle of the position of tap in use.
17.4.2 To give an indication at the remote control cubicle that a tap change is in-progress, by
means of an illuminated lamp.
17.5 For remote control, the switches, tap position indicator, etc. shall be supplied duly
mounted on remote control cubicle.
17.6 All relays and operating devices shall be operated correctly at any voltage between the
limits specified in the relevant ISS.
17.7 The tap changing mechanism and mechanism shall be mounted in the oil tank or
compartment mounted in an accessible position on the transformer.
17.8 Any non oil filled enclosed compartment shall be adequately ventilated,
thermostatically controlled heaters shall be provided in the driving mechanism
chamber and in the marshaling box. All contactor & auxiliary relay coils or other parts
shall be suitably protected against corrosion or deterioration due to condensation,
fungi etc.
17.9 The tap changer contacts which are not used for making or breaking current like
separate selector switch contacts can be located inside main transformer tank where
tap changer construction permits such an arrangement. The oil in case of on load tap
changer having separate compartment for selector contacts shall be maintained under
conservator head by means of pipe connection from the highest point of the chamber
to the conservator. Such connection shall be controlled by suitable valve and shall be
arranged so that any gas leaving the chamber will pass into the gas and oil actuated
relay. A separate Bucholz relay may be provided for this compartment.
17.10 It shall not be possible for the oil in these compartments of the tap change equipment
which contain contacts used for making or breaking current, to mix with the oil in the
compartments containing contacts and not used for making or breaking current.
17.11 Any 'DROP DOWN' tanks associated with the tap changing apparatus shall be fitted
with guide rods to control the movement during lifting or lowering operations. The
guide rods shall be so designed as to take support of the associated tank when in the
fully lowered position with oil. Lifting gear fitted to 'Drop Down' tanks shall include
suitable device to prevent run-away during lifting and lowering operations. They shall
be provided with adequate breathing arrangement.
17.12 Each compartment in which the oil is not maintained under conservator head shall be
provided with a suitable direct reading oil gauge.
17.13 The alternating supply for electrical operation of the control and indicating gear shall
be standard 415 Volts, three-phase, 3 wire, 50 Hz. alongwith 240 Volts single phase, 2
wire 50 Hz, subject to a variation of 5 percent so that the equipment offered can
withstand variation in AC
17.14 Limit switches shall be provided to prevent over-running of the mechanism and except
where modified in clause 17.15 shall be directly connected in the circuit of the
operating motor. In addition a mechanical stopper or other approved device shall be
provided to prevent over-running of the mechanism under any condition.
17.15 Limit switches may be connected in the control circuit of the operating motor provided
that a mechanical declutching mechanism is incorporated.
17.16 Thermal devices or other means like motor circuit breakers with shunt trip coil shall be
provided to protect the motor and control circuits. All relays, switches fuses, etc. shall
be mounted in the marshaling box or driving gear housing. These shall be clearly
marked for purpose of identification. They shall withstand the vibration associated with
tap changer gear operation.
17.17 The control circuits shall operate at 110V single phase to be supplied from a
transformer having a ratio of 415 or 240/55-0-55 V with the center point earthed
through a removable link mounted in tap changer drive.
17.18 The whole of the apparatus shall be of robust design and capable of giving satisfactory
service under conditions to be met in service including frequent operation.
17.19 A five-digit counter shall be fitted to the tap changing mechanism to indicate the
number of operations completed by the equipment.
17.20 A permanently legible lubrication chart shall be fitted within the driving mechanism
chamber, where applicable.
17.21 The indigenous make OLTC having voltage rating as 132 kV & current rating 500 Amp.
should be duly type tested from CPRI or other Govt. test house or from reputed lab
abroad to the extent the facilities of type test are available with CPRI.
18.00 PARALLEL OPERATION:
18.1 In addition to individual control of tap changer, provision shall be made to enable
parallel operation of the tap changer when one unit is running in parallel with another
transformer.
18.2 Suitable selector switch and controls shall be provided so that any transformer of the
group can at a time be selected as master, follower or independent. Arrangement shall
be made that only one of the transformers can be selected as master at a time.
18.3 An out of step device shall be provided for each transformer indicating out of step
condition by an indicating lamp and buzzer. It shall be arranged to prevent further tap
changing when transformers in a group operating in parallel control are one tap out of
step.
19.0. BUSHING INSULATORS AND TERMINALS:
19.1 Transformer shall be fitted with bushing insulators as follows: -
HV bushing: 245 kV class, condenser bushing of 800 Amp. rating without arcing
horns.
L.V. Bushing: 145 kV class condenser bushing of 800 Amp. rating without arcing
horns.
Neutral Bushing: 36 kV class, oil communicating type porcelain bushing of 1000
Amp. rating but without arcing horns.
The characteristics of the bushings shall be in accordance with IS: 2099 and IS:
3347.
The bushing insulators except for neutral bushing shall be provided with adjustable
arcing horns and the bidder shall furnish calibration gap to decide actual gap
setting.
A continuous flexible pull through lead suitably sweated to the end of winding
copper shall be connected to the connector in the helmet of the 220/132 kV
Bushing. The bushings may be filled with oil, which may not be in communication
with the oil in transformer.
All porcelain shall be free from defects and thoroughly vitrified with a smooth, hard
and uniform brown glaze. It should be capable of satisfactory use under the
climatic conditions as specified in clause-3.0.
In case of paper insulation care shall be taken to prevent ingress of moisture and a
final coat of non-hygroscopic varnish shall be given to them.
All clamps and fittings made of malleable iron or steel shall be galvanized as per
IS: 2629. The bushings flanges shall not be of re-entrant shape which may trap
air.
Bi-metallic terminal connectors shall be supplied suitable for single tarantula
conductor for HV LV side and neutral side. The take off for H.V. & L.V. connectors
will be Vertical and for Neutral it should be suitable for horizontal take off.
The connectors shall have six number bolts provided with check nuts & washers.
The connectors shall have rating corresponding to those of equipment or higher
and shall be designed most liberally with a higher factor of safety to comply in all
respects with temperatures rise, resistance, tensile strength short-circuit withstand
capability tests as specified in IS: 5561-1970 or amendment thereof (Latest
edition). Aluminum alloy used in the manufacture of Bi-metallic connectors shall
conform to designation Grade 4600 of IS:
617-1975. The steel bolts, nuts washers and check nuts shall be hot dip galvanized
marked with ISI certification mark or of GKW make.
20.00 TEMPERATURE INDICATING DEVICES:
20.1 All transformers shall be provided with a dial type thermometer for indicating oil
temperature. The indicator shall be fitted with a pointer to register maximum temp
recorded and adjustable set of mercury contact for alarm and trip.
20.2 In addition, all the transformers shall be provided with a dial type Hot Spot winding
temperature indicator in HV & LV winding. The indicator shall have a pointer to register
maximum temperature reached and four sets of adjustable mercury contacts for alarm,
trip, automatic control of fans & remote indication. The static remote repeater (for
winding temperature indicator) suitable for flush mounting shall be installed on remote
tap charge control cubicle.
20.3 The temperature indicators shall be housed in marshaling box.
20.4 The alarm (mercury) contact of WTI & OTI shall be adjustable between 50oC to 100oC
where as their trip (mercury) contacts shall be adjustable between 60oC and 120oC.
The temperature difference between opening & closing of these mercury contacts shall
not be more than 10oC.
20.5 The mercury contacts used for controlling cooling plant motors shall be adjustable to
close between 50oC and 100oC. The temperature differential between opening &
closing of this mercury contract shall be between 10oC to 15oC.
20.6 All contacts should be accessible on removal of the cover adjustable to scale. It shall
also be possible to move the pointers by hand for checking the operation of contacts
and associated equipment.
20.7 In addition each transformer shall be provided with a dial type thermometer for
indicating the ambient temperature.
21.00 GAS AND OIL ACTUATED RELAYS: -
211 The transformer shall be provided with a gas and oil actuated relay fitted with alarm
and trip contacts for main tank & oil surge relay for its OLTC as per IS:3637.
21.2 Each such relay shall be provided with a test cock to take a flexible connection for
checking relay operation
21.3 A machined surface shall be provided on top of relay for checking mounting angles in
the pipe cross level of relay and its setting.
21.4 The pipe work shall be such as to allow any gas formed in the tank to pass through the
relay. The oil circuit through the relay shall not form a parallel delivery path with any
circulating oil pipe, nor shall it be tied into or connected through the pressure relief
vent.
21.5 Adequate clearance between oil pipe work and live metal parts shall be provided.
22.00 MARSHALING BOX: -
22.1 A sheet steel (of 10 SWG size) vermin proof well ventilated and weather proof
marshaling box of suitable construction shall be provided for the transformer auxiliary
apparatus. The box shall have domed or sloping roofs. Ventilation louvers, suitably
padded with felt, shall also be provided. It shall be painted as per Cl.5.14.
22.2 The marshaling box shall accommodate temperature indicators. Local electrical
control of tap changer (if same cannot be housed in motor drive housing.), Control &
protection equipment for cooling plant, terminal boards and gland plates for cable etc.
The equipment shall be mounted on panels and panels wiring shall be done at the
back for interconnections.
22.3 The temperature indicators shall be mounted at about 1600mm from ground level.
22.4 A metal clad heater with thermostat, controlled by a waterproof rotary switch on the
outside of the box, shall be provided.
22.5 The incoming cables shall enter from the bottom with gland plate not less than 450mm
from the base of the box. Care shall be taken to avoid ingress of water from the cable
trench.
23.00 CONTROL CONNECTIONS, INSTRUMENTS WIRING, TERMINAL BOARD AND
FUSES: -
23.1 All cables and wiring shall be suitable for use under the conditions as specified in
Section -I. Any wiring liable to come in contact with oil shall be of oil resisting
insulation. The bare ends of stranded wire shall be sweated together to prevent oil
from creeping along the wire.
23.2 The instrument and panel wiring shall be run in PVC or non rusting metal cleats of
limited compression type.
23.3 The box wiring shall be as per relevant ISS. All wiring shall be of stranded copper of
660V grade and size not less than 4 Sq. mm. for CT leads and not less than 2.5 Sq.
mm for other connections. The panel wires and multi core cable shall bear ferrules of
white insulation material with indelible marking in black and as per relevant ISS. Same
ferrule number shall not be used on wires in different circuits. Double ferrule may be
provided where a change in number is required.
23.4 Stranded wires shall be terminated with tinned Ross Courtney terminals, washers or
crimped tubular lugs. Separate washers shall be used for each wire. Wire shall not be
jointed/tied between terminal points.
23.5 Where apparatus is mounted on panels all metal cases shall be separately earthed by
copper wire or strip not less than 2.5 sq. mm. The screens of screened pairs of multi
core cables shall be earthed at one end of the cable only.
23.6 All terminal boards shall be of stud-type & mounted obliquely towards the rear door
and these boards shall be spaced not less than 100mm apart. Suitable insulation
barriers shall be provided between adjacent connections. No live metal shall be
exposed at the back of terminal boards.
23.7 All fuses shall be of cartridge type and fuses and links shall be properly labeled.
24.0 EQUALIZATION FORMULA:
The losses at principal tap of each transformer shall be stated in the tender. The
manufacture shall state separately no load, load and Auxiliary losses at rated
frequency & voltage and load losses corresponding to OFAF rating (at full load at
750C) for fair comparison of difference of losses. It is essential that tenderers quote
firm losses.
For the purpose of arriving at comparable prices, the iron, copper and auxiliary losses
shall be capitalized as per formula given below:
=3,86,700 (Wi + 0.45 Wc + 0.45Wp)
Where
Wi = Iron (No. Load ) Losses
Wc = Copper (Load) Losses
Wp = Auxilary Losses
The maximum sealing of component and weightage average losses shall be as per clause
25.00 and no positive tolerance shall be allowed on these values.
In case losses of the T/F are found to be higher then the specified values at any stage
within three years from the date of commissioning the capitalized value of excess
losses, as compare to the specified value shall be recovered as per following
capitalization formula:-
Amount recoverable (Rs.)= 3,86,700(Wi + 0.45 Wc + 0.45Wp)
25.00 Losses:-
The losses of each transformer shall be stated in the tender for OFAF at principal tap
rating (at full load at 75 deg. C ) which shall be less than:-
Sr. No. Type of Losses 100 MVA, 220/132
KV T/F
1 No Load Losses 28 KW (Max)
2 Load Losses 233 KW(Max)
3 Auxiliary Losses 11 KW (Max)
4 overall average wt. losses (based on 124KW (Max.)
capitalisation formula of W i+0.45 (W p+W c)
25.1 Noise level : 80 dB
Transformer offers shall be rejected if audible sound level is higher than max. 80 dB.
26.00 TESTS:
26.1 ROUTINE TESTS:
All routine test shall be carried out on each transformer as per IS-2026 in the presence
of employer's representative.
26.2 TYPE TESTS :

The following type tests shall be carried out on one transformer as per IS: 2026 in the
presence of employer's representative.
i) Temperature rise test (alongwith DGA)
ii) Impulse voltage withstand test as per ISS: 2026/Part-III/81 on one limb.
There will not be any separate schedule for type test charges. The charges if any may
be included in bid price.
In addition, the following tests shall be carried out on the Transformer Tank:
26.2.1 OIL LEAKAGE TEST:
All tanks and oil filled compartments shall be tested for oil tightness by being
completely filled with oil of viscosity not greater than that of insulating oil to IS: 335 at
ambient temperature and subjected to a pressure equal to normal pressure plus
35KN/M2 (5 lbs sq. inch) measured at the base of the tank. This pressure shall be
maintained for a period not less than 12 hours, during which period no leakage shall
occur.
26.2.2 Following tests shall be carried out on each transformer as reference test:
i) Measurement of tan delta and capacitor of T/F Winding and bushings at 5 kV &
10 kV.
ii) Partial discharge list.
iii) Noise level test.
iv) Magnetic balance test.
v) Magnetising current at low voltage
vi) Measurement of percentage impedance at all taps at low voltage.
26.2.3 TRANSFORMER OIL:
Sufficient quantity (along with 10% extra) of insulating oil of napthenic type (as per
Clause-6 of specification) conforming to BS:148/IEC-296 Class-1 shall be put up for
inspection, at least 3 weeks before putting up the transformer for testing/inspection, at
sub-supplier works as per IS:335/BS/IEC. One sample of the oil shall also be got
tested from CPRI or any other Govt. approved testing house. The inspected oil shall
be dispatched to site as per dispatch instructions of purchaser.
26.2.4 SHORT CIRCUIT TEST
Short circuit test in accordance with latest IS-2026 Part (5) clause 4.2, IEC-60076-5
and CEA regulation-2010 shall be got conducted on one of the units of each voltage
and capacity at any test Agencies where facilities exist in the presence of Purchaser's
representative. However, in case of those manufacturers who have already got short
circuit test in accordance with Cl. 4.2 of IS-2026 Part(5) or latest edition conducted
during the last 7 years on same design and capacity of the Transformer, fresh short
circuit test is not required to be conducted. The bidder in such a case shall submit the
copy of type test report along with the bid. If this test is not conducted by the firm
earlier, then charges for this test shall be borne by the bidder.
26.3 The employer reserves the right to have any other, reasonable test carried out at his
expense either before shipment or at site to ensure that the transformer complies with
the requirement of this specification.
26.4 STAGE INSPECTION:
Stage inspection of built up core (in horizontal/vertical position), windings, tank and
radiators shall be carried-out as detailed below:-
a. CORE:-
i) Measurement of flux Density.
ii) No Load Loss Measurement by providing dummy oils.
iii) Tests of CRGO sample taken from the core shall be carried-out for Carlite test
(Resistance Measurement), Watt Loss Test, Lamination Thickness & Aging
Tests.
iv) Physical inspection for quality of workmanship.
v) Slitting/Cutting of core.
b. WINDINGS:
i. Measurement of cross-sectional area for current density.
ii. Measurement of weight of bare copper/ cover by resistance methods.
iii. The purity test of copper shall be got conducted on sample of copper for
assessing its quality, from two independent NABL accredited laboratories.
c. TANK:
i) Vacuum Test:
One transformer tank out of the lot shall be subjected to vacuum pressure of
100.64 kN (760 mm of hg). The tanks to be designed for full vacuum shall be tested
at an internal pressure of 3.33 KN/M2 (25mm of Hg.) for one hour.
The permanent deflection of flat plates after the vacuum has been released shall not
exceed the values given below without affecting the performance of the Transformer
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--
Horizontal length of flat plate(mm). Permanent deflection (mm).
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--
Upto & including 750 5.0
751-1250 6.5
1251-1750 8.0
1751-2000 9.5
2001-2250 11.0
2251-2500 12.5
2501-3000 16.0
above 3000 19.0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ii) PRESSURE TEST:
One transformer tank out of the lot shall be subject to the pressure corresponding to
twice the normal head of oil or normal pressure plus 35KN/M2 (which ever is lower)
measured at the base of the tank and maintained for one hour. The permanent
deflection of flat plates after removal of excess pressure shall not exceed the figures
specified as above.

d. RADIATORS:
Radiator shall be routine and type tested at sub contractors' work as per relevant
standard. Test reports are required to be supplied at the time of final inspection.
NOTE:
a. The insulation resistance values of the transformer windings will be recorded at
the time of carrying out routine tests, for 20 seconds, one minute, two minutes
with the help of 5000V motorized meggar. (Preferably EVERSHED/ AVO &
VIGNOLE MAKE). The polarization index values (ratio of 120/20 sec. value)
will be accordingly calculated and recorded in the test certificates and it should
not be less than 1.5.
b. Dissolved gas analysis test shall be got carried-out before and after heat run
test at CPRI.
c. Capacitance and Tan Delta values for each transformer and condenser
bushings will be taken and recorded in the test certificates at 5 kV & 10 kV.
Insulation resistance value of condenser bushings shall also be recorded.
d. Lightening impulse test with the chopped wave applications as per clause 13 of
IS: 2026/ 1981 (Part-III) amended upto date. This test will be carried out on one
of the limbs of HV and LV winding with positive polarity.
e. The tender should clearly indicate the testing facilities available with them and
tests which are to be arranged outside.
Contractor shall submit in-house test certificate atleast 15 days in advance for final
testing of transformer.
For testing T/F, all measuring instruments shall be of highest efficiency and best
quality. These shall be got calibrated from NPL/ Govt. Agency and be got sealed by
calibrating agency. HVPN reserves the right to calibrate the instruments in the
manner it desires.
Losses shall be measured with 3-wattmeter method only. Resistance shall be taken
with Double-Kelvin Bridge. Losses can be measured directly from CTs and PTs and
not through the panel. Ratio of the measuring instrument shall be such that the
multiplying factor is the minimum.
All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Employer before despatching the
material. Test certificates in quadruplicate will be submitted to the Employer for
approval. No material shall be despatched without prior inspection and approval of
test certificates unless otherwise agreed to. Type and routine test certificates of all
bought out items from recognised testing agency shall be submitted for approval
before commencing supplies. OLTC scheme including the master follower
functioning shall also be checked. Only fully assembled transformer including
mounting of radiators shall be put-up for inspection.
27.00 DRAWINGS:
27.1 The following drawings shall be supplied as part of the tender.
27.1.1 Outline dimensional drawing of transformer and accessories.
27.1.2 Bushing and terminal connectors drawing.
27.2 The successful bidder shall submit final version of drawings complete in all respects
as detailed in the following sub-clauses, in quadruplicate, within four weeks of
placement of order for employers approval. The employer shall communicate his
comments/approval on the drawings to the contractor within four weeks of their
receipt. The manufacturer shall, if necessary, modify the drawings and resubmit the
same for employers approval within two weeks of receipt of comments. Such duly
revised drawings will be approved by the employer within two weeks of the receipt.
After receipt of employers approval to drawings, the manufacturer will submit a set
of re-producible of all the approved drawings and will also supply five sets of all
approved drawings and five sets of manual of instructions per transformer to sub-
station Design Directorate, HVPNL, Panchkula.
ONE SET OF ALL THE APPROVED DRAWINGS AND MANUAL OF INSTUCTIONS

WILL BE SUPPLIED ALONGWITH EACH TRANSFRMER WITHOUT WHICH THE
SUPPLY WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED AS COMPLETE SUPPLY.
27.2.1 Outline general arrangement drawings showing plan, front elevation & side elevation
with all fittings and accessories etc. The following information must be specifically
included on the drawings.
a. Make of transformer oil.
b. Electrical clearances, minimum as well as actual.
c. No. of radiator headers, number of radiator element in each header.
d. Small sketch showing un-tanking details.
e. Thickness of transformer tank bottom, side & top plates.
f. Type, shade, shade No. and thickness of transformer paint.
g. Roller, rail gauge sketch.
h. Weight of oil, bare copper weight windings, core, un-tanking mass,
transportation mass and dimensions etc.
27.2.2 Detailed of bushings showing plan, elevation, terminal details, mounting details make
and type number incorporating electrical characteristics, description of various parts,
total creepage/ & protected creepage distance, weight of oil, total weight of bushing ,
dimensions, short time current rating etc.
27.2.3 Drawing showing HV & LV windings with arrangement of insulation and terminal
connections.
27.2.4 Schematic control and wiring diagram for auxiliary equipment like OLTC control gear,
cooler control gear, Marshaling Kiosk. Detailed write-up for schematic shall also be
supplied
27.2.5 Combined Rating & Diagram Plate.
27.2.6 Valve schedule plate.
27.2.7 Core assembly drawing with flux density calculations.
27.2.8 Interconnection diagram between OLTC panel, Drive mechanism and marshalling
kiosk.
27.2.9 Detailed calculations showing short circuit withstand capacity due to radial and axial
forces during short circuit and calculation for thermal withstand capability during
short circuit shall also be supplied.
27.2.10 Cable arrangement on the transformers.
27.2.11 Drawing showing connection of HV, LV lead with the respective bushing and their
place of storage during transportation.
27.2.12 Detailed drawings of NIFPES System along with its detailed write up.
28.00 LIST OF SPARES
As per schedule of requirement.
29.00 SPARE WINDING
It will be obligatory on the part of the firm to supply spare winding, if needed, during
the normal life of the transformer.
30.0 ERECTION TESTING AND COMMISSIONING AT SITE:-
The employer intends to carry-out the erection, testing and commission of the
equipment, covered by this specification departmentally with or without the
supervisory services off the contractor. Accordingly the successful bidder shall
furnish sufficient copies of complete erection drawings and instruction manuals
containing all relevant date to enable the employer to arrange the requirement tools.
Plant and instruments and to successfully install test and commission the equipment.
Complete details for filling of insulating oil, hot oil circulation, vacuum treatment,
venting of air if trapped during oil filling etc. shall be specifically covered in the
manuals. Full details of commissioning tests shall also be furnished.
The employer may at his option avail the services of contractor engineer(s) for
supervision of erection, testing and commissioning of the equipment for which bidder
should indicate the charges separately.
These charges and other terms and conditions shall be valid for one and a half years
after the supply of the equipment. The contractor shall also furnish, if necessary,
special erection, tools and plant instruments on rental basis.
31.0 SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS.

These particulars shall be furnished by the tenderers along with their tenders.

SECTION-3
CHAPTER-2
100 MVA, 220/33kV POWER TRANSFORMER

1.00 SCOPE:
a) This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly testing at
manufacturers works before despatch, supply and delivery at site as per
schedule of Requirement of 100 MVA, 220/33kV Power Transformer.
of all accessories and hardware shall be subject to HVPNLs approval.
2.00 Codes & Standards:
of bid.
BS:148/IEC:296
IS:375 Marking & arrangement of Switch-gear Bus-bars main connections and
auxiliary wiring.
&IEC:76
& 3347
switchgear & control gear.
&IEC-354
&IEC:214
IS:5561 Electricity power connectors.
IS:8603 : Dimensions for porcelain transformer bushings for use in heavily
polluted atmosphere (36 kV Class). Dimensions for oil filled porcelain
transformer bushings for use in medium polluted atmosphere.

equipment.
transformers.
Equipment complying with other internationally accepted standards would also be
3.00 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :
3.1 Max. Temprature 50 C
3.2 Min. Temprature -2.5 C
3.4 Min. relative humidity 26%
3.5 Average number of rainy days per annum Nearly120 Days.
3.7 Average number of dust strom days per annum 35
3.9 Max Wind pressures. 195kg/sqmt.
3.10 Altitude above mean sea level. Less than 1000 mt.
4.00 TYPE AND RATING:
4.1 The transformer shall be of 3 phase oil immersed three legged core type
with ONAN/ONAF/OFAF cooling suitable for outdoor service as step down
transformer.
4.2 The ratings and other characteristics which are not covered elsewhere shall be,
as detailed in following clauses:
a) ONAN 50 MVA
b) ONAF 75 MVA
c) OFAF 100 MVA
4.2.3 Frequency 50 Hz(5%)

4.2.4 Rated Voltage:
a) HV side 220 Kv
b) LV sid 33 Kv
4.2.5 Max. System Voltage

a) HV Side 245 Kv
b) LV Side 36 KV
4.2.6 Connections:
a) HV side Star with neutral solidly earthed
b) LV side ----------------do----------------
4.2.7 Vector group YYO

4.2.8 Tapping On load tappings at neutral end of 220
Kv side for variation +10 % to -10% in
steps of 1.25% each.
4.2.9 Rated short duration Power frequency withstand Voltage

a) HV Side 395Kv rms
b) LV Side 70Kv rms
c) Neutral 70Kv rms
4.2.10 Rated lightning impulse withstand Voltage

a) HV Side 950Kv Peak
b) LV Side 170Kv Peak
c) Neutral 170 Kv Peak
4.2.11 %age Impedance 12.5% at 100MVA base
4.2.12 B.I.L for Bushings
a) HV Side 1050Kv Peak/460Kv rms
b) LV Side 170 Kv Peak/ 70 Kv rms
c) Neutral 170 Kv Peak/ 70 Kv rms
4.2.13 Creepage:
a) Total 25mm per Kv corresponding to highest
system voltage
b) Protected 50% of the total creepage distance
5.00 GENERAL DESIGN OF TRANSFORMER:

5.1 The transformer and accessories shall be so designed as to facilitate
inspection, cleaning and repairs. The requirement of Indian Electricity Rules
shall be kept in view.
5.2 The design shall ensure satisfactory operation under severe working
conditions due to fluctuating load of steel furnaces and voltage variations in the
system including those, due to short circuits. The transformer shall be designed
as to minimize the risk of accidental short circuits caused by animals, birds or
vermins.
The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the
safety of all those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the equipment
keeping in view the requirements of Indian Electricity Rules.
5.3 All material used shall be of the best quality and of class most suitable for
working under specified conditions and shall withstand the atmospheric
conditions and temperature variations without undue deterioration or distortion or
setting up of undue stress in any part thereof.
5.6 All taper pins to be used in the mechanism shall be split types as per latest
edition of IS: 2393.

5.8 The construction shall be such as to avoid air or water pockets. Special care
shall be exercised to reduce noise and vibration to the minimum level.
5.9 Steel bolts of suitable finish will be used for diameters above 6mm. Brass bolts
or studs used for electrical connections shall not be of less than 6mm diameter.
On outdoor equipment, all bolts, nuts & washers in contact with current carrying
non-ferrous parts shall be phosphor bronze.
5.10 All nuts, bolts and pins shall be locked except those, which are external to the
transformer. If bolts and nuts are so placed as to be inaccessible by means of
ordinary spanners, the Contractor shall provide suitable special spanners.
5.11 Labels shall be provided for all apparatus like relays, switches, fuses, etc.
housed in any cubicle or marshalling kiosks. These shall be of incredible material
with matt/satin finish and permanent lettering. Labels mounted on black surface
shall have white letters and danger notices shall have red lettering on a white
background. The labels shall be secured by means of brass screws or rust
protected steel screws.
5.13 Before painting, all un galvanised parts shall be cleaned, made free from rust,
scale and grease and external rough surfaces smoothened (filled with metal
deposition). The interior of the tank and other oil filled chambers shall be cleaned
by shot blasting or any other suitable method.
5.14 All external surfaces shall be given three coats of paints except for nuts, bolts
and washers which may be given one coat after assembling of transformer at
works. The final coat shall be a glossy oil and weather proof, non-fading paint of
shade 631 of IS: 5
5.15 The interior of mechanism chambers and kiosks shall be given 3 coats of paint,
the final coat being of a light coloured anti-condensation mixture.
5.16 The outer most radial spacers of the winding shall be locked in position by means
of vertical strips so that the same cannot fall off/get displaced.
5.17 The manufacturers must ensure proper & complete tightening of the nuts of the
coil clamping bolts. The nuts of all the coil clamping bolts will be tightened to
designed value & the job be carried out with torque spanners.
The devices used for locking the nuts of coil clamping bolts must be of such a
quality and such care should be taken first in tightening. The nuts and next in
locking them in position that the arrangement does not become loose due to
stresses caused by short circuits and fluctuating loads etc.
5.18 The noise level shall not be more than 80 db.
5.19 The transformers shall be designed to have short circuit rating of five
seconds as per IS: 2026. The thermal ability to withstand short circuit shall be
judged by calculation to be supplied above in the tender. The dynamic ability to
with stand short circuit shall be demonstrated by test and their calculation will
also be supplied with drawings.
5.20 Foundation bolts and nuts shall be supplied along with the transformer
(Preferably at the time of call for inspection) so that transformer plinth is ready by
the time transformer is received by the consignee.
6.00 INSULATING OIL:
Sufficient insulating oil of Napthenic type (made from Napthenic crude) in which
paraffinic content should be less than 50% and aromatic content 4 to 12%
conforming to BS: 148/IEC:296 class-1 shall be supplied for first filling of each
transformer. Particular attention shall be paid to deliver the oil at site free from
moisture and of uniform quality through out in non-returnable steels drums. The
quantity of oil for first filling of each transformer shall be stated in tender along-
with trade mark of the oil to be supplied. Use of inhibitors in oil shall not be
resorted to. 10% extra oil of the total quantity of oil shall be supplied along with
the transformer.
7.00 LIMIT OF TEMPERATURE RISE
7.1 With the above climatic conditions, given in clause-3 each transformer
shall be capable of operating continuously on any tap at their normal rating
without exceeding following temperature rises:
i) 50o C in oil by thermometer.
ii) 55o C in winding by resistance.
iii) Temperature of hot spot in winding not to exceed 98oC when calculated
over max. annual weighted average temperature of 32o C.
manufacturer by carrying out the heat run test at the lowest negative tap. This
test shall be carried out by feeding 1.1 times the total losses at 75o C at highest
current tap.
7.3 OVERLOAD CAPACITY & CONTINUOUS RATING.
The safe over load capacity of the transformer and the duration of overload under
maximum temperature conditions without any damage to the winding or harmful
effects on the insulation shall be clearly stated in the tender which must be as per
IEC-354/IS: 6600, guide for loading of oil immersed transformer.
8.00 IMPEDANCE:
The transformer shall have 12.5% impedance on 100 MVA base with tolerance as per
IS: 2026/Part-1 (1983). Impedance shall include positive and zero sequence and shall
be expressed in terms of the branches of the star connected equivalent diagram, all on
the same KVA base and range shall be given for each branch of the equivalent circuit in
turn. Percentage tolerance allowed at extreme tap should be as applicable to normal tap.
9.00 FREQUENCY:
The transformer shall be suitable for continuous operation with a +/- 5% frequency
variation from a normal of 50 Hz without exceeding the temperature rise as specified in
Clause 7.1 above.
10.0 FLUX DENSITY, CORE CONSTRUCTION AND INSPECTION
10.1 The transformer should be so designed that the working flux density should
not exceed1.60 Tesla at normal voltage, frequency.

10.3 The core shall be built up with thin laminations of high grade. Non-ageing, low
loss, high permeability cold rolled super grain oriented silicon steel. Known as
MOH High B Grade or superior grade CRGO steels of maximum 0.27 mm or
low lamination thickness especially suitable for transformer core.
10.4(a) (i)Bidder should have in house core cutting facility for proper monitoring & control
on quality and also to avoid any possibility of mixing of prime material with
defective/second grade material. The purchaser may witness the core-cutting
operation. In case the in house core cutting facility for core cutting is not
available then the same shall be carried out in the presence of the
representative of HVPN.
(ii)Inspection call notice for the purpose should be accompanied with the
following documents as applicable as a proof toward use of Prime core
materials:-
c) Packing list.
d) Bill of loading.
Core material shall be directly procured either from the manufacturer or through
their accredited marketing ressurized of repute and not through any agent.
10.4(b) After being sheared, the laminations shall be treated to remove all burrs. They
shall be coated with a baked enamel insulation coating. The insulation shall be
inert to the action of hot transformer oil and shall be perfectly adhesive. Paper
and varnish insulation shall not be accepted. Particulars of proposed insulation
shall be stated in the tender. Laminations shall be checked for burrs during
stage inspection.
10.5 The core shall be rigidly clamped and/or bolted to ensure adequate
mechanical strength and to prevent vibrations during operation. The bolts used in
the assembly of the core shall be suitably insulated and the clamping structure
shall be constructed that the eddy currents will be minimum.
10.6 Construction of the core shall be such that number of steps in the limb and
yoke shall be matching and dimensionally identical to minimize the effect of
cross fluxing and better mechanical strength.
10.7 The core shall be provided with Lugs suitable for lifting the complete core and
coil assembly of transformer. The Core & coil shall be fixed in the tank such
that its shifting will not occur when the transformer is moved or when a short
circuit occurs.
10.8 The design of magnetic circuit shall be such as to avoid static discharge
development of short circuit paths within itself or to the earthing clamping
structure and the production of flux components at right angles to the plane of
the lamination which may cause local heating.

10.9 Every care shall be exercised in the selection treatment and handling of core
steel to ensure that the laminations are flat and that finally assembled core is
free from distortions.
10.10 The supporting frame work of the core shall be so designed as to avoid the
presence of pockets which would prevent complete emptying of the tank
through the drain valve or cause trapping of air during filling.
10.11 Oil ducts where necessary should be formed across the plane of the
lamination and be given a suitable slope to assist oil circulation. The overall
design of core and winding should be such that free flow of oil is not
obstructed.
10.12 The frame work and clamping arrangement shall be earthed by connecting to
the tank body through a copper strip. Yoke bolt area should be compensated if
bolts are used for fastening of the core.
10.13 The insulation of core to bolts and core to clamp plates shall be able to
withstand a voltage of 2KV RMS for one minute.
installation, service and adequate provision shall be made to prevent
movement of core and winding relative to tank during these conditions.
10.15 All steel sections used for supporting the core shall be thoroughly sand blasted
after cutting drilling and welding.
considered.
10.17 The tenderers should indicate the maximum flux density allowable continuously
as well as for time intervals of 1 minute and 5 seconds and the limit of flux density
at which core material used by them saturates.
10.18 The name of the core material must be mentioned in the tender. The
successful tenderer shall be required to furnish magnetization curves of the
core material/design calculations and such other data/documents deemed fit
by the Purchaser for being satisfied that flux density is as desired.
10.19 Purchaser shall inspect the built-up core for verification of flux density for which
all facilities shall be provided. The purchaser shall inspect/test the core material
for various tests as per relevant IEC/IS to ensure quality. Core may also be
inspected during horizontal assembly, built-up assembly.
NOTES:
i) The above flux density has been specified to meet with the over fluxing of the
core due to temporary over voltage of the order of 31% for l min, 44% for 5
seconds that may appear abnormal conditions such as those following sudden
loss of large loads.

ii) Yoke bolt area and flitch plate areas shall not be counted in the net core area
if these are provided for fastening core.
iii) The design of limb and yoke shall be so co-ordinate that there is no cross fluxing
at the joints.
11.00 SUPPRESSION OF HARMONICS:
The transformer shall be so designed as to withstand thermal and electro-magnetic
stress under severe short-circuits where the fault level on 220 KV & 33 KV bus are of
the order of 20,000 and 2,500 MVA respectively.
12.00 WINDING:
12.1 The 220/33 KV windings shall have graded insulation whereas the neutral points
shall be insulated as amended in IS:2026.
12.2 The transformers shall be capable of operation without danger on any particular tapping
at the rated KVA when the voltage may vary by 10% of the voltage corresponding to
the tapping.
12.3 The windings and connections as well as the insulating material shall not soften ooz,
shrink or collapse during service.
12.4 No strip conductor wound on edge shall have a width exceeding six times its thickness.
The conductors shall be transposed at sufficient intervals to minimize eddy currents and
equalize the current and temperature distribution along the windings.
12.5 The windings and connections shall be properly brazed to withstand shocks during
transportation or transient conditions during service.
12.6 Adequate pre-shrinkage of the coil assembly using pre-compressed press board
material having low moisture content for the radial spacer blocks shall be ensured by the
manufacturers so that there is no displacement of the radial spacer blocks due to
frequent short circuits on the transformers.
construction of the transformer shall be dried under vacuum and impregnated with hot
oil.
In addition to this the drying process be sufficiently extended for proper stabilization of
the coil assembly. More than one cycle of soaking in oil followed by retightening of the
coil assembly should be adopted.
12.8 The coil clamping rings wherever used shall preferably be of flat insulated steel
laminations. Axial laminated material except bakelised paper shall not be used.
12.9 The clamping arrangement shall exert equal pressure on all columns of spacers of the
transformer windings built of sections or disc-coils separated by spacers. In no case,
spiral winding will be used either for HV or LV windings.
12.10 The radial spacer blocks must be made of pre-compressed pressboard material,
which will not soften while in contact with oil or fray out into fibers or edges. The slots
should be so dimensioned that the blocks will not come out of the slots.
Uniform distribution of coil clamping force shall be designed by using an adequately
large number of coil clamping bolts and by transferring the clamping force from clamping
bolts to the clamping plates through intermediate members which can spread the
clamping force over a large area.
12.11 All joints shall be brazed/crimped considering the vibrations due to short circuits and
load fluctuations.
13.00 CURRENT DENSITY:
The HVPNL shall be at liberty to inspect built-up winding for its quality, weight of copper,
insulation and overall weight of coil assembly. The size of conductor used for different
windings shall also be checked during stage inspection to check the current density .
The transformer shall be so designed that the current density of all the windings and the
regulating winding at the lowest tap should not exceed 250 A/cm.Sq.
14.1.1 The tank shall be fabricated of a suitable grade steel and strong enough to allow the
lifting of complete transformer with oil by means of a crane or jacks and transported to
site without over-straining the joints etc.
14.1.2 The main tank body shall be capable of withstanding a vacuum of 100.64 Kn/m2
(760mm of Hg.)
14.1.3 The base shall be so designed as to allow the transformer to be moved by skidding
without any injury.
14.1.4 All channeled constructions and stiffeners shall be designed to avoid retention of
water.
14.1.5 The transformer shall preferably be of bell type tank with the joint 500 mm above the
bottom of tank.
14.1.6 The tank construction shall be free of air pockets. Where such pockets cannot be
avoided, vent pipes of 15 mm internal diameter shall be provided to vent gases into the
main expansion pipes. In case of short branch pipes, however, minimum diameter
may be taken as 6mm.
required they shall be double welded. All bolted joints to the tank shall be fitted with
suitable oil tight gaskets, which shall give satisfactory service under the operating
conditions and guaranteed temperature rise conditions. Special attention shall be
given to the methods of making hot oil tight joints between the tank and the cover and
also, between the cover and the bushings and all other out-lets to ensure that the
joints can be remade satisfactorily at site and with ease by semi-skilled labour.
14.1.8 Suitable lifting lugs for lifting the transformer filled with oil shall be provided on the
tank.
14.1.9 Four jacking lugs shall be provided to enable the transformer complete with oil to be
lifted or lowered by means of jacks. The lugs shall be fitted at a minimum height
(excluding under base if detachable) of 300mm for transformer up to 10 tons weight
and of 500mm for transformer above 10 tons weights.
14.1.10 The transformer shall be provided with detachable steel flanged wheels of 380mm
diameter and suitable for moving transformer complete with oil. These shall be suitable
for 2 rails of 1676 mm gauge along with longer axis and 2 rails of 3353 mm along with
shorter axis.

14.2 TANK COVER
14.2.1 The tank cover shall be of bolted type and of adequate strength so as not to distort,
when lifted. Suitable inspection cover shall be provided with lifting arrangements to
give access to bushings, winding connections or testing the earth connections. The
weight of each inspection cover shall not exceed 25 Kg.
14.2.2 Pockets shall be provided in the position of Max. oil temperature at CMR for fitting a
thermometer and for bolts of oil and winding temperature indicators. The thermometer
pockets shall be fitted with a captive screwed cap to prevent ingress of water.
14.2.3 Suitable No. of jacking bolts shall be provided on tank cover, inspection
covers/windows including OLTC.
14.3.1 An adequate conservator tank complete with sump and drain valves shall be provided
in such a position as not to obstruct the electrical connections to the transformer.
14.3.2 If the sump is formed by extending the feed pipe inside the conservator, this extension
shall be at least 25mm.
angle of 3 to 9 degrees to the horizontal up to Buchholz relay. The inside diameter of
the pipe shall be 80mm. The Buchholz relay will have suitable valves on its both side
so as to facilitate its testing at site as well as cut off oil supply to the transformer.
14.3.6 The conservator shall be provided with oil preservation system, which may not allow
direct contact of atmospheric air with oil during operation, in addition to silica
gel-breather.
14.4 VALVES:
mounted close to the top of the main tank & the other close to bottom of the tank oil
circulation and one drain valve of 80mm size with plug. The conservator shall have
drain plug of 25mm size.
14.4.2 Two robust sampling valves with spouts suitable for taking samples of top, and bottom
oil. The top sampling valves shall be brought down by internal pipe connections.
Suitable name plates shall be affixed to the sampling valves. The sampling device
shall not be fitted on the filter valve.
14.4.5 All valves shall be of gun metal and comply with the latest edition of IS: 3639.
A suitable pressure relief device shall be provided for rapid release of any pressure in
transformer which may endanger the equipment. The device (s) shall operate at static
opposite side of first PRD be provided.
14.6.1 Two earthing pads suitable for connecting 50x8mm mild steel flat shall be provided at
provided each on marshalling box and any other equipment mounted separately. The
earthing terminal should be capable of carrying full low voltage short circuit current of
transformer for four seconds.
14.7.1 All gaskets used for making oil tight joints shall be of granulated cork bonded with
vector relationship of different windings, plan view of the transformer showing physical
relationship of the terminals and no load voltage and corresponding current for each
tap.
14.8.2 Each transformer shall be provided with a rating plate data as specified in IS: 2026 or
equivalent international standard.
14.8.3 The transformer shall carry a valve schedule plate shorting the location and function of
all values and air release cock on plugs. This plate shall warn operators to refer to the
maintenance instructions before applying the vacuum treatment for drying.
14.8.4 I.R. values along with oil temperature at the time of testing at manufacturers works
shall be indicated on rating plate or separate plate, to be provided on transformer.

Thermosyphon filter arrangement shall be provided on the transformer for preserving
the quality of Transformer Oil. The filter assembly shall be mounted on the
Transformer as well as ground supported and connected with pipes and shut off
valves. Suitable instructions required to be followed for commissioning, dismantlement
& maintenance of the filter arrangement, re-generation and storage of the adsorbent
etc. must be included in the instruction manual. A detailed drawing showing internal
arrangement shall also be required to be submitted. Suitable capacity pump (along
with motor) shall also be provided to boost circulation of oil. The pump and motor
should not be in main pipe line. It should be in bypass pipe line having suitable valve to
isolate from main pipe line. The main pipe line should have two shut off valves at the
bottom.
NOTE : - The pump and motor should be weather proof(Flow well Type).
The oil & absorbent capacity required in the Thermosyphon Filter is as under : -

(ii) Quantity of absorbent 1.25% of total oil by weight.

15.0 NITROGEN INJECTION FIRE PROTECTION CUM EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM FOR
100 MVA TRANSFORMER
The Contractor shall provide the nitrogen injection fire protection cum extinguishing
system. The fire protection system using nitrogen as fire quenching medium is required
for the 100 MVA 220/33kV T/F NIFPES shall act as fire preventer by preventing
transformer oil tank explosion and possible fire in case of internal faults. In the event of
fire by external causes such as busing fire, OLTC fires, fire from surrounding equipment
etc, it shall act as a fast and effective fire fighter. NIFPES shall accomplish its role as fire
preventer and extinguisher without employing water and/or carbon dioxide. Fire shall be
put out within max. 3 minutes of system activation and within max. 30 seconds of
commencement of nitrogen injection.
15.1 Activation of NIFPES
Mal-functioning of fire prevention/extinguishing systems is their major shortcoming which leads
to interruption in power supply. The Contractor shall ensure that the chances of malfunctioning of
NIFPES are practically nil. To achieve this objective, the Contractor shall work out his scheme of
activating signals which, while preventing mal- operation, should not be too rigorous to make the
operation of NIFPES impracticable in case of actual need. Transformer isolation shall be the
mandatory pre-requisite for activation of the system in automatic mode or remote mode in the
control room. In addition, at least following electrical-signals shall be provided in series for
activating NIFPES.
15.1.1 Auto Mode

a) For prevention of fire:
iv) Differential relay operation
v) Buchholz relay paralleled with pressure relief valve
vi) Tripping of all connected breakers is a pre-requisite for initiation of system activation.
c) For extinguishing fire:

i) Fire detector
activation.
15.1.2 Manual Mode (Local/Remote): Tripping of all connected breakers is

activation.
15.1.3 Manual Mode (Mechanical) : Tripping of all connected breakers is a

activation.
15.2 General description of NIFPES
15.2.1 Schematic of the system

NIFPES should be a stand alone dedicated system for oil filled transformer. It should have a fire
extinguishing (F.E.) cubicle placed on a plinth at a distance of 6-10 mtrs. From the transformer.
The F.E. cubicle may be connected to the transformer oil tank (near its top) and to the oil pit (of
capacity approx. equal to 10% of transformer oil tank) from its bottom through oil pipes with gate
valves. The F.E. cubicle should house a ressurized nitrogen cylinder connected to the
transformer oil tank (near its bottom). Cable connections are to be provided from signal box
placed on the transformer to the control box in the control room and from control box to F.E.
cubicle. Fire detectors placed at the top of transformer are to be connected in parallel to the signal
box. The signal box may be connected to a pre-stressed non-return valve fitted between the
conservator tank and Buchholz relay. Control box is also to be connected to relay panel in control
room for system activation signals.
15.2.2 Operation
On receipt of all activating signals, drain of pre-determined quantity of oil commences
thus removing high temp. top oil layer. Simultaneously nitrogen is injected under high
pressure at a pre-fixed rate, stirring the oil thus bringing the temperature of top oil layer
down. Nitrogen occupies the space created by oil drained out and acts as an insulating
layer between the tank oil and fire on top cover. Pre-stressed non-return valve blocks oil
flow from conservator tank, thus isolating it & preventing aggravation of fire.
15.2.3 System components

Broadly, NIFPES shall consist of the following components. It is emphasized that
all components, irrespective of their exclusion in the details given below, necessary for
fast reliable and effective working of NIFPES shall be considered within the scope of
supply.
15.2.4 Fire Extinguishing cubicle

It shall be made of 3 mm thick steel sheet, painted dark red from inside and outside with
hinged split doors fitted with high quality tamper proof lock. It shall be complete with the
base frame and the following:-
Nitrogen gas cylinder with regulator and falling pressure electrical contact
manometer.
Oil drain pipe with mechanical quick drain valve.
Electro mechanical control equipment for oil drain and pre-determined regulated
nitrogen release.
Pressure monitoring switch for back-up protection for nitrogen release.
Limit switches for monitoring of the system.
Flanges on top panel for connecting oil drain and nitrogen injection pipes for
transformer.
Panel lighting (CFL type)
Oil drain pipe extension of suitable sizes for connecting pipes to oil pit.
15.2.5 Control box
Control box for monitoring system operation, automatic control and remote operation,
with following alarms indication, light switches, push buttons, audio signal, line fault
detection suitable for tripping and signaling on 110V DC/220V DC supply.
System on*
PNRV open*
Oil drain valve closed*
Gas inlet valve closed*
PNRV closed^
Fire detector trip^
Buchholz relay trip^
Oil drain valve open^
Extinction in progress^
Cylinder pressure low^
Differential relay trip^
PRV operated^
Transformer trip^
System out of service
Line fault fire detector
Line fault differential relay
Line fault buchholz relay
Line fault PRV
Line fault transformer trip
Line fault PNRV
Auto / Manual/Off
Extinction release on
Extinction release off
Lamp test
Visual/Audio alarm
Visual/Audio alarm
Visual/audio alarm for DC supply fail
The signals marked (*) shall be in the top most row of control box panel. The signals
marked (^) shall follow next.
15.2.6 Pre-stressed non return valve (PNRV)
PNRV is to be fitted in the conservator pipe line between conservator and Buchholz
relay. It shall have the proximity switch for remote alarm, indication and with visual
position indicator. The PNRV should be of the best quality because malfunction of PNRV
shall be of serious consequence as its closing leads to stoppage of breathing of
transformer.
15.2.7 Fire detectors

The system shall be complete with adequate number of fire detectors fitted on the top of
oil tank, OLTC/OFF ckt. tap changer rated for 141 degree C for heat sensing each fitted
with two no. cable glands (water proof/weather proof).
15.2.8 Signal box

It shall be fitted on the transformer for terminating cable connections form PNRV and fire
detectors and for further connection to the control box.
15.2.9 Cables
Fire survival cables, able to withstand 750 degree C, 4 core x 1.5 mm sq. for connection
of fire detectors in parallel shall be used.
Fire retardant low smoke (FRLS) cable 12 core x 1.5 mm sq. for connection between
transformer signal box/marshalling box to control box and control box to fire
extinguishing cubicle shall be used.
Fire retardant low smoke cable 4 core x 1.5mm sq. for connection between control box to DC
supply source and fire extinguishing cubicle to AC supply source, signal box/marshalling box to
pre-stressed non return valve connection on transformer shall be used.
15.2.10 Pipes
Pipes, complete with connections, flanges, bends tees etc. shall be supplied along with
the system.
15.3 Other items
l. oil drain and nitrogen injection openings with gate valves on transformer tank at suitable
locations.

m. Flanges with dummy piece in conservator pipe between Buchholz relay and conservator
tank for fixing PNRV.
n. Fire detector brackets on transformer top cover.
o. Spare potential free contacts for system activating signals i.e. differential relay buchholz
relay, pressure relief valve, transformer isolation (master trip relay).
p. Pipe connections between transformer to fire extinguishing cubicle and fire extinguishing
cubicle to oil pit.
q. Cabling on transformer top cover for fire detectors to be connected in parallel and inter
cabling between signal box to control box and control box to fire extinguishing cubicle.
r. Mild steel oil tank with moisture proof coating and sheet thickness of minimum 5 mm,
with watertight cover, to be placed in the oil pit. This tank shall be provided with the
manhole, air vent pipe through silica gel breather, drain valve and a spare gate valve at
the top.
The capacity of tank shall be 10,000 ltrs. And shall be provided as each S/Stn. The
location of the tank shall be approved by the HVPNL. All the Transformers to be fitted
with NISPEF at that S/Stn. shall be connected through suitable piping arrangement to
this common tank.
s. DC-DC converter 220-110V DC (optional, incase 110V, supply is not available.)
t. Gate valves on oil drain pipe and nitrogen injection pipe should be able to withstand full
vacuum. A non-return valve shall also be fitted on nitrogen injection pipe between
transformer and gate valve.
u. The F.E. cubicle shall be painted with post office red colour (shade 538 of IS-5). All the
exposed parts i.e. pipes, supports, signal box etc shall be painted with enameled paint.
v. Civil works of F.E. cubicle and oil pit are in the scope of bidder.
15.4 Interlocks
It shall be ensured that once the NIFPES gets activated manually or in auto
mode, all the connected breakers shall not close until the system is actually put in OFF
mode. Also PNRV shall get closed only if all the connected breakers are open.
15.5 Technical particulars
15.5.1 Fire extinction period
On commencement of nitrogen injection : Max. 30 secs.

From the moment of system activation to : Max. 3 mins.
Complete cooling.
Fire detectors heat sensing temperature :1410C
Heat sensing area :800mm radius
Pre-stressed non return valve setting for : minimum 60 ltr. Per operation.min.
Capacity of nitrogen cylinder : minimum 68 ltr. Water cap.
And shall hold minimum 10 cubic mete
gas to 150 bar pressure.
Power Source :
Control Box : 110V DC/220V DC
Fire extinguishing cubicle for lighting : 230V AC
16.00 COOLING PLANT:
16.1 The cooling equipment shall consist of the following:
d. 2-50 percent tank
e. 2-100% pumps one of these being stand by
f. 2-stand by fans one in each 50% Bank
connections to each cooler. Thermometer pockets with captive screwed cap at inlet
and outlet of each separate cooler, filter valve at top and bottom and air release plug of
15mm.
16.4 MOTORS:
16.4.1 The motor shall be squirrel cage totally enclosed weatherproof type suitable for direct
starting and for continuous running from 415/240 volts, three-phase/single phase 50
HZ supply. The motors shall comply with IS as applicable for continuous rated
machine.
5% and 415/240 V AC 10% variation of the normal voltage without injurious over
heating.
16.4.3 All motors shall have ball or roller bearing with hexagonal nipples for greasing. In case
of vertical spindle, motor shall have bearing capable of withstanding thrust, due to
weight of the moving parts.
16.4.4 Varnished cambric or glass insulator shall be used for connections from stator winding
to the terminal suitable for external wiring. The motor terminals shall be of stud type
and totally enclosed.
16.5 COOLER CONTROL:
connector with control gear for motor operation by hand and automatically through
16.5.2 All connection shall be so arranged as to allow either individual or collective operation
of the motors. Alarm indication (audio and visual) for failure of fans and to indicate
failure of power supply shall be provided.
a readily accessible position.
16.5.4 The alarm indication for failure of power supply and failure of individual fans be
provided through independent non trip alarm scheme to be wired on the remote tap
charger control cubicle conforming to the following. : -
ii) The closing of an initiating contact shall glow a lamp, which will not reset until
the fault has been cleared.
iii) It shall be possible to silence the buzzer by pressing Accept push button. If,
after canceling the alarm but before resetting the visual signal, the same fault
persists the buzzer shall be suppressed.
iv) If after canceling the alarm but before resetting the visual signal, some other
fault takes place, the alarm accompanied by flag indication on appropriate
auxiliary relay shall take place.
v) If after canceling the alarm and after resetting the visual signal, the same fault
appears or some other fault takes place, the alarm, flag indication and non-trip
lamp indication shall reappear as usual.
vi) The non-trip alarm acceptance shall be by means of push button and resetting
of visual signal may also preferably be done through a push button.
vii) Means shall be provided for test checking the lamp and alarm circuit at
frequent intervals.
Static facia aunnuciator conforming to the foregoing requirements of non-trip
17.00 VOLTAGE CONTROL (ON LOAD TYPE):
17.1 The transformer shall by provided with OLTC which apart from being suitable for local
manual/electrical operation & remote electrical operation.
17.2 Equipment for local and remote electrical and local' manual operation shall be
in use.
operations.
17.2.6 The local control switches shall be mounted, in the drive gear housing.
follows: -
Thermostatically controlled heaters shall be provided in the driving mechanism
fungi etc.
relay. A separate buchholz relay may be provided for this compartment.
be provided with adequate breathing arrangement. The tap changer shall be mounted
in such a way that the cover of the transformer can be lifted without removing
connections between windings and tap changer.
be standard 415 Volts, three-phase, 3 wire, 50 Hz. alongwith 240 Volts single phase,
2 wire 50 Hz, subject to a variation of 5 percent so that the equipment offered can
17.21 The indigenous make OLTC having voltage rating as 132 kV & current rating 300
Amp. should be duly type tested from CPRI or other Govt. test house or reputed lab
from abroad to the extent the facilities of type test available with CPRI.
18.0 PARALLEL OPERATION:

18. 1 In addition to individual control of tap changer, provision shall be made to enable
transformer.
step.
19.0 BUSHING INSULATORS AND TERMINALS:
HV bushing: 245 kV class, condenser bushing of 800 Amp. rating without arcing
horns.
L.V. Bushing: 72.5/36 kV class condenser bushing of 1000/2000 Amp. rating without
arcing horns.
Neutral Bushing: 36 kV class oil communicating type porcelain bushing of 1000/2000
Amp. rating without arcing horns.
3347.
copper shall be connected to the connector in the helmet of the 220/33 KV
air.
Bi-metallic terminal connectors shall be supplied suitable for single Tarantulla
conductor for HV side & twin AAC Tarantulla conductor for LV side and neutral
side. The take off for H.V. & L.V. connectors will be Vertical and for Neutral it
should be suitable for horizontal take off.
conform to designation Grade 4600 of IS: 617-1975. The steel bolts, nuts washers
and check nuts shall be hot dip galvanized marked with ISI certification mark or of
GKW make.

21.1 The transformer shall be provided with a gas and oil actuated relay fitted with alarm
vent.
22.00 MARSHALING BOX: -
trench.
FUSES: -
The losses at principal tap of each transformer shall be stated in the tender. The
manufacture shall state separately no load, load and Auxiliary losses at rated
frequency & voltage and load losses corresponding to OFAF rating (at full load at
750C) for fair comparison of difference of losses. It is essential that tenderers quote
firm losses.
shall be capitalized as per formula given below:
=3,86,700 (Wi + 0.45 Wc + 0.45Wp)
Where
Wi = Iron (No. Load ) Losses
Wc = Copper (Load) Losses
Wp = Auxilary Losses
25.00 and no positive tolerance shall be allowed on these values.
25.00 Losses:-
The losses of each transformer shall be stated in the tender for OFAF at principal tap
rating (at full load at 75 deg. C) which shall be less than:-
Sr. Type of Losses 100 MVA 220/33KV T/F

No.
1 No load losses 54 KW (Max)
2 Load Losses 274 KW (Max)
3 Auxiliary Losses 8KW (Max)
4 overall average wt. losses (based on 163KW (Max.)
capitalisation formula of W i+0.45 (W p+W c)
25.1 Noise level : Max. 80 dB
Transformer offers shall be rejected if audible sound level is higher than max. 80 dB.
26.00 TESTS:
26.1 ROUTINE TESTS:
All routine test shall be carried out on each transformer as per IS-2026 in the
presence of HVPNL's representative.
26.2 TYPE TESTS :

The following type tests shall be carried out on one transformer as per ISS:2026 in
the presence of HVPNL's representative.
vi) Temperature rise test (along with DGA)
vii) Impulse voltage withstand test as per clause 13 of ISS-2026/1981 Part-III on one
limb.
There will not be any separate schedule for type test charges. The charges if any may
be included in bid price.
In addition, the following tests shall be carried out on the Transformer Tank:
occur.
26.2.2 Following tests shall be carried out on each transformer as reference test:
vii) Measurement of tan delta and capacitor of T/F Winding and bushings at 5 kV &
10 kV.
viii) Magnetic balance test.
ix) Magnetising current at low voltage
x) Measurement of percentage impedance at all taps at low voltage.
xi) Partial discharge test.
xii) Noise level test.

26.3 The HVPNL reserves the right to have any other, reasonable test carried out at his
a. CORE:-
viii) Tests of CRGO sample taken from the core shall be carried-out for Carlite test
Tests.
ix) Physical inspection for quality of workmanship.
x) Slitting/Cutting of core.
b. WINDINGS:
c. TANK:
i) Vacuum Test:
100.64 kN (760 mm of hg). The tanks to be designed for full vacuum shall be
tested at an internal pressure of 3.33 KN/M2 (25mm of Hg.) for one hour.
The permanent deflection of flat plates after the vacuum has been released shall
not exceed the values given below without affecting the performance of the
Transformer.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Horizontal length of flat plate(mm). Permanent deflection(mm).
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
751-1250 6.5
1251-1750 8.0
1751-2000 9.5
2001-2250 11.0
2251-2500 12.5
2501-3000 16.0
above 3000 19.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ii) PRESSURE TEST:
One transformer tank out of the lot shall be subject to the pressure corresponding to
twice the normal head of oil or normal pressure plus 35KN/M2 (which ever is lower)
measured at the base of the tank and maintained for one hour. The permanent
deflection of flat plates after removal of excess pressure shall not exceed the figures
specified as above.
d. RADIATORS:
Radiator shall be routine and type tested at sub Contractors' work as per relevant
NOTE:
a. The insulation resistance values of the transformer windings will be recorded at
VIGNOLE MAKE). The polarisation index values (ratio of 120/20 sec. value)
will be accordingly calculated and recorded in the test certificates and it should
not be less than 1.5.
test at CPRI.
Contractor shall submit in-house test certificate at least 15 days in advance for final
testing of transformer. For testing T/F, all measuring instruments shall be of highest
efficiency and best quality. These shall be got calibrated from NPL/ Govt. Agency
and be got sealed by calibrating agency. HVPN reserves the right to calibrate the
instruments in the manner it desires.
Losses shall be measured with 3-wattmeter method only. Resistance shall be taken
with Double-Kelvin Bridge. Losses can be measured directly from CTs and PTs and
not through the panel. Ratio of the measuring instrument shall be such that the
multiplying factor is the minimum.
All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the HVPNL before dispatching the
material. Test certificates in quadruplicate will be submitted to the HVPNL for
approval. No material shall be despatched without prior inspection and approval of
test certificates unless otherwise agreed to. Type and routine test certificates of all
bought out items from recognised testing agency shall be submitted for approval
before commencing supplies. OLTC scheme including the master follower
functioning shall also be checked. Only fully assembled transformer including
mounting of radiators shall be put-up for inspection.
27.00 DRAWINGS:
27.1.2 Bushing and terminal connectors drawing.
27.2 The bidder shall submit four sets of final version of all the above drawings for
HVPNL's approval along with the tender in a separate seal cover. These drawings
will be opened in the event of order. The HVPNL shall communicate his
comments/approval on the drawings to the Contractor within four weeks of the issue
of LOI. The manufacturer shall, if necessary, modify the drawings and resubmit the
same for HVPNL's approval within two weeks of receipt of comments. Such duly
revised drawings will be approved by the HVPNL within two weeks of their receipt.
After receipt of HVPNL's approval to drawings, the manufacturer will submit a set of
reproducible of all the approved drawings and will also supply five sets of all
approved drawings and five sets of manual of instructions per transformer to
Substation Design Directorate HVPNL Panchkula.
ONE SET OF ALL THE APPROVED DRAWINGS AND MANUAL OF INSTRUCTIONS WILL BE
SUPPLIED ALONGWITH EACH TRANSFORMER WITHOUT WHICH THE SUPPLY WILL NOT
BE CONSIDERED AS COMPLETE SUPPLY.
27.2.1 Outline general arrangement drawings showing plan, front elevation & side elevation
with all fittings and accessories etc. The following information must be specifically
included on the drawings.
h. Weight of oil, bare copper weight windings, core, un-tanking mass,
transportation mass and dimensions etc.
27.2.2 Detailed of bushings showing plan, elevation, terminal details, mounting details make
and type number incorporating electrical characteristics, description of various parts,
total creepage/ & protected creepage distance, weight of oil, total weight of bushing ,
dimensions, short time current rating etc.
connections.
27.2.4 Schematic control and wiring diagram for auxiliary equipment like OLTC control gear,
cooler control gear, Marshaling Kiosk. Detailed write-up for schematic shall also be
supplied
kiosk.
27.2.9 Detailed calculations showing short circuit withstand capacity due to radial and axial
forces during short circuit and calculation for thermal withstand capability during
short circuit shall also be supplied.
27.2.12 Detailed drawing of NIFPES system along with its detailed write up.
28.00 LIST OF SPARES
As per schedule of requirement.
29.00 SPARE WINDING
It will be obligatory on the part of the firm to supply spare winding, if needed,
during the normal life of the transformer.
30.0 ERECTION TESTING AND COMMISSIONING AT SITE:-
The employer intends to carry-out the erection, testing and commission of the
equipment, covered by this specification departmentally with or without the
supervisory services off the contractor. Accordingly the successful bidder shall
furnish sufficient copies of complete erection drawings and instruction manuals
containing all relevant date to enable the employer to arrange the requirement tools.
Plant and instruments and to successfully install test and commission the
equipment. Complete details for filling of insulating oil, hot oil circulation, vacuum
treatment, venting of air if trapped during oil filling etc. shall be specifically covered
in the manuals. Full details of commissioning tests shall also be furnished.
The employer may at his option avail the services of contractor engineer(s) for
supervision of erection, testing and commissioning of the equipment for which
bidder should indicate the charges separately.
These charges and other terms and conditions shall be valid for one and a half
years after the supply of the equipment. The contractor shall also furnish, if
necessary, special erection, tools and plant instruments on rental basis.
32.0 SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS.

These particulars shall be furnished by the tenderers along with their tenders strictly.

SECTION-3
CHAPTER-3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 20/25 MVA 132/33kV
POWER TRANSFORMERS
1.0 SCOPE:
a) This specification covers the Design, Engineering, manufacture, testing, supply
on CIP basis, transportation to site, insurance, storage, testing and
commissioning of 20/25 MVA 132/33 kV Power Transformers.
of all accessories and hardware shall be subject to purchasers approval.
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS:
of bid. The following standards and codes shall be applicable: -
BS:148/IEC-296
IS:375 Marking & arrangement of Switch-gear bus bars main connections and
auxiliary wiring.
&IEC:76
& 3347
IS:2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage switchgear &
control gear.
&IEC-354
&IEC:214
IS:5561 Electric power connectors.
IS:8603 Dimensions for porcelain transformer bushings for use in heavily polluted
atmosphere(36 kV Class). Dimensions for oil filled porcelain transformer
bushings for use in medium polluted atmosphere.
equipment.
transformers.
Equipment complying with other internationally accepted standards will also be
The transformers are required to operate satisfactorily under the following site
conditions:
3.1 Max. temperature 50 C
3.2 Min. temperature -2.5 C
3.4 Min. relative humidity 26 %
3.5 Average number of rainy days per annum Nearly120 days
3.7 Average number of dust storm days per annum. 35
3.9 Max. Wind pressures 195 kg/sqmt.
3.10 Altitude above mean sea level Less than 1000 mt.
4.0 TYPE AND RATING :
4.1 The transformer shall be of two winding, 3 phase oil immersed core type with
ONAN/ONAF cooling suitable for outdoor service as step down transformers.
The transformer shall not be provided with the tertiary delta winding.
4.2 The ratings and other characteristics which are not covered elsewhere shall be,
as detailed in following clauses:
a) ONAN 20 MVA
b) ONAF 25 MVA
4.2.3 Frequency 50 Hz
(5%)
4.2.4 Rated Voltage :
a) HV side 132kV
b) LV side 33kV
4.2.5 Connections :
a) HV side Star
b) LV side Star
4.2.6 Vector group YYO
4.2.7 %age Impedance 10% at
25 MVA base
4.2.8 ON load taps on HV side +5% to -15% in steps of 1.25% each
4.2.9 a) Insulation level 132 kV 33 kV
i) Lighting withstand 550 kV 170kV
ii) Power frequency 230 kV 70 kV
withstand voltage (rms) (rms)
b) Insulation level of Bushings
i) Lighting Impulse 650 kV 170kV
voltage
ii) Power frequency 275 kV 70 kV
voltage (rms) (rms)
4.2 10 Total Creepage Distance :
a) Total: 25mm per kV corresponding to highest system voltage i.e.
145 kV, 36 kV, 12 kV.
b) Protected: 50% of the total Creepage distance
5.0 GENERAL DESIGN OF TRANSFORMER: -
5.1 The transformer and accessories shall be so designed as to facilitate inspection,
cleaning and repairs. The requirement of Indian Electricity Rules shall be kept in view.
5.2 The design shall ensure satisfactory operation under severe working conditions due to
fluctuating load of steel furnaces and voltage variations in the system including those,
due to short circuits. The transformers shall be designed as to minimize the risk of
accidental short circuits caused by animals, birds or vermins.
The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety of
all those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the equipment keeping in the
view the requirement of Indian Electricity Board.
5.3 All material used shall be of the best quality and of class most suitable for working under
specified conditions and shall withstand the atmospheric conditions and temperature
variations without undue deterioration or distortion or setting up of undue stress in any
part thereof.
5.6 All taper pins to be used in the mechanism shall be split types as per latest edition of IS:
2393.
5.8 The construction shall be such as to avoid air or water pockets. Special care shall be
exercised to reduce noise and vibration to the minimum level.
5.9 Steel bolts of suitable finish will be used for diameters above 6mm. Brass bolts or studs
used for electrical connections shall not be of less than 6mm dia. On outdoor
equipment, all bolts, nuts & washers in contact with current carrying non-ferrous parts
shall be phosphor bronze:
5.10 All nuts bolts and pins shall be locked except those which are external to the
transformer. If bolts and nuts are so placed as to be inaccessible by means of ordinary
spanners, suitable special spanners shall be provided by the supplier.
5.11 Labels shall be provided for all apparatus like relays, switches, fuses, etc. housed in any
cubicle or marshaling kiosks. These shall be of incorrodible material with matt/satin
finish and permanent lettering. Labels mounted on black surface shall have white
letters & danger notices shall have red lettering on a white background. The labels shall
be secured by means of brass screws or rust protected steel screws.
5.13 Before painting, all ungalvanised parts shall be cleaned made free from rust, scale and
grease and external rough surfaces smoothened filled with metal deposition. The
interior of the tank and other oil filled chambers shall be cleaned by shot blasting or any
other suitable method.
5.14 All external surfaces shall be given three coats of paints except for nuts, bolts and
washers which may be given one coat after erection. The final coat shall be a glossy oil
and weather proof, non-fading paints of shade 631 of IS:5.
5.15 The interior of mechanism chambers and kiosks shall be given 3 coats of paint, the final
coat being of a light coloured anti-condensation mixture.
5.16 LOCKING OF OUTER RADIAL SPACERS:-
The outer most radial spacers of the winding shall be locked in position by means of
vertical strips so that the same can not fall off/got displaced.
5.17 TIGHTENING OF THE NUTS OF THE COIL CLAMPING BOLTS:-
The proper & complete tightening of the nuts of the coil clamping bolts must be ensured
by the manufacturers. The tightening of the nuts to the designed value and that the nuts
of all the coils clamping bolts are tightened to same extent, should be carried out with
torque spanners.
The devices used for locking the nuts of coil clamping bolts must be of such a quality and such
care should be taken first in tightening the nuts and next in locking them in position that the
arrangement does not work loose due to vibrations caused by short circuits and fluctuating loads
etc.
5.18 The noise level shall not be more than 5db above NEMA standard publication TR-1.
5.19 The transformers shall be designed to have short circuit rating of two seconds as per
ISS-2026.
6.0 INSULATING OIL:-
Sufficient insulating oil of Napthenic type (made from Naphthenic crude) in which
paraffinic content should be less than 50% and aromatic content 4 to 12% conforming to
BS: 148/IEC:296 class-1 shall be supplied for first filling of each transformer. Particular
attention shall be paid to deliver the oil at site free from moisture and of uniform quality
through out in non-returnable steels drums. The quantity of oil for first filling of each
transformer shall be stated in tender along-with trade mark of the oil to be supplied. Use
of inhibitors in oil shall not be resorted to. 10% extra oil of the total quantity of oil shall be
supplied along with the transformer.
7.0 LIMIT OF TEMPERATURE RISE:-

7.1 With the above climatic conditions given in clause-3 each transformer shall be capable
of operating continuously on any tap at their normal rating without exceeding the
following temperature rises
(i) 50 deg C in oil by thermometer
(ii) 55 deg C in winding by resistance
(iii) Winding Gradient i.e the difference between average winding average oil
temperature not to exceed 13 deg C.
(iv) Temperature of hot spot in windings not to exceed 98 deg C when calculated
over max annual weighted average temperature of 32 deg C.
manufacturer by carrying out the heat run test at the lowest negative tap. This test shall
be carried out by feeding 1.1 times the total losses at 75 deg C at highest current tap.
7.3 OVERLOAD CAPACITY & CONTINOUS RATING
The safe overload capacity of the transformer and the duration of overload under maximum
temperature conditions without any damage to the winding or harmful effects on the insulation
shall be clearly stated in the tender which must be asper IEC-354/IS6600,guide for loading of oil
immersed transformer.
8.0 IMPEDANCE
The transformer shall have 10% impedance on 25 MVA base respectively with tolerance
as per IS:2026/Part-I(1983). Impedance shall include positive and zero sequence and
shall be expressed in terms of the branches of star connected equivalent diagram, all on
the same kVA base and range shall be given for each branch of the equivalent circuit in
turn.
9.0 FREQUENCY:-
The transformer shall be suitable for continuous operation with a 5% frequency variation from a
normal of 50 HZ without exceeding the temperature rise as specified in clause-7.1 above.

10.0 FLUX DENSITY, CORE CONSTRUCTION and INSPECTION
10.1 The transformer should be so designed that the working flux density should not exceed
1.57 Tesla at normal voltage, frequency.
10.3 The core shall be built up with thin laminations of high grade. non-ageing, low loss, high
permeability cold rolled super grain oriented silicon steel. Known as MOH High B Grade
or superior grade CRGO steels of maximum 0.27 mm or low lamination thickness
especially suitable for transformer core.
10.4(a) (i)Bidder should have in house core cutting facility for proper monitoring & control on
quality and also to avoid any possibility of mixing of prime material with defective/second
grade material. The purchaser may witness the core-cutting operation. In case the in
house core cutting facility for core cutting is not available then the same shall be carried
out in the presence of the representative of HVPN.
(ii)Inspection call notice for the purpose should be accompanied with the following
documents as applicable as a proof toward use of Prime core materials :-
c) Packing list.
d) Bill of loading.
Core material shall be directly procured either from the manufacturer or through their
accredited marketing organisation of repute and not through any agent.
10.4(b) After being sheared, the laminations shall be treated to remove all burrs. They shall be
coated with a baked enamel insulation coating. The insulation shall be inert to the
action of hot transformer oil and shall be perfectly adhesive. Paper and varnish
insulation shall not be accepted. Particulars of proposed insulation shall be stated in the
tender. Laminations shall be checked for burrs during stage inspection.
10.5 The core shall be rigidly clamped and/or bolted to ensure adequate mechanical strength
and to prevent vibrations during operation. The bolts used in the assembly of the core
shall be suitably insulated and the clamping structure shall be constructed that the eddy
currents will be minimum.
10.6 Construction of the core shall be such that number of steps in the limb and yoke shall
be matching and dimensionally identical to minimize the effect of cross fluxing and
better mechanical strength.
10.7 The core shall be provided with Lugs suitable for lifting the complete core and coil
assembly of transformer. The Core & coil shall be fixed in the tank such that its shifting
will not occur when the transformer in moved or when a short circuit occurs.
10.8 The design of magnetic circuit shall be such as to avoid static discharge development
of short circuit paths within itself or to the earthing clamping structure and the
production of flux components at right angles to the plane of the lamination which may
cause local heating.

10.9 Every care shall be exercised in the selection treatment and handling of core steel to
ensure that the laminations are flat and that finally assembled core is free from
distortions.
10.10 The supporting frame work of the core shall be so designed as to avoid the presence
of pockets which would prevent complete emptying of the tank through the drain valve
or cause trapping of air during filling.
10.11 Oil ducts where necessary should be formed across the plane of the lamination and be
given a suitable slope to assist oil circulation. The overall design of core and winding
should be such that free flow of oil is not obstructed.
10.12 The frame work and clamping arrangement shall be earthed by connecting to the tank
body through a copper strip. Yoke bolt area should be compensated if bolts are used
for fastening of the core.
10.13 The insulation of core to bolts and core to clamp plates shall be able to withstand a
voltage of 2 KV RMS for one minute.
installation, service and adequate provision shall be made to prevent movement of
core and winding relative to tank during these conditions.
10.15 All steel sections used for supporting the core shall be thoroughly sand blasted after
cutting drilling and welding.
considered.
10.17 The tenderers should indicate the maximum flux density allowable continuously as
well as for time intervals of 1 minute and 5 secs. and the limit of flux density at which
core material used by them saturates.
10.18 The name of the core material must be mentioned in the tender. The successful
tenderer shall be required to furnish magnetization curves of the core material/design
calculations and such other data/documents deemed fit by the Purchaser for being
satisfied that flux density is as desired.
10.19 Purchaser shall inspect the built-up core for verification of flux density for which all
facilities shall be provided. The purchaser shall inspect/test the core material for
various tests as per relevant IEC/IS to ensure quality. Core may also be inspected
during horizontal assembly, built-up assembly.
NOTES :
i) The above flux density has been specified to meet with the over fluxing of the core
due to temporary over voltage of the order of 31% for l min, 44%for 5 sec. that may
appear abnormal conditions such as those following sudden loss of large loads.
ii) Yoke bolt area and flitch plate areas shall not be counted in the net core area if these
are provided for fastening core.
iii) The design of limb and yoke shall be so co-ordinate that there is no cross fluxing at
the joints.
11. SUPPRESSION OF HARMONICS:
12. WINDINGS:-
12.1 The 132kV windings shall have graded insulation whereas all other windings shall be
fully insulated and the neutral points shall be insulated as amended in IS:2026.
12.2 The transformers shall be capable of operation without danger on any particular tapping
at the rated kVA when the voltage may vary by 10% of the voltage corresponding to the
tapping.
12.3 The windings and connections, insulation material shall not soften, ooze out, shrink or
collapse during service.
12.4 No strip conductor wound on edge shall have a width exceeding six times its thickness.
12.5 The windings and connections shall be properly brazed to withstand shocks during
12.6 The adequate pre-shrinkage of the coil assembly using pre-compressed press board
material having low moisture content for the radial spacer blocks shall be ensured by the
manufacturers so that there is no displacement of the radial spacer blocks due to
oil.
12.8 The coil clamping rings wherever used, shall preferably be of flat insulated steel
laminations. Auxiliary laminated material except bakelised paper shall not be used.
12.9 The clamping arrangement shall exert equal pressure on all columns of spacers of the
12.10 The radial spacer blocks must be made of pre-compressed pressboard material,
which will not soften while in contact with oil or fray out into fibers or edges. The slots
should be so dimensioned that the blocks will not come out of the slots.
large number of coil clamping bolts and by transferring the clamping force from clamping
bolts to the clamping plates through intermediate members which can spread the
clamping force over a large area.
12.11 All joints shall be brazed/crimped considering the vibrations due to short circuits and
load fluctuations.
13. CURRENT DENSITY:
The purchaser shall be at liberty to inspect built-up winding for its quality, weight of
copper, insulation and overall weight of coil assembly. The size of conductor used for
different windings shall also be checked during stage inspection to check the current
density. The transformer shall be so designed that the current density of all the windings
and the regulating winding at the lowest tap should not exceed 250 A/cm.Sq.
14. TANK CONSTRUCTION:-
14.1.1 The tank shall be fabricated of a suitable grade steel and strong enough to allow the
lifting of complete transformer with oil by means of a crane or jacks and transported to
site without over-straining the joints etc.
14.1.2 The main tank body shall be capable of withstanding a vacuum of 100.64 KN/m2
(760mm of Hg.)
14.1.3 The base shall be so designed as to allow the transformer to be moved by skidding
without any injury.
14.1.4 All channeled constructions and stiffeners shall be designed to avoid retention of water.
14.1.5 The tank construction shall be free of air pockets, where such pockets cannot be avoided vent
pipes of 15 mm internal dia shall be provided to vent gases into the main expansion pipes. In case
of short branch pipes, however, minimum diameter may be taken as 6mm.
required they shall be double welded. All bolted joints to the tank shall be fitted with
suitable oil tight gaskets, which shall give satisfactory service under the operating
conditions and guaranteed temperature rise conditions. Special attention shall be given
to the methods of making hot oil tight joints between the tank and the cover and also,
between the cover and the bushings and all other out-lets to ensure that the joints can
be remade satisfactorily at site and with ease by semi-skilled labour.
14.1.7 Suitable lifting lugs for lifting the transformer filled with oil shall be provided on the tank.
14.1.8 Four jacking lugs shall be provided to enable the transformer complete with oil to be
lifted or lowered by means of jacks. The lugs shall be fitted at a minimum height
(excluding under base if detachable) of 300mm for transformer upto 10 tonnes weight
and of 500mm for transformer above 10 tonnes weights.
14.1.9 The transformer shall be provided with detachable steel flanged wheels of 250mm dia
and suitable for moving transformer complete with oil. These shall be bi-directional and
mounted on swivels which may be turned through 90o when the tank is jacked up and
capable of being locked in position parallel to and at right angles to the longitudinal axis.
The wheel be suitable for standard gauge track of 1676mm.
14.2 TANK COVER
14.2.1 The tank cover shall be of bolted type and of adequate strength so as not to
distort, when lifted. Suitable inspection cover shall be provided with lifting arrangements
to give access to bushings, winding connections or testing the earth connections. The
weight of each inspection cover shall not exceed 25 Kg.
14.2.2 Pockets shall be provided in the position of Max. oil temperature at CMR for
fitting a thermometer and for bolts of oil and winding temperature indicators. The
thermometer pockets shall be fitted with a captive screwed cap to prevent ingress of
water.
14.2.3 Suitable No. of jacking bolts shall be provided on tank cover, inspection covers/windows
including OLTC.
14.3.1 An adequate conservator tank of air cell type complete with sump and drain valves shall
be provided in such a position as not to obstruct the electrical connections to the
transformer.
14.3.2 If the sump is formed by extending the feed pipe inside the conservator, this extension
shall be atleast 25mm.
angle of 3 to 9 degrees to the horizontal upto Buchholz relay. The inside diameter of
the pipe shall be 80mm. The Buchholz relay will have suitable valves on its both side
so as to facilitate its testing at site as well as cut off oil supply to the transformer.
14.3.6 The conservator shall be provided with oil preservation system, which should be
suitable either to remove moisture continuously from air entering the air space with
which they are connected or may not allow direct contact of atmospheric air with oil
during operation, in addition to silicagel-breather.
14.4 VALVES:
mounted close to the top of the main tank & the other close to bottom of the tank oil
circulation and one drain valve of 80mm size with plug. The conservator shall have
drain plug of 25mm size.
14.4.2 Two robust sampling valves with spouts suitable for taking samples of top, and bottom
oil. The top sampling valves shall be brought down by internal pipe connections.
Suitable name plates shall be affixed to the sampling valves. The sampling device
shall not be fitted on the filter valve.
14.4.5 All valves shall be of gun metal and comply with the latest edition of IS: 3639.
A suitable pressure relief device of 6" diameter shall be provided on the main tank and
of 3" diameter shall be provided on OLTC for rapid release of any pressure in
transformer, which may endanger the equipment. The device (s) shall operate at static
opposite side of the first PRD be provided.
14.6.1 Two earthing pads suitable for connecting 50x8mm mild steel flat shall be provided at
provided each on marshalling box and any other equipment mounted separately.
14.7.1 All gaskets used for making oil tight joints shall be of granulated cork bonded with
vector relationship of different windings, plan view of the transformer showing physical
relationship of the terminals and no load voltage and corresponding current for each
tap.
14.8.2 Each transformer shall be provided with a rating plate data as specified in IS: 2026.
14.8.3 I.R. values alongwith oil temperature at the time of testing at manufacturer's works
shall be indicated on rating plate or separate plate, to be provided on transformer.

Thermosyphon filter arrangement shall be provided on the transformer for preserving
the quality of Transformer Oil. The filter assembly shall be mounted on the
Transformer as well as ground supported and connected with pipes and shut off
valves. Suitable instructions required to be followed for commissioning, dismantlement
& maintenance of the filter arrangement, re-generation and storage of the adsorbent
etc. must be included in the instruction manual. A detailed drawing showing internal
arrangement, shall also be required to be submitted. Suitable capacity pump
(alongwith motor) shall also be provided to boost circulation of oil. The pump and
motor should not be in main pipe line. It should be in bypass pipe line having suitable
valve to isolate from main pipe line. The main pipe line should have two shut off valves
at the bottom.
NOTE: - The pump and motor should be weather proof (Flow well Type).
The oil & sorbent capacity required in the Thermosyphon Filter is as under: -
(ii) Quantity of adsorbent 1.25% of total oil by weight.
15. COOLING PLANT:-
15.1 Detachable radiators shall be fitted on the main tank with machined flanged outlet and
inlet. Each radiator shall be provided with 19mm drain plug at Bottom and 19mm air
release plug at the top. Valves shall be provided on the tank at each point of
connection to radiators.
connections to each cooler. 25 mm drain valve. Thermometer pockets with captive
screwed cap at inlet and outlet of each separate cooler, filter valve at top and bottom
and air release plug of 15mm.
15.4 MOTORS:-
15.4.1 The motor shall be squirrel cage totally enclosed weather proof type suitable for direct
starting and for continuous running from 415-240 volts, three phase/single phase 50 C/S
supply. The motors shall comply with IS as applicable for continuous rated machine.
5 % and 415/240 V AC 10 % variation of the normal voltage without injurious over
heating.

15.4.3 All motors shall have ball or roller bearing with hexagonal nipples for greasing. In case of
vertical spindle, motor shall have bearing capable of withstanding thrust, due to weight of
the moving parts.
15.4.4 Varnished cambric or glass insulator shall be used for connections from stator winding to
the terminal suitable for external wiring. The motor terminals shall be of stud type and
totally enclosed.
15.5 COOLER CONTROL:-
contactor with control gear for motor operation by hand and automatically through
15.5.2 All connection shall be so arranged as to allow either individual or collective operation of
the motors, Alarm indication (audio and visual) for failure of fans and to indicate failure of
power supply shall be provided.
readily accessible position.
15.5.4 The alarm indication for failure of power supply and failure of individual fans be provided
through independent non trip alarm scheme conforming to the following:-
ii) The closing of an initiating contact shall glow a lamp, which will not reset until the
fault has cleared.
iii) It shall be possible to silence the buzzer by pressing 'Accept' push button. If after
canceling the alarm but before resetting the visual signal, the same fault persists
the buzzer shall be suppressed.
iv) If after canceling the alarm but before resetting the visual signal, some other fault
takes place, the alarm accompanied by flag indication on appropriate auxiliary
relay shall taken place.
v) If after canceling the alarm and after resetting the visual signal, the same
fault appears or some other fault take place, the alarm, flag indication and
non-trip lamp indication shall reappear as usual.
vi) The non-trip alarm acceptance shall be by means of push button and resetting of
visual signal may also preferably be done through a push button.
vii) Means shall be provided for test checking the lamp and alarm circuit at frequent
intervals.
Static facia aunnuciator conforming to the foregoing requirements of non trip
16. VOLTAGE CONTROL (ON LOAD TYPE):-
16.1 The transformer shall be provided with voltage control equipment of the tap changing
type for varying its effective transformation ratio while the T/Fs are on load and without
producing phase displacement.
16.2 Equipment for 'local' and 'remote' electrical and 'local' manual operation shall be
in use.
operations.
follows: -
Thermostatically controlled heaters shall be provided in the driving mechanism
fungi etc.
relay. A separate buchholz relay may be provided for this compartment.

be provided with adequate breathing arrangement. The tap changer shall be mounted
in such a way that the cover of the transformer can be lifted without removing
connections between windings and tap changer.
be standard 415 Volts, three-phase, 3 wire, 50 Hz. alongwith 240 Volts single phase, 2
wire 50 Hz, subject to a variation of 5 percent so that the equipment offered can
16.21 The indigenous make OLTC suitable for 132 KV voltage class insulation (graded) but
the voltage class insulation should not be less than 66 KV and current rating as 300
Amp. The OLTC should be type tested from CPRI or other Govt. test house or from
reputed Lab. Abroad to the extent the facilities of type test are available with CPRI.
17.0 PARALLEL OPERATION -

17. 1 In addition to individual control of tap changer, provision shall be made to enable
similar unit of same rating.

step.
18.0 BUSHING INSULATORS AND TERMINALS:
HV bushing: 145 kV class, condenser bushing of 800 Amp. rating with arcing
horns.
L.V. Bushing: 36 kV class, oil communicating type porcelain bushing of 1000 Amp.
rating but with suitable arcing horns.
L.V.-N Bushing: 36 kV class, oil communicating type porcelain bushing of 1000 Amp.
rating but without arcing horns.
H.V-N Bushing: 36 kV class, oil communicating type porcelain bushing of 630 Amp.
rating but without arcing horns.
3347.
The bushing insulators except for neutral bushing shall be provided with adjustable
arcing horns and the bidder shall furnish calibration gap to decide actual gap
setting.
copper shall be connected to the connector in the helmet of the 220/132 kV
air.
Bi-metallic terminal connectors shall be supplied suitable for single 0.4 Sq. inch
ACSR Zebra conductor for HV, LVN & HVN and twin ACSR Zebra conductor for
LV side . The take off for H.V. & L.V. connectors will be Vertical and for Neutral it
should be suitable for horizontal take off.
conform to designation Grade 4600 of IS: 617-1975. The steel bolts, nuts washers
and check nuts shall be hot dip galvanized marked with ISI certification mark or of
GKWmake.
20.1 The transformer shall be provided with a gas and oil actuated relay fitted with alarm
vent.
21.0 MARSHALING BOX:
trench.
FUSES: -
The losses at principal tap of each transformer shall be stated in the tender ONAF
rating at full load at 750C.
shall be capitalised as per capitalization formula given below:
=3,86,700( Wi + 0.45 Wc + 0.45 Wp)
Where
Wi = Iron (No load) Losses
Wc = Copper (Load Losses)
Wp = Auxiliary Losses
24.0 and no positive tolerance shall be allowed on these values

within three years from the date of commissioning the capaitalized value of excess losses,
as compare to the specified value shall be recovered as per following capitalization
formula:-
Amount recoverable (Rs.)= 3,86,700 (Wi + 0.45 Wc + 0.45Wp).
24.0 Losses:-
The losses of each transformer shall be stated in the tender for OFAF rating at
principal tap (at full load at 75 deg. C) which shall be less than:-
Sr. No. Type of Losses 25 MVA, 132/33 KV T/F

1 No Load Losses 23 KW (Max)
2 Load Losses 100 KW(Max)
3 Auxiliary Losses 2.2 KW (Max)
4 Maximum weighted average losses 62 KW
24.1 Noise level : 80 dB

Transformer offers shall be rejected if audible sound level is higher than max.80 dB.
25. TESTS:
25.1 ROUTINE TESTS:
All routine test shall be carried out on each transformer as per IS-2026/ IEC-76. In the
presence of purchasers representative.
25.2 TYPE TEST
Following type test shall be carried out on one transformer as per ISS 2026 in the
presence of purchasers representative.
(i) Temperature rise test (along with DGA).
(ii) Impulse voltage withstand test as per clause 13 of ISS-2026 /1981 Part-III on one
limb.
25.3 In addition, the following tests shall be carried out on the Transformer Tank:
occur.
25.3.2 Following tests shall be carried out on each transformer as reference test
i. Measurement of tan delta and capacitor of T/F Winding and bushings at 5 kV &
10 kV.
ii. Magnetic balance test.
iii. Magnetising current at low voltage
iv. Measurement of percentage impedance at all taps at low voltage.


The warranty in case of Power Transformer shall be 18 months from the date of
commissioning or 24 months from the date of receipt whichever is earlier. All
other stipulations of Warranty Clause as per Schedule-D of purchase regulation
shall remain same.
25.4 The purchaser reserves the right to have any other, reasonable test carried out at his

a. CORE:
iii) Tests of CRGO sample taken from the core shall be carried-out for Carlite test
Tests.
iv) Physical inspection for quality of workmanship.
v) Slitting/Cutting of core.
b. WINDINGS:
c. TANK:
i) Vacuum Test:
100.64 kN (760 mm of hg). The tanks to be designed for full vacuum shall be
tested at an internal pressure of 3.33 KN/M2 (25mm of Hg.) for one hour.
The permanent deflection of flat plates after the vacuum has been released shall
not exceed the values given below without affecting the performance of the
Transformer.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------
Horizontal length of flat plate(mm). Permanent deflection(mm).
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------
751-1250 6.5
1251-1750 8.0
1751-2000 9.5
2001-2250 11.0
2251-2500 12.5
2501-3000 16.0
above 3000 19.0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------
ii) PRESSURE TEST:
One transformer out of the lot shall be subject to the pressure corresponding to
twice the normal head of oil or normal pressure plus 35KN/M2 (which ever is
lower) measured at the base of the tank and maintained for one hour. The
permanent deflection of flat plates after removal of excess pressure shall not
exceed the figures specified as above.
d. RADIATORS:
Radiator shall be routine and type tested at sub suppliers' work as per relevant
NOTE: a. The insulation resistance values of the transformer windings will be recorded at
VIGNOLE MAKE). The polarisation index values (ratio of 120/20 sec. value) will
be accordingly calculated and recorded in the test certificates and it should not
be less than 1.5.
test at CPRI.
Supplier shall submit in house test certificates at least 15 days in advance for
final testing of T/F. For testing T/F, all measuring instruments shall be of highest
efficiency and best quality. These shall be got calibrated from NPL/ Govt. Agency
and be got sealed by calibrating agency. HVPN reserves the right to calibrate
the instruments in the manner it desires.
Losses shall be measured with 3-wattmeter method only. Resistance shall be
taken with Double-Kelvin Bridge. Losses can be measured directly from CTs and
PTs and not through the panel. Ratio of the measuring instrument shall be such
that the multiplying factor is the minimum.
All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Purchaser before dispatching
the material. Test certificates in quadruplicate will be submitted to the Purchaser
for approval. No material shall be despatched without prior inspection and
approval of test certificates unless otherwise agreed to. Type and routine test
certificates of all bought out items from recognised testing agency shall be
submitted for approval before commencing supplies. OLTC scheme including the
master follower functioning shall also be checked. Only fully assembled
transformer including mounting of radiators shall be put-up for inspection.
26. DRAWINGS:
26.1.2.1 Bushing and terminal connectors drawing.
26.2 The successful bidder shall submit final version of drawings complete in all
respects in quadruplicate within 15 days of placement of order for purchaser's
approval. The purchaser shall communicate his comments/ approval on the
drawings to the supplier within one month of their receipt. The manufacturer
shall, if so required by the purchaser, modify the drawings and resubmit the
same for purchaser's approval within two weeks of receipt of comments. Such
duly revised drawings will be approved by the purchaser within two weeks of their
receipt.
After receipt of purchaser's approval to drawings, the manufacturer will submit
five sets of all approved drawings and five sets of manual of instructions to our
Design Office.
One set of all the approved drawings and manual of instructions will be
supplied along with each equipment without which the supply will not be
considered as complete supply.
26.2.1 Outline general arrangement drawings showing plan, front elevation & side
elevation with all fittings and accessories etc. The following information must be
specifically included on the drawings.
h. Weight of oil, bare copper weight windings, core, un-tanking mass, transportation
mass and dimensions etc.
26.2.2 Detailed of bushings showing plan, elevation, terminal details, mounting details
make and type number incorporating electrical characteristics, description of
various parts, total creepage/ & protected creepage distance, weight of oil, total
weight of bushing , dimensions, short time current rating etc.
connections.
26.2.4 Schematic control and wiring diagram for auxiliary equipment like OLTC control
gear, cooler control gear, Marshaling Kiosk. Detailed write-up for schematic shall
also be supplied
kiosk.
26.2.9 Detailed calculations showing short circuit with stand capability due to radial and
axial forces during short circuit. Also calculation for thermal withstand capability
during short circuit.

SECTION-4
CHAPTER-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 245 kV, 145 kV & 72.5 kV SF6 GAS CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1.0 SCOPE:
1.1 This specification provides for design, engineering, manufacture, stage testing,
inspection and testing before supply, packing, forwarding and delivery at site FOR
destination of 245 kV, 145 kV and 72.5 kV, 3 pole SF6 gas filled outdoor circuit breakers
along with terminal connectors, structures, all the accessories and auxiliary equipment
and mandatory spares and maintenance equipment for the satisfactory operation in
various substations of the state as specified here in.
1.2 It is not the intent to specify completely all the details of design and construction of the
circuit breakers. However, the breakers shall conform in all respects to the high standard
of engineering design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in
continuous commercial operation up to the Bidders guarantee in a manner acceptable
to the Purchaser. The circuit breakers equipment shall conform in all respects to high
standards of engineering design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in
continuous commercial operation up to the bidders guarantee acceptable to the
purchaser. The equipment offered shall be complete in all respect necessary for its
effective and trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed to be within the
scope of supply irrespective of whether those are specially brought out in this
specification and or the commercial order or not. All similar parts particularly movable
ones shall be interchangeable.
2.0 STANDARDS:
2.1 The circuit breakers shall conform to the latest revisions with amendments available at the time of
testing of relevant standards, rules and codes, some of which are listed herein for ready reference.
Sl. No. Standard No.

Title
1. IEC-56 Specification for alternating current circuit breakers.
2. IEC-376 Specification and acceptance of new supply of sulphur
hexafluoride.
3. IS-5578& 11353 Making and arrangement for switchgear bus-bar, main
connections and auxiliary wiring.
4. IS-2147 Degree of protection provided for enclosures for low voltage
switchgear and control gear.
5 IS-325 Specification for three phase induction motors.
6. IS-13118 Specification for circuit breakers.
7. IS-2629 Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing
of iron and steel.
8. IEC-137 Bushings for AC Voltages.
9. IS-2099 High voltage porcelain bushings.
10. IS-4379 Identification of the contents of Industrial Gas Cylinders.
11. IS-7285 Seamless high carbon steel cylinders for permanent and
high pressure liquefiable gases
12. IS-802 Code of practice for use of structural steel in (PART-1)
overhead transmission line towers.
2.2 Equipment meeting with the requirement of other authoritative Standards, which ensure
equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above, shall also be considered. When the
equipment offered by the supplier conforms to other standards salient points of difference between
standards adopted and the standards specified in this specification shall be clearly brought out in the
relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with authentic translation in English shall be
furnished along with the offer.
3.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS:

The breakers and accessories to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory
continuous operation under the following tropical conditions.

ii) Max ambient air temp.( 0 C) 50
iii) Min ambient air temp.(C) -2.5
iv) Max relative humidity.(%) 100
v) Min relative humidity. (%) 26
vi) Average annual rainfall.(mm) 900
vii) Max wind pressure (Kg/mm2) 195
viii) Max altitude above mean sea level (meters) 1000
ix) Isoceraunic level (days/year) 45
3.1 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY:
Auxiliary electrical equipment shall be suitable for operation on the following supply
system.
a. Power Devices 415 V, 3 phase 4 wire 50 Hz,
(like drive motors) Neutral grounded AC supply.
b. D.C. Alarm, control Two independent sources of 220 V DC, ungrounded 2 wire
Protective Device Substation wise exact details shall be furnished to the
Successful bidder
c. Lighting 240 V, single phase, 50 Hz AC supply.
Each of the foregoing supplies shall be made available by the Purchaser at the terminal point for
each circuit breaker for operation of accessories and auxiliary equipment. Bidder's scope include

supply of interconnecting cables, terminal boxes etc., The above supply voltage may vary as below
and all devices shall be suitable for continuous operation over the entire range of voltages.
i) AC supply : voltage + 10% & -15%, frequency 5%

ii) D.C. Supply : 10%.
4.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:
The SF-6 gas Circuit Breakers covered in this specification shall meet the technical requirements
listed hereunder.
PRINCIPAL TECHNICAL PARAMETERS:

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------
Sl. Item Specification
No. 72.5 kV 145 kV 245 kV
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------
1. Rated voltage (kV rms), 72.5 145 245
frequency (Hz.) 50 50 50
2. Continuous current 1250 1000 1250
rating (A rms)
3. Type 3 pole outdoor SF6
4. Mounting Hot dip galvanised lattice steel support structure,
bolted type to be supplied by the Bidder.
5. Number of Poles 3 3 3
6. Type of Operation 3 pole gang 3 pole gang Individually
Operated operated operated
single poles
7. Phase to phase spacing 1400 1700 4000
in the switchyard i.e.
Interpole spacing for
breaker (mm)
8. Required ground 3000 4000 5000
clearance from the lowest
live terminal if both the
terminals are not in
the same horizontal plane. (mm)
9. Phase to earth 800 1300 2400
clearance (mm)
10. Height of concrete plinth 150 150 150
(to be provided by the
Purchaser) (mm)
11. Minimum height of the 2550 2550 2550
lowest part of the ( Bidders offering lesser clearances must
support insulator from substantiate the same with adequate
ground level (mm). Information on impulse test withstand
capability of equipment)
12. Operating mechanism Spring / Pneumatic Spring / Pneumatic
(with unit compressor) (with unit compressor)
13 Auto reclosing duty Three Three Single and
phase phase three phase
14. Rated operating duty 0-0.3 sec. -CO- 3 min -CO cycle
15. "First pole to clear" As per IS-13118
factor (Type of tripping) (Trip free)
16. Max. closing time (ms) ------------- 150 ------------
17. Max. total break time (ms) Less than 3 cycles or 60 ms
18. 1.2/50 microsecond 325 650 1050
impulse withstand
voltage (kV peak)
19. 1 minute power 140 275 460
frequency withstand
voltage (kV rms)
20. Rated breaking current capacity:-
i) Line charging at 10 50 125
rated voltage at 90 deg.
leading power factor
(A) rms
ii) Small inductive ----------------- 0.5 to 10 -------------------
current (A) rms without exceeding switching o/v 2.0 p.u
iii) Cable charging 125 160 250
breaking current (A)
iv) Short circuit current
a) AC component (kA rms) 31.5 31.5 40
b) % DC component Corresponding to minimum opening time as per
IEC-56.
c) Duration of short circuit 1 sec 1 sec 1 sec
22. Rated short circuit 78.75 78.75 100

making current capacity (kA) (kA) (kA)
23. Permissible limit of As per clause 5.27
temperature rise
24. Max. acceptable difference in
the instants of closing/opening
of contacts
i. Within a pole (ms) 5 5 5
ii. Between poles (ms) 10 10 10
25. Min. creepage distance of 1813 3625 6125
support insulator (mm)
26. Short time current carrying 31.5 31.5 40
capability for one second (kA) (kA) (kA)
27. i) Rating of auxiliary
contacts ----- 10 A at 220 V D.C. -------
ii) No. of auxiliary 10 NO and 10 NC as spare with due
contacts provision to add more if required
28. Breaking capacity of 2 A DC with the circuit time
auxiliary contacts constant not less than 20 ms
29 . Noise level at base ------- 140 db (max.) -----------
and upto 50 meters
30 Seismic acceleration ------ 0.3g (horizontal) --------
31. Min. Corona extinction - - -
voltage kv (rms)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----
5.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:
5.1 Circuit breakers offered shall be sulphur hexaflouride (SF6) type only.
5.2 Any part of the breakers, especially the removable ones, shall be freely interchangeable
without the necessity of any modification at site.
5.3 Circuit breaker shall comprise of three identical single pole units. 245 kV circuit breakers are
meant for single pole re-closure. In this case pole discrepancy special features including relays, timers
etc., provided to minimise pole discrepancy and to avoid single phasing shall be highlighted in the
bid. The 72.5 kV and 145 kV circuit breakers are not meant for single pole re-closure. The units for
these breakers shall be linked together mechanically. Complete circuit breaker with all the items
necessary for successful operation shall be supplied, including but not limited to the following:
5.3.1 Breaker assemblies with bases, support structure for circuit breaker as well as for
control cabinet, central control cabinet and foundation bolts for main structure as well as control
cabinet and central control cabinet (except concrete foundations), terminals and operating
mechanisms are included in the scope of supply.

5.3.2 Compressed SF6 gas, pneumatic systems complete including compressors, tanks,
piping, fittings, valves and controls and necessary supports for interpole piping for pneumatic
systems.
5.3.3 In case of 245 kV circuit breakers one central control cabinet for each breaker,
and one control box for each pole shall be provided with all the required electrical devices mounted
therein and the necessary terminal blocks for termination of interpole wiring. The necessary interpole
cabling at site shall be done by the Purchaser based on the schematic, wiring diagram and termination
schedule to be supplied by the successful Bidder. Terminals shall be of stud type with two nuts.
5.3.4 Instruments, gauges and other devices for SF6 gas pressure, pneumatic pressure
supervision.
5.3.5 All necessary parts to provide a complete and operable circuit breaker installation such
as main equipment, terminal, control parts, connectors and other devices, whether
specifically called for herein or not.
5.4 The 245 KV circuit breaker shall be designed for high speed single and three pole
reclosing with and operating sequence and timing as specified in clause 4.0 "Principal
Parameters".
5.5 The support structure of circuit breaker as well as that of control cabinet shall be hot
dip galvanised. All other parts can be grey colour painted as per shade 631 of IS-5.
5.6 Circuit breaker shall be suitable for hot line washing.
5.7 All breakers shall be supplied with universal type terminal connectors.
5.8 The current density adopted for the design of the terminal pads shall in no case exceed
the following values. For copper pads - 1.6 A/sq.mm. and others - 1.0 A/sq.mm.
5.9 CONTACTS:
5.9.1 All making and breaking contacts shall be sealed free from atmospheric effects.
Contacts shall be designed to have adequate thermal and current carrying capacity
for the duty specified and to have a life expectancy so that frequent replacements due
to excessive burning will not be necessary. Provision shall be made for rapid dissipation
of heat generated by the arc on opening.
5.9.2 Main contacts shall be the first to open and the last to close so that there will be
little contact burning and wear.
5.9.3 If arcing contacts are used they shall be the first to close and the last to open.
These shall be easily accessible for inspection and replacement. If there are no separately mounted

arcing contacts the main contacts shall be easily accessible for inspection and replacements. Tips of
arcing contacts and main contacts shall be silver plated or have tungsten alloy tipping.
5.9.4 Any device provided for voltage grading to damp oscillations or to prevent restrike prior
to the complete interruption of the circuit or to limit over-voltages on closing shall have a
life expectancy comparable to that of the breaker as a whole.
5.9.5 Breakers shall be so designed that when operated within their specified rating, the
temperature of each part will be limited to values consistent with a long life of the
material used. The temperature shall not exceed that indicated in IEC-56 under specified
ambient conditions.
5.9.6 Contacts shall be kept permanently under pressure of SF6 gas. The poles shall be
partially filled with SF6 gas at the time of despatch and only topping upto required
pressure shall be permitted at site. The gap between the open contacts shall be such
that it can withstand atleast the rated phase to ground voltage continuously at zero
gauge pressure of SF6 gas due to its leakage.
5.10 PORCELAIN HOUSING:
5.10.1 The porcelain housing shall be of single piece construction without any joint or coupling.
It shall be made of homogeneous, vitreous porcelain of high mechanical and dielectric
strength. Glazing of porcelain shall be uniform brown or dark brown colour with a smooth
surface arranged to shed away rain water or condensed water particles (fog), free from
blisters, burns and similar other defects.
5.11 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS:
a) The circuit breakers shall be single pressure type and single break, the design and
construction of the circuit breaker shall be such that there is minimum possibility of gas
leakage and entry of moisture. There should not be any condensation of SF6 gas on the
internal insulating surface of the circuit breaker.
b) All gasketed surfaces shall be smooth, straight and reinforced, if necessary to minimise
distortion and to make a tight seal. Where the operating rod of the operating mechanism
connected to the arc chamber (SF6 media) adequate suitable Oring seals shall be
provided. The test holes for leakage test of the internal seals shall also be provided.
c) In the interrupter assembly there shall be a absorbing product box to eliminate SF6
decomposition products and moisture. The material used in the construction of the circuit
breakers shall be fully compatible with SF6 gas.
d) Each pole shall form an enclosure filled with SF6 gas independent of the other two
poles. The SF6 gas density of each pole shall be monitored and regulated by individual
pressure switches
e) The SF6 gas density monitor shall be adequately temp. compensated. The density
monitor shall meet the following requirements:
i) It shall be possible to dismantle the density monitor for checking/ replacement
without draining the SF6 gas by using suitable interlocked non-return couplings.
ii) It shall damp the pressure pulsation while filling the gas in service so that the
flickering of the pressure switch contacts does not take place.
iii) A pressure indicator shall also be supplied.
iv) The alarm and trip setting shall be such that:
a) Advance warning can be given for the low pressure below an unacceptable level.
b) After alarm, the breaker shall open if the pressure falls below pre- determined
value.
f) Means for pressure relief shall be provided in the gas chamber of circuit breaker to avoid
damages or distortion during occurrence of abnormal pressure increase or shock waves generated by
internal electric faults. The position of vents, diaphragms and pressure relief devices shall be so
arranged as to minimise danger to the operators in the event of gas or vapour escaping under pressure.
g) Facility shall also be provided to reduce the gas pressure within the breaker to a value
not exceeding 8 millibar for 245 kV and 6 millibar for 145 kV & 72.5 kV within 4 hours or
less.
Each circuit breaker shall be capable of withstanding this degree of vacuum without
distortion or failure of any part.
h) Sufficient SF6 gas shall be provided to fill all the circuit breakers installed. In addition to
this 20% of the total gas requirement shall be supplied in separate cylinders as spare
requirement. The pressure loss in the breaker shall not be more than 1% per year under
normal operating conditions.
i) Provisions shall be made for attaching an operation analyzer after installation at site to record
contact travel, speed and making measurement of operation timings and synchronization of contacts
in one pole.
5.12 SULPHUR HEXAFLUORIDE GAS (SF6 GAS):

a) The SF6 gas shall comply with IEC-376, 376A and 376B and be suitable in all respects for use in
the switchgear under the worst operating conditions.
b) The high pressure cylinders in which the SF6 gas is shipped and stored at site shall comply with
requirements of the following standards and regulations:
IS:4379 Identification of the contents of industrial gas cylinders.
IS:7285 Seamless high carbon steel cylinders for permanent and high pressure
liquefiable gases.
The cylinders shall also meet Indian Boiler regulations.
c) Test: SF6 gas shall be tested for purity, dew point, breakdown voltage, water contents as per
IEC-376, 376A and 376B and test certificates shall be furnished to Purchaser indicating all the
tests as per IEC-376 for each lot of SF6 gas.
5.13 DUTY REQUIREMENTS:
5.13.1 The circuit breakers shall be totally re-strike free under all duty conditions and shall be
capable of performing specified duties without opening resistors.
5.13.2 The circuit breakers shall meet the duty requirements for any type of fault or fault
location, for line charging and roping when used on an effectively grounded system
and perform make and break operations as per stipulated duty cycles satisfactorily.
5.13.3 The Circuit Breakers shall be capable of:
i) Clearing short line faults (Kilo metric faults) with source impedance behind the
bus equivalent to symmetrical fault current specified.
ii) Breaking inductive currents of 0.5 to 10A without switching over-voltage
exceeding 2.3 p.u.
iii) Breaking 25% of the rated fault current at twice rated voltage under phase
opposition condition.
5.13.4 The critical current which gives the longest arc duration at lockout pressure of
extinguishing medium and the arc duration shall be indicated.
5.13.5 The breakers shall satisfactorily withstand the high stresses imposed on them
during fault clearing, load rejection and re-energisation of lines with trapped
charges. The breakers shall also withstand the voltage specified in clause 4.0
Principal Parameters" of this specification.
5.14 TOTAL BREAK TIME:
5.14.1 The "Total Break Time" as specified in clause 4.0, "Principal Parameters" of this
section shall not be exceeded under any of the following duties:
i) Test duties 1,2,3,4,5 (with TRV as per IEC-56).
ii) Short line fault L90, L75 (with TRV as per IEC-56).
5.14.2 The Bidder may please note that there is only one specified break time of the
breaker which shall not be exceeded under any duty conditions specified
such as with the combined variation of the trip coil voltage, (85-110%)
pneumatic pressure and arc extinguishing medium pressure etc., While
furnishing the proof for the total break time of complete circuit breaker, the
Bidder may specifically bring out the effect of non-simultaneity between
contacts within a pole or between poles and show how it is covered in the
guaranteed total break time.
5.14.3 The values guaranteed shall be supported with the type test reports.
5.15 OPERATING MECHANISM AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENTS:
5.15.1 The circuit breakers shall be designed for electrical local as well as remote
control
5.15.2 (i) The operating mechanism shall be of pneumatic, spring charged mechanism or
combination of these, for 245 kV SF-6 Circuit Breakers. The mechanism shall be
adequately designed for specified tripping and re-closing duty. The entire
operating mechanism control circuitry, individual breaker compressor unit etc. as
required shall be housed in an out-door type,CRCA steel enclosure. This
enclosure shall conform to degree of protection IP-55 of ISS-2147. The enclosure
shall be invariable mounted on a separate concrete plinth of 150 mm height.
5.15.2 (ii) The operating mechanism shall be spring closing and spring tripping through electric
motor for 145 kV & 72.5kV SF-6 Circuit Breakers. The mechanism shall be adequately
designed for specified tripping and re-closing duty. The entire operating mechanism
control circuitry as required shall be housed in an out-door type,CRCA steel enclosure.
The enclosure shall be invariable mounted on a separate concrete plinth of 150 mm
height.
5.15.3 All working parts in the mechanism shall be of corrosion resistant material. All
bearings which require greasing shall be equipped with pressure grease fittings.
5.15.4 The design of the operating mechanism shall be such that it shall be practically
maintenance free. The guaranteed years of maintenance- free operation, the
number of full load and full rated short circuit current breaking/operation without
enquiring any maintenance or overhauling, shall be clearly stated in the bid. As
far as possible the need for lubricating the operating mechanism shall be kept to
the minimum and eliminated altogether if possible.
5.15.5 The operating mechanism shall be non-pumping (and trip free) electrically
pneumatically under every method of closing. There shall be no rebounds in the
mechanism and it shall not require any critical adjustments at site. Operation of
the power operated closing device, when the circuit breaker is already closed,
shall not cause damage to the circuit breaker or endanger the operator.
Provision shall be made for attaching an operation analyser to facilitate testing of
breaker at site.
5.15.6 A mechanical indicator shall be provided to show open and close position of the
breaker. It shall be located in a position where it will be visible to a man standing
on the ground level with the mechanism housing closed. An operation counter
shall also be provided in the central control cabinet.
5.15.7 The Bidder shall furnish detailed operation and maintenance manual of the
mechanism along with the operation manual for the circuit breakers.
5.16 CONTROL:
5.16.1 The close and trip circuits shall be designed to permit use of momentary contact
switches and push buttons.
5.16.2 Each breaker pole shall be provided with two (2) independent tripping circuits,
valves and coils each connected to a different set of protective relays.
5.16.3 The breaker shall normally be operated by remote electrical control. Electrical
tripping shall be performed by shunt trip coils. However, provisions shall be
made for local electrical control. For this purpose a local/remote selector switch
and close and trip push buttons shall be provided in the breaker central control
cabinet. Remote located push buttons and indicating lamps shall be provided by
the Purchaser.
5.16.4 The trip coils shall be suitable for trip circuit supervision. The trip circuit
supervision relay would be provided by the Purchaser. Necessary terminals shall
be provided in the central control cabinet of the circuit breaker by the Bidder.
5.16.5 Closing coil shall operate correctly at all values of voltage between 85% and
110% of the rated voltage. Shunt trip shall operate correctly under all operating
conditions of the circuit breaker upto the rated breaking capacity of the
circuit breaker and at all values of supply voltage between 85% and 110% of
rated voltage. If additional elements are introduced in the trip coil circuit their
successful operation and reliability for similar applications on outdoor circuit
breakers shall be clearly brought out in the additional information schedules.
In the absence of adequate details the offer is likely to be rejected.

5.16.6 Suitable relay for monitoring of DC supply voltage to the control cabinet shall be
provided. The pressure switches used for interlock purposes shall have
adequate contact ratings to be directly used in the closing and tripping circuits.
In case the contacts are not adequately rated and multiplying relays are used
then the interlock for closing/opening operation of breaker shall be with No
logic of the relay i.e. if the DC supply to the interlock circuit fails then it is
essential that breaker trips in order to protect the switchgear and
connected equipment like transformers etc., for any possible faults at that time.
Provision for automatic tripping of the breaker shall be made alongwith the flag
indication for non-availability of DC supply. The connection must be such that
capacitor provided for this purpose gets charged from the DC source provided by
the Board only and the capacitor supply is released for the tripping circuit as
soon as DC supply fails. It must be possible to close the breaker only after
restoration of DC supply. The entire arrangement of CTD must be
accommodated in a separate box and it shall be mounted to control cubicle
5.16.7 For pneumatically and spring operated mechanisms a local manual closing
device which can be easily operated by one man standing on the ground shall
also be provided for maintenance purposes and direction of motion of handle
shall be clearly marked.
5.16.8 The auxiliary switch of the breaker shall be preferably positively driven by the
breaker operating rod and where due to construction features, same is not
possible a plug-in device shall be provided to simulate the opening and closing
operations of circuit breaker for the purpose of testing control circuits.
5.17 MOTOR COMPRESSED SPRING CHARGING MECHANISM:
Spring operated mechanism shall be complete with motor, opening spring,
closing spring and all other necessary accessories to make the mechanism
a complete unit. Breaker operation shall be independent of motor which shall be
used solely for the purpose of charging the closing spring. Motor rating shall be
such that it requires only 15 seconds for fully charging the closing spring.
Closing operation shall compress the opening spring and keep ready for tripping.
The mechanism shall be provided with means for charging the spring by hand.
This operation shall be carried out with the doors of the cubicle open. During this
process no electrical or mechanical operation of the mechanism shall
endanger the operator or damage the equipment. A mechanical indicating device
shall be provided to indicate the state of the charge spring and shall be visible
with the door of the cubicle closed. An alarm shall be provided for spring
failing to be charged by a pre-set time after circuit breaker closing. The spring
mechanism shall be fitted with a local manual release, preferably by a push
button to avoid in advertent operation. Means shall be provided for
discharging the spring when the circuit breaker is in the open position without
circuit breaker attempting to close.
5.18 PNEUMATICALLY OPERATED MECHANISM:
a) Individual compressor units (ICU) shall be provided for pneumatically
operated circuit breakers.
b) The ICU shall be complete with air piping and accessories, all stop
valves, tees, pressure reducers etc., required for normal operation of the
breaker.

c) The breaker local receivers shall comply with the requirements in clause
5.29 and shall have sufficient capacity for two CO operations of the
breakers at the lowest pressure for auto reclosing duty without refilling.
The Bidder shall ensure that rated pressure. is available at all the
breaker locations.
d) Independently adjustable pressure switches with potential free,
ungrounded contacts to actuate a lockout device shall be provided. This
lockout device with provision of remote alarm indication shall be
incorporated in each circuit breaker to prevent operation whenever the
pressure of the operating mechanism is below that of parameter required
for satisfactory operation of the circuit breakers. The scheme should
permit operation of all blocking and alarm relays as soon as the pressure
transient present during the rapid pressure dip has been damped and a
reliable pressure measurement can be made. Such facilities shall be
provided for following conditions:
i) Close lockout pressure.
ii) Auto reclose lockout pressure.
iii) Extreme low pressure.
e) The compressed air mechanism shall be capable of operating the circuit
breaker under all duty conditions with the air pressure immediately
before operation between 85% and 110% of the rated supply pressure.
The make/break time at this supply pressure shall not exceed the
specified make/break time within any value of trip coil supply voltage as
specified.
f) The compressed air piping shall comply to requirements given in clause
5.28.8.
5.19 OPERATING MECHANISM HOUSING:
The operating mechanism housing/control cabinet shall conform to the
requirement specified in clause 5.30.
5.20 INTERLOCKS:
It is proposed to electrically interlock the circuit breaker with Purchaser's
associated air break isolating switches in accordance with switchyard safety
interlocking scheme. The details of the scheme will be furnished to the
successful Bidder. All accessories required on breaker side for satisfactory
operation of the scheme shall be deemed to be included in the scope of supply
of this specification.
5.21 SUPPORTING STRUCTURE:
The Bidder shall indicate the price of support structure along with the
foundation bolts required separately in the bid proposal sheets and these shall
be considered in evaluation. However, in case the equipment offered have
integral support structure or the specialities of the breaker are such that support
structures have to be provided by the successful Bidder, the prices of these
support structures shall be included in the price of the equipment and same shall
be indicated clearly in the bid proposal sheet. The support structure shall meet
the following requirements:
1) The minimum vertical clearance from any energised metal part to the
bottom of the circuit breaker (structure) base, where it rests on the
foundation pad, shall be 2.85meters for 72.5kV,3.85meters for 145kV and
4.85 meters for245 kV..
2) The minimum vertical distance from the bottom of the lowest porcelain
part of the bushings, porcelain enclosures or supporting insulators to the
bottom of the circuit breaker base, (from the ground level) shall be 2.55
meters for all voltages.
3) The minimum clearance between the live parts and earth shall be 0.8
meters for 72.5kV, 1.3 meters for 145kV and 2.4 meters for 245kV.
5.22 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES:
5.22.1 Following is a partial list of some of the major fittings and accessories to be
furnished by Bidder in the central control cabinet. Number and exact location of
these parts shall be indicated in the bid.
a) Central control cabinet in accordance with clause no. 5.30 complete with
i) Cable glands for control cables off sizes will be intimated to the
successful bidders .
ii) Local/remote changeover switch.
iii) Four digit operation counter.
iv) Pneumatic pressure gauges SF6 gas pressure gauge.
v) Control switches to cut off control power supply.
vi) Fuses and links as required.
vii) The number of terminals provided shall be adequate enough to wire out
all contacts and control circuits plus 24 terminals spare for Purchaser's
use.
viii) Operation hour meter for motor.
ix) Three pin plug with socket.
x) Illuminating lamp with door switch.
xi) Lock and key for mechanism box.
xii) Capacitor tripping device.
xiii) Thermostatically controlled space tubular heater.
b) Anti-pumping relay.
c) Rating plate in accordance with IEC incorporating year of manufacture.
Note :- Such components, required for satisfactory operation of breaker, shall be
deemed to be within the scope of supply irrespective of whether these are
specifically mentioned or not above.
5.22.2 Additional fittings for pneumatically operated circuit breaker.
a) Unit compressed air system in accordance with clause
No.5.28.
b) Breaker local air receivers.
c) Pressure gauge spring loaded safety valve, pressure switch with
adjustable contacts and explosion vents in case provision is not
in- built.
d) Pressure switch to initiate an alarm if the pressure in the aux.
reservoir remains below a preset level for longer than it is normally
necessary to refill the reservoir
e) Stop, non-return and other control valves, piping and all
accessories upto breaker mechanism housing.
5.23 SURFACE FINISH:
5.23.1 All interiors and exteriors of tanks and other metal parts shall be thoroughly
cleaned to remove all rust, scales, corrosion, greases or other adhering
foreign matter. All steel surfaces in contact with insulating oil, as far as
accessible, shall be painted with not less than two coats of heat resistant, oil
insoluble, insulating paint.
5.23.2 All metal surfaces exposed to atmosphere shall be given two primer coats of
zinc chromate and two coats of epoxy paint with epoxy base thinner. All metal
parts not accessible for painting shall be made of corrosion resisting material. All
machine finished or bright surfaces shall be coated with a suitable preventive
compound and suitably wrapped or otherwise protected. All paints shall be
carefully selected to withstand tropical heat and extremes of weather within
the limits specified. The paint shall not scale off or wrinkle or be removed by
abrasion due to normal handling. All external paintings shall be as per shade
no. 631 of IS:5.
5.23.3 All ferrous hardware, exposed to atmosphere, shall be hot dip galvanised.
5.24 GALVANISING:
All ferrous parts including all sizes of nuts, bolts, plain and spring washers,
support channels, structures, etc., shall be hot dip galvanised to conform to
latest version of IS:2629 or any other equivalent authoritative standard.
5.25 EARTHING:
The operating mechanism housing, control cabinets, dead tanks, support
structure etc., shall be provided with two separate Earthing terminals suitable for
bolted connection to 50x8mm MS flat to be provided by the Purchaser for
connection to station earth mat.
5.26 NAME AND RATING PLATES:
Circuit breaker and its operating device shall be provided with a rating plate or
plates marked with but not limited to following data:
a) Manufacturer's name or trade mark.
b) Serial number or type designation making it possible to get all the
relevant information from the manufacturer.
c) Year of manufacture.
d) Rated voltage.
e) Rated insulation level.
f) Rated frequency.
g) Rated normal current.
h) Rated short circuit breaking current.
i) First pole to clear factor.
j) Rated duration of short circuit.
k) Rated auxiliary DC supply voltage of closing and opening devices.
l) Rated pressure of compressed air gas for operation and interruption.
m) Rated out of phase breaking current
n) Rated supply voltage of auxiliary circuits.
o) Rated supply frequency of auxiliary circuits.
p) Purchase order number and customer's name.
The coils of operating devices shall have a reference mark permitting the data
to be obtained from the manufacturer.
The rating plate shall be visible in position of normal service and installation.
The rating plate shall be weather proof and corrosion proof.
5.27 LIMITS OF TEMPERATURE RISE:
The temperature rise on any part of equipment shall not exceed the maximum
temperature rise specified below under the conditions specified in test clauses.
The permissible temperature rise indicated is for a maximum ambient temperature
of 50 C. If the maximum ambient temperature rises, permissible values shall be
reduced accordingly.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----
Sl. Nature of the part or Maximum value of
No. of the liquid ----------------------------------------------------------
-----
Temp. at a Temp. rise ambient
max air temp not exceeding 50 C
1. Contacts in air. silver-faced 105 55

copper, copper alloy or alumi-
nium alloy {see notes (i) & (ii)}
Bare copper or tinned alumi- 75 25
nium alloy.
2. Contacts in oil:
i) Silver-faced copper, copper 90 40
alloy or aluminium alloy
(see note ii)
ii) Bare copper or tinned alumi- 80 30
nium alloy.
3. Terminals to be connected to 105 55
external conductors by screws
or bolts silver faced
(see note iii)
4. Metal parts acting as springs (See note iv) (See note iv)
5. Metal parts in contact with
insulation of the following
classes:
Class Y : (for non-impreg- 90 40
nated materials)
Class A : (for materials
immersed in oil 100 50
or impregnated)
Class E : in air 120 70
in oil 100 50
Class B : in air 130 80

in oil 100 50
Class F : in air 155 105
in oil 100 50
Enamel : oil base 100 50

synthetic : in air 120 70
synthetic : in oil 100 50
6. Any part of metal or of insul- 100 50
ating material in contact
with oil except contacts.
7. Oil 90 40
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------
Notes: i) When applying the temperature rise of 55 C, care should be taken to
ensure that no damage is caused to the surrounding insulating materials.
ii) The quality of the silver facing shall be such that a layer of silver remains
at the points of contact after the mechanical endurance tests. Otherwise,
the contacts shall be regarded as "bare".
iii) The values of temperature and temperature rise are valid whether or not
the conductor connected to the terminals is silver-faced.
iv) The temperature shall not reach a value where the elasticity of the
material is impaired. For pure copper, this implies a temperature limit of
75 C.
5.28 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM:
5.28.1 Each circuit breaker shall be supplied with individual compressor unit. Each ICU
shall be provided with compressor, piping, piping accessories, local air
receivers, control valves, filters, coolers of adequate capacity, reducing valves,
isolating valves, drain ports etc.,
5.28.2 The capacity of local air receivers shall be sufficient for two operations of the
circuit breaker, at the lowest pressure for auto reclosing duty without refilling.
5.28.3 Air Compressor:

a) The air compressor shall be oil-less and of air cooled type complete with
cylinder, lubrication, drive motor and slide rails. Each compressor shall
be rated for the following duty:
i) Total running time Not exceeding
of compressor per day 20 minutes.
ii) Normal running air charging Not exceeding
15 minutes.
iii) Air charging time after one Not exceeding
close-open operation of all breakers 60 minutes.
b) Compressor shall be driven by automatically controlled motors
conforming to this specification.
c) The compressor shall be provided with automatic adjustable
unloading device during starting.
d) Each compressor shall be equipped with a starting operation counter and
a running barometer.
5.28.4.1 Inter-cooler and After Cooler:
Inter-cooler between compressor stages and after-cooler at discharge of HP
cylinder shall be included in Bidder's scope. These shall be of air cooled type and
shall be designed as per ASME Code of IEMA Standards. The design pressure
on the air side of cooler shall be 25 times the working pressure. A corrosion
allowance of 3 mm shall be included for all steel parts.
5.28.5 Air Receivers:
a) Air receiver shall be designed in accordance with the latest edition of the
ASME Code for Pressure Vessel-Section VIII of BS:5197. A corrosion
allowance of 3.0 mm shall be provided for shell and dished ends in case
the air receiver are not hot dip galvanised . Receivers shall be coated
on the inside face with anti-rust medium.
b) Air receivers shall have a manhole with cover for inspection and
cleaning. Connections for air inlet and outlet, drain and relief valves shall
be flanged type. Pressure gauge and pressure switch connections shall
be of screwed type.
c) Accessories such as suitable sized safety valve to relieve full
compressor discharge at a set pressure equal to 1.1 times the
maximum operating pressure, blow off valve, auto drain tap with
isolating and bypass valve, dial type pressure gauge with isolating and
drain valve and test connection shall be provided.
d) The receiver shall be rated such that the compressor will not start
within less than hour hours for supplying the leakage of air from the
compressed air system. This condition shall be met with only one
compressor in operation at a time.
5.28.6 Quality of Air:
Compressed air used shall be dry and free of dust particles. Arrangement for
conditioning the compressed air shall be provided as an integral part of air
compressor system. Air shall not condensate at working pressure at a
temperature of minus 10 C. Measures of achieving this shall be brought out
clearly in the bid. All instruments required for checking the quality of air shall be
furnished as special tools alongwith the breakers.
5.28.7 Controls and Control Equipment:
a) The compressor control shall be of automatic start/stop type initiated by
pressure switches on the main receiver. Supplementary manual control
shall also be provided.
b) Duplicate incoming supply of 415 V, AC shall be provided by the
Purchaser at switchyard motor control center. The compressor MCC
which is in Bidder's scope shall be as per para of this section. Manual
change over scheme from the source to other shall be arranged. Facility
to annunciate failure of power supply to the compressor motor control
center shall be provided.
c) All control equipment shall be housed in a totally enclosed sheet steel
cabinet conforming to relevant standards. Pressure gauges, other
indicating devices and control switches shall be mounted on the control
cabinet.
5.28.8 Compressed Air Piping, Valves and Fittings:

a) The flow capacity of all valves shall be at least 20% greater than the total
compressor capacity.
b) The high pressure pipe and air system shall be such that after one
O-0.3 sec -CO- operation the breaker shall be capable of performing
one CO-operation within 3 minutes.
c) All compressed air piping shall be bright annealed, seamless
phosphorous Deoxidized Non-Arsenical Copper alloy or stainless steel
pipe (C-106 of BS:2871-1957).
d) Compressor air piping in the switchyard trenches shall be laid with a
slope of 1 in 1000. All necessary fittings required for this purpose
including the drain valves at all the low points shall be included in the
proposal. The piping shall be laid horizontally on steel supports in RCC
trenches having a slope of 1 in 500.
e) All joints and connections in the piping system shall be brazed or flared
as necessary.
f) All compressed air piping shall be carried out in accordance with
BS:162.
g) Compressed air piping system shall be complete with saddle clamps to
support the piping system at every one meter interval and expansion
joint at every 40 meters interval.
5.28.9 Motor Control Center:
The 415 Volt motor control centers conforming to requirements for control
cabinets stipulated in clause 5.3 of this specification shall be fixed type and
fully sectionalised and shall be equipped with load break switches. Motor
feeders shall be provided with isolating switch fuse unit and contractor
with thermal overload relay and open phase protection. The motor
contractor shall have one normally open auxiliary contact for alarm purposes.
An ammeter shall be provided on the motor feeders. The motor control circuit
shall be independent from all other control circuits.
5.28.10. Isolating Switches:
------ VOID --------
5.28.11 Fuses:
All fuses shall be of the HRC cartridge type, conforming to IS:2208 and suitable
for mounting on plug-in type of fuse bases. Fuses shall be provided with visible
operation indicators to show that they have operated. All accessible live
connections shall be adequately shrouded, and it shall be possible to change
fuses with the circuit live, without danger of contact with live conductor.
Insulated fuses pulling handle shall be supplied with each control cabinet.
5.29 TERMINAL CONNECTORS:
5.29.1 All the circuit breakers shall be provided with terminal connectors suitable for 0.4
Sq.inch ACSR Zebra Conductor.
The terminal connectors shall meet the following requirements:
a) Terminal connectors shall be manufactured and tested as per IS:5561.
b) All castings shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and
activities. All sharp edges & corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
c) No part of a clamp shall be less than 10 mm thick.
d) All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised conforming to IS:2633.
e) For bimetallic connectors, copper alloy liner of minimum thickness of 2
mm shall be cast integral with aluminium body.
f) Flexible connectors shall be made from tinned copper/ aluminium sheets.
g) All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have
minimum contact resistance.
h) Connectors shall be designed to be corona free in accordance with the
requirements stipulated in IS:5561.
5.30 SPECIFICATION FOR CONTROL CABINETS:
1. Control cabinets shall be of the free standing floor mounting type in case
of 245 kV SF6 Circuit Breaker.
2. Control cabinets shall be sheet steel enclosed and shall be dust, weather
and vermin proof. Sheet steel shall be at least 2.6mm thick (2 mm if
CRCA) sheet used. Control cabinets shall be provided with a hinged door
and padlocking arrangement. The door hinges shall be of union joint type
to facilitate easy removal. Door shall be properly braced to prevent
wobbling. There shall be provision in the bottom sheet for entrance of
cables from below.
3. Equipment and devices shall be suitable for operation on a 415 V, 3
phase 3/4 wire 50 Hz AC system. The wiring shall be of stranded copper
with minimum cross section of 2.5 Sq.mm with 1100 V PVC insulation.
4. Bus bars shall be of tinned copper of adequate cross-section to carry the
normal current, without exceeding the permissible temperature rise over
an ambient temperature of 50 C outside the cubicle. The buses shall be
braced to withstand forces corresponding to short circuit current of 25 kA.
5. Motors rated 1 KW and above being controlled from the control cabinet
shall be suitable for operation on a 415 V, 3 phase 50 Hz system.
Fractional KW motors shall be suitable for operation on a 240 V,
1-phase, 50 Hz supply system.
6. Isolating switches shall be group operated units 3-pole for use on
3-phase supply systems and 2 pole for single phase supply systems)
quick make quick break type, capable of breaking safely and without
deterioration, the rated current of the associated circuit. Control cabinet
door shall be interlocked with the operating handle of the switch so as to
prevent opening of the door when the switch is closed. A device for
bypassing the door interlock shall also be provided. Switch handle shall
have provision for locking in both fully open and fully closed positions.
7. Fuses shall be HRC cartridge link type having prospective current rating
of not less than 46 kA (rms). They shall be provided with visible operation
indicators to show when they have operated. One fuse pulling handle
shall be supplied for every ten fuses or a part thereof.
8. Push button shall be rated for not less than 6 Amps, 415 V AC or 2
Amps, 220V DC and shall be flush mounted on the cabinet door and
provided with appropriate name plates. Red, Green and Amber
indicating lamps shall be flush mounted and provided with series
resistors to eliminate the possibility of short circuiting of control supply in
the event of fusing of lamps.
9. For motors upto 5 KW, contactors shall be direct-on-line, air break, single
throw type and shall be suitable for making and breaking the starting
current of the associated motor which shall be assumed equal to 6.5
times the full load current of the motor at 0.2 p.f. For motors above 5 KW,
automatic star delta type starters shall be provided. 3 pole contactors
shall be furnished for 3 phase motors and 2-pole contactors for single
phase motors. Reversing contactors shall be provided with electrical
interlocks between forward and reverse contactors. If possible,
mechanical interlocks shall also be provided. Contactors shall be
suitable for uninterrupted duty and shall be of duty category class AC4
as defined in IS:2959. The main contacts of the contactors shall be
silver plated and the insulation class for the coils shall be class E or
better. The dropout voltage of the contactors shall not exceed 70% of
the rated voltage.
10. Contactors shall be provided with a three element, positive acting,
ambient temperature compensated, time lagged, hand reset type thermal
overload relay with adjustable setting. Hand reset button shall be flush
with the front door of the cabinet and suitable for resetting with starter
compartment door closed. Relays shall be either direct connected or CT
operated depending on the rated motor current.
11. Single phasing preventer relay shall be provided for 3 phase motors to
provide positive protection against single phasing.
12. Mini starters shall be provided with no volt coils whenever required.
13. All necessary cable terminating accessories such as glands, crimp type
tinned copper lugs etc., for control cables shall be included in Bidder's
scope of supply. Suitable brass cable glands shall be provided for cable
entry.
14. Wiring for all control circuits shall be carried out with 1100/650 volts grade
PVC insulated tinned copper stranded conductors of sizes not smaller
than 2.5 sq. mm atleast 10% spare terminal blocks for control wire
terminations shall be provided on each panel. The terminal blocks shall
be ELMEK type or equivalent. All terminals shall be provided with ferrules
Visibly marked or numbered and these identifications shall correspond to
the designations on the relevant wiring diagrams. The terminals shall be
rated for adequate capacity which shall not be less than 10 Amps.
15. Control cabinet shall be provided with 240 V, 1-phase 50 Hz, 20 W
fluorescent light fixture and 5 amps, 3 pin socket for handlamp.
16. Space heaters shall be provided inside each cabinet complete with
thermostat (preferably differential type) to prevent moisture condensation.
Heaters shall be controlled by suitably rated double-pole miniature Circuit
Breakers.
17. Signal lamps provided shall be of neon screw type with series resistors,
enclosed in bakelite body. Each signal lamp shall be provided with a fuse
integrally mounted in the lamp body.
18. All AC control equipment shall be suitable for operation on 240 V, 1
phase 50 Hz system.

19.
Items inside the cabinet made of organic material shall be coated with a
fungus resistant varnish.
20. All doors, panels, removable covers and breaker openings shall be
gasketed all around. All louvers shall have screens and filters. Cabinets
shall be dust, moisture and vermin proof.
5.31 MOTORS:
5.31.1 Motors shall be "Squirrel Cage" three phase induction motors of sufficient size
capable of satisfactory operation for the application and duty as required for the
driven equipment.
5.31.2 Stator:
a) Stator Frame:
The stator frame and all external parts of the motors shall be rigid
fabricated steel or of casting. They shall be suitably annealed to eliminate
any residual stresses introduced during the process of fabrication and
machining.
b) Stator Core:
The stator lamination shall be made from suitable grade magnetic sheet
steel varnished on both sides. They shall be pressed and clamped
adequately to reduce the core and teeth vibrations to minimum.
c) Insulation and Winding:
i) All insulated winding conductor shall be of copper. The overall
motor winding insulation shall be conventional class B type. The
winding shall be suitable for successful operation in hot,
humid and tropical climate with the ambient temperature of 50
C. The insulation shall be given fungicidal and tropical
treatment as per IS:3202.
ii) Any joints in the motor insulation such as at coil connections or
between slot and winding section shall have strength equivalent
to that of slot section of the coil.
iii) For 415 Volt motors, after the coils are placed in slots and all
connections are made, entire motor assembly shall be
impregnated by completely submerging core and winding in
suitable insulating compound or varnish allowed by proper baking.
At least two additional submersions and bakes shall be applied
either making a total of at least three submersions and bake
treatment.
5.31.3 Rotor:
a) Rotors shall be adequately designed to avoid overheating during the
starting and running conditions.
b) Rotors shall be properly balanced so as to keep the vibration under
running condition within the limits.
c) Rotors of induction motors shall be of rigid core construction with bars
firmly secured and solidly bonded to the end rings. The end rings
assembly shall be such that it is free to move with expansion of the bars
without distortion. The connection of the bars to the end ring shall be
made by brazing or fusion welding.
d) Rotors shall be so designed as to keep the combined critical speed with
the driven equipment away from the running speed by at least 20%.
e) Rotors shall also be designed to withstand 120% of the rated speed for 2
minutes in either direction of rotation.
f) All high speed rotors shall be constructed with provision of re-balancing
the rotor on its site position without major disassembly.

5.31.4 Bearings:
a) Depending upon the capacity and loading conditions Bidder shall design
suitable grease lubricated or oil lubricated bearings.
b) Greased ball and roller bearings when used shall be of reputed make
subject to Purchaser's approval. The minimum standard life of the
bearings shall not be less than 30,000 working hours taking all motor
and driven loads into account. These shall be pressure grease gun
lubricated type fitted with grease nipple and shall have grease relief
devices.
c) Bearing shall be so constructed that the loss of grease and its
creeping alongwith shaft into motor housing is prevented. It shall also
prevent dirt and water from getting into the motor.
d) Unless otherwise approved, bearing lubrication system shall be such
that no external forced oil or water is necessary to maintain
the required oil supply or to keep bearing temperature within
permissible limits.
e) For oil lubricated bearings, drain plugs shall be provided for draining
any residual oil when required.
5.31.5 Enclosures:
a) Motors to be installed outdoor shall have hose proof enclosure
equivalent to IP-55 as per IS:4691. For motors to be installed indoor,
the enclosure shall be dust proof equivalent to IP-54 as per IS:4691.
b) Two independent Earthing points shall be provided on opposite sides
of the motor for bolted connection of Earthing conductor.
c) Motors shall have drain plugs so located that they will drain water
resulting from condensation or other causes from all pockets in the motor
casing.
d) Motors weighing more than 25 kg shall be provided with eyebolts, lugs or
other means to facilitate lifting.
5.31.6 Cooling Method:
Motors shall be of self ventilated type having TEFC (totally enclosed fan
cooled) enclosure.
5.31.7 Rating Plate:
The rating plate shall conform to the requirements of IEC incorporating the year
of manufacture.
5.31.8 Operational Features:
a) Continuous motor rating (name plate rating) shall be at least ten (10)
percent above the maximum load demand of the driven equipment at
design duty point and the motor shall not be overloaded at any operating
point of driven equipment that will arise in service.
b) Motors shall be capable of giving rated output without reduction in
expected life span when operated continuously in the system having the
particulars as given in Annexure-II.
5.31.9 Starting Requirements:

a) All induction motors shall be suitable for full voltage direct-on -line
starting. These shall be capable of starting and accelerating to the rated
speed alongwith the driven equipment without exceeding the acceptable
winding temperature even when the supply voltage drops down to 85%
of the rated voltage.
b) Motors shall be capable of withstanding the electro dynamic stresses and
heating imposed if it is started at a voltage of 110% of the rated value.
c) The locked rotor current shall not exceed six (6) times the rated full
load current for all motors, subject to tolerance as given in IS:325.
d) Motors, when started with the driven equipment imposing full starting
torque under the supply voltage conditions specified under clause
5.32.9(a) above shall be capable of withstanding at least two
successive starts from cold condition at room temperature and one
start from hot condition without injurious heating of winding. The motors
shall also be suitable for three equally spread starts per hour under the
above referred supply condition.
e) The locked rotor withstand time under hot condition at 110% of rated
voltage shall be more than starting time with the driven equipment at
minimum permissible voltage by at least two seconds or 15% of the
accelerating time whichever is greater. In case it is not possible to meet
the above requirement, the Bidder shall offer centrifugal type speed
switch mounted on the motor shaft which shall remain closed for speeds
lower than 20% and open for speeds above 20% of the rated speed.
The speed switch shall be capable of withstanding 120% of the rated
speed in either direction of rotation.
6.0 TESTS:
6.1 TYPE TESTS:
The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then
seven years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests
carried out in accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed
accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be
submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as schedule given in
Bar Chart.
i) Impulse withstand voltage test
ii) Power frequency voltage withstand dry test on main circuit
iii) Short circuit withstand capability test
iv) Mechanical endurance test
v) Temperature rise test
vi) Radio interference voltage (RIV)
vii) Measurement of the resistance of main circuit
viii) Short time withstand current and peak withstand current test
ix) Out of phase making & breaking test
x) Shunt reactor current switching test
xi) Dielectric test
xii) IP-55 test on operating mechanism
xiii) Seismic test
6.2 ROUTINE TESTS:
As per quality assurance program (QAP).

6.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant ISS-13118 shall be
carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless
dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL.
i) Power frequency voltage withstand dry test on main circuit
ii) Voltage withstand test on control and auxiliary circuits
iii) Measurement of resistance of the main circuit
iv) Mechanical operating test
v) Design and visual test
vi) Tightness Test
7.0 INSPECTION:
7.1 The Purchaser shall have access at all times to the works and all other all other
places of manufacture, where the circuit breaker are being manufactured and the
supplier shall provide all facilities without extra charges, for unrestricted
inspection of the supplier's works, raw materials, manufacture of the equipment.,
all the accessories and for conducting necessary test as detailed herein.
7.2 The Supplier shall keep the Purchaser informed in advance, about the
manufacturing program so that arrangement can be made for inspection.
7.3 No material shall be despatched from its point of manufacture unless the material
has been satisfactorily inspected and tested.
7.4 The supplier shall submit their internal inspection report containing
manufacturer's test certificates before offering the material for inspection.
7.5 The acceptance of any quantity of equipment shall in no way relieve the Supplier
of his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of this specification and shall
not prevent subsequent rejection if such equipment are later found to be
defective.
8.0 Commissioning
The circuit breakers and associated equipment covered in the specification are
intended to be erected and commissioned departmentally for which detailed
instructions and special tools, if any, shall be supplied by the successful bidder.
The bidder shall however quote lump sum charges & other terms per breaker for
the service of supervisory commissioning engineer whose services may be
availed by the purchaser, if so desired, considering the type and design of
equipment offered. The estimated charges for such services shall be taken into
account while evaluating the offer for comparison with other offers.
9.0 DOCUMENTATION
9.1 All drawings shall conform to International Standards Organisation (ISO) 'A'
series of drawing sheet/Indian Standards Specification.
9.2 List of Drawings and Documents:
The Bidder shall furnish four sets of relevant descriptive and illustrative published
literature pamphlets and the following drawings for preliminary study alongwith
the offer.
a) General outline drawings showing dimensions and shipping weights,
quantity of insulating media, air receiver capacity etc.,

b) Sectional views showing the general constructional features of the circuit
breakers including operating mechanism, arcing chambers, contacts
etc., with lifting dimensions for maintenance.
c) Schematic diagrams of breakers offered for control supervision and
reclosing.
d) Structural drawing, design calculations and loading data for support
structures.
e) Foundation drilling plan and loading data for foundation design.
f) Terminal Connector
9.3 The bidder shall submit four sets of final versions of complete and correct
equipment drawings for purchasers approval along with bid in a sealed
envelope. The purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on the
drawings to the supplier within 21 days from the date of issue of LOI. The
submission of complete and correct readable drawings for approval is the
responsibility of the bidder/supplier. The supplier shall, if so required by the
purchaser, modify the drawings and resubmit four copies of the modified
drawings for purchasers approval within two weeks from the date of purchasers
comments. Then, the purchaser shall approve the revised drawings within two
weeks from the date of its receipt.
9.4 The successful bidder shall also supply one set of instruction manual containing
handling, installation, testing and commissioning of equipment at the time of
despatch of material to the consignee with each equipment for our field staff. In
addition, 5 sets of such bound manuals and final approved drawings shall be
supplied for reference & record in our design office.
One set of all the approved drawings and manual of instructions will be
supplied along with each equipment without which the supply will not be
considered as complete supply.
9.5 The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the
approved drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written
approval of the Purchaser. All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection
with the equipment prior to the approval of the drawing shall be at the Supplier's
risk.
9.6 Approval of drawings by the Purchaser shall not relieve the Supplier of any of his
responsibility and liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of
the drawings for meeting the requirements of the latest revision of the
applicable standards, rules and codes of practices. The equipment shall
conform in all respects to high standards of engineering, design, workmanship
and latest revisions of relevant standards at the time of supply and Purchaser
shall have the power to reject any material which, in his judgement, is not in full
accordance therewith.
9.7 Additional data to be furnished within two weeks of the placement of the order.
a) Drawing showing contacts in close, arc initiation, full arcing, arc
extinction and open position.
b) The temperature v/s pressure curves for each setting of density
monitor, along with details of density monitor.
c) Method of checking the healthiness of voltage distribution devices
(condensers) provided across the breaks at site.
d) Data on capabilities of circuit breakers in terms of time and number of
operations at duties ranging from 100% fault currents to load currents
of the lowest possible value without requiring any maintenance or
checks.
e) The effect of non-simultaneity between contacts within a pole or between
poles and also how it is covered in the guaranteed total break time.
f) Sectional view of non return couplings if used for SF6 pipes.
g) Details and type of filters used in interrupter assembly and also the
operating experience with such filters (for SF6 C.B.)
h) Details on SF6 gas:
i) The test methods used in controlling the quality of gas used in
the circuit breakers particularly purity and moisture content.
ii) Proposed tests to assess the condition of SF6 within a circuit
breaker after a period of service particularly with regard to
moisture contents of the gas.
iii) The precise procedure to be adopted by maintenance
personnel for handling equipment who are exposed to the
products of arcing in SF6 gas, so as to ensure that they are not
affected by possible irritants of the skin and respiratory system.
Recommendations shall be furnished for suitable protective
clothing, methods of disposal of circuit breaker cleaning utensils
and other relevant matters.
i) A complete catalogue on operation analyser satisfying all the
requirements stipulated in this specification.
j) The Bidder shall furnish along with the bid, curves supported
by test data indicating the opening time under close open
operation with combined variation of trip coil voltage and
pneumatic/hydraulic pressure.
k) Detailed literature and schematic diagrams of switching
mechanism for closing resistor showing the duration of
insertion shall also be furnished alongwith the calculations in
respect of thermal rating of resistors for the duties.
l) All duty requirements shall be proved with the support of adequate
test reports to be furnished alongwith the bid failing which the bid
is likely to be rejected.
m) Field test report in case of CB meant for Reactor switching duty.
9.8 TEST REPORTS:
i) Four copies of acceptance test reports shall be furnished to the
Purchaser. One copy will be returned, duly certified by the purchaser and
only there afterwards shall the material be despatched.
ii) All records of routine test reports shall be maintained by the Supplier at
his works for periodic inspection by the Purchaser.

iii) All test reports of tests conducted during manufacture shall be maintained
by the Supplier. These shall be produced for verification as and when
requested for by the Purchaser.

SECTION-4
CHAPTER-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 245/145/72.5/36 kV ISOLATORS & LINE - CUM - EARTH

SWITCHES
1.0 SCOPE:
This specification provides for design, engineering, manufacture, stage testing,
inspection and testing before dispatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at site of 245
kV, 145 kV 72.5 kV and 36 kV class Isolators and line-cum-earth switch complete with all
fittings, accessories and associated auxiliary equipment mandatory spares which are
required for efficient and trouble free operation as specified hereunder.
It is not the intent to specify completely herein all details of the design and construction
of equipments. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards
of engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in
continuous commercial operation up to the Bidders guarantee acceptable to the
HVPNL. The equipment offered shall be complete with all components necessary for
its effective and trouble free operation along with associated equipment, interlocks,
protection schemes etc., Such components shall be deemed to be within the scope of
supply, irrespective of whether those are specially brought out in this specification
and/or commercially ordered or not. All similar parts particularly movable ones shall be
interchangeable.
2.0 STANDARDS:
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification, the rating as well as
performance and testing of the isolators shall conform to the latest revisions and
amendments of the following standards available at the time of placement of order.
Sl. Standard Title
No No.
1. IS:9921 Alternating current isolators
(dis-connectors) and
earthing switches.
2. IEC:129 -do-
3. IS:2544 Insulators.
4. IS:2147 Degree of protection
provided by enclosure.
5. IS:4691 -do-
6. IS:325 Three phase induction
motors.
7. IS:4722 Rotating electrical
machines.
8. IS:262 Recommended practice for
hot dip galvanising of iron &
steel.
9. IS:4759 Hot dip galvanisation
coating on structural steel.
10. IS:2633 Method of testing weight,
thickness and uniformity
11. IS:1573 Electroplated coating of
zinc on iron and steel.
12. IS:6735 Spring washers.
13. IS:2016 Plain washers.
14. Indian Electricity Rules,
1956
Equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative National or International
Standards, which ensure equal or better performance than the standards mentioned
above, shall also be considered. When the equipment offered by the bidder conforms to
other standards salient points of difference between standards adopted and the
standards specified in this specification shall be clearly brought out in the relevant
schedule. Four copies of such standards with authentic translation in English shall be
furnished along with the offer.
Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory
continuous operation under the following tropical conditions:-
i. Location IN THE STATE OF HARYANA
0
ii. Max. ambient air temp ( C) 50
iii. Min. ambient air temp (0C) -2.5
iv. Max. Relative humidity % 100
v. Min. Relative humidity % 26
vi. Average annual rainfall (mm) 900
vii. Max. wind pressure (kg./Sq.m) 195
viii. Max. altitude above mean sea level (meters) less than 1000
ix. Isocerannic level (days/years) 45
x. Seismic level (horizontal acceleration) 0.3g
xi. Average no. of dust storm days/annum 35
Note: Moderately hot and tropical climate conductive to rust and fungus growth. The climatic
conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient conditions. Smoke is also present
in the atmosphere. Heavy lightening also occurs during June to October.

The equipment offered under this specification shall be suitable for the following auxiliary
power supplies.
a) Power Devices (like drive motors) 415 V, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz, neutral
grounded AC supply.
b) AC control and protective devices, 240 V, single phase, 2 wire, 50 HZ,
lighting fixtures, space heaters. neutral grounded AC supply.
c) DC alarm, control and protective 220 V, DC 2-wire
devices
Each of the foregoing supplies shall be made available by the HVPNL at the terminal
point for each equipment for operation of accessories and auxiliary equipment. Bidder's
scope shall include supply of interconnecting cables, terminal boxes, etc., The above
supply voltages may vary as below and all devices shall be suitable for continuous
operation over entire range of voltages.
i) AC supply - voltage + 10%& -15% frequency 5%
ii) DC supply - 15% to + 10%

The equipment covered in this specification shall meet the technical requirements listed
below:
Sl.No Technical Parameter 36kV 72.5kV 145 kV 245 kV
1. Rated Frequency (Hz) ------------ 50 ------------
2. System Neutral Earthing ------ Solidly Earthed --------
3. No. of Phases (Poles) -------------- 3 -----------------
4. Temperature Rise ------- As per relevant IS/IEC ---
5. Safe Duration of overload
a) 150% of rated current ---------- 5 minutes --------------
b) 120% of rated current ---------- 30 minutes --------------
6. Rated voltage /Highest 33/36 33/36 33/36 66/72.5 132/145 220/245
system voltage (kV rms)
7. Type of disconnect (AB) DB DB DB DB DB SB
8. Rated normal current 2000 1250 630 1250 1000 1250
(Amp rms)
9. Rated short time withstand 26.3 26.3 26.3 31.5 31.5 40
current (kA rms) of MS &
EB for 1 sec duration
10. Rated dynamic withstand 65.75 65.75 65.75 78.75 78.75 100
current (kA)
11. Rated short circuit making 65.75 65.75 65.75 78.75 78.75 100
current of EB (kA peak)
12. Basic insulation level:
I. 1.2/50 micro-sec lightning
impulse withstand voltage
(+ ve or - ve polarity)
a) To earth (kVp) 170 325 650 1050
b) Across isolating distance One terminal 195 375 750 1200
subjected to lightning impulse (kVp) and
opposite terminal subjected to power
frequency (kV rms) voltage (as per IS)
II. Rated 1 minute power frequency
withstand voltage ( kV rms )
a) Across isolating distance 100 160 315 530
b) To earth and between poles 70 140 275 460
13. Min. creepage distance of support and 900 1813 3625 6125
rotating insulator (mm)
14. Phase to Phase spacing for installation 1220 1830 3000 4000
(mm)
15. Minimum clearances:
a) Phase to earth 320 630 1300 2400
b) Phase to Phase 350 1300 1600 2700
(Across the same pole) ( Bidders offering lesser clearance must
substantiate the same with adequate information on impulse withstand capability of the
equipment, However the height of Post Insulator should not be les than 2300mm in case of
245kV, 1500mm in case of 145kVand 508 mm in case of 36kV Isolator )
16. Height of center line of terminal pad 2800 3000 4000 5000
above ground level (mm)
17. Rating of auxiliary contacts 10 A at 220V DC with breaking capacity of 2 A DC
with time constant not less than 20 ms.
18. Seismic acceleration .................... 0.3 g horizontal................
19. Operating time ---------------- 12 sec or less ---------------
20. Rated mechanical As per relevant standards
terminal load
21. Rated magnetizing/ capacitive current 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
make/break (Amps/rms)
22. RIV at 1 MHz & 1.1 X rated phase to 1000
earth voltage (micro volts)
5.1 The 245 kV single break isolators shall be a set of three individual poles with one vertical
break earthing blade per pole suitable for fixing on either side of the poles or without any
earthing blade.
5.2 The 145 kV, 72.5kV and 36 kV Isolators with & with out earth blade shall be triple pole,
single throw, double break, three post per phase, central pole rotating type. The blade shall
open and close in a horizontal plane.
5.3 Complete isolators with all the necessary items for successful operation shall be supplied
including but not limited to the following:
5.3.1 Isolators assembled with isolator blades (main and earth), complete base frame, linkages,
operating mechanism complete etc.
5.3.2 The three poles of the 245/145/72.5/36 kV Isolators covered by this specification will be
gang operated with one central cabinet for the required electrical devices mounted therein.
5.4 Material of Earthing blades and contacts shall be same as those of main blades and
contacts. Cross sectional area of Earthing blades and contacts shall not be less than 50%
of cross sectional area of main blades and contacts. The Earthing blades shall have the
same short time current rating (thermal and dynamic) as that of main blades.
The current density in the current carrying parts of the Isolator shall in no case exceeds
the following values:
For Copper : 2A/sq.mm
For Aluminium : 1A/sq.mm
5.5 Support insulators for all types of isolators shall be of solid core type except for 33 kV
Isolators where in post insulators shall be used.
5.5.1 The insulator shall be made of homogeneous and vitreous porcelain of high mechanical
and di-electric strength. It shall have sufficient mechanical strength to sustain electrical
and mechanical loading on account of wind load, short circuit forces etc., Glazing of the
porcelain shall be of uniform brown or dark brown colour with a smooth surface arranged
to shed away rain water. The porcelain shall be free from lamination and other flaws or
imperfections that might affect the mechanical or dielectric quality. It shall be thoroughly
vitrified, tough and impervious to moisture. The porcelain and metal parts shall be
assembled in such a manner and with such material that any thermal differential
expansion between the metal and porcelain parts throughout the range of temperature
specified in this specification shall not loosen the parts or create undue internal stresses
which may affect the mechanical or electrical strength or rigidity. The assembly shall not
have excessive concentration of electrical stresses in any section or across leakage
surfaces. The cement used shall not give rise to chemical reaction with metal fittings. The
insulator shall be suitable for water washing by rain or artificial means in service
condition. Profile of the insulator shall also conform to IEC-815. Insulator shall have a
minimum cantilever strength of 6 KN.
5.5.2 Cap to be provided on top of the insulator shall be of high grade cast iron or malleable
steel casting. It shall be machine faced and hot dip galvanised. The cap shall have four
numbers of tapped holes spaced on a pitch circle diameter of 127 mm for 245 kV, 145
kV & 72.5kV Isolators & Line-cum-Earth Switches and 76 mm for 36 kV Isolators & Line-
cum-Earth Switches. The holes shall be suitable for bolts with threads having anti
corrosive protection. The effective depth of threads shall not be less than the nominal
diameter of the bolt. The cap shall be so designed that it shall be free from visible corona.
5.5.3 The casting shall be free from blow holes, cracks and such other defects.
5.5.4 All the ferrous metal parts shall be hot dip galvanised smoothly as per IS: 3638 (as
amended up to date), IS: 2633 or any other equivalent authoritative standard. The material
shall be galvanised only after shop operations have been completed upon it. The metal
parts before galvanising should be thoroughly cleaned of any paint, grease, rust, scales or
alkali or any foreign deposit which are likely to come in the way of galvanising process.
The coating on the metal parts shall withstand minimum four one minute dips in copper
sulphate solution as per IEC-168.
5.5.5 The insulator unit shall be assembled in a suitable jig to ensure correct positioning of the
top and bottom metal fittings relative to one another. The faces of the metal fittings shall
be parallel and at right angles to the axis of the insulator and the corresponding holes in
the top and the bottom metal fittings shall be in a vertical plane containing the axis of the
insulator.
5.5.6 It shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to carry out thorough inspection and
quality checks on the insulators at the insulator Contractor's works, before offering the
insulators for HVPNL's inspection.
5.6 OPERATING MECHANISM:
5.6.1a) Each 245 kV, 145 kV, 72.5kV & 36 kV isolators shall be remote controlled from the control
room. Provision shall be made for local motor control also. Operating mechanism shall
also be equipped with local manual operating device intended for emergency operation
when motor operating mechanism becomes inoperative. Additional electromagnetic type
interlock shall be provided so as to prevent the operation of isolator manually or
electrically when the corresponding circuit breaker is ON.
b) Manual operating mechanism through crank and reduction gear shall be provided for the
earth switch which too will be gang operated. The operation of earth switch which too will
be gang operated. The operation of earth switch shall also be electrically inter-locked by
providing a 63.5V rated contractor and 220 kV DC rated electro magnet. The contractor
will be fed from single phase (132kV/3/110 kV/3) CVT/ PT provided at the entry of a
transmission line in the sub-station. The normally closed contact of said contactor will form
part of series chain with other contacts of line isolator/ earth switch to prevent closing of
earth switch when the contactor is in picked up position (which means that when the
concerned transmission line is live).
5.6.2 The operating mechanism shall provide quick, simple and effective operation. The motor
operated type operating mechanism shall be suitable for remote operation of all three
poles simultaneously as well as local manual operation through crank and reduction gear.
The design of manual operation shall be such that one man shall be able to operate the
isolator without undue effort with about 20 (twenty) revolutions of the crank. The operating
mechanism shall be suitable to hold the dis-connector in CLOSE OR OPEN position and
prevent operation by gravity, wind, short circuit forces, seismic forces, vibration, shock,
accidental touching etc.,
5.6.3 Limit switches for control shall be fitted on the isolator shaft within the cabinet to sense the
open and close positions of the isolators and earth switches.
5.6.4 It shall not be possible, after final adjustment has been made, for any part of the
mechanism to be displaced at any point in the travel sufficient enough to cause improper
functioning of the isolator when the isolator is opened or closed at any speed. All holes in
cranks, linkage etc., having moving pins, shall be drilled to fit accurately so as to maintain
the minimum amount of slack and lost-motion in the entire mechanism.
5.6.5 A "local/remote" selector switch and a set of open/close push buttons shall be provided on
the control cabinet of the isolator to permit its operation through local or remote push
buttons. The remote push buttons shall be arranged by the HVPNL.
5.6.6 Provision shall be made in the control cabinet to disconnect power supply to prevent
local/remote power operation.
5.6.7 Each motor operated mechanism shall be subjected to blocked rotor test.
5.7 CONTROL CABINET:
The control cabinet of the operating mechanism shall be made out of 12 SWG(2.64 mm
thick) sheet steel duly hot dip galvanised or 10 mm thick aluminium plate or casting.
Hinged door shall be provided with pad locking arrangement. Sloping rain hood shall be
provided to cover all sides. 15 mm thick neoprene or better type of gaskets shall be
provided to ensure degree of protection of at least IP:55 as per IS:2147. The cabinet shall
be suitable for mounting on support structure with adjustment for vertical alignment.
Details of these arrangements shall be furnished along with the tender.
5.8 MOTOR:
The motor shall be suitable for three phase, 415 V, A.C. with variations as specified in this
specification. It shall be totally enclosed type if mounted outside the control cabinet. The
motor shall withstand without damage stalled torque for at least three times the duration of
tripping device. The motor shall, in all other respects, conform to the requirement of
IS-325.
5.9 GEAR:
The disconnector may be required to operate occasionally, with considerably long idle
intervals. Special care shall be taken for selection of material for gear and lubrication of
gears to meet this requirement. The gears shall be made out of aluminium bronze or any
other better material and lubricated for life with graphite or better quality non draining and
non hardening type grease. Wherever necessary automatic relieving mechanism shall be
provided. Complete details of components, material, grade, self lubricating arrangement,
grade of lubricants, details of jig, fixtures and devices used for quality check, shall be
furnished by the Bidder in his offer.
5.10 GLAND PLATE AND GLANDS:
A removable gland plate with double compression type brass cable glands shall be
provided with each operating mechanism for terminating all cables. Exact quantity of
glands to be provided, shall be intimated to the Contractor.
5.11 CONTROL CIRCUITS:
Control device shall store OPEN and CLOSE command even if the corresponding switch
is momentarily pressed until the command is fully executed and the components get de-
energised after execution. Failure of auxiliary power supply or loose contact shall not
cause faulty operation.
5.12 SUPPORTING STRUCTURE :
The Isolators and isolator cum earth switches shall be mounted rigidly in an upright
position on their own supporting structure and not on the line or bus bar structure. The
supporting structures will be arranged by the HVPNL. The isolator and isolator cum
earth switch will be suitable for mounting on HVPNL's standard supporting structure
HTD/ST-170, HTD/ST-90R3, HTD/ST-87R & HTD/ST-110 for 245 kV, 145kV, 72.5kV & 36
kV respectively. One print of detailed structure drawing is enclosed with the specification
which may be perused & its suitability for the offered equipment be confirmed by the
bidders. Any additional member of structure required for mounting the MOM box of
isolators as well as line-cum-earth switch will be in scope of bidder's supply.
5.13 LIMIT SWITCH:
Limit switches shall be of reputed make. Auxiliary switch shall not be used as limit switch.
Details of make, rating and type of limit switch shall be furnished in the offer.
5.14 OVERLOAD AND SINGLE PHASING PREVENTER:
Suitable relay/device shall be provided to prevent overloading of the motor. Single phase
preventer shall be provided to operate on open circuiting of any phase and shall trip off the
motor. Complete details of the devices shall be furnished in the offer.
5.15 CONTACTOR:
The contractor shall be suitable for making and breaking stalled motor current. The
contractor coil shall be suitable for 220 V D.C. Two numbers of contractors shall be
provided for each motor for OPEN and CLOSE operation respectively. Make, type, rating
and details of the contractor shall be furnished in the offer.
5.16 AUXILIARY SWITCH:
5.16.1 Each operating mechanism box shall be equipped with ten numbers of NC and ten
numbers of NO auxiliary switches exclusively for HVPNL's use. In addition, two pairs of
make before break NO/NC contacts shall be provided in the operating mechanism
box. 3 pairs of NC and 3 pairs of NO contacts shall be provided in the auxiliary switch box
for earth mechanism.
5.16.2 The auxiliary switches and auxiliary circuits shall be capable of carrying the current of
atleast 10 Amps continuously.
5.16.3 Auxiliary switches shall be capable of breaking atleast 2A in a 220 V D.C. circuit with a
time constant of not less than 20 milli seconds.
5.16.4 Quick Make and Break (QMB) type auxiliary switch shall have snap action built-in within
the switch.
5.16.5 The auxiliary switches shall be actuated by a cam or similar arrangement directly mounted
on the isolator and shall be without any intermediate levels, linkages etc., to ensure fool
proof operation.
5.17 SPACE HEATERS:
Space heater, thermostatically controlled, suitable for single phase 240 V AC supply shall
be provided for motor operated operating mechanism to prevent condensation. A switch
and fuse/link shall be provided in the operating mechanism.
5.18 TERMINAL BLOCK AND WIRING:
Each operating mechanism shall be provided with 1100 V grade stud type terminal block
having washers, nuts & check nuts. All auxiliary switches, interlocks and other terminals
shall be wired up to terminal block. The terminal block shall have at least 20% extra
terminals. All wiring shall be carried out with 1100 V grade insulated 2.5 mm2 copper
wires.
5.19 DUTY REQUIREMENTS:
5.19.1 Isolators and earth switches shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic and thermal
effects of the maximum possible short circuit current of the systems in their closed
position. They shall be constructed such that they do not open under influence of short
circuit current.
5.19.2 The earth switches, wherever provided, shall be constructionally interlocked so that the
earth switch can be operated only when the isolator is open and not vice-versa. The
constructional interlocks shall be built-in construction of isolator and shall be in addition to
the electrical and mechanical interlocks provided in the operating mechanism.

5.19.3 In addition to the constructional interlock, isolator and earth switches shall have
provision to prevent their electrical and manual operation unless the associated and
other interlocking conditions are met. All these interlocks shall be of fail safe type.
Suitable individual interlocking coil arrangements shall be provided. The interlocking coil
shall be suitable for continuous operation from DC supply and within a variation range
stipulated in this volume.
5.19.4 The isolator shall be capable of making/breaking normal currents when no voltage
occurs across the terminals of each pole of isolator on account of make/break operation.
5.19.5 The isolator shall be capable of making/ breaking magnetising current of 0.7 A at 0.15
power factor and capacitive current of 0.7 A at 0.15 power factor.
5.19.6 Isolator and earth switches shall be able to bear on the terminals the total forces
including wind loading and electrodynamic forces on the attached conductor without
impairing reliability or current carrying capacity.
5.20 INTERIOR ILLUMINATION:

A switch, HRC fuse and holder suitable for a 240 V lamp shall be provided in one of the
motor operated mechanism box of isolator and manually operated mechanism box of
earth switch.
5.21 POWER SOCKET:
A single phase 240 V 15A power socket and switch shall be provided in the motor
operated operating mechanisms of the Isolators poles.
5.22 CONTROL AND AUXILIARY SUPPLY:
A three phase switch with HRC fuses for phases and link for neutral shall be provided for
power supply and a 2 way switch with HRC fuses shall be provided for control supply in
the motor operated mechanisms of the Isolators.
5.23 ACCESSORIES:
The accessories to be provided on the isolator shall include but not limited to the
following:
5.23.1 POSITION INDICATOR:
A position indicator to show whether the isolator is in ON or OFF position.
5.23.2 COUNTER BALANCE SPRINGS:
Counter balance springs, cushions etc., shall be provided to prevent impact at the end of
travel both on opening and closing of the isolator. The springs shall be made of durable
and non-rusting type alloy.
5.24 NAME PLATES:
Isolator and Earthing switches and their operating devices shall be provided with a name
plate. The name plate shall be weather proof and corrosion proof. It shall be mounted in
such a position that it shall be visible in the position of normal service and installation. It
shall carry the following information duly engraved or punched on it.
5.24.1 Isolator Base:
Name of utility (i.e. HVPNL) :
Name of Manufacturer :
P.O. No. :
Type Designation :
Manufacturer's serial number :
Rated voltage :
Rated normal current :
Rated short time current (rms) :
and duration :
Rated short time peak current (kAp) :
Weight :

5.24.2 Earthing Switch:
P.O. No. :
Type Designation :
Manufacturer's serial number :
Rated voltage :
Rated short time current (rms) :
and duration :
Rated short time peak current (kAp) :
Weight :
5.24.3 Operating Device:
P.O. No. :
Type Designation :
Reduction gear ratio :
AC Motor :
I.) Rated auxiliary voltage :
II.) Starting current :
III.) Designation of AC motor as per IS:4722 :
IV.) Starting torque at 80% of supply voltage :
V.) Over travel in degrees after cutting off supply :
Total operating time in seconds
I.) CLOSE operation - electrical :
II.) OPEN Operation - electrical :
-do- - manual :
Space Heater :
Rated voltage and power Auxiliary contacts
I.) Rated current (Amps) :
II.) Time constant (ms) :
III.) No. of contacts used (NC & NO) :
IV.) No. of free contacts (NC & NO) :
Terminal blocks and wiring
I.) Rated current :
II.) Voltage grade and type :
5.25 PADLOCKING DEVICE:
All Isolator and Earthing switches shall be provided with padlocking device to permit
locking of the isolator and Earthing switch in both fully open and fully closed positions.
Power driven isolator and Earthing switch shall be arranged to be interlocked
electrically also.
5.26 SIGNALLING:
5.26.1 Signalling of the close position shall not take place unless the movable contact has set
in a position in which the rated normal current, the peak withstand current and the
short time withstand current can be carried safely.
5.26.2 Signalling of the open position shall not take place unless the movable contact has
reached the position such that the clearance between the moveable and fixed contacts
is at least 80% of the isolating distance.
5.27 EARTHING:
5.27.1 Flexible copper connections shall be provided between rotating earth blades and the
frame which shall have a cross-section of atleast 50 mm2 and shall be tinned or
suitably treated against corrosion.
5.27.2 The frame of each disconnector and Earthing switch shall be provided with two reliable
Earthing terminals for connection to the HVPNL's Earthing conductor/flat and also
clamping screws suitable for carrying specified short time current. Flexible ground
connections shall be provided for connecting operating handle to the Earthing flat. The
diameter of clamping screw shall be atleast 12 mm. The connecting point shall be
marked with earth symbol.
5.28 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION:
5.28.1 Full particulars of design, manufacture, jig template and quality control devices
developed for manufacture of the equipment offered in respect of but not limited to the
following, shall be furnished with drawings and descriptions alongwith the tender.
i.) Contacts, material, current density etc.,
ii.) Design of contact pressure.
iii.) Contact support and fixing arrangement on isolators.
iv.) Turn and twist mechanism, clamps, locks etc.,
v.) Bearings, housing of bearings, bushes etc.,
vi.) Balancing of heights,
vii.) Coupling pipes, joints, connection adjustments.
viii.) Base plates.
ix.) Down pipe guides and joints.
x.) Brass bushes and bearings at various joints.
xi.) Operating mechanism, type of gear motor, limit switch, aux. switch, timers, size and
thickness of box, degree of protection, gland plate, gland etc.,
xii.) Nuts, bolts and fasteners.
xiii.) Interlocking devices.
Offers without the above information or with incomplete information shall not be
considered.
5.28.2 FASTENERS:
Nuts, bolts and washers of 5/8" and higher size shall be hot dip galvanised. The bolts
used on tapped holes of insulator cap shall be galvanised by centrifuge process to
avoid excess deposition of zinc on threads. Nuts, bolts and washers of less than 5/8"
size shall be of stainless steel when used on live parts and nickel plated brass in other
parts.
5.28.3 CONTACTS:
Contacts shall be made out of hard drawn electrolytic grade copper. Arcing contacts
wherever provided shall close first and open last. The contacts surface shall be silver
plated. Fabrication of contact shall be made with suitable jig to avoid deviations during
production. Details of size and shape of contacts, springs, back plate, fixing
arrangements, design of contact pressure, life of contacts, limit of temperature rise
etc., shall be furnished along with the tender. The moving contacts of tubular section
shall be so dimensioned as to carry the rated current.
5.28.4 MOUNTING OF CONTACTS:
The contacts shall rest on a brass block and with initial tension. Suitable device shall
be provided to prevent dashing. Fabrication, welding etc., shall be done in suitable jig
to avoid deviations during production.
5.28.5 TERMINAL PAD:
The terminal pad shall be suitable for connection to aluminium terminal connector
through bimetallic plate wherever necessary. It shall be made out of electrolytic copper
heavily silver plated. Dimensions of the terminal pad shall be furnished with the tender.
5.28.6 MOVING BLADE:
Moving blade shall be made out of hard drawn Electrolytic grade copper for
145/72.5/36 kV Isolators and hard drawn Electrolytic grade copper/aluminium for
245kV Isolators. Contact surface of moving blade shall be heavily silver plated. The
surface shall be wiped during closing and opening operations to remove any film,
oxide coating etc., Wiping action shall not cause scouring or abrasion of surfaces.
5.28.7 The rotating insulator shall be mounted on housing with bearing housing. The housing
shall be made of gravity dicast aluminium with smooth surfaces suitably machined for
seating the bearings. Two numbers of bearings with adequate shaft diameter and
distance between the bearings shall be provided to avoid wobbling during operations.
The bearings shall be of atleast 50 mm shaft diameter. The bearings shall be of
reputed make e.g. SKF, HMT, NBC, TATA, and lubricated for life. All other friction
locations shall be provided with bearings, bushes, joints, springs etc., shall be so
designed that no lubrication shall be required during service. Complete details of
bearings, bushes, housing, greasing etc., shall be furnished with the tender. The
Earthing switch shaft shall also be provided with necessary bearings.
5.28.8 Tandem pipes shall be of adequately dimensioned for the given duty and shall be
class B. Base plate of insulators for connection of tandem pipe shall be made out of
one piece 10 mm thick MS plate. Bolt and shackle device shall be used to connect
tandem pipe to the base plate.
5.28.9 The operating pipe too shall be of class B and adequately dimensioned for the given
duty. The pipe shall be terminated into a suitable swivel or universal type joint between
the insulator bottom bearing and the operating mechanism to take care of marginal
angular misalignment at site.
5.28.10 Each phase of isolator shall be provided with a rigid base fabricated from steel
sections. The base shall be suitable for mounting on support structures. Fabrication,
welding etc., shall be done by suitable jig, power press and templates to avoid
deviations during production. Details of dimensions sections, jig templates and device
used for production of the base shall be furnished with the tender.
5.29.1 All Isolators shall be provided with universal type terminal connectors suitable for
Single ACSR Zebra Conductor/Twin ACSR Zebra Conductor (AAC Tarantula for
220kV S/Stns). The unit rate for types of terminal connector shall be quoted in the
relevant schedule.
5.29.2 The terminal connectors shall meet the following requirements:
i.) Terminal connectors shall be manufactured and tested as per IS: 5561.
ii.) All castings shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All
sharp edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
iii.) No part of a clamp shall be less than 10 mm thick.
iv.) All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised conforming to IS: 2629.
v.) For bimetallic connectors, copper alloy liner of minimum thickness of 2 mm shall be
cast integral with aluminium body.
vi.) Flexible connectors shall be made from tinned copper / aluminium sheets.
vii.) All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have minimum
contact resistance.
viii.) Connectors shall be designed to be corona free in accordance with the requirements
stipulated in IS: 5561.
5.29.3 Wherever necessary bimetallic strip of standard quality shall be used to avoid galvanic
corrosion.
5.30 ASSEMBLY:
The disconnector shall be fully assembled at the works of the Contractor and
operations shall be carried out on it to ascertain that all parts fit correctly and
function satisfactorily.
5.31 PAINTING, GALVANISING AND CLIMATE PROOFING:
All interiors and exteriors of enclosures, cabinets and other metal parts shall be
thoroughly cleaned to remove all rust, scales, corrosion, grease and other adhering
foreign matter and the surfaces treated by recognised phosphating (e.g. Seven
tank phosphating sequence). After such preparation of surfaces, two coats of zinc
oxide primer shall be given by suitable staving and air drying before final painting.
Colour of the final paints shall be of shade no. 631 of IS: 5 i.e. epoxy light grey. The
finally painted cubicle shall present aesthetically pleasing appearance free from any
dent or uneven surface.
5.31.1 Paint inside the metallic housing shall be of anti-condensation type and the paint on
outside surfaces shall be suitable for outdoor installation.
5.31.2 All components shall be given adequate treatment of climate proofing as per IS: 3202
so as to withstand corrosive and severe service conditions.
5.31.3 All metal parts not suitable for painting such as structural steel, pipes, rods, levers,
linkages, nuts and bolts used in other than current path etc., shall be hot dip
galvanised and shall be capable to prevent corrosion in view of the severe climatic
conditions.
5.31.4 Complete details of painting, galvanising and climate proofing of the equipment shall
be furnished in the tender.
6.0 TESTS:
6.1 TYPE TESTS:
The equipment offered should be type tested. Test reports should not more then
seven years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried
out in accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accredited body or
witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the
successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.
i.) Insulation level test
ii.) Temperature rise test
iii.) Rated peak withstand current and rated short time withstand current test.
iv.) Short circuit making capacity test of earthing switch.
v.) Operation and mechanical endurance test.
6.2 ROUTINE TESTS:
The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant IS: 9921 (PART-IV) 1985
shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless
i.) Power Frequency withstand voltage dry test of main circuit.
ii.) Voltage test on control auxiliary circuits.
iii.) Measurement of resistance of main circuit.
iv.) Mechanical operating test.
7.0 INSPECTION:
i.) The HVPNL shall have access at all times to the works and all other places of
manufacture, where the dis-connectors, earth switches and associated equipment are
being manufactured and the Contractor shall provide all facilities with out extra cost
for unrestricted inspection of the works, raw materials manufacture of all the
accessories and for conducting necessary tests as detailed herein.
ii.) The Contractor shall keep the HVPNL informed in advance of the time of starting and
of the progress of manufacture of equipment in its various stages so that
arrangements could be made for inspection
iii.) No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture unless the material has
been satisfactorily inspected and tested.
iv.) The acceptance of any quantity of the equipment shall in no way relieve the Contractor
of his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of this specification and shall not
prevent subsequent rejection if such equipment are later found to be defective.
8.0 DOCUMENTATION:
All drawings shall conform to International Standards Organisation (ISO) 'A' series of
drawing sheet/Indian Standards Specification.

8.1 LIST OF DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS:
The Bidder shall furnish four sets of following drawings alongwith his offer:
a) General outline and assembly drawings of the dis-connector operating mechanism,
structure, insulator and terminal connector.
b) Sectional views and descriptive details of items such as moving blades, contacts, arms
contact pressure, contact support bearing housing of bearings, balancing of heights, phase
coupling pipes, base plate, operating shaft, guides.
c) Name plate.
d) Schematic drawing along with detailed write-up.
e) Wiring diagram.
NOTE: All above drawings should be a minimum space (14x10cm) for stamping the
approval of drawings by HVPNL.
8.2 The bidder shall submit four sets of final versions of complete and correct equipment
drawings for Purchaser's approval along with bid in a sealed envelope. The Purchaser
shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the Supplier within 21 days
from the date of issue of LOI. The submission of complete and correct readable drawings
for approval is the responsibility of the bidder/supplier. The Supplier shall, if so required by
the purchaser, modify the drawings and resubmit four copies of the modified drawings for
Purchasers approval within two weeks from the date of Purchasers comments. Then, the
purchaser shall approve the revised drawings within 2 weeks from the date of its receipt.
8.3
The successful Bidder shall also supply one set of all the approved drawings and instruction manual
containing handling, installation, testing and commissioning, operation and maintenance of the
equipment at the time of despatch of material to consignee with each equipment for our field staff. In
addition, 5 sets of such bound manuals and final approved drawings shall be supplied for reference
8.4 and record in our design office.
8.5 One set of all the approved drawings and manual of instructions will be supplied along with
each equipment without which the supply will not be considered as complete supply.
8.6
The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved
drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the Purchaser.
All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to the
approval of the drawing shall be at the Supplier's risk.
Approval of drawings/work by Purchaser shall not relieve the Supplier of his responsibility
and liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the latest revision of
applicable standards, rules and codes of practices.
Instruction Manuals:
Twenty copies of the erection, operation and maintenance manuals in English be
supplied for each type of dis-connector one month prior to despatch of the equipment.
The manual shall be bound volumes and shall contain all drawings and information
required for erection, operation and maintenance of the dis-connector including but not
limited to the following particulars:
a) Marked erection prints identifying the component parts of the dis-connector as
shipped with assembly drawings.
9.0
b) Detailed dimensions and description of all auxiliaries.
9.1
c) Detailed views of the insulator stacks, metallic, operating mechanism, structure,
interlocks, spare parts etc.,
9.2 Packing and Forwarding:

The equipment shall be packed in crates suitable for vertical/horizontal transport, as the
case may be and suitable to withstand bundling during transport and outdoor storage
during transit. The supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the equipment during
transit due to improper and inadequate packing. The easily damageable material shall be
carefully packed and marked with the appropriate caution symbols. Wherever necessary,
proper arrangement for lifting, such as lifting hooks etc., shall be provided. Any material
found short inside the packing cases shall be supplied by Supplier without any extra cost.
9.3
Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing, list containing the
following information:-
a) Name of the consignee.
b) Details of consignment.
c) Destination.
d) Total weight of consignment.
e) Handling and unpacking instructions.
f) Bill of material indicating contents of each package.
The supplier shall ensure that the packing list and bill of material are approved by the
purchaser before despatch.

ANNEXURE-I
(Isolators)
LIST OF SPECIAL TESTS TO BE CARRIED OUT
Sl. No. Name of the Test Standard to which it Conforms

1. Tests on insulators IS:2544
IEC:168
2. Tests on terminal connectors IS:5561
3. Tests on galvanised components IS:2633

SECTION-4
CHAPTER-3
SURGE ARRESTORS (LIGHTNING ARRESTORS)
1.0 SCOPE:
1.1 This specification provides for the design, engineering, manufacture, assembly,
stage testing, inspection and testing before despatch, packing, forwarding and
delivery at site of Metal Oxide (gapless) 198 kV, 120 kV, 60 kV, 30 kV & 9 kV
Surge Arrestors complete with discharge counter, insulating base and other
accessories for all rating arresters except 9 kV & 30 kV surge arrester as specified
hereunder.
1.2 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of design and
construction of Surge Arrestors. However, Surge Arrestors shall conform in all
respects to the high Standard of design and workmanship and be capable of
performing in continuous commercial operation upto Bidder's guarantee in a manner
acceptable to Purchaser. The Arrestors offered shall be complete with all parts,
necessary for their effective and trouble free operation. Such components shall be
deemed to be within the scope of supply, irrespective of whether they are specifically
brought out in the commercial order or not.
2.0 STANDARDS:
2.1 The Surge Arrestors shall conform to the latest editions and amendments available at
the time of supply, of the standards listed hereunder.
____________________________________________________________________
___
Sl. Standard Title
No. Ref. No.
____________________________________________________________________
___
1. IEC:99-4 Specification Part-4 for Surge Arrestors without gap for AC
system.
2. IS:3070 Specification for Lightning Arrestors
(Part-III) for alternating current system
3. IS: 2629 Recommended practice for hot dip galvanising of iron and
steel.
4. IS: 2633 Method for testing uniformity of coating on zinc coated
articles.
5. IS:5621 Specification for large hollow porcelain for use in electrical
installation.
6. IS:2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low
voltage
switchgear and control.
7. Indian Electricity Rules, 1956.
____________________________________________________________________________
__
Note:
i) For the purpose of this specification all technical terms used hereinafter shall
have the meaning as per IEC/ISS specification.
ii) For the parameters of the Arrestor which are not specified in IEC specification
for Surge Arrestors, the provisions of IS: 3070 (Part-I) shall be applicable.
2.2 Surge Arrestors meeting with the requirements of other authoritative standards,
which ensure equal or better quality than the standards mentioned above shall also
be acceptable. Where the equipment offered by the Bidder conforms to other
standards, salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the
specified standards shall be clearly brought out in the offer. Four (4) copies of the
reference standards in English language shall be furnished along with the offer.
The equipment is required to operate satisfactorily under the following site condition:
i) Temperature
a) Maximum 500C
b) Minimum -2.50C
ii) Relative Humidity
a) Maximum 100%
b) Minimum 26%
iii) Isocerounic level 45
iv) Approx. no. of rainy days/year 120 days nearly
v) Average rain fall/year 900 mm
vi) Altitude above mean sea level Below 1000 meters
vii) Max. wind pressure 195 Kg./m2
viii) Average number of dust storm days per annum 35
The reference ambient temperature may be taken as 500 C.
The equipment offered under this specification shall be suitable for the following
auxiliary power supplies.
a) Power Devices (like drive motors)415V, 3 Phase, 4 wire 50 Hz, neutral grounded
AC supply
b) AC Control and protective 240V, single space, 2 wire 50 Hz, neutral
devices, lighting fixtures, space grounded AC supply
heaters
c) DC alarm,control and protective 220V, DC 2-Wire
devices
Each of the foregoing supplies shall be made available by the Purchaser at the
terminal point for each equipment for operation of accessories and auxiliary
equipment. Bidders scope shall include supply of interconnecting cables, terminal
boxes, etc., The above supply voltages may vary as below and all devices shall be
suitable for continuous operation over entire range of voltages.
i) AC Supply-voltage+10%&-15% frequency + 5%
ii) DC Supply-15% to +10%
4.0 SYSTEM PARAMETERS:
The Surge Arrestors offered under this specification shall conform to the parameters
given below:
____________________________________________________________________
_______
Sl. Particulars System Voltage (KV rms)
No. 220 132 66 33

11___________
1. Nominal system voltage 220 132 66 33 11
(kV rms)
2. Highest system voltage 245 145 72.5 36 12
(kV rms)
3. 1.2/50 microsecond
impulse voltage withstand
level
a. Transformers and 900 550 325 170 75
Reactors (kVp)
b. Other equipment 1050 650 325 170 75
and lines (kVp)
4. Minimum prospective 40 31.5 31.5 26.3 18.4
symmetrical fault current
for 1 second at Arrestor
location (kA rms)
5. Anticipated levels of
temporary overvoltage
and its duration
a) Voltage (p.u.) 1.5/1.2 1.5/1.2 1.5/1.2 1.5/1.2 1.5/1.2
b) Duration (Seconds) 1/10 1/10 1/10 1/10 1/10
6. System frequency(Hz) --------------------- 50 2.5 C/S ----------------------
7. Neutral Grounding E.E* E.E* E.E* E.E* E.E*
8. Number of Phases ----------------------- Three --------------------
*E/E = Effectively earth
______________________________________________________________________
5.1 The Surge Arrestors shall conform to the technical requirements as per Annexure-II
5.2 The energy handling capability of each rating of Arrestor offered, supported by
calculations, shall be furnished in the offer.
5.3 The Surge Arrestors shall be fitted with pressure relief devices and arc diverting ports
and shall be tested as per the requirements of IEC specification for minimum
prospective symmetrical fault current as specified in Clause 4.0 (4).
5.4 The grading ring on each complete Arrestor for proper stress distribution shall be
provided if required for attaining all the relevant technical parameters.
5.5 PROTECTIVE LEVELS:
The basic insulation levels and switching impulse withstand levels of the lines and
equipment to be protected, have been specified in clause 4.0, "Principal
Parameters". The protective characteristics of the Arrestors offered shall be clearly
specified in the schedule of guaranteed technical particulars.
5.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
5.6.1 The materials and components not specifically stated in this specification but which
are necessary for satisfactory operation of the equipment are deemed to be included
in the scope of supply unless specifically excluded.
5.6.2 Unless otherwise brought out separately by the Bidder in the schedule of deviations
the Surge Arrestors offered shall conform to the specification scrupulously. All
deviations from the specification shall be brought out in the schedule of deviations.
The discrepancies between the specification and the catalogues or literature
submitted as part of the offer shall not be considered as valid deviations unless
specifically brought out in the schedule of deviations.
5.6.3 Any deviation which has not been specifically brought out in the schedule of
deviations of the Bid Proposal Sheets, shall not be given effect to. The deviations
brought out in the schedule shall be supported by authentic documents, standards
and other references.
5.6.4 Each individual unit of Surge Arrestor shall be hermetically sealed and fully protected
against ingress of moisture. The hermetic seal shall be effective for the entire life time
of the Arrestor and under the service conditions as specified. The Bidder shall furnish
sectional view of the Arrestor, showing details of sealing employed.
5.6.5 The Bidder shall furnish in the offer, a sectional view of pressure relief device
employed in the Surge Arrestors offered.
5.6.6 The Surge Arrestors shall be suitable for hot line washing.
5.7 CONSTRUCTION:
5.7.1 All the units of Arrestors of same rating shall be inter changeable without adversely
affecting the performance.
5.7.2 The Surge Arrestors shall be suitable for pedestal type mounting.
5.7.3 All the necessary flanges, bolts, nuts, clamps etc., required for assembly of complete
Arrestor with accessories and mounting on support structure to be supplied by the
Purchaser, shall be included in Bidder's scope of supply.
5.7.4 The drilling details for mounting the Arrestor on Purchaser's support shall be supplied
by the Supplier.
5.7.5 The minimum permissible separation between the Surge Arrestor and any earthed
object shall be indicated by the Bidder in his offer.
5.8.1 All porcelain housings shall be free from lamination cavities or other flaws affecting
the maximum level of mechanical and electrical strengths.
5.8.2 The porcelain shall be well vitrified and nonporous.
5.8.3 The Creepage distance of the Arrestor housing shall be as per Annexure-I.
5.8.4 The porcelain petticoat shall be preferably of self-cleaning type (Aerofoil design). The
details of the porcelain housing such as height, angle of inclination, shape of
petticoats, gap between the petticoats, diameter (ID and OD) etc., shall be
indicated by the Bidder in his offer in the form of a detailed drawing.
5.8.5 The Arrestor housing shall conform to the requirements of IEC/ISS specification.
5.9 GALVANISATION, NICKEL PLATING ETC.:
5.9.1 All ferrous parts exposed to atmosphere shall be hot dip galvanised as per IS:2629 as
amended from time to time., Tinned copper/brass lugs shall be used for internal
wiring of discharge counter. Screws used for electrical connections shall be either
made of brass or nickel plated.
5.9.2 Ground terminal pads and name plate brackets shall be hot dip galvanised.
5.9.3 The material shall be galvanised only after completing all shop operations.
5.10 ACCESSORIES AND FITTINGS:
5.10.1 Discharge counters shall be provided for the Arrestors except for 9 kV and
30 kV Arresters The discharge counter shall be provided with milli-ammeter for
measuring the leakage current and shall not require any DC or AC Aux. supply. It
shall be suitable for outdoor use. The installation of discharge counter shall not
adversely affect the Arrestor performance.
5.10.2 The discharge counter shall register operation whenever lightning or any other
type of surge strikes the Surge Arrestor.
5.10.3 All necessary accessories and Earthing connection leads between the bottom
of the Arrestor and the discharge counter shall be in the Bidder's scope of supply.
The connecting lead between discharge counter and Surge Arrestor shall be of
copper flexible tape of size 25x4 mm and minimum of 1.5 meter length. The
discharge counter shall be so designed that the readings of discharges recorded
by the counter and the readings of milli-ammeter shall be clearly visible through
an inspection window to a person standing on ground. The minimum height of
Purchaser's support shall be 2.5 Mts. Terminal connector conforming to IS:5561
shall be supplied along with the arrester.
5.11 Each Surge Counter shall have terminals of robust construction for connection to
Earthing lead and these shall be suitably arranged so as to enable the incoming and
outgoing connections to be made with minimum bends.
5.11.1 Suitable grounding terminal shall be provided for earthing of surge arrestors up to
water level. Proper functioning of the Surge counter with Surge Arrestor shall be
ensured by the Supplier.
5.12 NAME PLATE:
The arrestor shall be provided with non-corrosive legible name plate indelibly marked
with the following information:
1. Haryana Vidyut Prasaran Nigam Ltd.
2. Order No.
3. Manufacturer's name or trade mark and identification no. of the Arrestor being
supplied.
4. Rated voltage.
5. Maximum continuous operating voltage.
6. Type.
7. Rated Frequency.
8. Nominal discharge current.
9. Long duration discharge class.
10. Pressure relief current in kA rms.
11. Year of manufacture.
6.0 TESTS:
6.1 TYPE TESTS:
The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven years
old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited
laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accredited body or witnessed by HVPN or
another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for
approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.
i.) Insulation withstand test.
ii.) Residual voltage test.
iii.) Long duration current impulse withstand test.
iv.) Operating duty test.
v.) Pressure relief test.
vi.) Test of arrestor dis-connector.
vii.) Artificial pollution test on porcelain housed arrestors.
viii.) Temperature cycle test on porcelain housed arrestors.
ix.) Porosity test on porcelain house arrestors.
x.) Galvanising test on exposed ferrous metal parts.
6.2 ROUTINE TESTS:
The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant IS:3070 (PART-III) 1993 shall
be carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with
in writing by the HVPNL.
i.) Measurement of power frequency reference voltage.
ii.) Lightening impulse residual voltage test.
iii.) Partial discharge test.
6.4 SURGE MONITOR
The following routine test shall be performed in the presence of HVPNLs representative:
i.) Tests for satisfactory operation of surge counter while discharging surges.
ii.) Test for correctness of leakage current meter before and after the passage of surges.
iii.) Visual examination tests.
7.0 INSPECTION
7.1 The inspection may be carried out by the HVPNL at any stage of manufacture. The
successful Bidder shall grant free access to the HVPNL's representative at all times to
the works and all other places of manufacture, where equipment are being
manufactured and the Contractor shall provide all facilities without extra charges, for
unrestricted inspection of the Contractor's works, raw materials, manufacture of the
equipment., all the accessories and for conducting necessary test as detailed herein.
7.2 The Contractor shall keep the HVPNL informed in advance, about the manufacturing
program so that arrangement can be made for inspection.
7.3 No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture unless the material has
been satisfactorily inspected and tested.
7.4 The HVPNL reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/routine testing of
the bought out items.
7.5 The Contractor shall submit their internal inspection report containing manufacturer's
test certificates before offering the material for inspection.
7.6 The acceptance of any quantity of equipment shall in no way relieve the Contractor of
his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of this specification and shall not
7.7
prevent subsequent rejection if such equipment are later found to be defective.
8.0 DOCUMENTATION:
8.1 The successful bidder shall submit four sets of following drawings for HVPNL approval.
List of drawings:-
i.) General outline drawings of the complete Arrestors with technical parameters.
ii.) Drawing showing clearance from grounded and other live objects and between adjacent
poles of Surge Arrestors, required at various heights of Surge Arrestors.
iii.) Drawings showing details of pressure relief devices.
iv.) Detailed drawing of discharge counters along with the wiring and schematic drawing of
discharge counter and meter.
v.) Outline drawing of insulating base.
vi.) Details of grading rings, if used.
vii.) Mounting details of Surge Arrestors.
viii.) Details of line terminal and ground terminals.
ix.) Volt-time characteristics of Surge Arrestors.
x.) Details of galvanising being provided on different ferrous parts.
xi.) The detailed dimensional drawing of porcelain housing such as ID, OD, thickness and
insulator details such height, profile of petticoats, angle of inclination and gap between
successive petticoats, total Creepage distance etc.,
NOTE: All above drawings should bear a minimum space (14x10cm) for stamping the
drawings for Purchaser's approval along with bid in a sealed envelope. The
Purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the
Supplier within 21 days from the date of issue of LOI. The submission of complete
and correct readable drawings for approval is the responsibility of the bidder/supplier.
The Supplier shall, if so required by the purchaser, modify the drawings and resubmit
four copies of the modified drawings for Purchasers approval within two weeks from
the date of Purchasers comments. Then, the purchaser shall approve the revised
drawings within 2 weeks from the date of its receipt.
8.3 The successful Bidder shall also supply one set of all the approved drawings and instruction
manual containing handling, installation, testing and commissioning, operation and
maintenance of the equipment at the time of despatch of material to consignee with each
equipment for our field staff. In addition, 5 sets of such bound manuals and final approved
drawings shall be supplied for reference and record in our design office.
One set of all the approved drawings and manual of instructions will be supplied along
with each equipment without which the supply will not be considered as complete
supply.
8.4 i) Four copies of acceptance test reports shall be furnished to the Purchaser. One
copy will be returned, duly certified by the Purchaser and only thereafter shall
the materials be despatched.
ii) All records of routine test reports shall be maintained by the Supplier at his
works for periodic inspection by the Purchaser.
iii) All test reports of tests conducted during manufacture shall be maintained by
the Supplier. These shall be produced for verification as and when requested
for by the Purchaser.
NOTE: In case the equipment offered by the Supplier does not meet with the requirement
of technical specification the offer of the Firm shall not be considered.

ANNEXURE - I
(Surge Arrestors)
SHEET 1 OF 2
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR METAL OXIDE

(GAPLESS) SURGE ARRESTORS
____________________________________________________________________________
___
Sl. Particulars System voltagewise requirement of parameters
No. 220 kV 132 kV 66 kV 33 kV 11KV
____________________________________________________________________________
___
1. Rated Arrestor 198 120 60 30 9
Voltage
2. M.C.O.V. (kV rms) 168 104 49 25 7
3. Installation ----------------------- Outdoor ------------------------------------
4. Class --------- ------------------ Station Class ---------------------
5. Type of cons- ------------------ ---------- Single Column, Single Phase---
truction for
10 kA rated Arrestor.
6. Nominal discharge 10KA 10 KA 10KA 10KA 10 kA
current corres-
ponding to 8/20
microsec wave
shape (kA rms)
7. Min. discharge 5 KJ/kV (Referred to rated arrester voltage
capability. corresponding to Min. discharge characteristics)
8. Type of mounting ------------------------------------------ Pedestal --------------------------------
9. Connection
(Between phase P/E P/E P/E P/E P/E
to earth P/E)
(Between phase
to phase P/P)
10. Long duration 3 3 3 2 1
discharge class
11. Max. Switching Surge 455 280 140 70 21
kV(P) Protective level
voltage at 1000 Amp.
12. Max. residual voltage 550 340 170 85 25
kV(P) for nominal
discharge current
10 KA with 8/20
micro second wave
13. Max.residual voltage 600 372 186 93 28
kV(P) steep fronted
current impulse of
10 KA.
14. Minimum pros- 40 31.5 31.5 26.3 18.4
symmetrical fault
current for pressure
relief test (kA rms)
ANNEXURE - I
(Surge Arrestors)
SHEET 2 OF 2
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR METAL OXIDE

(GAPLESS) SURGE ARRESTORS
____________________________________________________________________________
_
Sl. Particulars System voltagewise requirement of parameters
No. 220 kV 132 kV 66 kV 33 kV 11KV
____________________________________________________________________________
_
15. a) Terminal Connector -------------------Single Zebra------------------------
suitable for ACSR
conductor size
b) Take off Vertical Vertical Vertical vertical vertical
16. Voltage (kV rms) Rated voltage of the Arrestor
(corona extinction)
17. Maximum radio -------------------------- 500 ----------------------------
interference
voltage (Microvolt)
when energised
at MCOV
18. Whether insulating Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
base and discharge
counter with
milli-ammeter are
required.
19. Minimum creepage 6125 3625 1813 900 300
distance of Arrestor
housing (mm)
____________________________________________________________________________
___

SECTION-4, CHAPTER-4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
36 kV VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKER (630A, 1250 & 2000 A)
1.0 Scope:
1.1 This specification covers the design, manufacture, inspection and testing before
dispatch, packing & delivery at site of 36 kV Vacuum Circuit Breaker complete with all
accessories including terminal connectors & supporting structure required for
satisfactory operation in various sub-stations in the state.
1.2 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of design and construction
of 36kV Vacuum Circuit Breaker. However, 36kV V.C.B. shall conform in all respect to
the high standard of design and workmanship and be capable of performing in
continuous commercial operation up to Bidder's guarantee in a manner acceptable to
HVPNL, who will interpret the meanings of drawings and specifications and shall have
the power to reject any work or material which in his judgment are not in accordance
there with. The circuit breaker offered shall be complete with all parts, necessary for
their effective and trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed to be
within the scope of supply, irrespective of whether they are specifically brought out in
the commercial order or not.
2.0 Standards:
The 36kV Vacuum Circuit Breaker shall conform to the latest editions and amendments
available at the time of supply of the standards listed here under:
Sr. Standard / Title IEC
No ISS No.
1. ISS 13118 Specification for High Voltage Alternating Current IEC-56
Circuit Breaker.
2. ISS 2071 Method of High voltage testing General definitions and IEC-601
(Part-I) test Equipment.
3. ISS 3716 Application guide to insulation Co-ordination. IEC-71-2
4. ISS 2099 Bushing for alternating voltage 1000 volts. IEC-137
5. ISS 4759 Hot dip zinc coating on structural steel and other allied
products
6. ISS 2633 Method for testing uniformity of coating on zinc coated
articles.
7. ISS 2147 Degree of Protection provided by enclosures for low
voltage switch gear and control.
8. -- Indian Electricity Rules, 1956 --
2.1 Equipment meeting with the requirement of other authoritative standards which ensure
equal or better quality then the standards mentioned above shall also be acceptable.
Where the equipment offered by the Bidder Conforms to other standards, salient points
of difference between the standards adopted and the specified standards shall be
clearly brought out in the offer. Four copies of reference standards in English language
shall be furnished along with the offer.
3.0 Climatic Conditions:
The 36 kV Vacuum Circuit Breakers shall be suitable for continuous satisfactory
operation under climatic conditions listed below:
Location In the State of Haryana Pradesh
Max. Ambient Air-temperature 500C
Min. Ambient Air-temperature -2.50 C
Average daily Ambient temp. 320 C
Max. Relative humidity 100%
Annual rainfall 900 mm
Max. Wind pressure 195 Kg/meter2
Isoceraunic level (days/year) 45
Altitude above mean Sea-level less than 1000 meter
Seismic level (Horizontal Acceleration) 0.3 g

4.0 Principal Parameters
i.) Nominal system voltage 33kV(RMS)
ii.) Highest system voltage 36kV (RMS)
iii.) No. Of poles 3
iv.) Frequency 502.5 Hz
v.) Interrupting Capacity 1650 MVA
vi.) Basic Insulation level 170 kV (P)
vii.) Operating duty 0.3sec-co-3min-co
viii.) Total break time for any current up to the 3 cycles max. (60ms)
rated breaking current.
ix.) Control circuit voltage
i.) 220 volts DC 10% to 15%
ii.) 240 volts +10% to - 15% for single phase AC supply
iii.) 415 volts 10% to - 15% for 3 phase AC supply
x.) Continuous current rating at ambient temperature of 630Amp 1250Amp 2000Amp.
50oC
xi.) Short Circuit breaking current for 1 second 26.3 KA 26.3KA 26.3 KA
xii.) Creepage distance 900 mm or more
5.1 General Technical Requirements
5.1.1 The circuit breaker shall consist of 3 phase vacuum circuit breaker consist of porcelain
clad for each phase mounted on common clad and mechanically connected for gang
operation. The unit shall be capable of with-standing pressure resulting from any
specified performance of the breaker.
5.1.2 Material used in construction of circuit breakers shall be acceptable of withstanding the
degree of vacuum without distortion or failure of any part.
5.1.3 The circuit breaker shall be supplied complete in all respect with necessary lifting tools,
foundation bolts and other accessories considered necessary by Bidders for the
satisfactory operation.
5.1.4 The vacuum interrupter bottles shall be completely maintenance free.
5.1.5 Tips of main contacts shall be heavily silver plated.
5.1.6 All equipment accessories and wiring shall have tropical protection, involving special
treatment of metal and insulation against fungus, insects and corrosion.
5.1.7 The safety clearances of all live parts of the equipment shall be as per relevant
standards.
5.1.8 Electrical as well as mechanical indicator shall be provided to show open and close
positions of breaker. It shall be located in a position where it will be visible to a man
standing on the ground with mechanism housing closed. And operation counter shall
also be provided with each breaker.
5.2 Mounting:
The circuit breakers shall be suitable for mounting on steel structures. The prices of
necessary frames for mounting & including connecting material of the circuit breakers
shall be quoted for separately.
5.3 Bushing & Insulator:
The basic insulation level of the bushings and support insulator shall be as per clause
4(vi) and the circuit breakers shall be suitable for installation in heavily polluted
atmosphere. The porcelain used shall be homogenous and free from cavities or other
flaws. These shall be designed to have adequate insulation, mechanical strength and
rigidity for satisfactory operation under conditions specified above. All the bushings of
identical ratings shall be interchangeable. The puncture voltage shall be entirely free
from disturbances, when operating at voltage up to a voltage 10% above rated voltage
and shall also be free from external and internal corona. Metal parts and hardware shall
be hot dip galvanized as per ISS-2633 latest edition.
5.4 Operating Mechanism:
5.4.1 The circuit breaker shall be designed for remote control from the control room and in
addition there shall be provision for manual operation of circuit breaker during
maintenance and for local electrical tripping and closing.
5.4.2 The circuit breaker shall have a mechanical 'open' and 'closed' indicators in addition to
facilities for remote electrical indications
5.4.3 The operating mechanism shall be electrical motor operated spring closing mechanism
type. The motor shall operate at 240 volts Single phase or 415 volts three phase AC
supply with a voltage variation +10% to - 15% in Clause 4 (ix). The mechanism shall
be trip free electrically and mechanically. All working parts in the mechanism shall be of
corrosion resistant material and all bearings which require greasing shall be equipped
with pressure grease fittings. The mechanism shall be strong and quick action and shall
be removable without disturbing the other parts of circuit breakers. The mechanism of
the breaker shall be such that failure of any spring will not prevent tripping and will not
cause tripping or closing.
5.4.4 The operating mechanism along with its accessories shall be mounted in the weather
proof sheet steel cabinet of 2 mm CRCA or 2.64 mm thick M.S sheet with hinged doors
of 3 mm thick M.S sheet & lock device located near the circuit breaker. The local control
switch and the breaker position indicator shall be provided in this cabinet. The circuit
breaker shall also be provided with means for manual operation for maintenance
purpose.
5.4.5 The control circuit shall be designed to operate on 220 volt DC and it shall be possible
to adapting it to work on other voltage by simply changing the operating coils. The
closing coil shall be designed to operate satisfactorily at control voltage from 85% to
110% of the normal voltage. It shall also be ensured that the trip coil can operate from
70% to 110% of the normal DC voltage as provided in IS: 13118/91. An AC heater shall
be provided in the cabinet to prevent moisture condensation. The 2000A/1250A VCB
should have the provision of Double Trip Coil.
5.4.6 Necessary cable glands for the cables of the operating mechanism shall also be
provided. The Bidder will use the terminal block of moulded dielectric having brass studs
for termination of HVPNL's control cables to be laid for remote control of the circuit
breaker including its automatic tripping under fault condition. The entire small wiring to
be carried out by the manufacturer at the time of constructing the circuit breaker shall be
terminated at the terminal block with the help of lugs duly crimped on to the cable cores.
The Bidder will supply sufficient number of cable glands & lugs for the HVPNL's use at
the time of erection of equipment.
5.4.7 Thermostat controlled space heater, internal illumination lamp and 3 pin 5 Amp socket
with individual ON/OFF switches shall be provided in the cabinet.
5.5 TERMINAL CONNECTOR:
Each circuit breaker shall be provided with requisite number of clamp type bimetallic
terminal connectors suitable for single/twin/triple ACSR Zebra/Moose/AAC Tarantula
Conductor. Two nos. terminal earth connectors for earthling connection shall also be
supplied.
5.6 Interlocking:
Provision shall be made to enable electrical interlocking with the opening or closing of
the isolator when breaker is closed etc. Provision should also be made for light
indication arrangement on control & relay panel when the electrical motor is in operation
for charging spring, so that breaker is not operated from remote during the charging
cycle. All electrical & mechanical interlock which are necessary for safe & satisfactory
operation shall be furnished.
5.7 AUXILIARY SWITCHES:
At least eight pairs of auxiliary contacts each of the normally open and normally closed
type shall be provided in circuit breaker for customer's use for the remote indication and
control scheme of the circuit breaker and for providing safety interlocking with
associated equipment by the HVPNL. Contact shall be provided with trip coil for pre
close and post close supervision of trip circuit.
5.8 Temperature rise limit:
The temperature rise on any part of equipment shall not exceed the maximum
temperature rise limit specified in ISS-13118 over an ambient temperature of 500C.
5.9 Erection Tools:
Special tools and standard accessories required for assembly and for maintenance of
the breakers should also form a part of the supply. Necessary list should be supplied
with the tender.

5.10 Rating Plate:
Circuit breaker and its operating device shall be provided with a rating plate marked with
but not limited to following data.
Manufacturer's name, Type of breaker.
Serial Number.
Rated voltage.
Rated normal continuous current.
Rated insulation level.
Rated frequency.
Rated short time breaking current with rated duration.
Total weight of breaker.
6.0 TESTS
6.1 Type Tests:
The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven
years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in
accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accredited body or witnessed by
HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to
HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.
i.) Impulse withstand voltage test
ii.) Power frequency voltage withstand dry test on main circuit
iii.) Short circuit withstand capability test
iv.) Mechanical endurance test
v.) Temperature rise test
vi.) Radio interference voltage (RIV)
vii.) Measurement of the resistance of main circuit
viii.) Short time withstand current and peak withstand current test
6.2 Routine Tests:
6.3 Acceptance Tests:
The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant ISS-13118 shall be carried out
by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by
the HVPNL.
i.) Power frequency voltage withstand dry test on main circuit
ii.) Voltage withstand test on control and auxiliary circuits
iii.) Measurement of resistance of the main circuit
iv.) Mechanical operating test
v.) Design and visual test
7.0 Inspection:
7.1 The inspection may be carried out by the HVPNL at any stage of manufacture. The
successful Bidder shall grant free access to the HVPNL's representative at a reasonable
time when the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under this
specification by the HVPNL shall not relieve the Bidder of his obligation of furnishing
equipment in accordance with the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection
if the equipment is found to be defective.
7.2 The Bidder shall keep the HVPNL informed in advance about the manufacturing
programme so that arrangement can be made for inspection.
7.3 The Contractor shall keep the HVPNL informed in advance, about the manufacturing
program so that arrangement can be made for inspection.
7.4 The HVPNL reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/routine testing of the
bought out items.
7.5 No material shall be dispatched from the point of manufacture unless the material has
been satisfactorily inspected tested and further dispatch authorised by HVPNL.
8.0 DOCUMENTAION:
8.1 The successful bidder shall furnish four sets or relevant descriptive and illustrative
published literature pamphlets and the following drawings for preliminary study along with
the offer.
List of Drawings and documents:
General outline drawings showing dimensions and shipping weights, quantity of insulating
media etc.
Sectional views showing the general constructional features of the circuit breaker including
operating mechanism, arcing chambers, contacts with lifting dimensions for maintenance.
Schematic ideograms of breaker offered for control supervision and re-closing.
Structural drawing, design calculations and loading data for support structures.
Foundation drilling plan and loading data for foundation design.
drawings for purchasers approval along with bid in a sealed envelope. The purchaser
shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the supplier within 21 days
from the date of issue of LOI. The submission of complete and correct readable drawings
for approval is the responsibility of the bidder/supplier. The supplier shall, if so required by
the purchaser, modify the drawings and resubmit four copies of the modified drawings for
purchasers approval within two weeks from the date of purchasers comments. Then, the
purchaser shall approve the revised drawings within two weeks from the date of its
receipt.
8.3 The successful bidder shall also supply one set of instruction manual containing handling,
installation, testing and commissioning of equipment at the time of despatch of material to
the consignee with each equipment for our field staff. In addition, 5 sets of such bound
manuals and final approved drawings shall be supplied for reference & record in our
design office.
One set of all the approved drawings and manual of instructions will
be supplied along with each equipment without which the supply will
[ not be considered as complete supply.
8.4 The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved
drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the
Purchaser. All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior
to the approval of the drawing shall be at the Supplier's risk.
8.5 Approval of drawings by the Purchaser shall not relieve the Supplier of any of his
responsibility and liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the
drawings for meeting the requirements of the latest revision of the applicable standards,
rules and codes of practices. The equipment shall conform in all respects to high
standards of engineering, design, workmanship and latest revisions of relevant standards
at the time of supply and Purchaser shall have the power to reject any material which, in
his judgement, is not in full accordance therewith.
8.6 TEST REPORTS:
Four copies of type test reports shall be furnished to the HVPNL within one month of
conducting the tests. One copy will be returned duly certified by the HVPNL to the bidder
within three weeks thereafter and on receipt of the same, bidder shall commence with the
commercial production of the concerned material.
Four copies of acceptance test reports shall be furnished to the HVPNL. One copy will be
returned, duly certified by the HVPNL and only there afterwards the material shall be
dispatched.
All records of routine test report shall be maintained by the Bidder at his works for periodic
inspection by the HVPNL.
All test reports of tests conducted during manufacture shall be maintained by the Bidder.
These shall be produced for verification as and when requested for by the HVPNL.
8.7 GUARANTEES:
The Bidder shall guarantee that the material, workmanship and performance of the plant
and accessories shall meet the requirement of this specification.
Should the Bidder wish to depart from the provision of the specifications either on account
of manufacturing practice or any other reasons he shall draw attention to the proposed
points of departure in his bid and submit such full information, drawings and specification
so that merit or his such proposal may be full under-stood. This specification shall be held
binding unless the departures have been fully recorded as required above.
SECTION-5
CHAPTER-1
HARYANA VIDYUT PRASARAN NIGAM

LTD.
FOR
420kV CT, 245kV, 145kV, 72.5kV & 36kV

CTs & NCTs & 12kV NCTs

SPECIFICATION No. HPD/S- 94/HPM-465/Vol-II (NOV, 2014)
Chief Engineer/MM
Design Directorate,
HVPNL, Shakti Bhawan,
Sec-6, Panchkula-134109
(Haryana)
Tel./Fax No. -0172-2583724
Email:- cemm@hvpn.gov.in
sedesign@hvpn.gov.in
CONTENTS
CLAUSE NO. TITLE PAGE NO.
1.0 SCOPE 3
2.0 STANDARDS 3
3.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS 4
4.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS 4
5.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 6
6.0 TESTS 9
7.0 DOCUMENTATION 10
ANNEXURES
I. COREWISE DETAILS FOR
A-(i) 420kV CT (2000-1000/1-1A, 2000-1000-500/1-1-1A) 12
B-(i) 245kV TRANSFORMER CTs (450-300/0.577-1-1-1-1A) 12
B-(ii/a) 245kV LINE CUM BUS COUPLER CTs (1200-800-400/1-1-1-1-1A) FOR 220KV S/STNS. 13
B-(ii/b) 245kV LINE CTs (2000-1000/1-1-1-1-1A) FOR 220KV S/STNS. 14
B-(iii) 245kV B/C CT (2400-1200/1-1-1-1A) FOR 400KV S/STNS. 15
B-(iv) 245kV T/F I/C CT (900-600-300/1-1-1-1-1A) 16
B-(v) 245kV NCTs (450-300/1A) 16
C-(i) 145kV T/F I/C CTs (750-500/0.577-1-1-1A) 17
C-(ii) 145kV TRANSFORMER CTs WITH METERING CORE (250-150-100/0.577-1-1-1A) 17
C-(iii) 145kV LINE CT AND 145kV B/C CTs for 132kV S/Stns. (600-300-150/1-1-1A) 18
C-(iv) 145kV NCTs (250-150-100/1A) 18
C-(v) 145kV BUS COUPLER CT (750-500/1-1A) for 160MVA 220/132kV T/Fs 18
D-(i) 72.5kV T/F I/C CTs (1500-1000/0.577-1-1-1A) 19
D-(ii) 72.5kV T/F CTs (300-200-150/0.577-1-1A) FOR 66/11kV T/Fs 19
D-(iii) 72.5kV LINE CT AND 72.5kV B/C CTs (600-300-150/1-1-1A) for 66kV S/Stns. 20
D-(iv) 72.5kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER NCTs (1500-1000/1A) 20
D-(v) 72.5kV NCTs (300-200-150/1A) FOR 66/11kV T/Fs 21
D-(vi) 72.5kV BUS COUPLER CT (1500-1000/1-1A) for 160MVA 220/66kV T/Fs 21
E-(i) 36 kV T/F I/C CTs FOR 132/33KV T/F WITH 26.3KA STC (1000-600-400/0.577-5-5-1A) 22
E-(ii) 36kV T/F I/C CTs FOR 220/33KV T/F WITH 26.3KA STC (2000-1000/0.577-5-5-1A) 22
E-(iii) 36kV LINE CUM CAPACITOR CTs WITH 26.3KA STC (400-300/5-1A) 23
E-(iv) 36kV T/F I/C NCTs (1000-600-400/5A) FOR 132/33KV T/F WITH 26.3KA STC 23
E-(v) 36kV T/F I/C NCTs (2000-1000/5A) FOR 220/33KV T/F ITH 26.3KA STC 23
E-(vi) 36kV Bus Coupler CTs (2000-1000/5A) FOR 220/33KV T/F WITH 26.3KA STC 24
E-(vii) 36kV TRANSFORMER CTs(100-50/5-5A) FOR 4 MVA 33/11KV T/F WITH 26.3KA STC 24
E-(viii) 36kV T/F NCT (100-50/5A) FOR 4 MVA 33/11KV T/F WITH 26.3KA STC 24
F-(i) 12kV NCTs (1800-900/5A) FOR 25/31.5 MVA 25
F-(ii) 12kV NCTs (1200-900/5A) FOR 12.5/16 MVA & 16/20 MVA 25
F-(iii) 12kV NCTs (300-150/5A) FOR 4 MVA 33/11KV T/F 25
II. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

26

1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification provides for design, engineering, manufacture, testing of out-door
instrument transformers alongwith terminal connectors for protection and metering
services in different 400/220/132/66kV S/Stns. in the state of Haryana.
1.2 It is not the intent to specify herein complete / all details of the design and construction of
equipment. However the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of
engineering design and workmanship and shall be acceptable to the purchaser, who will
interpret the meanings of drawings and specifications and shall have the power to reject
any work or material, which in his judgement is not in accordance therewith. The
equipment offered shall be complete with all components necessary for its effective and
trouble free operation. Such components shall deemed to be within the scope of supply
irrespective of whether those are specifically brought out in this specification and or the
commercial order or not.
2.0 STANDARDS
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification the rating as well as
performance and testing of the instrument transformers shall conform but not limited to
the latest revisions and amendments available at the time of placement of order of all the
relevant standards as listed hereunder.
2.1 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS :

Sr. No. Standard No. Title
1. IS:2165 Insulation Co-ordination for equipment of 100kV and
above.
2. IS:2705 Current Transformers.
(I to IV)
3. IS:2099 Bushings for alternating voltages above 1000Volts.
4. IS:3347 Dimensions of porcelain transformer bushings.
5. IS:2071 Method of High Voltage Testing.
6. IS:335 Insulating oil for transformers Switchgears.
7. IS:2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage
switchgear and control.
8. IS:2633 Method of testing hot dipped galvanized articles.
9. IS:4800 Enameled round winding wires.
10. IS:5561 Terminal connectors.
11. IS:11065 Drawings.
12. IEC 44-1 Current Transformers.
13. IEC-270 Partial Discharge Measurement

(or IS:11322)
14. IEC-44(4) Instrument Transformer measurement of PDs.
15. IEC-171 Insulation co-ordination.
16. IEC-60 High voltage testing techniques.
17. IEC-8263 Method for RIV test on high voltage insulators.
18. Indian Electricity Rules 1956.
19. IS:5621 Hollow porcelain insulators.

2.2 Equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative standards, which ensure
equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above, shall also be
considered. When the equipment offered by the supplier conforms to other standards
salient points of difference between standards adopted and the standards specified in
this specification shall be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule. Four copies of
such standards with authentic translation in English shall be furnished alongwith the
offer.

3.1 Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory
continuous operation under the following tropical conditions:-
1.
Location IN THE STATE OF HARYANA
Max. ambient air temp(OC)
2. 50
Min. ambient air temp (0C)
3. -2.5
4.
Maximum Relative humidity (%) 100
5.
Minimum Relative humidity (%) 26
6.
Average annual rainfall (mm) 900
7.
Max. wind pressure (Kg/sq.m.) 195
8.
Max. altitude above mean sea 1000
level (meters)
9. Isoceraunic level (days/year) 50
10. Seismic level (horizontal 0.3g
acceleration)
Note : Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and fungus growth. The
climatic conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient conditions. Smoke is
also present in the atmosphere. Heavy lightening also occurs during June to October.
The current transformers covered in this specification shall meet the technical
requirements listed hereunder.
Sr. Item 420kV 245kV 145kV 72.5kV 36kV 12kV
No.
1. Type of C.T./ Single phase, dead/live tank, oil filled, Hermetically sealed, outdoor type.
installation.
2. Type of Mounting Steel Structures

3. Suitable for system 50 Hz
Frequency
4. Highest system 420 245 145 72.5 36 12
Voltage (KV rms)
5. Minimum Neutral CT - 33 15 15 15 8.66
Insulating Voltage
6. Current Ratio A/A
a. Line CT 2000-1000- 1200-800-400/ 600-300-150/ 600-300-150/ 400-300/5-1 -
500/1-1-1-1-1 1-1-1-1-1, 1-1-1 1-1-1
2000-1000/1-
1-1-1-1
b. Transformer CT 2000-1000- 450-300/0.577- 250-150-100/ 300-200- 100-50/5-5 -
500/1-1-1-1-1 1-1-1-1 0.577-1-1-1 150/0.577-1-1
Sr. Item 400kV 245kV 145kV 72.5kV 36kV 12kV

No.
c. Transformer Incomer - 900-600- 750- 500/ 1500-1000/ 2000-1000/ -
CT 300/1-1-1-1-1 0.577-1-1-1 0.577-1-1-1 0.577-5-5-1,
1000-600-
400/0.577-5-5-1
d. Capacitor CT - - - - 400-300/5-1A -
e. NCT - 450-300/1 250-150-100/1 300-200- 2000-1000/5, 1800-
150/1, 1500- 1000-600- 900/5,
1000/1 400/5, 100-50/5 1200-
900/5,
300-
150/5
f. Bus Coupler/Tie CT 2000-1000- 2400-1200/ 750-500/1-1A, 1500-1000/1- 2000-1000/5 -
500/1-1-1-1-1 1-1-1-1, 1200- 600-300-150/ 1A, 600-300-
800-400/1-1-1- 1-1-1 150/ 1-1-1
1-1
7. Method of Earthing the Solidly Earthed
System
8. Rated Continuous 125% for all taps
Thermal current
9. Ratio taps The tapings shall be only on secondary winding.
10. Acceptable limit of As per IS:2705 or equivalent IEC
temperature rise above
the specified ambient
temperature for
continuous operation at
rated current.
11. Acceptance partial As per IS:11322-1985 or equivalent IEC
discharge level at 1.1
times the rated
voltage.
12. 1.2/50 microsecond lightning impulse withstand voltage (kVp)
a. CTs 1425 1050 650 325 170 -
b. NCTs - 170 95 95 95 75
13. 1 minute dry & wet power frequency withstand Voltage primary (kV rms)
a. CTs 630 460 275 140 70 -
b. NCTs - 70 38 38 38 28
14. Power frequency over 3
voltage withstand
requirement for
secondary winding (kV
rms) (for 1 minute)
15. Min. creepage distance of porcelain housing (mm)
a. CTs 10500 6125 3625 1815 900 -
b. NCTs - 900 440 440 440 250
16. Rated short time 40 40 31.5 31.5 26.3 18.4
withstand current
(kArms) for 1 Second.
17. Rated Dynamic 100 100 78.75 78.75 65.75 46
withstand current (kAp)
18. Maximum Creepage 4.0
Factor
5.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS :

5.1 The insulation of the instrument transformer shall be so designed that the internal insulation
shall have higher electrical withstand capability than the external insulation. The designed
dielectrics withstand values of external and internal insulation's shall be clearly brought out in
the guaranteed technical particulars. The dielectric withstand values specified in this
specification are meant for fully assembled instrument transformers.
5.2.1. The details of location and type of joint, if provided on the porcelain, shall be furnished by the
Supplier alongwith the offer. The housing shall be made of homogeneous, vitreous porcelain of
high mechanical and dielectric strength, glazing of porcelain shall be uniform brown or dark
brown colour with a smooth surface arranged to shed away rain water or condensed water
particles (fog).
5.2.2 Details of attachment of metallic flanges to the porcelain shall be brought out in the offer. Nuts
and bolts or screws used for fixation of the interfacing porcelain bushings for taking out terminals
shall be provided on flanges cemented to the bushings and not on the porcelain.
5.3 METAL TANK:
The metal tanks shall have bare minimum number of welded joints so as to minimize possible
locations of oil leakage. The metal tanks shall be made out of mild steel/stainless
steel/aluminum alloy, depending on the requirement. Welding in horizontal plane is to be
avoided as welding at this location may give way due to vibrations during transport resulting in
oil leakage. Supplier has to obtain specific approval from purchaser for any horizontal welding
used in the bottom tank. The castings of base, collar etc, shall be diecast and tested before
assembly to detect cracks and voids if any.
5.4 SURFACE FINISH :
The ferrous parts exposed to atmosphere shall be hot dip galvanized or shall be coated with
atleast two coats of Zinc Rich Epoxy painting. All nuts, Bolts and washers shall be of stainless
steel.
5.5 INSULATING OIL:
Insulating oil required for first filling of the instrument transformer shall be covered in Supplier's
scope of supply. The oil shall meet the requirements of latest edition IS:335 or equivalent IEC.
5.6 PREVENTION OF OIL LEAKAGE & ENTRY OF MOISTURE:
5.6.1 The supplier shall ensure that the sealing of instrument transformer is properly achieved. In this
connection the arrangement provided by the Supplier at various locations including the following
ones shall be described, supported by sectional drawings.
i) Locations of emergence of primary and secondary terminals.
ii) Interface between porcelain housing and metal tank/s.
iii) Cover of the secondary terminal box.
5.7 GASKETS:
For gasketed joints, wherever used nitrile butyl rubber gaskets shall be used. The gasket shall
be fitted in properly machined groove with adequate space for accommodating the gasket under
compression.

5.8 OIL LEVEL INDICATORS:
Instrument transformers shall be provided with oil sight window (Prismatic Type) at suitable
location so that the oil level is clearly visible with naked eye to an observer standing at ground
level.

5.9 EARTHING:
Metal tank of instrument transformer shall be provided with two separate earthing terminals for
bolted connection to 50x8mm MS flat to be provided by the Purchaser for connection to station
earth mat.
5.10 LIFITING AND TRANSPORTATION ARRANGEMENTS:
Instrument transformer shall be provided with suitable lifting arrangement to lift the entire unit.
The lifting arrangement shall be clearly shown in the general arrangement drawing. Lifting
arrangement (lifting eye) shall be positioned in such a way as to avoid any damage to the
porcelain housing or the tanks during lifting for installation/transport. Necessary string guides, if
required shall be offered which shall be removable type. The CT/NCT shall be so constructed
that it can be easily transported to site within the allowable transport limitation and in horizontal
position, if the transport limitations so demand.
5.11 NAME PLATE:
The instrument transformer shall be provided with non-corrosive, legible name plate with the
information specified in relevant standards, duly engraved/punched on it. In addition to these the
following specific points shall also be marked on the name plate.
i) P.O. No. with date and (item No, if any)
ii) Connection diagram.
iii) Rated continuous thermal current.
iv) General knee point voltage formula.
The size of nameplate and its location on the equipment should be such that it is clearly
readable with naked eyes while standing on ground.
5.12.1 Suitable terminal connectors of type 4 IPS Aluminium tube for 400kV CTs (Rigid type
for one side and expansion type for other side) and suitable terminal connectors for connecting
twin tarantulla for 220kV T/F I/C CTs, 220kV B/C CT (2400-1200/1-1-1-1A),220kV Line CT
(2000-1000/1-1-1-1-1A), 33kV B/C CTs, 33kV T/F I/C CT (2000-1000/0.577-5-5-1A), 33kV T/F
I/C NCT (2000-1000/5A), 132kV B/C CT(750-500/1-1A), 66kV B/C CT(1500-1000/1-1A), 66kV
T/F I/C CT, 66kV T/F I/C NCT & single Tarantulla conductor for 220kV T/F, Line/B.C CTs,
220kV NCTs, 132kV T/F I/C CT, 33kV Line cum Capacitor CT (400-300/5-1A) meant for
220/33kV T/F, twin ACSR Zebra for 33kV T/F I/C CT (1000-600-400/0.577-5-5-1A), 33kV T/F
I/C NCT (1000-600-400/5A) meant for 40/50MVA 132/33kV T/F & for Single ACSR Zebra for
remaining CTs/NCTs shall be supplied. Suitable terminal earth connectors for earthing
connections shall also be provided.
5.12.2. The terminal connectors shall meet the following requirements:
1) Terminal connectors shall be manufactured and tested as per IS:5561 or equivalent IEC.
2) All castings shall be free from blowholes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All sharp edges
and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
3) No part of a clamp shall be less than 10mm thick.
4) All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized conforming to IS:2633 or equivalent IEC.
5) For bimetallic connectors, copper alloy liner of minimum 2mm thickness shall be cast integral
with aluminium body.
6) Flexible connectors shall be made from tinned copper/ aluminium sheets.
7) All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have minimum contact
resistance.
8) Connectors shall be designed to be corona free in accordance with the requirements stipulated
in IS:5561 or equivalent IEC.
5.13 INTERNAL INSULATION:
Enamel, if used for conductor insulation, shall be polyvinyl acetate type and shall meet the
requirements of IS:4800 or equivalent IEC. Polyester enamel shall not be used. Double cotton
cover, if used, shall be suitably covered to ensure that it does not come in contact with oil.
5.14 TEMPERATURE RISE:

The temperature rise on any part of equipment shall not exceed maximum temperature rise
specified in IS:2705 or equivalent IEC. However, the permissible temperature rise is for a
maximum ambient temperature of 50o C.
5.15 PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICE:
Suitable arrangement shall be made for compensation of variation in the oil volume due to
ambient variation and to take care of internal abnormal pressures. The pressure variation shall
be kept within limits, which do not impair the tightness of the instrument transformer. A pressure
relief device capable of releasing abnormal internal pressure shall be provided.
5.16 SECONDARY TERMINAL BOXES:
The CT secondary terminals except for CTs with metering core having accuracy class 0.2S shall
be brought out in a weather proof terminal box. The terminal box shall be provided with
removable gland plate.
In case of CTs, with metering core having accuracy class 0.2S, CT secondary terminals shall be
brought out in two separate weatherproof terminal boxes.
In the first box, all the terminals of cores of CTs except metering core having accuracy class
0.2S shall be brought out. The terminal box shall be provided with removable gland plate.
The terminal of metering core having accuracy class 0.2S CTs, shall be brought out in the
second terminal box. This shall also be provided with a removable gland plate. This terminal box
shall be provided with proper sealing facility.
The terminal box/boxes shall be dust and vermin proof. The dimensions of the terminal
box/boxes and its/their openings shall be adequate to enable easy access and working space
with use of normal tools.
5.17 POLARITY :
Polarity shall be indelibly marked on each primary and secondary terminal. Facility shall be
provided for short-circuiting and grounding of the secondary terminals inside the terminal box.
5.18 OIL FILLING AND DRAIN VALVES:
The instrument transformers shall be vacuum filled with oil after processing and thereafter
hermetically sealed to eliminate breathing and to prevent air and moisture from entering the
tanks. Sealing type oil filling and/or oil sampling cocks shall be provided with facility to reseal the
same. The method adopted for hermetic sealing shall be described in the offer.
5.19 INSTRUMENT SECURITY FACTOR:

For all type of CTs, the instrument security factor at all ratios shall be less than 5 for metering
core. If any, auxiliary CTs / reactor are used in the CTs then all the parameters specified shall
have to be met treating auxiliary CTs as integral part of the current transformer.
5.20 PRIMARY WINDING:

The design density for short circuit current as well as conductivity of the metal used for primary
winding shall meet the requirement of IS:2705 or equivalent IEC. The supplier shall in his offer
furnish detailed calculations for selection of winding cross-sections.
5.21 SECONDARY WINDING:
Suitably insulated wire of electrolytic grade shall be used for secondary windings. Type of
insulation used shall be described in the offer. For multi ratio design, suitable tapping shall be
provided on secondary winding only. Ratio tap selection through primary side shall not be
acceptable.
5.22 CORE:
The exciting current of the CT shall be as low as possible. The supplier shall furnish alongwith
his offer the magnetization curve/s for all the core/s. The cores shall be of high grade,
non-ageing electrical silicon laminated steel of low hysterisis loss and high permeability to
ensure high accuracy at both normal and over current.
5.23 PRIMARY TERMINALS:
For 400kV CT, 220 kV Line CT (2000-1000/1-1-1-1-1A), 220kV Bus Coupler CT (2400-1200/1-1-
1-1A), 66kV T/F I/C CT (1500-1000/0.577-1-1-1A), 66kV T/F I/C NCT (1500-1000/1A), 66kV B/C
CT (1500-1000/1-1A), 33kV T/F I/C CT (2000-1000/0.577-5-5-1A & 1000-600-400/0.577-5-5-
1A), 33kV T/F I/C NCT (2000-1000/5A & 1000-600-400/5A) & 33kV Bus Coupler CT the primary
terminal shall be made out of rods of not less than 40mm dia. copper or equivalent as per IS/IEC
and for remaining CTs/NCTs the primary terminals shall be made out of rods not less than 30mm
dia. copper or equivalent as per ISS\IEC.
5.24 DEVIATION FROM SPECIFICATION:

Any deviation from the specification shall be clearly brought out separately. In the absence of
any specific mention, it shall be implied that the equipment offered is entirely according to this
specification.
5.25 TEST TAP:

The 72.5 kV and above voltage level, instrument transformers shall be provided with suitable
test tap for measurement of tests such as partial discharges etc. in factory as well as at site.
Provision shall be made of a screw on cap for solid and secured earthing of the test tap
connection, when not in use. A suitable caution plate shall be provided duly fixed on the cover of
the secondary terminal box indicating the purpose of the test tap and necessity of its solid
earthing as per prescribed method before energizing the equipment.
NOTE:- The Overall Tolerance for dimensions, Quantity of Oil, Weight, etc should be +5% max.
The General Tolerance should be as per ISS. Tolerance for Mounting Dimension should
be +5mm.
6.0 TESTS:
6.1 TYPE TESTS
The equipment offered should be fully type tested. In case, the equipment of the type and design
offered has already been type tested, the supplier shall furnish 4 sets of type test reports
alongwith the offer. The type test reports should not be more than seven years old, reckoned
from the date of bid opening and the type test should have been carried out in accordance with
ISS-2705(1992)/equivalent IEC from Govt./ Govt. approved test house.
However, temperature rise test although covered under type tests will be got conducted by the
supplier on one piece of total ordered quantity of each type, at his premises in the presence of
the inspecting officer of the purchaser, without any extra charges. The purchaser reserves the
right to demand repetition of some or all the type tests in the presence of purchaser's
representative.
6.2 ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TESTS:
i) All acceptance including Tan Delta test and routine tests as stipulated in the relevant standards
shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of purchaser's representative, unless dispensed
with in writing by the Purchaser.
ii) Immediately after finalisation of the programme of routine /acceptance testing, the Supplier shall
give sufficient advance intimation to the Purchaser to enable him to depute his representative
for witnessing the testing.
7.0 DOCUMENTATION:
7.1 All drawings shall conform to international standards organisation (ISO) À' series of drawing
sheet/Indian Standards Specification IS:11065. All drawings shall be in ink and suitable for
microfilming. If drawings are computerized than all drawings shall be nicely printed. All
dimensions and data shall be in S.I.Units.
7.2 List of drawings:
a) General outline and assembly drawings of the equipment.
b) Graphs showing the performance of equipment's in regard to magnetisation characteristics;
ratio & phase angle curves, ratio correction factor curves.
c) Sectional views showing:
i) General Constructional Features.
ii) Materials/Gaskets/Sealing used.
iii) The insulation & the winding arrangements, method of connection of the primary / secondary
winding to the primary/ secondary terminals etc.
iv) No. of Turns, Cross-Sectional Area, Current density of Primary and secondary windings.
v) Porcelain used and its dimensions.
d) Arrangement of terminals and details of connection studs provided.
e) Name plate.
f) Schematic drawing.
g) Detailed drawing of pressure release device with detailed literature.
h) Terminal connector drawing.
NOTE:- All above drawings should bear a minimum space (14X10cm) for stamping the approval
of drawings by the purchaser.
7.3 The bidder shall submit four sets of final versions of complete and correct equipment drawings
except 7.2 (b) above (actual of which shall be supplied at the time of inspection) for purchasers
approval alongwith bid in a sealed envelope. The purchaser shall communicate his
comments/approval on the drawings to the supplier within 21 days from the date of issue of LOI.
The submission of complete and correct readable drawings for approval is the responsibility of
the bidder/supplier. The supplier shall, if so required by the purchaser, modify the drawings and
resubmit four copies of the modified drawings for purchasers approval within two weeks from
the date of purchasers comments. Then, the purchaser shall approve the revised drawings
within two weeks from the date of its receipt.
7.4 The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved drawings
and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the purchaser. All
manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to the approval of the
drawing shall be at the supplier's risk.
7.5 The successful bidder shall also supply one set of nicely bound all the approved
drawings & instruction manual containing handling, installation, testing and commissioning of
equipment at the time of despatch of material to the consignee with each equipment for our field
staff without which the supply will not be considered as complete supply. In addition, 5
sets of such bound manuals and final approved drawings shall be supplied for reference &
record in our design office alongwith one good quality soft copy (CD) of approved drawings and
instruction manuals, if computerized.
7.6 Approval of drawings / work by Purchaser shall not relieve the Supplier of his responsibility and
liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the latest revision of applicable
standards, rules and codes of practices. The equipment shall conform in all respects to high
standards of engineering, design, workmanship and latest revisions of relevant standards at the
time of ordering and purchaser shall have the power to reject any work or material which in his
judgement is not in full accordance therewith.
NOTE :- (i) In case the equipment offered by the Supplier does not meet with the requirement of
technical specification the offer of the firm shall not be considered.
(ii) Supplier shall provide special label on the LIVE Tank CTs and its packing for caution
in handling the CTs carefully.

ANNEXURE I-A(i)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 420 kV CTs
(2000-1000-500/1-1-1-1-1A)
NUMBER OF CORES 5
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Min. knee Max. CT Max. Excitation
No. ratio burden class Pt. Voltage sec. wdg. current at Vk
(VA) Vk Resistance (in mA)
(ohms)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 BUS DIFF 2000- - PS 2000/1000 10/5 30 on 2000/1 Tap;
MAIN 1000 /1 60 on 1000/1 Tap
2 BUS DIFF 2000- - PS 2000/1000 10/5 30 on 2000/1 Tap;
CHECK 1000/1 60 on 1000/1 Tap
3 METERING 2000- 10 0.2S - - -
1000-
500/1
4 TRANS. 2000- - PS 4000/2000/ 10/5/2.5 30 on 2000/1 Tap;60
BACKUP/ 1000- 1000 on 1000/1 Tap; 120
LINE PROTN. 500/1 on 500/1 Tap
5 TRANS. DIFF/ 2000- - PS 4000/2000/ 10/5/2.5 30 on 2000/1 Tap;60
LINE PROTN. 1000- 1000 on 1000/1 Tap; 120
500/1 on 500/1 Tap
ANNEXURE I-B(i)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV Transformer CTs
(450-300/0.577-1-1-1-1A)
NUMBER OF CORES - 5
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for minimum Maximum A.L.F
No. Ratio (A) burden class knee-point voltage Exciting
(VA) as per At CT Secondary Current
0
IEC 185 resistance at 75 C at (mA)
300A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 DIFFERENTIAL 450-300/ - PS 40 (RCT+2) 30 @Vk/4 -
PROTECTION 0.577
2 REF PROTECTION 450-300/1 - PS 14 (RCT+2) 30 @Vk/2 -
3 OVER CURRENT 450-300/1 - PS 40 (RCT+4) 30 @Vk/2 -
PROTECTION / BUS
BAR PROTECTION
4 BUSBAR PROTECTION 450-300/1 - PS 40 (RCT+4) 30 @Vk/2 -
(FOR LOW IMPEDANCE
SCHEME)
5 METERING 450-300/1 10 0.2S - - -

NOTE : 4th core for bus bar protection has been kept in view of general design being followed in HVPNL. In
case this CT is used on a sub station having high impedance bus bar protection scheme or no bus bar
protection scheme then this core shall be short-circuited at site.

ANNEXURE I-B(ii/a)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV LINE CUM BUS-COUPLER CTs
(1200-800-400/1-1-1-1-1 A)
NUMBER OF CORES 5
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for minimum Maximum
No. Ratio (A) burden class knee point voltage At CT Exciting
(VA) as per Secondary resistance at Current
IEC 185 750C at 800Atap (Volt) (mA)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1. MAINI 1200-800- - PS 80(RCT+9) 80 @ Vk
DISTANCE 400/1
PROTECTION
2. MAINII 1200-800- - PS 80(RCT+9) 80 @ Vk
DISTANCE 400/1
PROTECTION
3. BUS 1200-800- - PS 100(RCT+4) 30 @ Vk/2
DIFFERENTIAL 400/1
MAIN
4. BUS 1200-800- - PS 100(RCT+4) 30 @ Vk/2
DIFFERENTIAL 400/1
CHECK
5. METERING 1200-800- 10 0.2S - -
400/1
NOTE :
1. 5 cores of 245kV line CT have been kept in view of general design being followed in
HVPNL.
2. In case this CT is used exclusively for bus bar protection purpose on a transformer circuit
at sub station having high impedance bus bar protection scheme then core no 1, 2 & 5
shall be short circuited at site.
3. In case this CT is used for feeder circuit on a sub station having low impedance bus bar
protection scheme then core no. 4 shall be short circuited at site and where there is no
bus bar protection scheme core no. 3 & 4 shall be short circuited at site.

G:\REC-138 New\Technical specification 21.04.15.doc
ANNEXURE I-B(ii/b)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV LINE CTs
(2000-1000/1-1-1-1-1 A)
NUMBER OF CORES 5
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for minimum Maximum

No. Ratio (A) burden class knee point voltage At CT Exciting
IEC 185 750C at 1000A tap (Volt) (mA)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1. MAINI 2000- - PS 1600 20-40
DISTANCE 1000/1
PROTECTION
2. MAINII 2000- - PS 1600 20-40
DISTANCE 1000/1
PROTECTION
3. BUS 2000- - PS 1600 20-40
DIFFERENTIAL 1000/1
MAIN
4. BUS 2000- - PS 1600 20-40
DIFFERENTIAL 1000/1
CHECK
5. METERING 2000- 10 0.2S - -
1000/1
NOTE :
1. 5 cores of 245kV line CT have been kept in view of general design being
followed in HVPNL.
2. In case this CT is used exclusively for bus bar protection purpose on a

transformer circuit at sub station having high impedance bus bar protection
scheme then core no 1, 2 & 5 shall be short circuited at site.
3. In case this CT is used for feeder circuit on a sub station having low
impedance bus bar protection scheme then core no. 4 shall be short circuited
at site and where there is no bus bar protection scheme core no. 3 & 4
shall be short circuited at site.

ANNEXURE I-B(iii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245 kV BUS COUPLER CTs FOR 400KV S/STNS.
(2400-1200/1-1-1-1A)
NUMBER OF CORES - 4
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for Maximum ALF

No. Ratio (A) burden class minimum knee Exciting
(VA) as per point voltage Current
IEC 185 At CT (mA)
Secondary
resistance at
750C at
2400Atap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. O/C & E/F 2400-1200/ 15 5P - - 10
PROTECTION 1
2. BUS 2400-1200/ - PS 100(RCT+4) 30 @ Vk/2 -

DIFFERENTIAL 1
3. BUS 2400-1200/ - PS 100(RCT+4) 30 @ Vk/2 -
DIFFERENTIAL 1
CHECK
4. METERING 2400-1200/ 10 1.0 - - -
1

ANNEXURE I-B(iv)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245 kV Transformer INCOMER CTs
(900-600-300/1-1-1-1-1A)
NUMBER OF CORES - 5
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for Maximum A.L.F

No. Ratio (A) burden class minimum Exciting
(VA) as per knee-point Current
IEC 185 voltage (mA)
At CT
Secondary
resistance
at 750C at
900Atap
(Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 DIFFERENTIAL 900-600-300/1 - PS 40 (RCT+2) 30 @Vk/4 -
PROTECTION
2 OVER CURRENT & 900-600-300/1 15 5P - - 10
EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION
3 METERING 900-600-300/1 10 0.2S - - -
4 BUSBAR PROTECTION 900-600-300/1 - PS 40 (RCT+4) 30 @Vk/2 -
MAIN DIFF.

CHECK DIFF.
ANNEXURE I-B (v)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV NEUTRAL CTs
(450-300/1A)
NUMBER OF CORE - 1
Application Current Accuracy Formula for minimum Maximum Minimum

Ratio (A) class knee-point voltage at CT Exciting Insulation
as per Secondary resistance at Current Voltage
IEC 185 750C at 300Atap(Volt) (mA) (kV)
1 2 3 4 5 6
REF 450-300/1 PS 14(RCT+2) 30 @ VK/2 33
PROTECTION
ANNEXURE I-C(i)

COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER CT
(750-500/0.577-1-1-1A)
NUMBER OF CORES 4
Core Application Current Output Accurac Formula for minimum Maximum A.L.F.
No. Ratio (A) burden y Class knee-point voltage At CT Exciting
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. DIFFERENTIAL 750-500/ - PS 40 (RCT+2) 30 @ Vk/4 -
PROTECTION 0.577
2. REF 750-500/1 - PS 90 (RCT+2) 37.5 @ Vk/2 -
PROTECTION
3. OVER 750-500/1 15 5P - - 10
CURRENT AND
EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION
4. METERING 750-500/1 10 0.2S - -
ANNEXURE I-C(ii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV TRANSFORMER CT

(250-150-100/0.577-1-1-1A)
No. OF CORES = 4
Core Application Current Output Accurac Formula for Maximum A.L.F.
No. Ratio (A) burden y class minimum knee-point Exciting
(VA) as voltage Current
per IEC At CT Secondary (mA)
185 resistance at 750C at
100A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. DIFFERENTIAL 250-150- - PS 40 (RCT+1) 30 @ Vk/4 -
PROTECTION 100/0.577
2. REF 250-150- - PS 20 (RCT+1) 30 @ Vk/2 -
PROTECTION 100/1
3. OVER 250-150- 15 5P - - 10
CURRENT 100/1
PROTECTION
4. METERING 250-150- 10 0.2S - - -
100/1

ANNEXURE I-C(iii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV LINE CT AND 145kV BUS COUPLER CT for 132kV
S/STNS.
(600-300-150/1-1-1A)
No. OF CORES = 3
Core Application Current Output Accura Formula for Maximum A.L.F.
No. Ratio (A) burden cy class minimum knee-point Exciting
(VA) as per voltage Current
IEC 185 At CT Secondary (mA)
resistance at 750C at
300Atap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 DISTANCE 600-300-150/1 - PS 120 (RCT+4.5) 80 @ VKP -
PROTECTION
2 OVER-CURRENT 600-300-150/1 15 5P - - 10
& EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION
3 METERING 600-300-150/1 10 0.2S - - -
ANNEXURE I-C(iv)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV NEUTRAL CT
(250-150-100/1A)
No. OF CORE= 1
Core Application Current Output Accurac Formula for Maximum Minimum
No. Ratio (A) burden y class minimum knee-point Exciting Insulatio
(VA) as per voltage Current n Voltage
IEC 185 At CT Secondary (mA) (kV)
100A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 REF 250-150- - PS 20 (RCT+1) 30 @ VK/2 15
PROTECTION 100/1
ANNEXURE I-C(v)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV BUS COUPLER CT for 160MVA 220/132kV T/Fs.
(750-500/1-1A)
No. OF CORES = 2
Core Application Current Output Accuracy A.L.F.
No. Ratio (A) burden class as per
(VA) IEC 185
1 2 3 4 5 8
2 OVER-CURRENT & EARTH 750-500/1 15 5P 10
FAULT PROTECTION
3 METERING 750-500/1 10 1.0 -

ANNEXURE I-D(i)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER CT
(1500-1000/0.577-1-1-1A)
NUMBER OF CORES - 4
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for Maximum A.L.F.

No. Ratio (A) burden class minimum knee-point Exciting
1000A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 DIFFERENTIA 1500-1000/0.577 - PS 40 (RCT+2) 30 @ VK/4 -
L
PROTECTION
2 REF 1500-1000/1 - PS 14 (RCT+2) 30 @ VK/2 -
PROTECTIO
N
3 OVER 1500-1000/1 15 5P - - 10
CURRENT &
EARTH
FAULT
PROTECTIO
N
4 METERING 1500-1000/1 10 0.2S - - -
ANNEXURE I-D(ii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV TRANSFORMER CT FOR 66/11kV T/Fs
(300-200-150/0.577-1-1)
No. OF CORES = 3

No. Ratio (A) burden class minimum knee- Exciting
(VA) as per point voltage At Current
IEC 185 CT Secondary (mA)
resistance at
750C at 300A tap
(Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 DIFFERENTIAL 300-200- - PS 40(RCT+4) 30 @ VK/2 -
2 REF PROTECTION 300-200-150/1 - PS 40(RCT+4) 30 @ VK/2 -
3 OVER CURRENT 300-200-150/1 15 5P - - 10

PROTECTION

ANNEXURE I-D(iii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV LINE CT AND 72.5kV BUS COUPLER CT for

66kV S/STNS.
(600-300-150/1-1-1A)
No. OF CORES = 3
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for min Maximum A.L.F.
No. Ratio (A) burden class knee point voltage At Exciting
(VA) as per CT Secondary res. at Current
IEC 185 750C at 600A tap (mA)
(Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 DISTANCE 600-300-150/1 - PS 80(RCT+4) 40 @VK/2 -
PROTECTION
2 OVER 600-300-150/1 15 5P - - 10
CURRENT &
EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION
3 METERING 600-300-150/1 10 0.2S - - -
ANNEXURE I-D(iv)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER NCT
(1500-1000/1A)
No. OF CORES= 1
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for min Maximum Minimum
No. Ratio (A) burden class knee point voltage Exciting Insulatio
(VA) as per At CT Secondary Current n Voltage
IEC 185 res. at 750C at (mA) (kV)
1000A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 REF PROTECTION 1500-1000/1 - PS 14 30 @ VK/2 15
(RCT+2)

ANNEXURE-I D(v)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5 kV NEURAL CT FOR 66/11kV T/Fs
(300-200-150/1)
No. OF CORE = 1
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for Maximum Minimum

No. Ratio (A) burden class as minimum knee exciting Insulation
(VA) per IEC point voltage at current voltage
185 CT secondary (mA) (kV)
resistance at 750
at 300A tap
(Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. REF 300-200- - PS 20 (RCT+1) 30 @ Vk/2 15
PROTECTION 150/1
ANNEXURE I-D(vi)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV BUS COUPLER CT for 160MVA 220/66kV T/Fs.
(1500-1000/1-1A)
No. OF CORES = 2
Core Application Current Output Accuracy A.L.F.

No. Ratio (A) burden class as per
(VA) IEC 185
1 2 3 4 5 8
2 OVER-CURRENT & EARTH 1500-1000/1 15 5P 10
FAULT PROTECTION
3 METERING 1500-1000/1 10 1.0 -

ANNE
XURE I-E(i)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER CT FOR 40/50MVA
132/33kV T/F AND OTHER RATINGS OF 132/33KV T/Fs WITH 26.3KA STC
(1000-600-400/0.577-5-5-1)
No. OF CORES = 4
No. Ratio (A) burden class as minimum knee Exciting
(VA) Per IEC point voltage At CT Current
185 Secondary (ma)
resistance at 750C
at
400A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 DIFFERENTIAL 1000-600-400/0.577 PS 40 (RCT+1) 30@VK/4 -
PROTECTION
2 REF 1000-600-400/5 - PS 100(RCT+1) 75@VK/2 -
PROTECTION
3 OVER CURRENT 1000-600-400/5 15 5P - - 10
& EARTH
FAULT
PROTECTION
4 MAIN 1000-600-400/1 10 0.2S - - -
METERING
ANNEXURE-I-E(ii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER CT FOR 220/33KV WITH
26.3KA STC
(2000-1000/0.577-5-5-1)
No. OF CORES = 4
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for minimum Maximum A.L.F.
No. Ratio (A) Burden class knee-point voltage At Exciting
(VA) as per CT Secondary Current
IEC 185 resistance at 750C at (mA)
2000A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 DIFFERENTIAL 2000-1000/ - PS 40 (RCT+1) 30@ V K/4 -
PROTECTION 0.577
2 REF. PROT. 2000-1000/ 5 - PS 100 (RCT+1) 75@ V K/2 -
3 OVER 2000-1000/5 15 5P - - 10
CURRENT &
EARTH FAULT
PROT.
4 MAIN 2000-1000/1 10 0.2S - - -
METERING

ANNEXURE I-E(iii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV LINE CUM CAPACITOR CT for 33kV LINE BAY AND
FOR 20MVAR & 10MVAR CAPACITOR BANKS ON 220/33KV T/F & 40/50MVA
132/33kV T/F WITH 26.3KA STC
(400-300/5-1)
No. OF CORES = 2
Core Application Current Ratio Output Accuracy A.L.F.
No. (A) (VA) Burden Class as
per IEC
185
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
1. OVER CURRENT & EARTH 400-300/5 15 5P 10
FAULT PROTECTION
2. METERING 400-300/1 10 0.2S 75
ANNEXURE I-E(iv)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER NCT FOR 40/50MVA
(1000-600-400/5)
No. OF CORES = 1
No. Ratio (A) burden class as minimum knee point Exciting Insulatio
(VA) Per IEC voltage Current n Voltage
185 At CT Secondary (mA) (kV)
400A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 REF 1000-600-400/5 - PS 100 (RCT+1) 75@ VK/2 15
PROTECTION
ANNEXURE-I-E(v)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER NCT FOR 220/33KV T/F
WITH 26.3KA STC
(2000-1000/5)
No. OF CORES = 1
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for minimum Maximum Minimum
No. Ratio (A) Burden class knee-point voltage At Exciting Insulatio
(VA) as per CT Secondary Current n Voltage
IEC 185 resistance at 750C at (mA) (kV)
2000A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 REF 2000- - PS 100 (RCT+1) 75@ VK/2 15
PROTECTION 1000 /5

ANNEXURE-I-E(vi)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV BUS COUPLER CT FOR 220/33KV WITH 26.3KA
STC
(2000-1000/5A)
No. OF CORES = 1
Core Application Current Output Accuracy class as per IEC A.L.F.
No. Ratio (A) Burden 185
(VA)
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 OVER CURRENT 2000-1000/ 15 5P 10
& EARTH FAULT 5A
PROTECTION
ANNEXURE I-E(vii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV TRANSFORMER CT WITH 26.3KA STC
FOR 4 MVA 33/11kV T/F
(100-50/5-5)
No. OF CORES = 2
No. Ratio (A) burden class as minimum knee point Exciting Insulatio
(VA) Per IEC voltage Current n Voltage
100A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 REF 100-50/5 - PS 100 (RCT+1) 75@ VK/2 -
PROTECTION
2 OVER 100-50/5 15 5P - - 10
CURRENT
PROTECTION
ANNEXURE I-E(viii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV TRANSFORMER NCT WITH 26.3KA STC
(100-50/5)
No. OF CORE = 1
Core Application Current Accuracy Formula for minimum Maximum Minimum
No. Ratio (A) class knee-point voltage At CT Exciting Insulatio
as per Secondary resistance at Current n Voltage
IEC 185 750C at 100A tap (Volt) (mA) (kV)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 REF 100-50/5 PS 100 (RCT+1) 75@ VK/2 15
PROTECTIO
N

ANNEXURE-I F(i)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 12 kV NEUTRAL CT FOR 25/31.5 MVA T/F
(1800-900/5)
No. OF CORE = 1
Core Application Current Accuracy Formula for Maximum Minimum
No. Ratio (A) class as minimum knee point exciting Insulation
per IEC voltage at CT current voltage
185 secondary (mA) (kV)
resistance at 750 at
1800A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1. REF 1800- PS 95 (RCT+1) 75@ Vk/2 8.66
PROTECTION 900/5
ANNEXURE I-F(ii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 12kV NEUTRAL CT FOR 12.5/16 MVA & 16/20 MVA T/F
(1200-900/5)
No. OF CORE = 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 REF 1200-900/5 PS 95 (RCT+1) 75@ VK/2 8.66
PROTECTIO
N
ANNEXURE I-F(iii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 12kV NEUTRAL CT for 4MVA 33/11kV T/F

(300-150/5)
No. OF CORE = 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 REF 300-150/5 PS 95 (RCT+1) 75@ VK/2 8.66
PROTECTIO
N

ANNEXURE-II
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
(To be filled in by the Supplier separately for each type and voltage rating).
1. Manufacturer's Name
2. Type/Installation.
3. Conforming to standard.
4. Rated voltage.
5. Rated frequency.
6. Detail of cores.
*Core No. I II III IV V
6.1 Purpose of cores.
6.2 Rated Secondary Current.
6.3 Class of accuracy.
6.4 Accuracy limit factor.
6.5 Formula governing minimum
knee point voltage at CT
Secondary resistance corrected
to 75 C.
6.6 Instrument security factor.
6.7 Secondary limiting voltage.
6.8 Maximum Secondary resistance
corrected to 75 C.
6.9 Rated burden.
6.10 Exciting current
for Distance protection
core at Vk, for Bus
Bar protection core & REF Core at
Vk/2. and for differential protection

Core at Vk/4
* No. of cores as per applicability for a particular type of current
7. Rated primary current.
8. Rated short time withstand
current (kA rms) for
1 second duration.
9. Rated dynamic withstand
current (kA peak).
10. Rated continuous thermal current (pu).
11. One minute power
frequency withstand
voltage (kV rms)
a) Dry
b) Wet
12. 1.2/50 micro-second
impulse withstand voltage (kV peak)
13. One minute power
frequency withstand
voltage of secondary
winding (kV rms)
14. Minimum creepage
distance (mm)
15. Maximum creepage factor.
16. Winding
a) No. of primary turns
b) Primary amp. turns
(Dynamic condition)
c) Current density

d) Area of Cross-section & material
i) Primary turns
ii) Secondary turns
17. I.S. to which the oil conforms.

18. Weight of oil (kg).
19. Quantity of oil (Ltrs)
20. Total weight (kg).
21. Maximum shipping weight (kg)
22. Overall dimension.
23. Mounting details.
24. Maximum permissible
temperature rise of
winding when referred
to maximum ambient
temperature of 50 C
in terms of clause 7.2
(Table 2 of IS:2705
Part-1-1992 ) or
Equivalent IEC

SECTION - 5
CHAPTER 2
FOR
420kV CVTs, 245kV, 145kV & 72.5kV CAPACITOR

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS & POTENTIAL
TRANSFORMERS
AND 36kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS
SPECIFICATION No. HPD/S-76/HPM-466/Prot. (NOV-2012)
Chief Engineer/MM
Design Directorate, HVPNL,
Shakti Bhawan, Sec-6,
Panchkula-134109 (HARYANA).
Tel./Fax No. 0172-2583724


CONTENTS
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.0 SCOPE 3
2.0 STANDARDS 3
3.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS 4
6.0 TESTS 10
ANNEXURES
I. COREWISE DETAILS FOR
A-(i) 420kV CVTs 13
B-(i) 245kV CVTs 14
B-(ii) 245kV PTs 15
C-(i) 145kV CVTs 16
C-(ii) 145kV PTs WITH METERING CORE 17
D -(i) 72.5kV CVTs 18
D-(ii) 72.5kV PTs 19
E (i) 36kV PTs 20
II. A GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

21
OF CVTs
II. B GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

23
OF PTs
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1.0 SCOPE :
1.1 This specification provides for design, engineering, manufacture, testing of
outdoor instrument transformers alongwith terminal connectors for
protection and metering services in different 420/220/132/66kV S/Stn. in
Haryana.
1.2 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all details of the design and
construction of equipments. However the equipment shall conform in all
respects to high standards of engineering design and workmanship and
shall be acceptable to the purchaser, who will interpret in a manner the
meanings of drawings and specifications and shall have the power to
reject any work or material, which in his judgement is not in accordance
therewith. The equipment offered shall be complete with all components
necessary for its effective and trouble free operation. Such components
shall be deemed to be within the scope of supply irrespective of whether
those are specifically brought out in this specification and or the
commercial order or not.
2.0 STANDARDS:
Sl.No. Standard No. Title.
1. IS : 3156 Voltage transformer
(Part-I to Part-III)
2. IS : 3156 (Part-IV) Capacitor Voltage Transformer
3. IS : 2099 High Voltage porcelain bushing.
4. IS : 3347 Dimensions of porcelain transformer bushings
5. IS : 2071 Method of High Voltage Testing
6. IS : 335 Insulating oil for transformers and switchgears
7. IS : 2165 Insulation Co-ordination for equipments of 100 kV and
above.
8. IS : 2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low
voltage switchgear and control.
9. IEC- 186 Voltage Transformers
10. IEC - 186A First supplement to IEC publication 186
11. IEC - 270 Partial discharge Measurement
12. IS - 5561 Terminal Connectors
13. IS -4800 Enameled round winding wires
14. IEC- 44 (4) Instrument Transformer measurement of PDs
15. IEC-171 Insulation Co-Ordination
16. IEC - 358 Coupling capacitor divider.
17. IEC-60 High Voltage testing techniques.
18. IEC-8263 Method for RIV test on high voltage insulators.
19. IS: 9348 Coupling capacitors and capacitor dividers
20. IS: 2633 Methods of testing hot dipped galvanized articles
21. IS: 11065 Drawings.
22. Indian Electricity Rules 1956
23. IS: 5621 Hollow porcelain insulators.

2.2 Equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative standards,
which ensure equal or better performance than the standards mentioned
above, shall also be considered. When the equipment offered by the
supplier conforms to other standards salient points of difference between
standards adopted and the standards specified in this specification shall
be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule. Four copies of such
standards with authentic translation in English shall be furnished alongwith
the offer.
3.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS :
Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for
satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions:-
i) Location IN THE STATE OF HARYANA
ii) Max. ambient air temp(C) 50

iii) Min. ambient air temp ( C) -2.5
iv) Maximum Relative humidity (%) 100
v) Minimum Relative humidity (%) 26
vi) Average annual rainfall (mm) 900
vii) Max. wind pressure (Kg/sq.m.) 195
viii)Max. altitude above mean sea level (meters) 1000
ix) Isoceraunic level (days/year) 50
x) Seismic level (horizontal acceleration) 0.3g.
Note : Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and
fungus growth. The climatic conditions are also prone to wide
variations in ambient conditions. Smoke is also present in the
atmosphere. Heavy lightening also occur during June to October.
4.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS :
The capacitor voltage transformers and potential transformers covered in
this specification shall meet the technical requirements listed hereunder.
Sl. Item Specification
No. 420kV 245kV 145kV 72.5kV 36kV
1. Type/Installation Single Phase, Oil filled,Self cooled, Hermetically sealed
Outdoor type _____
2. Type of mounting -----Steel structure----------
3. Highest system
420 245 145 72.5 36
voltage (kV rms)
4. Suitable for
50 Hz
system frequency
5. Rated primary 400/3 220/3 132/3 66/3 33/3
voltage (kV rms
6. No. of Secondary
Cores &
Secondary

Voltage (Volts)
PT - Core I,II Core I,II,III Core I,II Core I,II
i)
110/3 110/3 110/3 110/3
CVT Core I,II,III Core I,II, III Core I,II, III Core I,II -
ii) 110/3 110/3 110/3 110/3
7. Method of Solidly earthed
earthing the
system
8. 1.2/50 1425 1050 650 325 170
microsecond
lightning impulse
withstand voltage
(kVp)
9. 1 Minute dry & 630 460 275 140 70
wet power
frequency
withstand voltage
primary (kV rms)
10. Min. creepage 10500 6125 3625 1815 900
distance of
porcelain housing
(mm)
11. Creepage factor 4.0
(max.)
12. Rated voltage 1.2 continuous and 1.5 for 30 seconds
factor
13. Equivalent 8800+10% N.A
capacitance at -5%
power frequency
for carrier
coupling for CVT
(PF)
14. Resultant high 8800 in carrier frequency range of 40 KHz N.A to 500 KHz with
frequency variation in capacitance as contained in IEC-358 (i.e- 20% &
capacitance for +50%)
CVT (PF)
15. One minute 3.0
power frequency
withstand voltage
for secondary
winding (kV rms)
16. Max. As per IS:3156 or equivalent IEC
temperature rise
over ambient of
50C

5.1 Common for all CVTs & PTs
5.1.1 The insulation of the instrument transformers shall be so designed
that the internal insulation shall have higher electrical withstand capability
than the external insulation. The designed dielectric withstand values of
external and
internal insulations shall be clearly withstand values specified in this

guaranteed technical particulars. The dielectric withstand values specified
in this specification are meant for fully assembled instrument transformers.
5.1.2 Porcelain Housing :
5.1.2.1 The details of location and type of joint, if provided on the porcelain, shall
be furnished by the supplier alongwith the offer. The housing shall be
made of homogeneous, vitreous porcelain of high mechanical and
dielectric strength, glazing of porcelain shall be of uniform brown or dark
brown colour with a smooth surface arranged to shed away rain water or
condensed water particles (fog).
5.1.2.2 Details of attachment of metallic flanges to the porcelain shall be brought
out in the offer. Nuts and bolts or screws used for fixation of the interfacing
porcelain bushings for taking out terminals, shall be provided on flanges
cemented to the bushings and not on the porcelain.
5.1.3 METAL TANK:
The metal tanks shall have bare minimum number of welded joints so as
to minimise possible locations of oil leakage. The metal tanks shall be
made out of mild steel/Stainless steel/aluminium alloy, depending on the
requirement. Welding in horizontal plane is to be avoided as welding at
ths location may give way due to vibratins during transport resulting in oil
leakage. Supplier has to obtain specific approval from purchaser for any
horizontal welding used in the bottom tank.
5.1.4 Surface Finish:
The ferrous parts exposed to atmosphere shall be hot dip galvanised or
shall be coated with atleast two coats of zinc rich epoxy painting. All nuts,
bolts and washers shall be made out of stainless steel.
5.1.5 Insulating Oil:
Insulating oil required for first filling of the instrument transformer shall be
covered in supplier's scope of supply. The oil shall meet the requirements
of latest edition IS:335 or equivalent IEC.
5.1.6 Prevention of Oil leakages and Entry of Moisture:
5.1.6.1 The supplier shall ensure that the sealing of instrument transformer is
properly achieved. In this connection the arrangement provided by the
supplier at various locations including the following ones shall be
described, supported by sectional drawings.
i) Locations of emergence of primary and secondary terminals.
ii) Interface between porcelain housing and metal tanks.
iii) Cover of the secondary terminal box.
5.1.7 GASKETS:
For gasketed joints, wherever used nitrile butyl rubber gaskets shall be
used. The gasket shall be fitted in properly machined groove with
adequate space for accommodating the gasket under compression.

5.1.8 Oil level indicators:
Instrument transformers shall be provided with oil sight window (Prismatic
Type) at suitable location so that the oil level is clearly visible with naked
eye to an observer standing at ground level.

5.1.9 EARTHING:
Metal tank of the instrument transformer shall be provided with two separate earthing
terminals for bolted connection to 50X8mm MS flat to be provided by the Purchaser for
connection to station earth-mate.
5.1.10 LIFTING & TRANSPORTATION ARRANGEMENTS:
Instrument transformer shall be provided with suitable lifting arrangement, to lift the entire unit.
The lifting arrangement shall be clearly shown in the general arrangement drawings. Lifting
arrangement (lifting eye) shall be positioned in such a way so as to avoid any damage to the
porcelain housing or the tanks during lifting for installation/transport. If necessary, string
guides shall be offered which shall be of removable type. The instrument transformers shall
be so constructed that it can be easily transported to site within the allowable transport
limitation and in horizontal position, if the transport limitations so demand.
5.1.11 NAME PLATE:
The instrument transformer shall be provided with non-corrosive, legible name plate with the
information specified in relevant standards, duly engraved/punched on it. In addition to these
P.O. NO.& Connection diagram shall also be marked in rating plate.
5.1.12 TERMINAL CONNECTORS:
Suitable terminal connectors of type 4 IPS Aluminium tube for 400kV CVTs and suitable
terminal connectors for connecting single Tarantulla conductor for 220kV CVTs/PTs & for
Single ACSR Zebra in 132kV, 66kV CVTs/PTs & 33kV PTs shall be supplied. Suitable
terminal earth connectors for earthing connections shall also be provided.
5.1.12.1 The terminal connectors shall meet the following requirements:
1) Terminal connectors shall be manufactured and tested as per IS:5561 or equivalent IEC.
2) All castings shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All sharp
edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
3) No part of a clamp shall be less than 10mm thick.
4) All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized conforming to IS:2633 or equivalent IEC.
5) For bimetallic connectors, copper alloy liner of minimum 2mm thickness shall be cast integral
with aluminium body.
6) Flexible connectors shall be made from tinned copper/aluminium sheets.
7) All currents carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have minimum contact
resistance.
8) Connectors shall be designed to be corona free in accordance with the requirements
stipulated in IS: 5561 or equivalent IEC.
5.1.13 INSULATION:
Enamel, if used for conductor insulation, shall be polyvinyl acetate type or amide emide type
and shall meet the requirements of IS:4800 or equivalent IEC. Polyester enamel shall not be
used. Double cotton cover, if used, shall be suitably covered to ensure that it does not come
in contact with oil.
5.1.14 TEMPERATURE RISE:

The temperature rise on any part of equipment shall not exceed maximum temperature rise
specified in IS:3156 or equivalent IEC. However, the permissible temperature rise indicated
is for a maximum ambient temperature of 50C.
5.1.15 OIL FILLING & DRAIN VALVES:
The instrument transformers shall be vacuum filled with oil after processing and
thereafter hermetically sealed to eliminate breathing and to prevent air and moisture
from entering the tanks, sealing type oil filling and/or oil sampling cocks shall be provided with

facility to reseal the same. The method adopted for hermetic sealing shall be described in the
offer.
5.1.16 PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICE:
Suitable arrangement shall be made to accommodate the expansion and contraction of oil
due to temperature variation. The pressure variation shall be kept within limits which do not
impair the tightness of the instrument transformer. A pressure relief device capable of
releasing abnormal internal pressure shall be provided.
5.2 CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (CVT):
5.2.1 The CVTs comprising of a capacitor divider unit and electromagnetic unit shall be single
phase, oil filled hermetically sealed, self cooled, outdoor type and suitable for direct line
connection without any fuse and isolating switches, These CVTs are required to be used on
interlinking substations in Haryana power system for the purpose of protection, synchronising,
interlocking, carrier coupling and metering. CVTs shall be suitable for connecting the carrier
terminals to single circuit and double circuit transmission lines for phase to phase coupling for
power line carrier, voice communication, telemetering & teleprinting services.
5.2.2 The secondary terminals of potential unit, high frequency coupling terminal and the earthing
terminals shall be brought out separately and housed in a water proof cabinet outside the
main steel chamber.
5.2.3 The capacitor voltage transformer shall be suitable for simultaneous use as measuring unit,
for feeding voltage supply to protective relays and as coupling capacitor for carrier
transmission i.e. for voice communication, carrier protective relays, telemetering, teleprinting
services over one or more carrier channels in the frequency range of 40 to 500KHz.
5.2.4 The capacitors shall be designed for wide frequency band and low dielectric loss. Their
natural frequency shall be considerably higher than the carrier frequency range of 40 KHz to
500 KHz.
5.2.5 The unit capacitors shall be so designed that no damage to internal elements or change in
electrostatic capacitance is resulted by the application of impulse voltage.
5.2.6 Each CVT including its emvt unit shall be filled with insulating oil conforming to IS:335 or
equivalent IEC. And shall be hermetically sealed against moisture and dust.
5.2.7 The electromagnetic voltage transformer unit of CVT intended for out-door installation whose
primary is to be fed by the inter-mediate tapping of capacitor divider shall be of oil immersed,
self cooled design and shall be suitable for metering, relaying & synchronising services. The
core of this transformer shall be of high accuracy at normal & high voltages. The primary
winding shall be connected through a compensating reactor to compensate the voltage
increase at inter-mediate tapping, whatever is the load within range of rated burden.
5.2.8 The design shall be free from corona effect to keep noise level of carrier frequency link very
low. Use may be made of grading rings or Electrostatic screen for this purpose if required.
5.2.9 The design shall be suitable for rapid reclosing of the circuit and shall be capable of accurate
and proportionate transmission of sudden variation in the primary voltage.
5.2.10 Each CVT shall be provided with a suitable damping device so that ferro resonance oscillation
due to saturation of iron core of transformer or any inductance connected in parallel with it and
initiated by either over voltages on the net work side or by opening of the short circuited
primary or secondaries, shall be practically zero. Oscillations of the secondary voltages which
may arise as a result of breakdown of primary voltages due to short circuits shall not affect the
proper working of protective relays. This shall confirm to provisions of clause:42 of IEC
recommendations 186-A.
5.2.11 Design of the potential units of the CVT shall be based on the following requirements in
connection with protective relaying.
i) They must transmit accurately sudden drops of primary voltage.
ii) The CVTs must not enter into sub-harmonic resonance and transient oscillations during
energisation. They must be damped out with sufficient rapidness.
iii) They must have sufficiently low short circuit impedance as seen from secondary.
5.2.12 A device shall be incorporated in a capacitor voltage transformer for the purpose of limiting
over voltages which may appear across one or more of its components and/or to prevent
sustained ferro resonance.
The device may include a spark gap and may be located in several different ways according
to its nature. (Clause 2.12 of IS:3156 (Part-IV)-1978 or IEC-186A Clause 37.12)
5.2.13 SECONDARY TERMINAL BOXES:
5.2.13.1 Suitable terminal boxes with removable gland plate for facilitating the entry of H.F. Cable & VT
control cables shall be provided at an accessible position.
5.2.13.2 The secondary terminals of 420kV, 245kV, 145kV & 72.5kV CVTs shall be brought out in two
separate weather proof terminal boxes and it shall be provided with a removable gland plates.
In case of 420kV, 245kV & 145kV CVTs, in the first box, secondary terminals of Core-I & II
(i.e. Protection and measurement cores) shall be brought out. For 72.5kV CVT in the first box
the secondary terminals of 1st core (i.e. Protection and measurement core) shall be brought
out.
In the second box the secondary terminals of 3rd core (i.e metering Core) of 420kV, 245kV &
145kV CVTs and 2nd core (i.e metering Core) of 72.5kV CVT shall be brought out. The
Metering secondary terminal box shall be provided with proper sealing facility.
5.3 Voltage Transformer (PT):
5.3.1. CORE:
5.3.1.1 The voltage transformers shall be oil immersed, sealed type and self cooled, suitable for the
services indicated & conforming to the modern practices of designs and construction. The
core shall be of high grade, non ageing, electrical silicon laminated steel of low hysteresis loss
and high permeability to ensure high accuracy at both normal and over voltages.
5.3.1.2 The design of PT shall be based on following requirements.
i) They must transmit sudden drops of primary voltages.
ii) They must have sufficiently low short circuit impedance as seen from secondary.
5.3.2. SECONDARY TERMINAL BOXES:
5.3.2.1 The secondary terminals of the PTs except 145KV PTs (having 3 cores) & 36kV PTs (Having
two cores) shall be brought out in a weather proof terminal box and it shall be provided with a
removable gland plate.
In case of 145kV & 36kV PTs, two separate weather proof terminal boxes shall be provided.
In the first box, the terminals of core-I & II of 145kV PT and Core-II of 36kV PT shall be
brought out. The terminal box shall be provided with a removable gland plate.
In the second box, the terminals of Core-III of 145kV PT (i.e. metering core) and core-I of
36kV PT shall be brought out. The terminal box shall be provided with a removable gland
plate and with proper sealing facility.
5.3.2.2 All the fuses and the links shall be provided at the V.T terminal boxes.
5.3.2.3 The primary winding of voltage transformers will be connected phase to ground.
6.0 TESTS :
6.1 TYPE TEST
6.1.1 TYPE TESTS OF POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS (PT's)
The equipment offered should be fully type tested. In case, the equipment of the type and
design offered has already been type tested, the supplier shall furnish 4 sets of type test
reports alongwith the offer. The type test reports should not be more than seven years old,
reckoned from the date of bid opening and the type test should have been carried out in
accordance with ISS-2705(1992)/equivalent IEC from Govt./ Govt. approved test house.
supplier on one piece of total ordered quantity of each type, at his premises in the presence
of the inspecting officer of the purchaser, without any extra charges. The purchaser reserves
the right to demand repetition of some or all the type tests in the presence of purchaser's
representative.
6.1.2 TYPE TESTS OF CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS (CVT's)
The equipment offered should be fully type tested. In case, the equipment of the type and
design offered has already been type tested, the supplier shall furnish 4 sets of type test
reports of the following tests alongwith the offer.
Tests as per clause No. 12.1, 12.2 & 14 of IEC-358 (1990)and clause 10.1 (b), 10.1 (d),
10.1(e), 10.1(f), 49,51,52 & 53 of IEC-186 (1987) latest addition of IEC's to be considered.
The type test reports should not be more than seven years old, reckoned from the date of bid
opening and the type test should have been carried out in accordance with IEC-358(1992)
and IEC-186 (1987) from Govt. approved test house.
supplier on one place of total ordered quantity of each type, at his premises in the presence of
the inspecting officer of the purchaser, without any extra charges. The purchaser reserves the
right to demand repetition of some or all the type tests in the presence of purchaser's
representative.
6.2 ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TESTS :
i) All acceptance and routine tests as stipulated in the relevant standards shall be carried out by
the Supplier in presence of purchaser's representative, unless dispensed with in writing by
the Purchaser.
ii) Immediately after finalisation of the programme of routine /acceptance testing , the Supplier
shall give sufficient advance intimation to the Purchaser to enable him to depute his
representative for witnessing the testing.
7.0 DOCUMENTATION:
7.1 All drawings shall conform to international standards organisation (ISO) À' series of
drawing sheet/Indian Standards Specification IS:11065. All drawings shall be in ink and
suitable for microfilming. If drawings are computerized than all drawings shall be nicely
printed. All dimensions and data shall be in S.I.Units.
7.2 List of drawings:

a) General outline and assembly drawings of the equipment.
b) Graphs showing the performance of equipment's in regard to magnetisation characteristics;
ratio & phase angle curves, ratio correction factor curves.
c) Sectional views showing:
i) General Constructional Features.
ii) Materials/Gaskets/Sealing used.
iii) The insulation & the winding arrangements, method of connection of the primary / secondary
winding to the primary/ secondary terminals etc.
iv) Porcelain used and its dimensions.
d) Arrangement of terminals and details of connection studs provided.
e) Name plate.
f) Schematic drawing.
g) Detailed drawing of pressure release device with detailed literature.
h) Terminal connector drawing.

NOTE:- All above drawings should bear a minimum space (14X10cm) for stamping the
approval of drawings by the purchaser.
drawings except 7.2 (b) above (actual of which shall be supplied at the time of inspection) for
purchasers approval alongwith bid in a sealed envelope. The purchaser shall communicate
his comments/approval on the drawings to the supplier within 21 days from the date of issue
of LOI. The submission of complete and correct readable drawings for approval is the
responsibility of the bidder/supplier. The supplier shall, if so required by the purchaser, modify
the drawings and resubmit four copies of the modified drawings for purchasers approval
within two weeks from the date of purchasers comments. Then, the purchaser shall approve
the revised drawings within two weeks from the date of its receipt.
7.4 The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved
drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the purchaser. All
manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to the approval of
the drawing shall be at the supplier's risk.
7.5 The successful bidder shall also supply one set of nicely bound all the approved drawings &
instruction manual containing handling, installation, testing and commissioning of equipment
at the time of dispatch of material to the consignee with each equipment for our field staff
without which the supply will not be considered as complete supply. In addition, 5 sets
of such bound manuals and final approved drawings shall be supplied for reference & record
in our design office alongwith one good quality soft copy (CD) of approved drawings and
instruction manuals, if computerized.
7.6 Approval of drawings / work by Purchaser shall not relieve the Supplier of his
responsibility and liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the latest
revision of applicable standards, rules and codes of practices. The equipment shall conform in
all respects to high standards of engineering, design, workmanship and latest revisions of
relevant standards at the time of ordering and purchaser shall have the power to reject any
work or material which in his judgement is not in full accordance therewith.
NOTE :- 1. In case the equipment offered by the Supplier does not meet with the requirement of
technical specification the offer of the firm shall not be considered.

ANNEXURE- I A (i)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 420kV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (CVT)
Sl. Requirement Particulars

No.
1. Rated Primary voltage 400/3kV
2. Type Single phase
3. No. of Secondaries 3
4. Rated voltage factor 1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
5. Capacitance (minimum) 8800 (+10%, -5%) pico farads

6. Rated voltage (volts) Secondary-I Secondary-II Secondary-III
110/3 110/3 110/3
7. Application Metering & Protection Metering
Protection
8. Accuracy 1/3P 3P 0.2
9. Output burden (VA) 100 50 50
10.Percentage voltage error As per ISS/IEC
& phase displacement
(minutes) for respective
specified accuracy
classes.
Note:- Each winding shall fulfill its respective specified accuracy requirement within its
specified output range whilst at the same time the other winding has an output of any
value form zero to 100% of the output range specified for the other winding in line with
clause 6.2.1 of IS 3156 (Part-2 & Part-3) 1992 or its equivalent IEC.

ANNEXURE- IB(i)

No.
110/3 110/3 110/3
17. Application Protection & Protection Metering
Measurement
20. Percentage voltage error & As per ISS/IEC
phase displacement
specified accuracy classes.
Note:- Each winding shall fulfil its respective specified accuracy requirement within its

ANNEXURE- IB(ii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER (PT)
Sl. Particulars Requirement

No.
5. Rated voltage (volts) Secondary-I Secondary-II
110/3 110/3
6. Application Protection & Protection
Measurement
7. Accuracy 1/3P 3P
8. Output burden (VA) 150 50
phase displacement

ANNEXURE- IC(i)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (CVT).

No.
1. Rated Primary voltage 1323kV
110/3 110/3 110/3
Measurement
phase displacement

ANNEXURE- IC(ii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER (PT).

No.
110/3 110/3 110/3
6. Application Protection & Protection METERING
Measurement
phase displacement

ANNEXURE- ID(i)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (CVT)S.

No.
110/3 110/3
7. Application Protection & Metering
Measurement
8. Accuracy 1/3P 0.2
phase displacement

ANNEXURE- ID(ii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER (PT).

No.
110/3 110/3
Measurement
7. Accuracy 1/3P 3P
phase displacement

ANNEXURE- IE(i)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER (PT) OF 2 CORES.

No
110/3 110/3
6. Application Main metering Metering & Protection
7. Accuracy 0.2 1/3P
9. Percentage voltage error As per ISS/IEC
specified accuracy
classes.

ANNEXURE-IIA
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER

1. Name of manufacturer
2. Type and model
3. Rated voltage (kV)
4. Capacitance :
a) Primary capacitance C1 (pf)
b) Secondary capacitance C2 (pf)
c) Equivalent capacitance C (pf)
5. Number of secondary windings

6. Rated secondary windings :
a) Winding-I (volts)
b) Winding -Ii (volts)
7. Rated secondary burden:

a) Winding - I (VA)
b) Winding - II (VA)
8. Accuracy class of each secondary :
a) Winding -I (VA)
b) Winding - II (VA)
9. Rated voltage factor with rated burden.
10. One minute power frequency withstand:
Test (Dry) voltage (kV rms)
11. One minute power frequency withstand test

(wet) voltage (kV rms)
12. 1.2/50 micro second impulse wave withstand
test voltage (kV rms)
13. One minute power frequency withstand voltage
on secondaries (kV rms)
14. Total creepage distance (mm)

15. Creepage factor
16. Is CVT suitable for carrier

frequency in the range of 40 to 500 KHz? (Yes/No)
17. Natural frequency of coupling capacitors
18. Rated Primary

burden of potential devices (VA)
19. Temperature rise at 1.2 times rated voltage with rated burden (C)
20. Guaranteed value of temp. coefficient.
(percent per Ce
21. Guaranteed value of radio interference voltage

in micro-volts at different voltages.
22. Guaranteed sealing test. The pressure at

which sealing test is to be carried out.
23. Guaranteed value of the H.F capacitances and

equivalent series resistance at different.
24. Value of stray capacitance and stray conductance

in the carrier frequency range of 40 to 500 KHz.
25. Weight of oil and the standard to which it conforms

i) In capacitor unit (Kg/IS)
ii) In measuring unit. (Kg/IS)
26. Total weight (Kg)
27. Over -all dimensions (mm)
28. Mounting flange dimensional details
29. Whether CVT are suitable for
Carrier communication,
carrier protection,
carrier telemetering and
carrier teleprinting services,
metering, relaying protection,
synchronising and interlocking purposes.
30. Do the CVTs contain built in (Yes/No)
compensating reactors and damping
device in P.T. portion?

ANNEXURE-IIB
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
1. Manufacturer's type and designation.
2. Type
3. Rated Frequency
4. Rated primary voltage
5. Number of secondary windings
6. Rated secondary windings :

a) Winding-I
b) Winding -II
c) Winding -III
7. Class of Accuracy.
a) Winding - I
b) Winding - II
c) Winding -III
8. Limits of errors.
a) Winding -I
i) Percentage voltage ratio error
ii) Phase displacement. (Minutes)
b) Winding - II
ii) Phase displacement (minutes)
c) Winding - III
iii) Phase displacement (minutes)
9. Rated burden.
a) Winding - I
b) Winding -II
c) Winding-III
10. Rated voltage factor and time

11. Temperature rise at 1.2 times rated voltage when applied
continuously with
rated burden (C)
12. Insulation class of

a) Primary windings
b) Secondary windings
13. One minute power frequency:
(Dry) withstand Test voltage (kV)
14. One minute power frequency (wet)
withstand test voltage (kV)
15. 1.2/50 micro second impulse withstand

test voltage (kV peak)
16. One minute power frequency withstand

voltage on secondaries (volts)
17. a) Creepage distance.

c) Creepage factor
18. Standard to which the equipment conforms
19. Standard to which the oil conforms
20. Total weight of the P.T.
21. Overall dimensions
22. Mounting details
23. Weight of the oil

24. Total shipping weight.
SECTION 5
CHAPTER 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 400kV, 220 kV, 132 kV, 66 kV

& 33 kV CONTROL AND RELAY PANEL BOARDS
FOR SUBSTATIONS WITH SUBSTATION
AUTOMATION SYSTEM
[SPECIFICATION NO.HPD/S-89/HPM-468/Vol-II/Prot. (February, 2014)]

CHIEF ENGINEER/MM,
DESIGN DIRECTORATE, HVPNL,
SHAKTI BHAWAN, Basement,
SEC-6, PANCHKULA 134109
(HARYANA)
Tel./Fax No. 0172-2583724
CONTENTS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.0 SCOPE 3
2.0 STANDARDS 3
3.0 SERVICE CONDITION 4
6.0 TESTS 26
ANNEXURES
A. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS 29

B. TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF CTs, NCTs, PTs & CVTs 34
C. TRANSMISSION LINE DATA 55
D. SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS FROM THE SPECIFICATION 56
E. LINE PARAMETERS 57
F. DETAILS OF CARRIER EQUIPMENTS 58
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1.0 SCOPE:
1.1 This specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture, inspection & testing at
manufacturer's work before dispatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at discretion of purchaser of
Control & Relay Panels for 400kV,220 kV, 132 kV & 66 kV S/Stns. having Substation Automation
System in the state of Haryana.
1.2 Unless specifically excluded from the offer, all fittings and accessories, not specifically stated in this
specification but which are necessary for satisfactory operation of the scheme or to complete the
work in a good workman like manner shall be deemed to have been included in the scope of supply
of the Bidder.
1.3 CO-ORDINATION :
Circuit Breakers, CT's, PT's/CVT's & Isolating Switches, etc. are being purchased against separate
specification. The particulars of CTs, PTs and CVTs existing/ to be arranged are listed at Annexure
'B'. The Supplier of control & relay boards shall be responsible for preparing complete wiring diagram
of 33kV,66kV,132 kV, 220 kV & 400kV C&R panel boards and shall also undertake to mount & wire
any equipment received from other supplier. The schematic of breakers & isolators are required to
be incorporated in the panel schematic.
1.4 EXPERIENCE:
1.4.1 For 400kV & 220kV C&R Panels:
The supplier of C&R panels shall be manufacturer of relays and all the main relays on the C&R panels
shall be of his make only. However, one of the distance protection schemes on each 400kV & 220 kV
feeder C&R panel can be of different make in view of the fact that both the distance protection scheme
(Main-I & Main-II) should have different measuring techniques.
1.4.2 For 132kV, 66kV & 33kV C&R Panels:
The supplier of C&R panels shall be manufacturer of relays and all the main relays on the C&R panels
shall be of his make only. The suppliers own make relay includes the relays manufactured by their
Principals/Associates and they have their service centre with them.
2.0 STANDARDS :
2.1 The equipment offered shall conform to latest relevant Indian Standards listed hereunder or
equivalent IEC :-
Sr. No. Standard Title
1. IS: 5 Colour for ready mix paints.
2. IS: 375 Marking & arrangements for switchgear, bus bars, main
connections & auxiliary wiring.
3. IS: 694 PVC insulated cable for working voltage upto and
including 1100 V.
4. IS: 722 AC Electricity meters.
5. IS: 1248 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring
Part-I& IV instruments & their accessories.
6. IS: 2419 Dimensions for panel mounted indicating & recording
electrical instruments.
7. IS :3231 Electrical relays for power system protection.
8. IS :8686 Static protective relays.
9. IS :2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low
voltage switchgear & control gear.
2.2 The works covered by the specification shall be designed, engineered, manufactured, built, tested
and commissioned in accordance with the Acts, Rules, Laws and Regulations of India.
2.3 The equipment to be furnished under this specification shall conform to latest issue with all
amendments of standard specified above.
2.4 In addition to meeting the specific requirement called for in the Technical Specification, the
equipment shall also conform to the general requirement of the relevant standards and shall form an
integral part of Specification.
2.5 The Bidder shall note that standards mentioned in the specification are not mutually exclusive or
complete in themselves, but intended to compliment each other.
2.6 The Contractor shall also note that list of standards presented in this specification is not complete.
Whenever necessary the list of standards shall be considered in conjunction with specific IS/IEC.
2.7 When the specific requirements stipulated in the specification exceed or differ than those required by
the applicable standards, the stipulation of the specification shall take precedence.
2.8 Other internationally accepted standards which ensure equivalent or better performance than that
specified in the standard referred shall also be accepted.
2.9 In case governing standards for the equipment is different from IS or IEC, the salient points of
difference shall be clearly brought out alongwith English language version of standard or relevant
extract of the same. The equipment conforming to standards other than IS/IEC shall be subject to
Employer's approval.
2.10 The bidder shall clearly indicate in his bid the specific standards in accordance with which the works
will be conformed.
3.1 Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous
operation under the following tropical conditions:-
i) Location IN THE STATE OF HARYANA
ii) Max. ambient air temp (C) 50
iii) Min. ambient air temp (C) -2.5
iv) Maximum Relative humidity (%) 100
v) Minimum Relative humidity (%) 26
vi) Average annual rainfall (mm) 900
vii) Max. wind pressure (kg/sq. m.) 195
viii) Max. altitude above mean sea level (meters). 1000
ix) Isoceraunic level (days/Year) 50
x) Seismic level (horizontal acceleration) 0.3 g
xi) Average number of dust storm 35
(days per annum)
Note:-i) Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and fungus growth. The climatic
conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient conditions.
ii) Air conditioning or any special arrangement for making the control room dust proof shall not be
provided in any of the S/Stn.
3.2 All control wiring, equipment & accessories shall be protected against fungus growth, condensation,
vermin & other harmful effects due to tropical environments.
3.3 AUX. POWER SUPPLY :
i) A.C. Supply : 415/240 Volts, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50 Hz
Voltage variation : 10%
Frequency variation : 3%
ii) D C Supply : 220 Volts, 2 wire available from S/Stn.
battery(insulated)
Variation : 10%.
3.4. 400kV, 220 kV, 132 kV, 66 kV & 33 kV voltages will be three phase having normal frequency of 50 Hz
subject to a variation of 3%. Neutrals of the Power Transformers at the S/Stn. covered in this
specification are solidly earthed.

4.1 The panel shall have the principal dimensions as detailed below:-
i). Depth of panels = 610 mm
ii).a) Height of switchboard above base frame = 2210 mm
b) Height of base frame = 102 mm
iii). Type of Panels = Simplex Control & Relay Panel
Note:- The offer of the bidder not conforming to above requirement shall be out rightly rejected.
4.2 ARRANGEMENT OF PANELS:
The panels shall be fabricated so that even if the serial of panels is changed no difficulty will be faced
in the placement of panels and cabling etc. The sequence of various panels in a panel board at
S/Stn. shall be supplied to successful bidder.

5.1 MATERIAL & WORKMANSHIP:
All material used in the construction of the panels/relays shall be of the best quality obtainable of
their respective kind and whole of the work shall be of the highest class, well finished and of
approved design and make.
Castings shall be free from blow-holes, flaws, cracks or other defects and shall be smooth grained
and of true dimensions and forms.
The draw out mechanism in respect of draw out relays should be smooth and convenient so as to
give adequate service during their use.
5.2 DEPARTURE FROM THE SPECIFICATION:
Should the tenderer wish to depart from the provisions of this specification either on account of
manufacturing practice or for any other reasons, he will draw specific attention to the proposed points
of departure on the prescribed Performa (enclosed) at annexure-D in his tender and submit such full
information, drawings and specifications as will enable the merit of his proposal to be appreciated.
In the event of contractor drawings, specification and tables etc. disagreeing with this specification
during the execution of the contract this specification shall be held binding unless the departures
have been fully recorded as required above.
5.3 PAINTING:
All unfinished surfaces of steel panels and frame works shall be sand blasted to remove rust scale,
foreign adhering matter & grease. A suitable rust resistance primer shall be applied on the interior &
exterior of steel which will be followed by application of an under coat suitable to serve as base for
finishing coat. The finishing coat shall be as under: -
Exterior - Stove enameled light grey as per shade No.631 of IS: 5/IEC.
Interior - stove enameled white.
Base frame - Stove enameled glossy black.
5.4. TESTING EQUIPMENT AND TESTING FACILITIES ON THE RELAYS:

The tenderer shall recommend suitable testing equipment (alongwith quantity) required for field
testing of protective schemes and other relays offered against this specification. The actual quantity
to be ordered shall be determined by the Purchaser.
Also adequate testing facilities should be provided on the relay so as to test them without the
necessity of their removal or making any extra connections. The Bidder will clearly indicate the
testing procedure to be followed in respect of relays offered.
5.5 The transmission lines shall be either in form of overhead conductor or combination of
overhead conductor & underground cable. The tentative transmission line data in respect of
400kV, 220kV, 132kV & 66 kV lines covered in this specification is given at Annexure-C.
The standard chart providing the details of per unit values of Z1, Z2 & Z0 on 100 MVA base per 100
km of line for calculating these values for full lengths of lines are enclosed at Annexure-E.
The tentative details of carrier equipment are enclosed at Annexure-F.
The suitability of distance scheme offered with reference to the above parameters may be seen.
Guaranteed test sheets as per Annexure A shall be submitted by the tenderer. Relevant literature
shall be supplied along with the bid for proper appreciation of the offered equipment.
5.6 SUPERVISORY SERVICES:
The tenderer may offer supervisory services, panel wise testing & commissioning of 400kV, 220kV,
132 kV, 66 kV & 33 kV panel included in the specification. The tenderer may quote their rates on diem
basis category-wise with their terms & conditions. The rates quoted should be valid for at least three
years form the date of receipt of equipment by us.
5.7 TRANINING OF PERSONNEL:

The contractor will provide free facilities for training the purchaser's technicians /Engineers at his
works, design office and HVPNL's site. He will intimate in advance the schedule of completion of
designs and manufacture of equipment against the contract (of this specification) or similar equipment
to be manufactured at the works so that the purchaser may depute upto 3 technicians & 3 engineers
for training at the manufacture assembly, testing, operation and commissioning etc. including testing
and commissioning of protective relays, covering training in detecting faults in static relays complete
explanation of the schematic wiring and wiring schedule of the relays/scheme together with full
understanding regarding the functional modules of the relays/scheme shall be given to the Engineer /
technicians. The topics of CTs & PTs towards relay application shall also be kept under the scope of
training. The training shall be arranged by the contractor at the works in such a way that the persons
under training shall be freely acquainted with the equipment. The engineers / technicians shall also be
provided with relay/scheme guides/instruction manuals covering drawings of functional modules of
relays/schemes. The period of training will be not exceeding 15 days and all expenses shall be borne
by the purchaser.
5.8 GENERAL DESCRIPTION:

5.8.1. SIMPLEX C&R PANEL BOARDS:
The panels shall be of `simplex' type & consisting of separate cubicles (for each circuit complete with
side covers) made of sheet steel of thickness not less than 10 SWG for the base frame, door frame
and front portions of the cubicles and not less than 14 SWG for door, side, top & bottom portion
having provision for extension at both ends with internal wiring, illumination with door operated off &
on switch. The cubicle shall be suitable for floor mounting with its bottom open. Each cubicle shall be
fitted with flush mounted steel hinged door & lock at the back & all the equipments will be mounted in

front. The supply shall include suitable grouting bolts and nuts etc. All holes and extension windows
shall be blanked and access doors shall be provided with compressible liners at the edges.
These simplex panels offered may, therefore, match in following respects:-
i) Height-wise and depth-wise matching.
The control & relay Panels shall be completely dust & vermin proof. The enclosure shall provide
degree of protection not less than IP-31 in accordance with IS: 2147 and shall be suitable for tropical
use.
NOTE:- For testing purpose a small opening with a cap to close the same is required to be
provided to extend the testing leads on front side of the relay panel.
5.9 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF RELAYS:

All relays shall conform to the requirements of IS:3231/IEC-60255/IEC 61000 or other applicable
standards. Relays shall be suitable for flush or semi-flush mounting on the front with connections
from the rear. All protective relays shall be in draw out or plug-in type modular cases with proper
testing facilities. Necessary test plugs/test handles shall be supplied loose and shall be included in
contractors scope of supply.
All main protective relays shall be numerical type and communication protocol shall be as per IEC
61850. Further, the test levels of EMI as indicated in IEC 61850 shall be applicable to these.
For numerical relays, the scope shall include the following:
a) Necessary software and hardware to up/down load the data to/from the relay from/to personal
computer installed in the substation. However, the supply of PC is not covered under this clause.
b) The relay shall have suitable communication facility for future connectivity to SCADA. The relay shall
be capable of supporting IEC 61850 protocol (with fibre optical port) and shall be compatible with
existing SAS (may be of other make).
c) Numerical relays should have clock (Real Time Clock) with inbuilt battery back up having life span of
about 10 years.
d) Numerical relays shall have adequate no. of output contacts and LEDs to meet the specification /
Scheme requirement. All numerical relays shall be supplied pre-configured as per specification /
scheme requirements / approved drgs.
5.10 CONTROL SCHEME:

5.10.1 CONTROL SWITCH FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER:
5.10.1.1 It shall be possible to close various circuit breakers from the control room. For this purpose control
switches having pistol grip type and of the spring return to neutral position type non lockable handles
with alarm cancellation contacts shall be provided for ÒP' of ckt. breakers. These shall be so
designed that after being operated to `close' a circuit breaker, the operation cannot be repeated until
the switch has been turned to a `trip' position making it impossible to perform two `closing' operations
consecutively.
5.10.1.2 The rating of the control switch contacts shall be suitable for the duty imposed by the closing &
opening mechanism of circuit breakers and shall conform to the recommendations which may be
made by the suppliers of circuit breakers. The moving & fixed contacts shall be of such a form &
material as will ensure good contact and long service under severe operation duty. All contacts shall
be readily renewable.
5.10.1.3 The number of contacts in the control switches shall be decided by the tenderer in view of various
requirements of this specification. Two pairs of contacts one normally open and one normally closed
shall be kept spare. The total number of contacts proposed to be provided shall be stated in the
tender.
5.10.1.4 Safety against inadvertent operation due to light touch in the control switches shall be ensured.
5.11 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION RELAY:

The relay shall be capable of monitoring the healthiness of each trip coil and associated circuit of
circuit breaker during "on & off" conditions. The relay shall have time delay on drop-off of min. 200
milli seconds and shall be provided with operation indicator.
400kV & 220 kV circuit breakers being procured are generally equipped with 2 trip coils in each
phase/pole of the breaker. For monitoring of trip circuits, both in òpen' & `close' position of the
circuit breaker, 6 Nos. automatic trip circuit supervision relays (one for each pole and each trip coil)
are proposed.
For monitoring of entire trip circuit (from control & relay panel terminal to the trip coil of circuit breaker) both in òpen' &
`close' position of the circuit, 2 No. automatic trip circuit supervision relays are proposed for 132kV,66kV & 33kV panels
except 1No. Automatic trip circuit supervision relay is proposed for 33kV Line & Capacitor Panels.
5.12 D.C. FAIL ALARM RELAY:

A suitable relay for monitoring the Trip Circuit D.C. wiring of the control and relay panels shall be
provided. The relay shall have time delay on drop-off of min. 100 milli seconds and shall be provided
with operation indicator.
5.13 VOLTAGE SELECTION SCHEME:

The 400kV, 220kV, 132kV, 66kV & 33kV bus PTs exist on all the phases of both the 400kV, 220kV,
132kV, 66kV & 33kV buses at substations having double bus arrangement. Proper voltage selection
scheme shall be provided on panels.
5.14 AUTO RECLOSING SCHEME:

5.14.1The protective scheme shall incorporate the necessary equipment to impart auto-reclosing impulse to
the circuit breaker when it has tripped either due to the operation of the line protection scheme in the
first zone or the accelerated operation of it with the help of carrier equipment. No auto-reclosing
impulse shall be transmitted in the event of a fault cleared by the 2nd, 3rd & 4th zone of line protection
scheme. Auto-reclosing will also be blocked in case the circuit breaker is tripped manually.
5.14.2The provision of single & three phase auto-reclosing is to be made on 400kV & 220 kV feeder C&R
panels.
5.14.3 CHECK SYNCHRONIZING & DEAD LINE CHARGING SCHEME :

Check synchronizing relay and dead line charging equipment shall be provided for 400kV & 220 kV
feeder C&R panels. The check synchronizing relay shall compare the phase angle & frequency of the
ìncoming' and `running' supplies and allow the auto-reclose to take place only if the said parameters
are within the permissible limits. The dead line charging equipment shall ensure auto-reclosing a
circuit breaker on to a `dead' line leaving the checking of synchronism of two supplies to the other
end of it.
Synchronizing check relay with necessary auxiliary equipments shall be provided which shall permit
breakers to close after checking the requirements of synchronizing of incoming and running supply.
The phase angle setting shall not exceed 35 degree and have voltage difference setting not
exceeding 10%. This relay shall have a response time of less than 200 milliseconds when the two
system conditions are met within preset limits and with the timer disconnected. The relay shall have a
continuously adjustable time setting range of 0.5-3secs.
5.14.4 A four position stay-put non-locking type of auto-reclose selector-switch shall be provided on each of
the 400kV & 220 kV feeder C&R panels and shall have the following four positions:
a) `Single phase auto:
In this position, the relay shall allow single shot single pole auto reclosing for single line to ground
fault. For any other fault, the scheme shall allow all the three poles of the circuit breaker to trip & lock
them out.
b) `Single & three phase auto:
In this position the relay shall allow single shot single pole auto-reclosing for single line to ground
fault and three pole auto-reclosing for other faults such as line to line, double line to ground and three
phase faults.
c) `Three phase auto' :
In this position, the relay shall impart three pole, single shot-reclosing impulse irrespective of the type
of fault.
d) `Non - auto' :
By putting the switch in this position it shall be possible to make the reclosing scheme totally inactive
and all the three poles of the circuit breaker shall trip irrespective of the nature of a fault.
5.14.5 The reclosing scheme shall automatically reset after any successful reclosure and shall lock out in
case the circuit breaker trips immediately after reclosure. Also the (reclosing) scheme shall not
initiate reclosing upon an unsuccessful attempt to manually close circuit breaker.
5.14.6 There shall be clear target indications for successful & un-successful operation.
5.14.7 The auto-reclosing scheme shall have continuously variable dead time setting range of 0.1-2secs for
single phase reclosing as well as for three phase reclosing. The scheme shall have continuously
variable reclaim time setting range of 5-300secs.
Note:- The auto reclosing scheme in built with numerical distance protection relays is acceptable
provided it is available in both Main -I and Main-II distance protection schemes and meets the
above specification.
5.15 PROTECTION SCHEME:

Note:-1) The Protection Scheme shall be suitable for 5A current (instead of 1A) in case of 33kV
Level.
2) O/C & E/F relay for 11kV T/F Panel has to be provided on LV side i.e. 11kV VCB Panel as
per latest VCB Panel specifications of HVPNL.
5.15.1 PROTECTION SCHEME FOR POWER TRANSFORMERS.
A) TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION :
The relay shall

i) Be triple pole numerical type.
ii) Have 3 instantaneous high set over-current units.
iii) Have second harmonic restraint or other inrush proof feature and be stable under normal over
fluxing condition.
iv) Have fifth harmonic by pass filter or similar other arrangement to prevent mal-operation of the
relay under operating conditions.
v) Be suitable for rated current of 1A and include necessary ICTs for ratio & phase angle
correction.
vi) Have operating current setting sufficiently low (15% or less) so as to cover practically the
whole of the transformer against all types of faults.
vii) Have adjustable bias setting range of 20- 50%.
viii) Have maximum operating time of 30milli seconds at 5 times the rated current.
ix) Be provided with necessary terminals & links to measure current in restraining circuits & in the
operating circuits of all the phases under load without making any wiring changes.
x) Cover the lightning arrestors (proposed to be provided very close to the transformer) in the
zone of protection.
xi) The Scheme shall have in-built features of disturbance recorder and event logger.
For disturbance recorder and event logger features, it shall have 8 analog and 16 digital channels (out of
which at least 8 shall be external digital inputs). It shall have its own time generator and the clock of the
time generator shall be such that the drift is limited to +0.5 seconds/day, if allowed to run without
synchronization. Further, it shall have facility to synchronize its time generator from Time
Synchronization Equipment having output of following types.
Voltage signal: (0-5V continuously settable, with 50m Sec. minimum pulse duration)
Potential free contact (Minimum pulse duration of 50 m Sec.)
IRIG-B
RS232C
The recorder shall give alarm in case of absence of synchronizing pulse within specified time.
a) The disturbance recorder shall meet the following requirements:
The frequency response shall be 5 Hz on lower side and 250 Hz or better on upper side.
Scan rate shall be 1000 Hz/Channel or better.
Prefault time shall not be less than 100 milliseconds and the post fault time shall not be less than 2
seconds (adjustable). If another system disturbance occurs during one post-fault run time, the recorder
shall also be able to record the same. However, the total memory of acquisition unit shall not be less
than 5.0 seconds.
b) The event logger shall meet the following requirements:

The time resolution shall be 1milli second.
Cope with up to 40 changes in any one 10milli seconds interval.
The date and time should be printed to the nearest 1milli second followed by a message describing the
point which has operated.
Events occurring whilst a previous event is in process of being printed are to be stored to await printing.
Xii) Display resolution of differential/pickup current should be 0.01A (10mA).
B) NON DIRECTIONAL THREE OVER CURRENT+ ONE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION WITH HIGH
SET:
The 3 O/C & 1 E/F elements shall be either independent or composite units. The relay shall be single
pole inverse definite minimum time lag having definite min. time of 3 secs. at 10 times settings. Over
current relay with a setting range of 50%-200% of 1 Amp. supplemented with high set units having a
setting range of 500% to 2000% of 1 Amp. shall be provided. Earth fault relay with a setting range
of 20%-80% of 1 Amp. supplemented with high set units having a setting range of 200% to 800% of
1 Amp. shall be provided. The relay shall be numerical type.
C) RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION :
It shall be single pole type for the clearance of earth faults in the protected zone. The relay shall be
of high impedance type with a suitable setting to cover at least 90% of the winding & shall have a
setting range of 10% to 40% of 1 Amp. or suitable voltage setting. The relay shall be complete with
tuned 50 Hz circuit & stabilizing resistance. The tuned circuit will help reject harmonics produced by
CT saturation and thus make the relay operative for fundamental frequency only. The stabilizing
resistance may appropriately be set to avoid mal-operation under through fault conditions. The relay
shall be numerical type.
D) 8No. auxiliary relays for various transformer trip functions (Main Buch. Trip, OLTC Oil Temp.
Trip, Winding Temperature Trip, Oil Temp Trip, Pressure Relief Trip, Surge Relay Trip and two no.
spare) shall be provided.
E) OVER FLUXING PROTECTION:
An over fluxing detecting relay for the protection of the transformer against over-fluxing conditions is
proposed to be provided on each of the transformer C&R panels covered by this specification. The
relay shall be numerical in design with adjustable setting so as to avoid its operation on momentary
system disturbances. The relay shall be suitable for 110 Volts. The relay shall have inverse time
characteristics, matching with transformer over-fluxing withstand capability curve. The relay shall
provide an alarm with v/f setting range of 100% to 130% of rated values and time delay continuously
settable from 0.1 to 6 seconds to draw the operator's attention about the existence of over-fluxing
conditions. The tripping time shall be governed by v/f versus time characteristics to cause tripping of
transformer controlling circuit breaker if the over-fluxing conditions continue to exist.
Note:- The over fluxing relay in built with the numerical differential protection relay is acceptable
provided it meets the above specification.
F) OVER LOAD ALARM RELAY:

It is proposed to provide an over current (i.e. single phase) relay for initiating an alarm during
transformer overload condition on the T/F C&R panels. The relay shall have CONTINUOUS
VARIABLE setting range of 50-120% of 1Amp. and shall be supplemented by a continuously
variable timer of 1 to 10 seconds. The relay shall be arranged to sound an alarm when the
transformer exceeds the setting for a given period of time to draw the operator's attention.
Note:- The over load alarm relay in built with the numerical differential protection relay or Over
current & Earth Fault Protection Relay is acceptable provided it meets the above
specification.
5.15.2 PROTECTION SCHEME FOR LINES:

A) MAIN- I NON-SWITCHED DISTANCE PROTECTION [FOR 400kV & 220 kV LINES]:
The scheme shall:-
i) be numerical & modular in construction. Relay shall have continuous self monitoring & diag-
nostic feature.
ii) have high speed non-switched distance relays for three phase systems to clear all type of line
faults within the set reach of the relay.
iii) It should cover at least line sections completely with 20% in hand margin.
iv) Measure all type of faults without the need to switch the measuring elements to the faulty
phase or phases. Zone switching to extend the reach of the measuring elements is not al-
lowed. The reach of each zone shall be independently & individually adjustable and shall
have setting in steps of 1%. Memory circuits with defined characteristics shall be provided in
all three phases to ensure correct operation during close-up 3 phase faults and other adverse
conditions.
v) have a max. operating time up-to trip impulse to circuit breaker (complete protection time
including applicable carrier & trip relay time) under source to line impedance ratios (SIR)
under all possible combinations of fault with PT being used on the line (with all filters included)
at 50% of zone-1 reach :
for SIR 0.01-4:as 40 ms at nearest end & 60 ms at other end of line.
for SIR 4-15 :as 45 ms at nearest end & 65 ms at other end of line.
(carrier transmission time is taken as 20 ms provided that any reduction in carrier time shall be
directly reflected as reduction in maximum operating time).
vi) have stepped time-distance characteristics and shall have at least four independently variable
time graded distance protection zones to cover two adjacent line sections out of which Zone-1,
2 & 3 should be selectable in forward direction and Zone-4 should be selectable in reverse
direction.
vii) The relay shall have mho or quadrilateral or other suitably shaped characteristics for zone-1,
2, 3 & 4. The relay shall have an adjustable characteristics angle setting range of 30 - 85
degree or shall have independent resistance(R) & reactance(X) setting..

viii) ensure that this long coverage is consistent with limitations imposed by heavy loading and
sound phase component of fault current. If the characteristics of starting relays are such that it
cannot pick-up because of very low in-feed, under-voltage relays may also be used as
supplementary relays.
ix) have two independent continuously variable time setting range of 0-3 seconds for zone-2 and
0-5 seconds for zone-3 & 4.
x) have a maximum resetting time of less than 35milli-seconds.
xi) have facilities for offset features with adjustable 10-20% of Zone-3 setting.
xii) have residual compensation variable from 30-150%.
xiii) operate instantaneously when circuit breaker is closed to zero-volt 3 phase fault.
xiv) be suitable for single & three phase tripping.
xv) have a continuous current rating of two times of rated current. The voltage circuit shall be
capable of operation at 1.2 times rated voltage. The relay shall also be capable of carrying a
high short time current of 80 times rated current without damage for a period of 1 sec.
xvi) be selective between internal and external faults.
xvii) have adequate contacts to meet the complete scheme requirements & if required incorporate
three separate high speed self reset trip relays for single phase faults and a fourth high speed
trip relay for multi-phase faults.
xviii) have suitable number of potential free contacts. Multiplication relays, if required, shall be
provided for Carrier aided features, Auto reclosing, Event Logger, Disturbance recorder &
Data acquisition system.
xix) include power swing blocking protection which shall
a1) be of triple pole type
a2) have suitable setting range to encircle the distance protection described above.
a3) have a continuously adjustable time delay on pick up of setting range 0-2seconds.
a4) block tripping during power swing conditions.
a5) be of numerical type
xx) include fuse failure protection which shall
a1) monitor all the three fuses of PTs/CVTs and associated cable against open circuit.
a2) inhibit trip circuits on operation and initiate annunciation.
a3) remain inoperative for system earth faults.
a4) be of numerical type.
xxi) be wired for carrier inter-tripping (PUR/POR) & carrier blocking features selectable at
site.
xxii) be suitable for 1 Amp. rated CT secondary, 110V (phase to phase ) VT supply and 220 V DC
supply. Mode of conversation of DC supply from 220 V DC to the voltage level required for
their scheme may be mentioned in detail. Requirement of CTs & VTs for the satisfactory
working of the scheme may also be indicated in the tender.
xxiii) The relay shall be suitable for series compensated line and must have a current reversal
guard feature.
xxiv) The Scheme shall have in-built features of broken conductor detection, distance to fault
locator, disturbance recorder and event logger.
For disturbance recorder and event logger features, it shall have 8 analog and 32 digital channels (out of
which at least 16 shall be external digital inputs). It shall have its own time generator and the clock of
the time generator shall be such that the drift is limited to +0.5 seconds/day, if allowed to run without
synchronization. Further, it shall have facility to synchronize its time generator from Time
Synchronization Equipment having output of following types.
Voltage signal: (0-5V continuously settable, with 50m Sec. minimum pulse duration)
Potential free contact (Minimum pulse duration of 50 m Sec.)
IRIG-B
RS232C
The recorder shall give alarm in case of absence of synchronizing pulse within specified time.
a) The disturbance recorder shall meet the following requirements:
The frequency response shall be 5 Hz on lower side and 250 Hz or better on upper side.
Scan rate shall be 1000 Hz/Channel or better.
Prefault time shall not be less than 100 milliseconds and the post fault time shall not be less than 2
seconds (adjustable). If another system disturbance occurs during one post-fault run time, the recorder
shall also be able to record the same. However, the total memory of acquisition unit shall not be less
than 5.0 seconds.
b) The event logger shall meet the following requirements:
The time resolution shall be 1 milli second.
Cope with up to 40 changes in any one 10 milli seconds interval.
The date and time should be printed to the nearest 1 milli second followed by a message describing the
point which has operated.
Events occurring whilst a previous event is in process of being printed are to be stored to await printing.
Over 100 such events must be stored.
c) The distance to fault locator shall meet the following requirements:
Be On-Line type and suitable for breaker operating time of 2 cycles.
The display shall be directly in percent of line length or kilometers without requiring any further
calculations.
Shall have an accuracy of 3% or better for the typical conditions defined for operating timings
measurement of distance relays. The above accuracy should not be impaired by presence of remote end
infeed, predominant D.C. component in fault current, high fault arc resistance, severe CVT transients.
Shall have parallel line mutual zero sequence compensation feature.
B) MAIN -II NON-SWITCHED DISTANCE PROTECTION [FOR 400kV & 220 kV LINES] :
For Main-II distance protection, scheme shall be numerical and shall have same features as that of
Main-I protection against sub para 5.14.2 (A) above but with different measuring technique.
C) NON-SWITCHED DISTANCE PROTECTION SCHEME [FOR 132kV & 66kV LINES]:
The main protection scheme for these lines will be distance scheme working on definite distance
measuring principle both for phase & earth faults. The scheme shall:-
i) be numerical & modular in construction. Relay shall have continuous self monitoring & diag-
nostic feature.
ii) have high speed non-switched distance relays for three phase systems to clear all type of
line faults within the set reach of the relay.
iii) It should cover at least line sections completely with 20% in hand margin.
iv) measure all type of faults without the need to switch the measuring elements to the faulty
phase or phases. Zone switching to extend the reach of the measuring elements is not al-
lowed. The reach of each zone shall be independently & individually adjustable and shall
have setting in steps of 1%. Memory circuits with defined characteristics shall be provided in
all three phases to ensure correct operation during close-up 3 phase faults and other adverse
conditions.
v) have a max. operating time up-to trip impulse to circuit breaker (complete protection time
including trip relay time) under source to line impedance ratios (SIR) :0.01-4 as 50ms under all
possible combinations of fault at 50% of zone-1 reach.

vi) have stepped time-distance characteristics and shall have at least four independently variable
time graded distance protection zones to cover two adjacent line sections out of which Zone-1,
2 & 3 should be selectable in forward direction and Zone-4 should be selectable in reverse
direction.
vii) The relay shall have mho or quadrilateral or other suitably shaped characteristics for zone-1,
2, 3 & 4. The relay shall have an adjustable characteristics angle setting range of 30 - 85
degree or shall have independent resistance(R) & reactance(X) setting.
viii) ensure that this long coverage is consistent with limitations imposed by heavy loading and
sound phase component of fault current. If the characteristics of starting relays are such that it
cannot pick-up because of very low in-feed, under-voltage relays may also be used as
supplementary relays.
ix) have two independent continuously variable time setting range of 0-3 seconds for zone-2 and
0-5 seconds for zone-3 & 4.
x) have a maximum resetting time of less than 55milli-seconds (including the resetting time of trip
relays).
xi) have facilities for offset features with adjustable 10-20% of Zone-3 setting.
xii) For correct measurement of earth faults necessary equipment for residual compensation shall
be included. It shall have residual compensation variable from 30-150%.
xiii) operate instantaneously when circuit breaker is closed to zero-volt 3 phase fault.
xiv) be suitable for three phase tripping.
xv) have a continuous current rating of two times of rated current. The voltage circuit shall be
capable of operation at 1.2 times rated voltage. The relay shall also be capable of carrying a
high short time current of 80 times rated current without damage for a period of 1 sec.
xvi) have adequate contacts to meet the complete scheme requirements & if required incorporate
separate high speed self reset trip relays.
xvii) have suitable number of potential free contacts. Multiplication relays, if required, shall be
provided for Event Logger, Disturbance recorder & Data acquisition system.
xviii) include power swing blocking protection which shall
a1) be of triple pole type
a2) have suitable setting range to encircle the distance protection described above.
a3) have a continuously adjustable time delay on pick up of setting range 0-2seconds.
a4) block tripping during power swing conditions.
a5) be of numerical type
xix) include fuse failure protection which shall
a1) monitor all the three fuses of PTs/CVTs and associated cable against open circuit.
a2) inhibit trip circuits on operation and initiate annunciation.
a3) remain inoperative for system earth faults.
a4) be of numerical type.
xx) be suitable for 1 Amp. rated CT secondary, 110V (phase to phase ) VT supply and 220 V DC
supply. Mode of conversation of DC supply from 220 V DC to the voltage level required for
their scheme may be mentioned in detail. Requirement of CTs & VTs for the satisfactory
working of the scheme may also be indicated in the tender.
xxi) The Scheme shall have in-built features of broken conductor detection, distance to fault
locator, disturbance recorder and event logger.
D) THREE OVER CURRENT+ ONE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION:
The 3 O/C & 1 E/F elements shall be either independent or composite units. It shall include VT
fuse failure relays for alarm purposes.
DIRECTIONAL OVER CURRENT RELAY :

The relay shall
i) have IDMTL characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at 10 times setting.
ii) have a variable setting range of 50-200% of 1 Amp.
iii) have a characteristic angle of 45 degree lead.
iv) include operatio indicator.
v) be suitable for 110V VT secondary.
vi) be numerical type.
DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT RELAY:

The relay shall
i) be numerical type.
ii) have IDMTL characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at 10 times setting.
iii) have a variable setting range of 20-80% of 1 Amp.
iv) have a characteristic angle of 45 degree lag.
v) include operation indicator.
vi) be suitable for connection across open delta formed by 110/3 volt rated secondary of VT.
E) FEEDER OVER LOAD ALARM RELAY:
It is proposed to provide a single pole over current relay for the purpose of monitoring the load
flow on feeders to sound an alarm whenever load flow in the line exceeds the setting for a
given period of time to draw the operator's attention. The relay shall have CONTINUOUS
VARIABLE setting range of 50-200% of 1 Amp. and shall be supplemented by a continuously
variable timer of 1 to 10 seconds.
F) LINE OVERVOTAGE PROTECTION RELAY FOR 400KV :
The relay shall
(a) monitor all three phases
(b) have two independent stages and stage- 1 & II relay are acceptable as built in with line
distance relays Main I & II both .
(c) have an adjustable setting range of 100-170% of rated voltage with an adjustable time
delay range of 1 to 60 seconds for the first stage.
(d) have an adjustable setting range of 100-170% of rated voltage with a time delay of
100-200 mill seconds for the second stage.
(e) be tuned to power frequency
(f) provided with separate operation indicators (flag target) for each stage relays.
(g) have a drop-off to pick-up ratio greater than 95%.
(h) provide separate out-put contacts for each 'Phase' and stage for breaker trip relays, event
logger and other scheme requirements.
Note:- The Feeder over Load Alarm Relay in-built with numerical distance protection relay or
Over current & Earth Fault Protection Relay is acceptable provided it meets the above
specification.
5.15.3 PROTECTION SCHEME FOR BUS COUPLER:
NON DIRECTIONAL THREE OVER CURRENT + ONE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION WITH
HIGH SET:
The 3 O/C & 1 E/F elements shall be either independent or composite units. The relay shall be
single pole inverse definite minimum time lag having definite min. time of 3secs. at 10 times
settings. Over current relay with a setting range of 50%-200% of 1Amp. supplemented with
high set units having a setting range of 500% to 2000% of 1Amp. shall be provided. Earth
fault relay with a setting range of 20%-80% of 1Amp. supplemented with high set units having
a setting range of 200% to 800% of 1Amp. shall be provided. The relay shall be numerical
type.
5.15.4 BUS BAR PROTECTION SCHEME:
The duplicate/ redundant (1+1) busbar protection scheme shall be provided for each bus
system for 400kV having one & a half breaker scheme. One bus bar protection scheme shall
be provided for each main bus for 220kV having double bus arrangement. Bus bar protection
scheme shall:-
i. be of numerical, low impedance type and modular in construction. The scheme shall be
complete in all respects to cater the need of at-least 14 feeders/ bays.
ii. have maximum operating time up-to trip impulse to trip relay for all types of faults of 15milli
seconds at 5 times setting value.
iii. operate selectively for each bus bar.
iv. give hundred percent security up-to 40 kA fault level.
v. incorporate check feature.
vi. incorporate continuous supervision for CT secondaries against any possible open circuit and if
it occurs, shall tender the relevant zone of protection inoperative and initiate an alarm.
vii. not give false operation during normal load flow in bus bars.
viii. incorporate clear zone indication.
ix. be of phase segregated, triple pole type and provide independent zones of protection for each
bus.
x. include necessary auxiliary relays for each circuit as required for the scheme.
xi. shall be biased differential type and shall have operate and restraint characteristics.
xii. be transient free in operation.
xiii include continuous DC supply supervision for alarm and trip circuits separately and provide
separately non-trip alarm for B/B protection alarm circuit DC fail & B/B protection trip circuit DC
fail conditions.
xiv. shall include necessary multi-tap auxiliary CTs for each bay.
xv. include protection 'in/out' switch for each zone.
xvi. include necessary CT switching relays. Also provide indication to monitor Òperate' status of
the CT switching relays with a common push button and shall have CT selection incomplete
alarm with adequate time delay when proper CT switching has not taken place. CT switching
relay should have adequate contacts for selection of trip bus instead of direct isolator contact.
xvii. bus bar protection scheme should cover the blind zone on account of single CT on B/C
circuit.
xviii. Include high speed tripping relays for each bay.
xix The Scheme shall have in-built features of disturbance recorder and event logger. The
disturbance recorder should record the disturbance data bay-wise (all bays phase and neutral
current).
5.15.4.1 LOCAL BREAKER BACK UP PROTECTION SCHEME:
The relay shall be provided to take care of stuck breaker conditions. The local breaker back
up protection scheme will under such conditions, immediately after the operation of primary /
back up protection, transmit the tripping impulse to all the circuit breakers connected to that
bus zone of which the circuit breaker forms part. The scheme shall be supplemented with a
timer suitable for station DC supply and continuously adjustable setting of .05 to .5 sec. on
pick up.
The relay shall :
i) be triple pole type with a setting range of 20% -80% of rated current.
ii) have operating time of not more than 15 m-sec.
iii) have a resetting time of not more than 15 m-sec.
iv) be of numerical type.
v) have a continuous thermal with stand of two times rated current irrespective of setting.

Note:- The LBB protection scheme in built with numerical bus bar protection scheme is
acceptable provided it meets the above specification.
5.15.5 PROTECTION SCHEME FOR CAPACITOR C&R PANELS:

A) NON DIRECTIONAL THREE OVER CURRENT+ ONE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION WITH HIGH
SET:
The 3 O/C & 1 E/F elements shall be either independent or composite units. The relay shall be single
pole inverse definite minimum time lag having definite min. time of 3 secs. at 10 times settings. Over
current relay with a setting range of 50%-200% of 1 Amp. supplemented with high set units having a
setting range of 500% to 2000% of 1 Amp. shall be provided. Earth fault relay with a setting range
of 20%-80% of 1 Amp. supplemented with high set units having a setting range of 200% to 800% of
1 Amp. shall be provided. The relay shall be numerical type.
B) TIME DELAY RELAY:-
A time delay relay must be included with adjustable setting range of 0-5 minutes to provide a time lag
before which the bank shall not be again switched on (to avoid closing of the circuit breaker on a
trapped charge).
C) UNDER VOLTAGE PROTECTION :-
One inverse time under voltage relay having setting range of 50% to 90% of 110/3 volt (Phase-to-
neutral) shall be provided to disconnect the capacitor bank under low voltage conditions.
D) OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION :-

One inverse time over voltage relay suitable for operation with 110/3 volt AC supply (Phase to
neutral) with setting range of 100% to 130% shall be provided.
E) UNBALANCE PROTECTION :-
The unbalance protection shall be provided through current unbalance relay connected to the NCT in
neutral of capacitor bank connected in double star. Two such relays, one each for alarm & trip are
required. The setting of the relay shall be 10% to 40% of the CT secondary (i.e. 1A for 132 kV& 66kV
voltage levels and 5A for 33 kV voltage levels) followed by a time delay through a timer of 0.1 sec.
for transient free operation of the protection. The relays shall be numerical type.
The relay should not operate for healthy state spill current in neutral. Number of units of failure on
which alarm shall come and tripping is initiated, be clearly mentioned for proper setting of the relays.
Note:- The under voltage Relay and over voltage relay in-built with numerical unbalance protection
relay is acceptable provided it meets the above specification.
5.16 TRIPPING RELAY:

High speed tripping relay shall
i) be instantaneous ( operating time not to exceed 10 milli-seconds.)
ii) reset within 20 milli-seconds.
iii) Be 220 Volt DC operated.
iv) Have adequate contacts to meet the scheme requirement
v) Be provided with operation indicators for each element/coil.
5.17 RELAY SETTINGS :

The successful bidder will be responsible for calculating the relay setting of the protection schemes
included in the bid and obtain HVPN's M&P wing clearance before their adoption. Any data\
information in regard to the power system required by the supplier for this purpose shall be supplied
by HVPN.

5.18 TIME SYNCHRONISATION EQUIPMENT:
i) The Time synchronisation equipment shall receive the co-coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
transmitted through Geo Positioning Satellite System (GPS) and synchronize equipments to
the Indian Standard Time in a substation.
ii) Time synchronisation equipment shall include antenna, all special cables and processing
equipment etc.
iii) It shall be compatible for synchronisation of Event Loggers, Disturbance recorders and SCADA
at a substation through individual port or through Ethernet realized through optic fibre bus.
iv) The synchronisation equipment shall have 2 micro second accuracy. Equipment shall give real
time corresponding to IST (taking into consideration all factors like voltage & temperature
variations, propagation & processing delays etc).
v) Equipment shall meet the requirement of IEC 60255 for storage & operation.
vi) The system shall be able to track the satellites to ensure no interruption of Synchronisation
signal.
vii) The output signal from each port shall be programmable at site for either one hour, half hour,
minute or second pulse, as per requirement.
viii) The equipment offered shall have six (6) output ports. Various combinations of output ports
shall be selected by the customer, during detailed engineering, from the following:
Voltage signal : Normally 0-5V with 50milli Seconds minimum pulse duration. In case any
other voltage signal required, it shall be decided during detailed engineering.
Potential free contact (Minimum pulse duration of 50milli Seconds.)
IRIG-B
RS232C
ix) The equipment shall have a periodic time correction facility of one second periodicity.
x) Time synchronisation equipment shall be suitable to operate from 220V DC as available at
Substation.
xi) Equipment shall have real time digital display in hour, minute, second (24 hour mode) & have
a separate time display unit to be mounted on the top of control panels having display size of
approx. 100 mm height.
5.19. SMALL WIRING :

a) All wiring shall be of switch board type consisting of stranded /single annealed copper
conductor insulated with polyvinyl chloride insulation suitable for 650 volts service and in
accordance with IS : 694.
b) The wiring of the following circuits shall not be less than the size specified below:
CTs, PTs & CVTs circuits : 2.5 mm2
Control, alarm & supervision circuits etc. : 1.5 mm2
c) All wires will be continuous from one terminal to the other and also will have no tee - junction
en-route. The connections shall be securely made with the help of connecting lugs to ensure
non-oxidation of the bare copper conductor. At the terminal connections, washers shall be
interposed between stud type terminals and holding nuts. All holding nuts shall be secured by
locking nuts. The connection studs shall project at least 6 mm from the lock nut surface.
d) Bus wires shall be fully insulated and run separately. MCBs shall be provided to enable all the
circuits in a panel to be isolated from the bus wire. Wherever practicable, all circuits in which
the voltage exceeds 125 volts shall be kept physically separated from the remaining wiring.
The function of each circuit shall be marked on the associated terminal boards.
e) All wiring diagrams for the control and relay boards shall be drawn as viewed from the back of
the cubicle and shall be in accordance with IS:375 or equivalent IEC. Multi core cable tails
shall be so bound to its cable that each wire may be traced without difficulty.
f) All potential bus wiring, non-trip and trip alarm bus wiring, AC & DC control supply, panel
lighting bus wires and such other wiring which runs from panel to panel within a C&R panel
board shall be laid out in gutters and shall be suitably screened. In case of `simplex' type C&R
boards these common wires will run through bus wire holes.
5.20. TERMINAL BOARDS, TEST BLOCKS & SPARE CONTACTS:

a) Terminal block connectors built from cells of moulded dielectric and brass stud inserts shall be
provided for terminating the outgoing ends of the panel wiring and the corresponding tail ends
of control cables. Insulating barriers shall be provided between adjacent connections. The
height of the barriers and the spacing between terminals shall be such as to give adequate
protection while allowing easy access to terminals. Provision shall be made on each pillar for
holding 10% extra connectors.
b) The terminal blocks shall be suitable for 650 Volts service and for connection with both copper
and aluminum wires.
c) Terminal boards shall be mounted in such a manner as to afford easy access to terminations
and to enable ferrule numbers to be read without difficulty. Wire ends shall be so connected
at the terminals that no wire terminal gets marked due to succeeding connections. Terminal
board rows shall be adequately spaced and shall not be less than 100 mm apart so as to
permit convenient access to wires and terminations. Labels in the form of engraved plastic
plates shall be provided on the fixed portion of terminal boards. No live metal parts shall be
d) Switch board type back connected test block with contacts shall be provided with links or other
devices for shorting terminals of CT leads before interrupting the normal circuit for injection
from an external source or for inserting testing instruments in the circuit without causing open
circuit of the CT. The potential testing studs shall preferably be housed in narrow recesses of
the block, wherever required, shall be placed as close to the equipments as possible. Test
blocks shall be of flush mounting pattern and the number of test blocks being provided on each
control and relay panel shall be stated in the tender.
e) The purpose of all the relays (including the auxiliary relays) switches, lamps & push buttons
etc. is required to be indicated just below the respective equipment through engraving or
painting.
f) Spare contacts of relays are required to be brought on T.B's and shall be indicated on the
drawings.
5.21. BUS WIRES:
The VT, DC, AC, trip alarm , non-trip alarm & DC fail etc. inter panel bus wire terminals shall be
brought on Bus T.B's as well as on T.B's so that any panel specified herein can be used separately
at the Substation specified in this specification. The said bus wires for the panels specified in case of
existing substations shall be matched with the bus wires of the C&R panels already available at site,
the drawing for matching purposes for which shall be supplied to the successful bidder. The bus wire
terminals shall be indicated on the panel schematic drawings as well. The bus wire diagram shall
also be supplied alongwith the schematic drawings for each panel.
5.22. FERRULES :
Wire No. shall be indicated on panel schematic and wiring diagrams and accordingly engraved
ferrules with the same numbers and letters as indicated in the said diagrams shall be provided on the
terminal ends of all wires for easy identification of circuits for inspection and maintenance. Ferrules
shall be of strong & flexible insulating material with glossy finish to prevent adhesion. These shall be
engraved and marked clearly and shall not be affected by dampness. Ferrule numbering shall be in
accordance with IS: 375. The same ferrule number shall not be used on wires in different circuits on
a panel. At those points of interconnection between the wiring carried for equipments of different
suppliers where a change of number cannot be avoided double ferrules shall be provided on each
wire with the appropriate connection diagram of the equipment.
5.23. SPACE HEATERS:
Tubular space heaters suitable for connection to the single phase 220 Volts AC supply complete with
switches located at convenient positions shall be provided at the bottom of each control and relay
panel to prevent condensation of moisture. The watt loss per unit surface of heater shall be low
enough to keep surface temperature well below visible heat.
5.24. ILLUMINATION:
The C&R panel shall be provided with 220/240 Volts AC interior lighting. The lamp shall be free from
hand shadows. A door operated button switch shall be provided in each simplex panel. Each
simplex panel shall be provided with one no. illumination lamp with door switch.
5.25. POWER SOCKET :
Single phase 240 volt AC, 5-Pin, 5/15A power socket with power on/off switch shall be provided in
each simplex panel.
5.26. SAFETY EARTHING:
Earthing of current free metallic parts or metallic bodies of the equipment mounted on the switch
boards shall be done with bare copper conductor. Copper bus of size 25 mm x 6 mm extending
through entire length of a control and relay board shall be provided. The earthing conductor shall be
connected by Rose Courtney terminals and clamp junctions.
The neutral point of star connected secondary windings of instrument transformers and one corner of
the open delta connected LV side of potential transformer, if used shall be similarly earthed with the
main earth bar of the switch board earthing system. Multiple earthing of any instrument transformer
shall be avoided. An electrostatic discharge point shall be provided in each panel connected to earth
bus via 1 Mega Ohm resistor.
5.27. NAME PLATE:
An easily accessible engraved or painted panel name plate shall be provided inside each panel. It
must include G.A. drawing No., purchase order No., Contractor's reference No., name of S/Stn. as
per purchase order and name of circuit. In addition to this, an engraved plate indicating the purchase
order no. alongwith name of S/Stn. is required to be affixed on the panel at appropriate height so that
it is readable while standing in front of the panel. These are required to be indicated on the G.A.
drawings also. An engraved label indicating the purpose of all the relays & switches shall also be
provided.
5.28 PANEL DETAILS:
The mountings on various 400kV, 220 kV, 132kV, 66kV & 33kV C&R panels against various
Substations specified herein shall be as under. The bidders shall give the details of the various panel
mountings in the same serial as specified herein as under for the convenience of checking of the
same w.r.t. the provision in the specification. Any trip relay, auxiliary relay, timers, contact
multiplication relay, ICT, IVT & test block etc. required for the completeness of the scheme shall be
added by the Bidder as per scheme requirements and no cost addition on these accounts shall be
considered at a later date.
The following is the general criteria for the selection of the equipments to be provided in each
type of panel.

(A) LINE PROTECTION PANEL
Each Line Protection panel for transmission lines shall consist of following:
Sl. No. Description 400kV 220kV 132/66kV 33KV

1. Main-1 Numerical Distance protection 1 Set 1 Set 1 Set NIL
Scheme
2. Main-2 Numerical Distance protection 1 Set 1 Set NIL NIL
Scheme
3. Over Voltage Protection Scheme 1 Set NIL NIL NIL
4. Directional back up Over-current and 1 Set 1 Set 1 Set 1 Set with
E/F protection scheme (high set)
5. Overload alarm scheme 1 Set 1 Set 1 Set 1 Set
6. 3 phase Trip Relays NIL NIL 2 Nos. 1 No.
7. 1 Phase Trip Relays 6 Nos. 6 Nos. NIL NIL
6. Voltage selection scheme 1 Set 1 Set 1 Set 1 Set
8. Flag relays, carrier receive relays ,aux. Lot Lot Lot Lot
Relays, timers etc as per scheme
Requirements
9. Under Voltage relay for isolator/earth 2 Nos. 2 Nos. 2 Nos. 2 Nos.
Switch
(B) TRANSFORMER PROTECTION PANEL
Each protection panel for Transformer shall consist of the following:
Sl.No. Description HV side MV/LV side
1. Transformer Differential Protection scheme 1 Set Nil
2. Restricted Earth fault protection scheme 1 Set 1Set@
@ Not applicable for autotransformer
3. Non-Directional back up O/C and E/F scheme
with high set feature 1 set 1 set
4. Over Fluxing Protection scheme 1 Set. 1 Set $
$ applicable only for 400/220kV Transformer.
5. Overload alarm scheme 1 Set NIL
6. Three phase trip relays 2 nos. 2 nos.
7. Voltage selection scheme 1 set 1 set
8. Flag relays ,aux .relays, timers etc as per
scheme requirement including transformer
alarms and trip functions Lot Lot
(C) BREAKER RELAY PANEL for 400kV & 220kV Voltage Level
Each breaker relay panel shall consist of the following:
Sl.No. Description With A/R With out A/R
1. LBB Protection Scheme 1 set 1 set
2. DC supply Supervision scheme 1 set 1 set
3. Trip Circuit supervision relays 6 Nos. 6 Nos.
4. Autoreclose scheme with check
synchronising and dead line charging scheme 1 set NIL
5. Flag relays, aux relays, timers, trip
relays as per scheme requirements Lot Lot

(D) BREAKER RELAY PANEL for 132kV, 66kV and 33kV Voltage Levels
Each breaker relay panel shall consist of the following:
Sl.No. Description With out A/R
1. DC supply Supervision scheme 1 set
2. Trip Circuit supervision relays# 2 Nos.
# Trip supervision relays shall be 1No. for each 33KV Line and Capacitor Circuit breakers.
3. Flag relays, aux relays, timers, trip

relays as per scheme requirements Lot
4. Special Energy Meter(Main) as per Interutility 1 No.*
Metering System Specification No.
HPD/S-82/HPM-461/Vol-II/Prot (Jan-2013)
* applicable only for 33kV T/F I/C Panels
(E) BUS COUPLER PROTECTION PANEL
Each bus coupler Protection panel shall consist of following:
Sl. No. Description 220kV 132/66/33kV
1. Non-Directional Overcurrent and E/F
protection scheme with Highset 1Set 1 Set
2. 3 phase Trip Relays 2 Nos. 1 Nos.
3. Flag relays , aux.Relays timers etc
as per scheme Requirements Lot Lot
(F) BUS BAR PROTECTION PANEL

The bus bar Protection panel shall consist of following:
Sl. No. Description 400kV 220kV
1. Complete bus bar protection scheme as 1 Set 1 Set
Per clause 5.14.4 above
(G) CAPACITOR PROTECTION PANEL

Each capacitor Protection panel shall consist of following:
Sl. No. Description 33kV
1. Neutral Unbalance protection
Scheme 2 Set
2. Over Voltage Protection
Scheme 1 Set
3. Under Voltage Protection Scheme 1 Set
4. Non Directional Overcurrent and E/F
protection scheme with high set 1 Set
5. Time Delay relay 1 Set
6. 3 phase Trip Relays 1 Nos
7. Voltage selection scheme 1 set
8. Flag relays, aux.
Relays, timers etc as per scheme
Requirements Lot
9. Under Voltage relay for isolator/earth
Switch 2 Nos
Note:- 1) The CT secondary current is 5A for 11kV & 33kV in all panels.
2) O/C & E/F relay for 11kV T/F Panel has to be provided on LV side i.e. 11kV VCB Panel
as per latest VCB Panel specifications of HVPNL.
6.0 TESTS :
6.1 TYPE TESTS :
The equipment offered should be type tested. Type test report of similar equipment should not be
more than seven years old, reckoned from the date of bid opening, in respect of the following tests,
carried out in accordance with ISS-3231(1965)/equivalent IEC from Govt./ Govt. approved test
house & shall be submitted along with bid:
a) Insulation tests as per IEC 60255-5
b) High frequency disturbance test as per IEC 60255-22-1 (applicable for all type of numerical
relays).
c) Fast transient test as per IEC 1000-4, Level-III (not applicable for electromechanical relays)
d) Relay characteristics, performance and accuracy test as per IEC 60255.
e) Tests for thermal and mechanical requirements as per IEC 60255-6
f) Tests for rated burden as per IEC 60255-6
g) Contact performance test as per IEC 60255-0-20
h) Conformance tests as per IEC 61850
The above tests shall be supplied for distance protection, over current and earth fault protection,
restricted earth fault protection, Bus bar protection and transformer differential protection as per the
applicability of the relay alongwith bid.
The remaining type test reports of above relays & all the type test reports of remaining relays and
type test reports of meters shall be submitted by the successful bidder within three months of
placement of order. These type test reports will also be from Govt./ Govt. approved test house &
should not be more than seven years old, reckoned from the date of placement of order. The failure
to do so will be considered as a breach of contract.
6.2 ROUTINE TESTS:
6.2.1 All equipment shall be subject to routine tests according to the relevant standards / Quality
Assurance Program (QAP) and to such other tests as may be required to ensure that all equipment
is satisfactory and in accordance with this specification. The Purchaser reserves the right to witness
all the tests, unless dispensed with in writing by the Purchaser.
6.3.1 The Supplier shall give sufficient advance intimation (at least 15 days notice for Indian Supplier and
30 days notice for Foreign Supplier) to the Purchaser to enable him to depute his representative for
witnessing the tests. Following tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer's works after complete
assembly:-
i) Checking wiring of circuits and their continuity.
ii) One minute high voltage test.
iii) Insulation resistance of complete wiring, circuit by circuit with all equipment mounted on the
panel.
iv) Checking the operation of protection schemes.
7.0 DOCUMENTATION:
7.1 All drawings shall conform to international standards organization (ISO) À' series of drawing
sheet/Indian Standards Specification IS: 11065. All drawings shall be in ink and suitable for
microfilming. If drawings are computerized than all drawings shall be nicely printed. All dimensions
and data shall be in S.I.Units.
7.2 The successful Supplier shall submit four sets of G.A. and schematic drawings for Purchaser's
approval within two weeks of the date of placement of order.
The Purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the Supplier within
four weeks of the date of receipt of above drawings. The Supplier shall, if necessary, modify the
drawings and resubmit four copies of the modified drawings for Purchaser's approval within two
weeks from the date of Purchaser's comments. After receipt of Purchaser's approval, the Supplier
shall submit 10 prints of final drawings for each Item/Circuit and one good quality soft copy (CD) of
the following drawings and instruction manuals :-
i) Board-wise arrangement drawing (applicable for the panel board at a Substation having more
than one panel).
ii) G.A. drawing alongwith G.A. legend and foundation details.
iii) Schematic drawings alongwith legend & internal wiring details of main relays like transformer
differential relay, REF relay, and local breaker back up schemes, distance protection
scheme, bus-bar protection scheme, voltage selection scheme etc.
iv) Equipment-wise & wire-wise wiring diagrams.
Each set of drawings shall be bound separately. The final documents shall be supplied before
despatch of equipment.
7.3 The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with approved drawings and no
deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the Purchaser. All manufacturing &
fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to the approval of the drawings shall be at
the Supplier's risk.
7.4 The Supplier shall furnish specified no. of nicely printed and bound volumes of the instruction
manuals in English language, prior to the despatch of the equipment. The instruction manual shall
contain step by step instructions for all operational & maintenance requirements for all the protective
and aux. relays, switches, instruments etc. mounted on the panel and shall include the following
aspects.
i) Storage for prolonged duration.

ii) Unpacking.
iii) Erection.
iv) Handling at site.
v) Pre commissioning tests.
vi) Operating procedures.
vii) Maintenance procedure.
viii) Precautions to be taken during operation & maintenance work.
ix) Catalogue numbers of all the components liable to be replaced during the life of the panels.
x) Internal wiring diagrams of all the relays.
7.5 Ten (10) copies of instruction manuals for each Circuit/Item shall be supplied free of cost before
despatch of equipment. Each set of instruction manuals shall be bound separately. One master set
for all the Circuits/Items shall be supplied with in a week of placement of order to the Design
Directorate to facilitate the checking and approval of drawings.

7.6 Approval of drawings by Purchaser shall not relieve the Supplier of his responsibility and liability for
ensuring correctness & correct interpretation of the latest revision of applicable standards, rules &
codes of practices. The equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering,
design, workmanship and latest revisions of relevant standards at the time of ordering.
NOTE:- In case the equipment offered by the Supplier does not meet with the requirements of
technical specification, the offer of the firm shall not be considered.

ANNEXURE -A
GUARANTED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
CONTROL AND RELAY PANEL BOARDS FOR SUBSTATIONS
WITH SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM
I. PANELS.
1. Dimension of the C&R panels.
i) Depth
ii) Overall height
2. Dimension of supporting channel.
3. Thickness of the sheet steel proposed
for fabrication of panels.
II. SWITCH BOARD WIRING.

1. Insulation of wiring.
2. Material of wiring conductor.
3. Size of wiring conductor for:
i) C.T. Circuits.
ii) C.V.T./P.T. Circuits.
iii) D.C. supply circuits.
iv) A.C. Supply Circuit.
v) Other circuits.
4. Size of earthing bar for safety
earthing.
5. Type of terminals used in wiring the
panel.
III. CONTROL SWITCHES FOR CIRCUIT

BREAKER & ISOLATORS.
1. Make.
2. Type.
3. Type of handle provided.
4. Number of position .
5. Whether no. of Normally closed &
Normally open contacts sufficient
for seheme requirements?
(Yes / No).
6. Whether spring return to neutral or
stay-put type.
7. Type of lock provided.
8. Making capacity/breaking capacity at
220 Volt DC for both inductive &
non-inductive current.
9. Descriptive leaflet number submitted.
IV. OVER CURRENT & EARTH FAULT RELAY.

1. Make.
2. Type of relay.
3. Current coil rating.
4. Potential coil rating (applicable only
in case of directional relays).
5. Tap range.
6. Range of high set elements (wherever applicable).
7. VA burden.
a) Highest tap.
b) Lowest tap.
8. Time V/S current characteristics.
9. Trip contact rating.
10. Descriptive leaflet No. submitted.
V. AUXILIARY RELAYS.
1. Make.
2. Type.
3. Capacity of contacts:
i) Continuously.
ii) for 3 seconds.
4. Operating coil VA burden.
5. Voltage operated or current operated.
6. No. of Normally closed & Normally open
contacts sufficient for scheme
requirements (Yes / No).
7. Contacts hand or self reset type.
VI. TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL RELAY.

1. Make.
2. Type.
3. Minimum differential current at which
relay operations.
4. Range & steps of bias setting.
5. Operating time at twice the relay
setting.
6. VA burden of the relay.
VII. TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION RELAY.

1. Make.
2. Type
3. Rating
4. Minimum voltage for satisfactory
operation (% of rated voltage).
5. Monitoring of breaker trip coil in both
close & open position provided.
6. Safety resistors provided to limit
the current if the relay coil is
short-circuited.
contacts sufficient for seheme
VIII. RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT RELAY .

1. Make.
2. Type.
3. Tap range.
4. Timer setting range.
5. V A Burden.
6. Time/Current characteristics
7. Short time rating of relay.
IX. T/F OVER FLUXING RELAY.

1. Make
2. Type.
3. Rated Voltage (V,AC)
4. Rated DC Voltage.
5. Operating principle.
7. Contacts self/hand reset.
8. Burden.
9. Setting range.
i) V/F
ii) Time for alarm.
iii) Time for tripping.
10. Whether inverse time operating
characteristics provided.
11. Whether different time multiplier
settings provided.
12. Max. operating time of the relay at
i) 1.4 times the rated value of V/F.
ii) 1.25 times the rated value of V/F.
13. Reset time.
X. LOCAL BREAKER BACK UP RELAYS .

1. Make.
2. Type.
3. Setting range (% of rating)
a) Phase faults.
b) Ground faults.
4. Operating time (m sec.)
5. Reset time (m sec).
6. Burden.
7. Timer range.
8. Whether no. of Normally closed &
Normally open contacts sufficient
for seheme requirements? (Yes / No).
XI. OVER LOAD ALARM RELAY.

1. Make.
2. Type.
3. Rated Voltage.
4. Setting Ranges.
5. Operating time.
6. Setting range continuously variable.
XII. SELECTOR SWITCHES (AUTO-

RECLOSING IN/OUT, CARRIER
PROTECTION IN/OUT SWITCH,
TRIP TRANSFER SWITCH).
1. Make.
2. Type.
3. Type of handle.
4. No. of positions.
6. Making & breaking capacity of
contacts.
XIII. DISTANCE RELAYS.

1. Make.
2. Type of relay.
3. Type of distance measuring elements.
4. Details of starting units and their
switching sequence, if applicable.
5. Range of settings (in secondary ohms).
for Zone-I, Zone-2 & Zone-3.
6. Operating times:
i) First zone timing.
ii) Second zone time setting
adjustable between-------- secs
to ------- secs.
iii) Third zone time setting
adjustable between -------- secs
to ------- secs.
7, Contacts rating:
i) First Zone.
ii) Second Zone.
iii) Third Zone.
8. VA burden :
i) Current circuit of the scheme.
ii) Potential circuit of the scheme.
9 Is the VA burden at Sr.No.8 above is
continuous ? (yes/No)
10. Operating time versus ZS/ZL curves
of the distance scheme.
11. Descriptive leaflet no. submitted.
XIV. CHECK SYNCHRONIZING RELAY:

1. Make.
2. Type.
3. Rating ( V, ac )
4. Aux. Voltage ( V, dc )
5. Permissible voltage difference (%)
6. Permissible phase angle difference (degree)
7. Response time of relay (without timer)( m Sec )
XV. AUTO RECLOSING :

1. Make.
2. Type.
3. Multi shot or single shot.
4. Rating (V, dc)
5. Suitable for 1 & 3 phase.
6. Dead time setting range (Sec.)
7. Reclaim time setting range (sec.)
8. Four position selector switch provided.
9. Alarm contacts provided for Àuto-reclosed',
`Reclosure unsuccessful'.
XVI. BUS-BAR PROTECTION

1. Make.
2. Type.
3. Applicable standard.
4. Rated Voltage/Frequency.
5. Operating time (maximum).
6. Resetting time (maximum).
7. Does the offer meet the Yes/No
requirements of technical
specification?

ANNEXURE B
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF CTs, PTs, CVTs & NCTs.

COREWISE DETAILS OF 420 kV CTs
(2000-1000-500/1-1-1-1-1A)
NUMBER OF CORES 5
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Min. knee Max. CT Max.
No. ratio burden class Pt. Voltage sec. wdg. Excitation
(VA) Vk Resistance current at Vk
(ohms) (in mA)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 BUS DIFF 2000- - PS 2000/1000 10/5 30 on 2000/1
MAIN 1000 /1 Tap; 60 on
1000/1 Tap
2 BUS DIFF 2000- - PS 2000/1000 10/5 30 on 2000/1
CHECK 1000/1 Tap; 60 on
1000/1 Tap
3 METERING 2000- 10 0.2S - - -
1000- ISF<5 for
500/1 500/1A,
ISF<10 for
1000/1A,
ISF<20 for
2000/1A
4 TRANS. 2000- - PS 4000/2000/ 10/5/2.5 30 on 2000/1
BACKUP/ 1000- 1000 Tap;60 on
LINE PROTN. 500/1 1000/1 Tap;
120 on 500/1
Tap
5 TRANS. DIFF/ 2000- - PS 4000/2000/ 10/5/2.5 30 on 2000/1
LINE PROTN. 1000- 1000 Tap;60 on
500/1 1000/1 Tap;
120 on 500/1
Tap

COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV Transformer CTs
(450-300/0.577-1-1-1-1A)
NUMBER OF CORES - 5
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for Maximum I.S.F./
No. Ratio (A) burden class minimum knee-point Exciting A.L.F
0
resistance at 75 C at
300A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 DIFFERENTIAL 450-300/ - PS 40 (RCT+2) 30 @Vk/4 -
PROTECTION 0.577
2 REF PROTECTION 450-300/1 - PS 14 (RCT+2) 30 @Vk/2 -
3 OVER CURRENT 450-300/1 - PS 40 (RCT+4) 30 @Vk/2 -
PROTECTION / BUS
BAR PROTECTION
4 BUSBAR PROTECTION 450-300/1 - PS 40 (RCT+4) 30 @Vk/2 -
(FOR LOW IMPEDANCE
SCHEME)
5 METERING 450-300/1 10 0.2S - - <5

NOTE : 4th core for bus bar protection has been kept in view of general design being followed in HVPNL. In case
this CT is used on a sub station having high impedance bus bar protection scheme or no bus bar protection scheme
then this core shall be short-circuited at site.
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV LINE CUM BUS-COUPLER CTs
(1200-800-400/1-1-1-1-1 A)
NUMBER OF CORES 5
ore Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for minimum Maximum Instrument
o. Ratio (A) burden class knee point voltage At CT Exciting Security
(VA) as per Secondary resistance at Current factor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. MAINI 1200-800- - PS 80(RCT+9) 80 @ Vk -
DISTANCE 400/1
PROTECTION
2. MAINII 1200-800- - PS 80(RCT+9) 80 @ Vk -
DISTANCE 400/1
PROTECTION
3. BUS 1200-800- - PS 100(RCT+4) 30 @ Vk/2 -
DIFFERENTIAL 400/1
MAIN
4. BUS 1200-800- - PS 100(RCT+4) 30 @ Vk/2 -
DIFFERENTIAL 400/1
CHECK
5. METERING 1200-800- 10 0.2S - - ISF<5 for
400/1 ratio 400/1,
ISF<10 for
ratio 800/1,
ISF<20 for
ratio 1200/1
NOTE :
1. 5 cores of 245kV line CT have been kept in view of general design being followed in HVPNL.
2. In case this CT is used exclusively for bus bar protection purpose on a transformer circuit at sub
station having high impedance bus bar protection scheme then core no 1, 2 & 5 shall be short
circuited at site.
protection scheme then core no. 4 shall be short circuited at site and where there is no bus bar
protection scheme core no. 3 & 4 shall be short circuited at site.
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV LINE CTs
(2000-1000/1-1-1-1-1 A)
NUMBER OF CORES 5
ore Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for minimum Maximum Instrument
o. Ratio (A) burden class knee point voltage At CT Exciting Security
(VA) as per Secondary resistance at Current Factor/
IEC 185 750C at 1000A tap (Volt) (mA) A.L.F
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. MAINI 2000- - PS 1600 20-40 -
DISTANCE 1000/1
PROTECTION
2. MAINII 2000- - PS 1600 20-40 -
DISTANCE 1000/1
PROTECTION
3. BUS 2000- - PS 1600 20-40 -
DIFFERENTIAL 1000/1
MAIN
4. BUS 2000- - PS 1600 20-40 -
DIFFERENTIAL 1000/1
CHECK
5. METERING 2000- 10 0.2S - - ISF<5 for
1000/1 ratio 1000/1,
ISF<10 for
ratio 2000/1,
NOTE :
1. 5 cores of 245kV line CT have been kept in view of general design being followed in HVPNL.
2. In case this CT is used exclusively for bus bar protection purpose on a transformer circuit at sub
station having high impedance bus bar protection scheme then core no 1, 2 & 5 shall be short
circuited at site.
protection scheme then core no. 4 shall be short circuited at site and where there is no
bus bar protection scheme core no. 3 & 4 shall be short circuited at site.
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245 kV BUS COUPLER CTs FOR 400KV S/STNS.
(2400-1200/1-1-1-1A)
NUMBER OF CORES - 4

Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for Maximum ALF/ISF
No. Ratio (A) burden class minimum knee Exciting
resistance at 750C
at
2400Atap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. O/C & E/F 2400-1200/1 15 5P - - 10
PROTECTION
2. BUS 2400-1200/1 - PS 100(RCT+4) 30 @ Vk/2 -

DIFFERENTIAL
3. BUS 2400-1200/1 - PS 100(RCT+4) 30 @ Vk/2 -
DIFFERENTIAL
CHECK
4. METERING 2400-1200/1 10 1.0 - - ISF<5
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245 kV Transformer INCOMER CTs

(900-600-300/1-1-1-1-1A)
NUMBER OF CORES - 5
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for Maximum I.S.F./

No. Ratio (A) burden class minimum knee Exciting A.L.F
IEC 185 At CT (mA)
Secondary
resistance
at 750C at
900Atap
(Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 DIFFERENTIAL 900-600-300/1 - PS 40 (RCT+2) 30 @Vk/4 -
PROTECTION
2 OVER CURRENT & 900-600-300/1 15 5P - - 10
EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION
3 METERING 900-600-300/1 10 0.2S - - <5
MAIN DIFF.

CHECK DIFF.
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV NEUTRAL CTs
(450-300/1A)
NUMBER OF CORE - 1
Application Current Accuracy Formula for minimum Maximum Minimum

Ratio (A) class knee-point voltage at CT Exciting Insulation
as per Secondary resistance at Current Voltage
IEC 185 750C at 300Atap(Volt) (mA) (kV)
1 2 3 4 5 6
REF 450-300/1 PS 14(RCT+2) 30 @ VK/2 33
PROTECTION
COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER CT

(750-500/0.577-1-1-1A)
NUMBER OF CORES 4
Core Application Current Output Accurac Formula for minimum Maximum I.S.F./
No. Ratio (A) burden y Class knee-point voltage At Exciting A.L.F.
(VA) as per CT Secondary Current
IEC 185 resistance at (mA)
750C at 500Atap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. DIFFERENTIAL 750-500/ - PS 40 (RCT+2) 30 @ Vk/4 -
PROTECTION 0.577
2. REF 750-500/1 - PS 90 (RCT+2) 37.5 @ Vk/2 -
PROTECTION
3. OVER 750-500/1 15 5P - - ALF10
CURRENT AND
EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION
4. METERING 750-500/1 10 0.2S - - ISF<5
COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV TRANSFORMER CT

(250-150-100/0.577-1-1-1A)
No. OF CORES = 4
Core Application Current Output Accurac Formula for Maximum A.L.F.
No. Ratio (A) burden y class minimum knee- Exciting
(VA) as point voltage Current
per IEC At CT (mA)
185 Secondary
resistance at
750C at
100A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. DIFFERENTIAL 250-150- - PS 40 (RCT+1) 30 @ Vk/4 -
2. REF 250-150- - PS 20 (RCT+1) 30 @ Vk/2 -
PROTECTION 100/1
3. OVER 250-150- 15 5P - - 10
CURRENT 100/1
PROTECTION
4. METERING 250-150- 10 0.2S - - ISF<5
100/1
COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV LINE CT AND 145kV BUS COUPLER CT for 132kV S/STNS.
(600-300-150/1-1-1A)
No. OF CORES = 3
Core Application Current Output Accura Formula for Maximum A.L.F./
No. Ratio (A) burden cy class minimum knee- Exciting I.S.F.
resistance at
0
75 C at 300Atap
(Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 DISTANCE 600-300-150/1 - PS 120 (RCT+4.5) 80 @ VKP -
PROTECTION
2 OVER-CURRENT 600-300-150/1 15 5P - - ALF 10
& EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION
3 METERING 600-300-150/1 10 0.2S - - ISF<5 for
ratio 150/1,
ISF<10 for
ratio 300/1,
ISF<20 for
ratio 600/1
COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV NEUTRAL CT

(250-150-100/1A)
No. OF CORE= 1
Core Application Current Output Accurac Formula for Maximum Minimum
No. Ratio (A) burden y class minimum knee- Exciting Insulatio
(VA) as per point voltage Current n Voltage
IEC 185 At CT Secondary (mA) (kV)
resistance at
750C at
100A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 REF 250-150- - PS 20 (RCT+1) 30 @ VK/2 15
PROTECTION 100/1
COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV BUS COUPLER CT for 160MVA 220/132kV T/Fs.

(750-500/1-1A)
No. OF CORES = 2
Core Application Current Output Accuracy A.L.F./
No. Ratio (A) burden class as per I.S.F.
(VA) IEC 185
1 2 3 4 5 8
2 OVER-CURRENT & EARTH 750-500/1 15 5P ALF 10
FAULT PROTECTION
3 METERING 750-500/1 10 1.0 ISF<5

COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER CT
(1500-1000/0.577-1-1-1A)
NUMBER OF CORES - 4
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for Maximum A.L.F./

No. Ratio (A) burden class minimum knee- Exciting I.S.F.
resistance at
750C at
1000A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 DIFFERENTIA 1500-1000/0.577 - PS 40 (RCT+2) 30 @ VK/4 -
L
PROTECTION
2 REF 1500-1000/1 - PS 14 (RCT+2) 30 @ VK/2
PROTECTIO
N
3 OVER 1500-1000/1 15 5P - - ALF 10
CURRENT &
EARTH
FAULT
PROTECTIO
N
4 METERING 1500-1000/1 10 0.2S - - ISF <5
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV TRANSFORMER CT FOR 66/11kV T/Fs
(300-200-150/0.577-1-1)
No. OF CORES = 3

No. Ratio (A) burden class minimum knee- Exciting
resistance at
750C at 300A tap
(Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 DIFFERENTIAL 300-200- - PS 40(RCT+4) 30 @ VK/2 -
2 REF PROTECTION 300-200-150/1 - PS 40(RCT+4) 30 @ VK/2 -
3 OVER CURRENT 300-200-150/1 15 5P - - 10

PROTECTION
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV LINE CT AND 72.5kV BUS COUPLER CT for 66kV S/STNS.
(600-300-150/1-1-1A)
No. OF CORES = 3
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for min Maximum A.L.F./
No. Ratio (A) burden class knee point Exciting I.S.F.
(VA) as per voltage At CT Current
IEC 185 Secondary res. (mA)
at 750C at 600A
tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 DISTANCE 600-300-150/1 - PS 80(RCT+4) 40 @VK/2 -
PROTECTION
2 OVER 600-300-150/1 15 5P - - ALF 10
CURRENT &
EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION
3 METERING 600-300-150/1 10 0.2S - - ISF<5 for
ratio 150/1,
ISF<10 for
ratio 300/1,
ISF<20 for
ratio 600/1
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER NCT

(1500-1000/1A)
No. OF CORES= 1
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for min Maximum Minimum
No. Ratio (A) burden class knee point Exciting Insulation
(VA) as per voltage At CT Current Voltage
IEC 185 Secondary res. (mA) (kV)
at 750C at
1000A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 REF PROTECTION 1500-1000/1 - PS 14 30 @ VK/2 15
(RCT+2)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5 kV NEURAL CT FOR 66/11kV T/Fs

(300-200-150/1)
No. OF CORE = 1
No. Ratio (A) burden class as minimum knee exciting Insulation
(VA) per IEC point voltage at current voltage
185 CT secondary (mA) (kV)
resistance at 750 at
300A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. REF PROTECTION 300-200- - PS 20 (RCT+1) 30 @ Vk/2 15
150/1
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV BUS COUPLER CT for 160MVA 220/66kV T/Fs.

(1500-1000/1-1A)
No. OF CORES = 2
Core Application Current Output Accuracy A.L.F./

No. Ratio (A) burden class as per I.S.F.
(VA) IEC 185
1 2 3 4 5 8
2 OVER-CURRENT & EARTH 1500-1000/1 15 5P ALF 10
FAULT PROTECTION
3 METERING 1500-1000/1 10 1.0 ISF<5
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER CT FOR 40/50MVA

(1000-600-400/0.577-5-5-1)
No. OF CORES = 4
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for Maximum A.L.F./
No. Ratio (A) burden class as minimum knee Exciting I.S.F.
(VA) Per IEC point voltage At Current
185 CT Secondary (ma)
resistance at
750C at
400A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 DIFFERENTIAL 1000-600-400/0.577 PS 40 (RCT+1) 30@VK/4
PROTECTION
2 REF 1000-600-400/5 - PS 100(RCT+1) 75@VK/2
PROTECTION
3 OVER CURRENT 1000-600-400/5 15 5P - - 10
& EARTH
FAULT
PROTECTION
4 MAIN 1000-600-400/1 10 0.2S - - <5 for
METERING ratio
300/1
<10 for
ratio
400/1
<20 for
ratio
600/1

COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER CT FOR 220/33KV WITH 26.3KA STC
(2000-1000/0.577-5-5-1)
No. OF CORES = 4
No. Ratio (A) Burden class minimum knee- Exciting / ISF
resistance at 750C
at 2000A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 DIFFERENTIAL 2000-1000/ - PS 40 (RCT+1) 30@ V K/4 -
PROTECTION 0.577
2 REF. PROT. 2000-1000/ 5 - PS 100 (RCT+1) 75@ V K/2 -
3 OVER CURRENT 2000-1000/5 15 5P - - 10
& EARTH FAULT
PROT.
4 MAIN 2000-1000/1 10 0.2S - - For
METERING ratio
1000/1
ISF<5.
For
ratio
2000/1
ISF<10
.
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV LINE CUM CAPACITOR CT for 33kV LINE BAY AND FOR 20MVAR &
10MVAR CAPACITOR BANKS ON 220/33KV T/F & 40/50MVA 132/33kV T/F WITH 26.3KA STC
(400-300/5-1)
No. OF CORES = 2
Core Application Current Ratio Output Accuracy A.L.F.
No. (A) (VA) Burden Class as
per IEC
185
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
1. OVER CURRENT & EARTH 400-300/5 15 5P 10
FAULT PROTECTION
2. METERING 400-300/1 10 0.2S 75

COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER NCT FOR 40/50MVA 132/33kV T/F AND
OTHER RATINGS OF 132/33KV T/Fs WITH 26.3KA STC
(1000-600-400/5)
No. OF CORES = 1
No. Ratio (A) burden class as minimum knee Exciting Insulation
(VA) Per IEC point voltage Current Voltage
185 At CT (mA) (kV)
Secondary
resistance at
750C at
400A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 REF 1000-600-400/5 - PS 100 (RCT+1) 75@ VK/2 15
PROTECTION
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER NCT FOR 220/33KV T/F WITH 26.3KA STC
(2000-1000/5)
No. OF CORES = 1
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Formula for minimum Maximum Minimum
No. Ratio (A) Burden class knee-point voltage At Exciting Insulatio
(VA) as per CT Secondary Current n Voltage
IEC 185 resistance at 750C at (mA) (kV)
2000A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 REF 2000- - PS 100 (RCT+1) 75@ VK/2 15
PROTECTION 1000 /5
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV BUS COUPLER CT FOR 220/33KV WITH 26.3KA STC
(2000-1000/5A)
No. OF CORES = 1
Core Application Current Output Accuracy class as per IEC A.L.F.
No. Ratio (A) Burden 185
(VA)
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 OVER CURRENT 2000-1000/ 15 5P 10
& EARTH FAULT 5A
PROTECTION

COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV TRANSFORMER CT WITH 26.3KA STC
(100-50/5-5)
No. OF CORES = 2
No. Ratio (A) burden class as minimum knee Exciting Insulatio
(VA) Per IEC point voltage Current n Voltage
resistance at 750C
at
100A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 REF 100-50/5 - PS 100 (RCT+1) 75@ VK/2 -
PROTECTION
2 OVER 100-50/5 15 5P - - 10
CURRENT
PROTECTION
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV TRANSFORMER NCT WITH 26.3KA STC

(100-50/5)
No. OF CORE = 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 REF 100-50/5 PS 100 (RCT+1) 75@ VK/2 15
PROTECTIO
N
COREWISE DETAILS OF 12 kV NEUTRAL CT FOR 25/31.5 MVA T/F

(1800-900/5)
No. OF CORE = 1
No. Ratio (A) class as per knee point voltage at exciting Insulation
IEC 185 CT secondary current voltage
resistance at 750 at (mA) (kV)
1800A tap (Volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1. REF 1800-900/5 PS 95 (RCT+1) 75@ Vk/2 8.66
PROTECTION

COREWISE DETAILS OF 12kV NEUTRAL CT FOR 12.5/16 MVA & 16/20 MVA T/F
(1200-900/5)
No. OF CORE = 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 REF 1200-900/5 PS 95 (RCT+1) 75@ VK/2 8.66
PROTECTIO
N
COREWISE DETAILS OF 12kV NEUTRAL CT for 4MVA 33/11kV T/F
(300-150/5)
No. OF CORE = 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 REF 300-150/5 PS 95 (RCT+1) 75@ VK/2 8.66
PROTECTIO
N


No.
21.Rated Primary voltage 400/3kV
22.Type Single phase
23.No. of Secondaries 3
24.Rated voltage factor 1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
25.Capacitance (minimum) 8800 (+10%, -5%) pico farads

26.Rated voltage (volts) Secondary-I Secondary-II Secondary-III
110/3 110/3 110/3
27.Application Metering & Protection Metering
Protection
28.Accuracy 1/3P 3P 0.2
29.Output burden (VA) 100 50 50
30.Percentage voltage error & As per ISS/IEC
phase displacement
Note:- Each winding shall fulfill its respective specified accuracy requirement within its specified
output range whilst at the same time the other winding has an output of any value form zero to
100% of the output range specified for the other winding in line with clause 6.2.1 of IS 3156
(Part-2 & Part-3) 1992 or its equivalent IEC.


No.
110/3 110/3 110/3
Measurement
phase displacement

COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER (PT)

No.
110/3 110/3
Measurement
16. Accuracy 1/3P 3P
phase displacement

COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (CVT).

No.
11. Rated Primary voltage 1323kV
110/3 110/3 110/3
Measurement
phase displacement

COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER (PT).

No.
110/3 110/3 110/3
15. Application Protection & Protection METERING
Measurement
phase displacement

COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (CVT)S.

No.
110/3 110/3
17. Application Protection & Metering
Measurement
18. Accuracy 1/3P 0.2
phase displacement

COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER (PT).

No.
110/3 110/3
Measurement
16. Accuracy 1/3P 3P
phase displacement

COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER (PT) OF 2 CORES.

No
110/3 110/3
15. Application Main metering Metering & Protection
16. Accuracy 0.2 1/3P
18. Percentage voltage error As per ISS/IEC
specified accuracy
classes.

ANNEXURE-C
TRANSMISSION LINE DATA (TENTATIVE)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sr. Name of Circuit Line Conductor size
No. length Sq. inch ACSR
in KM. Copper equivalent
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* The line lengths and conductor size shall be supplied to successful Bidder.

ANNEXURE-D
SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS FROM THE SPECIFICATION
In the table the Bidder shall set out all deviations clause by clause from the specification of the equipment offered.
The bid shall be deemed to conform to Purchaser's specification in all respects unless specifically mentioned in this
table.
Sr.No. Clause No. Detailed deviations with justification.

------ ---------- --------------------------------------

ANNEXURE-E
LINE PARAMETERS (per UNIT)/100 MVA BASE/100 km
WITH CONDUCTOR SIZE & POWER CAPACITY
Volta No.of Conduct Resistan Reactanc Susceptan Resistanc Reactanc Line

ge Ckt. or ce R e X ce Y e R0 e X0 Capacity
size (MW )
(kV) (inch2)
220 D/C 0.40 0.0088 0.0443 0.2700 0.05109 0.21666 300
220 S/C 0.40 0.0176 0.0886 0.1350 0.05951 0.26180 150
132 D/C 0.20 0.0445 0.1167 0.0970 0.15648 0.64289 112
132 S/C 0.20 0.0890 0.2335 0.0485 0.19776 0.76814 56
66 D/C 0.15 0.2347 0.4637 0.0272 0.71210 2.70857 50
66 S/C 0.15 0.4695 0.9275 0.0136 0.93744 3.20761 25
Remarks:
1. Size of Earth wire for:-
220 kV = 7/3.15 mm
132 kV = 7/2.5 mm
66 kV = 7/2.5 mm
2. Resistance of conductor at 20 C.
3. Resistivity of Earth Assumed = 100.

ANNEXURE-F
DETAILS OF CARRIER EQUIPMENT
The carrier terminals available in carrier equipment for feeders are as under:-
CARRIER BOOST
CARRIER SEND
(MAIN-I) + VE
CARRIER SEND + VE
(MAIN-II)
- VE
DIRECT TRIP
(SEND) + VE
- VE
CARRIER HEALTHY
(MAIN-I)
CARRIER HEALTHY
(MAIN-II)
CARRIER SIGNAL
RECEIVE
(MAIN-I)
CARRIER SIGNAL
RECEIVE
(MAIN-II)
DIRECT TRIP
(RECEIVE)

SECTION -5
CHAPTER-4 (i)
FOR
SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM

CONTENTS
Clause No. TITLE Page No.

1.0 GERNERAL 3
2.0 SYSTEM DESIGN 3
3.0 BAY LEVEL FUNCTIONS 6 ANNEXUR
4.0 SYSTEM HARDWARE 14
5.0 SOFTWARE STRUCTURE 17
ES
6.0 TESTS 18
7.0 SYSTEM OPERATION 20
8.0 POWER SUPPLY 21
10.0 TRAINING, SUPPORT SERVICES, MAINTENANCE 22
AND SPARES
11.0 MAINTENANCE 24
12.0 GURANTEES REQUIRED 25
13.0 SPARES 25
14.0 LIST OF EQUIPMENTS 25
I SIGNAL LIST FOR BASIC MONITORING 26
REQUIRMENTS
II TYPICAL ARCHITECTURE DRAWING OF SAS 30

1.0 GENERAL:
The substation automation system shall be offered from a manufacturer who must have designed,
manufactured, tested, installed and commissioned substation automation system which must be in
satisfactory operation on 220kV system or higher for at least 2 (Two) years as on the date of bid
opening.
1.2 The Substation Automation System (SAS) shall be installed to control and monitor all the sub-station
equipment from remote control centre (RCC) as well as from local control centre.
The SAS shall contain the following main functional parts:
i) Bay control Intelligence Electronic Devices (IED s) for control and monitoring.
ii) Station Human Machine Interface (HMI)
iii) Redundant managed switched Ethernet Local Area Network communication infrastructure with
hot standby.
iv) Peripheral equipment like printers, display units, key boards, Mouse etc.
1.3 It shall enable local station control via a PC by means of human machine interface (HMI) and contro
software package, which shall contain an extensive range of supervisory control and data acquisition
(SCADA) functions.
1.4 It shall include communication gateways, intelligent electronic devices (IED) for bay control and inter IED
communication infrastructure. An architecture drawing for SAS is enclosed at Annexure-III.
1.5 The communication gateways shall facilitate the information flow with remote control centers. The bay
level intelligent electronic devices (IED) for protection and control shall provide the direct connection to
the switchgear without the need of interposing components and perform control, protection, and
monitoring functions.
2.0 SYSTEM DESIGN :
2.1 GENERAL SYSTEM DESIGN:

The Substation Automation System (SAS) shall be suitable for operation and monitoring of the complete
substation including future extensions as given in Section-Project.
The systems shall be of the state-of-the art suitable for operation under electrical environment present in
Extra high voltage substations, follow the latest engineering practice, and ensure long-term compatibility
requirements and continuity of equipment supply and the safety of the operating staff.
The offered SAS shall support remote control and monitoring from Remote Control centers via
gateways.
The system shall be designed such that personnel without any background knowledge in
Microprocessor-based technology are able to operate the system. The operator interface shall be
intuitive such that operating personnel shall be able to operate the system easily after having received
some basic training.
The system shall incorporate the control, monitoring and protection functions specified, self-monitoring,
signaling and testing facilities, measuring as well as memory functions, event recording and evaluation
of disturbance records.
Maintenance, modification or extension of components may not cause a shutdown of the whole
substation automation system. Self-monitoring of components, modules and communication shall be
incorporated to increase the availability and the reliability of the equipment and minimize maintenance.
Bidder shall offer the Bay level unit (a bay comprises of one circuit breaker and associated
disconnector, earth switches and instrument transformer), bay mimic along with relay and
protection panels and PLCC panels (described in other sections of technical specifications)

housed in air-conditioned Kiosks suitably located in switchyard and Station HMI in Control Room
building for overall optimization in respect of cabling and control room building.
2.2 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE:
The SAS shall be based on a decentralized architecture and on a concept of bay-oriented, distributed
intelligence.
Functions shall be decentralized, object-oriented and located as close as possible to the process.
The main process information of the station shall be stored in distributed databases. The typical SAS
architecture shall be structured in two levels, i.e. in a station and a bay level. At bay level, the IEDs shall
provide all bay level functions regarding control, monitoring and protection, inputs for status indication
and outputs for commands.
The IEDs should be directly connected to the switchgear without any need for interposition or
transducer.
Each bay control IED shall be independent from each other and its functioning shall not be affected by
any fault occurring in any of the other bay control units of the station.
The data exchange between the electronic devices on bay and station level shall take place via the
communication infrastructure. This shall be realized using fibre-optic cables, thereby guaranteeing
disturbance free communication. The fibre optic cables shall be run in G.I conduit pipes. Data exchange
is to be realized using IEC 61850 protocol with a redundant managed switched Ethernet communication
infrastructure.
The communication shall be made in 1+1 mode, excluding the links between individual bay IEDs to
switch, such that failure of one set of fibre shall not affect the normal operation of the SAS. However it
shall be alarmed in SAS. Each fibre optic cable shall have four (4) spare fibres.
At station level, the entire station shall be controlled and supervised from the station HMI. It shall also be
possible to control and monitor the bay from the bay level equipment at all times.
Clear control priorities shall prevent operation of a single switch at the same time from more than one of
the various control levels, i.e. RCC, station HMI, bay level or apparatus level. The priority shall always
be on the lowest enabled control level.
The station level contains the station-oriented functions, which cannot be realized at bay level, e.g.
alarm list or event list related to the entire substation, gateways for the communication with remote
control centers.
The GPS time synchronizing signal (as specified in the section relay & protection) for the
synchronization of the entire system shall be provided.
The SAS shall contain the functional parts as described in Para 1.2 above.
2.3 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS:

The high-voltage apparatus within the station shall be operated from different places:
i) Remote control
ii) Station HMI.
iii) Local Bay controller IED (in the bays)
Operation shall be possible by only one operator at a time. The operation shall depend on the conditions
of other functions, such as interlocking, synchrocheck, etc. (see description inBay level contro
functions).
2.3.1 SELECT-BEFORE-EXECUTE:
For security reasons the command is always to be given in two stages: selection of the object and
command for operation under all mode of operation except emergency operation. Final execution shall
take place only when selection and command are actuated.
2.3.2 COMMAND SUPERVISION:

BAY/STATION INTERLOCKING AND BLOCKING
Software Interlocking is to be provided to ensure that inadvertent incorrect operation of switchgear
causing damage and accidents in case of false operation does not take place.
In addition to software interlocking hardwired interlocking are to be provided for:
a) Bus Earth switch Interlocking
b) Transfer Bus interlocking (if applicable)
It shall be a simple layout, easy to test and simple to handle when upgrading the station with future bays.
For software interlocking the bidder shall describe the scenario while an IED of another bay is switched
off or fails.
A software interlock override function shall be provided which can be enabled to bypass the interlocking
function.
2.3.3 RUN TIME COMMAND CANCELLATION

Command execution timer (configurable) must be available for each control level connection. If the
control action is not completed within a specified time, the command should get cancelled.
2.3.4 SELF-SUPERVISION
Continuous self-supervision function with self-diagnostic feature shall be included.
2.3.5 USER CONFIGURATION

The monitoring, controlling and configuration of all input and output logical signals and binary inputs and
relay outputs for al built-in functions and signals shall be possible both locally and remotely.
It shall also be possible to interconnect and derive input and output signals, logic functions, using built-In
functions, complex voltage and currents, additional logics (AND-gates, OR gates and timers).
(Multi-activation of these additional functions should be possible).
The Functional requirement shall be divided into following levels:
a) Bay (a bay comprises of one circuit breaker and associated disconnector, earth switches and
instrument transformer) Level Functions.
b) System Level Functions.
3.1 BAY LEVEL FUNCTIONS:

In a decentralized architecture the functionality shall be as close to the process as possible. In this
respect, the following functions can be allocated at bay level:
a) Bay control functions including data collection functionality.
b) Bay protection functions
Separate IEDs shall be provided for bay control function and bay protection function.
3.1.1 BAY CONTROL FUNCTIONS:
3.1.1.1 OVERVIEW:
FUNCTIONS:
i) Control mode selection
ii) Select-before-execute principle
iii) Command supervision:
a) Interlocking and blocking
b) Double command
iv) Synchrocheck, voltage selection
v) Run Time Command cancellation
vi) Transformer tap changer control (for power transformer bays)
vii) Operation counters for circuit breakers and pumps
viii) Hydraulic pump/ Air compressor control and runtime supervision
ix) Operating pressure supervision
x) Display of interlocking and blocking
xi) Breaker position indication per phase
xii) Alarm annunciation
xiii) Measurement display
xiv) Local HMI (local guided, emergency mode)
xv) Interface to the station HMI.
xvi) Data storage for at least 200 events
xvii) Extension possibilities with additional I/O's inside the unit or via fibre-optic communication and
process bus.
3.1.1.2 CONTROL MODE SELECTION:

BAY:
As soon as the operator receives the operation access at bay level the operation is normally performed
via bay control IED. During normal operation bay control unit allows the safe operation of all switching
devices via the bay control IED.
EMERGENCY OPERATION:
It shall be possible to close or open the selected Circuit Breaker with ON or OFF push buttons even
during the outage of bay IED.
REMOTE MODE:
Control authority in this mode is given to a higher level (Remote Control Centre) and the installation can
be controlled only remotely. Control operation from lower levels shall not be possible in this operating
mode.
3.1.1.3 SYNCHRONISM AND ENERGIZING CHECK:
The synchronism and energizing check functions shall be bay-oriented and distributed to the bay contro
and/or protection devices. These features are:
a) Settable voltage, phase angle, and frequency difference.
b) Energizing for dead line - live bus, live line - dead bus or dead line dead bus with no
synchrocheck function.
c) Synchronizing between live line and live bus with synchrocheck function.
3.1.1.4 VOLTAGE SELECTION:

The voltages relevant for the Synchrocheck functions are dependent on the station topology, i.e. on the
positions of the circuit breakers and/or the isolators. The correct voltage for synchronizing and
energizing is derived from the auxiliary switches of the circuit breakers, the isolator, and earthing switch
and shall be selected automatically by the bay control and protection IEDs.
3.1.1.5 TRANSFORMER TAP CHANGER CONTROL:

Raise and lower operation of OLTC taps of transformer shall be facilitated through Bay controller IED.
3.1.2 BAY PROTECTION FUNCTIONS:

3.1.2.1 GENERAL:
The protection functions are independent of bay control function. The protection shall be provided by
separate protection IEDs (numerical relays) and other protection devices as per section Relay &
Protection. IEDs, shall be connected to the communication infrastructure for data sharing and meet the
real-time communication requirements for automatic functions. The data presentation and the
configuration of the various IEDs shall be compatible with the overall system communication and data
exchange requirements.

3.1.2.2 EVENT AND DISTURBANCE RECORDING FUNCTION:
Each IED should contain an event recorder capable of storing at least 200 time-tagged events. This shall
give alarm if 70% memory is full. The disturbance recorder function shall be as per detailed in the
technical specification of C&R Panels.
3.2 SYSTEM LEVEL FUNCTIONS:

3.2.1 STATUS SUPERVISION:
The position of each switchgear, e.g. circuit breaker, isolator, earthing switch, transformer tap changer
etc., shall be supervised continuously. Every detected change of position shall be immediately displayed
in the single-line diagram on the station HMI screen, recorded in the event list and a hard copy printout
shall be produced. Alarms shall be initiated in the case of spontaneous position changes.
The switchgear positions shall be indicated by two auxiliary switches, normally closed (NC) and normally
open (NO), which shall give ambivalent signals. An alarm shall be initiated if these position indications
are inconsistent or if the time required for operating mechanism to change position exceeds a predefined
limit.
The SAS shall also monitor the status of sub-station auxiliaries. The status and control of auxiliaries
shall be done through separate one or more IED and all alarm and analogue values shall be monitored
and recoded through this IED.
3.2.2 MEASUREMENTS:
Analogue inputs for voltage and current measurements shall be connected directly to the voltage
transformers (VT) and the current transformers (CT) without intermediate transducers. The values of
active power (W), reactive power (VAR), frequency (Hz), and the rms values for voltage (U) and current
(I) shall be calculated.
The measured values shall be displayed locally on the station HMI and in the control centre. The
abnormal values must be discarded.
The analogue values shall be updated every 2 seconds.
Threshold limit values shall be selectable for alarm indications.
Suitable no. of Transducers shall be provided to facilitate the flow of 4-20mA Analogue signals as per
AnnexureI from the bay level equipments (i.e circuit breaker, AC Kiosks, Transformers, etc.) to its
respective C&R Panel BCU and Station level equipments (i.e. ACDB, DCDB, Battery Chargers, L.T.
Transformer, Generator, etc.) to station auxiliary BCU, as per its respective approved drawings, for
remote control & supervision at Station HMIs thereof by the successful SCADA supplier.
3.2.3 EVENT AND ALARM HANDLING:

Events and alarms are generated either by the switchgear, by the control IEDs, or by the station leve
unit. They shall be recorded in an event list in the station HMI. Alarms shall be recorded in a separate
alarm list and appear on the screen. All, or a freely selectable group of events and alarms shall also be
printed out on an event printer.
The alarms and events shall be time-tagged with a time resolution of 1 ms.
3.2.4 STATION HMI:

3.2.4.1 SUBSTATION HMI OPERATION:
On the HMI the object has to be selected first. In case of a blocking or interlocking conditions are not
met, the selection shall not be possible and an appropriate alarm annunciation shall occur. If a selection
is valid the position indication will show the possible direction, and the appropriate control execution
button shall be pressed in order to close or open the corresponding object.
Control operation from other places (e.g. REMOTE) shall not be possible in this operating mode.
3.2.4.2 PRESENTATION AND DIALOGUES:

GENERAL:
The operator station HMI shall be a redundant with hot standby and shall provide basic functions for
supervision and control of the substation. The operator shall give commands to the switchgear on the
screen via mouse clicks or keyboard commands.
The HMI shall give the operator access to alarms and events displayed on the screen. Aside from these
lists on the screen, there shall be a printout of alarms or events in an event log.
An acoustic alarm shall indicate abnormalities, and all unacknowledged alarms shall be accessible from
any screen selected by the operator.
The following standard pictures shall be available from the HMI:
a) Single-line diagram showing the switchgear status and measured values
b) Control dialogues with interlocking and blocking details.
This control dialogue shall tell the operator whether the device operation is permitted or blocked.
a) Measurement dialogues
b) Alarm list, station / bay-oriented
c) Event list, station / bay-oriented
d) System status
3.2.4.3 HMI DESIGN PRINCIPLES:

Consistent design principles shall be adopted with the HMI concerning labels, colors, dialogues and
fonts. Non-valid selections shall be dimmed out.
The object status shall be indicated using different status colors for:
a) Selected object under command

b) Selected on the screen
c) Not updated, obsolete values, not in use or not sampled
d) Alarm or faulty state
e) Warning or blocked
f) Update blocked or manually updated
g) Control blocked
h) Normal state
3.2.4.4 PROCESS STATUS DISPLAYS AND COMMAND PROCEDURES:
The process status of the substation in terms of actual values of currents, voltages, frequency, active
and reactive powers as well as the positions of circuit breakers, isolators and transformer tap-changers
shall be displayed in the station single-line diagram.
In order to ensure a high degree of security against undesired operation, a "select-before-execute"

command procedure shall be provided. After the "selection" of a switch, the operator shall be able to
recognize the selected device on the screen, and all other switchgear shall be blocked. As
communication between control centre and device to be controlled is established, the operator shall be
prompted to confirm the control action and only then final execute command shall be accepted. After the
execution of the command the operated switching symbol shall flash until the switch has reached its
new position.
The operator shall be in a position to execute a command only, if the switch is not blocked and if no
interlocking condition is going to be violated. The interlocking statements shall be checked by the
interlocking scheme implemented at bay and station level.
After command execution the operator shall receive a confirmation that the new switching position has
been reached or an indication that the switching procedure was unsuccessful with the indication of the
reason for non-functioning.
3.2.4.5 SYSTEM SUPERVISION & DISPLAY:

The SAS system shall be comprehensively self-monitored such that faults are immediately indicated to
the operator, possibly before they develop into serious situations. Such faults are recorded as a faulty
status in a system supervision display. This display shall cover the status of the entire substation
including all switchgear, IEDs, communication infrastructure and remote communication links, and
printers at the station level, etc.
3.2.4.6 EVENT LIST:

The event list shall contain events that are important for the control and monitoring of the substation.
The event and associated time (with1 ms resolution) of its occurrence has to be displayed for each
event.
The operator shall be able to call up the chronological event list on the monitor at any time for the whole
substation or sections of it.
A printout of each display shall be possible on the hard copy printer.

The events shall be registered in a chronological event list in which the type of event and its time of
occurrence are specified. It shall be possible to store all events in the computer for at least one month.
The information shall be obtainable also from a printed event log.
The chronological event list shall contain:
a) Position changes of circuit breakers, isolators and earthing devices

b) Indication of protective relay operations
c) Fault signals from the switchgear
d) Indication when analogue measured values exceed upper and lower limits.
Suitable provision shall be made in the system to define two level of alarm on either side of the
value or which shall be user defined for each measurand.
i) Loss of communication.
Filters for selection of a certain type or group of events shall be available. The filters shall be designed to
enable viewing of events grouped per:
a) Date and time

b) Bay
c) Device
d) Function e.g. trips, protection operations etc.
e) Alarm class.
3.2.4.7 ALARM LIST:
Faults and errors occurring in the substation shall be listed in an alarm list and shall be immediately
transmitted to the control centre.
The alarm list shall substitute a conventional alarm tableau, and shall constitute an evaluation of al
station alarms. It shall contain unacknowledged alarms and persisting faults. The date and time of
occurrence shall be indicated.
The alarm list shall consist of a summary display of the present alarm situation.
Each alarm shall be reported on one line that contains:

a) The date and time of the alarm
b) The name of the alarming object
c) A descriptive text
d) The acknowledgement state.
Whenever an alarm condition occurs, the alarm condition must be shown on the alarm list and must be
displayed in a flashing state along with an audible alarm. After acknowledgement of the alarm, it should
appear in a steady (i.e. not flashing) state and the audible alarm shall stop. The alarm should disappear
only if the alarm condition has physically cleared and the operator has reset the alarm with a reset
command. The state of the alarms shall be shown in the alarm list (Unacknowledged and persistent,
Unacknowledged and cleared, Acknowledged and persistent).
Filters for selection of a certain type or group of alarms shall be available as for events.
3.2.4.8 OBJECT PICTURE:

When selecting an object such as a circuit breaker or isolator in the single-line diagram, the associated
bay picture shall be presented first. In the selected object picture, all attributes like
a) Type of blocking
b) Authority
c) Local / remote control
d) RSCC / SAS control
e) Errors
f) Etc.,
Shall be displayed.
3.2.4.9 CONTROL DIALOGUES:

The operator shall give commands to the system by means of mouse click located on the single-line
diagram. It shall also be possible to use the keyboard for command activation. Data entry is performed
with the keyboard. Dedicated control dialogues for controlling at least the following devices shall be
available:
a) Breaker and disconnector
b) Transformer tap-changer
3.2.5 USER-AUTHORITYV LEVELS:

It shall be possible to restrict activation of the process pictures of each object (bays, apparatus...) within
a certain user authorization group. Each user shall then be given access rights to each group of objects,
e.g.:
a) Display only
b) Normal operation (e.g. open/close of switchgear)
c) Restricted operation (e.g. by-passed interlocking)
d) System administrator
For maintenance and engineering purposes of the station HMI, the following authorization levels shall be
available:
(i) No engineering allowed
(ii) Engineering/configuration allowed
(iii) Entire system management allowed
The access rights shall be defined by passwords assigned during the log-in procedure. Only the system
administrator shall be able to add/remove users and change access rights.
3.2.6 REPORTS:
The reports shall provide time-related follow-ups of measured and calculated values.
The data displayed shall comprise:
A. Trend reports:
Day (mean, peak)
Month (mean, peak)
Semi-annual (mean, peak)
Year (mean, peak)
B. Historical reports of selected analogue Values:
Day (at 15 minutes interval)
Week
Month
Year
It shall be possible to select displayed values from the database in the process display on-line. Scrolling
between e.g. days shall be possible. Unsure values shall be indicated. It shall be possible to select the
time period for which the specific data are kept in the memory.
Following printouts shall be available from the printer and shall be printed on demand:
i. Daily voltage and frequency curves depicting time on X-axis and the appropriate parameters on the Y-
axis. The time duration of the curve is 24 hours.
ii. Weekly trend curves for real and derived analogue values.
iii. Printouts of the maximum and minimum values and frequency of occurrence and duration of maximum
and minimum values for each analogue parameter for each circuit in 24 hr period.
iv. Provision shall be made for logging information about breaker status like number of operation with date
and time indications.
v. Equipment operation details shift wise and during 24 hours.
vi. Printout on adjustable time period as well as on demand for MW, MVAR, Current, Voltage on each
feeder and transformer as well as Tap Positions, temperature and status of pumps and fans for
transformers.
vii. Printout on adjustable time period as well as on demand system frequency and average frequency.
viii. Reports in specified formats which shall be handed over to successful bidder.
3.2.7 Trend display (historical data)

It shall be possible to illustrate all types of process data as trends - input and output data, binary and
analogue data. The trends shall be displayed in graphical form as column or curve diagrams with a
maximum of 10 trends per screen. Adjustable time span and scaling ranges must be provided.
It shall be possible to change the type of value logging (direct, mean, sum, or difference) on-line in the
window. It shall also be possible to change the update intervals on-line in the picture as well as the
selection of threshold values for alarming purposes.

3.2.8 Automatic disturbance file transfer
All recorded data from the IEDs with integrated disturbance recorder as well as dedicated disturbance
recording systems shall be automatically uploaded (event triggered or once per day) to a dedicated
computer and be stored on the hard disc.
3.2.9 Disturbance analysis

The PC-based work station shall have necessary software to evaluate all the required information for
proper fault analysis.
3.2.10. IED Parameter Setting

It shall be possible to access al protection and control IEDs for reading the parameters (settings) from
the station HMI or from a dedicated monitoring computer. The setting of parameters or the activation of
parameter sets shall only be allowed after entering a password.
3.2.11 Automatic sequences
The available automatic sequences in the system should be listed and described, (e.g. sequences
related to the bus transfer). It must be possible to initiate pre-defined automatic sequences by the
operator and also define new automatic sequences.
3.3 Gateway
3.3.1 Communication Interface
The Substation Automation System shall have the capability to support simultaneous communications
with multiple independent remote master stations.
The Substation Automation System shall have communication ports as follows:-
(a) Two ports for Remote Control Centre
(b) Two ports for Regional System Coordination Centre (RSCC)
The communication interface to the SAS shall allow scanning and control of defined points within the
substation automation system independently for each control centre. The substation automation system
shall simultaneously respond to independent scans and commands from employer's control centres
(RCC & RSCC). The substation automation system shall support the use of a different communication
data exchange rate (bits per second), scanning cycle, and/or communication protocol to each remote
control centre. Also, each control centres data scan and control commands may be different for different
data points within the substation automation system's database.
3.3.2 Remote Control Centre Communication Interface

Employer will supply communication channels between the Substation Automation System and the
remote control centre. The communication channels provided by Employer will consist either of power
line carrier, microwave, optical fibre, VSAT or leased line, the details of which shall be provided during
detailed Engineering.
3.3.3 Interface Equipment:
The Contractor shall provide interface equipment for communicating between Substation Automation
system and Remote control centre and between Substation Automation system and Regional System
Coordination Centre (RSCC). However, the communication channels available for this purpose are
specified in section project.
In case of PLCC communication any modem supplied shall not require manual equalization and shal
include self-test features such as manual mark/space keying, analogue loop-back, and digital loop-back.
The modems shall provide for convenient adjustment of output level and receive sensitivity.
The modem (for both ends) should be standalone type complete in all respects including power
supply to interface the SAS with communication channel.
The configuration of tones and speed shall be programmable and maintained in non-volatile memory in
the modem. All necessary hardware and software shall also be in the scope of bidder except the
communication link along with communication equipment between substation control room and Remote
Control Centre.
3.3.4 Communication Protocol
The communication protocol for gateways to control centre must be open protocol and shall support both
the telecommunication protocols i.e. IEC 60870-5-101 (Serial) & IEC 60870 5 104 (TCP/IP) and IEC
61850 for all levels of communication for sub-station automation such as Bay to station HMI, gateways
to remote stations etc.
4.0 System Hardware:

4.1 Redundant Station HMI, HMI View Node, Remote HMI and Disturbance Recorder Work station:
The contractor shall provide redundant station HMI in hot standby mode.
It shall be capable to perform all functions for entire substation including future requirements as
indicated in the SLD. It shall use industrial grade components.
Processor and RAM shall be selected in such a manner that during normal operation not more than 30%
capacity of processing and memory are used. Supplier shall demonstrate these features.
The capacity of hard disk shall be selected such that the following requirement should occupy less than
50% of disk space:
1. Storage of al analogue data (at 15 Minutes interval) and digital data including alarm, event and trend
data for thirty (30) days,
2. Storage of all necessary software,
3. 20GB space for OWNER'S use.
Supplier shall demonstrate that the capacity of hard disk is sufficient to meet the above requirement.
4.1.1 HMI (Human Machine Interface)

The VDU shall show overview diagrams (Single Line Diagrams) and complete details of the switchgear
with a color display. Al event and alarm annunciation shall be selectable in the form of lists. Operation
shall be by a user friendly function keyboard and a cursor positioning device. The user interface shall be
based on WINDOWS concepts with graphics & facility for panning, scrolling, zooming, decluttering etc.
4.1.2 Visual Display Units/TFT's (Thin Film Technology)

The contractor shall provide three display units, one for station HMI, one for redundant HMI and one for
DR work station. These shall have high resolution and reflection protected picture screen. High stability
of the picture geometry shall be ensured. The screen shall be at least 21" diagonally in size and capable
of color graphic displays.
The display shall accommodate resolution of 1280 X 1024 pixels.

The HMI shall be able to switch the key board and cursor positioning device, as unit among all the
monitors at a consol vis push button or other controls.
4.1.3 Printer
It shall be robust & suitable for operation with a minimum of 132 characters per line. The printing
operation shall be quiet with a noise level of less than 45 dB suitable for location in the control room.
Printer shall accept and print all ASCII characters via master control computer unit interface.
The printer shall have in built testing facility. Failure of the printer shall be indicated in the Station HMI.
The printer shall have an off line mode selector switch to enable safe maintenance. The maintenance
should be simple with provisions for ease of change of print head, ribbon changing, paper insertion etc.
All printers mounted in the control room shall be provided with a separate printer enclosure each. The
enclosure shall be designed to permit full enclosure of the printers at a convenient level. Plexiglas
windows shall be used to provide visual inspection of the printers and ease of reading. The printer
enclosures shall be designed to protect the printers from accidental external contact & each should be
removable from hinges at the back and shall be provided with lock at the front.
All reports and graphics prints shall be printed on laser printer. One dot matrix printer shall be
exclusively used for hourly log printing.
All printers shall be continuously online.
4.1.4 Mass Storage Unit

The mass storage unit shall be built-in to the Station HMI. All operational measured values and
indications shall be stored in a mass-storage unit of CD-ROM / DVD-ROM with 700 MB or more
capacity. The unit should support at least Read (48X), Write (24X), and Re-Write (10X) operations, with
Multi-Session capability. It should support ISO9660, Rockridge and Joliet File systems. It should support
formatting and use under the operating system provided for Station HMI. The monthly back up of data
shall be taken on disc. The facility of back up of data shall be inherent in the software.
4.1.5 Switched Ethernet Communication Infrastructure:

The bidder shall provide the redundant switched optical Ethernet communication infrastructure for SAS.
The bidder shall keep provision of 100% spare capacity for employer use. One switch shall be provided
to connect all IEDs for two adjacent bays of 220kV, 66kV & four adjacent 33kV bays of 33kV yards to
communication infrastructure.
4.2 Bay Level Unit

The bay unit shall use industrial grade components. The bay level unit, based on microprocessor
technology, shall use numerical techniques for the calculation and evaluation of externally input
analogue signals. They shall incorporate select-before-operate control principles as safety measures for
operation via the HMI. They shall perform all bay related functions, such as control commands, bay
interlocking, data acquisition, data storage, event recording and shall provide inputs for status indication
and outputs for commands. They shall be directly connected to the switchgear. The bay unit shall
acquire and process all data for the bay (Equipment status, fault indications, measured values, alarms
etc.) and transmit these to the other devices in sub-station automation system. In addition, this shall
receive the operation commands from station HMI and control centre. The bay unit shall have the
capability to store all the data for at least 24 hours.
One no. Bay level unit shall be provided for supervision and control of each 220kV, 66kV and 33kV bay
(a bay comprises of one circuit breaker and associated disconnector, earth switches and instrument
transformer). The Bay level unit shall be equipped with analogue and binary inputs/outputs for handling
the control, status monitoring and analogue measurement functions. All bay level interlocks are to be
incorporated in the Bay level unit so as to permit control from the Bay level unit/ local bay mimic panel,
with all bay interlocks in place, during maintenance and commissioning or in case of contingencies when
the Station HMI is out of service.
The Bay level unit shall meet the requirements for withstanding electromagnetic interference according
to relevant parts of IEC 61850. Failure of any single component within the equipment shall neither cause
unwanted operation nor lead to a complete system breakdown.
4.2.1 Input/Output (I/O) modules
The I/O modules shall form a part of the bay level unit and shall provide coupling to the substation
equipment. The I/O modules shall acquire all switchgear information (i.e. data coming directly from the
switchgear or from switchgear interlocking devices) and transmit commands for operation of the
switchgear. The measured values of voltage and current shall be from the secondaries of instrument

transformers. The digital inputs shall be acquired by exception with 1 ms resolution. Contact bouncing in
digital inputs shall not be assumed as change of state.
4.3 Air-conditioned kiosk
The Air-conditioned Kiosk offered shall house Bay level units, bay mimic, relay and protection panels,
PLCC panels etc. for two adjacent bays in 220kV & 66kV Level and for four adjacent bays in 33kV
level of 220/33kV T/F starting from Bay No.1 as per GELO drg. In case of incomplete diameter the
kiosk shall have necessary space for accommodating the future bay IEDs. The layout of
equipment/panel shall be subject to Owners approval. The Kiosk shall be provided with fire alarm
system with at least two detectors and it shall be wired to SAS. The detailed requirement of Kiosk is
enclosed as Annexure-II. The air conditioner provided in Kiosk shall be controlled and monitored from
substation automation system. One additional Kiosk for each voltage level, if required, shall be
provided for housing bus bar protection panels at suitable location in switchyard.
4.4 Extendibility in future
Offered substation automation system shall be suitable for extension in future for additional bays. During
such requirement, all the drawings and configurations, alarm/event list etc. displayed shall be designed
in such a manner that its extension shall be easily performed by the employer. During such event,
normal operation of the existing substation shall be unaffected and system shall not require a shutdown.
The contractor shall provide all necessary software tools along with source codes to perform addition of
bays in future and complete integration with SAS by the user. These software tools shall be able to
configure IED, add additional analogue variable, alarm list, event list, modify interlocking logics etc. for
additional bays/equipment which shall be added in future.
5.0 Software structure
The software package shall be structured according to the SAS architecture and strictly divided in
various levels. Necessary firewall shall be provided at suitable points in software to protect the system.
An extension of the station shall be possible with lowest possible efforts. Maintenance, modification or
an extension of components of any feeder may not force a shut-down of the parts of the system which
are not affected by the system adaptation.
5.1.1 Station level software

5.1.1.1 Human-machine interface (HMI)
The base HMI software package for the operator station shall include the main SAS functions and it shal
be independent of project specific hardware version and operating system. It shall further include tools
for picture editing, engineering and system configuration. The system shall be easy to use, to maintain,
and to adapt according to specific user requirements. Systems shall contain a library with standard
functions and applications.
5.1.2 Bay level software
5.1.1.1 System software

The system software shall be structured in various levels. This software shall be placed in a non-volatile
memory. The lowest level shall assure system performance and contain basic functions, which shall not
be accessible by the application and maintenance engineer for modifications. The system shall support
the generation of typical control macros and a process database for user specific data storage. In case
of restoration of links after failure, the software along with hardware shall be capable of automatically
synchronizing with the remaining system without any manual interface. This shall be demonstrated by
contractor during integrated system test.
5.1.1.2 Application software
In order to ensure robust quality and reliable software functions, the main part of the application software
shall consist of standard software modules built as functional block elements. The functional blocks shall
be documented and thoroughly tested. They form part of a library. The application software within the
control/protection devices shall be programmed in a functional block language.

5.1.1.3 Network Management System:
The contractor shall provide network management system software for following management functions:
a. Configuration Management
b. Fault Management
c. Performance Monitoring
This system shall be used for management of communication devices and other IEDs in the system.
This NMS can be loaded in DR work-station and shall be easy to use, user friendly and menu based.
The NMS shall monitor all the devices in the SAS and report if there is any fault in the monitored
devices. The NMS shall
(a) Maintain performance, resource usage, and error statistics for all managed links and devices and
present this information via displays, periodic reports and on demand reports.
(b) Maintain a graphical display of SAS connectivity and device status.
(c) Issue alarms when error conditions occurs
(d) Provide facility to add and delete addresses and links
5.1.1.4 The contractor shall provide each software in two copies in CD to load into the system in case
of any problem related with Hardware/Communication etc.
6.0 TESTS
The substation automation system offered by the bidder shall be subjected to following tests to establish
compliance with IEC 61850 for EHV sub-station equipment installed in sheltered area in the outdoor
switchyard and specified ambient conditions:
6.1 Type Tests:

6.1.1 Control IEDs and Communication Equipment:
a. Power Input:
i. Auxiliary Voltage
ii. Current Circuits
iii. Voltage Circuits
iv. Indications
b. Accuracy Tests:
i. Operational Measured Values
ii. Currents
iii. Voltages
iv. Time resolution
c. Insulation Tests:
i. Dielectric Tests
ii. Impulse Voltage withstand Test
d. Influencing Quantities
i. Limits of operation
ii. Permissible ripples
iii. Interruption of input voltage
e. Electromagnetic Compatibility Test:

i. 1 MHZ. burst disturbance test
ii. Electrostatic Discharge Test
iii. Radiated Electromagnetic Field Disturbance Test
iv. Electrical Fast transient Disturbance Test
v. Conducted Disturbances Tests induced by Radio Frequency Field
vi. Magnetic Field Test
vii. Emission (Radio interference level) Test.
viii. Conducted Interference Test

f. Function Tests:
i. Indication
ii. Commands
iii. Measured value Acquisition
iv. Display Indications
g. Environmental tests:
i. Cold Temperature
ii. Dry Heat
iii. Wet heat
iv. Humidity (Damp heat Cycle)
v. Vibration
vi. Bump
vii. Shock
6.2 Factory Acceptance Tests:
The supplier shall submit a test specification for factory acceptance test (FAT) and commissioning tests
of the station automation system for approval. For the individual bay level IEDs applicable type test
certificates shall be submitted.
The manufacturing phase of the SAS shall be concluded by the factory acceptance test (FAT). The
purpose is to ensure that the Contractor has interpreted the specified requirements correctly and that the
FAT includes checking to the degree required by the user.
The general philosophy shall be to deliver a system to site only after it has been thoroughly tested and
its specified performance has been verified, as far as site conditions can be simulated in a test lab. If the
FAT comprises only a certain portion of the system for practical reason, it has to be assured that this test
configuration contains at least one unit of each and every type of equipment incorporated in the
delivered system.
If the complete system consists of parts from various suppliers or some parts are already installed on
site, the FAT shall be limited to sub-system tests. In such a case, the complete system test shall be
performed on site together with the site acceptance test (SAT).
6.3 Integrated Testing;

The integrated system tests shall be performed as detailed in subsequent clauses as per following
configuration:
(i) Redundant Station HMI, DR work station, two switches (i.e. for two diameters) along with all IEDs
for the Dia and printers.
All other switches for complete sub-station as detailed in section project shall be simulated as needed.
6.3.1 Hardware Integration Tests:
The hardware integration test shall be performed on the specified systems to be used for Factory tests
when the hardware has been installed in the factory. The operation of each item shall be verified as an
integral part of system. Applicable hardware diagnostics shall be used to verify that each hardware
component is completely operational and assembled into a configuration capable of supporting software
integration and factory testing of the system. The equipment expansion capability shall also be verified
during the hardware integration tests.
6.3.2 Integrated System Tests:
Integrated system tests shall verify the stability of the hardware and the software. During the tests all
functions shall run concurrently and all equipment shall operate a continuous 100 Hours period. The

integrated system test shall ensure the SAS is free of improper interactions between software and
hardware while the system is operating as a whole.
6.4 Field Tests:
The field tests shall completely verify all the features of SAS hardware and software.
7.0 SYSTEM OPERATION

7.1 Substation Operation
7.1.1 NORMALOPERATION
Operation of the system by the operator from the remote RCC or at the substation shall take place via
industry standard HMI (Human Machine interface) subsystem consisting of graphic color VDU, a
standard keyboard and a cursor positioning device (mouse).
The colored screen shall be divided into 3 fields:
i) Message field with display of present time and date
ii) Display field for single line diagrams
iii) Navigation bar with alarm/condition indication
For display of alarm annunciation, lists of events etc a separate HMI View node shall be provided.
All operations shall be performed with mouse and/or a minimum number of function keys and cursor
keys. The function keys shall have different meanings depending on the operation. The operator shall
see the relevant meanings as function tests displayed in the command field (i.e. operator prompting).
For control actions, the switchgear (i.e. circuit breaker etc.) requested shall be selectable on the display
by means of the cursor keys. The switching element selected shall then appear on the background that
shall be flashing in a different color.
The operator prompting shall distinguish between:-

- Prompting of indications e.g. fault indications in the switchgear, and
- prompting of operational sequences e.g. execution of switching operations
The summary information displayed in the message field shall give a rapid display of alarm/message of
the system in which a fault has occurred and alarm annunciation lists in which the fault is described
more fully.
Each operational sequence shall be divided into single operation steps which are initiated by means of
the function keys/WINDOW command by mouse. Operator prompting shall be designed in such a
manner that only the permissible keys are available in the command field related to the specific
operation step. Only those switching elements shall be accessed for which control actions are possible.
If the operation step is rejected by the system, the operator prompting shall be supported by additional
comments in the message field. The operation status shall be reset to the corresponding preceding step
in the operation sequence by pressing one of the function keys. All operations shall be verified. Incorrect
operations shall be indicated by comments in the message field and must not be executed.
The offer shall include a comprehensive description of the system.
The above operation shall also be possible via WINDOWS based system by mouse.
8.0 POWER SUPPLY
Power for the substation automation system shall be derived from substation 220V DC system. Inverter
of suitable capacity shall be provided for station HMI and its peripheral devices e.g. printer etc. In the
event of Power failure, necessary safeguard software shall be built for proper shutdown and restart.
9.0 DOCUMENTATION
The following documents shall be submitted for employers approval during detailed engineering:
(a) System Architecture Drawing
(b) Hardware Specification
(c) Sizing Calculations of various components
(d) Response Time Calculation
(e) Functional Design Document
The following documentation to be provided for the system in the course of the project shall be
consistent, CAD supported, and of similar look/feel. All CAD drawings to be provide in dxf format.
List of Drawings
Substation automation system architecture
Block Diagram
Guaranteed technical parameters, Functional Design Specification and Guaranteed
availability and reliability
Calculation for power supply dimensioning
I/O Signal lists
Schematic diagrams
List of Apparatus
List of Labels
Logic Diagram (hardware & software)
Panel Room Layout drawing
Control Room Lay-out
Test Specification for Factory Acceptance Test (FAT)
Product Manuals
Assembly Drawing
Operators Manual
Complete documentation of implemented protocols between various elements
Listing of software and loadable in CD ROM
Other documents as may be required during detailed engineering.
Four sets of hard copy and Four sets of CD ROM containing all the as built documents/drawings shall be
provided.
10.0 TRAINING, SUPPORT SERVICES, MAINTENANCE AND SPARES
10.1 Training
Contractor personnel who are experienced instructors and who speak understandable English shall
conduct training. The contractor shall arrange on its own cost al hardware training platform required for
successful training and understanding in India. The Contractor shall provide all necessary training
material. Each trainee shall receive individual copies of al technical manuals and al other documents
used for training. These materials shall be sent to Employer at least two months before the scheduled
commencement of the particular training course. Class materials, including the documents sent before
the training courses as well as class handouts, shall become the property of Employer. Employer
reserves the right to copy such materials, but for in-house training and use only. Hands-on training shal
utilize equipment identical to that being supplied to Employer.
For all training courses, the travel (e.g., airfare) and per-diem expenses will be borne by the participants.
The Contractor shall quote training prices individually for each of the courses as indicated in BPS.
Employer will have the option to cancel any or all-training courses. In the case of cancellation, the rate
quoted against the respective course will not be paid to the Contractor.

The schedule, location, and detailed contents of each course will be finalized during Employer and
Contractor discussions.
10.2 Computer System Hardware Course

A computer system hardware course shall be offered, but at the system level only. The training course
shall be designed to give Employer hardware personnel sufficient knowledge of the overall design and
operation of the system so that they can correct obvious problems, configure the hardware, perform
preventive maintenance, run diagnostic programs and communicate with contract maintenance
personnel. The following subjects shall be covered:
a) System Hardware Overview: Configuration of the system hardware.

b) Equipment Maintenance: Basic theory of operation, maintenance techniques and diagnostic
procedures for each element of the computer system, e.g., processors, auxiliary memories, LANs,
routers and printers. Configuration of all the hardware equipments.
(c) System Expansion: Techniques and procedures to expand and add equipment such as loggers,
monitors, and communication channels.
(d) System Maintenance: Theory of operation and maintenance of the redundant hardware configuration,
failover hardware, configuration control panels and failover switches. Maintenance of protective
devices and power supplies.
(e) Subsystem Maintenance: Theory of design and operation, maintenance techniques and practices,
diagnostic procedures, and (where applicable) expansion techniques and procedures. Classes shall
include hands-on training for the specific subsystems that are part of Employer's equipment or part of
similarly designed and configured subsystems. All interfaces to the computing equipment shall be taught
in detail.
(f) Operational Training: Practical training on preventive and corrective maintenance of all equipment,
including use of special tools and instruments. This training shall be provided on Employer equipment, or
on similarly configured systems.
10.3 Computer System Software Course

The Contractor shall provide a computer system software course that covers the following subjects:
(a) System Programming: Including all applicable programming languages and all stand-alone service
and utility packages provided with the system. An introduction to software architecture, Effect of tuning
parameters (OS software, Network software, database software etc.) on the performance of the system.
(b) Operating System: Including the user aspects of the operating system, such as program loading and
integrating procedures; scheduling, management, service, and utility functions; and system expansion
techniques and procedures.
(c) System Initialization and Failover: Including design, theory of operation, and practice.
(d) Diagnostics: Including the execution of diagnostic procedures and the interpretation of diagnostic
outputs.
(e) Software Documentation: Orientation in the organization and use of system software documentation.
(f) Hands-on Training: One week, with allocated computer time for trainee performance of unstructured
exercises and with the course instructor available for assistance as necessary.
10.4 Application Software Course

The Contractor shall provide a comprehensive application software courses covering all applications
including the database and display building course. The training shall include:
(a) Overview: Block diagrams of the application software and data flows. Programming standards and
program interface conventions.
(b) Application Functions: Functional capabilities, design, and major algorithms. Associated
maintenance and expansion techniques.
(c) Software Development: Techniques and conventions to be used for the preparation and integration of
new software functions.
(d) Software Generation: Generation of application software from source code and associated software
configuration control procedures.
(e) Software Documentation: Orientation in the organization and use of functional and detailed design
documentation and of programmer and user manuals.
(f) Hands-on Training: One week, with allocated computer time for trainee performance of unstructured
exercises and with the course instructor available for assistance as necessary.
10.5 Requirement of training:

The contractor shall provide training for two batches for two weeks each for following courses.
S. No. Name of Course

1 Computer System Hardware
2 Computer System Software
3 Application Software
11.0 Maintenance
11.1 Maintenance Responsibility during the Guaranteed Availability Period:
During Guaranteed Availability Period, the Contractor shall take continual actions to ensure the
guaranteed availability and shall make available all the necessary resources such as specialist
personnel, spare parts, tools, test devices etc. for replacement or repair of all defective parts and shal
have prime responsibility for keeping the system operational.
11.2 RELIABILITYAND AVAILABILITY

The SAS shall be designed so that the failure of any single component, processor, or device shall not
render the system unavailable. The SAS shall be designed to satisfy the very high demands for reliability
and availability concerning:
Mechanical and electrical design
Security against electrical interference (EMI)
High quality components and boards
Modular, well -tested hardware
Thoroughly developed and tested modular software
Easy-to-understand programming language for application programming
Detailed graphical documentation and application software
Built-in supervision and diagnostic functions
Security
Experience of security requirements
Process know-how
Select before execute at operation
Process status representation as double indications
Distributed solution
Independent units connected to the local area network
Back-up functions
Panel design appropriate to the harsh electrical environment and ambient conditions
Panel grounding immune against transient ground potential rise
Outage
1) Outage
The state in which substation automation system or a unit of SAS is unavailable for Normal Operation
as defined in the clause 7.1 due to an event directly related to the SAS or unit of SAS. In the event, the
owner has taken any equipment/ system other than Sub-station Automation System for schedule/forced
maintenance, the consequent outage to SAS shall not be considered as outage for the purpose of
availability.
2) Actual outage duration (AOD)

The time elapsed
th
in hours between the start and the end of an outage. The time shall be counted to the
th th
nearest 1/4 of an hour. Time less than 1/4 of an hour shall be counted as having duration of 1/4 of an
hour.
3) Period Hours (PH)
The number of hours in the reporting period. In a full year the period hour are 8760h (8784h for a leap
year).
4) Actual Outage hours (AOH)

The sum of actual outage duration within the reporting period
AOH = AOD
5) Availability:
Each SAS shall have a total availability of 99.98 % i.e. the ratio of total time duration minus the actua
outage duration to total time duration.
12.0 Guarantees Required
The availability for the complete SAS shall be guaranteed by the Contractor. Bidder shall include in their
offer the detailed calculation for the availability. The contractor shall demonstrate their availability
guaranteed by conducting the availability test on the total sub-station automation system as a whole
after commissioning of total Sub-station Automation system. The test shall verify the reliability and
integrity of all sub-systems. Under these conditions the test shall establish an overall availability of
99.98%. After the lapse of 1000 Hours of cumulative test time, test records shall be examined to
determine the conformance with availability criterion. In case of any outage during the availability test,
the contractor shall rectify the problem and after rectification, the 1000 Hours period start after such
rectification. If test object has not been met the test shall continue until the specified availability is
achieved.
The contractor has to establish the availability in a maximum period of three months from the date of
commencement of the availability test.
After the satisfactory conclusion of test both contractor and employer shall mutually agree to the test
results and if these results satisfy the availability criterion, the test is considered to be completed
successfully. After that the system shall be taken over by the employer and then the guarantee period
shall start.
13.0 Spares
13.1 Consumables:
All consumables such as paper, cartridges shall be supplied by the contractor till the SAS is taken over
by the owner.
13.2 Availability Spares:
In addition to mandatory spares as listed in section project for SAS, the bidder is required to list the
spares, which may be required for ensuring the guaranteed availability during the guaranteed availability
period. The final list of spares shall form part of scope of supply and accordingly the price thereof shal
be quoted by the bidder and shall be considered in the evaluation of the bids. During the guaranteed
availability period, the spare parts supplied by the Contractor shall be made available to the Contractor
for usage subject to replenishment at the earliest. Thus, at the end of availability period the inventory of
spares with the Employer shall be fully replenished by the Contractor.
However, any additional spares required to meet the availability of the system (which are not a part of
the above spares supplied by the Contractor) would have to be supplied immediately by the Contractor
free of cost to the Employer.
14.0 LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
Quantity of equipments shall be decided by bidder in order to achieve guaranteed reliability and
availability as declared by bidder.
i) Station HMI
ii) Redundant Station HMI (in Hot-stand by mode)
iii) Bay level units along with bay mimic
iv) Disturbance Recorder Work Station(Maintenance HMI)
v) Color Laser Printer 1 No. (For Reports & Disturbance records)
vi) Dot matrix printers - (one each for Alarms and log sheets)
vii) All interface equipment for gateways to RCC and RSCC
viii) Communication infrastructure between Bay level units, Station HMI, Printers, gateways, redundant LAN
etc. as required
ix) Any other equipment as necessary.

Annexure-I
Basic Monitoring requirements are:
- Switchgear status indication
- Measurements (U, I, P, Q, f)
- Event
- Alarm
- Winding temperature of Transformers.
- Ambient temperature.
- Status and display of 415V LT system, 220V & 48V DC system.
- Status & Display of Fire protection System and AC System.
- Acquisition of all counters in PLCC panels through potential free contacts from PLCC or independently
by counting the receive/send commands.
- Acquisition of alarm and fault record from protection relays Disturbance.
- Monitoring the state of batteries by displaying DC voltage, charging current and load current etc.
- Tap-position of Transformer
List of Inputs
The list of input for typical bays is as below:-
Analogue inputs
i) For line
Current R phase
Y phase
B phase
Voltage
Y-B phase
B-R phase
ii) For Transformer
Current R phase
Y phase
B phase
WTI (for transformer)
Tap position (for transformer only)
iii) For Bus coupler

Current R phase
Y phase
B phase
iv) Common
a) Voltage for Bus-I, Bus-II and Transfer bus wherever applicable
Voltage R-Y phase
Y-B phase
B-R phase
b) Frequency for Bus-I and Bus-II
c) Ambient temperature (switchyard).
d) LT system
i) Voltage R-Y, Y-B, B-R of Main Switch Board section-I
ii) Voltage R-Y, Y-B, B-R of Main Switch Board section-II
iii) Voltage R-Y, Y-B, B-R of Diesel Generator
iv) Current from LT transformer-I
v) Current from LT transformer-II
vi) Current from Diesel Generator
vii) Voltage of 220V DCDB-I
viii) Voltage of 220V DCDB-II
ix) Current from 220V Battery set-I
x) Current from 220V Battery set-II
xi) Current from 220V Battery charger-I
xii) Current from 220V Battery charger-I
xiii) Voltage of 48V DCDB-I
xiv) Voltage of 48V DCDB-II
xv) Current from 48V Battery set-I
xvi) Current from 48V Battery set-II
xvii) Current from 48V Battery charger-I
xviii) Current from 48V Battery charger-I
Digital Inputs
The list of input for various bays/SYSTEM is as follows:
1. Line bays
i) Status of each pole of CB, Isolator, Earth switch

ii) CB trouble
iii) CB operation/closing lockout
iv) Pole discrepancy optd
v) Trip coil faulty
vi) LBB optd
vii) Bus bar protn trip relay optd
viii) Main bkr auto recloser operated
ix) Tie/transfer auto recloser operated
x) A/r lockout
xi) Tie/transfer bkr a/r lockout
xii) Direct trip-I/II sent
xiii) Direct trip-I/II received
xiv) Main I/II blocking
xv) Main I/II-Inter trip send
xvi) Main I/II-Inter trip received
xvii) O/V STAGE I operated
xviii) O/V STAGE II operated
xix) FAULT LOCATOR FAULTY
xx) MAIN-I/II CVT FUSE FAIL
xxi) MAIN-I PROTN TRIP
xxii) MAIN-II PROTN TRIP
xxiii) MAIN-I PSB ALARM
xxiv) MAIN-I SOTF TRIP
xxv) MAIN-I R-PH TRIP
xxvi) MAIN-I Y-PH TRIP
xxvii) MAIN-I B-PH TRIP
xxviii) MAIN-I START
xxix) MAIN-I/II Carrier aided trip
xxx) MAIN-I/II fault in reverse direction
xxxi) MAIN-I/II ZONE-2 TRIP
xxxii) MAIN-I/II ZONE-3 TRIP
xxxiii) MAIN-I/II weak end infeed optd
xxxiv) MAIN-II PSB alarm
xxxv) MAIN-II SOTF TRIP
xxxvi) MAIN-II R-PH TRIP
xxxvii) MAIN-II Y-PH TRIP
xxxviii) MAIN-II B-PH TRIP
xxxix) MAIN-II start
xl) MAIN-II aided trip
xli) MAIN-I/II fault in reverse direction
xlii) Back-up o/c optd
xliii) Back-up e/f optd
xliv) 220V DC-I/II source fail
xlv) SPEECH CHANNEL FAIL
xlvi) PLCC Protection Channel-I FAIL
xlvii) PLCC Protection Channel-II FAIL
2. Transformer bays

ii) CB trouble
v) Trip coil faulty
vi) LBB optd
viii) REF OPTD
ix) DIF OPTD
x) OVERFLUX ALARM (MV)
xi) OVERFLUX TRIP (MV)
xii) OVERFLUX ALARM (HV)
xiii) OVERFLUX TRIP (HV)
xiv) HV BUS CVT FUSE FAIL
xv) MV BUS CVT FUSE FAIL
xvi) OTI ALARM/TRIP
xvii) PRD OPTD
xviii) OVERLOAD ALARM
xix) BUCHOLZ TRIP
xx) BUCHOLZ ALARM
xxi) OLTC BUCHOLZ ALARM
xxii) OLTC BUCHOLZ TRIP
xxiii) OIL LOW ALARM
xxiv) back-up o/c (HV) optd
xxv) back-up e/f (HV)optd
xxvi) 220v DC-I/II source fail
xxvii) TAP MISMATCH
xxviii) GR-A PROTN OPTD
xxix) GR-B PROTN OPTD
xxx) back-up o/c (MV) optd
xxxi) back-up e/f (MV)optd
3. Transformer bays

ii) CB trouble
v) Trip coil faulty
vi) LBB optd
viii) REF OPTD
ix) DIF OPTD
x) HV BUS CVT FUSE FAIL
xi) OTI ALARM/TRIP
xii) PRD OPTD
xiii) BUCHOLZ TRIP
xiv) BUCHOLZ ALARM
xv) OIL LOW ALARM
xvi) Back-up impedance relay
xvii) 220v DC-I/II source fail
xviii) GR-A PROTN OPTD
xix) GR-B PROTN OPTD
4 Bus Bar Protection
i) Bus bar main-I trip

ii) Bus bar main-II trip
iii) Bus bar zone-I CT open
iv) Bus bar zone-II CT open
v) Bus transfer CT sup. Optd
vi) Bus transfer bus bar protn optd
vii) Bus protection relay fail
5. Auxiliary system
i) Incomer-I On/Off
ii) Incomer-II On/Off
iii) 415V Bus-I/II U/V
iv) 415v bus coupler breaker on/off
v) DG set bkr on/off
vi) Alarm/trip signals as listed in Section: DG set
vii) LT transformer-I Bucholz Alarm & trip
viii) LT transformer-II Bucholz Alarm & trip
ix) LT transformer-I WTI Alarm & trip
x) LT transformer-II WTI Alarm & trip
xi) LT transformer-I OTI Alarm & trip
xii) LT transformer-II OTI Alarm & trip
xiii) PLCC exchange fail
xiv) Time sync. Signal absent
xv) Alarm/trip signals as listed in Section: Battery and Battery charger
xvi) 220v dc-I earth fault
xvii) 220v dc-II earth fault
NOTE:-
The exact number and description of digital inputs shall be as per detailed engineering requirement
Apart from the above mentioned digital inputs, minimum of 200 inputs shall be kept for use in future.

Annexure-II
TYPICAL ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING

OF
SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM
Router Station HMI Gateway GPS

HMI View Node
DR Work Station Clock
Redundant Managed
Ethernet Station Bus IEC 61850
IEC 61850
Switch Switch Switch Switch

for Dia for Dia. for Dia.
1 for Dia.
2 3 N
Fibre optic
Connection
IEC 61850
IEDs for
IEDs for IEDs for IEDs for
Control & Control & Control &
protection protection Control &
protection
protection
Note:

1. The redundant managed bus shall be realized by high speed optical bus using industrial
grade components and shall be as per IEC 61850.
2. For 220kV, 66kV yards, IEDs for two adjacent bays can be housed in one Kiosk along
with its switch. For 220/33kV T/F, IEDs for four adjacent 33kV bays can be housed in
one Kiosk along with its switches.
3. Inside the sub-station, all connections shall be realized as per IEC 61850 protocol.
4. For gateway, it shall communicate with Remote Supervisory Control Centre (RSCC) on
IEC 60870-5-101 protocol.
5. The router to Remote Control Centre (RCC) shall communicate on IEC 60870-5-101
protocol.
6. The printer as required shall be connected to station bus directly and can be managed
either from station HMI, HMI view node or disturbance recorder work station.

124
SECTION 5
CHAPTER 5
HARYANA VIDYUT PRASARAN NIGAM LTD.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
INTERUTILITY METERING SYSTEM AND
COMMON METER READING INSTRUMENT

(CMRI)
SPEC. NO. HPD/S-82/HPM-461/Vol-II/PROT. (Jan-2013)

125
Chief Engineer/MM
Design Directorate, HVPNL,
Shakti Bhawan, Sec-6,
Panchkula-134109 (HARYANA).
Tel/Fax No. 0172-2583724

126
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR INTERUTILITY METERING SYSTEM
1.0 The specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing, inspection, delivery of
interutility metering system and /or common meter reading instrument (CMRI).
2.0 The energy meters specified herein shall be used for tariff metering for bulk, Inter -utility
power flows in HVPNL/DISCOM. The meters shall be installed on each circuit as a self
contained device for measurement of active energy & reactive energy in each successive
15-minute block and certain other functions as described in the following paragraphs.
3.0 The meters shall be suitable for being connected through Test terminal blocks to
the voltage transformer having a rated secondary line to line voltage of 110 V,
and to current transformers having a rated secondary current of 1 A. Any further
transformer/transducers required for their functioning shall be in built in the
meters. Necessary isolation and / or suppression shall also be built in for
protecting the meters from surges and voltage spikes that occur in the VT/CT
circuits of the switchyards. The reference frequency shall be 50Hz.
4.0 The microprocessor based 3 phase 4 wire meters shall conform to class 0.2S as
per IS 14697 for Indian manufacturers or IEC- 62053-22 (2003) for foreign
manufacturers & technical specification and meter shall be stand alone type. The
meters shall bear BIS certification mark, if required as per Govt. of India Gazette
notification. It will be the responsibility of the bidder to get these meters marked
with BIS certification. The BIS certification shall be supplied with the tender.
5.0 Meters shall be supplied with associated TTBs. The Meters shall have following
features: -
a) Meter shall be stand alone type.
b) For transfer of data, system should have multiple communication ports as

described in the following paragraphs
6.0 The active energy measurement (Wh) shall be carried out on 3 phase 4 wire
principle with an accuracy as per class 0.2S of IS 14697/IEC- 62053- 22 (2003) In
the meters the energy shall be computed directly in CT/VT secondary quantities
and indicated in Watt-hours. The meters shall compute the net active energy (Wh)
sent out from the Sub-Station during each successive 15 minute block, and store
in its memory along with +/- sign. It shall also display on demand the net WH sent
out during the previous 15 minute block, with a minus sign if it is a net Wh receipt.
7.0 Further, the meter shall continuously integrate and display on demand the net
cumulative active energy sent out from the Sub-Station upto that time. The
cumulative Wh reading at each midnight shall be stored in the meters memory.
The register shall move backwards when active power flows backwards into the
Sub-Station.
8.0 The meter shall count the number of cycles in VT output during each successive
15-minute block and divide the same by 900 to arrive at the average frequency.
This shall be stored in the meter's memory as a 2-digit code, which shall be
arrived at by subtracting 49 from the average frequency, multiplying by 50 and
neglecting all decimals. For e.g. 49.89 Hz shall be recorded as 44. In case the
127
average frequency is less than 49.0 Hz, it shall be recorded as 00. In case it is
51.0 Hz or higher, it shall be recorded as 99. The average frequency of the
previous 15-minutes block shall also be displayed on demand in Hertz. The
accuracy of the voltage measurement/computation shall be at-least 0.5%, a better
accuracy such as 0.2% in the 95-105% range being desirable.
9.0 The meters shall continuously compute the average of the RMS value
(fundamental only) of the three lines to neutral VT secondary voltage as a
percentage of 63.51 V and display the same on demand.
10.0 The meter shall also compute the reactive power (VAR) on 3 phase 4 wire principle.
Limits of error shall be corresponding to class 1.0 as per IS 14697 for reactive energy for
Indian manufacturers or half (50%) of those permitted corresponding to class 2.0 for
reactive energy as per IEC 62053-23 (2003) for foreign manufacturers, and integrate the
reactive energy (VARh) algebraically in 2 separate registers, one for the period for which
the average RMS voltage is 103% or higher and the other for the period for which the
average RMS voltage is below 97%. The current reactive power (VAR) with a minus sign
if negative, and cumulative reactive energy (VARh) reading of the 2 registers shall be
displayed on demand. The readings of the 2 registers at each midnight shall also be stored
in the meter's memory. In the meter, the reactive power and reactive energy transmittals
shall be computed in VAR/VARh directly calculated in VT and CT secondary quantities.
When lagging reactive power is being sent out from the Sub-Station. VAR display shall
have no sign and VARh registers shall move forward. When reactive power flow is in the
reverse direction. VAR display shall have a negative sign and VARh registers shall move
backwards.
11.0 The meter shall fully comply with all the stipulations of IS 14697/IEC- 60687-2000 (or
latest revision) for class 0.2S for static watt-hour meters except those specifically
modified by this specification. The reference ambient temperature shall be 50 deg. C.
12.0 Error shall be as per IS-14697/ IEC- 62053- 22 (2003) for all power factor angles
from 0 deg. to 360 deg.

128
13.0 Each meter shall have a test output device (visual) for checking the accuracy of active
energy Wh and reactive energy (VARh) measurement using a suitable test equipment. The
test output shall be software configurable for active energy import/export and reactive
energy import/export.
14.0 No rounding off to the next higher last decimal shall be done for voltage and frequency
displays.
15.0 There shall be provisions of below mentioned Tempers and Events in the
Interutility Meters of 0.2S accuracy class:-
15.1 Tempers:-
1) Current Reversal/Current Failure/Current Unbalance/Current bypass.
2) Magnetic Tempering.
3) Under voltage/Voltage unbalance.
4) Abnormally Low PF 0.45 (lag or lead) of any of the phases indicative of phase
sequence mismatch in 3-phases.
5) Power on/off.
15.2 Events:-
1) Over Voltage:- If any of the phase voltage is more than 110% of rated voltage & it
is continuing for more than 15 minutes, meter records over voltage as an event.
2) Under Voltage:- The three line to neutral voltages shall be continuously monitored by
individual phase wise LED's, and in case any of these falls below 70%, the normally
flashing lamp provided on the meters front becomes steady. The time blocks in which
such a voltage failure occurs/persist shall also be recorded in the meter's memory. The
lamp shall automatically resume flashing when corresponding VT secondary voltage is
healthy again. LCD indication are also acceptable. The two VARh registers specified in
clause-10 shall remain stay-put while VT supply is unhealthy. This feature shall be
recorded as an event.
16.0 The meters shall operate with the power drawn from the VT secondary circuits, without
the need for any auxiliary power supply. The total burden imposed by a meter for
measurement and operation shall not exceed 10 VA on any of the phases.

129
An automatic backup for the continued operation of the meter's calendar clock shall be
provided through a long life battery, which shall be capable of supplying the required
power for atleast two years. The meters shall be supplied duly fitted with the battery
which shall not require to be changed for atleast 10 years, as long as total VT supply
interruption does not exceed two years. The battery mounting shall be designed to
facilitate easy battery replacement without affecting PCB of meter.
17.0 Each meter shall have a built-in calendar and clock, having an accuracy of 30 seconds per
month or better. The calendar and clock shall be correctly set at the manufacturer's works.
The date (day-month-year) and time (hour-minute-second) shall be displayed on the meter
front on demand. Clock adjustment shall be possible at site using the Meter Reading
Instrument (MRI) or remotely using time synchronization signal through RS 485. For the
purpose of getting the standard time, the computer (s) from where the meter will be read
shall be equipped with GPS signal receiver. This computer and the GPS receiver,
however, are not in the scope of this specification. When an advance or retard command is
given, six subsequent time blocks shall be contracted or elongated by 10 seconds each.
The meter shall not accept another clock correction command for seven days. The meter
time shall automatically be corrected every time the remote computer interrogates it. All
clock corrections shall be registered in the meter's memory and shall be suitably shown on
the print out of the collected data
18.0 Each meter shall have a unique identification code, which shall be marked permanently on
the front as well as in its memory. All meters supplied to HVPN, as per this specification
shall have their identification code starting with HVPN, which shall not be used for any
other supply. HVPN shall be followed by a dash and a four digit running serial number.

130
The series of four digit running serial no. indicating the unique identification code of each
meter shall be provided by HVPN to the successful bidder.
19.0 The measured value(s) shall be displayed through LED/back-lit LCD display with proper
identification for indication of the following (one at a time) on demand.
19.1 Meter Serial No.

19.2 Date (dd-mm-yy) 'd'
19.3 Time (hr-min-sec) 't'
19.4 Cumulative Wh reading 'c'
19.5 Average frequency of the previous 15-minute block 'F'
19.6 'E'
Net Wh transmittal in the previous 15-minute
block, with +/- sign
19.7 Average percentage voltage 'U'
19.8 Reactive power (VAR) with +/- sign 'r'
19.9 Voltage high VARh register reading 'H'
19.10 Voltage-Low VARh register reading 'L'
19.11 Low Battery Indication
20.0 A keypad or scrolling facility shall be provided on the front of the meter for switching on
the display of the meter parameters selected and for changing from one indication to next.
21.(A) Meter shall have a non-volatile memory in which the following shall be automatically
stored.
21.1 Average frequency for each successive 15-minute block upto second decimal/as
a two-digit code.
21.2 Net Wh transmittal during each successive 15-minute block upto second
decimal/with plus minus sign.
21.3 Cumulative Wh transmittal at each midnight in 6 digits including one decimal.
21.4 Cumulative VARh transmittal for voltage high condition, at each midnight in 6 digit
including one decimal.
21.5 Cumulative VARh transmittal for voltage low condition, at each midnight in 6 digit
including one decimal.
21.6 Date & time blocks of failure of VT supply on any phase, as a star (*) mark.
21.(B) Battery backed memory shall not be accepted.
22.0 The meter shall store all the above listed data in their memories for a period of
35 days. The data older than 35 days shall get erased automatically.
23.0 CMRI/DCD: To ensure inter operability of system at the meter reading instrument end,
the common meter reading instrument (CMRI) or data collection devices (DCD)

131
confirming to DOS platform and having min. 16 MB memory shall be used to enable
different manufacturers to download into same hand held terminal & the meters of various
makes to be read through the same hand held terminal. Each CMRI shall be complete
with:-
i) a lead with optical head for coupling it to the meter,

ii) a lead for plugging it to a personal computer;
iii) an internal battery for powering the devices;
iv) a case for safely carrying it about
v) a battery charger
The total arrangement shall be such that one (1) operation can carry out the whole
operation, in about five (5) minutes per meter.
Portable Meter Reading Instruments (MRI)/data collection devices (DCD) shall have a
key for starting the data tapping from the coupled meters memory, a key to start data
transfer to the PC, and a lamp, which would light up on completion of data collection,
remain on while the data is held in the device and would go off when all data has been
transferred to the PC. Data tapping operation from CMRI/DCD shall not erase the data
from the meters memory, or effect the meter operation in any way. The memory of the
CMRI/DCD shall get automatically cleared when the data has been transferred to the PC
only then the CMRI/DCD shall accept data from another meter. CMRI/DCDs shall also
have necessary provision for meter clock correction. CMRI/ DCDs shall be compatible
with earlier supplied meters in regard to data downloading etc.
23.1 Each meter shall have an optical communication port compatible to RS 232 on its front
for tapping all data stored in its memory. In addition to the above each meter shall be

132
provided with a RS485 port on one of its sides, from where all the data stored in the
meters memory can also be tapped. Portable Meter Reading Instruments (MRI)/data
collection devices (DCD) of SANDS, ANALOGIC make have already been provided
separately for this purpose, one for each Sub-Station, to serve as interface between the
meters specified above and the local PC. Meter shall be compatible with earlier supplied
CMRI/DCD. Each meter shall be provided with a lead having optical head for coupling
the meter to CMRI/DCD.
23.2 Software Package: The existing metering system records all the parameters
required for the Availability Based Tariff. Suitable software for CMRI shall be
provided by the bidder for smooth downloading of the data to/ from the CMRI. For
data analysis & billing, the different meter manufacturers shall provide the meter
reading software to interpret the data collected through CMRI or through RS485
for conversion into a common ASCII format. The Data of the existing meters is
available in the specified ASCII Format; details of which are enclosed at
Annexure-II (Page1 to 3). A similar output in the same ASCII format (space
delimited, fixed length values) shall be made available from the new meters by
the successful bidder for future use of data for generation of BST & ABT
Bills/Reports or any other purpose. In addition to this successful bidder shall
make provision to supply load survey data in Excel format as per Annexure-
III.The supplier shall provide above software which would enable a local PC to:-
i) accept the data from the CMRI and/or from a interface device connected to the optical
port/RS-485 port and store it in its memory in binary read only format.
ii) Polling feature along with a task scheduler to run the data downloading software at a pre-
designated date and time repeatedly or by manually selecting a meter. A detailed activity
log shall also be available for each downloading operation.
iii) Display the collected data on PCs screen on demand as per annexure-II & III in text
format, with forward/backward rolling.
iv) Print out in text format the data collected from one or more meters as per annexure-II &
III, starting from a certain date and time, as per operators instructions.
v) Transmit the collected data, in binary format, through an appropriate communication link
to the central computer, starting from a certain date and time, as per operators
instructions.
vi) Store the collected data, in binary format, on a floppy disc/CD/Pen drive/DVD.
The above software shall further ensure that absolutely no tampering (except total
erasures) of the collected metering data is possible during its handling by the PC.
The software shall be suitable for the commonly available PCs and shall be
supplied to owner in a compatible form to enable its easy loading into the PCs
available at the various Sub-Stations/Energy Accounting Centre.

133
23.3 The overall intention is to tap the data stored in the meter memory at any time
from any of the two ports mentioned above and transmit same to a remote centre
computer using communication links, through the local PC. It should also be
possible to obtain a print out (hard copy) of all data collected from the meters,
using the PC. The received/ downloaded meter data should be the original output
from the meter.
23.4 As a part of commissioning the Contractor shall load the software in the PCs at
the respective substations, and fully commission the total meter reading scheme.
He shall also impart the necessary instructions to substation engineers.
24.0 The whole system shall be such as to provide a print out (both from the local PC and the
remote central computer) of the following form:
23 55 +16.28 56 +15.95 55 +15.32 54 +15.66

55 +14.93 55 +14.26 54 +14.85 56 +15.17
HVPNL **** 12345.6 01234.5 00123.4 99-04-28
57 +14.72 56 +13.83 55 +13.57 53 +12.91
01 52 +13.34 51 +12.76 52 +14.11 52 +15.28
25.0 All the meters shall be identical in all respects except for their unique identification codes.
They shall also be totally sealed and tamper proof, with no possibility of adjustment at site
except for a restricted clock correction.
26.0 The meter shall safely withstand the usual fluctuations arising during faults in particular,
VT secondary voltage 115% of rated applied continuously and 190% of rated for 3
seconds and CT secondary current 150% of rated applied continuously and 30 times of
rated applied for 0.5 seconds, shall not cause any damage to or the mal-operation of the
meters.
27.0 The meter shall continue to function for remaining healthy phase(s), in case of failure of
one or two phases of VT supply. In case of a complete VT supply failure, the computation
of average frequency (as per 8.0) shall be done only for the period during which the VT
supply was available in the 15-minute block. Any time block contraction or elongation for
clock correction shall also be duly accounted for.

134
28.0 The harmonics shall be filtered out while measuring the Wh, VAR and VARh and only
fundamental frequency quantities shall be measured or computed.
29.0 VOID
30.0 VOID
31.0 Every meter shall be indelibly marked with connection diagram showing the
phase sequence for which it is intended and shall be attached on the meters. In
case of any special precautions need to be taken at the time of testing the meter,
the same shall be indicated alongwith the circuit diagram.
32.0 VOID
33.0 Sealing arrangement: Sealing arrangement for meters and TTBs shall be provided as
under:
33.1 TTBs: Each TTB shall have the provision for two seals.
33.2 Meters: Meter body or cover & meter terminal blocks shall be sealable including
each optical communication port.
34.0 The meters shall be supplied housed in compact and sturdy; metallic or moulded cases of non-rusting construction and/or finish. The cases
shall be designed for simple mounting on a plane, vertical surface such as a control/relay panel front. All terminals for CT and VT
connections shall be arranged in a row along the meters lowerside. Terminals shall have a suitable construction with barriers and
cover, to provide a secure and safe connection of CTs and VTs leads through stranded copper conductors of 4.0 sq. mm. size.
The meters shall also withstand without any damage or maloperation reasonable mechanical shocks, earthquake forces, ambient
temperature variations, relative humidity etc. They shall have an IP-51 category dust-tight construction, and shall be capable of
satisfactory operation in an indoor, non-air conditioned installation.
The contractor shall be responsible for total installation and commissioning of the meters (alongwith test blocks, if supplied
separately)as per Owners advice, including unpacking and inspection on receipt at site, mounting the meters on existing control and
relay panels at an appropriate viewing height., connection of CT and VT circuits including any required rewiring (however, supply &
installation of 4cx4mm2 control cables (laid through 2.5 dia HDD PVC Pipe) from CT, VT to metering system are not in the scope of
this specification), functional testing, commissioning and handing over. The Contractors personnel shall procure/carry the necessary
tools, equipment, materials and consumables (including insulated wires, lugs, ferrules, hardware etc.).
35.0 Inspection & Testing:

35.1 Type Tests:
The meter should be fully type tested as per IS 14697 for Indian Manufacturers or
IEC-62053-22 (2003) & IEC-62053-23 (2003) for foreign manufacturers.
35.2 Routine Tests:
All Routine tests as per IS 14697 shall be carried out by the supplier on the
meters for compliance in both directions of power flow.
35.3 Acceptance Tests:
All equipment, after final assembly and before despatch from manufacturer's
works shall be duly tested as per IS 14697 for compliance in both directions of
power flow in presence of purchaser's representative, unless dispensed with in
135
writing by the purchaser. In addition, the following acceptance tests shall also be
conducted:-
1. Functional checks for display and memory.
2. Accuracy of voltage and frequency measurement.
All DCDs/MRIs after final assembly and before dispatch from Manufacturers
works shall be duly tested to verify that they are suitable for supply to the
purchaser. In particular, each and every DCD/MRI shall be subjected to the
following acceptance test:-
1. Functional checks
2. Downloading Meter Data from the Meter(s).
3. Compatibility with PC software
4. Downloading the meter data on PC
5. Functioning of advance and retard time commands.
6. Per meter downloading time verification
7. Capacity of DCD/MRI for data storage.
36.0 Quality Assurance

The quality control procedure to be adopted during installation of the specified equipment shall be mutually discussed and finalized
in due course, generally based on the established and proven practices.
37.0 Any meter, which fails to fully comply with the specification requirements, shall be
liable to be rejected by the purchaser.
38.0 VOID
39.0 Following technical information shall be furnished by the bidders in their
offers.:
39.1.1 The prospective bidder shall be required to submit complete type test reports
from Govt. approved laboratory alongwith bid. The type test reports shall not be
more than seven years old reckoned from the date of opening of part-1 tender.
39.2 Guaranteed Technical Particulars as per Annexure-I.
40.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS

Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for
satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions:-
i. Location IN THE STATE OF HARYANA
ii. Max. ambient air temp (0C) 50
iii. Min. ambient air temp (0C) -2.5
iv. Maximum Relative humidity (%) 100
v. Minimum Relative humidity (%) 26
vi. Average annual rainfall (mm) 900
vii. Max. wind pressure (Kg/sq.m.) 195
viii. Max. altitude above mean sea level 1000
(meters)
ix. Isoceraunic level (days/year) 50
x. Seismic level (horizontal acceleration) 0.3g

136
Note: Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and fungus growth.
The climatic conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient conditions.
Smoke is also present in the atmosphere. Heavy lightening also occur during June
to October.

137
Annexure-I
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR THREE-PHASE FOUR WIRE CLASS

0.2S ACCURACY POWER MONITORING SYSTEM.
1. Makers name and country

2. Type of Meter/Model
3. Standards to which the meter conform
4. Accuracy class
5. Parameters measured
6. P.F. Range
7. Overload capacity
8. Variation of voltage at which system function normally
9. Minimum starting current
10. MD reset provisions
11. Reset count
12. No. of digits of display
13. Particulars of readout by CMRI
14. Non volatile memory retention time in absence of
power
15. Memory capacity (kb)
16. Demand integration period
17. Pulse output for each meters
18. Metrology indicator for each meters
19. Communication capability on
a. Local port
b. Remote port
20. Load survey parameters
21. Power Consumption per phase
i) Voltage circuit.
ii) Current circuit.
22. Self diagnostics features, if any (Provide details)
23. Principle of operation (Provide details)
24. Foreseen dimensions of proposed meter.
25. Expected weight of proposed meter
26. Foreseen dimensions of DCD/MRI.
27. Expected weight of DCD/MRI.
28. Dimensions and weight of the test block, if supplied
separately.

138
Annexure-II
Standard Format for Meter Readings, Energy data
First Row/*-- Header Information : Starting date & time and End date & time is defined
First row
Starting time 4 character (11th character to 14th character).
Starting date 8 character (23rd Character to 30th Character),
Ending time 4 character (35th Character to 38th Character),

Ending date 8 character (47th Character to 54th Character)
RTC Synchronization Status Indicator 1 Character (56th Character): 1 indicates RTC
synchronized, 0 indicates RTC not synchronized.
Second Row:
Meter Sr. No 10 Characters (1st to 10th Character),
Mid Night Net Wh 7 Character (15th Character to 21st Character),
Reactive High Energy 7 Characters (26th Character to 32nd Character),
Reactive Low Energy 7 Characters (37th Character to 43rd Character),
Data Date 8 Characters (48th Character to 55th Character)

Third Row is Blank
Fourth row: 16 IP data in each row
Starting Hour 02 Characters (1st , II nd Character),

Avg. Freq 2 Characters (5th, 6th character),
Status Indication 3 character (7th Character to 9th character),
Net Energy 6 Character (10th to 15th Character)
2 Character left blank and all the data will be repeated 16 times
Fifth Row : Same as 4th Row

Sixth Row : Same as 4th Row
Seventh Row : Same as 4th Row

Eighth Row : Same as 4th Row
Ninth row:
Same as 4th row and at the end net energy of 24 hours at 215th Character (4 Character)
Lines will be repeated from 2nd line onwards as above.
/*-- Header Information
139
One Block At the beginning of each day in Following Format:
Meter SerialNo MidNight Net Wh Reactive High Energy Reactive Low Energy Date
16 IP data in each row and total 6 rows for complete 24 hours data
Format for IP wise information:

StartingHour AvgFreq StatusIndication NetEnergy AvgFreq StatusIndication NetEnergy ...
StatusIndication gives following Information:

* to indicate Supply Down.Supply failure might be momentary or might have lasted for several IPs
rr to indicate time retard "aa" to indicate time advance
Sum of net energies(for 96 IP) at the end of last row of the day having complete 24 hours data
--*/

140
WEEK FROM 0000 HRS OF 28-06-05 TO 1224 HRS OF 01-08-05 0
AP-M038-75 95736.5 02793.0 05701.7 28-06-05
00 18 +22.48 03 +22.19 11 +22.38 08 +22.44 11 +22.57 10 +23.03 14 +23.11 14 +23.23 22 +23.28 28 +23.29 35 +23.45 41 +23.48 44 +23.66 44 +23.68 45 +23.54 52 +23.54
04 46 +23.63 48 +23.99 42 +24.35 26 +24.75 44 +25.84 48 +26.40 46 +26.52 56 +23.32 69 +22.85 61 +21.83 55 +21.24 60 +24.44 65 +23.36 61 +20.22 60 +19.19 62 +18.72
08 64 +18.50 62 +18.51 63 +17.60 67 +15.19 63 +14.62 59 +15.63 59 +16.02 52 +16.65 39 +16.46 43 +15.18 64 +15.14 65 +15.29 52 +14.87 49 +13.21 50 +13.79 51 +15.19
12 48 +17.31 38 +18.39 43 +18.12 27 +18.23 54 +14.67 51 +16.20 56 * +03.30 51 * +00.03 47 +00.06 49 +00.03 25 +05.45 20 +10.40 29 * +04.08 30 * +04.11 18 +10.35 28 +10.45
16 65 +10.68 55 +07.22 59 +04.76 62 +04.43 65 +04.19 00 * +10.48 59 +20.77 60 +23.64 70 +21.06 65 +15.04 68 +13.45 56 +14.38 47 +15.50 40 +17.67 51 +22.55 25 +25.24
20 12 +27.56 19 +29.27 10 +29.96 13 +29.97 22 +29.61 09 +28.68 22 +27.72 18 +27.22 09 +26.55 12 +25.47 30 +25.02 23 +22.52 13 +24.89 13 +24.46 26 +24.59 04 +23.77 1801.35
AP-M038-75 97537.9 02804.6 06093.8 29-06-05
00 09 +23.64 11 +23.53 12 +23.35 07 +23.11 18 +23.20 29 +23.54 34 +23.76 38 +23.87 35 +23.97 31 +23.85 43 +23.90 51 +23.95 52 +24.10 55 +24.10 49 +23.95 59 +24.24
04 66 +24.77 57 +25.14 51 +25.75 45 +26.42 60 +27.94 63 +28.62 62 +28.75 56 +27.99 77 +23.31 78 +19.45 74 +19.25 67 +18.95 65 +13.97 72 +12.92 72 +13.11 74 +13.07
08 76 +13.07 70 +12.96 64 +12.97 66 +12.96 55 +12.81 49 +16.12 48 +16.78 48 +16.90 52 +17.72 51 +20.22 43 +17.60 51 +19.78 52 +21.48 57 +23.23 47 +26.32 35 +27.02
12 49 +27.45 42 +27.04 43 +27.03 45 +27.30 56 +27.72 54 +26.70 52 +26.24 51 +26.67 51 +26.93 41 +26.91 45 +25.73 44 +26.27 50 +26.58 40 +26.25 47 +26.17 57 +26.55
16 68 +26.87 52 +25.64 54 +23.94 47 +26.32 62 +17.90 59 +06.48 58 +13.01 65 +14.96 75 +17.25 70 +16.96 66 +17.82 64 +17.42 63 +19.26 51 +20.20 49 +23.48 54 +25.23
20 25 +28.96 08 +30.16 10 +30.31 05 +30.44 10 +28.50 28 +28.42 25 +28.15 16 +27.31 13 +26.43 22 +26.01 29 +25.47 21 +24.75 35 +25.16 30 +25.57 43 +25.50 48 +25.30 2194.13
AP-M038-75 99732.0 02849.2 06724.7 30-06-05
00 52 +25.10 58 +24.99 56 +24.70 60 +24.79 48 +24.66 62 +24.83 62 +24.75 60 +24.81 60 +24.72 62 +24.62 61 +24.48 67 +24.50 65 +24.46 56 +24.18 58 +24.26 51 +24.19
04 57 +24.28 66 +24.81 60 +25.25 45 +25.77 49 +26.19 53 +26.65 49 +26.50 45 +25.73 69 +22.24 61 +19.69 48 +18.96 47 +18.55 58 +14.72 58 +12.39 61 +12.53 55 +12.66
08 49 +12.34 42 +12.47 49 +12.53 56 +12.61 53 +12.52 47 +12.65 43 +12.54 51 +11.71 39 +11.96 52 +12.11 41 +12.16 33 +12.09 32 +16.05 27 +17.90 19 +18.12 13 +18.39
12 01 +18.48 00 +16.06 00 +15.48 03 +15.57 15 +15.67 29 +18.41 00 +25.66 14 +24.74 61 +24.23 43 +24.59 01 +24.20 20 +24.24 40 +24.17 48 +23.44 47 +23.43 26 +22.54
16 28 +22.65 28 +22.79 36 +22.97 23 +22.46 18 * +21.03 56 +20.23 24 +20.50 30 +20.20 59 +18.13 61 +19.79 63 +22.28 47 +22.83 52 +19.63 32 +21.87 11 +24.40 00 +25.80
20 00 +30.53 01 +12.91 12 +00.04 00 +10.45 03 +30.33 00 +31.96 10 +30.78 51 +19.79 33 +24.10 13 +27.75 19 +26.72 13 +24.58 38 +26.18 19 +25.82 30 +25.66 41 +25.66 2010.84
AP-M038-75 01742.8 02932.1 06980.9 01-07-05
00 22 +25.35 16 +25.54 31 +25.56 25 +25.25 35 +25.44 27 +25.58 29 +25.44 35 +25.39 47 +25.45 55 +25.59 55 +25.69 53 +21.36 56 +20.34 48 +20.40 49 +20.32 45 +20.37
04 47 +20.63 37 +20.84 35 +21.15 27 +24.36 45 +28.17 47 +28.38 50 +28.29 47 +26.74 56 +21.27 44 +18.48 36 +19.28 42 +19.34 55 +16.68 51 +13.75 50 +13.67 51 +13.61
08 62 +13.56 61 +13.63 51 +13.60 56 +13.60 31 +13.62 41 +13.85 46 +13.93 48 +13.72 42 +13.86 16 +13.71 18 +13.70 15 +13.48 00 +15.30 09 +23.83 02 +26.60 05 +26.94
12 22 +28.59 17 +28.81 34 +30.73 15 +30.76 28 +30.88 16 +30.26 00 +29.53 09 +30.21 06 +30.50 01 +22.38 06 +22.74 08 +23.04 16 +23.66 13 +23.41 07 +23.06 03 * +22.03
16 23 * +14.38 37 +16.67 39 +16.94 38 +07.42 63 +14.18 49 +16.78 36 +17.89 44 +17.89 60 +19.38 56 +23.89 34 +21.55 26 +21.29 07 +15.15 00 +11.78 00 +00.02 00 +02.29
20 00 +22.83 00 +25.15 05 +24.43 00 +29.69 00 +32.39 16 +29.05 06 +14.03 00 +03.92 00 +21.73 04 +27.26 05 +27.31 00 +26.67 00 +27.61 00 +22.95 14 +26.95 24 +27.10 2031.80
AP-M038-75 03774.7 03035.5 07267.9 02-07-05

141
Annexure III
/* Header
Information */
Meter Serial No.
Load Survey Data From: 26/02/2010 To:
01/04/2010
PT Status
Time Coded Net Time
Date Indicator (for low
Slot Frequency Wh Retard/Advance
voltage indication)
2/26/2010 0:15 49 15.78 aa *
2/26/2010 0:30 23 9.64 rr *
2/26/2010 0:45
2/26/2010 1:00
2/26/2010 1:15
2/26/2010 1:30
2/26/2010 1:45
2/26/2010 2:00
2/26/2010 2:15
2/26/2010 2:30
2/26/2010 2:45
2/26/2010 3:00
2/26/2010 3:15
2/26/2010 3:30
2/26/2010 3:45
2/26/2010 4:00
2/26/2010 4:15
2/26/2010 4:30
2/26/2010 4:45
2/26/2010 5:00
2/26/2010 5:15
2/26/2010 5:30
2/26/2010 5:45
2/26/2010 6:00
2/26/2010 6:15
2/26/2010 6:30
2/26/2010 6:45
2/26/2010 7:00
2/26/2010 7:15
2/26/2010 7:30
2/26/2010 7:45
2/26/2010 8:00
2/26/2010 8:15
2/26/2010 8:30
2/26/2010 8:45
2/26/2010 9:00
2/26/2010 9:15
2/26/2010 9:30
2/26/2010 9:45
2/26/2010 10:00
2/26/2010 10:15
2/26/2010 10:30
2/26/2010 10:45
2/26/2010 11:00
2/26/2010 11:15
2/26/2010 11:30
2/26/2010 11:45
142
2/26/2010 12:00
2/26/2010 12:15
2/26/2010 12:30
2/26/2010 12:45
2/26/2010 13:00
2/26/2010 13:15
2/26/2010 13:30
2/26/2010 13:45
2/26/2010 14:00
2/26/2010 14:15
2/26/2010 14:30
2/26/2010 14:45
2/26/2010 15:00
2/26/2010 15:15
2/26/2010 15:30
2/26/2010 15:45
2/26/2010 16:00
2/26/2010 16:15
2/26/2010 16:30
2/26/2010 16:45
2/26/2010 17:00
2/26/2010 17:15
2/26/2010 17:30
2/26/2010 17:45
2/26/2010 18:00
2/26/2010 18:15
2/26/2010 18:30
2/26/2010 18:45
2/26/2010 19:00
2/26/2010 19:15
2/26/2010 19:30
2/26/2010 19:45
2/26/2010 20:00
2/26/2010 20:15
2/26/2010 20:30
2/26/2010 20:45
2/26/2010 21:00
2/26/2010 21:15
2/26/2010 21:30
2/26/2010 21:45
2/26/2010 22:00
2/26/2010 22:15
2/26/2010 22:30
2/26/2010 22:45
2/26/2010 23:00
2/26/2010 23:15
2/26/2010 23:30
2/26/2010 23:45
2/26/2010 0:00
Total
PT Status
Time Coded Net Time
Date Indicator (for low
Slot Frequency Wh Retard/Advance
voltage indication)
2/27/2010 0:15
2/27/2010 0:30
2/27/2010 0:45
2/27/2010 1:00
2/27/2010 1:15
143
2/27/2010 1:30
2/27/2010 1:45
2/27/2010 2:00
2/27/2010 2:15
2/27/2010 2:30
2/27/2010 2:45
2/27/2010 3:00
2/27/2010 3:15
2/27/2010 3:30
2/27/2010 3:45
2/27/2010 4:00
2/27/2010 4:15
2/27/2010 4:30
2/27/2010 4:45
2/27/2010 5:00
2/27/2010 5:15
2/27/2010 5:30

144
SECTION-6
CHATPER-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 245 kV, 145 kV, 72.5 kV AND 36 kV BUS
POST INSULATOR
1. SCOPE
This specification covers design, Engineering, manufacture, stage testing, inspection and
testing before supply packing, forwarding and delivery at site/store of 245 kV, 145 kV, 72.5
kV & 36 kV outdoor type bus Post Insulators and its clamps as per quantities given in the
schedule of requirement for use on the 245 kV, 145 kV, 72.5 kV & 36 kV Grid S/Stns. to
support the bus bar at various switchyards under Haryana Vidyut Prasaran Nigam Limited.
It is not the intent to specify completely all the details of design and construction of the
insulator. However, the insulator shall conform in all respects to the high standard of
engineering design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous
commercial operation up to the Bidders guarantee in a manner acceptable to the Purchaser.
The equipment offered shall be complete with all components necessary for its effective and
trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed to be within the scope of supply
irrespective of whether those are specially brought out in this specification or not. All similar
parts particularly movable ones shall be interchangeable.
2. STANDARD
The Post Insulators and their Hardwares shall comply as regards general requirements, test
voltages and test with the latest edition of IS 2544/1973 IS-5350
(P-II) 1973 IS-5350 (P-III) 1971/IEC-168/1979 except in so far as the same may be modified
by this Specification.
3. TYPE AND RATING

The 245 kV, 145 kV, 72.5 kV & 36 kV Bus Post Insulators are required for outdoor-system
conforming to IS 2544/1973 or latest version thereof suitable for heavily polluted
atmosphere. The Post Insulators shall be specifically suitable to meet the particular
requirements of ultimate torsional strength and cantilever loads etc. which they will be called
upon to resist during service at the rated voltage.
The principal rating of bus Post Insulators shall be as under: -
Sr. Particulars Unit
No.
i. Nominal system voltage kV 220 132 66 33
ii. Highest system voltage kV 245 145 72.5 36
iii. Rated frequency 50+/-2.5H
iv. Minimum creepage distance mm 6125 3625 1813 900
v. One minute power kV(rms) 460 275 140 70
frequency withstand voltage
vi. Impulse withstand voltage kV(peak) 900 550 325 170
(+ve & -ve)
vii. Minimum visual discharge kV(rms) 154 - - -

voltage level (extinction)
145
viii. Radio interference voltage Micro >1000 >500 >500 >500
(Micro volt at 1 MHz) at a Volt
system voltage of 156 kV.
ix. Cantilever strength Kg. 600 400 400 400
(Upright)
x. Torsion strength nm 3000 3000 2000 1200
xi. Bending strength N 4000 4000 4000 1000
xii. Tensile strength N 70000 50000 35000 25000
xiii. Compressive strength N 140000 100000 70000 50000
xiv. Applicable standard IS: 5350, IS:2544, IEC 168
xv. Pitch Circle Dia:
a. Top mm 127 127 127 76
b. Bottom mm 225 178 127 76
xvi. Height of insulator mm 2300 1500 770 508
xvii. No. of Insulator per stack No. 2 1 1 1
4. CLIMATIC CONDITION
The climatic conditions are of extreme nature varying from extreme cold to dry to tropical
humid and to hot. The relative humidity may vary from 26% to 100% and the temperature
may vary from 2.5o C to 50o C with maximum to minimum condition of humidity stated
above.

ii) Max. Ambient air temp. 500C
iii) Min. Ambient air temp. -2.50C
iv) Daily average temp. 350C
v) Average number of dust storm days per annum 45
vi) Max. relative humidity 100%
vii) Min. relative humidity 26%
viii) Average annual rain fall 900mm
ix) Max. Wind pressure 195 kg/sqmt
x) Max. Altitude above man sea level 1000 mt.
xi) Isoceraunic level 45
xii) Seismic level (horizontal acceleration) 0.3g
xiii) Average number of rainy days per annum 120 days
Note: Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and fungus growth. The
climate conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient condition. Smoke is also
present in the atmosphere. Heavy lightening also occurs from June to October.

146
5. GENERAL REQUIREMENT
245 kV, 145 kV, 72.5 kV & 36 kV Bus Post Insulator shall be either solid core or polycon
type insulators complete with all fittings and accessories required for holding single bus bar
conductor ACSR 0.4 Sq. inch Zebra. The bus Post Insulator pedestal shall be suitable for
fixing on the supporting structure to be provided by the purchaser.
The bus Post Insulator shall be provided with a completely galvanised steel base designed for
mounting on the support structure to be provided by the purchaser. The base and mounting
arrangement shall be such that the insulator shall be rigid and self supporting and no guying
or cross bracings between phases shall be necessary.
Cap to be provided on top of the insulator shall be of high grade cast iron or malleable steel
casting. It shall be machine faced and hot dip galvanised. The cap shall have four nos. of
tapped holes spaced on a pitch circle diameter to accommodate the terminal clamp for
supporting the purchasers bus bars. The holes shall be suitable for bolts with threads having
anticorrosive protection. The effective depth of threads shall not be less than the nominal
diameter of the bolt.
The Post Insulator clamps are to be fitted on the top of the bus Post Insulator
for holding single conductor ACSR Zebra tightly and rigidly. The clamps shall be made of
Aluminium alloy and shall comply with relevant ISS. The clamps shall be supplied with
galvanised steel studs of the suitable size and maintain the requisite pressure to ensure good
and tight joint of low resistance.
The insulators shall be entirely free from sharp edges, ridges or points and shall not exhibit
appreciable corona formation during service.
Castings shall be free from blow holes, flaws, cracks and other defects and shall be smooth,
close grained and of true forms and dimensions.
The porcelain shall be white, finished brown glazed, non-porous of high di-electric,
mechanical and thermal strength, free from defects and thoroughly vitrified. Cement used
shall be of high quality, durable and high strength Portland cement. Cement is not to be
treated as an adhesive medium between the porcelain and metal parts of an insulator.
Preference will be given to a fixing medium of an approved metal alloy.
Cement shall be a replenishment material for filling gap between the porcelain and metal
parts to fix them.
6. GALVANISING
All the ferrous metal parts shall be hot dip galvanised smoothly, as per IS 3638 (as amended
up to date). IS 2633 or any other equivalent authoritative standard. The material shall be
galvanised only after shop operations upon it have been completed. The metal parts before
galvanising should be thoroughly cleaned of any paint, grease, rust, scales or alkalis, or any
foreign deposit which are likely to come in the way of galvanising process. The metal parts
coating shall withstand minimum four for one minute dips in copper sulphate solution as per
IEC-168.

147
The bus Post Insulator unit shall be assembled in a suitable jig to ensure correct positioning
of the top and bottom metal fittings relative to one another. The faces of the metal fittings
shall be parallel and at right angles to the axis of the insulator and the corresponding holes in
insulator.
All nuts, bolts and spring washers etc. required for the assembly of the complete insulator
stack shall be in tenderers scope of supply. The bolts and nuts shall be hot dip galvanised
and shall be of high strength generally conforming to IS-136 or any other equivalent
international standard.
7. TESTS
7.1 Type Tests
All the equipments offered shall be fully type tested as per the relevant standards. In case the
equipment of the type and design offered, has already been type tested, the tenderer shall
furnish four sets of the type test reports along with the offer. The purchaser reserves the right
to demand repetition of some or all the type tests in the presence of purchasers
representative. For any change in the design/type, already type tested viz-a-viz the
design/type offered against this Specification the purchaser reserves the right to demand
repetition of tests without any extra cost. In case the equipments have not been type tested
earlier all the type tests as per relevant standards shall be carried out by the successful
tenderer in the presence of purchasers representative without any extra cost.
7.2 Acceptance and Routine Tests

7.2.1 All the acceptance and routine tests as stipulated in the relevant standards shall be carried out
by the supplier in the presence of purchasers representative. No material shall be dispatched
without the approval of test certificates.
8. INSPECTION
The inspection may be carried by the purchaser at any stage of manufacture. The successful
tenderer shall grant free access to the purchasers representative at a reasonable time when
the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under this Specification
by the purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of furnishing equipment in
accordance with the Specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment
is found to be defective.
The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance about the manufacturing
The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/routine testing of the
bought out items.
9. GUARANTEED DATA
Guaranteed technical particulars and other technical data in respect of equipment/material offered should be furnished duly signed
along with the tender in the performa given in Vol-III. Any other particulars considered necessary may also be given in addition to
those listed in the schedule.
10. DRAWING AND LITERATURE

The bidder shall submit four sets of final version of all the above drawings for Purchaser's
approval alongwith the tender in a separate seal cover. These drawings will be opened in the
event of order. The Purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the
Supplier within four weeks of the issue of LOI. The successful bidder will re-submit such
drawing(s) duly reflecting the purchasers comments within two weeks of their receipt, which
will be approved by the purchaser within two weeks. The successful bidder shall supply 6
148
copies each of the approved drawing and descriptive literature containing handling, erection &
maintenance instructions CE/D&P, HVPNL, Panchkula for distribution amongst field
organisation. Reproducible(s) of the approved drawing(s) will also be supplied by the
successful bidder.
Also, a copy each of the drawing(s) & descriptive literature will accompany the equipment for
use by the stores/field offices drawing it for application on Nigams power system.
11. MARKING
Each porcelain insulator unit shall legibly and indelibly be marked to show the following: -
a) Name or Trade Mark of the manufacture.
b) Month and year of manufacture.
c) Country of manufacture.
Marking on the porcelain shall be printed and shall be applied before firing.
12. PACKING AND FORWARDING
12.1 The equipments shall be packed in crates suitable to withstand handling during transport and
outdoor storage during transit. The supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the
equipment during transit, due to improper and inadequate packing. The easily damageable
material shall be carefully packed and marked with the appropriate caution symbols.
Wherever necessary, proper arrangement for lifting, such as lifting hooks etc. shall be
provided. Any material found short inside the packing cases shall be supplied by supplier
without any extra cost.
12.2 Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the following
information: -
b) Details of the consignment.
c) Destination.
e) Sign showing upper/lower side of the crate.
f) Handling and unpacking instructions.
g) Bill of material indicating contents of each package.

149
ANNEXURE A
SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENT
Total
Sr.No. Description of material Requirement
1 245 kV Post Insulators as per technical details specified Nos.
3 72.5 kV Post Insulators as per technical details specified Nos.
NOTE: The purchaser reserves the right to increase or decrease the number of post insulators than
those provided above at the time of placing the order.

150
SECTION-6
CHATPER-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 245 kV, 145 kV, 72.5 kV AND 36 kV BUS
POST INSULATOR
4. SCOPE
This specification covers design, Engineering, manufacture, stage testing, inspection and
testing before supply packing, forwarding and delivery at site/store of 245 kV, 145 kV, 72.5
kV & 36 kV outdoor type bus Post Insulators and its clamps as per quantities given in the
schedule of requirement for use on the 245 kV, 145 kV, 72.5 kV & 36 kV Grid S/Stns. to
support the bus bar at various switchyards under Haryana Vidyut Prasaran Nigam Limited.
It is not the intent to specify completely all the details of design and construction of the
insulator. However, the insulator shall conform in all respects to the high standard of
engineering design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous
commercial operation up to the Bidders guarantee in a manner acceptable to the Purchaser.
The equipment offered shall be complete with all components necessary for its effective and
trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed to be within the scope of supply
irrespective of whether those are specially brought out in this specification or not. All similar
parts particularly movable ones shall be interchangeable.
5. STANDARD
The Post Insulators and their Hardwares shall comply as regards general requirements, test
voltages and test with the latest edition of IS 2544/1973 IS-5350
(P-II) 1973 IS-5350 (P-III) 1971/IEC-168/1979 except in so far as the same may be modified
by this Specification.
6. TYPE AND RATING

The 245 kV, 145 kV, 72.5 kV & 36 kV Bus Post Insulators are required for outdoor-system
conforming to IS 2544/1973 or latest version thereof suitable for heavily polluted
atmosphere. The Post Insulators shall be specifically suitable to meet the particular
requirements of ultimate torsional strength and cantilever loads etc. which they will be called
upon to resist during service at the rated voltage.
The principal rating of bus Post Insulators shall be as under: -
Sr. Particulars Unit
No.
i. Nominal system voltage kV 220 132 66 33
ii. Highest system voltage kV 245 145 72.5 36
iii. Rated frequency 50+/-2.5H
iv. Minimum creepage distance mm 6125 3625 1813 900
v. One minute power kV(rms) 460 275 140 70
frequency withstand voltage
vi. Impulse withstand voltage kV(peak) 900 550 325 170
(+ve & -ve)
vii. Minimum visual discharge kV(rms) 154 - - -

voltage level (extinction)
viii. Radio interference voltage Micro >1000 >500 >500 >500

(Micro volt at 1 MHz) at a Volt
151
system voltage of 156 kV.
ix. Cantilever strength Kg. 600 400 400 400
(Upright)
x. Torsion strength nm 3000 3000 2000 1200
xi. Bending strength N 4000 4000 4000 1000
xii. Tensile strength N 70000 50000 35000 25000
xiii. Compressive strength N 140000 100000 70000 50000
xiv. Applicable standard IS: 5350, IS:2544, IEC 168
xv. Pitch Circle Dia:
a. Top mm 127 127 127 76
b. Bottom mm 225 178 127 76
xvi. Height of insulator mm 2300 1500 770 508
xvii. No. of Insulator per stack No. 2 1 1 1
4. CLIMATIC CONDITION
The climatic conditions are of extreme nature varying from extreme cold to dry to tropical
humid and to hot. The relative humidity may vary from 26% to 100% and the temperature
may vary from 2.5o C to 50o C with maximum to minimum condition of humidity stated
above.

ii) Max. Ambient air temp. 500C
iii) Min. Ambient air temp. -2.50C
iv) Daily average temp. 350C
v) Average number of dust storm days per annum 45
vi) Max. relative humidity 100%
vii) Min. relative humidity 26%
viii) Average annual rain fall 900mm
ix) Max. Wind pressure 195 kg/sqmt
x) Max. Altitude above man sea level 1000 mt.
xi) Isoceraunic level 45
xii) Seismic level (horizontal acceleration) 0.3g
xiii) Average number of rainy days per annum 120 days
Note: Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and fungus growth. The
climate conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient condition. Smoke is also
present in the atmosphere. Heavy lightening also occurs from June to October.

152
5. GENERAL REQUIREMENT
245 kV, 145 kV, 72.5 kV & 36 kV Bus Post Insulator shall be either solid core or polycon
type insulators complete with all fittings and accessories required for holding single bus bar
conductor ACSR 0.4 Sq. inch Zebra. The bus Post Insulator pedestal shall be suitable for
fixing on the supporting structure to be provided by the purchaser.
The bus Post Insulator shall be provided with a completely galvanised steel base designed for
mounting on the support structure to be provided by the purchaser. The base and mounting
arrangement shall be such that the insulator shall be rigid and self supporting and no guying
or cross bracings between phases shall be necessary.
Cap to be provided on top of the insulator shall be of high grade cast iron or malleable steel
casting. It shall be machine faced and hot dip galvanised. The cap shall have four nos. of
tapped holes spaced on a pitch circle diameter to accommodate the terminal clamp for
supporting the purchasers bus bars. The holes shall be suitable for bolts with threads having
anticorrosive protection. The effective depth of threads shall not be less than the nominal
diameter of the bolt.
The Post Insulator clamps are to be fitted on the top of the bus Post Insulator
for holding single conductor ACSR Zebra tightly and rigidly. The clamps shall be made of
Aluminium alloy and shall comply with relevant ISS. The clamps shall be supplied with
galvanised steel studs of the suitable size and maintain the requisite pressure to ensure good
and tight joint of low resistance.
The insulators shall be entirely free from sharp edges, ridges or points and shall not exhibit
appreciable corona formation during service.
Castings shall be free from blow holes, flaws, cracks and other defects and shall be smooth,
close grained and of true forms and dimensions.
The porcelain shall be white, finished brown glazed, non-porous of high di-electric,
mechanical and thermal strength, free from defects and thoroughly vitrified. Cement used
shall be of high quality, durable and high strength Portland cement. Cement is not to be
treated as an adhesive medium between the porcelain and metal parts of an insulator.
Preference will be given to a fixing medium of an approved metal alloy.
Cement shall be a replenishment material for filling gap between the porcelain and metal
parts to fix them.
6. GALVANISING
All the ferrous metal parts shall be hot dip galvanised smoothly, as per IS 3638 (as amended
up to date). IS 2633 or any other equivalent authoritative standard. The material shall be
galvanised only after shop operations upon it have been completed. The metal parts before
galvanising should be thoroughly cleaned of any paint, grease, rust, scales or alkalis, or any
foreign deposit which are likely to come in the way of galvanising process. The metal parts
coating shall withstand minimum four for one minute dips in copper sulphate solution as per
IEC-168.

153
The bus Post Insulator unit shall be assembled in a suitable jig to ensure correct positioning
of the top and bottom metal fittings relative to one another. The faces of the metal fittings
shall be parallel and at right angles to the axis of the insulator and the corresponding holes in
insulator.
All nuts, bolts and spring washers etc. required for the assembly of the complete insulator
stack shall be in tenderers scope of supply. The bolts and nuts shall be hot dip galvanised
and shall be of high strength generally conforming to IS-136 or any other equivalent
international standard.
7. TESTS
7.1 Type Tests
All the equipments offered shall be fully type tested as per the relevant standards. In case the
equipment of the type and design offered, has already been type tested, the tenderer shall
furnish four sets of the type test reports along with the offer. The purchaser reserves the right
to demand repetition of some or all the type tests in the presence of purchasers
representative. For any change in the design/type, already type tested viz-a-viz the
design/type offered against this Specification the purchaser reserves the right to demand
repetition of tests without any extra cost. In case the equipments have not been type tested
earlier all the type tests as per relevant standards shall be carried out by the successful
tenderer in the presence of purchasers representative without any extra cost.
7.2 Acceptance and Routine Tests

7.2.1 All the acceptance and routine tests as stipulated in the relevant standards shall be carried out
by the supplier in the presence of purchasers representative. No material shall be dispatched
without the approval of test certificates.
8. INSPECTION
The inspection may be carried by the purchaser at any stage of manufacture. The successful
tenderer shall grant free access to the purchasers representative at a reasonable time when
the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under this Specification
by the purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of furnishing equipment in
accordance with the Specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment
is found to be defective.
The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance about the manufacturing
The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/routine testing of the
bought out items.
9. GUARANTEED DATA
Guaranteed technical particulars and other technical data in respect of equipment/material offered should be furnished duly signed
along with the tender in the performa given in Vol-III. Any other particulars considered necessary may also be given in addition to
those listed in the schedule.
10. DRAWING AND LITERATURE

The bidder shall submit four sets of final version of all the above drawings for Purchaser's
approval alongwith the tender in a separate seal cover. These drawings will be opened in the
event of order. The Purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the
Supplier within four weeks of the issue of LOI. The successful bidder will re-submit such
drawing(s) duly reflecting the purchasers comments within two weeks of their receipt, which
will be approved by the purchaser within two weeks. The successful bidder shall supply 6
154
copies each of the approved drawing and descriptive literature containing handling, erection &
maintenance instructions CE/D&P, HVPNL, Panchkula for distribution amongst field
organisation. Reproducible(s) of the approved drawing(s) will also be supplied by the
successful bidder.
Also, a copy each of the drawing(s) & descriptive literature will accompany the equipment for
use by the stores/field offices drawing it for application on Nigams power system.
11. MARKING
Each porcelain insulator unit shall legibly and indelibly be marked to show the following: -
d) Name or Trade Mark of the manufacture.
e) Month and year of manufacture.
f) Country of manufacture.
Marking on the porcelain shall be printed and shall be applied before firing.
12. PACKING AND FORWARDING
12.1 The equipments shall be packed in crates suitable to withstand handling during transport and
outdoor storage during transit. The supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the
equipment during transit, due to improper and inadequate packing. The easily damageable
material shall be carefully packed and marked with the appropriate caution symbols.
Wherever necessary, proper arrangement for lifting, such as lifting hooks etc. shall be
provided. Any material found short inside the packing cases shall be supplied by supplier
without any extra cost.
12.2 Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the following
information: -
h) Name of the consignee.
i) Details of the consignment.
j) Destination.
k) Total weight of consignment.
l) Sign showing upper/lower side of the crate.
m) Handling and unpacking instructions.
n) Bill of material indicating contents of each package.

155
ANNEXURE A
Total
Sr.No. Description of material Requirement
3 72.5 kV Post Insulators as per technical details specified Nos.
NOTE: The purchaser reserves the right to increase or decrease the number of post insulators than
those provided above at the time of placing the order.

156
SECTION-3
CHAPTER-3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR220V DC BATTERY CHARGER WITH 20AMP.

FLOAT AND 30AMP. BOOST
1. Battery Charger
The DC system for 220V DC is unearthed. The Battery Chargers as well as their
automatic regulators shall be of static type and shall be compatible with VRLA
batteries. All battery chargers shall be capable of continuous operation at the
respective rated load in float charging mode, i.e. Float charging the associated Lead-
Acid Batteries at 2.13 to 2.27 Volts per cell while supplying the DC load. The
chargers shall also be capable of Boost charging the associated DC battery at 2.28
to 2.32 volts per cell at the desired rate.
Charger shall regulate the float/boost voltage in case of prescribed temperature rise
of battery as per manufacturers recommendation to avoid thermal runaway.
Necessary temperature sensors shall be provided in mid location of battery banks
and shall be wired up to the respective charger for feedback control. The
manufacturer shall demonstrate this feature during testing of each charger.
Each of the two chargers in this float-cum-boost charger for float mode & for boost
mode shall be provided with independnet transformer & associated circuitary.
1.1 The battery chargers shall be provided with facility for both automatic and manual
control of output voltage and current. A selector switch shall be provided for
selecting the mode of output voltage/current control, whether automatic or manual.
When on automatic control mode during float charging the chargers output voltage
shall remain within + 1% of the set value, for AC input voltage variation of + 1%
frequency variation of + 5% a combined voltage and frequency variation of + 1% and
a DC load variation from zero to full load.
1.2 All battery chargers shall have a constant voltage characteristics throughout the
range (from zero to full load) at the floating value of the voltage so as to keep the
battery fully charged but without harmful overcharge.
1.3 All chargers shall have load limiters having drooping characteristics, which shall
cause, when the voltage control is in automatic mode, a gradual lowering of the
output voltage whet eh DC load current exceeds the Load limiter setting of the
Charger. The Load-limiter characteristics shall be such that any sustained overload
or short circuit in DC system shall not charge the Charger nor shall it cause blowing
of any of the Charger fuses. The Charger shall not trip on overload or external short
circuit.
1.4 Uniform and step less adjustments of voltage setting (in both manual and automatic
modes) shall be provided on the front of the Charger panel covering the entire float
charging output range specified. Step less adjustments of the Load-limiter setting
shall also be possible from 80% to 100% of the rated output current for Charging
mode.
1.5 During Boot Charging, the Battery Charger shall operate on constant current mode
(when automatic regulator is in service). It shall be possible to adjust the Boost
charging current continuously over a range of 50 to 100% of the rated output current
for Boost charging mode.
The Charger output voltage shall automatically go on rising, when it is operating on

Boost mode, as the Battery Chargers up. For limiting the output voltage of the
157
Charger, a potentiometer shall be provided on the front of the panel, whereby it shall
be possible to set the upper limit of this voltage any where in the output range
specified for Boost Charging mode
1.6 The Charger manufacturer may offer an arrangement in which the voltage setting
device for Float charging mode is also used as output voltage limit setting device for
Boost charging mode and the Load-limiter of Float charging mode is used as current
setting device in boost charging mode.
1.7 Suitable filter circuits shall be provided in all the chargers to limit the ripple content (
Peak to Peak) in the output voltage to 1% irrespective of the DC load level, when
they are not connected to a battery.
1.8 The charger shall be capable of delivering 20A in float mode & 30A in boost mode
separately at rated voltage.
1.9 MCCB
All Battery Chargers shall have 2 Nos. MCCBs on the input side to receive cables
from two sources. Mechanical interlock should be provided such that only one shall
be closed at a time. It shall be of P2 duty and suitable for continuous duty MCCBs
should have auxiliary contacts for annunciation.
1.10 Rectifier Transformer
The rectifier transformer shall be continuously rated, dry air cooled (A.N) an of class
F insulation type. The rating of the rectifier transformer shall have 10% overload
capacity.
1.11 Rectifier Assembly
The rectifier assembly shall be fully/half controlled bridge type and shall be designed
to meet the duty as required by the respective charger. The rectifier shall be
provided with heat sink having their own heat dissipation arrangements with natural
air cooling. Necessary surge protection devices and rectifier type test acting HRC
fuses shall be provided in each arm of the rectifier connections.
1.12 Instruments
One AC voltmeter and one AC ammeter along with selector switches shall be
provided for all chargers. One DC voltmeter and DC ammeter (with shunt) shall be
provided for all chargers. The instruments shall be flush type, dust proof and
moisture resistant. The instruments shall have easily accessible means for zero
adjustment. The instruments shall be of 15 accuracy class. In addition to the above a
centre zero voltmeter with selector switch shall also be provided for 220 V Chargers
for testing purpose.
1.13 Air Break Switches
One DC output switch shall be provided in all chargers. They shall be air break type
suitable for 500 Volts AC/ 250 DC. The contacts of the switches shall open and
close with a snap action. The operating handle of the switch shall be fully insulated
from circuit. ON and OFF position on the switch shall be clearly indicated. Rating
158
of switches shall be suitable for their continuous load. Alternatively, MCCBs of
suitable ratings shall also acceptable in place of Air Break Switch.
1.14 Fuses
All fuses shall be HRC Link type. Fuses shall be mounted on fuse carriers which are
in turn mounted on fuse bases. Wherever it is not possible to mount fuses on
carriers, fuses shall be directly mounted on plug-in type base. In such case one
insulated fuse pulling handle shall be supplied for each charger. Fuse rating shall be
chosen by the Bidder depending on the circuit requirement. All fuses in the chargers
shall be monitored. Fuse failure annunciation shall be provided on the failure of any
fuse.
1.15 Blocking Diode
Blocking diode shall be provided in the positive pole of the output circuit of each
charger to prevent current flow from the DC battery into the charger.
1.16 Annunciation System
Audio-visual indications through bright LEDs shall be provided in all Chargers for the
following abnormalities:-
a) AC Power failure.
b) Rectifier/chargers fuse blown.
c) Over voltage across the battery when boost charging.
d) Abnormal voltage (High/Low)
e) Any other annunciation if required
Potential free NO contacts of above abnormal conditions shall also be provided for
common remote indication CHARGER TROUBLE in Owners Control Board.
Indication for charger in float mode and boost mode through indication lamps shall
be provided for chargers. A Potential free contact for float/boost mode shall be
provided for external interlocks.
1.17 Name Plates and Marking
The name plates shall be white with black engraved letters. On top of each Charger,
on front as well as rear sides, larger and bold name plates shall be provided to
identify the Charger. Name plates with full and clear inscriptions shall also be
provided on and inside of the panels for identification of the various equipments and
ease of operation and maintenance.
1.18 Charger Construction
The Chargers shall be indoor, floor-mounted, self-supporting sheet metal enclosed

cubicle type. The Contractor shall supply all necessary base frames, anchor bolts
and hardware. The Chargers shall be fabricated from 2.0mm cold rolled sheet steel
and shall have folded type of construction. Removable gland plates for all cables
and lugs for power cables shall be supplied by the Contractor. The lugs for power
cables shall be made of electrolytic copper with tin coat. Power cable sizes shall be
advised to the Contractor at a later date for provision of suitable lugs and drilling of
gland plates. The Charger shall be tropicalised and vermin proof. Ventilation louvers,
if provided shall be backed with screens. All doors and covers shall be fitted with
159
synthetic rubber gaskets. The chargers shall have hinged double leaf doors provided
on front and on backside for adequate access to the Chargers internals. All the
charger cubicle doors shall be properly earthed. The degree of protection of Charger
enclosure shall be at least IP-42 as per IS: 13947 Part -1.
1.18.1 All indicating instruments, control switches and indicating lamps shall be mounted on
the front side of the Charger.
1.18.2 Each Charger shall be furnished completely wired upto power cable lugs and
terminal blocks and ready for external connections. The control wiring shall be
carried out with PVC insulated, 1.5 sq.mm. stranded copper wired. Control terminals
shall be suitable for connecting two wires, with 2.5 sq.mm stranded copper
conductors. All terminals shall be numbered for ease of connections and
identification. Each wire shall bare a ferrule or tag on each end for identification. At
least 20% spare terminals shall be provided for control circuits.
1.18.3 The insulation of all circuits, except the low voltage electronic circuits shall withstand
test voltage of 2 KV AC for one minute. An air clearance of at least ten (10) mm shall
be maintained throughout for such circuits, right up to the terminal lugs. Whenever
this clearance is not available, the live parts shall be insulated or shrouded.
1.19 Painting
All sheet steel work shall be pre-treated in tanks, in accordance with IS:6005
Degreasing shall be done by alkaline cleaning. Rust and scale shall be removed by
pickling with acid. After pickling, the parts shall be washed in running water. Then
these shall be rinsed in slightly alkaline hot water and dried. The phosphate coating
shall be Class-C as specified in IS:6005. Welding shall not be done after
phosphating. The phosphating surfaces shall be rinsed and passivated prior to
application of stoved lead oxide primer coating. After primer application, two coats of
finishing synthetic enamel paint of shade -692 (smoke grey) of IS-5 shall be applied,
unless required otherwise by the Owner. The inside of the chargers shall be glossy
white. Each coat of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall be properly staved. The
paint thickness shall not be less than fifty (50) microns.
1.20 TESTS
1.20.1 Battery Chargers shall conform to all type tests as per relevant Indian Standard
Performance test on the Chargers as per Specification shall also be carried out on
each charger as per specification. Rectifier transformer shall conform to all type tests
in IS:4540 and short circuit test as per IS:2026. Following type tests shall be carried
out for compliance of specification requirements:-
i) Voltage regulation test.

ii) Load limiter characteristics test
iii) Efficiency tests
iv) High voltage tests
v) Temperature rise test
vi) Short circuit test at no load and full load at rated voltage for sustained
short-circuit.
vii) Degree of protection test
viii) Measurement of ripple by oscilloscope.
ix) Temperature compensation feature demonstration
1.20.2 The contractor may be required to demonstrate to the OWNER that the chargers
conform to the specification particularly regarding continuous rating, ripple free
160
output, voltage regulation and load limiting characteristic, before despatch as
well as after installation at site. At site the following tests shall be carried out:-
i) Insulation resistance test

ii) Checking of proper annunciation system operation
1.20.3 If a Charger fails to meet the specified requirements, the Contractor shall replace
the same with appropriate Charger without affecting the commissioning schedule
of the Sub-Station, and without any extra cost to the OWNER.
1.20.4 The Contractor shall present for inspection, the type and routine test certificates
for the following components whenever required by the OWNER.
(i) Switches
(ii) Relays/MCCBs
(iii) Instruments
(iv) DC fuses
(v) SCR
(vi) Diodes
(vii) Condensers
(viii) Potentiometers
(ix) Semiconductor
(x) Annunciator
(xi) Control wiring
(xii) Push buttons and contactors
Makes of above equipment shall be subject to Owners approval.

161
SECTION-6
CHAPTER 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF
D.C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD.
1. SCOPE:
This specification provides for design, Engineering, manufacture, stage testing,
inspection and testing before dispatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at site of
D.C. Distribution Board, complete with all fittings accessories and associated
auxiliary equipment mandatory which are required for efficient and trouble free
operation as per specified here under.
It is not the intent to specify completely all the details of design and construction of
equipment. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to the high standard
purchaser. The equipment offered shall be complete in all component necessary for
its effective and trouble free operation along with associated equipment interlocks
protection scheme etc. Such components shall be deemed to be within the scope of
supply irrespective of whether those are specially brought out in this Specification
and or the commercial order or not. All similar parts particularly movable ones shall
be interchangeable.
As per Section-I Vol-II.
1.03 STANDARD:
All material and equipment shall comply in every respect with the requirements of the latest
edition of the relevant Indian Standard IS:1651.
1.04 MANUFACTURE AND WORKMANSHIP:
All the material used in the construction of the equipment shall be of the best quality
obtainable of their respective kinds and whole of the work shall be of the highest class, well
finished and of approved design and make. Casting shall be free from blow holes, flaws and
of the true form and dimensions.
All machined surfaces shall be true and smooth and well finished.
1.05 DUTY AND GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS:
The power for the charging apparatus shall be given through an independent 4-core cable
connection from an A.C. 50 cycles 3 phase 415 10% volts switchboard fed from a Station
Transformer. D.C. Distribution shall be through fuse protected rotary switches mounted on a
separate distribution board.
1.06 TYPE OF EQUIPMENT:
All equipment shall be located indoors. D.C. Distribution panel are to be mounted on the
floor in the control room adjacent to the Battery room.
Necessary doors and screens shall be provided wherever required. All equipment shall be
vermin proof. The overall design of the entire equipment should be adequate for the duty in
view to ensure trouble free and dependable service.
The various cables for D.C. Distribution circuits, which are to be arranged by the Bidder shall
have P.V.C. insulation. The conductors may be of copper or aluminum. All panel wiring to be
provided by the supplier, shall consist of suitable colored/marked P.V.C. insulated cables.
1.07 BUS BARS AND SUPPORTS:
The bus bars shall be of aluminium having adequate cross-sections. The bus bars shall be so
designed and mounted that their expansion and contraction does not subject, either the Bus

162
Bars or their supports, to any stresses. All bus bars and connections shall be duly marked and
colored for identification.

163
1.08 INSTRUMENTS:
All instruments shall have 96 sq mm dials and flush mounted on the panels. Moving coil
spring controlled instruments shall be used except those for A.C. which may be of the moving
iron type. The error of indication shall not exceed 1% throughout the effective range of the
meter.
1.09 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DESIGNS:
The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for co-ordinate and adequate design and shall
conform to the best engineering practice for the operating conditions specified. In case the
equipment covered by this specification is to be co-ordinate with other equipment, the Bidder
shall furnish complete information and data as may be desired by the purchaser.
1.10 GROUNDING:
All metal parts should be grounded according to Indian Electricity Rules. Main ground Bus
shall be provided by the purchaser. Special grounding lugs of adequate size shall be provided
by the supplier on the charging equipment.
1.11 INTER CHANGEABILITY:
Corresponding parts of plant and equipment shall be made to gauge or jig and shall be
interchangeable in every respect.
1.12 DOCUMENTATION
The successful bidder shall submit four sets of drawings for HVPNL approval.
The following drawing shall be supplied with the tender: -
i) Outline drawings of all apparatus showing sufficient details to enable the purchaser
to determine whether the design proposed can be installed satisfactorily or not.
1.13 FOUNDATIONS AND FIXINGS:

All plants and equipment shall be provided with a complete set of foundation holding down
bolts, washers, nuts plants and other fixture as may be required and these shall be supplied by
the Bidder. These fittings will be fixed by the purchaser in the foundations unless otherwise
specified. All foundation bolts, fixtures etc. shall be supplied as soon as possible after the
contract drawings have been approved.
1.14 INSTRUCTION AND MARKING PLATES:
All gauges, meters, instruments etc. shall have dials or scales calibrated in metric system of
units. All name plates, instruction plate, warning signs and any marking what-so-ever on the
equipment and its parts and accessories shall be in Hindi-English Language, using idioms,
words and meaning as in current use in India.
In order to facilitate sorting and erection at site every part of the plant and equipment shall be
suitably marked.
1.15 TROPICAL TREATMENT & PAINT:
All corrodible parts and surfaces shall be of such material and shall be provided with such
paint or other protective finish that no part of the installed equipment shall be injuriously
affected by the atmospheric moisture, heat and fumes. The panels shall be finally painted
with light grey paint having shade No.631 of IS:5 with stove enameled finish.
1.16 PLACE OF MANUFACTURE AND INSPECTION:
The Bidder shall state in his tender the place(s) of manufacture, testing and inspection of the
various portions of the work included in the tender. The purchaser or his duly authorised
agent shall have access to the Bidder's or sub Bidder's work at any time during working hours
for the purpose of inspecting the manufacture and testing of materials, equipment and
completed plant and the Bidder shall provide the necessary facilities for inspection.
1.17 TESTS:
1.17.1 Type Tests
The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven years old
reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited
laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or
164
i) Verification of constructional requirements
ii) Verification of marking
iii) Verification of dimensions
1.17.2 Routine Tests
1.17.3 Acceptance Tests
The following acceptance tests for DCDB shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of
HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL.
i) Dimension test
ii) Visual check test
iii) quantative check
iv) Functional checks
v) wiring HV Test
vi) Insulation resistance test
1.17.4 SAMPLING SCHEME AND CRITERIA FOR ACCEPTANCE:

The sampling scheme and criteria for acceptance for cells up to and including 600 AH
capacity shall be in accordance with clause 5 1.4 of IS-8320-1976. The sampling scheme for
cells of higher capacities shall be subject to agreement between the user and the
manufacturer.
1.18 SPARE PARTS :-
The Bidder shall quote separately in his tender for spare parts as he world recommend for the
main maintenance operation of the equipment for the period of 5 years. Of detailed list of
such spares parts which item wise prices shall be given under schedule of requirement and
prices. The purchaser may order spares subsequently as may be finally decided upon, at the
rates given in the tender. All spares parts shall be interchangeable and shall be of same make
material and both workmanship as the corresponding parts furnished with the main
equipment.
1.19 DETAILS OF TECHNICAL PARTICULARS AND SPECIFICATION:
Details of the technical particulars and specification required have been given in
Appendix (b). Any other particulars considered necessary by the supplier may also be given
in addition to the above listed in Data requirement sheet.
1.20 COMPLETENESS OF EQUIPMENT:
Any fittings, accessories or apparatus which may not have been specifically mentioned in the
specification, but which are usually necessary in the equipment shall be deemed to be
included in the contract and shall be supplied by the Bidder without extra cost.

165
APPENDIX 'A'
D.C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD:
The D.C. Distribution Board shall be housed in a sheet steel cubicle with adequate ventilation and
it should be vermin proof as far as possible and should be provided with louvers for ventilation
backed by fine wire mesh, which applies to both charging equipment and D.C. Distribution Board.
The DCDB shall match with the battery charging equipment and should be complete with bus bars
of suitable capacity, wiring, rating plates, glands and fixing bolts. The minimum size of cubical
should be 600X700X1600 mm. The following components shall be provided on the D.C.
distribution board:
FOR 200 AH & 100 AH BATTERIES

1. Double pole ON/OFF rotary switch of 200 Amps. for 200 AH rating Battery with 2 1 set
Nos. HRC fuses of 100 Amps
2. Moving coil ammeter of 96mm sq. and range 0-200 amps. for 200 AH battery for 1 No
measuring the load on the bus.
3. Change over contactor :
a) 20 Amps. for 200 AH battery change over contractor AC/DC for switching indication 1 No
over to DC. On failure of AC supply and also for emergency pilot light in the event of
AC failure.
b) 10 Amps HRC fuses for pilot light 2 Nos.
4. Double pole D.C. Rotary switches with HRC fuses for each of following feeders:
a) 220 kV closing supply of 50 Amps, capacity 1 No.
b) 132 kV closing supply 50 Amp. Capacity 1 No.
c) 66 kV -do- 1 No.
d) 33 kV -do- 1 No.
e) 11 kV closing supply 100 Amps. capacity 1 No.
f & g) spare 100 Amp. Capacity 2 Nos.
h & i) spare 50 Amp. capacity 2 Nos.
5. Double pole D.C. rotary switch of 10 Amps. rating with 10 Amp. HRC fuses for each
of the following feeders:
a) 11 kV Tripping supply 10 Amp capacity 1 No.
b) 33 kV -do- 1 No.
c) 66 kV -do- 1 No.
d) 132 kV -do- 1 No.
e) 220 kV -do- 1 No.
f) Carrier telephone 10 Amp. capacity 1 No.
g) 33 kV Relay & Board panel 10 Amp. capacity 1 No.
h) 66 kV Relay & Board panel 10 Amp. capacity 1 No.

166
i) 132 kV Relay & Board panel 10 Amp capacity 1 No.
j) 220 kV Relay & Board panel 10 amp. capacity 1 No.
k) Spare 10 Amp capacity 3 Nos.
All the instruments shall be of flush mounted type. The rotary switches shall also be
flush mounted except for the protection portion in the panels. All switches shall be
mounted on the front panel and all the HRC fuses together with their fuse fittings on
the front panel but within a chamber that can be opened by half doors, to occasion
accessibility to the fuses. The various components shall be of the best quality and from
reputed manufacturers. The layout of components, wiring workmanship reliability etc.
shall be of the best quality. Adequate room should be provided within the charger/DC
distribution board cubicles for easy accessibility of components and also to facilitate
ventilation.

167
SECTION-6
CHAPTER - 5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 415 VOLTS MCCB AC DISTRIBUTION BOARD.
1.0 SCOPE :
This specification covers design, Engineering, manufacture, stage testing,
inspection and testing before despatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at site
of 415 Volts AC LT MCCB Board complete with all fittings, accessories and
associated auxiliary equipment mandatory spares as per Annexure A which are
required for efficient and trouble free operation as specified hereunder.
It is not the intent to specify herein all the details of design and construction of
equipments. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to the high
standards of engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of
performing in continuous commercial operation up to the Bidders guarantee in a
manner acceptable to the Purchaser. The equipment offered shall be complete
with all components necessary for its effective and trouble free operation along
with associated equipment, interlocks protection schemes etc. irrespective of
whether those are specially brought out in this specification and commercially
added or not. All similar parts particularly movable ones shall be
interchangeable.
The equipment is required to operate satisfactorily under the following site
conditions:-
i) Max. Temperature 500C
ii) Min. Temperature -2.50C
iii) Relativehumidity
a) Max. 100%
b) Min. 26%
iv) Average number of rainy days per Nearly 120 days
annum
v) Average rain fall per year. 900 mm
vi) Average number of dust storm days 35
per annum
vii) Isoceraunic level 45
viii) Max. Wind pressures 195 kg/sqmt.
ix) Altitude above mean sea level Less than 1000 mt.
1.03 STANDARDS:
The metal clad (preferably sheet metal) MCCB Board to be supplied against this
Specification shall meet with the requirements laid down in IS: 13947 Part-
2(latest edition). All MCCB shall be of P2 duty. MCCB shall be flush mounted on
the AC distribution boards. MCCBs shall be provided with thermo-magnetic type
release for over current and short circuit protection. The setting of the thermal
release shall be adjustable between 75% to 100% of the rated current. The MCCB
shall have breaking capacity not less than 20 kA. MCCBs used for ACDB
incomers shall be equipped with stored energy mechanism for electrical closing
and tripping. All other MCCBs shall be manually operated. The operating handle
should give a clear trip indication.
All other equipments shall also comply with the requirements of the latest edition
of the respective Indian Standards.
1.04 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP:
All the materials used in the construction of the equipment shall be of the best
quality obtainable of their respective kinds and whole of the work shall be of the
highest class, well finished and of approved design and make of the true form
and dimensions.
1.05 INTER CHANGEABILITY:
Corresponding parts of plant and equipment shall be made to gauge or jig and
shall be interchangeable in every respect.
168
1.06 DOCUMENTATION
NOTE: All above drawings should be a minimum space (14x10cm) for stamping the approval
of drawings by HVPNL.
1.07 FOUNDATIONS AND FIXINGS:
All plants and equipment shall be provided with a complete set of foundation
holding down bolts, washers, nuts plants and other fixtures as may be required
and these shall be supplied by the contractor. These fittings will be fixed by the
purchaser on the foundations unless otherwise specified.
1.08 INSTRUCTION AND MARKING PLATES:
All gauge meters, instruments etc. shall have dials or scales calibrated in metric
system of units. All name plates, instruction plate, warning signs and any
marking what-so-ever on the equipment and its parts and accessories shall be in
Hindi-English Language, using idioms, words and meaning as in current use in
India.
In order to facilitate sorting and erection at site every part of the plant and
equipment shall be suitably marked.
1.09 PAINTING
The whole of the plant except bright parts, valves and such portions as are
finished shall be painted with two painting coats of approved rust resisting paint
in plain colours for packing and the parts not so painted shall be protected from
deterioration during transit. All the ferrous parts shall be painted with battle ship
grey paint by means of spray painting. The painting should be as per relevant
ISS. All the non ferrous parts including the bus bars, thimbles, jumpers shall be
tinned plated and sleeves of proper thickness and size shall be provided on all
the jumpers. After erection at site every painted part shall be well cleaned filed
and chopped and shall then receive two coats of best oil paint of approved
colour, to be supplied by the contractor without any extra cost.
1.10 TESTS:
1.10.1 TYPE TEST
accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be
submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as schedule given in
Bar Chart.
Contractor shall submit type test report for the following Switchgear and Control gears
before the fabrication of switchgear is started:
MCCB as per IS 13947 Part-II
1.10.2 Routine Test
1.10.3 Acceptance Test
The following acceptance tests & other acceptance tests as per IS 13947 Part-II
shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless
i) Dimensional test
ii) Continuity test
iii) Insulation resistance test
iv) High voltage test
v) Inter locking test
1.11 INSTRUCTION BOOKS:
Applicable parts, lists, catalogues and operating instructions in English
Language specially prepared to cover all the equipment furnished under this
specification which may be needed or prove useful in operation, maintenance,
repair, dismantling or assembling and for the repair and identification of parts for
ordering replacements shall be assembled under a common cover and submitted
169
in duplicate for each unit to the purchaser free of cost.
1.12 REPRODUCIBLE DRAWINGS:
The contractor shall supply two sets of full size reproducible drawings (approved
by the purchaser) along with detailed drawings of various major
components/accessories etc. (showing sectional views, wherever necessary) on
oil cloth to prove useful in the erection, operation maintenance and repair of the
equipment. He shall also supply twenty sets of azo prints of the above mentioned
drawings for use in field and design offices.
1.13 PARTICULARS OF THE SYSTEM:
The equipment shall be suitable for 415 Volts 50 cycles, 3 Phase 4 wire system
with neutral solidly earthed.
1.14 RISE IN TEMPERATURE:
The equipment shall be operated at maximum ambient temperature of 500C and
as such the temperature rise of its parts should be proportionately below the
figure provided in respective standards.
1.15 EACH BOARD SHALL COMPRISE OF:
Metal clad floor mounting combination MCCB board consisting of a suitable bus
bar of 500 Amps rating for 25 Ckts. Triple pole and neutral bus bar chamber,
mounted on a high floor stand arranged and equipped for the circuits given in
the schedule of requirement and mounted above and below the bus bar chamber
to form a suitable arrangement. The bus bar chamber shall have provision for
adding two more MCCB units as given in the schedule at a later date.
The MCCB boards shall be installed indoors. The enclosing chambers shall be
dust-tight and vermin proof.
All equipments shall be suitable for reception of Aluminium cable rising from the ground. The
details of equipment required for each switch board has been given in the schedule of
requirement.
The board shall be of uniform height not exceeding 2450mm.
The board shall be of double front construction and shall have a completely enclosed
busbar compartment for running busbars.
1.16 BUS BARS:

The bus shall be made of high conductivity copper or Aluminium and shall have
adequate cross section so as to be capable of carrying 500 Amps in phase and
250 Amps. in neutral.
The bus bar shall be so designed and mounted in the separate chamber such
that their expansion or contraction does not subject either the bus bars or their
insulation supports to any stresses.
The bus bar shall be properly spaced so as to provide easy access during
maintenance and inspection etc. There should be no joints in the bus bars.
The current density for copper and aluminium bus bars must not exceed 1 A/cm2
and 87 A/cm2 respectively.
1.17 CONNECTIONS:
All the connections for the tees from the bus bars shall be bolted type and
suitable spring washers shall be provided to ensure proper jointing and material
of the bolts shall be of suitable metal. All the connections shall be provided with
thimbles of suitable rating.
1.18 METERING EQUIPMENT
Metering equipment for the station transformer shall be located between the L.T.
side of the transformer and L.T. Bus Bars. The metering equipment shall include
500/5 Amps C.T.s having burden 15 VA with accuracy class 1 and 3 phase 4wire
170
unbalanced load integrating electronic KWH meter. A 100 mm dial flush mounted
digital Voltmeter(0-500V) and a 100 mm dial flush mounted digital ammeter(0-
500/5A) both with phase selector switch shall also be provided on each
switchboard to indicate the bus bar voltage and total load on the station
transformer feeder. Metering equipment for the DG set shall be located between
the L.T. terminals of DG set and L.T. Bus Bars. The metering equipment shall
include 300/5 Amps C.T.s having burden 15 VA with accuracy class 1 and A 100
mm dial flush mounted digital Voltmeter(0-500V) and a 100 mm dial flush
mounted digital ammeter(0-300/5A) both with phase selector switch shall also be
provided on each switchboard to indicate the bus bar voltage and total load on
the DG set. All the meters shall be enclosed in separate chamber to have a flush
pattern type appearance. The meters shall be dust tight.
1.19 EARTHING
Two separate earths shall be run and each and every metallic parts of the stand/
MCCB/bus bar chambers shall be earthed at two different places independently.
The size of the earthing conductor for the switches and individual parts shall not
be less than No. 8 SWG copper conductor and size of the main for earthing shall
not be less than No. 3 SWG copper conductor.
1.20 BUS BAR CHAMBER
The bus bar chamber shall be made out of angle iron of suitable size as specified
below along with other details: -
a) Thickness of sheet steel enclosures, doors, covers
i) Cold rolled 2mm minimum
ii) Hot rolled +2.5mm minimum
b) Degree of protection IP-54 as per BS-2817/IEC-144
c) Colour finish shade
i) Interior Glossy white
ii) Exterior Light grey semi glossy shade
d) Earthing bus material size Copper 25x6 mm
e) Purchasers earthing conductor Galvanised steel
Material
Size 30x6 mm
f) Clearance in air of live parts
i) Phase to Phase 80 mm
ii) Phase to earth 80 mm
1.21 LABELS:
Each switch shall be provided with suitable labels paginated on hard plastic
sheet and duly held in boss framed of the size 75x50 mm for the incoming and
outgoing feeders. The hard plastic sheet shall be of white color and will be
painted in black for the outgoing feeders whereas it shall be painted bright red
for the incoming feeders.
1.22 INTERLOCKING
Interlocks must be provided to ensure that
a) Both incomer should not be switched ON at a time. If supply in any of incomer gets
OFF then it shall be tripped automatically.
b) DG incomer supply should be automatically switched OFF when supply in any of
incomers.
c) Cover cannot be opened when the MCCB is in the closed position. It should however be
possible for competent examiner to over ride this interlock and operate the MCCB with
enclosure open.
1.23 FIRE HAZARDS
The switch and its associated apparatus shall be arranged to minimize fire
hazards.
1.24 CLEARANCES
The clearances between phases and between phases and earth shall be as per
IS-3072-1975 with latest amendments.
1.25 CONTACTS
171
All live contacts of the switch shall be adequately shrouded to prevent accidental
contact when the equipment is either in the isolated or normal closed position
and shall be silver plated of suitable thickness. The fixed contacts of the fuse
switch unit shall be fully shrouded with arc resistant material. Material needs to
be specified in the tender.
1.26 CABLE AND BOXES:
a) The incoming switch and outgoing switches shall be provided with cable and
boxes of suitable size capacity and rating suitable for PVC cables. Suitable
cleating arrangement shall also be provided for the cables entering the MCCB
units in the top tier.
The cabling arrangement shall be such that cables outgoing from Isolator unit
can be connected or disconnected easily and safely.
1.27 RUPTURING CAPACITY
The rupturing capacity of the bus bar switchgear/MCCB shall not be lower than 2
MVA at 415 volts.
1.28 The individual MCCB shall be provided in such a way that they can be removed
from the front of the switch board for servicing and maintenance.
1.29 MARKING
All the switches shall be clearly marked with the following particulars: -
a) Reference to the standard.
b) Rated voltage.
c) Rated normal current.
d) Rated marking capacity.
e) Breaking capacity.
f) Type of fuse/links to be used.
g) Name plate.
1. Supplier name.
2. Purchaser
3. P.O. No.
4. Rating.
5. Serial no.
6. Year of manufacturing.
1.30 OTHER PARTICULARS
The Bidder should clearly furnish the following information in their offer: -
a) Material and plating of the contacts.
b) Current density assumed.
c) Temperature rise under continuous full load over the ambient temp. of 500C.
d) Temperature rise under short circuit condition.
e) Guaranteed Technical particulars as required in appendix-A.
1.31 List of references if similar L.T. MCCB Board already in service/supplied with
complete details shall be furnished.

172
ANNEXURE A
SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENTS
415 V 3 Phase 4 wire L.T. Switch Board comprising of 25 circuits TP & N MCCB units consisting of two
incomer from Station transformer of 500 A and 3rd incomer from 100kVA DG Set of 320A with suitable
CTs and selector switch for incomer feeders and 22 Nos. MCCBs for outgoing feeders having the
following ratings for 220 KV S/Stns.
Sr. No. MCCB Rating No.
L.T. Feeders (Amps)
1. Incoming from Station transformer 500 2
2. I/C from DG Set 320 1
3. Oil filtration set feeder 200 1
4. Yard lighting feeder 160 1
5. Feeder -I 160 1
6. Feeder-II 160 1
7. 220kV C&R Panels/AC Kiosks 100 1
8. 132/66/33 kV C&R Panels/AC Kiosks 100 2
9. Fan control of T/F, OLTC motor and oil motor of 100 3
220/66 KV T/F
10. Fan control of 66/11 KV T/F & OLTC motor 63 2
11. Outdoor street lighting feeder 63 1
12. Water pump and sewerage pump. 63 1
13. 220V DC Battery charger 63 2
14. 11kV VCB Board Feeder 32 2
15. Control Room 32 1
16. Spare feeders 160 1
17. Provision for additional switch fuse unit to be 2
mounted at a later stage.
25
TOTAL Nos.
NOTES:
1. Each circuit as indicated above shall have MCCB rating and LT feeder
labeling as mentioned against each. It shall include bus bar connections,
terminals, cable glands and cable lugs etc.
2. All the three Incomers shall be provided with the following equipments:
i) One No. 100mm dial flush mounting digital ammeter of scale of 0
500A/5A for incomers from station transformers and 0-300A/5A for DG
incomer with phase selector switch.
ii) One No. 100 mm dial flush mounting Digital voltmeter of range 0-500V
with phase selector switch.
iii) 3 Nos. 500/5A(for station transformers) and 300/5A(for DG) CTs having
burden 15 VA and accuracy class 1 and Instrument Security factor as
5.
iv) One No. 3 phase , 4 wire unbalanced load integrating watt hour meter
(operatable on 500/5A CTs) only for incomer from station
transformers. Watt hour meter is not required for incomer form DG set.
v) TTB for LT CT meter.
3. Make of each component must be listed in bid.
4. The bus bar shall be designed for 500 A for phase and 250 A for neutral.
173
174
SECTION-6
CHAPTER -6
FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT
1.0 SCOPE
Portable fire extinguishers of Carbon Dioxide type and Dry chemical Powder type
shall be provided in adequate numbers for protection the Control Room Building and all
other Buildings in the sub-stations. The protection shall cover all the rooms/areas of the
buildings. The quantity and location of the extinguishers shall be as per the requirements
of Fire protection Manual (Part-I) issued by Tariff Advisory Committee of India (TAC)
and IS:2190.
1.1 Trolley Mounted fire extinguishers of 22.5 kg Carbon Dioxide type and 22.5 kg Dry
Chemical Powder type shall be used for protection of all 220kV,132/33kV Transformers
and reactors in the S/Stn. Two DCP type and two CO2 type extinguishers shall be
provided for each transformer/reactor.
2.0 PORTABLE TYPE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS:
2.1 This Specification lays down the requirement regarding fire extinguishers of following
types:
a) Carbon Dioxide type
b) Dry Chemical powder type
2.2 All the portable extinguishers shall be capable of discharging freely and completely in
upright position.
2.3 Each extinguisher shall have the instructions for operating the extinguishers on its body
itself.
2.4 All extinguishers shall be supplied with initial charge and accessories as required.
2.5 Portable type extinguishers shall be provided with suitable clamps for mounting on walls
or columns.
2.6 All extinguishers shall be painted with durable enamel paint of fire red colour confirming
to relevant Indian Standards.
2.7 Capacities of each type shall be as indicated in the schedule of quantities.
2.8 Carbon Dioxide (CO2 type) extinguishers shall conform to IS:2878.
2.9 Dry chemical powder type extinguisher shall conform to IS:2171.
2.10 TESTS AND INSPECTION
2.10.1 All tests required to ensure that the equipment conforms to the Specification requirements
and relevant standards and codes.
2.10.2 A performance demonstration test at site of five (5) percent or one (1) number whichever
is higher, of the extinguishers shall be carried out by the Contractor. All consumable and
replaceable items required for this test would be supplied by the Contractor without any
extra cost to the Purchaser.
2.10.3 Performance listing of extinguishers shall be in line of applicable Indian Standards. In
case, where no Indian Standard is applicable for a particular type of extinguishers, the
method of testing shall be mutually discussed and agreed to before placement of order for
the extinguishers.

175
2.11 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
The contractor shall guarantee all equipment supplied by him against any defect due
to faulty design, materials and workmanship. The equipment shall be guaranteed to
operate satisfactorily at the rated conditions at site.
2.12 PAINTING
Each fire extinguisher shall be painted with durable enamel paint of fire red colour
conforming to relevant Indian Standards.
3.0 TROLLEY MOUNTED DRY CHEMICAL POWDER TYPE MOBILE FIRE

EXTINGUISHER
The Specification lays down the requirement regarding wheeled fire extinguisher of dry
chemical powder type.
Design, Manufacture, Material of construction and performance of mobile type fire

extinguisher shall comply with the requirements of latest Indian Standards & shall have
BIS approval (ISI marked).
3.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT

The capacity of the mobile dry chemical powder type fire extinguisher
shall be 22.5 kg which means the total capacity of the container, when
powder completely filled to the specified level shall be 22.5 kg.
The fire extinguishers shall be used for Class B, C, and E fires.
The extinguishers shall operate in the vertical position, mounted on solid

rubber tyre trolley wheels.
The effective throw during operation of the extinguishers shall not be less
than 10 meter.
A carbon dioxide cartridge fitted with valved discharge head, shall provide
sufficient carbon dioxide to expel the dry chemical powder.
3.2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

The construction of wheeled fire extinguishers shall conform to IS
standard and not be limited to the requirements mentioned here.
The shape of the body of the fire extinguisher shall be cylindrical. It shall
have adequate supporting arrangement.
The balance of the fully equipped assembly shall be so arranged that it

can be easily towed speedily behind a jeep or a car and also wheeled by a
single operator.
Two solid rubber tyred trolley wheels shall be fitted to the body of the
mobile fire extinguisher. The rubber tyres shall have an effective life, and
less than three (3) years.
The extinguisher shall be fitted with a discharge hose and nozzle

connection. The hose shall be of rubber or composite construction,
176
having a length of 4.5-meter minimum. The bursting pressure of the hose
shall be minimum 42 kgf/cm (g).
The design of discharge nozzle shall be such that when the extinguisher
is operated in still air the powder will be thrown in the form of a jet having
a range of 10m (minimum) for a period of 50-60 seconds. The nozzle shall
be fitted with a hand control device.
Provision shall be therefore making a pressure test on the body.
To minimize corrosion, the various components shall be provided with

suitable anti-corrosive as per the requirement of applicable codes.
Each mobile extinguisher shall be complete with initial charge, discharge

fittings and accessories.
3.3 TESTS AND INSPECTION

Testing at manufacturers works.
The manufacturer shall conduct all tests required to ensure that the
equipment furnished will conform to this Specification requirements,
relevant Indian Standards and applicable codes. Everybody shall be
capable of withstanding an internal hydraulic pressure of 25 kgf/cm (g)
without leakage or visible distortion, prior to painting, for a minimum
period of 5 minutes.
In destruction tests, if called for, ultimate failure shall occur at a test

pressure not less than 32 kgf/cm (g) and if it occurs below 35 kgf/cm (g)
there shall not be damage in any joint, seam casting of fittings.
A performance demonstration test at site on five (5) percent or one (1)

number, whichever is higher, shall be required to be carried out by the
CONTRACTOR. All consumable and replaceable items required for the
test shall be supplied by the CONTRACTOR without any extra cost to
Purchaser.
After conduction tests as in 1.1 and 1.4 the body shall be properly washed
and drained off. After 24 hours, the interior shall be examined and it must
be free from any stain, rust etc.
The CONTRACTOR shall guarantee all equipment supplied by him against

any defect due to faulty design, materials and workmanship. The
equipment shall be guaranteed to operate satisfactorily at the rated
conditions at site.
3.5 PAINTING
Each mobile fire extinguisher shall be painted with durable enamel paint
of red colour conforming to relevant Indian Standard. The mobile foam
177
type fire extinguisher shall be of make approved by Tariff Advisory
Committee/NFPA/FOC/UL. Appliances conforming to the relevant
BS/NFPA Standards are also acceptable provided the construction
generally conform to the IS Standards so that spares refills/cartridges of
Indian make conforming to IS Specification can be used after the
operation of the extinguisher.
Spare charge cartridges equivalent to requirements of 2 Nos.

extinguishers shall also be supplied.
4.0 TROLLEY MOUNTED CARBOB-DIOXIDE TYPE MOBILE FIRE

EXTINGUISHER
1.1 This Specification lays down the requirements regarding wheeled fire
extinguisher of carbon-dioxide.
1.2 Design, manufacture, material of construction and performance of

extinguisher as specified herein after shall comply with the
requirements of latest applicable Indian Standards IS-2878 or
equivalents and shall have BIS approval (ISI marked).
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT

1.3.1 The capacity of the extinguisher shall be 22.5 kg of carbon-dioxide
when filled in the container to a filling ratio of about 0.66, 7.
1.3.2 The extinguisher shall be designed for use where larger high intensity
fire hazards are involved requiring versatility of action. These shall be
used for Class B fire, i.e. fire in flammable liquid. Class C fire i.e. fire
in gaseous substances under pressure and Class E fire, i.e. fires in live
electrical equipment.
1.3.3 The extinguisher shall be operated in upright position, by releasing a
suitable valve.
1.3.4 The range of effective operation of the extinguishers shall be about 4
meters.
1.4 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

The construction of wheeled fire extinguisher, carbon-dioxide type, shall
in general conform to IS:2828 subject to the requirements mentioned
hereunder:
1.4.1 The carbon-dioxide gas shall conform to IS:307.
1.4.2 The shape of the body of the extinguisher shall be cylindrical. The body
shall be of steel cylinder. It shall have adequate supporting arrangement
so that it can rest on the wheeled body in upright position and the
operator be free to direct the stream.
1.4.3 The balance of the full equipped trolley unit shall be so arranged, that
despite its considerable weight, it can be easily wheeled by one man. It
should be capable of being towed speedily behind a jeep or car.
1.4.4 The cylinder shall be mounted on a trolley fitted with two cushion tyred
wheels and fitted with suitable handle. The overall wheel diameter shall
be about 280 mm.
The frame of the trolley shall be made of welded steel section.
1.4.5 The design shall permit easy maintenance and operation with one man
service.
178
1.4.6 The extinguisher shall be fitted with a high pressure flexible hose of
about 9 m length and internal dia to hoses shall not be more than 12
mm.
1.4.7 A discharge horn made of fibre or any material non-conducting to
electricity shall be fitted with a handle made of thermal insulating
material capable of protecting operators hand from freezing effects.
1.4.8 Suitable provision for firmly securing the horn to the body, when it is
not in use, shall be provided. The fixing device shall not interfere with
the operation or mobility of the extinguisher.
1.4.9 The discharge valve or operating head shall be capable of being
operated satisfactorily. It shall be made of material as specified in
IS:2878.
1.4.10 There shall be no leakage of CO2 from valve or fitting during the use of
extinguisher. Valve shall be provided with suitable safety device to
prevent over pressure in cylinder.
1.4.11 A seal or device shall be fitted to indicate that the extinguisher has not
been used.
1.4.12 Each extinguisher shall be complete with initial charge, discharge
fittings and other accessories as required.

179
1.5 TEST AND INSPECTION
1.5.1 The extinguisher at ambient temperature shall expel at least 95% of its
content as continuous discharge with in a maximum of 90 seconds and
minimum of 30 seconds.
1.5.2 The extinguisher without its attachment shall be shelved for 21 days
after filling and shall be check weighed at the end of the period. There
shall be no loss of mass.
1.5.3 Carbon-dioxide cylinder shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure of
236 kgf/cm (g) to prove leak tightness for a period of one hour.
1.5.4 Hose assembly with its coupling shall be hydrostatically tested at a
pressure of 315 kgf/cm (g) without failure.
4.5.5 All tests required to ensure that the equipment conforms to the Specification
requirements and relevant standards and codes shall be conducted by the
manufacturer. Adequate time ahead of these shop tests the Purchaser
shall be informed so that if he so desires, his representative may witness
the tests.
1.5.5 A performance demonstration test at site on five (5) percent or one (1)
number, whichever is higher, shall be required to be carried out by the
CONTRACTOR. All consumable and rechargeable items required for the
test shall be supplied by the CONTRACTOR without any extra cost to
Purchaser.

The CONTRACTOR shall guarantee all equipment supplied by him against
any defect due to faulty design, materials and workmanship. The
equipment shall be guaranteed to operate satisfactorily at the rated
conditions at site.
1.7 PAINTING & MARKING

Each extinguisher shall be painted in red and permanently marked in
accordance with the requirements laid down in IS-2878. besides
permanently making on the front of the extinguisher indicating its
purpose, content and usage shall also be provided.
1.7.1 The mobile Carbon-dioxide type fire extinguisher shall be of make

approved by Chief Inspector of Explosives, Nagpur, India and Tariff
Advisory Committee/NFPA/FOC/UL.
2. VENTILATION SYSTEM
Mechanical ventilation systems using exhaust fans shall be provided for
all the rooms which are not considered for air conditioning. Capacity of
the fan shall be selected so as to have the minimum air changes in the
various rooms as below:
Battery room, Pantry, toilets : 15 air

Changes/hr.
All other rooms : 12 air
Changes/hr.
180
For Battery room, the fan shall be bifurcated type spare proof
construction.

181
SECTION-6
CHAPTER-7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 33 kV CLASS COPPER WOUND DISTRIBUTION

TRANSFORMERS (CONVENTIONAL TYPE) FOR 200, 400 & 630 KVA CAPACITY WITH
INTERNAL CSP (COMPLETELY SELF PROTECTED) FEATURES
1 SCOPE
This specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture, testing, supply and
delivery of oil immersed, naturally cooled, three phase, 50Hz, double wound, outdoor
type distribution transformers of 200, 400 & 630KVA capacity with completely self
protected (CSP) distribution transformers for outdoor sub-stations in earthed neutral
system with nominal voltage of 33 kV Sub-Station auxiliary distribution systems.
1.1 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of the design and
construction of equipment. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to high
standards of engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing
in continuous commercial operation upto the Bidders guarantee, in manner acceptable
to the purchaser, who will interpret the meanings of drawings and specification and
shall have the power to reject any work or material which, in his judgment is not in
accordance therewith. The offered equipment shall be complete with all components
necessary for their effective and trouble free operation. Such, components be deemed
to be within the scope of Bidders supply interceptive of whether those are specifically
brought out in this specification and / or the commercial order or not. Transformers will
be plinth mounted.
2. STANDARDS
Unless otherwise modified in this specification the transformer shall conform in all
respect to the relevant Indian / International Standard Specification, with latest
amendments thereof some of them are listed below:
Indian Title International
Standards standards
IS-2026:1977-81 Specification of Power Transformer IEC-76
IS-335/1983 Insulating Oil for transformer & switchgear BS-148
IS-3639:1968 Fittings & Accessories for Power Transformer ASTM D-1275
IS-2099:1986 Higher Voltage Porcelain Bushings IEC 296-1969
IS-7421-1988 Low Voltage Porcelain Bushings
IS-3347 Dimensions for Outdoor Bushings DIN 42531 to
33, 23, 3
IS-12444 Specification for Copper wire rods ASTM B-49
IS-5/1964 Specification for colours for ready mixed paints
IS-6600/1972 Guide for loading of oil immersed Transformers
CBI&P Manual on transformer, Publication No.275
The bidder shall use ISS, however, wherever this standard is not available,
corresponding IEC may be followed.
Material conforming to ISS or the internationally accepted standards, which ensure
equal or higher quality than the standards mentioned above, would also be acceptable.
In case the Bidders who wish to offer material conforming to the standards, salient
points of difference between the standards adopted and the specific standards shall be
clearly brought out in relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with authentic
English translations shall be furnished along with the offer.
3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
As per Vol-II Sec-1.
4. TYPE AND RATING

182
The transformers shall have core type construction and ONAN cooled as mentioned
below and shall be suitable for outdoor service as step-down-transformers. The rating
and electrical characteristics of the transformers shall be as follows:

183
i.) Continuous capacity 200KVA, 400KVA & 630KVA
ii.) Rated HT voltage 33kV
iii.) Rated LT voltage 433V 250V
iv.) Frequency 50Hz 5%
v.) No. of phases 3
vi.) Connection (HT) Delta
vii.) Connection (LT) Star Neutral brought out
viii.) Vector Group Dyn-11
ix.) Taps No. of taps shall be -5% to +10% with 2.5% steps.
x.) Type of cooling ONAN
xi.) No Load Voltage ratio 33000/433V at principle tap
5. WINDINGS
The primary winding shall be connected in delta and the secondary winding in star
(Vector symbol Dyn-11) so as to produce a positive displacement of 300 from the
primary to the secondary vectors of the same phase. The neutral of the secondary
winding shall be brought out to a separate insulated terminal.
All transformers shall be oil immersed weather proof and suitable for outdoor
installation.
The windings and connections, insulation material shall not soften, ooze out, shrink or
collapse during service.
No strip conductor wound on edge shall have a width exceeding six times its thickness.
The windings and connections shall be properly brazed to withstand shocks during
The adequate pre-shrinkage of the coil assembly using pre-compressed press board
material having low moisture content for the radial spacer blocks shall be ensured by
the manufacturers so that there is no displacement of the radial spacer blocks due to
All windings after being wound and all fibrous hygroscopic materials used in the
oil.
The coil clamping rings wherever used shall preferably be of flat insulated steel
laminations. Auxiliary laminated material except bakelised paper shall not be used.
The clamping arrangement shall exert equal pressure on all columns of spacers of the
The radial spacer blocks must be made of pre-compressed pressboard material, which
will not soften while in contact with oil or fray out into fibers or edges. The slots should
be so dimensioned that the blocks will not come out of the slots.
large number of coil clamping bolts and by transferring the clamping force from
clamping bolts to the clamping plates through intermediate members, which can spread
the clamping force over a large area.
All joints shall be brazed/crimped considering the vibrations due to short circuits and
load fluctuations.

184
6. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
a) Core: Material CRGO sheet.
b) The core shall be of high grade cold rolled grain oriented annealed silicon steel
laminations having low loss & good grain properties, coated with oil proof insulation,
bolted/clamped together to the frames firmly to prevent any vibration. All core clamping
bolts if provided shall be effectively insulated. The complete design of core must ensure
permanency of the core losses with continuous working of the transformer. The value of
the flux density allowed & the design & grade of laminations used shall be clearly stated
in the offer.
c) Flux Density: Flux Density at normal voltage (for grade-41 CRGO Laminations) shall
not be more than 1.6 Tesla.
d) Over Flux: Over Flux in the transformer core shall be limited to 12.5% to ensure that in
the event of over-voltage to the extent of 12.5%, the core does not get saturated.
e) No Load Current: No Load Current at 100% voltage shall not be more than 2% of the
full load current subject to tolerance as per ISS. No Load current at 12.5% over voltage
shall not exceed 4% of the full load current. The supplier shall furnish necessary design
data in support of this stipulation.
f) Minimum number of steps of core shall be 5 Nos.
g) Core Clamping:
a) The core-clamping channel shall be of size 75mm x 40mm with 2 No. 12mm dia MS
Bolts for clamping efficiently.
b) For top yoke (channel), if cuts of holes are made for LV connection, suitable
reinforcement to channel shall be made.
c) MS channel shall be painted with oil & corrosion resistant paint before use.
d) Core base and bottom yoke shall be supported with 75mm x 40mm MS channel with
proper bolting together. In no case flat or cut channels shall be accepted.
Note: The tenderer shall ensure that the CRGO supplier should have BIS certification.
7. TEMPERATURE RISE
The temperature rise shall not exceed limits of 500C (measured by resistance) for
transformer windings & 400C (measured by thermometer) for top oil, when tested in
accordance with IS-2026-1977. The hot spot temperature shall not exceed 950C when
calculated on an annual weighted average temp. of 320C as per ISS:2026.
manufacturer by carrying the heat run test at the lowest negative tap by feeding losses
corresponding to the rated current of the tap.
8. IMPEDANCE
The percentage impedance at 750C shall be 4.5% subject to tolerance as per IS-2026.
9. COOLING
All transformers shall be capable of giving a continuous output without exceeding the
specified temperature rise with ONAN cooling
10. TRANSFORMER OIL
The transformer oil shall comply with the requirement of ISS-335 Specification for
insulating oil for transformers.
11. TAP CHANGING MECHANISM
The transformers shall be provided with off circuit tap selector switch on HV windings
for HV variation from 5% to +10% in steps of 2.5% to give a constant LV.
These steps shall be operated by hand, and provisions shall be made for indication of
tap position and locking on any particular tap.
12. FITTINGS
The following standard fittings shall be provided: -
a) Two no. suitable earthing terminals.
b) Oil level gauge indicating three positions of oil marked as follows:
185
i) Minimum 50C.
ii) At 300C.
iii) Maximum 980C.
c) Lifting lugs & pulling lugs.
d) Rating and terminal marking plates.
e) Silica gel breathing device of weather proof design with minimum silica gel 400 gm.
f) Drain cum sampling valve made of steel of the type suitable to the tank.
g) Thermometer pocket with 4 inch dial type thermometer.
h) Filling hole having P 1-1/4 thread conservator.
i) 1 No. filter valve with plug 25mm diameter at the top for filtration.
j) Air release plug on the top cover.
k) Conservator tank along with a drain valve, filling hole & valve between conservator and
tank.
l) Base channels.
m) Explosion vent/Pressure relief device operate at a pressure of 0.3 to 0.5kg/cm2.
n) Off load tap changer with tapping device.
o) Uni-directional flat rollers.
p) Bimetallic terminal connector on HV/LV Bushings (Universal type).
q) Radiators as required.
13. CONSERVATOR
On transformers, provision of conservator is obligatory. When a conservator is fitted,
the oil gauge and the breathing device shall be fixed to the conservator which shall also
be provided with a drain plug and a filling hole with a cover. In addition, the cover of the
main tank shall be provided with an air release plug to enable trapped air to be released
unless.
The conservator is so located as to eliminate the possibility of air being trapped within
the main tank.
The inside diameter of the pipe connecting the conservator to the main tank shall be
within 20 mm to 50 mm and it should project into the conservator in such a way that its
end is approximately 20 mm above the bottom of conservator, so as to create a sump
for collection of impurities. The minimum oil-level (corresponding to 50C) should be
above the sump level.
14. TANK
The main tank of the transformer shall be made of good quality steel sheet having a
minimum thickness of 4 mm for the sides of the tank and a minimum thickness of 6.00
mm for top and bottom plates for all ratings. The tanks shall be suitably stiffened at two
places along the height to make them sturdy. The stiffeners shall be provided on all the
4 sides of the tank. The tank shall be capable of withstanding a pressure upto +1Kg/cm2
and (-0.7) Kg/cm2 (Gauge pressure) for 30 minutes. The word HVPNL PROPERTY
shall be engraved on the top cover plate and side of the tank body. No negative
tolerance shall be allowed.
The permanent deflection of plate after pressure has been released, shall not exceed
the values given below:
Length of plate DEFLECTION
750 MM 5 mm
751-1250 mm 6 mm
14.2 RADIATORS
These shall be made of ERW tubes with min side thickness of 18 SWG. These tubes
186
should be used in vertical formation without any bending and properly welded on both
ends to common headers. These radiators should be individually test for leakage and
pressure tests etc. before welding with the main tank.

187
14.3 FASTENERS:
All bolts, studs, screw threads, pipe threads, bolt heads and nuts shall comply with the
appropriate Indian Standards for metric threads, or the technical equivalent. Bolts or
studs shall not be less than 6 mm in diameter except when used for small wiring
terminals.
All nuts and pins shall be adequately locked. Wherever possible bolts shall be fitted in
such a manner that in the event of failure of locking resulting in the nuts working loose
and falling off, the bolt will remain in position.
All ferrous bolts, nuts and washers placed in outdoor positions shall be treated to
prevent corrosion, by hot dip galvanizing, except high tensile steel bolts and spring
washers which shall be electro-galvanised / plated. Appropriate precautions shall be
taken to prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals.
Each bolt or stud shall project at least one thread but not more than three threads
through the nut, except when otherwise approved for terminal board studs or relay
stems. If bolts nuts are placed so that they are inaccessible by means of ordinary
spanners, special spanners shall be provided.
The length of the screwed portion of the bolts shall be such that no screw thread may
form part of a shear plane between members.
Taper washers shall be provided where necessary.
Protective washers of suitable material shall be provided front and back or the securing
screws.
2 No., anti-theft fasteners of steel on two diagonally opposite corners of the tank shall
be provided. All nuts & pins shall be adequately locked.
15. BUSHING AND TERMINALS
15.1 Terminal arrangement: The transformer shall be fitted with three high voltages and four
low voltage outdoor types porcelain bushing of appropriate voltage and current rating
and LT bushing shall be provided on the side of the tank. Each terminal including the
neutral shall be distinctly marked and coloured for phase voltage on both HV and LV
sides. The system of marking shall be in accordance with the latest amendment of
relevant IS.
15.2 The electrical characteristics of high voltage bushing shall conform to latest version of
IS:2099 and IS 3347. The low voltage bushing shall conform to latest version of IS:
7421. All porcelain bushing shall be homogeneous, free from flaws effecting its
mechanical strength or dielectric quality. They should be well vitrified, uniformly glazed,
tough and impervious to moisture. The creepage distance of all the bushing shall be
25mm per kV of highest system voltage suitable for heavily polluted atmosphere and
the protected creepage distance not less than 50% of total.
15.3 The bushings terminal connectors for both HT and LT shall be of clamp type to directly
receive Aluminium/ conductors/ cables without requiring use of lugs. The terminal
connectors shall be directly screwed on the stem to secure effective sealing of the
bushings.
15.4 The bushings rods and nuts shall be made of brass suitable for bushings as per
requirement of IS-3347 mentioned in 15.1 above.
15.5 Neutral bushing of LV side should be similar to LV bushing. Neutral shall be earthed
through a separate bushing on the transformer tank.
16. SEALING GASKETS
All sealing washers/gaskets should be of grade RC-70C or RC-80B of neoprene
Bended Cork as per IS-4253 (P-II) 1980 (Latest edition).
17. FINISH
The exterior of the transformer tank and other ferrous fittings shall be thoroughly
cleaned, scraped and given a priming coat and two finishing coats of durable oil and
weather resisting paints or enamel. The colour of the finishing coats shall be dark grey
conforming to No. 632 of IS:5-1961 Colours for Ready Mixed paints (second revision).
18. RATINGS AND TERMINAL MARKING PLATES
Each transformer shall be provided with non-detachable rating and terminal marking
188
plates of weather proof material fitted in a visible position and showing the complete
information as given under clause 16 of IS-1980 (Part-I) 1981 or any authoritative
standards for transformers including the following details: -
i) Purchase order No. & date
ii) Date of
inspection
iii) Property of HVPNL.
19. MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS
The under base of all transformer shall be provided to make them suitable for fixing on
a plinth.
20 LOSSES
The losses of each transformer shall be stated in the tender ONAN rating at principal
tap at full load at 750C which shall be less than :-
Sr. No. KVA rating of No Load losses Full Load Maximum
T/F in Watts (max.) losses Rating Weighted
Watts (max.) average
at 75oC losses
1. 200 500 3000 1600
2. 400 750 5000 2700
3. 630 1000 7000 3700
21 EQUALISATION FORMULA:
The losses at principal tap of each transformer shall be stated in the tender ONAN
rating at full load at 750C.
For the purpose of arriving at comparable prices, the iron & copper losses shall be
capitalized as per formula given below:-
=3,86,700( Wi + 0.45 Wc)
Where
Wi = Iron (No load) Losses
Wc = Copper (Load Losses)
The maximum sealing of component and weightage average losses shall be as per
clause 24.0 and no positive tolerance shall be allowed on these values.
22 COMPLETELY SELF PROTECTED (CSP) FEATURES
The Transformers shall have the following CSP features:
22.1 Internal HV fuse on the HT side of transformer:
Specification for the HV fuse: Expulsion/any other suitable type of fuse placed in series
with the primary winding. The fuse is mounted normally inside of the primary bushing
for the three phases and it is connected to the high voltage winding through a terminal
block. This has to protect that part of the electrical distribution system, which is ahead
of the distribution transformers from faults, which occur inside the distribution
transformers i.e. either on the windings or some other part of the transformers. It shall
be ensured that the fuse does not blow for faults on the secondary side (LT side) of the
transformer i.e. the blowing characteristics of the fuse and LT breaker shall be so
coordinated such that the fuse shall not blow for any faults on the secondary side of the
transformer beyond LT breakers and those faults shall be cleared by the LT breaker
only
22.1.1 Internally mounted oil immersed LT breaker on the LV side of the transformer
22.1.1.1 3 Pole LT Circuit Breaker: All LT faults after the breaker shall be cleared by this
breaker. As such it shall be designed for perfect coordination with the HT fuse link. The
bidder shall furnish the time/current characteristic for LT circuit breaker of 33kV fuses
189
for various current multiples.

190
The two characteristics shall be drawn on the same sheet to indicate coordination
between the circuit breaker and fuse. The Bidder shall carry out coordination test as
indicated above and this forms one of the tests as for acceptance test.
The breaker shall be coordinated thermally with the transformer design to follow closely
the variations of coil acceptance test.
The breaker shall be coordinated thermally with the transformer design to follow closely
the variations of coil temperature due to fluctuating load and ambient temperatures
This is to be accomplished by connecting the breaker in series between the secondary
windings and the secondary bushings. The breaker shall be located in the same oil as
the core and coil assembly so that the bimetal are sensitive to the temperature of oil as
well as the load current.
The circuit breaker shall also be closed and opened manually standing on ground. The
current carrying parts of breakers shall be copper plus a set of copper tungsten current
interrupting contacts.
The cross section of the current carrying parts of the breakers shall withstand the full
load current at a current density not more than 2.5 A/Sq.mm (for additional mechanical
strength the area should be more).
22.1.1.2 Unit P.F &
22.1.1.3 0.8P.F
22.1.1.4 125% load
22.1.1.5 100% load
22.1.1.6 75% load
22.1.1.7 50% load
22.1.1.8 25% load
22.1.1.9 Regulation at
The bidder may offer microprocessor based MCCB with line current characteristics
confirming to IS: 156600 of appropriate rating & good quality from reputed manufacturer
in the metal-box of the distribution transformer instead of internal LV breaker.
NOTE:- The breaker-trip setting shall be done considering loading of 130% loading for 6 hours
duration at an average ambient temperature of 400C for internal breaker as well as
MCCB (if approved)
23 TESTS AND INSPECTION
All the tests shall be carried out in accordance with clause 16 of IS (Part-I) 1977
23.1 ROUTINE TESTS:
All transformers shall be subjected to the following routine tests at the manufacturers
works in accordance with IS 2026 and 1180 (Part-I): -
a) Measurement of winding resistance.
b) Ratio, Polarity and phase relationship.
c) Measurement of Impedance voltage/short circuit impedance.
d) Load losses.
e) No load losses and no load current.
f) Insulation resistance.
g) Induced over voltage withstand.
h) Separate source voltage withstand.
i) Ratio, Polarity and phase relationship.
j) Measurement of Impedance voltage/short circuit impedance.
k) Load losses.
l) No load losses and no load current.
m) Insulation resistance.
n) Induced over voltage withstand.
o) Separate source voltage withstand.
p) Oil leakage test.

191
q) Magnetic balance test and magnetizing current and low voltage.

192
23.2 TYPE TESTS
The following type tests shall be made on the transformers in addition to the routine
tests from (a) to (f) as indicated in 19.1 above: -
i) Temperature rise test shall be carried out on one unit from each lot as offered for
inspection.
ii) Air pressure tests: The tank shall be fixed with a dummy cover with all fittings
including bushings in position and shall be subjected to the following pressure created
inside the tank:
a) 0.8 kg/cm2 above the atmospheric pressure for 10 minutes.
b) A vacuum corresponding to (-) 0.7 kg/cm2 for 10 minutes. Permanent deflection of flat
plate after pressure has been released, shall not exceed the value given below: -
Length of plate DEFLECTION
Upto 750 mm 5 mm
751-1250 mm 6 mm
iii) Impulse voltage withstand test on all the three limbs of HT side as per clause 13 of ISS
2026/1991/Part-II conducted at some recognized/Govt. test house not more than 7
years old from the date of bid opening shall required to be submitted. The dispatches
shall only be allowed after successful conductance of this test.
iv) SHORT CIRCUIT TEST: This test shall be made in accordance with the details
specified in IS 2026/1977 conducted at some recognized/Govt. test house not more
than 7 years old from the date of bid opening shall required to be submitted. The
dispatches shall only be allowed after successful conductance of this test. If short circuit
tests on unit of similar design of transformer with capacity as per schedule had been
conducted earlier than certificate shall be produced along with tender and the test need
not be conducted.
v) Unbalance Current Test: The value of unbalanced current indicated by the ammeter
shall not be more than 2% of the full load current.
No supplies will be allowed to be dispatched without inspection by the purchaser/its
representative and without carrying out the impulse and short circuit tests satisfactorily.
23.3 FLUX DENSITY TEST:
The supplier shall arrange to conduct the flux density test on one of the cores of the
transformers in each lot so as to ensure that the flux density does not exceed the
maximum specified limit of 1.6 Tesla at normal voltage & frequency.
23.4 OIL TEST
At least two samples of oil shall be drawn out of any two sizeable lots from total ordered
quantity to ensure that the oil used complies with the requirements of the Specification
as per ISS-335. However, inspecting officer can draw oil samples from any number of
lots if considered necessary so as to ensure that transformer oil conforming to ISS is
being used. The dispatches for such lots shall be allowed only after receipt of
satisfactory oil test results.
23.5 OIL LEAKAGE TEST:
The air pressure tests provided as a routine test shall be carried out on 10% of the
transformers in each lot. The firm shall ensure to get this test carried out strictly as per
relevant ISS.
23.6 PHYSICAL CHECK ON VARIOUS DIMENSIONS (INTERNAL & EXTERNAL WEIGHT
CLEARANCE ETC.)
One No. transformer from each lot shall be opened for checking of core weight, size
and weight of HT & LT conductor, quantity of oil and various clearances etc.
23.7 INSPECTION
The inspection shall be carried out by an outside inspection agency to be nominated by
the Nigams representative. All tests & inspection shall be made at the place of
manufacturer unless otherwise specifically agrees upon between the manufacturer and
the purchaser at the time of placing the order. The manufacturer shall afford the
inspector representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities, without charge, to satisfy
himself that the material is being furnished in accordance with this Specification.
193
23.8 The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at its own cost by an
independent agency whenever there is any dispute regarding the quality of supply. If
the transformer fails in the tests, the cost shall be borne by the supplier and if it passes,
the cost shall be borne by the Nigam.
23.9 The purity test of copper for winding shall be got conducted on sample of copper for
24 TEST VOLTAGE
Transformers shall be capable of withstanding the power frequency and impulse test
voltages prescribed as below: -
NOMINAL HIGHEST SYSTEM IMPULSE TEST POWER
system VOLTAGE VOLTAGE FREQUENCY TEST
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
33 KV (RMS) 36 KV (RMS) 170 KV (PEAK) 70 KV (RMS)
25 TOLERANCE OF ELECTRICAL PERFORMANCE
Tolerance shall be according to clause 11 of IS: 2026 (part-I/General: 1977).
26 DRAWING AND LITERATURE
The bidder shall submit four sets of final versions of complete and correct equipment
drawings for purchasers approval along with bid in a sealed envelope. The purchaser
shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the supplier within 21
days from the date of issue of LOI. The submission of complete and correct readable
drawings for approval is the responsibility of the bidder/supplier. The supplier shall, if so
required by the purchaser, modify the drawings and resubmit four copies of the
modified drawings for purchasers approval within two weeks from the date of
purchasers comments. Then, the purchaser shall approve the revised drawings within
two weeks from the date of its receipt.
The successful bidder shall also supply one set of instruction manual containing
handling, installation, testing and commissioning of equipment at the time of despatch
of material to the consignee with each equipment for our field staff. In addition, 5 sets of
such bound manuals and final approved drawings shall be supplied for reference &
record in our design office.
One set of all the approved drawings and manual of instructions will be supplied
along with each equipment without which the supply will not be considered as
complete supply.
27 PACKING
Transformers shall be delivered suitably packed. Although the method of packing is left
to the discretion of the manufacturer, it should be robust enough for rough handling,
which is occasioned during transportation by rail/road.
28 GUARANTEED DATA
Guaranteed Technical particulars and other Technical data in respect of
equipment/material offered shall be furnished duly signed along with the tender in the
Performa attached as Vol-III. Any other particulars considered necessary may also be
given in addition to those listed in the schedule.

194
SECTION 6
CHPATER 8
33kV CAPACITOR WITH ALLIED EQUIPMENT
1. GENERAL:
This specification covers the basic requirements in respect of Capacitor Banks with
internal/external fuse, mounting racks, supporting structures complete in all respect along
with series reactors wherever required for installation at various 220/66/33kV S/Stn.
2. STANDARDS
The shunt capacitor bank and associated equipment shall conform to the latest additions of
the following standards except to the extent explicitly modified in the specification and shall
also be in accordance with requirements specified in Chapter- GEN and Chapter- TR of this
specification.
a) Capacitor IEC/871-1/87/
IS:13925(Part-1) 1998
b) Series Reactor IS:5553

c) Internal fuse IEC593
d) External fuse IEC549/IS 9402
3. GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF CAPACITOR BANKS

a) The Capacitor banks shall be of outdoor type suitable for operation in the climatic
conditions as given in this specification and mounted on steel racks and structure
with suitable insulators as required to be supplied by the bidder.
b) The bidder shall furnish details of connections between the Capacitor units and
groups together with layout diagram showing the basic arrangement of banks
complete with dimensions.
4. DESIGN CRITERIA REQUIREMENTS AND CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF

CAPACITORS.
i) 33kV rating Capacitor Bank shall be made up either by two groups of star connected
or single groups star connected banks un-earthed, with a floating neutral but
connected by a neutral protective current transformer (NCT) of suitable ratio to
operate Protective relays.
ii) The protective scheme shall be by a two step relay one step current arranged as
follows:
If the failure of one or more units causes an over-voltage of less than 10% tolerable on the
other remaining healthy units, then the unbalance current shall cause in the first step to sound an
alarm. But if more than the above number of units fail causing a voltage rise of more than 10%
then the unbalance current shall cause to trip and isolate the capacitor bank instantaneously.

195
iii) The per phase and individual star group rating shall be built by series parallel
combination of individual unit so as to achieve the desired bank rating. The
individual capacity rating shall be as per IS:13925 Part-I.
iv) All parallel units in one series group shall preferably be arranged in different tiers,
that is, one series group shall be duly insulated from one another by post insulators
adequate to withstand the voltage that may be impressed and shall be sufficient to
withstand even in case of total failure be duly insulated from the earth potential by
supporting post insulators.
v) Although the tolerances in the output rating of each individual units shall be as per
IS:13925. Yet it shall be ensured that in a completely assembled bank, the departures
from the nominal rating and within the specified tolerances values shall not cause
nuisance alarm or tripping since such alarm or tripping shall be to meet only with the
protective requirements specified.
vi) The tolerance in the output ratings shall not cause departures in the line currents by
that value specified in IS: 13925. Besides it shall also be ensured that these
unsymmetrical current shall not cause unsymmetrical voltage rise, whether for a short
period or during prolonged operation.
vii) Individual units shall be designed to meet with the requirements of the permissible
overloads as specified as per IS: 13925. Each unit shall also be provided with
internal discharging devices complying with the requirements of IS.
viii) The voltage rating of the NCT shall be decided by the Contractor by taking into
consideration the voltage impressed on the NCT due to:
a) Failure of one or more parallel units in a series bank.
b) Voltage impressed on the NCT when all the parallel units in one series bank
fail simultaneously. The bidders shall furnish along with the bid design
calculations for the same.
5. CAPACITOR UNITS:
a) Each capacitor unit in the Bank shall be self contained outdoor type having 2 bushing
suitably rated for series/parallel connections with other units to form the capacitor
bank of rated capacity at 50Hz. The bushing shall be of porcelain and shall be joined
to case preferably by welding.
b) The capacitor unit shall be manufactured using imported and of best quality
obtainable in the international market, non-PCB impermanent and polypropylene as
di-electric. Vendors technical specification and test certificate shall be furnished
alongwith the bid. The impregnation shall be carried out under high degree of
vacuum and the unit shall be of totally sealed type.
c) Each capacitor unit shall be provided with a internal discharge resistor designed to
drain the phase voltage of the bank to 50 V or less within 5 minute after
disconnection from the supply.
d) Each capacitor unit shall be suitable for continuous operation at least 1.3 times the
rated current at rated voltage of the bank and frequency. This over current factor
shall include the combined effect of presence of harmonics and over voltage upto 1.1
times rated voltage.
e) The container of capacitor unit shall be of stainless steel or CRCA steel painted with
suitable anti rust primer and two finishing coats of paint as per manufacturers
standard practice. The container shall be made from contraction due to all ambient
and loading conditions expected during the life of the unit.
f) The design of internally fused capacitor units shall be such that it shall permit upto
40% element failure in series group without passing more than 10% over voltage on
other healthy units.
g) Each capacitors units shall be mounted so that it can be easily removed from the
racks and replaced without removing other units, de-assembling any portion of the
rack.
6. PROTECTIVE FUSES:
196
The capacitor unit shall be provided with either internal or external fuses as per
standard practice of the manufacturer.
6.1 CAPACITOR UNITS WITH INTERNAL FUSES:

The internal fuses shall conform to IEC: 593/IS:12762 and the Bidder shall furnish
type test certificates for compliance with IEC/IS
a) The design of the internal fuse shall be same that residues from fuse operation(s)
shall not cause deterioration of the impregnating fluid. The fuse assembly shall be
distinct and separate from element packs and so constructed that operation of fuse
indoor worst condition does not affect the other healthy elements.
b) The fuses shall not melt or deteriorate when subjected to inrush currents, which occur
during the life of the bank.
c) The design of the fuse shall be such that it shall isolate only the faulty element and
the operation of the fuse shall not affect the other healthy element.
6.2 CAPACITOR UNIT WITH EXTERNAL FUSES:
a) The external fuses shall be of current limiting (HRC) type. The fuse system shall in
any event be designed to ensure that the energy released into faulty capacitor units is
less than the value that will cause rupture or bursting of the container. The fuses
shall conform to IEC:549/IS:9402 and Bidder shall furnish type test certificate for
compliance with IEC/IS.
b) The characteristics of the fuse shall be such that it shall isolate the faulty unit only
and prevent it from mechanical destruction due to internal faults. The capacitor unit
together with external fuses shall be arranged in the bank by providing adequate
clearance between the body of the capacitor units of a phase and the line terminal or
the common bus for the units of the other phases to obviate the possibility of
occurrence of bird faults. The fuse shall isolate the faulty capacitor unit only and the
healthy capacitor units shall not be affected in anyway be the isolation of faulty unit.
c) The fuses shall not melt or deteriorate when subjected to inrush currents, which occur
during the life of the bank.
d) The external distance between two metal ends of the fuse shall comply with specified
creepage distance (i.e., the length of the insulating part of the fuse shall be such that
the specified creepage distance is achieved).
e) The selection of fuse to be done in such a manner that characteristic of fuse shall
match suitably with over current withstand characteristic of associated capacitor unit.
f) The capacitor bank and protection shall be such that failure of one unit (i.e one
external fuse operation) does not cause tripping of the bank. The bidder shall furnish
detailed calculations in evidence of above alongwith the Bid.
7. MOUNTING RACKS
a) The mounting racks shall be hot dip galvanised steel sections. Each end of the rack
shall have provision to receive incoming line connection.
b) The racks shall be complete with rack insulators, foundation bolts or any other
hardware etc. for assembly into complete bank.
c) The height of the racks of capacitor banks shall be such that for making electrical
connections with other equipment, proper electrical clearances are maintained.
d) The capacitor bank along with its mounting racks and series reactor and null CT shall
be suitable for installation on the plinth and the enclosure shall be suitably fenced.
8. TESTS
8.1 Type Test:
197
accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or
i) Thermal Stability Test
ii) Capacitor Loss tangent measurement at elevated temperature
iii) AC Voltage Test between terminal and containers
iv) Lightening impulse voltage test between terminal and containers
v) Short circuit discharge test
8.2 ROUTINE TESTS:
8.3 Acceptance & Routine Test:
The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant IS: 13925 (PART-I) 1998 shall be
carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in
writing by the HVPNL.
i) Visual examination
ii) Measurement of capacitance
iii) Voltage test between terminals
iv) AC Voltage test between terminal container
v) Test of discharge device
vi) Capacitor Loss tangent measurement at elevated temperature
vii) Ceiling test
9. SERIES REACTORS:
9.1 The series reactor of small size is required for limiting the inrush current. The series reactor
shall be outdoor type, 50Hz, air cooled, air core type and suitable for operation in climatic
conditions specified.
9.2 Series reactors shall be capable of withstanding the specified short circuit currents.
9.3 The percentage series reactance shall preferably be 0.2%.
9.4 The series reactors shall conform to type tests and shall be subjected to routine tests as per IS.
10. TESTS
10.1 Type Test:
i) Temperature Rise Test
ii) Impulse voltage withstand test
10.2 Routine Tests
10.3 Acceptance Tests
The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant IS: 5553 (PART-III) 1970 shall be
carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in
writing by the HVPNL.
i) Measurement of winding resistance
ii) Measurement of current and impedance
iii) Separate source voltage withstand test
iv) Induced over voltage withstand test or impulse voltage withstand test
v) Measurement of insulation resistance
11. TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF CAPACITORS,SERIES REACTORS & NCT.
11.1(a) CAPACITOR for S/Stn. where 2 No. bays are available.

198
Sr. ITEM
No SPECIFICATION
a. Nominal system voltage (kV) 33
b. MVAR Capacitor required at (MVAR) 5.43+5.43
nominal system voltage (separated by Isolators as per
arrangement shown in drg.)
c. Rated voltage of the Capacitor (kV) 38
Bank
d. Rated output of Cap. Bank at (KVAR) 7200+7200
rated voltage
e. Protection of capacitor units External/
Internal fuse
f. Type of connection
g. Rating of Cap. Units with KVAR 7.3 KV

internal fuse 200
h. Power loss (tan delta) Not to exceed 0.2 W per KVAR subject to
including loss in the fuse tolerance as per applicable standards.
i. Permissible overloads Max. permissible overloads with reference
to voltage current and reactive output shall
conform to applicable standards.
j. Type of grounding Un-grounded
k. Capacity to receive inrush Not less than 100 times rated current.
current
l. Temperature category The capacitors shall be suitable for
maximum ambient temperature of 50 deg.
C. Adequate care should be taken to
protect the capacitors from direct sun
radiation on account of outdoor
installations.
Note: The capacitor bank shall be capable of running either half unit or full unit based on
requirement of load. These shall be controlled by single breaker but two isolators.
Series reactors shall be arranged accordingly. The maximum bay space available for
two part capacitor bank shall be equivalent to 11400 mm (indicative sketch attached
at Annexure-1 for 220kV S/Stn. Mehna Khera). Special requirement of protection, if
any, for two part operation of capacitor bank shall be brought out by the bidder.
For single part capacitor unit the bay space available is 5700mm.
11.1(b) CAPACITOR for S/Stn. where 1 No. bay is available.
Sr. ITEM
No SPECIFICATION
a. Nominal system voltage (kV) 33
b. MVAR Capacitor required at (MVAR) 10.872
nominal system voltage
c. Rated voltage of the Capacitor (kV) 38
Bank
d. Rated output of Cap. Bank at (KVAR) 14400
rated voltage
e. Protection of capacitor units External/
Internal Fuse
f. Type of connection
g. Rating of Cap. Units with KVAR 7.3 KV
internal fuse 400
h. Power loss (tan delta) Not to exceed 0.2 W per

199
including loss in the fuse KVAR subject to tolerance
as per applicable
standards.
i. Permissible overloads Max. permissible overloads

with reference to voltage
current and reactive
output shall conform to
applicable standards.
j. Type of grounding Un-grounded
k. Capacity to receive Not less than 100 times rated

inrush current current.
l. Temperature category The capacitors shall be

suitable for maximum
ambient temperature of
50 deg. C. Adequate care
should be taken to protect
the capacitors from
direct sun radiation on account
of outdoor
installations.
11.2 SERIES REACTORS
Sr. No. Item Specification
a. Rated voltage 36
b. Type Air core
c. Rating of series reactors 0.2% of capacitor bank rating to be
connected on neutral end
d. Insulation levels Impulse withstand 170
voltage /power frequency with stand 70
voltage
e. Short-time withstand capacity and 16 times of 130% rated current of
duration capacitor bank for 3 seconds.
f. Linear characteristic Upto 1.5 pu.
g. Continuous rating 130% of rated current of capacitor
bank.
Note: For 100 MVA, 220/33kV T/F Capacitor bank of capacity 2x10.872 MVAR to be
installed per bay.
11.3 NEUTRAL CURRENT T/F (4.7)
Highest system voltage 36 kV
Rated voltage 33 kV
Reference standard IS-2705
Ratio To be suitably designed by the
bidder as per actual requirement
Rated VA Burden
Core-I 15
Core-II 15
Accuracy class
Core-I 5P
Core-II 1
i)Accuracy limit factor Core-I Not less than 10
ii) Instrument security factor Core-II Not exceeding 5
Creepage distance 900
Minimum insulation voltage 15 kV
12.0 CAPACITOR LOSSES

200
The capacitor shall be of low loss type. The losses in watts for each capacitor unit
including losses in fuses and discharge resistors forming integral part of the capacitors
along with losses for series reactor shall be guaranteed. If the test figures of capacitor
losses exceed 0.2 W/KVAR, the capacitors will be liable for rejection. Total losses
shall be complied as below:
6*(W*n+losses in series reactor)
where n is number of capacitor units per phase of star connection and W is the total
loss in a capacitor unit.
13.0 DOCUMENTATION
NOTE: All above drawings should be a minimum space (14x10cm) for stamping
the approval of drawings by HVPNL.

201
202
SECTION-6
CHATPER-9
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
1.00.00 GENERAL
1.01.00 This specification covers supply, installation, testing and commissioning and
handing over to HVPNL of Air Conditioning system for the control room
building.
Air conditioning units for control room building shall be set to maintain the
following inside conditions.
DBT 24.40 C +/- 20 C
1.02.00 The following rooms shall be air conditioned:
i) Control room
ii) Conference Room
iii) DGMs room
iv) Battery room
v) Electronics test lab
1.03.00 Air conditioning requirement of rooms indicated at clause No. 1.02.00 shall be
met using split AC units. High wall type split AC units of 2TR capacity each
with high wall type indoor evaporator unit shall be used for all rooms.
1.04.00 Scope
The scope of the equipment to be furnished and services to be provided

under the contract are outlined herein after an the same is to be read in
conjunction with the provision contained in other sections/clauses. The scope
of work under the contract shall be deemed to include all such items, which
although are not specifically mentioned in the bid documents and/or in
Bidders proposal, but are required to make the equipment/system complete
for its safe, efficient, reliable and trouble free operation.
1.04.01 Twelve (12) nos. of high wall type split AC units of 2TR capacity each
complete with air cooled outdoor condensing unit having hermetically sealed
compressor and high wall type indoor evaporator unit with cordless remote
controller.
1.04.02 Copper refrigerant piping complete with insulation between the indoor and
remote outdoor condensers as required.
1.04.03 PVC drain piping from the indoor units upto the nearest drain point.
1.04.04 Power and control cabling between the indoor unit and outdoor unit and
earthing.
1.04.05 MS brackets for outdoor condensing units, condensers as required.
PAGE-1 of 2

203
2.00.00 Specification of Split AC units
2.01.00 The split AC units will be complete with indoor evaporator and outdoor
condensing units and cordless remote control units.
2.02.00 Outdoor unit shall comprise of hermetically sealed reciprocating/rotary

compressors mounted on vibration isolators, propeller type axial flow fans
and copper tube aluminum finned coils all assembled in a sheet metal casing.
The casing and the total unit shall be properly treated and shall be
weatherproof type. They shall be compact in size and shall have horizontal
discharge of air.
2.03.00 The indoor units shall be high wall type. The indoor unit shall be compact and
shall have elegant appearance. They shall have low noise centrifugal blowers
driven by special motors and copper tube aluminum finned cooling coils.
Removable and washable polypropylene filters shall be provided. They shall
be complete with multi function cordless remote control unit with special
features like programmable timer, sleep mode and soft dry mode etc.
2.04.00 The split AC units shall be of Carrier, Voltas, Blue Star, Hitachi, Daikin, LG ,
National, OGeneral or Samsung make.
PAGE-2 of 2

204
SECTION 6
CHAPTER 10
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LT TWO CORE, 3 CORE AND FOUR CORE PVC
INSULATED UNARMOURED CABLE OFF SIZES FOR WORKING VOLTAGE UPTO &
INCLUDING 1100 V, FOR SERVICE CONNECTIONS.
1. SCOPE:- This specification provides for design, manufacture, inspection at manufacturers

works, testing before dispatch, supply and delivery of unarmoured 2 core, 3 core and 4 core
PVC sheathed Aluminium conductor cables for voltage upto 1.1 kV.
2. STANDARD:- LT distribution unarmoured cables shall be suitable for service voltage of

1100 volts (640 volts to earth) and made from high conductivity Aluminium conductor
insulated with PVC compound and having inner and outer sheathing of PVC compound. The
cables shall be strictly in conformity with ISS-1554/Part-I/1988 with latest amendments/
edition if any and shall be ISI/ IEC marked. The inner and outer sheathing shall be carried out
as per relevant ISS. However, material manufactured as per any other International Standard
which offers equivalent or materials better in quality and workmanship as compared to
mentioned standards shall also be acceptable. Aluminium conductor complying with IS:8130-
1984 shall be used.
3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:- The cable shall work satisfactorily under the following
climatic conditions:-
i) Maximum ambient temperature 50oC

ii) Minimum ambient temperature -2.5oC
iii) Maximum relative humidity 100%
iv) Minimum relative humidity 26%
v) Altitude Below 1000 meters above mean sea
level.
vi) Average no. of Rainy days per annum. 120
vii) Average annual Rain fall. 900 mm
viii) Maximum wind pressure 195 Kg/ meter2
4 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:- The cable shall be suitable for use on 50 Hz three phase
AC solidly earthed Neutral power system working voltage of 3 x 240/ 415 Volt.
4.1 Sheathing:-
a) 4 Core Cables:- The supplier has the option to provide inner and outer sheathing of
PVC compound by single or separate pressure extrusion process as per relevant ISS.
b) 3 Core Cables.
c) 2 core cable.

205
i) Inner and outer sheathing shall be provided by separate operation process only.
ii) Where inner and outer sheathing are to be provided with PVC compound (by separate
operation) the sheathing are to be provided by pressure extrusion process.
iii) Where inner sheathing is to be provided with thermo plastic material or proofed tape
which shall not be harder than PVC used for insulating and outer sheathing shall be
provided with pressure extrusion process.
Note:- Cable with sheathing by sleeves extrusion shall not be accepted.
5. SIZES:- The normal sizes of the cables shall be as per schedule of requirements as per
requirement.
6. TESTS:-
6.1 TYPE TESTS:-

A copy of Type Test reports for the tendered type and size of cable carried at Govt./
Recognized Test House should be submitted alongwith the tender. The type tests shall be
carried out as per IS:1554/Part-I/1988, IS-8130:1984 and IS:5831:1984. These type tests
should have been carried out not earlier than seven years from the date of opening of Bids.
Tenders not accompanied with copies of type test certificates are liable to be rejected.
6.2 ROUTINE TEST:- The following shall constitute routine tests:-

a) Conductor resistance test.
b) High voltage test at room temperature.
All Routine Tests shall be carried out at manufacturers works by the supplier. Copies of
routine test certificates shall be submitted alongwith the inspection report for approval.
6.3 ACCEPTANCE TEST:- The following shall constitute the acceptance tests which shall be
got carried out by the inspecting officer during inspection:
a) Tensile test.
b) Wrapping test.
c) Conductor Resistance test and nominal X-sectional area of conductor & neutral.
d) Tests for thickness of insulation and sheath.
e) Tensile strength and clongation at break of insulation and sheath.
f) Insulation resistance test.
g) High voltage test.
h) Flammability test.
Inspecting officer shall carry out following type tests also during inspection at firms works
on all the lots offered for inspection.
a) Shrinkage test.
b) Hot deformation test.
c) Thermal stability test.

206
7. MANUFACTURER IDENTIFICATION:- HVPNL alongwith brand name, manufacturer
name, voltage rating, size and year of manufacture in English shall be embossed on the outer
sheath of the cable at regular intervals of approximately 1 to 1.5 metre.
8. INSPECTION AND TEST:- An authorised representative of the Nigam shall inspect,

examine and test the equipment/ material in respect of quality, size and ratings as per ISS/
IEC mentioned above at the manufacturers works during or after the manufacture of goods
prior to dispatch on receipt of a clear notice of minimum two weeks in advance to be
reckoned from the date of receipt of the same by the purchaser. No material will be allowed
to be dispatched without prior inspection and approval. The inspecting officer of the
purchaser may also inspect the material during the course of manufacture. In case, inspection
of any consignment is waived off by the purchaser, the supplier will be required to furnish the
requisite test certificates (for acceptance as well as routine tests) for approval. It will be the
responsibility of the supplier to make adequate arrangements for testing of material at their
works without any additional charge to the purchaser. All testing instruments and appliances
will be made available and material destroyed/ consumed during testing will be to the account
of the supplier.
The purchaser reserves the right to carry out Type Test as per Indian Standard
Specifications with latest version thereof. These tests will be carried out at an
Independent & recognized test house/ agency/ laboratory. All expenses whatsoever
for carrying out these tests shall be to the suppliers account. The purchaser has the
right to have the tests carried out at any Govt./ Recognized Test agency in case of
dispute in quality, size and ratings as per relevant ISS.
8.1 SAMPLING OF CABLES:-

a) Scale of sampling:- Samples shall be taken and tested from each lot for ascertaining
the conformity of the lot to the required specifications.
b) The number of samples to be selected as per table given below at random (the
randomness of selection, random number tables shall be used as per IS:4905-1968.
No. of drums to be taken permissible number of as sample (a).
S.No. of drums/ No. of coils/ No. of drums to be taken as Permissible number of

reels in lot. sample. refectives.
(n) (n) (n)
Upto 50 3 0
51 to 100 5 0
101 to 300 13 0
301 to 500 20 1
501 to above 31 2
The inspector shall have the option to take the sample (s) from any point in the length
of any drums selected at random for carrying out various tests and total length of that
particular drum(s) of such two pieces because of this sampling in such a particular
case will be considered as one length.

207
9. PACKING:- The cable shall be packed and supplied in non-returnable wooden drums
provided with cast iron bushings to resist any damage during transit. Material offered for
inspection should be duly packed provided with blank lead seals for the purpose of sealing by
the Inspecting Officer. The supplier will put their own seals also on the two ends of the
cables.
10. DRUM LENGTH:- The cable shall be supplied in standard lengths as under:-
Cable upto 185 sq.mm. = 500 Metres + 5%
Cable above 185 sq.mm. = 250 Metres + 5%
Non standards lengths not less than 100 metres each shall be acceptable upto 5% of the
ordered quantity. A tolerance of + 5% is permissible allotted to each consignee with overall +
2% tolerance on the ordered quantity for completion of order.
11. MARKING:- The marking on the drums shall have the following informations:-
a) Trade mark, if any.
b) Name of the manufacturer.
c) Nominal cross sectional area of conductor of the cable.
d) Year of manufacture.
e) Type of cable and voltage for which it is suitable.
f) Length of cable on the drum/ reel.
g) Approximate gross weight.
h) Number of cores and colour of cores.
i) Net weight of the cable.
j) Drum/ reel identification no.
k) Purchase Order No. and Date.
l) Consignees name with designation.
m) ISI mark/ IEC mark.
n) Direction of rotation of drum/ reel (by means of an arrow).
o) Reference IS:1554/Part-I/1988.

208
SECTION 6
CHAPTER 11
SECTION: DIESEL GENERATOR SET

Table of Contents
Clause No. Description Page No.

1.1 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
1.2 SCOPE OF SERVICE
1.3 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT
1.4 PLANT DESIGN
1.4.1 Diesel Engine
1.4.2 Air Suction & Filtration
1.4.3 Fuel & Lubricating System
1.4.4 Engine Starting System
1.4.5 Fuel Injection and Regulator
1.4.6 Alternator
1.4.7 Coupling
1.4.8 Mounting Arrangement
1.4.9 Peripherals
1.5 CONTROL AND INSTRUCMENTATION
1.6 D.G. SET Enclosure
1.7 INSTALLATION ARRANGEMNT
1.8 DOCUMENTS
1.9 TESTS
1.10 COMMISSIONING CHECKS
SECTIONAL : DIESEL GENERATOR SET

1.1 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
1.1.1 The scope covers supply of Diesel Generator Set of Stationary Type having a
net electrics output of 100kVA capacity at specified site conditions of 500C
209
ambient temperature and 100% relative humidity on FOR site basis. DG set
shall be equipped with:-
(i) Diesel engine complete with all accessories.
(ii) An alternator directly coupled to the engine through coupling, complete with
at accessories.
(iii) Automatic voltage regulator.
(iv) Complete starting arrangement, including two nos. batteries & chargers.
(v) Base frame, foundation bolts etc.
(vi) Day tank of 500 Litre capacity.
(vii) Engine Cooling and lubrication system.
(viii) Engine air filtering system.
(ix) Exhaust silencer package.
(x) Set of GI pipes, valves, strainers, unloading hose pipes as required for fuel
transfer system from storage area to fuel tank including electrically driven fuel
pump.
(xi) All lubricants, consumable, touch up paints etc. for first filing, testing &
commissioning at site. The fuel oil for first commissioning will also be
provided by the contractor.
(xii) AMF panel for control, metering and alarm.
(xiii) Enclosure for silent type D.G. Set.
1.2 SCOPE OF SERVICE

1.2.1 The Contractor shall provide following services :-
a) Design manufacture, shop testing including assembly test.
b) Despatch, transportation to site.
c) Erection, testing & commissioning with all equipments/materials required for
the purpose.
d) Drawings, data, design calculations and printed erection, operation &
maintenance manual.
e) Certification and compliance for meeting noise level & emission parameters
and other requirements in accordance with latest Notification of MOEF.
1.3 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.3.1 The rating of DG sets are as follows
1.3.1.1 DG set net out put after considering deration for engine and alternator
separately due to temperature rise in side the enclosure and on account of
power reduction due to auxiliaries shall be 100kVA, 1500 RPM, 0.8RPM,
0.8Pf, 415V, 3 phase, 50Hz. The above ratings are the minimum
requirements.
1.3.1.2 DG Set shall also be rated for 110% of full load for 1 hour in every twelve hrs
of continuous running.
1.3.2 The output voltage, frequency and limits of variation from open circuit to full
load shall be as follows:-
a) Voltage variation +5% of the set value provision shall exist to
adjust the set value between 90% to 110%
of nominal Generator voltage of 415V.
b) Frequency 50Hz +2%
1.3.3 The Diesel Generator and other auxiliary motor shall be of H class with
temperature rise limited to Class-F for temperature rise consideration.
13.4 NOISE LEVEL & EMISSION PARAMETERES: These shall be as per latest
Notification of MOEF.
210
1.4 PLANT DESIGN
1.4.1 DIESEL ENGINE
1.4.1.1 The engine shall comply with the IS 10002/BS 5514/ISO 3046; latest edition.
1.4.1.2 Diesel engine shall be turbo changed multicylinder V-type in line type with
mechanical fuel injection system.
1.4.1.3. The engine with all accessories shall be enclosed in a enclosure to make it
work Silently (Within permissible noise level without any degradation in its
performance.
1.4.1.4 The Diesel Engines shall be directly water cooled. Cooling of water
through radiator and fan as cavisaged.
1.4.1.5 The fuel used shall be High Speed Diesel Oil (HSD) or Light Diesel Oil
(LDO) as per IS:1460.
1.4.2 AIR SUCTION & FILTRATION
1.4.2.1 Suction of air shall be from vanulation and exhaust flue gasses will be let out
to outside atmosphere. Condeasate traps shall be provided on the exhaust
pipe.
1.4.2.2 Filter shall be dry type as filter with replaceable elements.
1.4.3 FUEL AND LUBRICATING OIL SYSTEM
1.4.3.1 The engine shall have closed loop lubricating system. No moving parts shall
require lubrication by hand prior to the start of engine or while it is in
operation.
1.4.4 ENGINE STARTING SYSTEM
1.4.4.1 Automatic electric starting by DC starter motor shall be provided.
1.4.5 FUEL INJECTION AND REGULATOR
1.4.5.1 The engine shall be fitted with electronic governor suitable for class A-1 as
per IS 10000.
1.4.5.2 The engine shall be fitted with a heavy, dynamically balanced fly wheel
suitable for constant speed governor duty.
1.4.6 ALTERNATOR
1.4.6.1 The alternator shall comply with BS 2613/IS 4722/IEC 34: latest edition.
1.4.6.2 The alternator shall be of continuously rated duty, suitable for 415V, 3 Phase,
50 Hz Power development having brush-less, synchronous, self-excited, self-
regulating system.
1.4.6.3 The alternator shall be drip-proof, screen protected as per IP-23 degree of
Protection.
1.4.6.4 The rotor shall be dynamically balanced to minimize vibration.
1.4.6.5 It shall have the winding of class H but limited to Class-F for temperature rise
consideration.
1.4.6.6 It shall have the winding of class H but limited to Class-F for temperature rise
consideration.
1.4.6.7 The Alternator regulator shall be directly coupled to the engine and shall be
complete with the excitation system, automatic voltage regulation of +/- 1%
voltage adjusting potentiometer and under over speed protection.

211
1.4.6.8 TERMINAL BOX
1.4.6.8.1 Six (6) output terminals shall be provided in alternator terminal box. Terminals
shall be suitable for 31/2 Core 300 mm2 XLPE cable for 100kVA DG set. The
neutral shall be formed a AMF panel. The generator terminal box shall be
suitable to house necessary cables an should be made of non-magnetic
material.
1.4.6.8.2 The alternator with all accessories shall be enclosed in a enclosure to make it
work Silently (within permissible noise level)
1.4.7 COUPLING
1.4.7.1 The engine and alternator shall be directly coupled by means of self-aligning
flexible flange coupling to avoid misalignment.
1.4.7.2 The coupling shall be provided with a protecting guard to avoid accidental
contract.
1.4.8 MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT
1.4.8.1 The engine and alternator shall be mounted on a common heavy duty, rigid
fabricated steel base frame constructed from ISMC of suitable sections.
1.4.8.2 Adequate number of anti-vibration mounting pads shall be fixed on the
common base frame on which the engine and the alternator shall be mounted
to isolate the vibration from passing on to the common base frame or the
foundation of the D.G. Set.
1.4.9 PERIPHERALS
1.4.9.1 FUEL TANK
1.4.9.1.1 The Fuel tank of 500 Litre capacity shall be provided on a suitably fabricated
steel platform. The tank shall be complete with level indicator marked in litres,
filling inlet with removable screen, an outlet, a drain plug, an air vent, an air
breather and necessary piping. The tank shall be painted with oil resistant
paint and shall be erected I accordance with Indian explosive act of 1932.
Fuel tank shall be kept outside of enclosure. The fuel piping shall be carried
out to connect the D.G. set kept inside.
1.4.9.1.2 For transferring fuel to Fuel tank transfer pump is envisaged. The capacity of
transfer pump shall be adequate to fill the day tank in about 30 minutes. Fuel
pump shall be electrically driven.
1.4.9.2 BATTERY and BATTERY CHARGER
1.4.9.2.1 Two nos. 12V batteries of atleast 150AH complete with all leads, terminals
and stand shall be provided Each battery shall have sufficient capacity to give
10 nos. successive starting impulse to the diesel engine.
1.4.9.2.2 The battery charger shall be complete with transformer, suitable rating (415V,
3 Ph., 50Hz./230V, 1Ph., 50Hz) rectifier circuit, charge rate selector switch for
tricle/boost charge, D.C. ammeter & volunteer, annunciation panel for
battery charge indication/loading/failures.
1.4.9.2.3 The charger shall float and Boost Charge the battery as per recommendation
manufacturer of battery. The charger shall be able to charge a fully
discharged batter I state of full charge in 8 Hrs. with 25% spare capacity.
1.4.9.2.4 Manual control for coarse and find voltage variation shall be provided. Float
charger sl. have built-in load limiting features.

212
1.4.9.2.5 Ripple shall not be more than 1% (r.m.s.) to get smooth DC voltage shall be
provided.
1.4.9.2.6 Charger shall be provided with Out-put Voltmeter & Ammeter.
1.4.9.2.7 Changeover scheme for selecting battery and battery charger by changeover
switch show be provided.
1.5 CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
1.5.1 Each D.G. Set shall be provided with suitable instruments, interlock and
protection arrangement, suitable annunciation and indications etc. for proper
start up, monitoring and safe operation of the unit. One local AMF control
panel alongwith D.G. set shall be provided by the Contractor to accommodate
these instruments, protect relays, indication lamps etc. The AMF Panel shall
have IP-52 degree of Protection as IS:12063.
1.5.2 The D.G. sets shall be provided with automatic start facility to make it
possible to take load within 30 seconds of Power Supply failure.
1.5.3 Testing facility for automatic operation of D.G. Set shall be provided in AMF
panel.
1.5.4 A three attempt starting facility using two impulse timers and summating timer
for shall be proved and if the voltage fails to develop within 40 sec. from
receiving the final impulse, the set shall block and alarm to this effect shall be
provided in the AMF panel.
1.5.5 Following instruments shall be provided with Diesel Engine.
a) Lub Oil Pressure Gauge.
b) Water Temperature Thermometers.
c) Engine Tachometer/HR
d) Any other instruments necessary for DG Set operation shall be
provided.
1.5.6. DG Set shall be capable of being started stopped manually from remote as
well as laid (Remote START/STOP push button shall be provided in 415V
ACDB). However interlock shall be provided to prevent shutting down
operation as long as DG care breaker is closed.
1.5.7. The diesel generator shall commence a shutdown sequence whenever any of
the following conditions appear in the systems :-
a) Overspeed
b) Overload
c) High temperature of Engine and Cooling Waters
d) High temperature inside enclosure
e) Low lube oil pressure
f) Generator differential protection
g) Short Circuit Protection
h) Under Voltage
i) Under Voltage
j) Further interlocking of breaker shall be provided to prevent parallel
operation of DG set with normal station supply.
1.5.8 Following indication lamps for purposes mentioned as under shall be
provided in AMF Panel
1.5.8.1 Pilot indicating lamp for the following:-
a) Mains ON
b) Alternator ON
c) Charger ON/OFF
d) Breaker ON/OFF
e) Main LT Supply ON/OFF.
1.5.8.2 Visual Annunciation shall be provided for set shut down due to :
a) Engine overheating
b) Low Oil Pressure
c) Lack of Fuel
213
d) Set failed to start in 30 secs after receiving the first start impulse
e) High Cooling Water Temperature
f) Low level in daily service fuel tank
g) Overspeed trip
h) Audio & Visual Annunciation for alternator fault.
1.5.9 Thermostatically controlled space heaters and cubicle illumination operated

by Door Switch shall be provided in AMF Panel. Necessary isolating switches
and fuses shall also be provided.
1.5.10 AMF Panel shall have facility for adjustment of speed and voltage including
the adjustments in remote as well as in local mode.
Following shall also be provided in AMF Panel.

a) Frequency meter.
b) 3 Nos. Single Phase CTs for metering.
c) 3 Nos. (Provided by LT swgr. Manufacturer) Single Phase CTs with KPV
300V & RCT 0.25 ohm for differential protection of DG Set on neutral side
only for 100kVA.
d) One (1) DC Ammeter (0-40A)
e) One (1) DC Voltmeter (0-30V)
f) One (1) Voltmeter Selector Switch
g) One (1) AC Ammeter
h) One (1) AC Voltmeter
i) Three (3) Timers (24V DC)
j) Two (2) Auto/Manual Selector Switch
k) Two (2) Auto/Test/Manual Selector Switch
l) Eleven (11) Aux. Contactors suitable for 24V DC.
m) One (1) Motorised potentiometer for voltage adjustment
n) Two (2) Set Battery charger as specified in Technical Specification
o) One (1) Set Phase & Neutral busbars.
p) Any other item required for completion of Control Scheme shall be deemed to
be included.
1.6 D.G. SET ENCLOSURE
1.6.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.6.1.1 Diesel engine, alternator, AMF panel, Batteries and Chargers shall be
installed outdoor in a suitable weather-proof enclosure which shall be
provided for protection from rain, sun, dust etc. Further, in addition to the
weather proofing, acoustic enclosures shall also be provided such that the
noise level of acoustic enclosure DG set shall meet the requirement of
MOEF. The diesel generator sets should also conform to Environment
(Protection) Rules, 1986 as amended. An exhaust fan with louvers shall be
installed in the enclosure for temperature control inside the enclosure. The
enclosure shall allow sufficient ventilation to the enclosed D.G. Set so that the
body temperature is limit to 500C. The air flow of the exhaust fan shall be
from inside to the outside the shelter. The exhaust fan shall be powered from
the DG set supply output so that it starts with the starting of the DG set and
stops with the stopping of the DG set. The enclosure shall have suitable
viewing glass to view the local parameters on the engine.
1.6.1.2 Fresh air intake for the Engine shall be available abundantly; without making
the engine to gasp for air intake. A chicken mess shall be provided for air inlet
at suitable location in enclosure which shall be finalized during detailed
engineering.
1.6.1.3 The Enclosure shall be designed and the layout of the equipment inside it
shall be such that there is easy access to all the serviceable parts.

214
1.6.1.4 Engine and Alternator used inside the Enclosure shall carry their
manufacturers Warranty for their respective Models and this shallnot
degrade their performance.
1.6.1.5 Exhaust from the Engine shall be let off through Silence arrangement to keep
the noise level within desired limits. Interconnection between silence and
engine should be through stainless steel flexible hose/pipe.
1.6.2 All the Controls for Operation of D.G. Set shall be easily assessable. There
should be provision for emergency shut down from outside the enclosure.
1.6.3 Arrangement shall be made for housing the Battery Set in a tray inside the
Enclosure.
1.6.4 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES
1.6.4.1 The enclosure shall be fabricated from at least 14 Gauge CRCA sheet steel
and of Modular construction for easy assembling and dismantling. The sheet
metal components shall be pre-treated by Seven Tank Process and Poweder
coated (PURO Polyester based) both-in side and out side for long life. The
hard-ware and accessories shall be high tensile grade. Enclosure shall be
given a lasting anti-rust treatment and finished with pleasant environment
friendly paint. All the hardware and fixtures shall be rust proof and able to
withstand the weather conditions.
1.6.4.2 Doors shall be large sized for easy access and provided with long lasting
gasket to make the enclosure sound proof. All the door handles shall be
lockable type.
1.6.4.3 The Enclosure shall be provided with anti-vibration pads (suitable for the
loads and vibration they are required to carry) with minimum vibration
transmitted to the surface the set is resting on.
1.6.4.4 High quality rock wool of required density and thickness shall be used with
fire retardant thermo setting resin to make the Enclosure sound proof.
1.6.4.5 Provision for Neutral/Body Earthing.
1.6.5.1 Points shall be available at two side of the enclosure with the help of flexible
copper wires from alternator neutral, and electrical panel body respectively.
The earthing point shall be isolated through insulator mounted on enclosure.
1.7 INSTALLATION ARRANGEMENT
1.7.1 DG set enclosed in enclosure shall be installed on Concrete Pedestal 300mm

above FGL.
1.8 DOCUMENTS
1.8.1 Following drawings and data sheet shall be submitted for approval:
(i) Data sheet for Engine, Alternator, Batter, AMF Panel and Enclosure.
(ii) G.A. drawing of DG set.
(iii) Layout of DG set in the enclosure along with sections.
(iv) GA and schematic of AMF panel.
(v) Arrangement of inclined roof and pedestal.
1.8.2 The DG Set shall be supplied with

(i) DG Set test certificate.
(ii) Engine Operation & maintenance Manual.
(iii) Engine Parts Catalogue.
(iv) Alternator Operation, maintenance & Spare Parts Manual.
(v) Alternator Test Certificate.
1.9 TESTS

215
a) The Diesel generator sets shall be tested for routine and acceptance tests as
per the relevant IS/IEC standards.
b) The Type Test Report for diesel engine and alternation are not required to be
submitted or the makes indicated at Annexure-E of Section: GTR/HVPNL
approved list of subvendors. For the new makes (other than those indicated
at Annexure-E/HVPNL approved list of subvendors) Type Test Reports as
per relevant standard shall be submitted for HVPNLs approval.
1.10. COMMISSIONING CHECKS
In addition to the checks and test recommended by the manufacturer, the

Contractor shall carryout the following commissioning test to be carried out at
site.
1. LOAD TEST
The engine shall be given test run for a period of atleast 6 hours. The set
shall be subjected to the maximum achievable load as decided by HVPNL
without exceeding the specified DG Set rating:
During the load test, half hourly records of the following shall be taken :
a) Ambient temperature.
b) Exhaust temperature if exhaust thermometer is fitted.
c) Cooling water temperature at a convenient point adjacent to the water
output from the engine jacket.
d) Lubricating oil temperature where oil cooler fitted.
e) Lubricating oil pressure.
f) Colour of exhaust gas.
g) Speed.
h) Voltage, wattage and current output.
i) Oil tank level.
The necessary load to carryout the test shall be provided by the HVPNL.
2. INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST FOR ALTERNATOR

Insulation resistance in mega-ohms between the coils and the frame of the
alternator when tested with a 500V megger shall not be less than 1R=2x
(rated voltage in KV)+1
3. CHECK OF FUEL CONSUMPTION

A check of the fuel consumption shall be made during the load run test. This
test shall be conducted for the purpose of proper tuning of the engine.
4. INSULTAITON RESISTANCE OF WIRING

Insulation resistance of control panel wiring shall be checked by 500V
Megger. The IR shall not be less than one mega ohm.
5. FUNCTIONAL TESTS
a) Functional tests on control panel.

b) Functional test on starting provision on the engine.
c) Functional tests on all Field devices.
d) Functional tests on AVR and speed governor.
6. MEASUREMENT OF VIBRATION
The vibration shall be measured at load as close to maximum achievable
load and shall not exceed 100 microns.
7. Noise Level Check As Per Relevant Standard.

216
8. The tests shall be carried out with the DG set operating at rated speed and at
maximum achievable load. Necessary correction for Test environment
condition & background noise will be applied as per IS:12065.
SECTION-7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR SWITCHYARD ERECTION

1.0 GENERAL
This section covers the Technical requirements of various ancillary items and general switchyard erection
practices. All ancillary items under the contractors scope of supply shall conform to the type tests and routine
tests as per the relevant standards.
1.1 STRING INSULATORS & HARDWARE
1.1.1 GENERAL
The insulators for suspension and tension strings shall conform to IS:731, long rod insulator shall conform to
IEC-433(1980) and composite long rod insulator shall confirm to various standard mentioned in the
specifications. Insulator Hardware shall conform to IS:2486.
1.2 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
Suspension and tension insulator shall be wet process porcelain with ball and socket connections. Insulator
shall be interchangeable and shall be suitable for forming either suspension or strings. Each insulator shall
have rated strength marking on porcelain printed and applied before firing.
Porcelain used in insulator manufacture shall be homogeneous, free from Laminations, cavities and other
flaws or imperfections that might affect the mechanical or dielectric quality and shall be thoroughly vitrified,
tough and impervious to moisture.
Glazing of the porcelain shall be uniform brown colour, free from blisters, burrs and other similar defects.
When operating at normal rated voltage there shall be no electric discharge between conductor and insulator
which would cause corrosion or injury to conductor or insulator by the formation of substances due to
chemical action. No radio interferences shall be caused when operating at normal rated voltage.
The design of the insulator shall be such that stresses due to expansion and contraction in any part of the
insulator shall not lead to deterioration. All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised in accordance with the
latest edition of IS:2629. the zinc used for galvanising shall be of grade Zn-99.5 as per IS-209. the zinc coating
shall be uniform, adherent, smooth, reasonably bright, continuous and free from imperfections such as flux,
ash, rust stains, bulky white deposits and blisters.
Bidder shall make available data on all the essential features of design including the method of assembly of
discs and metal parts, number of discs per insulators, the manner in which mechanical stresses are transmitted
through discs to adjacent parts, provision for meeting expansion stresses, results of corona and thermal shock
tests, recommended working strength and any special design or arrangement employed to increase life under
service conditions
Insulator Hardware shall conform to the requirements stipulated for clamps and connectors. All Hardware
shall be designed for tensile load with a factor of safety 2.
Insulator Hardware shall be of forged steel. Malleable cast iron shall not be accepted except for insulator disc
cap. The surface of Hardware must be clean, smooth, without cuts, abrasion or projections. No part shall be
subjected to excessive localized pressure. The metal parts shall not produce any noise-generating corona under
operating conditions.
The tension insulator string shall be designed for the required tensile load Earth wire tension clamp shall be
designed for the required tensile load with a factor of safety two (2).
The tension insulator string assembly shall be supplied along with suitable turnbuckle at the rate of one
turnbuckle per string.
All Hardware shall be bolted type.
1.3 TESTS
In accordance with the requirements stipulated in section1 and section2, the suspension and tension strings,
insulator discs and Hardware shall be conform to type tests as per relevant IS/IEC and shall be subjected to the
following acceptance tests and routine tests.
1.3.1 ACCEPTANCE TESTS FOR DISC INSULATOR
Visual Examination (IS 2486-1971) Part 1.
Verification of Dimensions : Cl no. 10.5 IS:731-1971
Temperature cycle test: Cl no. 10.6 IS:731-1971

Puncture Test: Cl no. 10.10 IS:731-1971
217
Galvanising Test: CI no. 10.12 IS:731-1971
Mechanical performance test : IEC:575-1977 Cl.4
Test on locking device for ball and socket coupling IEC:372(2)-1976.
Porosity test Cl no. 10.11 IS:7311-971.
1.3.2 ACCEPTANCE TEST ON HARDWARE FITTING
Visual Examination: CI. 5. 10 IS:2486 (Part-1).

Verification of Dimensions :CI. 5.8 IS:2486 (part-I)-1971.
Galvanizing/Electroplating tests : CI. 5.9 IS:2486 (Part-I)-1971
Slip strength test :CI 5.4 of IS:2486 (Part-I).
Shore hardness test for the Elasto-meters (if applicable as per the value guaranteed by the Bidder).
Mechanical strength test for each component.

The load shall be so supplied that the component is stressed in the same way as it would be in actual service
and the procedure as given in 13.1 (g) above should be followed.
Test on locking devices for ball and socket coupling : IEC:372(2) 1976.
1.3.3 ROUTINE TEST ON DISC INSULATOR/ LONG ROAD INSULATOR
Visual inspection :Cl. No. 10.13 IS:731-1971.

Mechanical Routine Test : Cl. No. 10.14 IS:731-1971.
Electrical Routine Test: Cl. No. 10.15 IS:731-1971.
1.3.4 ROUTINE TEST OF HARWARE FITTINGS
a) Visual examination :Cl. 5.10 of IS-2486(I).
b) Mechanical strength test: Cl. 5.10 of IS-2486 (I).

Samples taken from the zinc ingot shall be chemically analyzed as per IS:209 - 1966. The purity of zinc shall
not be less than 99.5%.
c) Chemical Analysis, mechanical hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for malleable casting:
The chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for malleable castings will be as per the
internationally recognised procedures for these tests. The sampling will be based on heat number and heat
treatment batch. The details regarding tests will be as discussed and mutually agreed to by the Contractor and
HVPNL in Quality Assurance Program.
d) CHEMICAL ANALYSIS, HARDNESS TESTS AND MAGNETIC PARTICLE FOR FORGINGS
The chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for forgings will be as per the
internationally recognized procedures for these tests. The sampling will be based on heat number and heat
treatment batch.
e) CHEMICAL ANALYSIS, HARDNESS TESTS AND MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION FOR
FABRICATED HARDWARE:
The chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for fabricated hardware will be as per
the internationally recognised procedures for these tests. The sampling will be based on heat number and heat
treatment batch.
1.4 PARAMETERS
1.4.1 DISC INSULATORS
a) Type of insulators : Anti Fog type
b) Size of insulator units (mm) : 280 x 145 for 12000 kg.
255 x 145 for 9000/4500 kg.
c) Electro mechanical strength : 12000/ 9000/ 4500 kg for Twin/ single
218
conductor.
d) Creepage distance of individual insulator units : Markings on porcelain shall be printed
(minimum and as required to meet total creepage and applied before firing.
distance).e) Markings.
1.4.2 INSULATOR STRING
220 kV 132 kV 66 kV 33 kV 11 kV
Power frequency withstand voltage of 460 kV (rms) 275 kV 140 kV 75 kV 28 kV (rms)
the complete string with arcing horns (rms) (rms) (rms)
(dry & wet)
Lightning impulse withstand voltage 1050 kV 650 kV 325 kV 170 kV 75 kV
of the complete string with corona
control rings (+ and peaks)
Power frequency puncture withstand 1.3 times actual wet flashover voltage of the unit.
voltage for a string insulator unit.
RIV level of the complete string with 1000 micro volts
CC rings at 1.1 U/-3 (max)
Total creepage distance of the ---------------- 25 mm/kV ------------------
complete insulator string (mm)
Total no. of discs per strings. 15 S/T 10 S/T 6 S/T 3 S/T 2 S/T
14 S/S 9 S/S 5 S/S 3 S/S 2 S/S
1.4.3 Technical Description of Composite Long Rod Insulators
1.4.3.1 Details of Composite Long Rod Insulators

The insulators of the strings shall consist of composite long rod insulators for a three phase, 50 Hz, effectively
earthed 220kV sub-station application in a very heavy polluted environment. Couplings shall be ball and
socket type.
Bidder shall quote such composite insulators which have proven use under foggy/humid operational
conditions in polluted industrial environment combined with smoke and dust particles. The Bidder shall
furnish evidence in the form of certification from the power utilities that the similar type of product supplied
to them had been performing satisfactory. The Bidder shall also submit certified test report for an accelerated
ageing test of 5000 hours such as that described in Appendix-C of IEC-61109.
Insulators shall have sheds of the open aerodynamic profile without any under ribs with good self-cleaning
properties. Insulator shed profile, spacing projection etc. shall be strictly in accordance with the
recommendation of IEC-60815.
The size of long rod insulator, minimum creepage distance, the number to be used in different type of strings,
their electromechanical strength and mechanical strength of insulator string alongwith hardware fittings shall
be as follows:
S.No Type of *Size of Min. No. of Electro- Mechanical Strength
String Composite Creepage individual Mechanical of Insulator String
Insulator Distance Units per Strength of along with Hardware
(Core dia x (mm) String Insulator Unit Fittings (kN)
Nominal (Nos.) (kN)
length) (mm)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FOR 220kV AC yard of substations with AAC Tarantula/ACSR Zebra Conductor
1 Single 20x2030 7595 1x1 90 90
Suspension
2 Single 20x2175 7595 1x1 90 90
Tension
1 Single 20x1305 4495 1x1 90 90
Suspension
2 Single 20x1450 4495 1x1 90 90
Tension
1 Single 20x725 2248 1x1 90 90
Suspension
2 Single 20x870 2248 1x1 90 90
Tension
1 Single 20x435 1124 1x1 90 90
219
Suspension
2 Single 20x435 1124 1x1 90 90
Tension
1 Single 20x290 750 1x1 90 90
Suspension
2 Single 20x290 750 1x1 90 90
Tension
Note: *The core dia of composite insulators mentioned at column No.3 is minimum requirement. The bidder
shall offer composite long rod insulators of suitable core dia to meet specified E&M strength
requirements. For offered core dia, the bidder shall submit documentary evidence of past supplies &
satisfactory operation of the same for minimum period of three years. However, the overall string
length shall be within the limits specified in the drawing.
1.4.3.2 Pin and Cap
Pin and cap shall be designed to transmit the mechanical stress and develop uniform mechanical strength in
the insulator. The cap shall be circular with the inner and outer surfaces concentric of such design that it will
not yield or distort under load conditions.
The design shall be such as to permit easy removal of replacement of either insulator units or fittings under the
live line conditions.
1.4.3.3 Ball and Socket Designation
The dimensions of the Ball and Socket shall be of 16mm designation for 90kN Insulator in accordance with
the standard dimensions stated in IEC:120/ IS:2486 (Part-II).
1.4.3.4 Dimensional Tolerance of Composite Insulators
The tolerances on all dimensions e.g. diameter, length and creepage distance shall be allowed as follows:
(0.04d+1.5) mm when d300 mm.
(0.025d+6) mm when d>300 mm.
Where, d being the dimensions in millimeters for diameter, length or creepage distance as the case may be.
However, no negative tolerance shall be applicable to creepage distance.
1.4.3.5 Interchangeability
The composite long rod insulators inclusive of the ball & socket connection shall be standard design suitable
for use with the hardware fittings of any make conforming to relevant IEC standards.
1.4.3.6 Corona and RIV Performance

All surfaces shall be clean, smooth, without cuts, abrasions or projections. No part shall be subjected to
excessive localized pressure. The insulator and metal parts shall be so designed and manufactured that it shall
avoid local corona formation and shall not generate any radio interference beyond specified limit under the
operating conditions.
1.4.3.7 Maintenance
The long rod insulators offered shall be suitable for employment of hot line maintenance technique so that
usual hot line operation can be carried out with ease, speed and safety.
All insulators shall be designed to facilitate cleaning and insulators shall have the minimum practical number
of sheds and grooves. All grooves shall be so proportioned that any dust deposit can be removed without
difficulty either by wiping with a cloth or by remote washing under live line condition.
1.4.3.8 Materials
i) Core
It shall be a glass-fiber reinforced (FRP rod) epoxy resin rod of high strength. Glass fibers and resin shall be
optimized. The rod shall be electrical grade corrosion resistant (ECR), boron free glass and shall exhibit both
high electrical integrity and high resistance to acid corrosion.
ii) Housing & Weather sheds
The FRP rod shall be covered by a seamless sheath of a silicone rubber compound of a thickness of minimum
3mm. The housing & weather sheds should have silicon content of minimum 30% by weight. It should protect
the FRP rod against environmental influences, external pollution and humidity. It shall be extruded or directly
molded on the core. The interface between the housing and the core must be uniform and without voids. The
strength of the bond shall be greater than the tearing strength of the polymer. The manufacturer shall follow
non-destructive technique (N.D.T.) to check the quality of jointing of the housing interface with the core. The
technique being followed with detailed procedure and sampling shall be furnished along with the bid. The
details for this shall be finalized during detailed engineering and finalization of MQP.
The weather sheds of the insulators shall be of alternate shed profile. The weather sheds shall be vulcanized to
the sheath (extrusion process) or molded as part of the sheath (injection moulding process) and free from
imperfections. The vulcanization for extrusion process shall be at high temperature and for injection moulding
shall be at high temperature & high pressure. Any seams / burrs protruding axially along the insulator,
resulting from the injection moulding process shall be removed completely without causing any damage to the
220
housing. The track resistance of housing and shed material shall be class 1A4.5 according to IEC60587. The
strength of the weather shed to sheath interface shall be greater than the tearing strength of the polymer. The
composite insulator shall be capable of high pressure washing.
iii) End Fittings
End fittings transmit the mechanical load to the core. They shall be made of malleable cast iron spheroidal
graphite or forged steel. They shall be connected to the rod by means of a controlled compression technique.
The manufacturer shall have in-process Acoustic emission arrangement or some other arrangement to ensure
that there is no damage to the core during crimping. This verification shall be in-process and done on each
insulator. The gap between fitting and sheath shall be sealed by a flexible silicone rubber compound. The
system of attachment of end fitting to the rod shall provide superior sealing performance between housing and
metal connection. The sealing must be humidity proof and durable with time.
iv) Grading Rings
Grading rings shall be used at both ends of each composite insulator unit for reducing the voltage gradient on
and within the insulator and to reduce radio and TV noise to acceptable levels. The size and placement of the
metallic grading rings shall be designed to eliminate dry band arcing/corona cutting/ exceeding of permissible
electrical stress of material. The bidder shall furnish calculations along with the proposed placement and
design of corona ring in support of the above. Grading rings shall be capable of installation and removal with
hot line tools without disassembling any other part of the insulator assembly.
The supply of grading rings shall be in the scope of the composite insulator supplier.
1.4.3.9 Workmanship
All the materials shall be of latest design and conform to the best modern practices adopted in the extra high
voltage field. Bidders shall offer only such insulators as are guaranteed by him to be satisfactory and suitable
for transmission lines specified and will give continued good service.
The design, manufacturing process and material control at various stages shall be such as to give maximum
working load, highest mobility, best resistance to corrosion, good finish and elimination of sharp edges and
corners to limit corona and radio interference.
The design of the insulators shall be such that stresses due to expansion and contraction in any part of the
insulator shall not lead to deterioration.
The core shall be sound and free of cracks and voids that may adversely affect the insulators.
Weather sheds shall be uniform in quality. They shall be clean, sound, smooth and free from gross defects and
excessive flashing at parting lines.
End fittings shall be free from cracks, seams, shrinks, air holes and rough edges. End fittings should be
effectively, sealed to prevent moisture ingress, effectiveness of sealing system must be supported by test
documents. All surfaces of the metal parts shall be perfectly smooth with the projecting points or irregularities
which may cause corona. All load bearing surfaces shall be smooth and uniform so as to distribute the loading
stresses uniformly.
All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized to give a minimum average coating of zinc equivalent to 600
gm/sq.m. and shall be in accordance with the requirement of ISO:1461 (E) and shall satisfy the tests
mentioned in ISO:1460 (E). The zinc used for galvanizing shall be of purity of 99.95%. The zinc coating
shall be uniform, adherent, smooth, reasonably bright continuous and free from imperfections such as flux, ash
rust stains, bulky white deposits and blisters. The galvanized metal parts shall be guaranteed to withstand at
least six successive dips each lasting for one (1) minute duration under the standard preece test. The
galvanizing shall be carried out only after any machining.
1.4.3.10 Equipment Marking
Each composite long rod unit shall be legibly and indelibly marked with the trade mark of the manufacturer,
name of HVPNL and month & year of manufacture. The guaranteed combined mechanical and electrical
strength shall be indicated in kilo Newton followed by the word kN to facilitate easy identification and to
ensure proper use.
One 10 mm thick ring or 20 mm thick spot of suitable quality of paint shall be marked on the cap/end fitting of
each composite long rod of particular strength for easy identification of the type of insulator. The paint shall
not have any deteriorating effect on the insulator performance. Following codes shall be used as identification
mark :
For 90 kN long rod unit : Orange
Bid Drawings
The Bidder shall furnish full description and illustration of the material offered.
The Bidder shall furnish along with the bid the outline drawing (6 copies) of each insulator unit including a
cross sectional view of the long rod insulator unit. The drawing shall include but not limited to the following
information :
a) Long rod diameter and ball to ball spacing with manufacturing tolerances
b) Minimum Creepage distance with positive tolerance
c) Protected creepage distance
d) Eccentricity of the long rod unit
Axial run out
221
Radial run out
e) Unit mechanical and electrical characteristics
f) Size and weight of ball and socket parts
g) Weight of composite long rod units
h) Materials
Identification mark
Manufacturer's catalogue number
After placement of award, the Supplier shall submit full dimensioned insulator drawings containing all the
details as given in Clause No. 3.2 above, in four (4) copies to Employer for approval. After getting approval
from Employer and successful completion of all the type tests, the Supplier shall submit 20 more copies of the
same drawing to the Employer for further distribution and field use at Employer's end.
After placement of award the Supplier shall also submit fully dimensioned insulator crate drawing for different
type of insulators.
After placement of award, the Supplier shall submit full dimensioned manufacturing drawing of composite
long rod insulator unit in six (6) copies to the Employer for reference and record.
1.4.3.11 Tests and Standards

Type Tests
The following type tests shall be conducted on long rod units, components, materials or complete strings:
On the complete composite Long Rod Insulator String with Hardware Fittings
(a) Power frequency voltage withstand test with corona control rings/grading IEC:383-1993/ Annexure
ring and arcing horns under wet condition A
(b) Switching surge voltage withstand test under wet condition IEC:383-1993
(c) Impulse voltage withstand test under dry condition IEC:383-1993
(d) Corona and RIV test under dry condition Annexure-A
(e) Mechanical Strength test Annexure-A
(f) Vibration test Annexure-A

(g) Salt-fog pollution withstand test Annexure-A
On Composite Insulator Units
(a) Tests on interfaces and connections of metal fittings (Tests to be performed IEC: 61109
on the same samples in the sequence given below)
i) Dry power frequency voltage test
ii) Sudden load release test
iii) Thermal mechanical test
iv) Water immersion test
v) Steep front impulse voltage test
vi) Dry power frequency voltage test
(b) Assembled core load time test IEC: 61109
i) Determination of the average failing load of the core of the
assembled unit
ii) Control of the slope of the strength time curve of the insulator
(c) Brittle fracture resistance test Annexure-A
(d) Test of housing, Tracking and erosion test IEC: 61109
(e) Tests for the core material IEC:61109
i) Dye penetration test
ii) Water diffusion test
(f) Flammability test IEC:61109
(g) Recovery of Hydrophobicity test Annexure-A
(h) Mechanical Load Time test and test of tightness between end firings and IEC:61109
insulator housing
(i) Silicone content test Annexure-A
(j) High Pressure washing test Annexure-A
All the type test given in Clause No. 4.1.1 shall be conducted on Single I suspension, Double tension,
Double I suspension & Quadruple tension insulator string along with hardware fittings. All the type tests
given in Clause No. 4.1.1 (a) to (e) shall also be conducted on Single 'I' Pilot suspension & Single tension
insulator string along with hardware fittings.
Acceptance Tests:
For Composite Long Rod Insulators
a) Verification of dimensions IEC : 61109
b) Galvanising test IEC : 60383
c) Verification of locking system IEC : 60383
d) Verification of tightness of interface between end fittings and insulator IEC : 61109
housing and of specified mechanical load
222
d) Recovery of Hydrophobicity Annexure-A
e) Tests on interfaces and connections of metal fittings (Tests to be IEC: 61109
performed on the same samples in the sequence given below
i) Dry power frequency voltage test
ii) Sudden load release test
iii) Thermal mechanical test
iv) Water immersion test
v) Steep front impulse voltage test
vi) Dry power frequency voltage test
f) Silicone content test Annexure-A
The test 4.2.1.(e) shall be carried out in case total quantity of insulators of a particular rating exceeds 5000
nos.
The test 4.2.1.(f) shall be done against each lot or against every 5000 nos. of insulators whichever is less.
In the event of failure of the sample to satisfy the acceptance test(s) specified in 4.2 above, the retest procedure
shall be as per clause 7.6 of IEC 61109.
Routine Tests
For Composite Long Rod Insulator Units
a) Visual Inspection As per IEC:61109
b) Mechanical routine test As per IEC:61109
Tests During Manufacture
On all components as applicable
a) Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanising As per Annexure-A
b) Chemical analysis, mechanical, metallographic test and magnetic particle As per Annexure-A
inspection for malleable castings.
c) Chemical analysis hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for As per Annexure-A
forgings
d) Tracking and erosion test on insulating material IEC 60587
Testing Expenses
Testing charges for the type test specified shall be indicated separately in the prescribed schedule.
Bidder shall indicate unit type test charges for all type tests covered under Clause 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 separately, in
the relevant schedule of Prices as applicable. Charges for each type tests shall be separately indicated.
For Type Tests which involves the tests on the complete insulator string with hardware fitting, the Contractor
of hardware fittings shall supply the necessary number of sets of hardware fittings at the place of testing free
of cost.
In case of failure in any type test the supplier whose material has failed is either required to modify the design
of the material & successfully carryout all the type tests as has been detailed out in Clause 4.1 of this
specifications or to repeat that particular type test at least three times successfully at his own expenses. In case
of failure of the complete string in any type test, the manufacturer whose product has failed in the test shall get
the test repeated at his cost. The Supplier whose material has not failed in the test shall be required to supply
the requisite quantity of material (that is insulator or hardware fittings as the case may be) required for repeat
testing at the place of testing and the cost of supply shall be borne by the Supplier whose material has failed in
testing.
Bidder shall indicate the laboratories in which they propose to conduct the type tests. They shall ensure that
adequate facilities are available in the laboratory and the tests can be completed in these laboratories within
the time schedule guaranteed by them in the appropriate schedule.
The entire cost of testing for acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture specified herein shall
be treated as included in the quoted Ex-works/CIF Price.
In case of failure in any type test, if repeat type tests are required to be conducted, then all the expenses for
deputation of Inspector/ Employer's representative shall be deducted from the contract price. Also if on receipt
of the Bidder's notice of testing, the Employer's representative does not find the material or test setup /
equipments to be ready for testing, the expenses incurred by the Employer for redeputation shall be deducted
from contract price.
The Bidder shall intimate the Employer about carrying out of the type tests along with detailed testing
programme at least 2 week in advance (in case of testing in India) and at least 6 weeks advance (in case of
testing abroad) of the scheduled date of testing during which the Employer will arrange to depute his
representative to be present at the time of carrying out the tests.
Sample Batch for Type Testing
The Bidder shall offer material for sample selection for type testing only after getting Quality Assurance
Programme approved by the Employer. The Bidder shall offer at least three times the quantity of materials
required for conducting all the type tests for sample selection. The sample for type testing will be
manufactured strictly in accordance with the Quality Assurance Programme approved by the Employer.
Before sample selection for type testing, the Supplier shall be required to conduct all the acceptance tests
successfully in presence of Employer's representative.
223
Schedule of Testing
The Bidder has to indicate the schedule of following activities in their bids :
a) Submission of drawing for approval.
b) Submission of Quality Assurance Programme for approval.
c) Offering of material for sample selection for type tests.
d) Type testing.
Additional Tests
The Employer reserves the right of having at his own expenses any other test(s) of reasonable nature carried
out at Supplier's premises, at site, or in any other place in addition to the aforesaid type, acceptance and
routine tests to satisfy himself that the material comply with the Specifications.
The Employer also reserves the right to conduct all the tests mentioned in this specification at his own expense
on the samples drawn from the site at Supplier's premises or at any other test centre. In case of evidence of non
compliance, it shall be binding on the part of the Supplier to prove the compliance of the items to the technical
specifications by repeat tests or correction of deficiencies or replacement of defective items, all without any
extra cost to the Employer.
Guarantee
The Supplier of insulators shall guarantee overall satisfactory performance of the insulators.
Test Reports
Copies of type test reports shall be furnished in at least six (6) copies along with one original. One copy shall
be returned duly certified by the Employer only after which the commercial production of the concerned
material shall start.
Copies of acceptance test reports shall be furnished in at least six (6) copies. One copy shall be returned duly
certified by the Employer, only after which the material shall be dispatched.
Record of routine test reports shall be maintained by the Supplier at his works for periodic inspection by the
Employers representative.
Test certificates of test during manufacture shall be maintained by the Supplier. These shall be produced for
verification as and when desired by the Employer.
1.4.3.12 Inspection
The Employers representative shall at all times be entitled to have access to the works and all places of
manufacture, where insulator, and its component parts shall be manufactured and the representatives shall
have full facilities for unrestricted inspection of the Suppliers and sub-Suppliers works, raw materials,
manufacture of the material and for conducting necessary test as detailed herein.
The material for final inspection shall be offered by the Supplier only under packed condition as detailed in
clause No.4.13 of the specification. The Employer shall select samples at random from the packed lot for
carrying out acceptance tests. The lot should be homogeneous and should contain insulators manufactured in
3-4 consecutive weeks.
The Supplier shall keep the Employer informed in advance of the time of starting and the progress of
manufacture of material in their various stages so that arrangements could be made for inspection.
No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it has been satisfactorily inspected and
tested unless the inspection is waived off by the Employer in writing. In the latter case also the material shall
be dispatched only after satisfactory testing for all tests specified herein have been completed.
The acceptance of any quantity of material shall be no way relieve the Supplier of his responsibility for
meeting all the requirements of the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection, if such material
are later found to be defective.
1.4.3.13 Packing and Marking
All insulators shall be packed in suitable PVC/ plastic tubes/any other suitable packing along with temporary
wrap-on shields/shrouds for each insulator unit. The packing shall provide protection against rodent. The
shields/shrouds shall be for protection during transport and for preventing bird pecking during erection.
Further, the shields/shrouds shall be made of opaque, weather proof material of adequate strength and shall be
colour coded. The shields/shrouds shall have smaller diameter than the insulator to stay in place against winds
& weather and shall be designed so as to leave only the end fittings exposed for attachment of insulator to
tower and line hardware until line construction is complete. The shield/shroud shall have suitable pull off loop
for easy detachment just prior to charging of the line without causing any damage to the insulator. The
bidder/Supplier shall furnish detailed design of the packing and shield/shroud along with attachment and
detachment procedure in this regard. For marine transportation, crates shall be palleted.
The packing shall be of sufficient strength to withstand rough handling during transit, storage at site and
subsequent handling in the field.
Suitable cushioning, protective padding, or dunnage or spacers shall be provided to prevent damage or
deformation during transit and handling.
The Supplier shall guarantee the adequacy of the packing and shall be responsible for any loss or damage
during transportation, handling, storage and installation due to improper packing.
All packing cases shall be marked legibly and correctly so as to ensure safe arrival at their destination and to
224
avoid the possibility of goods being lost or wrongly dispatched on account of faulty packing and faulty or
illegible markings. Each case/crate shall have all the markings stenciled on it in indelible ink.
1.4.3.14 Standards
The insulator strings and its components shall conform to the following Indian/International Standards which
shall mean latest revision, with amendments/changes adopted and published, unless specifically stated
otherwise in the Specification.
In the event of supply of insulators conforming to standards other than specified, the Supplier shall confirm in
his bid that these standards are equivalent or better to those specified. In case of award, salient features of
comparison between the standards proposed by the Supplier and those specified in this document will be
provided by the Supplier to establish equivalence.
Sl. No. Indian Title International Standard
Standard
1. IS:209-1992 Specification for zinc BS:3436
2. IS:406-1991 Method of Chemical Analysis of Slab Zinc BS:3436
3. IS:731-1991 Porcelain insulators for overhead Power lines with a nominal BS:137- (I&II) IEC:60383
voltage greater than 1000 V
4. IS:2071 Part Methods of High Voltage Testing IEC:60060-1
(I)- 1993
(Part(II)-
1991
Part(III)-
1991
5. IS:2486 Specification for Insulator fittings for Overhead Power Lines
Part- I-1993 with a nominal voltage greater than 1000V
Part- II-1989 General Requirements and Tests Dimensional Requirements BS:3288
Locking Devices IEC:60120
Part-III-1991 IEC:60372
6. IS:2629-1990 Recommended Practice for Hot, Dip Galvanisation for iron ISO-1461 (E)
and steel
7. IS:2633-1992 Testing of Uniformity of Coating of zinc coated articles
8. IS:3188-1988 Dimensions for Disc Insulators IEC:60305
9. IS:6745-1990 Determination of Weight of Zinc Coating on Zinc coated iron BS:433-1969 ISO:1460-
and steel articles 1973
10. IS:8263-1990 Methods of RI Test of HV insulators IEC:60437,NEMA Publn
No.07/1964/ CISPR
11. IS:8269-1990 Methods for Switching Impulse test on HV insulators IEC:60506
12. Thermal Mechanical Performance test and mechanical IEC: 60575
performance test on string insulator units
13. Salt Fog Pollution Voltage Withstand Test IEC:60507
14. Composite insulators for A.C. Overhead lines with nominal IEC 61109
voltage greater than 1000V Definitions, test methods and
acceptance criteria
15. Guide for the selection of insulators in respect of polluted IEC:60815
conditions
16. Tests on insulators of Ceramic material or glass or glass for IEC:60383
overhead lines with a nominal voltage greater than 1000V
17. Characteristics of string insulator units of the long rod type IEC : 60433
1.4.3.15 Tests on Complete Strings with Hardware Fittings Annexure-A
a. Corona Extinction Voltage Test (Dry)
The sample assembly when subjected to power frequency voltage shall have a corona extinction voltage as per
ISS/IEC applied line to ground under dry condition. There shall be no evidence of corona on any part of the
sample. The atmospheric condition during testing shall be recorded and the test results shall be accordingly
corrected with suitable correction factor as stipulated in IEC : 383.
b. RIV Test (Dry)
Under the conditions as specified in Corona Extinction Voltage Test (Dry)(a) above, the insulator string along
with complete hardware fittings shall have a radio interference voltage level below 1000 micro volts at one
MHz when subjected to 50 Hz AC voltage as per ISS/IEC applied line to ground under dry condition. The test
procedure shall be in accordance with IS:8263 /IEC : 60437.
c. Mechanical Strength Test
The complete insulator string along with its hardware fitting excluding arcing horn, corona control ring,
grading ring and suspension assembly/dead end assembly shall be subjected to a load equal to 50% of the
specified minimum ultimate tensile strength (UTS) which shall be increased at a steady rate to 67% of the
minimum UTS specified. The load shall be held for five minutes and then removed. After removal of the load,
225
the string components shall not show any visual deformation and it shall be possible to disassemble them by
hand. Hand tools may be used to, remove cotter pins and loosen the nuts initially. The string shall then be
reassembled and loaded to 50% of UTS and the load shall be further increased at a steady rate till the specified
minimum UTS and held for one minute. No fracture should occur during this period. The applied load shall
then be increased until the failing load is reached and the value recorded.
d. Vibration Test
The suspension string shall be tested in suspension mode, and tension string in tension mode itself in
laboratory span of minimum 30 metres. In the case of suspension string, a load equal to 600 kg shall be
applied along the axis of the suspension string by means of turn buckle. The insulator string along with
hardware fittings and the sub-conductors each tensioned at 43 kN shall be secured with clamps. The system
shall be suitable to maintain constant tension on each sub-conductors throughout the duration of the test.
Vibration dampers shall not be used on the test span. All the sub-conductors shall be vertically vibrated
simultaneously at one of the resonance frequencies of the insulators string (more than 10 Hz) by means of
vibration inducing equipment. The peak to peak displacement in mm of vibration at the antinode point, nearest
to the string, shall be measured and the same shall not be less than 1000/f1.8 where f is the frequency of
vibration in cycles/sec. The insulator string shall be vibrated for not less than 10 million cycles without any
failure. After the test the insulators shall be examined for looseness of pins and cap or any crack in the cement.
The hardware shall be examined for looseness, fatigue failure and mechanical strength test. There shall be no
deterioration of properties of hardware components and insulators after the vibration test. The insulators shall
be subjected to the Mechanical performance test followed by mechanical strength test as per relevant
standards.
e. Salt-fog pollution withstand test

This test shall be carried out in accordance with IEC : 60507. The salinity level for composite long rod
insulators shall be 160 Kg/m3 NACL.
1.4.3.16 Composite Long rod Insulator Units
Brittle Fracture Resistance Test
Assembled core load time test with container that contains1n-HNO3 concentric acid that is applied at the
naked rod. The rod should be held at 80% of SML for the duration of the test.
The rod should not fail within the 96 hour test duration
Recovery of Hydrophobicity Test
The surface of selected samples shall be cleaned with isopropyl alcohol. Allow the surface to dry and spray
with water. Record the HC classification. Dry the sample surface.
Treat the surface with corona discharges to destroy the hydrophobicity. This can be done utilizing a high
frequency corona tester, Holding the electrode approximately 3mm from the sample surface,
slowly move the electrode over an area approximately 1 x 1. Continue treating this area for 2 3 minutes,
operating the tester at maximum output.
Immediately after the corona treatment, spray the surface with water and record the HC classification. The
surface should be hydrophilic, with an HC value of 6 or 7. If not, dry the surface and repeat the corona
treatment for a longer time until an HC of 6 or 7 is obtained. Dry the sample surface.
Allow the sample to recover and repeat the hydrophobicity measurement at several time intervals. Silicone
rubber should recover to HC 1 HC 2 within 24 to 48 hours, depending on the material and the intensity of
the corona treatment.
Silicone content test
Minimum content of silicone as guaranteed by supplier shall be verified through FT-IR spectroscopy & TGA
analysis or any other suitable method mutually agreed between Employer & Supplier in Quality Assurance
Programme.
High Pressure washing test
The test is to be carried out at 3800 kPa with nozzles of 6 mm diameter at a distance of 3m from nozzles to the
insulator, followed by a dry power frequency voltage test as per IEC 61109.
Tests on All components (As applicable)
Chemical Analysis of Zinc used for Galvanizing
Samples taken from the zinc ingot shall be chemically analysed as per IS:209-1979. The purity of zinc shall
not be less than 99.95%.
Tests for Forgings
The chemical analysis hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for forgings, will be as per the
internationally recognised procedures for these tests. The sampling will be based on heat number and heat
treatment batch. The details regarding test will be as discussed and mutually agreed to by the Supplier and
Employer in Quality Assurance Programme.
Tests on Castings
The chemical analysis, mechanical and metallographic tests and magnetic, particle inspection for castings will
be as per the internationally recognised procedures for these tests. The samplings will be based on heat
226
number and heat treatment batch. The details regarding test will be as discussed and mutually agreed to by the
Supplier and Employer in Quality Assurance Programme.
1.4.4 C-WEDGE CONNECTOR
1.4.4.1 Wedge connector should be FIRED-ON or powder actuated only
1.4.4.2 The power booster should be colour coded for proper installation of wedge connectors
1.4.4.3 Wedge connector members- taperd C shaped spring member and wedge should be made from a special
Aluminium alloy of high ductility and electrical conductivity. When Installed, it will provide a tenable
electrical and mechanical connection for solid or stranded conductor combinations including ACSR conductor
1.4.4.4 The dimensions for the wedge shall be manufactured to close tolerance to ensure repeatability and reliability
of the connection.
1.4.4.5 All sharp edges and burrs shall be removed.
1.4.4.6 The wedges shall be burnished to achieve optimum surface roughness for electrical contact.
1.4.4.7 The wedge connector shall meet the current cycle test requirements as per ANSI C119.4-1998 Class AA.
When connected as specified samples shall indicate electrical stability for terminated connectors. The
resistance of connection, when measured as specified shall be stable through out test. The sample shall be
tested to 500on/off current cycle with the control conductor raised between 1750C to 1800C above ambient.
1.4.4.8 The wedge connector shall meet the mechanical requirements as per ANSI C119.4-1998 Class-3, minimum
tension. When tested as specified or 5% of the rated cable strength of the weaker conductor.
1.4.4.9 The Wedge connector shall meet the following thermal shock/salt spray test:-
a) Hours at 1500C
b) 15 minutes at 0C water, immediately from the oven
c) 30 minutes at 1500C
d) 20.75 hours at room temperature
1.4.4.10 Salt spray corrosion, samples shall be subjected to a 30 day salt spray corrosion test. Each daily exposure shall
consist of :-
a) 15 hours in 5% salt spray atmosphere
b) 1 hour in drying over at 1000C
c) 8 hours at room temperature
1.4.4.11 During installation, the wedge of wedge shall be driven inside the C member at high velocity between the
run & tap conductor so as to spread the C member to ensure high retentive force on the conductors. A
locking tab, formed balance on the tool should prevent the wedge from loosening once it has been driven into
position
1.4.4.12 The wedge terminal shall have back up conductor cleaning capability during application. The wedge terminals
should ensure stable & low contact resistance under varying load conditions & the thermal cycling effects.
1.4.4.13 An oxide inhibiting compound placed in the wedge & C member groove of Wedge Terminals.
2.0 CONDUCTOR
2.1 AAC TARANTULA CONDUCTOR
2.1.1 DETAILS OF CONDUCTOR
SCOPE
This specification provides for design, manufacture, engineering, inspection, stage testing and testing before
dispatch, packing and delivery at site of All Aluminium conductor specified herein for its satisfactory
operation on various Transmission lines and substations of the State.
AAC Tarantula conductor is to be used as power conductor on single circuit and double circuit transmission
lines and sub-stations of the HVPNL.
2.1.2 STANDARDS
The power conductor shall conform to the following Indian Standards, which shall mean latest revision,
amendments/changes adopted and published, unless otherwise specified herein before.
Sr No ISS Title
1. IS: 398 Part I to V Specification for Aluminium conductors for overhead Transmission purpose.
(As relevant)
2. IS : 1778 Reels and Drums for Bare conductors
3. IS : 1841 EC grade Aluminium rod produced by rolling
4. IS : 5484 EC grace Aluminium rod produced by continuous casting and rolling
2.1.3 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS
The detail of conductor are tabulated below
a) Stranding and wire diameter 37/5.23 mm Al.
b) Code name AAC TARANTULA
c) Number of strands per layer of aluminium Wire Central 1
1st Aluminium layer 6
2nd Aluminium layer 12
3rd Aluminium layer 18
227
d) Total Sectional area of aluminium (Sq. mm) 795.6 mm2
e) Overall diameter (mm) 36.61mm
f) Approximate weight (kg/km) 2198 kg/km
g) Calculated max. d.c. resistance at 20 Deg. C (ohm/km) 0.03656
h) Minimum UTS (kN) of conductor 11,600 kg.
i) Modulus of Elasticity 0.5976x106 kg/cm2
j) Coefficient of linear expansion (per Deg.C) 23X10-6
The details of aluminium strand are as follows:
a) Minimum breaking load of strand before stranding (kN)
b) Minimum breaking load of strand after stranding (kN) 3.08
c) Maximum D.C resistance of strand of 20 Deg. C (ohm/km) 1.350
d) Diameter mm (Standard/Max/Min) 5.23/5.28/5.18
e) Mass (Kg/Km) 59.40
2.1.4 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT
The ACC Tarantula conductor shall be suitable for being installed directly in air supported on suspension
insulator strings or anchored through tension insulator strings at the power cross arms of single circuit and
double circuit transmission line towers.
The conductor shall therefore be suitable for satisfactory operation under the tropical climatic conditions listed
under the Annexure III of Section 1.
2.1.5 Physical constants of materials
Physical constants for Hard-drawn Aluminium
2.1.6 Resistivity
The resistivity of aluminium depends upon its purity and its physical condition. For the purpose of this
specification the maximum value permitted is 0.028264 mm2/m at 20oC and this value has been used for
calculation of the maximum permissible value of resistance.
Note: It is not intended to check the resistivity from the measured values of resistance.
2.1.7 Density
At a temperature of 20oC the density of hard drawn aluminium has been taken as 2.703 g/cm3.
2.1.8 Constant-Mass Temperature Co-efficient of Resistance
At a temperature of 20o C the constant mass temperature co-efficient of resistance of hard drawn aluminium
measured between two potential points rigidly fixed to the wire, the metal being allowed to expand freely, has
been taken as 0.004 per degree Celsius.
2.1.9 Co-efficient of Linear Expansion
The co-efficient of linear expansion of hard-drawn aluminium at 0oC has been taken as 23.0x10-6 per deg. C.
This value holds good for all practical purposes over the range of temperatures from 0o C to highest safe
operating temperature.
2.1.10 Materials
The conductor shall be manufactured from EC grade aluminium rods suitably hard-drawn on wire drawing
machines. The aluminium rods used shall comply with IS:1841-1978 and IS:5484. The mechanical and
electrical properties of aluminium wire shall comply with the requirements given in relevant standard. The
aluminium wire shall be manufactured from not less than 99.5% pure electrolytic aluminium rods of E.C.
Grade.
2.1.11 Freedom from Defects
The wires shall be smooth and free from all imperfections such as spills, spilts, slag inclusion, die marks,
scratches, fittings, blow-holes, projections, looseness, overlapping of strands, chipping of aluminium layers
etc. and all such other defects which may hamper the mechanical and electrical properties of the conductor.
Special care should be taken to keep away dirt, grit etc. during stranding.
2.1.12 Wire Sizes
Nominal Size
The aluminium for the stranded conductor covered by this standard shall have diameters specified in clauses
2.1.3
2.1.13 Tolerances on normal size
2.1.13.1 Aluminium Wires
A tolerance of + 1% is permitted on the nominal diameter of AAC conductor.
Note: In order to maintain the circularity of the wires the tolerance allowed in 2.1.13.1 shall apply to both the
measurement at right angles taken at the same cross-section as per clause 2.2 of IS:398 (Part-II) (Second
Revision with latest Amendments).
2.1.14 Joints in wires
Aluminium wires
No joints shall be permitted in the aluminium wires in the outermost layer of the ACSR conductor. Joints in
the inner layers are permitted, in addition to those made in the base rod or wire before final drawing, but no
two such joints shall be less than 15 metres apart in the complete stranded conductor. Such joints shall be
made by cold pressure butt-welding.
228
Note: Joints are not permitted in the outermost layer of the conductor in order to ensure a smooth conductor finish
and reduce radio interference levels and corona losses on the extra high voltage lines.
2.1.15 Stranding
The wires used in the construction of all aluminium conductor shall, before stranding, satisfy all the relevant
requirements of this specification.
The lay ratio of the different layers shall be within the limits given in the table below
LAY RATIO OF ALL ALUMINIUM CONDUCTOR
No. of wires Lay Ratios for Aluminium Wires
Al. Outside Layer Layer Immediately beneath Innermost Layer of conductor with
out side layer three Aluminium Wire Layers
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
37 11.25 14 14 21 18 21
Note: For the purpose of calculation, the mean lay ration shall be taken as the arithmetic mean of the relevant
minimum and maximum values given in this table
In all constructions, the successive layers shall have opposite directions of lay, the outermost layer being right-
handed. The wires in each layer shall be evenly and closely stranded.
The lay ratio of any aluminium layer shall not be greater than the lay ratio of the aluminium layer immediately
beneath it.
Standard Length
The standard length of the conductor shall be 500 meters. A tolerance of +5% on the standard length shall be
permitted. All lengths outside this limit of tolerance shall be treated as random lengths.
Random lengths will be accepted provided no length is less than 70% of the standard length specified and the
total quantity of such random lengths shall not be more than 5% of the total quantity ordered.
Supplier shall also indicate the maximum single length above the standard length, he can manufacture, in the
guaranteed technical particulars.
The conductor shall be supplied in standard drum length of manufacturer as per actual requirement.
2.2 ACSR MOOSE/ ZEBRA CONDUCTOR
2.2.1 DETAILS OF CONDUCTOR
The conductor shall conform to IS:398(Part V)-1982 except where otherwise specified herein.
2.2.2 The details of the conductor are tabulated below:
Moose Zebra
a) Stranding and wire diameter 54/3.53mm AL+7/3.53mm steel 54/3.18mm AL+7/3.18mm steel
b) Number of strands
core 1 1
1st Layer 6 6
2nd Layer 12 12
3rd Layer 18 18
4th Layer 24 24
c) Sectional area of Aluminium 528.5 mm2 428.9 mm2
d) Total sectional area 597 mm2 484.50 mm2
e) Overall diameter 31.77mm 28.62 mm
f) Approximate weight 1998 kg/km 1621 kg/km
g) Calculated DC resistance at 20 0.05595 ohm/km 0.06868 ohm/km
degree C
h) Minimum UTS 159.60 KN 130.32 KN
2.2.3 The details of aluminium strand are as follow:
i) Minimum breaking load of 1.57 kN 1.29 kN
strand before stranding
ii) Minimum breaking load of 1.49 kN 1.23 kN
strand after stranding
iii) Maximum D.C resistance of 2.954 ohms/KM 3.651 ohms/KM
strand at 200C
2.2.4 The details of steel strand are as follows:
i) Minimum breaking load of 12.86 kN 10.43 kN
strand before stranding
ii) Minimum breaking load of 12.22 kN 9.95 kN
strand after stranding
iii) Minimum no. of twist to be 18-before stranding 18-before stranding
with stood in torsion test when 16-after stranding 16-after stranding
tested on a gauge length of 100
times diameter of wire
3.0 Tests
The type, acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture, shall be carried out on the conductor. For
229
the purpose of this clause:
Type tests shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out to prove the process of manufacture and general
conformity of the material to this specification. These tests shall be carried out on samples prior to
commencement of commercial production against the order. The supplier shall indicate his schedule for
carrying out these tests in the activity schedule.
Acceptance tests shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out on samples taken from each lot offered for
pre-dispatch inspection, for the purposes of acceptance of that lot.
Routine tests shall mean those tests which are to be carried out on each strand/spool/length of the conductor to
check requirements which are likely to vary during production.
Tests during manufacture shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out during the process of manufacture
and end inspection by the Supplier to ensure the desired quality of the end product to be supplied by him.
Samples for individual wires for tests shall be taken before stranding from not less than ten percent of the
spools in the case of aluminium wires. If samples are taken after stranding, they shall be obtained by cutting
1.2 metres from the outer end of the finished conductor from not more than ten percent of the finished reels.
The standards and norms to which these tests will be carried out are listed against them.
For type and acceptance tests, the acceptance values shall be the values guaranteed by the Supplier in the
Performa for Guaranteed Technical Particulars, furnished in the Annexure-II or the acceptance value
specified in this specification, whichever is more stringent for that particular test.
3.1 Acceptance Tests
a) Visual and dimensional check
b) Visual check for joints, scratches etc. and lengths of conductor.
c) Dimensional check on aluminium strands
d) Check for lay ratios of various layers
e) Breaking load test on aluminium strands
f) Wrap test on aluminium strands
g) DC resistance test on aluminium strands
Note: All the above tests shall be carried out on aluminium strands after stranding only.
3.2 Routine Tests
a) Check to ensure that the joints are as per specification
b) Check that there are no cuts, etc. on the strands.
c) Check that drums are as per specifications.
d) All acceptance tests are mentioned in Clause 6.2 above shall be carried out on each coil.
3.3 Testing Expenses
The testing charges for the type tests specified shall be indicated separately in the prescribed schedule.
The supplier shall indicate the type test charges for each type test separately.
In case of failure in any type, the supplier is either required to modify the design of the material or repeat the
particular type test three times successfully at his own expenses. The decision of the Purchaser in this regard
shall be final binding.
Suppliers shall indicate the laboratories in which they propose to conduct the type tests. They shall ensure that
the tests can be completed in these laboratories within the time schedule guaranteed by them in the
appropriate schedule.
The entire cost of testing for the acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture specified herein
shall be treated as included in the quoted unit price of conductor, except for the expenses of the
inspector/Purchasers representative.
3.4 Additional Tests
The Purchaser reserves the right of having at his own expenses any other test(s) of reasonable nature carried
out at Suppliers premises, at site, or in any other place in addition to the aforesaid type, acceptance and
routine test, to satisfy himself that the material comply with the specifications.
3.5 Sample Batch for testing
Samples shall be obtained by cutting 2mtrs. length from the outer end of the finished conductor from
minimum 10% of the finished drums offered for inspection.
The Supplier is required to carry out all the acceptance tests successfully in the presence of Purchasers
representative before dispatch.
3.6 Test Reports
Copies of type test reports shall be furnished in at least six(6) copies alongwith one original. One copy shall be
returned duly certified by the Purchaser only after which the material will be dispatched.
Record of routine test reports shall be maintained by the supplier at his works for periodic inspection by the
Purchasers representative.
Test Certificates of tests conducted during manufacture shall be maintained by the supplier. These shall be
produced for verification as and when desired by the Purchaser.
3.7 Test Facilities
The following additional test facilities shall be available at Suppliers works
Calibration of various testing and measuring equipment including tensile testing machine, resistance
measurement facilities, burette, thermometer, barometer etc.
230
Standard resistance for calibration of resistance bridges.
Finished conductor shall be checked for length verification and surface finish on separate rewinding machine
at reduced speed (variable from 8 to 16 meters per minute). The rewinding facilities shall have appropriate
clutch system and shall be free from vibrations, jerks etc. with transverse layering facilities.
3.8 INSPECTION
The Purchasers representative shall, at all times, be entitled to have access to the works and all places of
manufacture where conductor shall be manufactured and the representative shall have full facilities for
unrestricted inspection of the Suppliers works, raw materials and process of manufacture and conducting
necessary tests as detailed herein.
The Supplier shall keep the Purchaser informed in advance of the time of starting and of the progress of
manufacture of conductor in its various stages so that arrangements can be made for inspection.
No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it has been satisfactorily inspected and
tests, unless the inspection is waived off by the Purchaser in writing. In the later case also, the conductor shall
be dispatched only after satisfactory testing for all tests specified herein has been completed and approved by
the Purchaser.
The acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way relieve the Supplier of any of his responsibilities
for meeting all requirements of the specification, and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if such material is
later found to be defective.
At least 10% of the total number of drums subject to minimum of two in any lot put up for inspection shall be
selected at random to ascertain the length of conductor by the following method.
At the works of the manufacture of the conductor, the conductor shall be transferred from one drum to
another at the same time measuring its length with the help of a graduated pulley & Cyclometer. The
difference in the average length thus obtained and as declared by the Supplier in the packing list shall be
applied to all the drums if the conductor is found short during checking.
4.0 DOCUMENTATION
Six sets of type test reports, duly approved by the Purchaser shall be submitted by the Supplier for distribution,
before commencement of supply. Adequate copies of acceptance and routine test certificates, duly approved
by the Purchaser shall accompany the dispatched consignment.
Approval of drawing/work by Purchaser shall not relieve the Supplier of his responsibility and liability for
ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the latest revision of applicable standards, rules and codes of
practices. The material shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering, design, workmanship
and latest revisions of relevant standards at the time of ordering and Purchaser shall have the power to reject
any work or material which in his judgement is not in full accordance therewith.
5.0 PACKING & FORWARDING
The conductor shall be supplied in non-returnable, strong wooden drums provided with lagging of adequate
strength capable of withstanding displacement during transit, storage and subsequent handling and stringing
operation in the field. The drums shall generally conform to IS: 1778-1980 except otherwise specified
hereinafter.
The drums shall be suitable for wheel mounting and for jetting off the conductor under a minimum controlled
tension of the order of 5 kN.
The Supplier shall submit the proposed drum drawings alongwith the bid. However, the same shall be in line
with the requirements as stated herein. After placement of the Letter of Award, the Supplier shall submit four
copies of fully dimensioned drawing of the drum he wishes to supply , for Purchasers approval before taking
up manufacturing of Conductor. After getting approval from the Purchaser, the Supplier shall submit 30 more
copies of the approved drawing to Purchaser for further distribution and field use at Purchasers end.
All wooden components shall be manufactured out of seasoned soft wood free from defects that may
materially weaken the component parts of the drums. Preservative treatment for anti-termite /anti fungus
(Aldrime /Aldruse) shall be applied to the entire drum with preservatives of a quality which is not harmful to
the conductor.
The flanges shall be of two/three ply construction with each ply at right angles to the other and nailed together.
The nails shall be driven from the inside face flange, punched and then clenched on the other face. The
tolerance in thickness of each ply shall be +3 mm only. There shall be at least 3 nails per plank of ply with
maximum nail spacing of 75mm. Where a slot is cut in the flange to receive the inner end of the conductor, the
entrance shall be in line with the periphery of the barrel.
The wooden battens used for making the barrel of the conductor shall be of segmental type. These shall be
nailed to the barrel supports with at least two nails. The battens shall be closely butted and shall provide a
round barrel with smooth external surface. The edges of the battens shall be rounded or chamfered to avoid
damage to the conductor.
Barrel studs shall be used for construction of drums. The flanges shall be holed and the barrel supports slotted
to receive them. The barrel studs shall be threaded over a length on either end, sufficient to accommodate
washers, spindle plates and nuts for fixing flanges at the required spacing. The Barrel studs should be tack-
welded with the nuts after tightening.
Normally, the nuts on the studs shall stand proud of the flanges. All the nails used on the inner surface of the
flanges and the drum barrel shall be countersunk. The ends of barrel shall generally be flushed with top of the
231
nuts.
The inner check of the flanges and drum barrel surface shall be painted with a bitumen based paint.
Before reeling, card board of double corrugated or thick bituminized waterproof bamboo paper shall be
secured to the drum barrel and inside of flanges or the drum by means of a suitable commercial adhesive
material. The paper should be dried before use. Medium grade Kraft paper shall be used in between the layers
of the conductor. After reeling the conductor, the exposed surface of the outer layer of conductor shall be
wrapped with think polythene sheet across the flanges to preserve the conductor from dirt, grit and damage
during transportation and handling and also to prevent ingress of rain water during storage/transport.
A minimum space of 125mm shall be provided between the inner surface of the external protective layer and
outer layer of the conductor.
Each batten shall be securely nailed across grains as far as possible to the flange edges with at least 2 nails per
end. The length of the nails shall not be less than twice the thickness of the battens. The nail shall not protrude
above the general surface and shall not have exposed sharp edges or allow the battens to be released due to
corrosion.
Outside the protective layer, there shall be a minimum of two binders consisting of hoop iron/galvanized steel
wire. Each protective layer shall have two recess to accommodate the binders.
The conductor ends shall be properly sealed and secured with the help of U-nails on one side of the flanges.
The conductor shall be hinged by use of galvanized steel wire/aluminium wire at three locations at least 75mm
apart or more covered with PVC adhesive tape so as to avoid loosening of conductor layers in transit and
handling.
Only one length of conductor shall be wound on each drum.
Marking
Each drum shall have the following information stenciled on it in indelible ink alongwith other essential data:
a) Purchase order number
b) Name and address of consignee
c) Manufactures name and address
d) Drum Number
e) Size of conductor
f) Length of conductor in meters
g) Gross weight of drum with conductor
h) Weight of empty drum with lagging
i) Arrow marking for unwinding
6.0 GALVANISED STEEL EARTHWIRE

6.1 DETAILS OF EARTHWIRE
The galvanised steel earth wire shall generally conform to the Specification of ACSR core wire as mentioned
in IS:398 (Part-II)-1976 except where otherwise specified herein.
The details of the earthing are tabulated below:
a) Stranding and wire diameter 7/2.50 mm steel 7/3.15 mm steel 7/3.66 mm steel
b) Number of strands
Steel core 1 1 1
Outer steel layer 6 6 6
c) Total sectional area 35.30 mm2 54.55 mm2 73.65 mm2
d) Overall diameter 7.50 mm 9.45 mm 10.98 mm
e) Approximate weight 271 kg/km 428 kg/km 583 kg/km
f) Calculated DC resistance at 5.56 /km 3.375 /km 2.5 /km
200C
g) Minimum ultimate tensile 36 KN 57 KN 68.4 KN
strength
h) Direction of lay of outer layer Right hand Right hand Right hand
6.2 WORKMANSHIP
6.2.1 All steel strands shall be smooth, uniform and free of all imperfections, such as spills and splits, die marks,
scratches, abrasions and kinks after drawing and also after stranding.
6.2.2 The finished material shall have minimum brittleness, as it will be subjected to appreciable vibration while in
use.
6.2.3 The steel strands shall be hot dip galvanised and shall have a minimum zinc coating of 275 gms/sq. m.) after
stranding of the uncoated wire surface. The zinc coating shall be smooth, continuous, of uniform thickness,
free from imperfections and shall withstand three and a half dips after stranding in standard preece test. The
steel wire rod shall be of such quality and purity that, when drawn to the size of the strands specified and
coated with zinc, the finished strands shall be of uniform quality and have the same properties and
characteristics in ASTM designation B498-74.
6.2.4 The steel strands shall be performed and post formed in order to prevent spreading of strands while cutting of
232
composite earth wire. Care shall be taken to avoid damage to galvanization during pre forming and post
forming operation.
6.2.5 To avoid susceptibility towards wet storage stains (white rust), the finished material shall be provided with a
protective coating of boiled linseed oil.
6.3 JOINTS IN WIRES
There shall be no joint of any kind in the finished steel wire strand entering into the manufacture of
the earth wire. There shall be no strand joints or strand splices in any length of the completed
stranded earth wire.
6.4 TOLERANCES
The manufacturing tolerances to the extent of the following limits only shall be permitted in the
Diameter of the individual steel strands and lay length of the earth wire:
Earth wire Standard Dia. Maximum Dia. Minimum Dia.
7/2.50 2.50 mm 2.56 mm 2.47 mm
7/3.15 3.15 mm 3.20 mm 3.10 mm
7/3.66 3.66 mm 3.75 mm 3.57 mm
Lay length
Earth Wire Standard Maximum Minimum
7/2.50 113 mm 135 mm 90 mm
7/3.15 160 mm 175 mm 145 mm
7/3.66 181 mm 198 mm 165 mm
6.5 MATERIALS
6.5.1 STEEL
The steel wire strands shall be drawn from high carbon steel rod and shall conform to the following
requirements as to the chemical composition: -
Element %Composition
7/2.50 mm steel 7/3.15 mm steel 7/3.66 mm steel
Carbon 0.55 Max. 0.55 Max. 0.55 Max.
Manganese 0.4 to 0.9 0.4 to 0.9 0.4 to 0.9
Phosphorus 0.040 Max. 0.040 Max. 0.04 Max.
Sulphur 0.040 Max. 0.040 Max. 0.04 Max.
Silicon 0.15 to 0.35 0.15 to 0.35 0.15 to 0.35
6.5.2 ZINC
The zinc used for galvanising shall be electrolytic High Grade Zinc of 99.95% purity. It shall conform
to and satisfy all the requirements of IS:209-1979.
6.5.3 STANDARD LENGTH
The earth wire shall be supplied in standard drum length of manufacturer as per actual requirement.
6.6 TESTS
In accordance with the requirements stipulated in Section1 and Section2, earth wire shall conform to type tests
as per relevant IS/IEC and shall be subjected to the following acceptance tests and routine tests:
6.6.1 ACCEPTANCE TESTS
a) Visual check for joints, scratches etc. and length of )
Earth wire.
b) Dimensional check )
c) Galvanising test )
d) Lay length check )
e) Torsion test )
f) Elongation test )
g) Wrap test )
h) DC resistance test ) IS:398 (Part III) 1976
i) Breaking load test )
j) Chemical analysis of steel )
6.6.2 ROUTINE TESTS
Check that there are no cuts, fins etc. on the strands.
Check for correctness of stranding.
TESTS DURING MANUFACTURING
a) Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanising. )
b) Chemical analysis of steel )
6.7 MARSHALLING KIOSK
6.7.1 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS
The Marshalling Kiosk shall be suitably fixed so as to provide no opening to inside and shall be sufficiently
projected to prevent splash of rainwater to the inside of the Marshalling Kiosk.
233
The Marshalling Kiosk will be 1400 mm (height) 1200 mm (width) and 550 mm (depth) complete with double
door in front provided with pad-locking facility in the door handle. The Marshalling Kiosk shall be bolted on
the 550 mm high angle-iron frame work made of 35x35x6 mm MS angle braced length-wise by 35x6 mm MS
Flat.
The Marshalling Kiosk shall be equipped with 3 No. earth test links made of tinned copper for CT
circuits.
6.8 TERMINAL BLOCK CONNECTORS
Terminal block shall conform to requirements given in Section 2(GTR).
The terminal connector will conform to the following details:
i.) Current & Voltage 30 Amps, 660VAC/900 VDC
Ratings
ii.) Capacity up to three ring-tongue crimped copper wires of 4mm2, cross sectional area.
iii.) disconnecting type terminal blocks for CTs and PTs Terminal connectors for CT/PTs shall have provision of
disconnecting and shortening links for measurement of CT currents without opening the CTs and isolation of
PT circuits.
6.9 DISTRIBUTION OF TERMINALS AND THEIR IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS

The no. of terminals required shall be as follows:
220kV-300, 132kV-250 & 66kV-200.
The total number of terminals in the Marshalling Kiosk will be distributed in ten rows. Terminal block
connector rows shall be adequately spaced and in no case less than 100 mm apart center of the terminal block
so as to permit convenient access to terminations.
Labels in the form of plastic/steel plates carrying numerals for terminal identification shall be so mounted as to
cause no interference with regard to access to terminal nuts. The numerals marked from top to bottom in
ascending order starting from left-hand side as viewed from the front of the Marshalling Kiosk and a
progressively increasing from left hand side to right hand side. The numbering of Terminals and their
arrangement in a 200, 250 and 300 terminals Marshalling Kiosks shall be as per sketch enclosed (Drg. No.
C/ENG/HSEB/MB).
6.10 EARTHING CONDUCTORS
6.10.1 GENERAL
All conductors buried in earth and concrete shall be of mild steel. All conductors above ground level and
earthing leads shall be of galvanised steel.
6.11.1 GALVANISED STEEL
Steel conductors above ground level shall be galvanised according to IS:2629.
The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 610 gm/sq.m. and minimum thickness shall be 85 microns.
The galvanised surfaces shall consist of a continuous and uniformly thick coating of zinc, firmly adhering to
the surfaces of steel. The finished surface shall be clean and smooth and shall be free from defects like
discolored patches, bare spots, unevenness of coating, spelter which is loosely attached to the steel globules,
spiky deposits, blistered surfaces, flaking or peeling off etc. The presence of any of these defects noticed on
visual or microscopic inspection shall render the material liable to rejection.
6.11.2 TESTS
Galvanised steel shall be subjected to four one minute dips in copper sulphate solution as per IS:2633.
6.12 SPACERS
6.12.1 GENERAL
Spacers shall conform to IS-10162.
No magnetic material shall be used in fabrication of spacers except for GI Bolts and nuts.
Spacer design shall be made to take care of fixing and removing during installation and maintenance.
The design of the spacers shall be such that the conductor does not come in contact with any sharp edge.
6.14 TESTS
In accordance with requirements stipulated in Section1 and Section2, each type of spacer shall conform to type
tests as per relevant IS/IEC and shall be subjected to the following, acceptance tests and routine tests in
addition to those specified in IS/IEC: -
6.14.1 ACCEPTANCE TEST
The acceptance tests shall be as per IS:10162 (latest revision).
6.14.2 ROUTINE TEST
a) Visual Examination
b) Dimensional verification.
7.0 EARTHING
The earthing shall be in accordance with requirements given hereunder. The earthmat design shall be done by
the contractor as per IEEE 80. The earthmat shall be connected to the existing earthmat in case of substations
where earthmat is already laid.
7.1 GENERAL
234
7.1.1 Exact location of earthing connections shall be designed to suit the site conditions.
7.1.2 Neutral points of system of different voltages, metallic enclosures and frame works associated with all current
carrying equipments and extraneous metal works associated with electric system shall be connected to a single
earthing system unless stipulated otherwise.
a) Code of practice for Earthing IS:3043.
b) Code of practice for the protection of building and allied structures against lightning IS:2309.
c) Indian Electricity Rules 1956 with latest amendments.
d) National Electricity Safety Code IEEE-80.
7.2 DETAILS OF EARTHING SYSTEM
ITEM SIZE MATERIAL
a) Main Earthing Conductor 40 mm dia MS Rod Mild Steel
b) Conductor above ground & earthing 75x12 mm GS Flat Galvanised Steel
leads (for equipment)
c) Conductor above ground & earthing 75x12 mm GS Flat Galvanised Steel
leads (for columns & aux. Structures)
d) Earthing of indoor LT panels, control 50x6 mm GS Flat Galvanised Steel
panels marshalling boxes, MOM
boxes, junction boxes & lightning
panels etc.
e) Rod electrode 40 mm dia, 3000 mm Mild Steel
f) Pipe electrode upto water level 100 mm dia CI pipe with 13 CI
mm thickness
g) Earthing for motors flat 25x3 mm steel Galvanised
h) Earthing conductor along 50x6 mm GS Flat Mild Steel painted with Red Oxide
outdoor cable trenches primer
7.3 EARTHING CONDUCTOR LAYOUT
7.3.1 Earthing conductors in outdoor areas shall be buried at least 600 mm below finished grade level unless stated
otherwise.
7.3.2 Wherever earthing conductors cross cable trenches, underground service ducts, pipes, tunnels, railway tracks
etc. It shall be laid minimum 300 mm below them and shall be re-routed in case it fouls with
equipment/structure foundations
7.3.3 Tap-connections from the earthing grid to the equipment/structure to be earthed, shall be terminated on the
earthing terminals of equipment/structure.
7.3.4 Earthing conductors or leads along their run on cable trench, ladder columns, beams, walls etc. shall be
supported by suitable welding/cleating at intervals of 750 mm. Wherever it passage through walls, floors etc.,
galvanised iron sleeves shall be provided for the passage of the conductor and both ends of the sleeves shall be
sealed to prevent the passage of water through the sleeves.
7.3.5 Earthing conductor around the building shall be buried in earth at a minimum distance of 1500 mm from the
outer boundary of the building. In case high temperature is encountered at some location, the earthing
conductor shall be laid minimum 1500 mm away from such location.
7.3.6 Earthing conductor crossing the road shall be laid 300 mm below road or at a greater depth to suit the site
conditions.
7.3.7 Earthing conductor embedded in the concrete shall have approximately 50 mm concrete cover.
7.4 EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURE EARTHING
7.4.1 Earthing pads shall be provided by the Contractor of the apparatus/equipment at accessible position. The
connection between earthing pads and the earthing grid shall be made by short and direct earthing leads free
from kinks and splices. In case earthing pads are not provided on the item to be earthed, same shall be
provided in consultation with engineer.
7.4.2 Whether specifically shown in drgs. or not, steel/structure columns, metallic stairs etc. shall be connected to
the nearby earthing grid conductor by two earthing leads. Electrical continuity shall be ensured by bonding
different sections of hand-rails and metallic stairs.
7.4.3 Metallic pipes, conduits and cable tray sections for cable installation shall be bonded to ensure electrical
continuity and connected to earthing conductors at regular. Apart from intermediate connections, beginning
points shall also be connected to earthing system.
7.4.4 Metallic conduits shall not be used as earth continuity conductor.
7.4.5 A separate earthing conductor shall be provided for earthing lighting fixtures, receptacles, switches, junction
boxes, lighting conduits etc.
7.4.6 Wherever earthing conductor crosses or runs along metallic structures such as gas, water, steam conduits etc.
and steel reinforcement in concrete it shall be bonded to the same.
Light poles, junction boxes on the poles, cable and cable boxes/glands, lockout switches etc. shall be
connected to the earthing conductor running along with the supply cable which in turn shall be connected to
earthing grid conductor at a minimum two points whether specifically shown or not.
7.4.8 Railway tracks within switchyard area shall be earthed at a spacing of 30 mm and also by both the ends.
7.4.9 Earthing conductor shall be buried 500 mm inside the switchyard fence. Every alternate post of the fence and
235
gates shall be connected to earthing loop by one lead.
7.4.10 Flexible earthing connectors shall be provided for the moving parts.
7.4.11 All lighting panels, junction boxes, receptables fixtures, conduits etc. shall be grounded in compliance with the
provision of I.E. rules.
7.4.12 A continuous ground conductor of 16 SWG GI wire shall be run all along each conduit run and bonded at
every 600 mm by not less than two turns of the same size of wires. The conductor shall be connected to each
panel ground bus. All junction boxes, receptacles, lighting fixtures etc. shall be connected to this 16 SWG
ground conductor.
7.4.13 50 mm x 6 mm MS flat shall run on the top tier and along the cable trenches and the same shall be welded to
each of the racks. Further this flat shall be earthed at both the ends at an interval of 30m. The MS flat shall be
finally painted with two coats of Red Oxide primer and coats of post office and red enamel paint.
7.5 JOINTING
7.5.1 Earthing connections with equipment earthing pads shall be bolted type. Contact surfaces shall be free from
scale, paint, enamel, grease, rust or dirt. Two bolts shall be provided for making each connection. Equipment
bolted connections, after being checked and tested, shall be painted with anti-corrosive paint/compound.
7.5.2 Connection between equipment earthing lead and main earthing conductors and between main earthing
conductors shall be welded/brazed type. For rust protections, the welds should be treated with red lead and
afterwards thickly coated with bitumen compound to prevent corrosion.
7.5.3 Steel to copper connections shall be brazed type and shall be treated to prevent moisture ingression.
7.5.4 Resistance of the joint shall not be more than the resistance of the equivalent length of the conductor.
7.5.5 All ground connections shall be made by electric arc welding. All welded joints shall be allowed to cool down
gradually to atmospheric before putting any load on it. Artificial cooling shall not be allowed.
7.5.6 Bending of large rod/thick conductor shall be done preferably by gas heating.
7.5.7 All arc welding with large dia. Conductors shall be done with low hydrogen content electrodes.
7.6 POWER CABLE EARTHING
Metallic sheaths and armour of all multi core power cables shall be earthed at both equipment and switchgear
end. Sheath and armour of single core power cable shall be earthed at switchgear end only.
7.7 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT FOR EARTHING SYSTEMS
7.7.1 Each earthing lead from the neutral of the power transformer shall be directly connected to one pipe electrode
in independent treated earth pit up to water level which in turn, shall be buried in cement concrete pit with a
cast iron cover hinged to a cast iron frame to have an access to the joints. One directly driven three meter MS
Rod of 40 mm dia electrode shall also be provided on each neutral. In one substation minimum four number of
independent pipe electrodes up to water level shall be provided at least one each at every neutral point of all
transformer. All the pipe electrodes and rod electrodes shall be connected to the station main earth grid.
7.7.2 Earthing terminal of each lightning arrester shall be directly connected to two rod electrode which in turn,
shall be connected to station earthing grid.
7.7.3 Capacitor voltage transformer , PT and down conductors of tower with peak etc. shall be directly connected to
rod electrode which in turn, shall be connected to station earthing grid.
7.7.4 Auxiliary earthing mat comprising of closely spaced (300mm x 300mm) conductors of 40 mm dia rod shall be
provided at depth of 300 mm from ground level below the operating handles of the MOM Boxes of Isolators
in area of 1.5m x 1.5m. MOM Boxes shall be directly connected to the auxiliary earthing mat. The auxiliary
earthing mat shall be connected to main earth mat.
7.7.5 Earthing of each Post Insulator base of Isolator and support Insulators of circuit Breakers is required to be
connected with earthing strip.
7.7.6 The earthing strips are required to be connected at the top of support structure on both sides and not at bottom.
7.7.7 Insulating strings in the gantry beam are required to be connected at the base with common strip.
7.8 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
7.8.1 Conductors of the lightning protection system shall not be connected with the conductors of the safety earthing
above ground level.
7.8.2 Down conductors shall be cleated on the structures at 2000 mm interval.
7.8.3 Connection between each down conductor and rod electrodes shall be made via test joint located
approximately 1500 mm above ground level. The bidders shall include the cost of test links in the erection
price component of respective equipment/structure and no extra payment shall be made for the same.
7.8.4 Lightning conductors shall not pass through or run inside G.I. conduits.
7.8.5 All metallic structures within a vicinity of 2000 mm in air and 5000 mm below ground shall be bounded to the
conductors of lightning protection system.
8. MAIN BUS BARS
8.1 The brief description of the bus switching scheme, bus bar layout and equipment connection already adopted
are indicated in the SLDs enclosed with Section 1.
8.2 The bidder shall furnish supporting calculations for the bus bars/conductors to show adequacy of design
parameters for:
a) Cantilever strength of Post Insulators.
b) Short circuit forces and spacer location for each span of ACSR conductor stringing.
c) Earthing design calculations.
236
d) Direct stroke lightning protection.
e) Ampacity calculations.
9. BAY EQUIPMENT #
The disposition of various bay equipment is shown in single line diagrams and standard section
drawing/layout drawing enclosed with Section 1.
10. LIGHTNING PROTECTION
10.1 Direct stroke lightning protection (DSLP) shall be provided in the switchyard by shield wires. The layout
drawings enclosed indicate arrangement. The final arrangement shall be decided after approval of the DSLP
calculations. Rezvik method of lightning protection shall be followed. Any additional expenditure resulting
from change of layout if required shall be to the firms account.
10.2 The lightning protection system shall not be in direct contact with underground metallic service ducts and
cables.
11.
TERMINAL POINTS
The terminal points for the scope of work of switchyard are given below: -
11.1 LINE FEEDERS
The transmission line shall terminate on line side gantry structure. The supply and erection of tension insulator
string for line termination and tension clamps for earthwire are included in the scope of the bidder.
11.2 Lightning protection down conductor at this end, tap offs and jumper connections from this dead end to all
equipment in the switchyard are in Contractors scope.
12. EQUIPMENT ERECTION NOTES
12.1.1 All support insulators, circuit Breaker interrupters and other fragile equipment shall preferably be handled
with cranes having suitable booms and handling capacity.
12.1.2 The slings shall be of sufficient length to avoid any damage to insulator due to excessive swing, scratching by
sling ropes etc.
12.1.3 Handling equipment, sling ropes etc. should be tested periodically before erection for strength.
12.1.4 Bending of compressed air piping should be done by a bending machine and through cold bending only.
Bending shall be such inner diameter of pipe is not reduced.
12.1.5 Cutting of the pipes wherever required shall be such as to avoid flaring of the ends. Hence only a proper pipe
cutting tool shall be used. Hacksaw shall not be used.
12.1.6 Muslin or leather cloth shall be used for cleaning the inside and outside of hollow insulators.
12.1.7 All the equipment, instruments and auxiliaries required for testing and commissioning of equipment shall be
arranged at site by the contractor.
12.2 STORAGE
The contractor shall provide and construct adequate storage shed for proper storage of equipments, where
sensitive equipments shall be stored indoors. All equipments during storage shall be protected against damage
due to acts of nature or accidents. The storage instructions of the equipment manufacturer/HVPNL shall be
strictly adhered to.
13 (A) WIRING DIAGRAM AND CABLE SCHEDULES FOR TURNKEY PROJECTS
a) At 400kV & 220kV Sub-Stations, Armoured Copper Control Cables with 350TB or more (depends upon
control circuit termination) & 300TB MK resp. and at 132/66kV Sub-Stations Unarmoured Copper Control
Cables with 250TB/200TB MKs are used. All cables from each equipment installed in a bay shall be routed
through BMK to Control Room (for S/Stns without SAS). However, for 33kV voltage level MKs are not
provided and Unarmoured Copper Control Cables from each equipment installed in a bay shall be routed
directly to Control Room(for S/Stns without SAS). Further, Control cables shall be routed directly from
equipments to AC kiosks for S/Stns. with SAS except for 400kV S/Stns. where cables shall be routed through
BMKs to AC Kiosks. Voltage level for 400kV is designated by AA, 220kV is designated by A, 132kV is
designated by B, 66kV is designated by C, 33kV is designated by D and 11kV is designated by E.
b) As per standard practice in HVPNL, following sizes of copper control cables are being used for
400/220/132/66/33kV voltage levels:-
3CX2.5Sq.mm, 7CX2.5Sq.mm, 10CX2.5Sq.mm, 16CX2.5Sq.mm, 4CX4Sq.mm, 2CX4Sq.mm, 2CX6Sq.mm
and 7CX4Sq.mm and routed as under:-
Sr. No. Size of Cables (Cores X MK Equipment Circuits to be used

Sq.mm) TB
No.
1. 7CX4 & 4CX4 TB-1 For 220kV CT Circuit (from Top)
4CX4 & 2CX4 TB-1 From MK to C&R Panel
2. 7CX4 & 4CX4 TB-1 For 132/66kV CT circuits (From Top).
4CX4 & 2CX4 TB-1 From MK to C&R Panel
3. 4CX4 & 2CX4 - For 33kV CT circuit Directly to C&R Panel.
4. 2CX4 TB-1 For 220/132/66kV NCT Circuit (Bottom TBs).
237
5. 2CX4 - For 33kV NCT circuit Directly to C&R Panel.
6. 4CX4 & 2CX4 TB-2 For 230VAC Supply (From Top).
(3-Phase 4wire & 1-Phase)
7. 2CX6 TB-2 For 220VDC Supply (From Bottom).
8. 16CX2.5 TB-3 From top, CB Trip Circuit (DC Supply-1/Auto Reclose / Remote
or 10CX2.5 Close / Remote Tip-1/ Prot. Trip-I / Remote Trip-II / Prot. Trip-II/
Post-Pre Close Sup. TC-I / Post-Pre Close Sup. TC-II / DC Supply-
II) etc.
9. 16CX2.5 TB-3 For CB Alarm Circuit including spring charge indications (After CB
or 10CX2.5 Trip Circuits)
10. 16CX2.5 or 10CX2.5 TB-4 For all CB N/C Contacts (Semaphore / Auto Trip / Trip Alarm /
Close Indication / Digital Status), etc.
11. 10CX2.5 or 7CX2.5 TB-5 For all CB N/O Contacts (Semaphore / Open Indication / Digital
Status), etc.
12. 10CX2.5 or 7CX2.5 or - For 33kV VCB Tripping Circuit, Alarms and Indication
3CX2.5
13. 16CX2.5 or 10CX2.5 TB-6 For Bus Isolator-A N/C Contacts (From Top) For Bus Isolator-B
N/C Contacts (From Middle)
14. 3CX2.5 TB-6 For Bus Isolator-A Electrical Interlocking Coil (Bottom).
15. 16CX2.5 or 10CX2.5 TB-7 For Bus Isolator-A N/O Contacts (From Top) For Bus Isolator-B
N/O Contacts (From Middle)
16. 3CX2.5 TB-7 For Bus Isolator-B Electrical Interlocking Coil (Bottom).
17. 16CX2.5 or 10CX2.5 TB-8 For Line Isolator N/C Contacts (From Top) For Earth Switch N/C
Contacts (From Middle)
18. 3CX2.5 TB-8 For Line Isolator Electrical Interlocking Coil (Bottom).
19. 16CX2.5 or 10CX2.5 TB-9 For Line Isolator N/O Contacts (From Top) For Earth Switch N/O
Contacts (From Middle)
20. 3CX2.5 TB-9 For Earth Switch Electrical Interlocking Coil (Bottom).
21. 3CX2.5 - For 33kV Isolators / Line &Earth Switch semaphore.
22. 4CX4 TB-10 In case of Bus Coupler Bay
PT Circuits (From Top)
23. 4CX4 TB-10 In case of Line Bay with 3No. CVTs
CVT Circuits (From Top)
3CX2.5 TB-10 KCVT Supply for Electrical Interlocking (From Bottom)
24. 2CX4 TB-10 In case of Line Bay with 1No. CVT

CVT Circuits and KCVT Supply for Electrical Interlocking (From
3CX2.5 TB-10 Bottom)
25. 16CX2.5 or 10CX2.5 or TB-10 In case of T/F Bay
7CX2.5 T/F Tripping Contacts (From Top)
T/F Alarm Circuits (After trip Circuits)
NOTE:-
1. In case of transformer and Bus Coupler bays, TB No. 8 & 9 of MK will remain spare since L&E does not
exist.
2. In case, all CB alarm wires do not get accommodated on Bottom part of TB-3 of MK then shift all CB
alarm wires on Bottom part of TB-5 of MK.
3. In case of 33kV Bays suitable Terminal Junction Box shall be erected near CTs and wires from CT will be
taken to JB & then to Control Room.
4. Suitable rating of fuses & links shall be provided for AC & DC Supply by firm.
5. 10% spare capacity of cores shall be kept spare in each size of cables used for each circuit and intermixing
of cables is not allowed for wiring.
c) As per HVPNL standard practice cable marking be done as given below and Cable ferrule Numbering shall
start from equipment and the numbers will continue in sequential order for outgoing cables to Control
Room for same equipment.
MK TB Purpose Cable Numbering
No.
TB-1 CT/NCT Circuit Starting from 401
TB-2 For AC AC Supply for Adj. MK / ACDB
-801
AC Supply for C&R Panel from
ACDB -802
TB-2 For DC DC Supply for Adj. MK / DCDB
-101
DC Supply for C&R Panel from
238
DCDB -102
TB-2 For AC Supply to 501 The Cable No. from MK to Control
CB Room in next sequential order
TB-3 For CB trip 502 5XX.
Circuits.
TB-3 For CB Alarms 503
TB-4 N/C Contacts of 504
CB
TB-5 N/O Contact of CB 505
TB-8 & 9 N/C and N/O 601 The Cable No. from MK to Control
Contacts of Line Room in next sequential order
Isolator. 6XX.
TB-8 Electrical 602
Interlocking Coil
of Line Isolator.
TB-6 & 7 N/C and N/O 603
Contacts of Bus
Isolator-A
TB-8 Electrical 604
Interlocking Coil
of Bus Isolator-A
TB-6 & 7 N/C and N/O 605
Contacts of Bus
Isolator-B
TB-8 Electrical 606
Interlocking Coil
of Bus Isolator-B
TB-8 & 9 N/C and N/O 301
Contacts of Earth
Switch
TB-8 Electrical 302
Interlocking Coil
of Earth Switch
TB-10 KCVT Supply for 303
Interlocking
TB-10 For AC Supply for 701 The Cable No. from MK to Control
T/F Room in next sequential order
TB-10 For T/F Trip 702 7XX.
Circuits
TB-10 For T/F Alarms 703
TB-10 For PT/CVT Starting from 201
Circuits
NOTE:-
1. Incase of Isolators / L&E Switch the cable numbering for AC & DC supply shall be in continuation to the
numberings marked above.
2. Each cable number is to be followed by respective bay number and same method of cable numbering is to
be followed for 400kV, 220kV,132kV, 66kV and 33kV bays.
Example:- In case of 132kV Bay with Bay No. B-10; cable numbering for AC supply to Circuit Breaker be
done as-
2C X 4mm2 C.No.501B10
Where,
2C X 4mm2 is Size of Cable.
501 is cable number.
B is Voltage level.
10 is bay number.
3. Cable termination shall be done as described below.
i) At MK, LHS of each TBs shall have respective equipment cable ferrule no. / MK TB No. and RHS shall
have MK TB No./ C&R Panel cable ferrule no.
ii) At Each Equipment, LHS of TBs shall have MK TB No./Equipment ferrule no.
iii) At C&R Panel, LHS of TBs shall have respective MK TB No./ C&R panel ferrule no.
iv) In Wiring Diagram, single line Diagram shall have complete TB details of all equipment installed in a bay
with cable core ferrule no. as per approved drawings has to be provided.
d) Electrical Interlocking Scheme for Double Bus-Bar sub-stations
The main requirement of Electrical Interlocking Scheme for grid sub-stations having Double Bus-Bar sub-
239
stations is as under:-
1. The Isolator shall not operate unless the circuit breaker is locked in open position.
2. The earthing switch shall close only when the line Isolator is open and line is OFF.
3. The line Isolator shall close only when the corresponding Circuit Breaker is open.
4. The Bus Isolator of Bus Coupler Bay shall operate only when the Bus Coupler Circuit Breaker is open.
5. When one Bus Isolator of any bay excepting the Bus Coupler is closed, the other shall close only
when the Bus Coupler Circuit Breaker & its both the Isolators are closed.
A typical Interlocking Scheme satisfying the above requirement is shown in figure 1 enclosed. Further,
Electrical Interlocking Scheme for Single Bus-Bar sub-stations be prepared in this pattern accordingly.
These schemes shall be provided in respective wiring diagrams and interlinking be shown in MK.
Note:-
CS/WD as per above shall be prepared by the bidder after award of contract and submitted in 5sets for
consideration and approval to the purchaser.
13.(B) CABLE TAGS AND MARKERS
13.1 Each cable and conduit run shall be tagged with numbers that appear in the cable and conduit schedule.
13.2 The tag shall be of Aluminium with the number punched on it and securely attached to the cable conduit by
not less than two turns of 20 SWG GI wire conforming to IS:280. Cable tags shall be of rectangular shape
for power cables and circular shape for control cables.
13.3 Location of cables laid directly underground shall be clearly indicated with cable marker made of
galvanised iron plate.
13.4 Location of underground cable joints shall be indicated with cable marker with an additional inscription
Cable Joints.
13.5 The marker shall project 150mm above ground and shall be spaced at an interval of 30 meters and at every
change in direction. They shall be located on both sides of road and drain crossings.
13.6 Cable tags shall be provided on all cables at each end (just before entering the equipment enclosure), on
both sides of a wall or floor crossing, on each duct/conduit entry and at every twenty meters (20 m) in cable
tray/trench runs. Cable tags shall be provided inside the switchgear, motor control centers, control and relay
panels etc., wherever required for cable identification, where a number of cables enter together through a
gland plate.
13.7 CABLE SUPPORTS AND CABLE TRAY MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS
13.7.1 The contractor shall provide embedded steel insert on concrete floors/walls to secure supports for by
welding to these inserts or available building steel structures, for the purpose of casting in the control room.
13.7.2 The supports shall be fabricated from standard structural steel members.
13.7.3 Insert plates will be provided at an interval of 750 mm wherever cables are to be supported without the use
of cable trays, such as in trenches, while at all other places these will be an interval of 1000 mm (as per drg.
attached).
13.8 CABLE TERMINATION AND CONNECTIONS
13.8.1 The termination and connection of cables shall be done strictly in accordance with cable and termination kit
manufacturers instructions, drawing and/or as directed by the HVPNL.
13.8.2 The work shall include all clamping, fittings, fixing, plumbing, soldering, drilling, cutting, taping, heat
shrinking, (where applicable), connecting to cable terminal, shorting and grounding as required to complete
the job.
13.8.3 Supply of all consumable material shall be included in the scope of the contractor.
13.8.4 The equipment will be generally provided with un-drilled gland plates for cables/conduit entry. The
contractor shall be responsible for drilling of gland plates painting and touching up. Holes shall not be
made by gas cutting.
13.8.5 Control cable cores entering control panels /switchgear /MCC / miscellaneous panels shall be neatly
bunched, clamped and tied with nylon strap or PVC perforated strap to keep them in position.
13.8.6 The contractor shall tag/ferrule control cable cores at all terminations, as instructed by the HVPNL. In
panels where a large number of cables are to be terminated and cable identification may be difficult, each
core ferrule may include the complete cable no. as well
13.8.7 Spare cores shall be similarly tagged with cable numbers and coiled up.
13.8.8 All cable entry points shall be sealed and made vermin and dust proof. Unused openings shall be effectively
closed.
13.8.9 Double compression type tinned/nickel plated brass cable glands shall be provided by the contractor for all
power and control cables to provide dust and weather proof terminations.
13.8.10 The cable glands shall be tested as per BS:6121. They shall comprise of heavy duty brass casting, machine
finished and tinned to avoid corrosion and oxidation. Rubber components used in cable glands shall be
neoprene and of tested quality. The cable glands shall be of approved make.
13.8.11 The cable gland shall also be tested for dust proof and weather proof termination. The test procedure has to
be discussed and agreed to between the HVPNL and cable glands manufacturer.
13.8.12 If the cable and box or the terminal enclosure provided on the equipment is found unsuitable and requires
modification, the same shall be carried out by the contractor, as directed by the HVPNL.
13.8.13 Crimping tool shall be of approved design and make.
240
13.8.14 Cable lugs shall be tinned copper solderless crimping type conforming to IS:8309 and 8394. The cable lugs
shall be of approved make.
13.8.15 Solderless crimping of terminals shall be done by using corrosion inhibitory compound. The cable lugs
shall suit the type of terminals provided.
14. DIRECTLY BURIED CABLES
14.1 The contractor shall construct the cable trenches required for directly buried cables. The scope of work
shall include excavation, preparation of sand bedding, soil cover, supply and installation of brick or
concrete protective covers back filling and ramming supply and installation of route markers and joint
markers. The Bidder shall ascertain soil conditions prevailing at site, before quoting the unit rates.
14.2 The power and control cable between LT station, Control room, shall be laid in the buried cable trenches.
Further, for lighting purposes also, buried cable trench can be used in the outdoor area.
14.3 Cable route and joint markers and RCC warning covers shall be provided wherever required. The voltage
grade of cables shall be engraved on the marker.
15. INSTALLATION OF CABLES
15.1 Cabling shall be on cable racks, in built-up trenches, vertical shafts, excavated trenches for direct burial,
pulled through pipes, and conduits laid in concrete ducts, run bare and clamped on wall/ceiling/steel
structures etc. as shown in the drawings in detailed engineering stage. Where specific cable layouts are not
shown on drawings, contractor shall route these as directed by the HVPNL.
15.2 The contractor shall fabricate and install mounting arrangements for the support and installation of all the
cables on angles at 1000 mm spacing in the trenches, as shown in the drawing enclosed with Specification.
These mounting structures/cable racks shall be fabricated from structural steel members (channels, angles
and flats) of the required size. The fabrication, welding and erection of these structures shall conform to the
relevant clauses of Section STR, in addition to the Specifications given herein.
15.3 Cable racks and supports shall be painted after installation with two coats of metal primer (comprising of
red oxide zinc chromate in a synthetic medium) followed by two finishing coats of Aluminium paint. The
red oxide and zinc chromate shall conform to IS:2074. All welding works inclusive of the consumables
required for Specifications given herein.
15.4 All inter pole cables (power & control) for all equipment shall be laid in cable trenches/Gl conduit pipes of
NB 50/100 mm diameter, class medium as per IS 4736 which shall be buried in the ground at a depth of
250 mm. The interpole cabling piping of Breakers shall be laid in cable trenches. The scope shall include
all labour,material, equipment for transporting, laying, burying etc. including required bends and seals.
15.5 Cable shall be generally located adjoining the electrical equipment through the pipe insert embedded in the
floor. In the case of equipments located away from cable trench either pipe inserts shall be embedded in the
floor connecting the cable trench and the equipment or in case the distance is small, notch/opening on the
floor shall be provided. In all these cases necessary bending radius as recommended by the cable Contractor
shall be maintained. Cabling in the control room shall be done on ladder type cable trays.
15.6 Cables from the equipment to trench shall run in GI conduits. Necessary conduits of adequate sizes and
length shall be supplied and installed by the contractor. Flexible conduit should be used between fixed
conduit/cable trays (perforated type) and equipment terminal boxes, where vibration is anticipated. The
flexible conduit shall be as per the relevant IS.
15.7
Power and control cables shall be laid in separate tiers. The order of laying of various cables shall be as
follows, for cables other than directly buried:
Power Cable on top tiers.
Control instrumentation and others service cables in bottom tiers.
15.8
Single core cables in trefoil formation shall be laid with a distance of three times the diameter of cable
between trefoil centerlines. All power cables shall be laid with a minimum center-to-center distance equal
to twice the diameter of the cable.
15.9
Trefoil clamps for single core cable shall be pressure die cast Aluminium (LM-6), Nylon or fibre glass and
shall include necessary fixing GI nuts, bolts, washers etc. These are required at every 2 meter of cable runs.
The cost of supply and erecting these clamps shall be made on the unit rate basis.
15.10
Power and control cable shall be securely fixed to the trays/supports with self locking type nylon ties with
deinterlocking facility at every 5 meter interval for horizontal run Vertical and inclined cable runs shall be
secured with 25 mm wide and 2 mm thick Aluminium strip clamps at 2 m.
15.11 Cables shall not be bent below the minimum permissible limit. The permissible limits are as follows:
Table of cable and Minimum bending radius voltage grade
Power cable 12 D.
Control cable 10 D.

241
D is overall diameter of cable.
15.12
The cables are to be laid in single layers on racks and are to be routed through culvert whenever there is
road crossing.
15.13
In each cable run some extra length shall be kept at a suitable point to enable one (for LT cables)/two (for
HT cables) straight through joints to be made in case the cable develop fault at later date.
15.14
Selection of cable drums for each run shall be so planned as to avoid using straight through joints. Cable
splices will not be permitted except where called for by the drawings, unavoidable or where permitted by
the HVPNL. If straight through joints are unavoidable, the contractor shall use the straight through joints
kit of reputed make.
15.15
Control cable terminations inside equipment enclosures shall have sufficient lengths so that changing of
termination blocks can be done without requiring any splicing.
15.16
Metal screen and armour of the cable shall be bonded to the earthing system of the station, wherever
required by the HVPNL.
15.17
Rollers shall be used at intervals of about two meters while pulling cables.
15.18
All due care shall be taken during unreeling, laying and termination of cable to avoid damage due to twist,
kinks, sharp bends etc.
15.19
Cable ends shall be kept sealed to prevent damage.
15.20
Inspection on receipt, unloading and handling of cables shall generally be in accordance with IS:1255 and
other Indian Standard Codes of practices.
15.21
Wherever cable pass through wall openings or other partitions, wall sleeves with bushes having a smooth
curved internal surface so as not to damage the cable, shall be supplied, installed and properly sealed by the
contractor at no extra charges.
15.22
Contractor shall remove the RCC/Steel trench covers taking up the work and shall replace all the trench
covers after the erection-work in that particular area is completed or when further work is not likely to be
taken up for sometime.
15.23
Contractor shall furnish three of the report on work carried out in a particular week, indicating cable
numbers, date on which laid, actual length and route, testing carried out, terminations carried out, along
with the marked up copy of the cable schedule and interconnection drawing wherever any modifications are
made.
15.24
Contractor shall paint the tray identification number on each run of trays at an interval of 10 m.
15.25
In case the outer sheath of a cable is damaged during handling/installation, the contractor shall repair it at
his own cost to the satisfaction of the HVPNL. In case any other part of a cable is damaged, the same shall
be replaced by a healthy cable at no extra cost to the HVPNL, i.e. the contractor shall be paid for
installation and removal of the damaged cable.
15.26
All cable terminations shall be appropriately tightened to ensure secure and reliable connections. The
contractor shall cover the exposed part of all cable lugs whether supplied by him or not with insulating
tape, sleeve or paint.
15.26.a
Separate racks/trays will be utilised for different voltage levels from switchyard to control room.
15.26.b
All the cable trenches will be constructed as per standard HVPNL design as far as electrical portion is
concerned.

242
15.26.c
The GI pipe duly lugged at both ends and by providing bends/elbows or trenches will be
provided/constructed from equipment to trenches.
15.26.d
Provision for accommodation of cables of future bays (All bays position marked on the drawing whether
shown dotted or not to be included for future provision in main the trench size) are to be made in the main
trenches.
15.27
TESTS ON CABLE TRAYS
15.27.1
Test for galvanising (Acceptance test) to be done as per relevant standard.
15.27.2
DEFLECTION TEST (TYPE TEST)
A 2.5 meter straight section of all widths cable trays be simply supported at two ends a uniform distributed
load of 76 kg meter shall be applied along the length of the tray. A maximum deflection at the mid span
shall not exceed 7 mm.
15.28
CONDUITS, PIPES AND DUCT INSTALLATION
15.28.1
Contractor shall supply and install all rigid conduits, mild steel pipes, flexible conduits, hume pipes etc.
including all necessary sundry materials such as tees, elbows, check nuts, bushing reducers, enlargers,
coupling Cap, nipples, gland sealing fittings, pull boxes etc. as specified and to be shown in detailed
engineering drawing. The size of the conduit/pipe shall be selected on the basis of 40% fill criterion.
15.28.2
Contractor shall have his own facility for bending, cutting and threading the conduits at site. Cold bending
should be used. All cuts & threaded ends shall be made smooth without leaving any edges. Anticorrosive
paint shall be applied at all field threaded portions.
15.28.3
All conduit/pipes shall be extended on both sides of wall/floor openings. The fabrication and installation of
supports and the clamping shall be included in the scope of work by Contractor.
15.28.4
When two lengths of conduits are joined together through a coupling, running threads equal to twice the
length of coupling shall be provided on each conduit to facilitate easy dismantling of two conduits.
15.28.5
Conduit installation shall be permanently connected to earth by means of a special approved type of
earthing clamps. GI pull of adequate size shall be laid in all conduits before installation.
15.28.6
Each conduit run shall be painted with its designation as indicated on the drawing such that it can be
identified at each end.
15.28.7
Embedded conduits shall have a minimum concrete cover of 50 mm.
15.28.8
Conduit run sleeves shall be provided with the bushings at each end.
15.28.9
Metallic conduit runs at termination shall have two locknuts and a bushing for connection. Flexible
conduits shall also be suitably clamped at each end with the help of bushings. Bushings shall have rounded
edges so as not to damage the cables.
15.28.10
When embedded conduits turn upwards from a slab or fill, the termination dimensions shown on the
drawings, if any, shall be taken to represent the position of the straight extension of the conduit external to
and immediately following the bend. At least one half of the arc length of the bend shall be embedded.
15.28.11
All conduits/pipes shall have their ends closed by caps until cable are pulled. After cables are pulled, the
ends of conduits/pipes shall be sealed in an approved manner to prevent damage to threaded portions and
entrance of moisture and foreign material.
15.28.12
For underground runs, contractor shall excavate and back fill as necessary.
243
15.28.13
Contractor shall supply, unload, store and install conduits required for the lighting installation as specified.
All accessories/fittings required for making the installation complete, including but not limited to pull out
boxes ordinary and inspection tees and elbow, check nuts, male and female bushings (brass or galvanised
steel), caps, square headed male plugs, nipples, gland sealing fittings, pull boxes, conduit terminal boxes,
gaskets and box covers, saddle terminal boxes, and all steel supporting work shall be supplied by the
contractor.
15.28.14
All unarmoured cable shall run within the conduits from lighting panels to lighting fixtures, receptacles etc.
15.28.15
Size of conduit for lighting shall be selected as per the table given in the attached drawings.
15.28.16
Exposed conduits shall be run in straight lines parallel to building columns, beams and walls. Unnecessary
bends and crossings shall be avoided to present a neat appearance.
15.28.17
Conduit supports shall be provided at an interval of 750mm for horizontal runs and 100 mm for vertical
runs.
15.28.18
Conduit supports shall be clamped on the approved type spacer plates or brackets by saddles or U-bolts.
The spacer plates or brackets in turn, shall be securely fixed to the building steel by welding and to concrete
or brickwork by grouting or by nylon rawl plugs. Wooden plug inserted in the masonry or concrete for
conduit support is not acceptable.
15.28.19
Embedded conduits shall be securely fixed in position to preclude any movement. In fixing embedded
conduit, if welding or brazing is used, extreme care should be taken to avoid any injury to the inner surface
of the conduit.
15.28.20
Spacing of embedded conduits shall be such as to permit flow of concrete between them and in no case
shall be less than 38 mm.
15.28.21
Where conduits are along with cable trays, they shall be clamped to supporting steel at an interval of 600
mm.
15.28.22
For directly embedding in soil, the conduits shall be coated with an asphalt-base compound. Concrete pier
or anchor shall be provided wherever necessary to support the conduit rigidly and to hold it in place.
15.28.23
Conduit shall be installed in such a way as to ensure against trouble from trapped condensation.
15.28.24
Conduit shall be kept, wherever possible, at least 300 mm away from hot pipes, heating devices etc. when it
is evident that such proximity may reduce the service life if cables.
15.28.25
Slip joints shall be provided when conduits cross structural expansion joints or where long run of exposed
conduits are installed, so that temperature change will cause no distortion due to expansion or contraction
of conduit run.
15.28.26
For long conduit run, pull boxes shall be provided at suitable intervals to facilitate wiring.
15.28.27
Conduit shall be securely fastened to junction boxes or cabinets, each with a lock nut inside and outside the
box.
15.28.28
Conduits joints and connections shall be made thoroughly water-tight and rust proof by application of a
thread compound which insulates the joints. White lead is suitable for application on embedded conduit and
lead for exposed conduit.
15.28.29
Field bends shall have a minimum radius of four (4) times the conduit diameter. All bends shall be free of
kinds, indentations of flattened surfaces. Heat shall not be applied in making any conduit bend. Separate
bends may be used for this purpose.
15.28.30
The entire metallic conduit system, whether embedded or exposed, shall be electrically continuous and
244
thoroughly grounded. Where slip joints are used, suitable bounding shall be provided around the joint to
ensure a continuous ground circuit.
15.28.31
After installation, the conduits shall be thoroughly cleaned by compressed air before pulling in the wire.
15.28.32
Lighting fixtures shall not be suspended directly from the junction box in the main conduit run.
16.
ILLUMINATION SYSTEM
16.1.1
The scope of work comprises of design, engineering, testing, supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of various lighting fixtures complete with lamps, supports and accessories, lighting panels,
lighting complete with distribution boxes, galvanised rigid steel conduits, lighting wires, G.I. Earthwire
receptacles, switchboards, switches, junction boxes, pull out boxes complete with accessories, lighting
transformer & Street steel light poles as per IS: 2713-1980 (Part-II). The details of area to be illuminated
are given below: -
Control Room Building.
Switch Yard area.
Roads and streets.

16.1.2
The minimum lux levels to be maintained in the different areas shall be as per following: -
Sr. No.
Area Lux. Level
i)
Switchyard 50 lux on power transformer and 20 lux on other equipment.
ii)
Street/Road 20 lux.
Bidder shall submit detailed for reaching the above LUX levels.
16.1.3
Any material, wire, conduits, accessories etc. not specifically mentioned or specified but required for
installation of lighting fixtures are included in the scope of contractor.
All lighting fixtures & accessories shall be designed for continuous operation under atmospheric conditions
existing at site, without reduction in the life or without any deterioration. The lighting fixtures shall be of
Philips or Bajaj or Crompton Greaves of make only.
16.2
TEMPERATURE RISE
All lighting fixtures and accessories shall be designed to have a low temperature rise according to the
relevant Indian Standards, the design average ambient temperature shall be taken as 500C.
16.3
LIGHTING FIXTURES
16.3.1
All fixtures shall be designed for minimum glare.
16.3.2
All lighting fixtures shall be complete with lamps a specified and shall be suitably wired up.
16.3.3
All lighting fixtures shall be complete with accessories. Outdoor type fixtures shall be provided with
outdoor type weather proof box.
16.3.4
Each lighting fixtures shall be provided with an earthing terminal and all metal parts of the housing shall be
constructed so as to ensure earthing continuity throughout the fixture up to the earthing terminal.
16.3.5
The mounting facility and conduit knock-outs for the fixtures shall be suitable for 20 mm conduit entry.

245
16.3.6
The wire shall be of 1100 V grade and PVC insulated with multi stranded copper conductor.
16.4
TESTS
Manufactures type and routine test certificates shall be submitted for the fixtures and accessories.
16.5
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The lighting system shall comprise of the following: -

16.5.1
AC NORMAL LIGHTING
All the lights connected to the AC lighting system in different area will be connected to the AC distribution
boards to be supplied.
16.5.2
DC EMERGENCY LIGHTING
DC emergency in Control room, relay and protection room, office, LT switchgear room, D.C.D.B. room
shall be provided to avoid complete darkness in case of complete AC failure. The number of DC
emergency lights to be provided shall be calculated on the basis that at least illumination level of at least 30
LUX is achieved when DC emergency lights get switched ON.
16.5.3
RECEPTACLES
Adequate number of 5A, 15 A, (single phase) and 32 A (3phase) receptacles shall be provided at suitable
locations to be mutually during the detailed engineering.
16.6
ERECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF LT PANELS & BATTERY CHARGER
16.6.1
The Contractor shall unload, erect, install, test and put into commercial use all electrical equipment
included in this Specification.
16.6.2
Equipment shall be installed in a neat, workman so that it is level plumb, square and properly aligned and
oriented. Tolerance shall be as established in Contractors drawings or as stipulated by HVPNL. No
equipment shall be permanently bolted down to foundations until the alignment has been checked and
found acceptable by the HVPNL.
16.6.3
Contractor shall furnish all supervision, labour tools equipment rigging materials, bolts, wedges, anchors,
concrete insert etc. in proper time required to completely install, test and commission the equipment.
16.6.4
Manufactures and HVPNLs instructions and recommendations of all equipment.
16.6.5
Contractor shall move all equipment into the respective room through the regular door or openings
specifically provided for this purpose. No part of the structure shall be utilised to lift or erect any equipment
without prior permission of HVPNL.
16.6.6
All switchboards shall be installed in accordance with Indian standards IS:3072 and at HVPNLs
instructions. Switchboard panels shall be installed on finished surfaces, concrete or steel stills. Contractor
shall be required to install and align any channel sills which from part of foundations. In joining shipping
sections of switchboards together adjacent housing of panel section or flanged throat sections shall be
bolted together after alignment has been completed. Power bus, enclosures ground and control splices of
conventional nature shall be cleaned and bolted together being drawn up with torque spanner of proper size
or by other approved means.
16.6.7
All switchboards shall be made completely vermin proof.
16.6.8
Contractor shall take utmost care in holding instruments, relaying and other delicate mechanism wherever
the instruments and relays are supplied separately they shall be mentioned only after the associated panels
246
have been erected and aligned. The blocking materials HVPNL for safe transit of instrument and relays
shall be removed after ensuring that panel been completely installed and to further movement of the same
should be necessary. Any damage shall be immediately reported to HVPNL.
16.6.9
Equipment furnished with finished coats of paint shall be touched by up Contractor if their surface is
specified or marred while handling.
16.6.10
Foundation work for all switchboard panels will be carried out by Civil Contractor. However, minor
modifications shall be carried out by the Contractor at no extra cost.
16.6.11
After installation of panels, power and control wiring and connections, Contractor shall perform operational
tests on all switchboards, to verify proper operation of switchboards/panels and correctness of all
equipment in each and every respect.
16.6.12
COMMISSIONING CHECK TESTS
The Contractor shall carry out the following commissioning check wherever applicable in addition to the
other checks and tests recommended by the manufacturers: -
16.6.12.1
GENERAL
i. Check nameplate details according to the Specification.
ii,
Check for physical damage.
iii.
Check tightness of all bolts, clamps, joints connecting terminals.
iv.
Check earth connection,
v.
Check cleanliness of insulators and bushings.
vi.
Check all moving parts for proper lubrication.
16.6.12.2
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
i.
Check alignment of Breaker truck for free movement.
ii.
Check correct operation of shutters.
iii.
Check control wiring for correctness of connections, continuity and IR values.
iv.
Manual operation of Breaker completely assembled.
v.
Power closing/opening operation, manually and electrically.
vi.
Breaker closing and tripping time.
vii.
Trip free and anti-pumping operation.
viii.
IR values, minimum pick up voltage and resistance of coils.
ix.
Contact resistance.
x.
Simultaneous closing of all the three phases.
xi.
Check electrical and mechanical interlocks provided.

247
xii.
Check on spring charging motor, correct operation of limit switches, and timeof charging.
xiii.
All functional checks.
16.2.12.3
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
i.
Megger between winding and winding terminals top body.
ii,
Polarity test.
iii.
Ratio identification checking of all ratios on all by primary injection of current.
iv.
Spare CT cores, if any, to be shorted and earthed.
16.2.12.4
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
i.
Insulation resistance test.
ii,
Ratio test on all cores.
iii.
Polarity test.
iv.
Line connections as per connection diagram.
16.2.12.5
CUBICLE WIRING
i.
Check all switch development.
ii,
Each wire shall be traced by continuity tests and it should be made sure that the wiring is as per relevant
drawing. All interconnection between panels/equipment shall similarly checked.
iii.
All the wire shall be meggered to earth.
iv.
Functional check of all control circuit e.g. closing, tripping control, interlock, supervision and alarm circuit.
16.2.12.6
RELAYS
i.
Check connections and wiring.
ii. a)
Megger all terminal to body.
b)
Megger AC to DC terminals.
iii.
Check operations characteristics by secondary injection.
iv.
Check minimum pick up voltage of DC coils.
v.
Check operation of electrical/mechanical targets.
vi.
Relays settings.
vii. Check CT and VT connections with particular reference to their polarities for directional relays, wherever
required.
16.2.12.6
METERS

248
i.
Check calibration by comparing it with a sub-standard.
ii,
Megger all insulated portions
iii.
Check CT and VT connections with a particular reference to their polarities for power type meters.
16.7
ERECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF BATTERY BANK
16.7.1
The control shall unload, erect, install, test and put into commercial use already electrical equipment
included in this Specification.
16.7.2
Equipment shall be installed in a neat, workman like manner so that it is level, plumb, square and properly
aligned and oriented tolerance shall be established in Contractors drawings or as stipulated by HVPNL. No
equipment shall be permanently bolted down to foundations until the alignment has been checked and
found acceptable by the HVPNL.
16.7.3
Contractor shall furnish all labour tools equipment rigging materials, bolts, wedges, anchors, concrete
inserts etc. in proper time required to completely install, test and commission the equipment.
16.7.4
Manufacturers and HVPNLs instructions and recommendations shall be correctly followed in handling,
testing and commissioning of Battery Bank.

249
SECTION 8
STRUCTURES
1.0 GENERAL
250
1.1 The scope of specification covers fabrication, proto-assembly supply and erection of
galvanised steel structure for towers, latticed griders and equipment support structure.
Towers, girder & equipment support structures shall be as per HVPN drawing
conforming to IS 2062 (latest).
The scope shall include all types of bolts, nuts, step bolts, inserts in concrete,
gusset plates, equipment mounting bolts, structure Earthing bolts, foundation
bolts, spring washers, fixing plates, angles and bolts for structure mounted or
ground mounted marshalling boxes (AC/ DC Marshalling box & equipment
control cabinet) and any other items as required to complete the job.
The connection of all structures to their foundations shall be by base plates

and embedded anchor/ foundation bolts. All steel structures and anchor/
foundation bolts shall be fully galvanized. The weight of the zinc coating shall
be at least 0.610 kg/m2. One additional nut shall be provided below the base
plate which may be used for the purpose of leveling.
2.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Minimum distance from the hole centre to edge shall be 1.5x bolt diameter.
Minimum distance between center to center of holes shall be 2.5x bolt
diameter.
2.2 The minimum bolt diameter shall be 16 mm.
2.3 In order to facilitate inspection and maintenance, the structures shall be

provided with climbing devices. Each tower shall be provided with step bolts
not less than 16 mm diameter & 175 mm long spaced not more than 450 mm
apart, staggered on faces on one leg extending from about 0.5 meters above
ground level to the top of the tower. The step bolt shall conform to IS:10238.
Ladders on towers with lighting appliances shall be provided with safety
guards.
2.4 If luminaries are proposed to be fixed on gantries/ towers, then the proper
loading for the same shall be considered while designing. Also holes for fixing
the brackets for luminaries should be provided wherever required.
2.5 Foundation bolts/ studs shall be designed for the loads for which the
structures are designed.
3.0 FABRICATION OF STEEL
3.1 The supplier shall bear all the expenditure at all stages on account of loading/
unloading, transportation and other miscellaneous expenses and losses and
damages for all materials upto the fabrication yard/ shop and there after to the
erection site including all other expenses till the erection of work has been
completed and accepted. The unit rates shall be deemed to be inclusive of all
such incidental expenses and nothing extra shall be payable on any account
in this regard.
3.2 The fabrication and erection works shall be carried out generally in
accordance with IS:802. A reference however may be made to IS:800 in case
of non-stipulation of some particular provision in IS:802. All materials shall be
251
completely shop fabricated with proper connection material and erection
marks for ready assembly in field.
4.0 ASSEMBLY
i) The component parts shall be assembled in such a manner that they

are neither twisted nor otherwise damaged and shall be so prepared
that the specified camber, if any, is provided. In order to minimise
distortion in member the component parts shall be positioned by using
the clamps, clips, dogs, jigs and other suitable means and fasteners
(bolts and welds) shall be placed in a balanced patten. If the individual
components are to be bolted, paralled and tapered drifts shall bed
used to align the part so that the bolts can be accurately positioned.
ii) Sample towers, beams and equipment support structure shall be trial
assembled keeping in view the actual site conditions, before erection in
the fabrication shop and shall be inspected and approved by
Purchaser before mass fabrication. Necessary match marks shall be
made on these components in the shop before disassembly and
despatching.
5.0 BOLTING
i) Every bolt shall be provided with a spring washer under the nut so that
no part of the threaded portion of the bolt is within the thickness of the
parts bolted together.
ii) All steel items, bolts, nuts and washers shall be galvanised.
iii) 2.0% extra nuts and bolts shall be supplied for erection.

252
6.0 WELDING
The work shall be done as per approved fabrication drawing which clearly
indicate various details of joints to be welded, type of weld, length and size of
weld, whether shop or site weld. Symbols for welding on erection and shop
drawings shall be according to IS:813. Efforts shall be made to reduce site
welding so as to avoid improper welding due to constructional difficulties.
7.0 FOUNDATION BOLTS
7.1 Foundation bolts for the towers and equipment supporting structures and
elsewhere shall be embedded in first stage concrete while the foundation is
cast. The Supplier shall ensure the proper alignment of these bolts to match
the holes in the base plate.
7.2 The Supplier shall be responsible for the correct alignment and leveling of all
steel work on site to ensure that the towers/ structures are plumb.
7.3 All foundation bolts for lattice structures are to be supplied by the supplier.
7.4 All foundation bolts shall be fully galvanised so as to achieve 0.61 kg per
Sq.m of Zinc Coating as per specification.
8.0 STABILITY OF STRUCTURE
The Supplier shall be responsible for the stability of the structure art all stages
of its erection at site and shall take all necessary measures by the additions
of temporary bracing and guying to ensure adequate resistance to wind and
also to loads due to erection equipment and their operations.
9.0 GROUTING
The method of grouting the column bases shall be subject to approval of

Purchaser and shall be such as to ensure a complete uniformity of contact
over the whole area of the steel base. The Supplier will be fully responsible
for the grouting operations.
10.0 GALVANISING
10.1 All structure steel works and single pipe supports shall be galvanised after
gabrication.
10.2 Zinc required for galvanising shall have to be arranged by the manufacturer.
Purity of zinc to be used shall be 99.5% as per IS:209 (latest).
10.3 The Supplier shall be required to make arangement for frequent inspection by
the Purchaser as well as continuous inspection by a resident representative
of the Purchaser, if so desired for fabrication work.
11.0 INSPECTION BEFORE DISPATCH

253
Each part of the fabricated steel work shall be inspected and certified by the
Purchaser of his authorised representative as staisfactory before it is
despatched to the erection site. Such certificate shall not relieve the Supplier
of his responsibility regarding adeqaucy and completeness of fabrication.
12.0 TEST CERTIFICATE
Copies of all test certificate relating to material procured by the Supplier

works shall be forwarded to the Purchaser.
13.0 ERECTION
The Supplier should arrange his own erection plant and equipment, welding
set, tools and tackles, scaffoliding, trestles equipment etc. and any other
accessories and ancillaries required for the work.
14.0 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The Supplier shall strictly follow at all stages of fabrication, transportation and
erection of steel structures, raw materials and other tools and tackles, the
stipulations contained in Indian Standard Code for erection for structural steel
work IS:7205.

254
REC-138
SECTION-9
CIVIL WORKS
1.0 GENERAL
The intent of specification covers the following:
Design, Engineering, Construction of all specified Civil Works of the proposed

substation covered under the scheme. All Civil Works shall also satisfy the
general technical requirements specified in other sections of this specification
and as detailed below. All the specified designs shall be carried out to the
required service conditions/loads as specified elsewhere in the specifications
or implied as per National/International Standards and as specified by
manufacturers.
All Civil Works shall be carried out as per applicable Indian Laws, latest
Standards and Codes. All material shall be of best quality conforming to
relevant Indian Standards and Codes. The successful bidder shall furnish all
design, (unless otherwise specified), drawings, labour, tools, equipment,
material, temporary works, construction plant and machinery, supply fuel,
transportation and all other incidental items not shown or specified but are
required for complete performance of the works in accordance with approved
drawings, specifications and direction of HVPNL.
The successful bidder responsible for developing the designs and drawings
(as mentioned in the BOQ) shall get these counter checked/vetted/approved
from some professional institute of repute like IIT, NIT, PEC etc. before
submission to HVPNL for final approval.
The work shall be carried out according to the design/drawings approved by

Nigam. The design/drawing so approved shall become the property of the
Nigam and the Nigam shall be free to use these designs/drawings at any of
its upcoming/future station. For all structures, buildings, foundations etc.
necessary layout and details shall be developed by the bidder keeping in view
the functional requirement of the sub-station facilities and providing enough
space and access for operation, use and maintenance based on the input
provided by the HVPNL. Certain minimum requirements are indicated in this
specification for guidance purposes only. However, the bidders shall quote
considering all the requirements essential for functional purposes.
All the civil works covered under the said scheme shall be constructed under
the supervision of experienced degree holder should have the minimum
experience of 2 years/diploma holder of minimum experience for 5 years as
mentioned under GCC.
2.0 SOIL DATA

255
For the guidance of the bidders, the general soil data around proposed sub-
station is specified below:-
Station Type Dry/Wet Angle of Cohesion Net safe Depth of

2
Name of soil Bulk internal (kg/cm ) allowable B.C water table
2
Density friction (kg/cm ) at from N.S.L
kg/m3 1.5m depth
(F.O.S=2.5)
0
Mehna Silty 1500, 30 0 0.80 More than
Khera sand 1650 10M
0
Fatehabad Silty 1500, 30 0 0.60 More than
sand 1650 10M
Rania Sandy 1500, 30 00 0.46 More than
soil 1650 10M
0
Bhiwani Sandy 1620, 31 0 1.0 More than
soil 1650 6M
2.1 GENERAL SITE DESCRIPTION
The substation site is generally leveled. To achieve formation level which

generally is fixed at higher level than its surroundings, earth filling shall be
required. Tentative quantity of earth filling has been indicated in the BOQ but
may vary as per site requirement based on contouring and surroundings. The
bidders are advised to visit the site before quoting.
2.2 The successful bidder shall use the above soil parameters for designing the
foundations of tower/equipment structures, buildings etc. Minimum depth of
foundations in natural ground designed on above parameters shall not be less
than 1.0m excluding lean concrete.
2.3 SITE PREPARATION
The site as available shall be handed over to the successful bidder. Clearing
the site from bushes/trees including their roots shall be carried out by the
successful bidder without any extra cost to HVPNL. The HVPNL, if required,
shall arrange necessary permission for cutting of trees from the concerned
authorities. The Contractor shall hand over the wood of trees to HVPNL.
The Contractor shall prepare the `CONTOURS` of land at suitable intervals.

The spot levels shall be taken at a distance not more the 3.0M intervals. To
have a fair idea about the topography of the area, the contours at new sub-
stations shall extend sufficient distance (approx. 50M) beyond the land. On
submission of contour plan by the successful bidder and based on the
surroundings, drainage condition etc., the HVPNL shall fix the Formation
Level(s) of the sub-stations except for the substations where bays are
proposed for which the formation level shall remain same as that of the
existing level of that sub-station. The contractor, as per specifications shall
carry out necessary earth cutting/filling in layers, compaction, leveling and
dressing to reach the desired formation level.
The contractor at his own cost shall make the layout and levels of all
structures/buildings as per the general grid of the plot and the Benchmark
given by the concerned Executive Engineer/Civil Works Division.

256
The permanent Benchmark and all the change points shall be established at
the proposed site and the same shall be got authenticated before taking any
further levels. The contractor shall provide all help including instruments,
materials and personnel to the Executive Engineer/Civil Works Division or his
representative for checking the detailed layout and shall solely be responsible
for the correctness of the layouts and levels.
3.0 SCOPE
This clause covers the design, engineering, supply of labour, material, T&P and
execution of civil items including dismantling of the existing foundations/structures/roads
wherever required, clearing the site, site preparation, supply and compaction of fill
material to achieve formation level, foundations, excavation and compaction of backfill
for foundation, roads, trenches including trenches below floors in buildings etc., complete
in all respects.
3.1 WATER SAMPLE
The successful bidder shall arrange water supply connection from Local Govt.
(Public Health Deptt., Municipal Committee/Council, HUDA etc.) to meet the
construction requirement. HVPNL will facilitate the successful bidder for
obtaining connection from the concerned govt. department.
In case water supply connection is not feasible, the successful bidder shall arrange at his own cost sufficient quantity and good quality
water along with required pumping arrangements for construction, curing and other purposes.
3.2 GENERAL
3.2.1 Material including excavated material unsuitable for founding of foundations

shall be removed and replaced by suitable fill material and the same is
required to be got approved from the HVPNL.
3.2.2 Fill/Backfill material around foundations or other works shall be free from
harmful salts viz. sulphates, chlorides and or any organic/inorganic materials.
The Fill/Backfill material should be compacted as described under clause 3.4.
3.3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
3.3.1 Excavation and backfill for foundations shall be in accordance with the
relevant IS code and as per approved design/drawings.

257
3.3.2 Whenever water table/seepage water is met during excavation, it shall be
dewatered and foundation pit shall be maintained dry i.e. free of water during
the excavation, concreting and back filling. No extra payment on this count
shall be admissible.
3.3.3 When embankments are to be constructed on slopes of 15% or greater,

benches or steps with horizontal and vertical faces shall be cut in the original
slope prior to placements of embankment material. The vertical faces shall
measure not more than 1.0 m in height.
3.3.4 Embankments adjacent to abutments, culverts, retaining walls and similar

structures shall be constructed by compacting the material not exceeding
15cm in thickness of loose material before compaction in successive uniform
horizontal layers. Each layer shall be compacted as required by means of
mechanical means i.e. rollers, vibrators etc. as approved by the HVPNL.
Rocks larger than 10 cm shall not be placed in embankment adjacent to
structures.
3.3.5 Earth embankments of roadways and site areas adjacent to buildings shall be
placed in successive uniform horizontal layers not exceeding 20 cm in
thickness in loose stage measurements and compacted to the full width
specified. The upper surface of the embankment shall be shaped so as to
provide complete drainage of surface water at all times.
3.3.6 In case the switchyard area needs leveling & dressing only, to maintain the
final formation level as fixed by HVPNL, same shall be done with utmost care
and with proper compaction.
3.3.7 If the top crest of earth (30 cm depth or as per soil investigation report
whichever is maximum) contains harmful salts and organic/inorganic
materials, it shall be scraped and disposed off at a place outside substation
as directed by Executive Engineer/ Civil Works Division payment shall be paid
as per quoted rates.
3.4 COMPACTION
3.4.1 The method and equipment used to compact the fill material shall be suitable
to achieve the density that will give the allowable soil bearing pressure
required for the foundations, roads etc. in each layer of fill material. Each
layer of earth embankment when compacted shall be as close to optimum
moisture content as practicable. Embankment material that does not contain
sufficient moisture to obtain proper compaction shall be wetted. If the material
contains excess moisture, then it shall be allowed to dry before rolling. The
rolling shall begin at the edges overlapping half the width of the roller each
time and progress to the center of the road or towards the building as
applicable. Rolling will also be required on rock fills. No compaction shall be
carried out in rainy season/during rains.
3.4.2 At all times, the unfinished construction shall have adequate drainage. Upon
completion of the road surface course, adjacent shoulders shall be given a
final shaping, true alignment and grade.

258
3.4.3 The density to which fill materials shall be compacted shall be as per relevant
IS and as per direction of HVPNL. All compacted sand filling shall be confined
as far as practicable. Backfilled earth shall be compacted to minimum 95% of
the Standard Proctor's density at Optimum Moisture Content (OMC). The sub-
grade for the roads and embankment filling shall be compacted to minimum
95% of the Standard Proctor's density at OMC.
3.5 EARTH WORK FOR ACHIEVING FORMATION GROUND LEVEL (FGL)
To maintain the formation level (FL) as fixed by HVPNL, earth filling/cutting or

both filling/cutting may be required. Before earth work is started, the site shall
be cleared from bushes/trees including roots, existing structures etc. by the
successful bidder.
In case earth is to be imported (earth filling), the area from where the earth is
to be imported should be pre-determined so as to ensure good quality of
earth i.e. earth imported should be free from shrubs, ranks, vegetation, grass,
brushwood, stone shingle and boulders (longer than 75mm in any direction),
organic or any other foreign matter. Earth containing deleterious materials salt
peter earth etc. shall not be used for filling. All clods and lumps of earth
exceeding 8cm in any direction shall be broken or removed before the earth is
used for filling. Imported earth shall be measured for payment as per x-
sections based on initial and final levels at the substation.
In case the earth work is required in cutting, the cut earth shall be spread in
sub-station areas requiring filling and the surplus earth, if any shall be
disposed of to a suitable undisputed place outside the substation. The
successful bidder shall be responsible in case some dispute arises on
account of disposal of earth at a disputed site. Cutting shall be measured and
payment shall be made on actual basis as per X-sections based on initial and
final levels at the substation.
In case both cutting of earth (including spreading) & filling (import of earth)
are required, each item will be measured separately and payment made on
actual basis for both as per x-sections based on initial and final levels at the
substation.
The rates for earth filling/cutting and spreading of earth shall include site
clearance, laying of earth in layers (as per specification briefly brought out
under compaction), dressing, carriage, lead, loading and unloading, watering
and compaction with roller including compensation of earth etc. as per
specification complete for the substation as a whole, including under roads.
In case only dressing is required for maintaining FGL, nothing shall be paid
extra on this account.
In case top layer earth (300mm or as per soil investigation report) contains
harmful salts, deleterious materials etc., requires cutting/removal and disposal
only, it shall be paid as per cutting and disposal quoted rates. This earth shall
be disposed outside substation area and shall not be used for filling anywhere
in the substation area.

259
4.0 SITE SURFACING
4.1 SCOPE OF WORK

The contractor shall furnish all labour, equipment and materials required for
complete performance of the work in accordance with the drawings,
specifications and directions of the Executive Engineer/Civil Works Division.
Stone spreading along with cement concrete layer shall be done in areas
presently in the scope of the scheme. Stone spreading only shall, however,
be provided in the areas (bays) kept for future expansion. In the existing sub-
stations where cement concrete base has not been laid under gravel, only
gravel shall be laid in that sub-station.
4.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENT
4.2.1 The material required for site surfacing/gravel filling should be free from all
types of organic materials and shall be of standard approved quality as
directed by the Executive Engineer/Civil Works Division.
4.2.2 The material to be used for stone filing/site surfacing shall be crushed/broken
stone of 40mm nominal size (ungraded single size) conforming to table 2 of
IS: 383 1970. Hardness, flakiness shall be as required for wearing courses
are given below:-
a) Sieve Analysis Limits (Gradation) (IS: 383 Table 2)

Sieve Size % passing by weight
63mm 100
40mm 85-100
20mm 0-10 (upto 90% retained on sieve)
b) Hardness
Abrasion Value (IS: 2386 Part-IV) not more than 50%
Impact value (IS: 2386 Part-IV) not more than 45%
4.2.3 The Contractor, after all the structures and equipment have been erected and
accepted, the surface of the switchyard area shall be maintained,
rolled/compacted to the lines and grades in accordance with the requirements
and direction of the Executive Engineer/Civil Works Division. The sub grade
shall be consolidated by using 3 ton roller with suitable water sprinklers to
form a smooth and compact surface. The roller shall run over the sub-grade
till the soil is evenly and densely consolidated and behaves as an elastic
mass.
4.2.4 Areas where the Executive Engineer/Civil Works Division is satisfied that
proper filling of the base course material by normal rolling equipment is not
possible due to closely laid foundations and structures, the filling of the base
course material shall be compacted by hand. Due care shall be exercised to
avoid any damage to the foundations, structures, equipments (Cable trench
or Cable) during rolling compaction or otherwise.

260
4.2.5 The sub grade shall be in moist condition at the time the cement concrete is
placed. If necessary, it should be saturated with water for not less than 6
hours but not exceeding 20 hours before placing of cement concrete. If it
becomes dry prior to the actual placing of cement concrete, it shall be
sprinkled with water and it shall be ensured that no pools of water or soft
patches are formed on the surface.
4.2.6 100mm thick base layer of cement concrete in 1:4:8 (1 cement: 4 fine
aggregates: 8 coarse aggregate nominal size 20MM) conforming to zone-II as
per IS:583 shall be provided in the areas excluding roads, drains, cable
trenches as per detailed engineering drawing. For easy drainage of water, the
slope of 1:1000 is to be provided from the ridge to the nearest drain. The
ridge shall be suitably located at the centre of the area between the nearest
drains. The above slope shall be provided at the top of base layer of cement
concrete in 1:4:8. A layer of cement slurry of mix 1:4 (1 cement: 4 fine
aggregates) shall be laid uniformly over cement concrete layer. The cement
consumption for cement slurry shall not be less than 150kg per 100 sq.m.
4.2.7 A final layer of 100mm thick uncrushed/crushed/broken stone of 20mm

nominal single ungraded size as per site requirement shall be spread
uniformly over cement concrete layer after curing is complete.
4.2.8 Generally site surfacing will be restricted upto 2.0m beyond the last
structure/equipment foundation. However, depending upon the site
requirement, the same shall be carried out as per instructions of Executive
Engineer/Civil Works Division. To hold the stone (bajri) wherever required, a
toe wall of 115mm thick, 300mm deep (1:4) shall be provided. Top of wall
shall be 25mm above top of bajri. All visible portion of toe wall shall be
plastered and cement painted.
5.0 SITE DRAINAGE

SCOPE
Adequate site drainage system shall be provided by the Contractor within the
switchyard fencing under the present scope including switch house building &
connection at one or more points to the outfall point located outside the
substation boundary wall is in the scope of contractor. Invert level of drainage
system at outfall point shall be decided in such a way that the water can
easily be discharged outside the substation boundary wall. Outfall point shall
be got approved from Executive Engineer/Civil Works Division before
commencement of construction. The contractor shall obtain rainfall data and
design the storm water drainage system including culverts, ditches, drains
etc. to accommodate the most intense rainfall that is likely to occur over the
catchments area in one hour period on an average of once per ten years.
While designing the drainage system following points shall taken care of:
5.1 The surface of the switchyard shall be sloped to prevent pounding of water.
5.2 Longitudinal slope shall generally be not less than 1 in 1000. However,
keeping in view the discharge, the same can be increased to 1:2000.
5.3 Open surface drains shall be construed in first class brick masonry in 1:4
cement sand mix laid over 100mm thick PCC of 1:4:8 (1cement; 4 coarse
261
aggregates; 8 stone aggregate 20mm nominal size). The side walls shall be
plastered with 1:5 cement sand mix.
5.4 The trapezoidal drains, if proposed shall have 300mm bottom width and sides
slope of 1 horizontal; 1.5 vertical. For design of lined drain IS: 10430 and for
construction of cast-in-situ cement lining IS: 3873 shall be followed.
5.5 Drain shall be constructed on one/both sides of roads as per site requirement.
In the switchyard maximum spacing between two drains shall not be more
than 100 meter. It will be ensured that no area is left un-drained.
5.6 The side wall(s) of the drains as per site conditions shall be 25mm above the
gravel level to prevent spilling gravels. Suitable mild steel grating be provided
for drainage of surface water. 25mm thick RCC tiles be placed over grating
openings.
5.7 RCC pipe drains shall be provided in area of switch yard where movement of
crane will be necessary in operating phase of the substation.
5.8 For pipe drains including road crossings, RCC concrete pipe of class NP3
shall be used. For design of RCC pipes for drains and culverts, IS: 456 and
IS: 783 shall be followed.
5.9 Pipe drains shall be connected through manholes at an interval of max. 30m.
5.10 Sum pit of suitable size to hold water for 5 minutes discharge has to be
constructed within the substation boundary at suitable site(s) as per HVPNL
drawings & directions of Executive Engineer/Civil Works Division.
5.11 The drainage scheme and associated drawings shall be developed by the
successful bidder and shall be got approved from HVPNL before
commencement of work.
5.12 Two non clog pumps (of reputed make) of suitable capacity (depending upon
maximum discharge and capable of lifting particle size 65mm) shall be
provided at sump pit-cum-pump chamber by the contractor without any extra
cost.
6.0 RAINWATER HARVESTING
6.1 In addition to drainage of rainwater in accordance with clause 5.0 of section

civil of Technical specification, the contractor shall provide rainwater
harvesting system also one each for control room building and yard.
Rainwater harvesting shall not be done if the depth of water table is within 8.0
m from finished ground level.
6.2 Rainwater harvesting shall be done by providing two number recharge

structures with bore wells. The recharge structures shall be suitably located
within the sub-station. Branch drains from the main drain carrying rainwater
from entire area constructed in accordance with clause 5.0, shall be
connected to the recharge structure.

262
6.3 The internal diameter of recharge shaft shall not be less than 3/4.5 meter (as
applicable) and shall be provided with 230mm thick lining of brick work upto a
depth of 2.0 meter from ground level and 345mm thick brickwork below 2.0
meter depth. The brickwork shall be constructed with cement mortar 1:6
(1cement: 6 coarse sand). The overall depth of shaft shall be 5.0 meter below
invert level of drain. The shaft shall be covered with RCC slab for a live load
of 300kg per sq m. Two openings of size 0.7x0.7 meter shall be provided in
the RCC cover slab. An iron cover made of 5mm thick chequerred plate with
hinges shall be provided on the openings. Galvanized M.S. rungs of 20mm
diameter at spacing of 300mm shall be provided in the wall of shaft below the
opening in the RCC slab to facilitate cleaning of shaft.
6.4 A 300 mm diameter bore well shall be drilled in the centre of the shaft. The
depth of bore well shall be 5.0 meter more than the depth of sub soil water or
as per directions of the Executive Engineer/Civil Works Division.
6.5 A 150 mm dia. class 3 PVC pipe conforming to IS 4985-1981 with latest
revision shall be lowered in the bore well keeping bail plug towards bottom of
bore well. The pipe shall have 1.58 mm holes for 4.0 meter length starting
from 1.0 meter from bottom of bore well. Holes of 3.0 mm dia shall be
provided for a length of 2.0 meter starting from the bottom level of coarse
sand and down wards. The overall length of pipe shall be equal to total depth
of bore well plus depth of shaft.
6.6 Gravel of size 3mm to 6mm shall be filled around 150 dia PVC pipe in the
bore well. The shaft shall be filled with 500mm thick layers each from the
bottom of shaft with boulders of size 50mm to 150mm, gravel of size 5mm to
10mm coarse sand having particle size 1.5mm to 2.0 mm and boulders of
size not less than 200mm respectively.
7.0 ROAD, CULVERTS AND PCC PAVEMENT/PARKING:
Latest specifications as adopted by HVPNL for construction of roads and

pavement shall be followed. Finished top (crest) of roads shall be as per
tender drawings & levels shall match with the levels fixed by the HVPNL.
SCOPE:
7.1 This clause covers the supply of labour and material for executing the work for
the road & design, engineering, supply of labour and material for providing
culverts within the sub station fencing including approach road from main
Public/Village road to the sub-station main entry gate(s) as contained in the
General Electric layout (GELO)/Civil layout (CLO) or as per requirement of
the Sub-Station covered under the said scheme.
7.2 The rates quoted shall be for constructions of roads as per attached drawings, complete in all respect (except earth filling).
Wherever earth cutting is involved no extra payment shall be made for it. However, layout of roads shall be as per General Electric
layout (GELO)/Civil layout plan of the Sub-Station.
7.3 Adequate turning space for vehicles shall be provided and bend radii may be set accordingly.
7.4 All substation roads shall be constructed to permit transportation of all heavy
equipment. The main road leading to control room/switch yard/colony shall
263
have a minimum 6m width with shoulder on either side (Refer drawing
HCD/SK-181). The roads within the sub-station shall be as per General
Electric layout (GELO)/Civil layout (CLO) and as per above referred drawing.
The shoulders/footpath/side-walk should be provided with pre-cast kerbs on
either side of the road. The top edge of the kerbs shall be battered. The kerb
stones with top 20cm wide shall be laid with their length running parallel to the
road edge, true in line and gradient at a distance of 30cm from the road edge
to allow for the channel and shall project about 12.5cm above the latter. The
channel stones with top 30cm wide shall be laid in position in camber with
finished road surface and with sufficient slope towards the road gully
chamber. The joints of kerb and channel stones shall be staggered and shall
not be more than 10mm. Wherever specified all joints shall be filled with
mortar 1:6 (1 cement: 6 coarse sand) and pointed with mortar 1:2 (1 cement:
2 fine sand) which shall be cured for 7 days. The kerb should be painted as
per directions of Executive Engineer/Civil Works Division.
The necessary drainage openings of specified sizes shall be made through

the kerb as per drawings or as directed by the Executive Engineer/ Civil
Works Division for connecting to storm water drains.
Top of the shoulders/footpath/side-walk shall be provided with 20mm thick

precast chequred tiles made in ordinary grey cement without chips laid on
bed of 100mm coarse sand, PCC 1:8:16 (100mm thick) and 20mm thick bed
of cement coarse sand mortar 1:3 with neat cement slurry between joints as
per PWD specifications.
7.5 Adequate provision shall be made for road drainage.
7.6 The rate of camber on a cement concrete surfacing shall be 1 in 72 unless otherwise provided.
7.7 The base sub-grade is to be consolidated with power road roller of 8 Tons to 12 Tons (Roller shall pass a minimum of 5 runs on
sub-grade). The roller shall run over the sub-grade till the soil is evenly and densely consolidated and behaves as elastic mass.
All undulations in the surface that develop due to rolling shall be made good with quarry spoils and sub grade is re-rolled.
7.8 The coarse aggregate used shall be crushed or broken stone or any naturally occurring aggregates such as kankar, laterites of
suitable quality shall conform to the physical requirements as given below:
Los Angeles Abrasion value (Max) 30% (IS: 2386 (Part-IV))

Aggregate Impact Value (Max) 30% (IS: 2386 (Part-IV) or IS: 5640)
Flakiness Index (Max) 10% (IS: 2386 (Part-I)
The crushed or broken stone shall be hard, durable and free from excess flat,
longated, soft and disintegrated particles, the 100mm thick & 75mm thick.
Soling aggregates shall conform to following grading respectively.
% BY WT. PASSING
GRADE SIZE SIEVE DESIGNATION
95 to 45 125mm 100
90mm 90-100
63mm 25-60
45mm 0-15
22.4 mm 0-5
63 to 45 90mm 100
63mm 90-100
53mm 25-75
264
45mm 0-15
22.4mm 0-5
13.2 13.2 mm 100

11.2 mm 95-100
5.6mm 15-35
180 micron 0.10
7.9 The base shall be constructed, to have as nearly as practicable a uniform bearing power throughout its entire width and to
conform to the line, grade and cross-section, shown in the drawing enclosed with the document. Where existing road is to be
widened every precaution shall be taken to ensure that there would be no differential settlement between the old surface and the
newly added strip.
7.10 The base course shall be extended on either side to at least 15 cm (for switch yard roads) beyond the edge of the concrete pavement.
The base course shall be prepared at least 2 days in advance of concreting.
7.11 The side forms shall be made of metal of approved section having a thickness not less than 5 mm and shall have a depth equal to the
specified thickness of the slab. They shall be provided with an efficient locking device to ensure continuity of line and level
through joints and with steel pins to hold them in position. Building up of forms shall not be permitted. Flexible or curved forms
of proper radius shall be used for curves of 30 meters radius or less. Forms shall not deflect more than 6mm. when tested as a
simple beam with a span of 3 meters and a load equal to that which is expected upon them during construction. Forms shall be at
least 7.5 cm wide at the base and shall be free from wrap, bends or kinks. The top of the form shall not vary from a 3 meters
straight edge by more than 3 mm at any point and the side of the form by more than 6 mm.
7.12 The base under the form shall be compacted and cut to grade so that the forms, when set, shall be uniformly supported for their entire
length and at the specified elevation. Surface found to be below established grade at the form line shall be filled to grade in lifts
of 12mm or less and thoroughly re-levelled or tamped.
7.13 Forms shall be set over length presenting 2 days work in advance of the point where concrete is being proposed to be placed and shall
be cleaned and oiled prior to the placing of concrete. Forms shall remain in place for at least 12 hours after placing the concrete.
If the air temperature is below 100C at any time during 12 hours period from the time the concrete is placed, forms shall not be
removed until 30 hours after placing of the concrete. While using the device, care shall be taken not to damage the edge of the
concrete or of the form. Forms shall be cleaned for reuse immediately after striking. They shall be handled with care and in no
circumstances shall be dropped or struck with heavy hammers to remove adhering concrete.
7.14 After the base has been approved by the Executive Engineer/Civil Works Division, it shall be sprinkled with water and kept moist to
prevent the absorption of water from the concrete. If so required by the Executive Engineer/ Civil Works Division, it shall be
saturated with water previous night for not less than 6 hours previous to placing of the concrete. The method of sprinkling of
water shall not be such as to form mud or pools of water. No concrete shall be placed around man-holes for other structures until
they have been brought to the required grade and camber.
7.15 The concrete to be placed shall conform to M-20 grade design mix. For small works, nominal mix of 1:1 :3 may be used for which
specific approval shall be obtained by the successful bidder. The concrete shall be distributed to such depth that when
consolidated and finished, the slab thickness obtained is equal at all points and no surface is below the specified level at any
point. The un-compacted concrete will be placed keeping the surface slightly higher than the top of the forms; the amount of
surcharge depending upon the consistency of the concrete.
7.16 The concrete shall be deposited on the prepared base for the required width, in such a manner as to require as little re-handling as
possible. Concrete shall be placed at the working face as provided in the code. Necessary hand-spreading shall be done with
shovels and not with rakes.
7.17 For large works, concrete shall be compacted by vibrators. However, for small works hand-tamping shall be allowed at the discretion
of the Executive Engineer/Civil Works Division.
7.18 The slab is laid continuously in strips/alternate between longitudinal joints. Ends of slabs should be painted with bitumen before the
intermediate bays are filled in.
7.19 After belting and as soon as surplus water, if any, has risen to the surface, the pavement shall be given a broom finish, with an
approved steel or fibre broom not less than 50cm wide. The broom shall be pulled gently over the surface of the pavement from
edge to edge. Adjacent strokes shall be slightly overlapped. Brooming shall be perpendicular to the centre line of the pavement
and so executed that the corrugations thus produced will be uniform in character and width, and not more than 1.5mm deep.
Brooming shall be completed before the concrete reaches such as stage that the surface is likely to be torn or unduly roughened
by the operation. The broomed surface shall be free from porous or rough spots, irregularities depression etc.
7.20 Immediately after the final set has taken place, the surface of the finished concrete shall be kept covered with moist gunny bags for the
first 24 hours. The gunny bags shall then be removed and the grooves in the transverse expansion and contraction joints shall be
sealed temporarily. The surface shall then be cured for at least 14 days by pounding to a depth of about 7.5 cm or by covering
with not less than 7.5cm layer of wet earth. The earth cover shall be kept wet continuously during the whole curing period. At
the expiry of the curing period, the surface shall be cleaned of all earth etc.

265
7.21 Forms shall not be removed from freshly placed concrete until it has set for at least 24 hours. They shall be so carefully removed and
in such a manner that no damage will be done to the edge of the pavement. After the forms have been removed, the ends of all
joints shall be cleaned, after which the sides of the slab shall be covered with earth to the level of the top of the slab.
7.22 The finished concrete road shall not be opened to traffic till after the expiry of 4 weeks and till all the joints have been sealed, as
specified above.
7.23 The expansion joints shall not be more than 20mm. For filling the joints, either pre-moulded or poured types of filers as described
below may be used.
(a) Sand 60%; asphalt 30%; saw-dust 7%; cement 3%.
(b) 80kg of hot bitumen; 1 kg cement; 0.25 cum of coarse sand.
7.24 Joints should not be sealed while the concrete is still green or when it is
damp. The sealing compound shall be heated until it is fluid enough to pour
easily into the joint. Rubberised compositions shall not be heated above 1800.
Preparation of base, lying of concrete/joints etc. shall conform to the Indian
Standard Specifications.
7.25 The finished surface shall be uniform and conform to the lines, grades and
typical X-section shown in the approved drawing
7.26 Cement concrete paving/parking shall be provided on front, rear & sides, if
any of Switch House Building as per drawing no. HCD/SK-172. The concrete
blocks shall be of size 46. The blocks shall be casted in situ alternatively
but after 48hrs. No gap is to be left between the panels. Top surface be left
rough but should be in level. Suitable slope of earth for drainage of rainwater
be provided.
7.27 RCC pipe culvert of suitable size shall be provided at appropriate location(s)
under the approach road(s) leading to substation. The culverts shall be of one
or multiple pipes (600 or 750mm i/d or higher size NP-4 class) as per
drainage requirement National/State Highway Authority. The exact location
and no. of culverts shall be decided by the Executive Engineer/Civil Works
Division. The design of culvert shall be as per IRC standards for class A
loading. The design data, contours and details required for design of culvert
shall be submitted by the successful bidder along with the design/drawing to
HVPNL for approval.

266
8.0 TRANSFORMER FOUNDATION
8.1 TRANSFORMER FOUNDATION (100 MVA):
As per scope 100MVA T/F is proposed to be installed. However, the plinth of

the Transformer shall be designed assuming placement of 160MVA T/F for
future use. For this purpose, the Design Dte. of HVPN shall issue necessary
parameters which will be supplied to the successful bidder for suitable design.
The transformer foundation plinth for placing the transformer shall be of RCC
having minimum Grade M-20 laid on base concrete (1:4:8) of minimum
thickness 100mm. Foundation shall be designed for the equipment load
requirements of transformer including impact load equivalent to 15% of total
transformer load including oil etc. or total Jacking Load whichever is more.
The top of plinth i.e. top of rail level shall match with height of tractor-trailer
used for transporting the transformer (minimum 750-mm from top of road).
The plinth shall extend upto edge of road for perfect movement from trailer to
plinth and vice-versa. Suitable arrangement for shifting the transformer from
trailer like jacking etc. wherever required shall be made in plinth and in front
of plinth on the road.
The space between the rail tracts of the transformer plinth, if any shall be
suitably filled with compacted sand and 50-mm thick PCC of grade 1:2:4 laid
on 75-mm thick base concrete (1:5:10) placed over compacted earth filling.
The top of PCC shall be minimum 300-mm above the formation level of
switchyard. Adequate drainage outlets shall be provided and necessary
slopes given to drain off rain water/oil.
The deep beam/wall having rails at top shall be of minimum thickness

as 300 mm and suitably restrained at ends by beam/wall of same
thickness.
The rails shall be fresh, first quality 52-kg/meter medium manganese steel as
per Indian railway specification T-12-64 and its subsequent revisions. Suitable
arrangement shall be made to maintain the rail gauge.
Suitable foundations shall be provided for all auxiliary equipment of the

transformer like radiators, fan supports etc. as required. The work of
Transformer foundation shall be taken in hand only after approval of transfer
equipment drawing and the transformer plinth foundation shall match the
equipment drawing.
For NIFPES fire fighting system, the successful bidder shall develop design &
foundation drawings as per manufacturer drawing(s) as approved by Design
(electrical) wing of HVPNL and submit the same for approval of HVPNL.
8.2 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION
The cable trench to transformer shall be as per trench layout plan. The cables
leading to various components of transformer shall pass through GI pipes
supported suitably in transformer pit.
9.0 CABLE & PIPE TRENCHES

267
SCOPE
9.1 The contractor shall construct various sizes of cable trenches proposed in the
switch yard and inside the switch house building to carry the control cables
etc. The layout and size of cable trenches shall be as per approved Floor
plan/trench layout plan.
9.2 Trenches shall be reinforced cement concrete of M-20 grade concrete. MS

angle 50x50x6mm welded with GI flat 50x6mm 75mm long @1 meter c/c to
hold the angle shall be provided on top of the trench walls for protection of the
edges.
9.3 RCC cable trenches and precast removable RCC covers enclosed by suitable
GI angles for edge protection in respect of switch yard trenches (with lifting
arrangement) shall be designed to withstand self weight of top slab +
concentrated load of 150kg at center of span on each panel.
9.4 6mm thick chequred plates with lifting arrangement the bottom of which shall
be welded with MS Angle 65x65x6 mm for holding the plates shall be
provided over the indoor cable trenches.
9.5 Medium weight channels (ISMC) of 75x40mm shall be provided @ 600mm

across the indoor cable trenches to support the chequred plates. The length
of chequred plates shall be 600mm except at the ends/bends.
9.6 The cables shall be placed on hard wood supported on steel racks of MS
Angles 50x50x6 (grouted in the RCC walls) spaced 1.0-m c/c. The ends of
the horizontal MS angles should be fixed with suitable angle (by welding at
900) to hold the cables. All the racks (MS angles, flats etc.) shall be
galvanized (conforming to IS 2629-1985 and IS 4759-1968 and withstand
tests as per IS 2633-1986). The galvanizing shall be done after fabrication
work is complete. However for touch-ups of damaged spots, cold galvanizing
be done with paints/sprays such as ZINKOTE -20 Zinc rich paint or Zinc metal
spray after cleaning the damaged spots of rust, oil, grease, dirt, moisture,
water etc.
9.7 The top of trenches shall be kept at least 25mm above the gravel level. The
top of cable trench shall be such that the surface rain water does not enter
the trench.
9.8 All metal parts inside the trench shall be connected to the earthing system.
9.9 Trench wall shall not foul with the foundations. Cable trenches shall be
blocked at the ends (if required for future extensions) with brick masonry 1:6
in cement sand mortar and this brick masonry work shall be plastered from
both sides with cement sand mortar 1:4.
9.10 The trench bed shall have a slope of 1/500 along the run & 1/250
perpendicular to the run. In case straight length exceeds 30m, suitable
expansion joint shall be provided at appropriate space. The expansion joint
shall run through vertical wall and base of trench. All expansion joints shall be
provided with approved quality PVC water stops of approx. 230x5 mm size.
268
9.11 Suitable box culvert (Single span or multi spans) shall be provided for any
road crossing. The box culvert shall extend 1.5 m on each side of road and
shall have 230-mm wide, 500mm high brick parapet wall at ends. If required,
the bed of trench on both sides of culvert shall have to be lowered in slope, in
1.5 m length to meet the bed of culvert.
9.12 Necessary sumps shall be provided at suitable places as per direction of EIC
and each sump shall be provided with pumps of 1 HP capacity with all
accessories shall be supplied for pumping out water collected in the cable
trenches. Cable trenches shall not be used as storm water drains. Man hole
shall be provided at interval of not more than 30 meters. This clause shall be
applicable as per site requirement.
10.0 FOUNDATION/RCC CONSTRUCTION (GENERAL)

10.1 Work covered under this clause comprises the design, engineering, supply and construction of foundations and other RCC
constructions for switchyard structures, equipment supports, trenches, drains, jacking pad, crane hoisting, pulling block, control
cables, bus supports, transformers marshalling kiosks, auxiliary equipment system buildings or for any other equipment or service and
any other foundation required to complete the work. This clause is as well applicable to other RCC constructions.
10.2 In case of overlapping of foundations in switchyard area, deeper foundation shall be constructed first. The foundations resting on
filled up soil, the fill material under foundation/trenches shall be such that the maximum pressure from the footing transferred through
fill material will not exceed the allowable soil bearing pressure of original undistributed soil.
10.3 In case earth filling is involved due to high fixation of formation level, all foundation shall rest below virgin ground level and the
minimum depth of all foundations below virgin ground level excluding lean concrete shall not be less than 1000mm.
10.4 All the properties of concrete regarding its strength under compression, tension, shear, punching and bond strength etc. as well as
workmanship will conform to IS: 456.
10.5 The concrete used as lean concrete or base concrete under the structure/equipment/trench/walls etc. foundations shall be 1:4:8;
minimum 100 mm thick or more as per drawing (in case thickness is mentioned less than 100mm, it shall be considered as
100mm). The aggregate size shall be 20mm nominal for 100mm thickness and 40mm nominal for thickness more than 100mm.
Base concrete shall be well compacted. The top surface of base concrete shall be leveled before placing the reinforcement.
During excavation if excavation exceeds than the required depth or if any loose pocket of earth is met below the base then the
loose earth shall be removed or excavation depth be increased till normal hard soil is met as per satisfaction of Executive
Engineer/Civil Works Division. This extra depth shall be filled with lean concrete. No extra shall be payable an account of this
extra excavation and lean concrete.
10.6 If the site is sloppy, the foundation height will be adjusted to maintain the exact level of the top of structures to compensate such
slopes.
10.7 The Switch Yard foundations shall be 100mm above the finished ground level or as per the manufacturers design. The plinth
level of the control room building shall be 600mm minimum above the finished ground level. Based on the general topography
of the surrounding area HVPNL shall, however, fix the plinth level of building.
10.8 The design and detailing of foundations shall be done based on the approved soil data and sub-soil conditions as well as for all
possible critical loads and the combinations thereof. The spread or pile foundation may be required based on soil/sub-soil
conditions and superimposed loads.
10.9 The cement concrete used shall conformed to IS:456:2000. Concrete of minimum grade M-20 (irrespective of any grade
mentioned on the drawings) shall be used for all structural load bearing members. The mix-design (conforming to IS-
Standards) shall be done prior to start of work, as per specifications, got approved from HVPNL and shall be used for
the construction, provided there is no change in the source and the quality of materials. The source of materials shall be
intimated to the HVPNL and shall be ensured that Mix design is with the materials from intimated source only and it is
not changed during construction. In case source of material changes or quality of material differs from the earlier
approved parameters the Mix design shall be done again.
10.10 The Coarse aggregate used shall be of 20 mm graded or two types of single size aggregate mixed in some fixed ratio to have
graded 20mm aggregate. The Coarse aggregate shall conform to IS 383.
10.11 Grading of Fine aggregate shall conform to Zone-II of Table - 4 of IS: 383 and shall be free from deleterious materials.

269
10.12 The environmental exposure condition considered for mix design shall be MILD.
10.13 For Mix-design, the degree of quality control shall be considered as FAIR.
10.14 The Water cement ratio shall be minimum 0.50 and maximum 0.55.
10.15 The minimum slump shall be 25mm and maximum 75mm.
10.16 For Volumetric use of ingredients for concrete mix, the contractor shall intimate the size of measuring boxes along with
the Mix-design.
10.17 Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) of Grade 43 conforming to IS: 8112 manufactured by major cement manufacturer shall be
used, as mentioned in FQP.
10.18 The water used for preparing concrete and for curing purpose shall be fresh, clean and free from oil, acids and alkalis, organic
materials or suspended or other deleterious substances. Saltish or brackish water shall not be used. Water used for construction &
curing etc. shall be conforming to requirements of IS: 456 Clause 5.4. Contractor shall arrange at his own cost sufficient
quantity and good quality water for construction and curing and other purposes. In case good quality water is available
at existing sub-stations, it can be used by the successful contractor free of cost (also refer clause 3.1).
10.19 No admixtures shall be used except water proofing cement additives conforming to IS 2645 with the approval of the HVPNL.
10.20 Reinforcement steel (including TMT) Bars manufactured by main producers or their authorized re-rollers in India or abroad
shall be used and certificates in this regard shall be submitted by the Contractor to the entire satisfaction of the HVPNL. The
steel used shall conform to IS: 1786 for deformed and cold twisted bars. Required grade of steel shall be Fe-415. All
reinforcement shall be clean and free from loose mill scale, dust, loose rust and coats of paint, oil or other coating, which may
destroy or reduce bond with concrete. Reinforcement bars should be fresh. Bidder shall supply, fabricate and place
reinforcement to shapes and dimensions as indicated on the drawings or as required to carry out the intent of drawings and
specifications. Adequate nos. of chairs, spacers of required size shall be provided to ensure the proper placement of
reinforcement. The reinforcement bars crossing one another should be tied together at every intersection with two strands of
annealed steel wires 0.9 to 1.6 mm thick twisted and tied to make the skeleton of the steel work rigid so that the reinforcement
does not get displaced during concrete placement.
10.21 All the reinforcement steel should be placed/ stacked at site store on raised (at least 0.5 metre from near surroundings)
pucca/brick platform or reinforcement steel should be placed on MS/GI sheets. The reinforcement steel after stacking should be
covered with Tarpaulin to avoid corrosion. Immediately before concreting (portion of reinforcement to be embedded in concrete)
shall be painted with cement slurry after removing any rust/corrosion/any other foreign material. Overlaps in more than 30% of
bars will not be allowed at a section. Fabricated Reinforcement bars shall be placed in position as shown in the drawing or as
directed by Executive Engineer/Civil Works Division.
10.22 The bars crossing one another shall be tied together at every intersection with two strands of annealed steel wires 0.9 to 1.6mm
dia. twisted and tied to make the skeleton of steel work rigid so that reinforcement does not get displaced during placement of
concrete.
10.23 Two types of steel shall not be used.
10.24 All the foundation bolts used for equipment foundations & for main gantry tower foundations shall be galvanized.
10.25 The foundation bolts shall be embedded in concrete during concreting and no grout holes shall be left for this purpose.
10.26 Excavation shall extend minimum 150 mm around foundation (from RCC portion and not from lean concrete).
10.27 Proper shuttering & shoring shall be provided to support the excavated earth face to avoid falling of earth. No extra charges shall
be admissible for the removal of fallen earth in the pit, once excavated.
10.28 Design and detailing of foundations shall be done based on the approved soil data and sub soil conditions as well as for all
possible critical loads and the combination thereof. The raft/spread footing/pile foundations as may be required based on soil/sub
soil condition and superimposed loads shall be provided.
10.29 If pile foundations are adopted, the same shall be cast-in-situ bored or pre cast or under reamed type as per relevant parts of
IS:2911. Only RCC piles shall be provided. To establish the pile design capacity, necessary initial load tests shall be carried out
by the successful bidder at his cost. Only after the design capacities of piles have been established, the successful bidder shall
take up the job of piling. Routine tests for the piles shall also be conducted as per IS:2911. All the testing work shall be planned
in such a way that these shall not cause any delay in project completion.
11.0 MIXING, PLACING AND COMPACTION OF CONCRETE

270
11.1 The concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer. The mixer shall comply
with IS: 1791 & 12119. The mixer shall be fitted with water measuring
devices.
11.2 Mixing shall be continued until there is uniform distribution of material and the
mix is uniform in colour and consistency. If there is segregation after
unloading from mixer, the concrete should be re-mixed, but in no case the
mixing shall be done close to the foundation, or place of work but in case it is
not possible the concrete may be mixed at the nearest convenient place.
From mixer, concrete shall be put on pucca platform or steel troughs, which
shall be leak proof to avoid any loss of water/slurry. The concrete shall be
transported from the place of mixing to the place of final deposit as rapidly as
practicable, which shall prevent the segregation before any setting
commences.
11.3 Proper shuttering shall be used for the construction of all type of PCC/RCC
works. Shuttering shall be rigidly tightened so that there are no distortions in
the shape. Shuttering shall be made sufficiently strong to with stand all the
loads and vibrations. Vibrators shall be used to ensure thorough compaction.
11.4 After the shuttering has been removed, if the concrete surface is found to be
slightly damaged, same shall be repaired with rich cement sand mortar to the
satisfaction of the HVPNL's representative before the foundation pits are
back-filled.
12.0 CURING
The concrete after setting for 24 hours shall be cured by keeping the concrete
wet continuously for a period of 10 days (minimum) after laying. The
foundation be back filled with selected good earth free from harmful salts,
organic material, sprinkled with necessary amount of water and well
consolidated in layers not exceeding 200 mm of consolidated thickness after
a minimum period of 72 hours and thereafter both backfilled earth and
exposed top shall be kept wet for the remainder of the prescribed curing time.
The uncovered concrete portion above the backfilled earth or vertical columns
etc. shall be kept wet by providing empty cement jute bags dipped in water
fully wrapped around the concrete for curing and ensuring that the bags are
kept wet by the frequent pouring of water on them. In case Portland
Pozzolona cement has been used, curing period shall be increased by
Executive Engineer/ Civil Works Division.
13.0 DISMANTLING
The contractor wherever required, shall carry out dismantling & disposal of
PCC/RCC upto a lead of 15 Km or as directed by the Executive Engineer/Civil
Works Division, to make space for the proposed structures in the new
proposed bays of the Sub- Station.
14.0 DESIGN
14.1 All the foundations except walls of switch house building etc. shall be of Reinforced Cement Concrete. The design &
construction of RCC structures shall be carried out as per IS:456-2000 using minimum grade of concrete as M-20. Higher grade of
concrete than specified above may be used by the contractor without any additional cost to the HVPNL with proper mix design.

271
14.2 Limit state method of design shall be adopted unless specified otherwise in the specification/IS Codes.
14.3 For design and construction of steel-concrete composite beams IS: 11384 shall be followed.
14.4 For detailing of reinforcement, IS: 2502 and SP: 34 shall be followed. Two layers of reinforcement (on inner and outer shall be
provided for wall & slab sections) having thickness of 150 mm and above. Clear cover to reinforcement towards the earth face shall be
minimum 50 mm and for other components, same shall be as per IS: 456.
14.5 The procedure used for design of the foundations shall be the most critical loading combination of steel structure and or
equipment and/or superstructure and other conditions, which produces the maximum stresses in the foundation or the foundation
component and as per the relevant IS Codes of foundation design. The contractor, for approval of drawings shall submit detailed
design calculations along with drawings.
14.6 Designer shall consider sub-soil water pressure that may be encountered, following relevant standard strictly.
14.7 Necessary protection to the foundation work, if required shall be provided to take care of any special requirements for aggressive
alkaline soil, black cotton soil or any other type of soil which is detrimental/harmful to the concrete foundations without extra cost to
the HVPNL.
14.8 RCC column shall be provided with rigid connection at the base.
14.9 All sub-structures shall be checked for sliding and overturning stability during both construction and operating conditions for
various combinations of loads. Factor of safety for these cases shall be taken as mentioned in relevant IS Codes or as stipulated
elsewhere in the specifications. For checking against overturning weight of soil vertically above footing shall be taken and inverted
frustum of pyramid of earth on the foundation should not be considered. In case of trench passing above the footing base then for over
turning only dead weight of trench shall be considered.
14.10 Earth pressure for all underground structures shall be calculated using coefficient of earth pressure at rest, co-efficient
of active or passive earth pressure (whichever is applicable). However, for the design of sub-structures of any underground enclosures,
earth pressure at rest shall be considered.
14.11 In addition to earth pressure and ground water pressure etc. a surcharge load of 2T/sq. m shall be considered for the
design of all underground structures including channels, sumps, tanks, trenches, substructure of any underground hollow enclosure
etc. for the vehicular traffic in the vicinity of the structure or otherwise.
14.12 Following conditions shall be considered for the design of water tank in pumps house, channels, sumps and trenches
and other underground structures.
a) Full water pressure from inside and no earth pressure and ground water pressure & surcharge pressure from outside, (applicable
only to structures which are liable to be filled up with water or any other liquid).
b) Full earth pressure, surcharge pressure from outside and no water pressure from inside.
c) For any water retaining structure or any member submerged in water the minimum grade and concrete shall be M-25.
d) Design shall also be checked against buoyancy due to the ground water during construction and maintenance stages. Minimum
factor of safety of 1.5 against buoyancy shall be ensured ignoring the super imposed loadings.
14.13 Base slab of the any underground enclosure like water storage tank shall also be designed for empty condition during
construction and maintenance stages with maximum ground water table (GWT) at 2.0 m. below ground level. Minimum factor of
safety of 1.5 against buoyancy shall be ensured ignoring the super-imposed loading. Intermediate dividing piers of such enclosures
shall be designed considering water in one pump sump only & the other pumps sump being empty for maintenance.
14.14 The foundations shall be proportioned so that the estimated total and differential movements of the foundations are
greater than the movements that the structure or equipment is designed to accommodate.
14.15 The foundations of transformer/reactor and circuit breaker shall be of block type foundation. Minimum reinforcement
shall be governed by IS: 2974 and IS:456-2000.

272
14.16 The tower and equipment foundations shall be checked for a factor of safety of 2.2 for normal condition and 1.65 for
short circuit condition against sliding, overturning and pullout. The same factors shall be used as partial safety factor over loads in
limit state design also.
15.0 OTHER FOUNDATIONS
15.1 All foundations shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of the
relevant parts of latest revisions of Indian Standards IS: 456 and other
relevant Indian Standards.
15.2 Type of foundation system i.e. isolated footing or raft etc. shall be decided
based on the load intensity and soil strata.
16.0 BUILDINGS
16.1 GENERAL SCOPE
The scope of construction of switch house building or any other building shall
include providing anti-termite treatment, plinth protection DPC of building,
sanitary, water supply, triple layered Sintex/Diplast polyvinyl tanks,
electrification including supply and providing of 2T split high wall mounted
ACs, ceiling fans, T-5, 28W 4ft. long CFL tubes with fittings, modular
switches, boxes, electric wire, flooring, finishing items including acrylic
emulsion (interior) and whether proof (exterior acrylic paint), anodized
aluminum doors/windows/ventilators frames provided with 5.0mm thick glass,
steel jail, fire doors, indoor cable trenches with covers in control room/battery
room/ACDB/DCDB rooms etc. etc. complete in all respect as per HVPNL
drawing(s). Scope shall also cover any other item(s) required for the
completion of building which has/have not been mentioned in the specification
or in the drawings but are essential for completion of the building.
The width of electrical room and passage/corridor of 220kV control
room building shall be 9.23M and 2M respectively. The dimensions in
the architectural and structural drawings if mentioned as 8.23M and 3M
these may be amended accordingly. The drawings require changes on
account of above shall be issued to the successful bidder during
construction.
HVPNL reserves the right to alter the finishing schedule and specifications.
Such changes will have no additional financial implication whatsoever on
HVPNL. Further, it is informed to the bidders that the drawings for
construction of 220 and 132kV Substation switch house buildings is being
constructed for the 1st time, therefore, changes if any in the drawings issued
with the bid documents shall be carried out by the bidder at no additional cost
to HVPNL.
Rate for control room building shall be paid as per actual on per sqft. basis.
16.2 STORM WATER DRAINAGE FOR ALL BUILDINGS

The building drains shall be provided for the collection of storm water from the
roofs. This water shall be collected in junction boxes and these boxes shall
drain to the main drainage system of the station.

273
PVC rain water down comers as mentioned in clause 16.15 shall be provided
to drain off the rain water from the roof. These shall be suitably concealed
with masonry work or cement concrete jalis or cladding material. The number
and size of down comers shall be governed by IS: 1742 and IS: 2527.
All drains inside the buildings shall have minimum 40mm thick grafting covers
and in areas where heavy equipment loads would be coming, pre-cast RCC
covers shall be provided in place of steel grating.
For all buildings, suitable arrangement for draining out water collected from
equipment blow down, leakage, floor washings fire fighting etc. shall be
provided for each floor.
16.3 MATERIALS
The brief requirement regarding various materials to be used for construction
of building are detailed below or specified in respective drawings. However,
materials not specifically mentioned in the specifications/drawings, the same
shall also conform to the relevant IS codes and got approved from the HVPNL
before being used. The contractor shall remove from site any material not
conforming of IS Standards or rejected by the representative of
HVPNL/Executive Engineer/Civil Works Division.
16.4 BRICKS AND TILES
The bricks used shall be first Class bricks of nominal size (230x110x70) mm
so that every four courses shall measure 30.48 cm in height. A tolerance upto
80mm in length 40mm in width and 40mm in thickness/height shall be
permitted per 20 bricks. The bricks shall be made from good brick earth free
from efflorescence/kankar, thoroughly burnt and uniform deep red colour,
regular in size and shape with parallel faces and sharp corners, uniform in
colour, free from flaws etc, and shall have all the qualities of a good brick.
Bricks and tiles shall have ringing sound when struck with each other.
Bricks shall have a minimum crushing strength of 105 kg/per sq. cm and shall
not absorb water more than 20% of its own dry weight after 24 hours
immersion in cold water.
For tile terracing and tile facing, size of tile shall be (230x110x30) mm having
permissible tolerance of IS Standards for length, width & height 40mm.
16.5 SAND (FOR MASONRY MORTAR & PLASTER)
Sand for masonry work and plaster shall preferably consist of natural sand,
However crushed stone sand or crushed gravel sand or a combination of any
of them be used. Sand shall be hard, durable, clear and free from harmful
impurities like iron pigments, mica salts, coal or other organic impurities.
Grading of sand for use in masonry mortar shall be conforming to IS: 2116
and for use in plaster shall conform to IS: 1542 tabulated as below:
For mortar For Plaster

IS Sieve Designation
Percent passing by mass
9.0 mm - 100
274
4.75 mm 100 95 to 100
2.36 mm 90 to 100 95 to 100
1.18 mm 70 to 100 90 to 100
600 micron 40 to 100 80 to 100
300 micron 5 to 70 20 to 65
150 micron 0 to 15 0 to 50
The maximum quantities of clay, fine silt, fine dust and organic impurities shall
not exceed limits described in IS: 2386 (Part II). Clay, fine dust and silt in
natural sand or crushed gravel sand or crushed stone sand not more then 5%
by mass.
16.6 BRICK WORK
All brickwork shall strictly be according the specifications and notes specified
in the drawings. All bricks shall be soaked in stacks by spraying clean water
at regular intervals to keep them wet to the satisfaction of Executive Engineer/
Civil Works Division. Each brick shall be set (with frog upwards) with bed and
vertical joints completely filled with mortar. Thickness of mortar joint shall be
6.25 mm and shall not be more than 9.4 mm. For exposed brickwork, bed
joint will be 7.81 mm thick and vertical joint 6.28 mm.
All brickwork shall be true in plumb, straight edge, for exposed brickwork or
face work bricks shall be selected for purpose. The face joints shall be duly
racked to minimum depth of 13 mm when mortar is green for providing key to
plaster or pointing. The mortar used for brick work/ plasterwork shall be
machine mixed only.
All fixtures, doors/windows/CI pipes, outlet for water, hold fasts etc. which are
required to be built/laid in brickwork shall be embedded simultaneously. Each
day work done shall not be more than 1m in height and no portion of the work
shall be left more than 1m lower than the other. The height of brick courses
shall be kept uniform.
All the half brick thick walls shall be provided with 2 numbers - 6 mm bars at every fourth layer.
In case of difference in the natural ground level and formation level, payment on account of additional brick work in building(s)
shall not be paid extra. The contractor may, therefore, visit the site before quoting rates for construction of Switch house building,
security hut, Pump house etc.
16.7 DAMP PROOF COURSE
On outer walls horizontal DPC shall be provided at level with plinth protection
and on inner face vertical DPC 20 mm thick, shall be provided. On all inner
walls horizontal DPC shall be provided at floor/plinth level.
Horizontal DPC shall consist of cement concrete (1:1:3) 50 mm thick. Edge

of DPC shall be straight, even and vertical. It shall be cured for at least 7
days, after which it shall be allowed to dry. Vertical DPC shall consist of two
layers of plaster (1:3) with total thickness of 20 mm. Hot bitumen shall be
applied over dried up surface in thin layer.
16.8 PAINTING, ACRYLIC EMULSION (INTERIOR)/WEATHER PROOF

ACRYLIC EMULSION (EXTERIOR) PAINT
275
The switch house, GIS halls or any other building(s) including walls & ceiling
shall be provided with Acrylic emulsion paint (interior) of reputed make over
prepared base. The outer face of building shall have peach colour whether
proof acrylic (exterior) paint. Columns, beams parapet and plastered area
shall have mid cream colour whether proof acrylic emulsion (exterior) paint.
All the steel work shall have first quality paints of approved make/shades. The
boundary wall shall be provided with weather proof acrylic emulsion (exterior)
paint. All fire fighting MS pipes shall have post office red colour paint.
16.9 MATERIALS
The Acrylic interior emulsion and weather proof exterior acrylic emulsion
paints shall be of superior quality manufactured by standard firms like
ASIAN, NEROLAC, DULUX etc. The material should be brought to site in
sealed condition and stored properly.
All paints and allied materials shall be of 1st quality manufactured by standard
firms like ASIAN, NEROLAC, DULUX etc. and meet the requirements of
following Indian Standards for metallic surfaces and shall be of approved
brands and manufacturer and of approved shade.
a) Primer for Iron, steel etc. shall be conforming to IS: 2074. The primer
shall be ready mixed primer.
b) Synthetic enamel paint shall be conforming to IS: 117, IS: 133 and IS:
137 of first quality.
16.10 APPLICATION
a) ACRYLIC INTERIOR EMULSION/WEATHER PROOF ACRYLIC

EMULSION: Two to three coats shall be applied over a priming coat as
detailed below:
i PREPARATION OF SURFACE: For new work the surface shall be

thoroughly cleaned of dust. In case of previously painted surface, it shall be
thoroughly scraped to remove loose or flaking material, dust, grease and dirt.
Ensure that the surface is free from fungus, algae and moisture. Treat the
infected surface with a liberal coat of fungical solution, if required. Apply a
coat of suitable cement primer solvent/water thinnable followed by wall putty
of same make like Asian, Nerolac, Dulux etc. or Birla/J&K wall cement putty, if
required to level the dents and make surface uniform. Sand the surface with
emery paper no. 180 and wipe clean. Apply another coat of primer and allow
drying. Sand the surface gently with emery paper no. 320 and wipe clean. For
parapet walls and horizontal surface apply 3 coats on freshly plastered wall
after necessary priming coats.
ii PRIMING COAT: The priming coat shall be done with matching brand
(Asian/Nerolac/Dulux etc.) by thinning with 100% volume/weight with clean
276
water followed by two coats of top coat. Manufacturer guidelines may be
followed.
iii Minimum time interval of at least 6 hours maximum upto 7 days shall be
allowed between successive coats to permit proper drying of preceding coat.
b) PAINTING
i. All rust & scale be removed by scrapping or by brushing with steel wire brush.
ii. The primer coat shall be allowed to dry before painting is started.
iii. The putty around glass panes shall also be painted.
iv The additional coats of paint etc. shall be provided if required for the required finish as per Executive Engineer/ Civil
Works Division.
16.11 FLOORING
The flooring of switch house building except battery room and toilet shall be of
precast terrazzo/vitrified tiles (as detailed in the working drawing or mentioned
here below). Anti-skid tile 300x300x7.7mm flooring in toilets and pantry and
Acid-resistance tiles shall be provided above 40mm thick PCC (1:2:4) flooring
in battery room.
Before flooring work is taken up, works such as laying of services which
otherwise would affect the laying of floors, plastering of all inside & outside
walls, ceilings, fixing of doors and window frames in place and all heavy work
in room may be completed.
The base layer for all floors shall be of 100-mm thick sand and 100 mm thick
cement concrete 1:4:8 laid on sand. The sand for base filling shall be clean
and dry, free from clay clods and other harmful impurities such as iron
pigments alkalis, coal and lignite, materials finer than 75 microns. Sand shall
be of particle size ranging from 1.18 mm to 150 micron. The fineness
modulus shall vary from 0.8 to 1.0. Generally sand fit for plastering is fit
for sand filling under floor.
The pre cast terrazzo tiles of 300x300x25mm minimum thickness (the

finished thickness of the top upper layer shall be 10mm) in 50% white & 50%
ordinary grey cement with marble chip conforming to IS: 1237-1980 and pre-
polished granite stone (slab) flooring as approved by HVPNL shall be laid on
20 mm thick bed of cement coarse sand mortar 1:3. The mortar shall be
evenly spread over the base for two rows of tiles and about three to five
meters in length. The top of mortar shall be kept rough so that cement slurry
can be absorbed. Neat cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be
spread over the mortar bed @ 5 kg per sq. meter. The joints shall be kept as
thin as possible (not exceeding 1.5 mm) and filled with neat cement slurry,
treads of steps and landing, if any. The floor shall be kept wet or flooded with
water and protected against damage due to traffic or any other cause, for at
least seven days after finishing the tiles.
After the tiles are cured and have dried up, these shall be ground evenly with
machine fitted with special rapid cutting grit blocks (carborundum stone) of
coarse grade (No. 60) till the marble chips are evenly exposed and the floor is
smooth. After the first grinding, the surface shall be thoroughly washed to
277
remove all grinding mud and covered with a grout of cement and colouring
matter in same mix and proportion as the topping in order to fill any pin holes
that appear. The surface shall be allowed to cure for 5 to 7 days and then
rubbed with machine fitted with fine grit blocks (No.120). The surface is
cleaned and repaired as before and allowed to cure again for 3 to 5 days.
Finally the third grinding shall be done with machine fitted with fine grade grit
blocks (No. 320) to get even and smooth surface without pinholes. The
finished surface should show the marble chips evenly exposed.
Where use of machine for polishing is not feasible or possible, rubbing and
polishing shall be done by hand, in the same manner as specified for machine
polishing except that carborundum stone of coarse grade (No. 60) shall be
used for the 1st rubbing, stone of medium grade (No. 80) for second rubbing
and stone of fine grade (No. 120) for final rubbing and polishing.
After the final polish either by machine or by hand, oxalic acid shall be dusted
over the surface @ 33 gm per square meter sprinkled with water and rubbed
hard with a nemdah block (Pad of Woolen rags). The following day, the floor
shall be wiped with a moist rag and dried with a soft cloth and finished clean.
Anti skid floor tiles of reputed makes such as Somany, Kajaria, Nitco etc.
having minimum 300x300 mm nominal size and 7.7 mm thick preferably in
Beige colour shall be provided in the toilets. The tiles shall conform to
relevant EN/IS codes. The tiles shall conform to relevant EN/IS codes. The
tiles & the colour scheme shall be got approved from the HVPNL.
Entire area around the Switch house building and GIS blocks shall be
provided with 100mm thick RCC 8mm tor @ 300C/C both ways in M-25 grade
cement concrete paver laid over 100mm thick 1:4:8 upto 2 meter from the
outer edge of the building.
16.12 SKIRTING
Matching pre-cast terrazzo tiles 300x150x25mm made in 50% white & 50%
grey cement conforming to IS: 1237-1980 shall be used in areas provided
with pre-cast terrazzo tile flooring. The minimum finished thickness of tiles
shall be 12.5 mm. Tile skirting and dado shall be fixed only after laying the
tiles in the floor. The portion of the wall to be covered with skirting and dado
shall be left unplastered. The wall surface shall be evenly and uniformly
covered with about 10 mm thick backing of cement coarse sand mortar 1:3.
However, in the case of skirting, the tiles may be directly fixed without
application of back as a separate course. Before the backing mortar has
hardened, the back of each tile to be fixed shall be covered with a thin layer of
neat cement paste and the tile gently tapped against the wall with a wooden
mallet. The fixing shall be done from the bottom of the wall upwards. All the
tile faces shall be set in conformity with one another and shall be truly vertical.
The sides of the tiles shall be coated with grey or white cement slurry with or
without pigment to match the shade of tiles and butt jointed. The joints shall
be as thin as possible.
Tiles shall be ground and polished as for flooring by hand.

278
In case of vitrified tiles, the skirting shall also be of same make, colour and
style. The vitrified tiles for flooring shall be of size 600x600mm 1st quality of
approved make viz. Nitco, Kajaria, Somany, Orient, Jonson and laid in any
pattern as specified over base of 20mm thick cement coarse sand mortar 1:4
for flooring and 12mm thick for skirting including jointing with white cement
slurry mixed with pigment to match the shade of tile.
In toilets and pantries, the skirting/dado shall be of 1st quality tiles of 6.7mm
thick 200x200 mm size of reputed makes such as Somany, Kajaria, Nitco etc.
and should go upto 6'-9" high from floor level. The tiles shall conform to
relevant EN/IS codes. The tiles & the colour scheme shall be got approved
from the HVPNL. Skirting/Daddo colour and style should match with the
flooring. The tiles shall be fixed over 20mm thickness cement mortar 1:4
including jointing with white cement slurry mixed with pigment to match the
shade of tile completely.
16.13 DOORS/WINDOWS
The contractor shall provide & fix Aluminum chowkhats/doors /windows/

ventilators (single & double leaf) consisting frame work including vertical
styles, top rails, lock (middle) rails and bottom rails with metal fastener &
screws fitted with nuts & bolts or using rawl plugs & screws as per HVPNL
drawings. The Aluminum section to be used shall be of 10 gauge (3mm)
anodized (15 micron) of reputed makes such as HINDALCO/JINDAL
conforming to IS: 1968-1983. The doors & windows shall be fitted with 5.0
mm thick glass of reputed make like TATA FLOAT/SAINT GOBBAIN, high-
class rubber gasket & aluminum beading complete so to make the glass
airtight. The toilet doors shall, however, be fitted with 12mm thick three
layered medium density particle pre-laminated board
(NOVAPAN/KIT/DECCO) panels of appropriate size with aluminum beading
to make it airtight. The door/floor springs, locks (six lever of Godrej or
equivalent), 1st quality aluminum handles/tower bolts/stoppers with rubber
cushion, screws etc. shall be of 1st quality ISI make as approved by Executive
Engineer/Civil Works Division. However plug of minimum 5mm depth shall be
provided on the top and bottom of the styles of window and door frames.
16.14 TOILET & PANTRY FIXTURES
All the water closets, wash basins, squatting panes etc. shall be of vitreous
China clay in white colour, (first quality) conforms to IS: 2556. The water
closet in officers toilet shall be European type with single syphonic low-level
cistern. In general toilets high-level cistern shall be provided with Indian type
water closet. Providing and fixing in position best Indian make 25mm dia.,
600mm long towel rails fixed in raw slugs embedded in walls with CP brass
screws. All fixtures/fittings shall be chromium plated of best quality and shall
be approved by the Executive Engineer/Civil Works Division.
Providing & fixing best Indian make white vitreous chinaware sink of size
600x450x250mm with complete fittings including 40mm CP brass waste and
PVC pipe chromium plated brass tap. Granite slab 20-25mm thickness as
approved by Executive Engineer/Civil Works Division is to be provided in the
kitchen as shown in drawing.

279
6mm thick beveled edge mirror 1000x660mm shall be fixed mounted on
12mm thick water proof plywood backing and hardwood beading all round
and mirror fixed to the backing with 4 no. CP cap screws and washers
including fixing the mirror to the wall with necessary screws, plugs and
washers etc.
Door hangers, glass/marble/ceramic corner shelves may be provided in all

toilets.
All water supply pipes shall be GI Pipes (medium quality) conforming IS:1239
along with specials ISI marking.
All drainage pipes shall be HCI pipes along with special and ISI marked,
embedded in walls, having concrete 1:2:4 around the horizontal pipes up to
first inspection chamber/gully trap shall also be HCI pipes.
From Inspection chamber onwards to soakage pit or to existing sewerage

system as the case may be SW Pipes shall be used.
Construction of soakage pit near switch house building or laying of SW pipes

up to sewerage system within sub-station is in scope of this bid.
16.15 RAIN WATER PIPES
All rain water pipes shall be unplasticised rigid PVC (Colour:dark shade of
grey) 110mm nominal outside dia. class 2 (0.4MPa) conforming to
IS:13592/4985, Type A either plain or with sliding/grooved socket unless
shorter lengths are required at junctions with fittings. Tolerances on specified
length shall be +10mm and -0mm. The pipes shall be fitted to fittings including
bends, clamps etc. with seal ring conforming to IS:5382 allowing 10mm gap
for thermal expansion. The pipes shall either be fixed or face of wall or
imbedded in masonry as shown in construction drawings. The PVC pipes
shall be secured to the walls at all joints by means of 50x50x50mm hardwood
plugs, screwed with MS screws of required length including cutting, brickwork
and fixing in cement mortar 1:4. At top of roof proper grating shall be
provided.
16.16 ELECTRICAL ITEMS IN CONTROL ROOM AND OTHER BUILDINGS
The general requirement of electrical fittings shall be as per drawing attached

with tender. The bidder shall prepare the actual design and detail of circuits to
be provided and layout of pipes.
The wiring shall be recessed conduit wiring. Heavy duty PVC conduits of
20/25/30mm size and wires 2.5/4/6 sq. mm copper for circuit wiring & 1.5 sq.
mm copper for earth including wiring for sub-mains, modular switch boards,
junction boxes, switches/sockets 5 Amp, 5/16 Amp and 16 Amp, 240V indoor
and outdoor receptacle including 2T split/window ACs, electronic step
regulator mounted on the switch boards, provision for telephone wires
including telephone junction boxes/tap blocks, sockets.

280
Depth of inspection/junction boxes shall be 80 mm in ceiling and 28 mm on
wall surface which may vary as per requirement of modular
switches/regulator.
All the split/window ACs, ceiling fans, 28W (T-5) CFL tubes etc. shall be of
reputed company like
LG/Samsung/Hitachi/Videocon/Crompton/Philips/Osram etc. All switches,
fittings, sockets, fans shall be of latest modular design and of reputed make
like Crompton, Havels, Philips etc. All the material shall conform to latest IS
specification as ISI marked. All the electrical fitting including ACs, fans shall
be as per electrical drawing to be provided by the HVPNL or developed by the
successful bidder. The items not provided herein but are required to be
provided as per drawing requirement or site requirement shall be provided by
the successful bidder without and extra cost to the HVPNL.
16.17 ROOFING
On top of RCC slab of building, terracing shall be done with tile brick paving.
The top surface of RCC slab when thoroughly dry shall be painted uniformly
with bitumen of penetration 80/25, hot cut back bitumen, the quantity of
bitumen shall be 1.7 kg per sq. m of roof surface. Immediately after painting
dry, clean sharp coarse sand shall be evenly sprayed and leveled over the
surface after bitumen is still hot.
Over the layer of bitumen the good soil with optimum moisture content shall
be laid on roof to requisite thickness and slope, well compacted. After laying
the mud surface shall be given a coat of mud plaster 25 mm thick and allowed
to dry. Over the mud plaster flat tile bricks shall be laid using the minimum
amount of plain mud mortar as bedding. The tiles shall be laid close to each
other; the thickness of joints shall not be less than 6 mm and more then 12
mm in width. After tiles are well set and bedding mortar has dried joints of
tiles shall be grouted with cement mortar of mix 1:3 (1 cement: 3 fine sand)
such that all the joints of tiles are completely filled with mortar and the joints
should be finished neatly by providing flush pointing in 1:3 cement mortar (1
cement: 3 sand). The surface shall be cured for at least 7 days. The tiles
surface as completed shall be even and true to slopes of 1 in 48.
17.0 STATUTORY RULES
Vender shall comply with all the applicable statutory rules pertaining to factory
acts, safety rules of Tariff Advisory Committee and Chief Electrical Inspector.
18.0 SWITCH YARD FENCING AND GATE
Fencing & Gates shall be provided for Switchyard area as per General Electrical Layout
Plan and any other specified area along the lines shown. The design shall be as per
drawings attached with the tender. Refer item no. 16.6 for specification on brickwork and
item no. 16.8-16.10 for exterior emulsion on toe wall.

281
Chain link fence fabric shall of size 75mm; coated wire shall be of 3.15mm dia
having zinc coating after weaving. The chain link fabric shall be fixed to the
intermediate parts and at top & bottom of fence by welding/fixing 50x6mm
M.S. flat all through its length.
All structural steel manufactured by TISCO, SAIL, IISCO and RASHTRIYA
ISPAT (primary manufacturers) shall conform to IS: 20621786 shall only be
used. The bidders shall, however, be allowed to use Amba steel, Rathi steel,
Kamdhenu steel, Barnala steel, P.R.S steel, Shidbali steel (manufactured by
secondary manufacturers) only after obtaining non-availability certificate from
the primary manufacturers. Before using secondary steel, the selected bidder
would require to conduct all physical & chemical tests (lot wise & dia. wise) to
establish its conformity to IS Standards conforming to IS 2062.
The barbed wire shall consist of two splices per reel. The barbed wire shall be
formed by twisting two line wires, one containing barbs. The barbed wire shall
be of 12 SWG galvanized steel with its weight 155-186 gm/m length of wire.
Distance between two barbs shall be 75mm. The barbs shall carry four points
and shall be formed by twisting two point wires, each two turn tightly round
one line wire making altogether 4 complete turn. The barbs shall be finished
in such a way that four points are set and locked at right angles to each other.
The barbs shall have a length of not less than 13mm and not more than
18mm. The points shall be sharp and well pointed.
Fasteners Single strand aluminum or galvanized steel, wire conforming to
requirements for fence fabric 4mm diameter.
Tension wires - Single strand, high tensile, galvanized steel wire 4mm
diameter.
Fittings and Hardware Cast aluminum alloy or galvanized steel malleable
or ductile steel. Cast iron D-Clamp to be drop forged with bolt, Check nut,
thimble and other material required for stretching the Barbed wire complete in
all respect.
Generally the drawing attached with the tender shall be applicable. However, if due to
difference of levels between formation level and Switchyard and outside, normal
foundations have to be changed in some portion and retaining wall have to be provided
below due to site requirements. Successful bidder for approval before execution will
submit the suitable design. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.
All the structural steel shall be galvanized (conforming to IS 2629-1985 and IS 4759-
1968 and withstand tests as per IS 2633-1986). The galvanizing shall be done after
fabrication work is complete. However for touch-ups of damaged spots, cold galvanizing

282
be done with paints/sprays such as ZINKOTE -20 Zinc rich paint or Zinc metal spray
after cleaning the damaged spots of rust, oil, grease, dirt, moisture, water etc.
19.0 BOUNDARY WALL INCLUDING BARBED WIRE FENCING/GRILLS
19.1 Boundary wall shall be provided on the front, sides & back side alongwith main entrance
gate(s) as per HVPNL drawings enclosed herewith and type of wall detailed in the CLO.
Refer item no. 16.6 for specification on brickwork and item no. 16.8-16.10 for exterior
weather proof emulsion paint on boundary wall. Weep holes as per site requirement are
to be provided.
All the structural steel/grill on top of wall shall be painted with 1st quality black enamel
paint (as mentioned in the architectural drawing) after priming coat of red oxide. Refer
item no. 16.8 to 16.10 for make of paint, application etc.
The measurement/payment of boundary wall shall be carried out in two parts as detailed
below:
a). The brick work in foundation upto DPC level shall be measured in cubic
meter. Nothing extra shall be paid for 100mm thick PCC 1:4:8 below brick
foundation and 25mm thick horizontal DPC, cement plaster with finishing
items on outer or inner side of wall, as the case may be (inner side, if earth
level outside sub-station boundary is at higher level).

283
b). The brick work above DPC (excluding DPC) for construction of front wall,
side (c-fence) wall and U/C-walls shall be measured in running meter
complete in all respects as per HVPNL drawings. Nothing extra shall be paid
for pointing, cement plaster, PCC posts, angles, grills, flats, barbed wire,
galvanization, finishing items etc.
c). The main entry gate(s) shall be measured in running meter (above DPC level)
complete in all respects as per HVPNL drawings and payment shall be made
as per rates quoted for the type of boundary wall where the gates are
proposed.
19.2 PCC posts, angles, grills, flats, barbed wire fencing etc. shall be as per HVPNL
drawing(s). All the structural steel & barbed wire shall be galvanized (conforming to IS
2629-1985 and IS 4759-1968 and withstand tests as per IS 2633-1986). The galvanizing
shall be done after fabrication work is complete. However for touch-ups of damaged
spots, cold galvanizing be done with paints/sprays such as ZINKOTE -20 Zinc rich paint
or Zinc metal spray after cleaning the damaged spots of rust, oil, grease, dirt, moisture,
water etc. For detail specification refer item no. 23.0 above.
20.0 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL PLAN
For effective control on quality of civil works, a field quality control plan is
enclosed herewith for reference & record of the successful bidder. All cost of
testing as per approved field Quality control plan or as directed by HVPNL
shall be borne by the Contractor.
21.0 After completion of civil works, a completion plan giving all details of
foundations, trenches, culverts, fencing, building etc. as built shall be
submitted with original tracing.

284
22.0 Any material or activity not covered under the specifications or drawings shall
be, as governed by relevant IS specification/National Building Code of India.
23.0 GENERAL
The work shall be carried out by specialists in the trade. Workers shall be
provided with gum boots and hand gloves. Minimum overlaps of 100mm shall
be given at the ends and sides of the strips of the felts/tissue and properly
bonded with bitumen. Joints in the successive layers of the fibre glass based
felt/tissue shall be staggered. There shall be no air pockets. Corners shall be
treated flush without any air pockets or voids.
a. The materials and the sub-contractors executing the work shall be duly
approved by the Executive Engineer/Civil Works Division.
b. Adequate covering shall be provided during work to avoid splashing or

staining of adjacent works and surfaces. Any surface or work splashed or
stained shall be thoroughly cleaned to the full satisfaction of the Executive
Engineer/Civil Works Division.
24.0 SPECIAL NOTE
24.1 Fully galvanized angles, flat, nut & bolts etc. shall be used in all the items
covered under this scheme. Galvanizing of the steel section shall confirm to
IS 2629-1985 and IS 4759-1968. All galvanizing members shall withstand test
as per IS 2633-1986. The galvanizing shall be done after all fabrication work
is completed, except that the nuts may be tapped or re-run after galvanizing.
Threads of the bolts and nuts shall have a neat fit and shall be such that they
can be turned with finger throughout the length of the threads of bolts and
they shall be capable of developing full strength of the bolts.
24.2 Care must be taken to avoid gap between foundation top and structures base
plate. In case, the gap is unavoidable, it shall be filled with Dr. Fixit Pidigrout
10M.
24.3 The successful bidder shall get the mix design conforming of M-20 grade of
concrete with OPC of grade 43 conforming to IS:8112 manufactured by major
cement manufacturers done within 75 days issue of letter of intent (LOI). In
the meanwhile, the successful bidder may use nominal mix 1:1:3 with
proportion of materials as defined in table 9 of IS:456:2000.

285
SECTION-10
CHAPTER-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLCC EQUIPMENTS &

PROTECTION COUPLER
1. GENERAL:
The manufacturer whose PLCC panels are offered should have designed,
manufactured, tested, supplied and commissioned PLCC panels for the specified
voltage and fault level.
2. STANDARD:
2.1 All the PLCC equipment covered under the package shall conform to the
requirements of the latest addition of the relevant IEC/IS Specification or equivalent
National Standards, except to the extent mentioned by this specification.
2.2 The works covered by the specification shall be designed, engineered,
manufactured, built tested and commissioned in accordance with the Acts, Rules,
Laws and Regulations of India.
2.3 The equipment to be furnished under this specification shall conform to latest issue
with all amendments of standard specified above.
2.4 In addition to meeting this specific requirement called for in the Technical
Specification, the equipment shall also conform to the general requirement of the
relevant standards and shall form an integral part of specification.
2.5 The Bidder shall nor that standards mentioned in the specification are not mutually
exclusive or complete in themselves but intended to compliment each other.
2.6 The contractor shall note that list of standards presented in this specification is not
complete. Whenever necessary the list of standards shall be considered in
conjunction with specific IS/IEC.
2.7 When the specific requirements stipulated in the specification exceed or differ than
required by applicable standards, the stipulation of the specification shall take
precedence.
2.8 Other internationally accepted standards which ensure equivalent or better
performance than that specified in the standard referred shall also be accepted.
2.9 In case governing standards for the equipment is different from IS or IEC, the salient
points of difference shall be clearly brought out alongwith English language version
of standard or relevant extract of the same. The equipment conforming to standards
other than IS/IEC shall be subject to HVPNLs approval.
2.10 The bidder shall clearly indicates in his bid the specific standards in accordance with
which the works will be conformed.
3. TRAINING:
As per clause 12 of section I General.
3.1 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT:
The PLCC equipments as specified shall be installed at the respective ends of the
transmission lines.
4. FREQUENCY PLANNING:
4.1 For planning frequency and output power of carrier terminals, bidders may plan for a
minimum receive signal to noise ratio of 25dB for the speech channels without
compander and 15dB for protection signalling & 29dB for data transmission. The
details of line, tower, conductor shall be furnished to the Contractor to carry out the
assessment of signal attenuation. IEC/CIGRE specifications/guidelines shall be
adhered to.
4.2 Frequency and output power of PLC terminals for protection shall be planned such
that the protection signal is received with full reliability even when one of the phase is
earthed or is on open circuit on the line side causing an additional minimum loss of
6dB.
4.3 Successful Bidder shall be fully responsible for the co-ordination required with
concerned State Electricity Board for finalising the frequency plan.
286
4.4 The frequency plan will be referred to wireless Advisor/DOT Department for
clearance and in case any change in the contractors recommended carrier
frequency and power output is proposed by these authorities, the contractor shall
have to modify his proposal accordingly. Change of power output shall however not
involve repeater station.
5. PROPOSED ARRANGEMENT:
5.1 The power line carrier communication equipment required by the HVPNL is to
provide primarily efficient, secure and reliable information link for carrier aided
distance protection and direct tripping of remote and breaker and also for speech
communication between sub-station. It shall include separate carrier terminals of
multipurpose type for speech and protection purposes. Provision for super-imposing
telex and data signals shall be made on speech terminals. All carrier terminals
including those for protection shall be suitable for point to point speech
communication also. Carrier aided protection is not being provided on 132kV and
below transmission lines in HVPNL.
5.2 For security reasons each transmission line shall be protected by Main-I and Main-ii
protections or Main & Backup protections. The features of Direct Trip Send and
Direct Trip Receive shall also be provided in the protection coupler.
5.3 The requirement of carrier information on each link covered under this specification
is for speech communication and protection signaling.
5.4 The equipment for protection signals shall have high degree of reliability and speed.
It shall be guaranteed to function reliably in the presence of noise impulse caused by
isolator or breaker operation. It shall also be possible to effect direct tripping of
breaker at one end when the other end breaker opens out either manually or by
relays such as Bus fault relay etc.
5.5 The time intervals between receipt of a trip command on the transmit side, its
transmission over the carrier link, reception at the far end and giving command to the
trip relays at the distant end shall not exceed 20 m.sec. for permissive inter-tripping
and 30m.sec. for direct inter-tripping even for the longest line section. The above
timings are Inclusive of operating time for auxiliary relays and interposing relays, if
any, included in the PLCC equipment.
5.6 The requirement of protection signaling channel is such that security against
incorrect signals being received shall be atleast two to three orders higher than
reliability against a signal not being received.
5.7 The planning of frequencies for the PLCC terminals shall be done confederating the
existing PLCC network as well as full communication channel requirement detailed
above so that there is no problem of frequency allocation at a later date when the
subsequent section communication requirements come up.
5.8 For reasons of security and reliability, phase to phase coupling for S/C lines and
inter-circuit coupling for D/Clines shall be employed.
5.9 The parameters of the equipment quoted shall be such that the mode of wave
propagation on transmission line shall not impose any limitation on the efficient and
reliable performance of information link from protection or communication point of
view.
5.10 The Bidder shall submit curves illustrating incorrect tripping and Failure to trip
probability plotted against corona noise level in the presence of impulse noise due to
switching of isolator and circuit breaker etc. Detail of Field tests and laboratory tests
for successful operation of his equipment, under such adverse conditions shall be
furnished by the bidder. These are to be related to end-to-end signaling and shall
take into account the type of communication link.
6. POWER LINE CARRIER TERMINAL:
6.1 The offered PLCC equipment should be suitable for carrier transmission in high
frequency of Speech, Facsimile, Telegraphy, RTU data, Teleprotection signals in
frequency range of 40KHz to 500KHz over high voltage overhead power
transmission lines.
The system should have one/two speech channels each of which can be set
for full bandwidth speech cum fax conversations or shared speech cum
287
superimposed date channels or suitable for high sped 4 wire RTU data
channel of 1200/2400 bits per second. The superimposed data channel can
support upto 600 baud (2760-3720 Hz, 960 Hz BW or 2280-3360 Hz, 1080
Hz BW) channel as a backup for RTU/SCADA.The system should be fully
field programmable and flexible easy to use and compact leading to simplified
network design, installation and maintenance work.
The system can provide up to 12/6Nos. of 50 baud, 8/4 Nos. of 100 baud or 1
Nos. of 600 baud voice band data for superimposed channels and speech up
to 2 KHz/2.4KHz in VF circuits simply by changing plugin filters provided in
channels modem. Optionally system can be provided to give speech and data
only channels (upto 28/13/9 Nos. of 50/100/200 baud or 1 Nos. of 1200/2400
bps ) or Interface for protection coupler signal.
As already indicated the information link shall be provided for speech,
protection, telex and data services. PLC terminals shall be fully co-ordinated
to match with the specific requirements. Because of strict requirement of high
speed of operation, security, reliability and efficient operation of protection
channel along with the carrier terminals, Bidder shall ensure the complete
and fool-proof co-ordination of the PLC and protection equipments. It shall
therefore be necessity to have these combinations as one unit without any
mismatch or necessary of any intermediate co-ordination unit.
6.2 PLC terminal shall use Amplitude Modulation and shall have single side band
transmission mode. These shall be equipped for fixed frequency duplex working and
shall be fully transistorised, however, this fixed frequency shall be programmable at
site.
Characteristic input and output parameters of the SSB PLC terminals shall be
as per IEC-495, unless otherwise specified.
6.3 The features of carrier terminal are detailed out below:
a) Mode of transmission single side band with Amplitude Modulation
suppressed carrier or reduced carrier.
b) Carrier frequency range 40 to 500KHz
c) Nominal carrier frequency band in either direction of 4.0KHz
transmission
d) Power output (PEP) of HF terminals 20 watt
e) Frequency difference between a pair of PLC Frequency difference between
terminals VF signal at the transmitting and
receiving ends will not exceed 2
Hz with suppressed carrier. With
reduced carrier frequency
difference shall be zero. This
shall include permissible ambient
temperature variation and supply
frequency and voltage variation
of (+) 15 % and (-)10%
f) Automatic gain control For 40dB change in carrier
frequency signal level within the
regulation range, change in VF
receive levels of both speech and
other signals shall be less than
1dB.
g) Supply voltage 48V DC+15%-10% (Positive pole
earthed).
h) Nominal impedance
-Carrier freq. Sides 150ohm balanced
-VF sides 600ohm
i) Return loss within nominal freq. Band: -Not less than 10dB on Carrier
freq. Transmit side.
-Not less than 14dB on VF side.
288
j) Spurious emission at edge of nominal carrier freq. -10dBm(Max)
Band.
k) Speech level across 600ohms.
-Four wire transmit 0dBr to 17dBr
-Four wire receive 8 dBr to -3.5 dBr
-2 wire transmit 0dBr
-2 wire receive -7dBr
l) Permissible limits for variation of overall loss As per IEC 495/IS 9482
(attenuation) of the speech channel in relation to
800Hz for back to back operation of a pair of
terminals without compander.
m) Voltage withstand requirement D/C Power terminal. Capable of with standing 500V
When isolated from earth DC for 1 minute between both
terminals connected together and
earth.
When not isolated form earth. An impulse voltage of 1000v
1.2/50 applied between.
VF signaling and alarm circuit when free from earth. 500V DC applied for 1 minute
between both terminals of circuit
connected together and earth.
6.4 Following facilities to be provided in the PLC terminals:
1) Loop test facility for local transmitted and receiver.
2) Changeover provision of termination of PLC terminals on dummy load.
3) Position of each module may be marked at the back side of chassis also.
4) Terminal blocks for power supply, telephone cable and two HF cable sockets.
5) Channel testing from terminal to terminal.
6.5 All the PLC terminals shall be of multipurpose type. The bidder shall confirm that the
total transmission time for tele protection shall not exceed 20ms for permissive and
30ms for direct tripping signals.
6.6 In the input circuit of PLC terminal protective devices shall be provided in the form of
zener diodes or surge suppressors in order to eliminate an surge transfer through the
coupling device or the surge induced in the connecting path of HF cable.
6.7 To improve voice transmission characteristics for the system, companders and
expanders shall be provided. The companders shall have atleast 2:1 compression
ratio with a corresponding expansion ratio of 1:2. The operating range of compander
shall be compel with the audio power levels specified for 4 wire operation. The
improvement gained by companders shall however, not be taken into account for
power allocation and shall be in-hand reserve.
6.8 Sudden changes in input level to the receiver shall not cause false tripping. The
bidder shall clearly indication in his offer the methods adopted to ensure above
phenomenon. The receiver design shall also provide protection against false tripping
from random noise.
6.9 Fail-safe devices shall be provided, so that a malfunction in one unit or sub-assembly
cannot cause damage elsewhere in the system. All plug-in equipment shall be fitted
with features to prevent improper insertion. The electrical cables shall not be routed
across sharp edges or near sources of high temperature. The adjustments, which
are susceptible to misadjustment for accidental contact/vibration, shall be equipped
with suitable locking devices.
6.10 The PLC set shall be designed to give guaranteed performance from 0 deg. C to
50deg. C ambient temperature. The thermal capability of the equipment shall be so
designed that the equipment remains operational successful upto 60deg. C ambient
temperature. Any ventilation fans provided for circulation of air inside the cabinets
shall conform to relevant Indian Standards.
6.11 The terminals shall be provided with built-in indicating Instrument to facilitate
checking of important voltages and current values and signal levels in different parts
of the PLC terminals. Protection fuses shall be provided in all important circuits and

289
fuses shall be so mounted as allow their easy inspection and replacement. All test
points shall be easily accessible.
The carrier set shall be provided with suitable supervision and alarm facilities
Individual parts of the carrier set should be accessible from front, making it
possible to place the carrier cabinets side-by-side. All components and parts
of the carrier sets shall be suitably tropicalised.
6.12 PLC terminals shall be housed in floor mounting sheet metal cabinets, suitable for
mounting on concrete plinth as well as channel frame by means of nuts and bolts or
welding. The cabinets shall be properly cleaned and spray painted with two coats or
synthetic enamel paint. Exterior of the cabinets shall be painted with smoke-glossy
finish. Interior of the cabinets shall be painted with white enamel paint with glossy
finish. All the panels shall be provided with suitable point for earthling with the earth
of the Grid/S/Stn.. Detailed drawings for earthing connections shall be submitted.
6.13 All cabinets having PLC terminals shall be provided with lamps of sufficient wattage
for interior illumination with switch.
6.14 A name plate shall be provided on the front door of each cabinet indicating channel
function, transmitter frequency and direction etc.
6.15 Bidder shall submit type test & routine test certificate from internationally reputed test
authorities for the quoted PLC terminals in respect of characteristic input and output
parameters of the PLC terminals in accordance with IEC-495 alongwith the Bid.
6.15.1 TYPE TESTS:
I Carrier frequency side
Nominal impedance, return loss and tapping loss
Balance of ground
Spurious omissions
carrier frequency levels
frequency accuracy
Voice Frequency Side
Automatic gain control
Transmit/receive frequency difference
Noise generated, within the termianls
Harmonic distortion
Selectivity
Nominal impedance and return loss
Balance of ground
Telephone signalling channel
Voltage withstand requirements
Electromagnetic compatibility
II Standard Equipment
Attenuation distortion
Group delay distortion
Signals above 3400 Hz
III Speech Plus Equipment
Attenuation distortion
Group delay distortion

290
IV Multichannel Terminals
Carrier frequency output power
Nominal impedance, return loss
Spurious omissions
Inter channel cross talk attenuation
V Common Requirements
AC Power Supply
DC Power Supply
Temperature and humidity
VI Storage Conditions
Subject to agreement between the manufacturer and the user
Routine Test:
ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
The following acceptance tests shall be carried out by the Supplier in
presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the
HVPNL.
i) Carrier frequency levels
ii) Frequency accuracy
ii) Automatic gain control
iv) Transmit/receive frequency difference
v) Voltage withstand requirements
vi) Attenuation distortion
vii) Attenuation distortion
viii) Carrier frequency output power
7. SPEECH COMMUNICATION:
PLC equipments offered shall provide telephone communication between
the stations where the transmission line equipment shall be suitable for
providing the following:
(a) It shall be possible for subscriber at any of the stations to contact the subscriber at all
other stations connected in the system by dialing his call number. To achieve this a
24 lines EPAX with 4 wire interface & remote subscriber units shall be
provide/available at different stations.
(b) The equipment shall contain all normal facilities like ring back tone, dial tone, engage
tone & priority tone and suitable pluses to established and disconnect
communication between subscribers.
(c) The equipment shall be provided with necessary alarm circuits and fuses etc.
(d) The equipment shall be of 4 kHz bandwidth on either direction for providing super
imposed data and be suitable for teleprinter facilities at a later date without major
modifications and high cost. The Bidder shall clearly indicate in his bid the provision
made in his proposal for future development and the extent to which such additional
facilities can be asked at a later date.
(e) Arrangement for over-riding facilities shall be provided by means of priority keys
wherever specified. The over-riding facility shall enable cutting in ongoing calls with
the priority key and ask the concerned parties to finish their conversation. The
wanted number should then get automatically connected without having to redial the
number.
(f) All the carrier telephone conversations shall be secret and it should not be possible
for anybody to over hear the conversation going on between any two parties except
those provided with over-riding facilities.
(g) All the relays etc, used in the equipment shall be of roubust design to cope with the
duty imposed on them. Electronic components used in the equipment shall be of long
life type and as far as possible a few types only shall be used.
291
(h) The cabinets housing the equipment for EPAX, four wire E/M interface & remote
subscriber units (four wire) shall have mounting arrangement similar to that for PLC
terminals and these cabinets shall also be painted with the same paint similar to that
of PLC terminals.
(i) All the terminals for speech shall be supplied fully wired for addition of VFTs in
future. However, the terminal supplied shall be equipped with programmable transit
band pass filters.
(j) Equipment for speech communication must be fully compatible with HVPNLs
existing equipment. Any Interfaces required for proper matching and connection
with the HVPNLs existing equipment shall be provided by the Contractor.
(k) Terminals for protection shall be suitable between two ends of each transmission line
or on tandem operation basis with back to back connection at the intermediates
stations.
(l) Each PLC terminal for speech as well as protection purposes shall be provided with
a plug-in type service telephone and buzzer. Further, 4 wire remote telephone
instruments (parallel to service telephone) shall also be provided on one PLC
terminals for protection for each link. These instruments shall be located in
respective switchyard control room to enable the operator to make emergency calls
on point-to-point basis. Each such instrument shall be equipped, with a buzzer and
press-to-call key and shall not require any additional power supply units.
8. NETWORK PROTECTION EQUIPMENT (PROTECTION COUPLER) :
8.1 The bidder shall offer voice frequency transmission equipment which shall work on
frequency shift or coded signal principle for transmission/reception of protection
signals as single purpose channel. The equipment shall be suitable for connection to
the power line carrier terminal mentioned above.
8.2 The voice frequency transmission equipment shall not only be insensitive to corona
noise but shall also remain unaffected by impulse type noise which are generated by
electrical discharge and by the opening and closing of circuit breakers, isolators,
earthing switches etc. The equipment shall be made immune to a field strength of
10V/m expected to be caused by portable radio transmitters in the range of 20-1000
MHz . In his offer, the bidder shall clearly explain as to what measures have been
taken to make the equipment insensitive to corona noise, white noise and to impulse
noise of an amplitude larger than the wanted signal and submit full field test and
laboratory test reports. The guarantee on design data shall not be acceptable.
8.3 The equipment shall be unaffected by spurious tripping signals. The bidder shall
submit proof as to how this is achieved satisfactorily.
8.4 The equipment shall be suitable for transmission of direct and permissive trip signal
as well as blocking signals for protective gear of power system. The equipment shall
be operated in the audio frequency range in speech band or above speech band as
superimposed channel in 4KHz band of SSR carrier. The equipment shall operate
with full duplex frequency shift mode of operation. The protection signaling
equipment shall be solid state design, modular in construction and have a proven
operating record in similar application ever EHV systems. Details regarding
application of the equipment over 220kV systems shall be submitted along with the
bid Each protection signaling equipment shall provide:
(i) Transmission facilities for minimum tow protection signals.
(ii) Reception facilities for minimum two protection signals.
(iii) Direct trip Send and Direct Trip Receive facility in addition to above two protection
signals.
8.5 The equipment shall be designed for remote tripping/blocking on permissive basis
and direct tripping for reactor fault and others. The overall time of PLC.VFT and
transmission path for permissive trip/blocking shall be 20m. sec. or less and for
direct tripping 30m.sec. or less even for the longest line section.

292
Operating time lower than specified above may be preferred provided they
fulfill the requirements of security and reliability as mentioned below:
False-trip probability >10-5

(Noise burst of nay amplitude)
Fall to trip probability >10-5
For S/N dB In 3.1 KHz Band (while Noise Measurement)
8.6 It may be emphasised that specified time, as mentioned above is composed
of the following:
a) Back-to-Back signal delay in frequency shift or coded signals
protection equipment.
b) Back-to-Back delay in PLC terminal.
c) Delay in transmission line.
d) Operation time of interposting relay, if any in frequency shift or coding
equipment.
Reference is invited in this regard to the guide lines expressed in
CIGRE Publication Teleprotection report by Committee 34-35.
8.7 The following transfer criteria shall be provided by the equipments:

a) Transmit side:One number potential free No (normally open) contact
of protective relays (to be supplied by the HVPNL) of under noted
rating of each of the following functions:
i. Permissive trip command
ii. Direct trip command
Contact rating.
Maximum voltage :360volts.
Maximum current rating :5amps.
Maximum power rating :1200 w/va.
b) Receive side:Voice frequency transmission equipment for network protection
shall be provided with one potential free No (normally open) contact of the
under noted rating of each of the following functions:
i. Permissive trip command
ii. Direct trip command
Contact rating.
Rated voltage :250volts DC
Rated current :0.1ADC.
Other Parameters :as per IEC-255-0-20
c) Alarm:In addition, the voice frequency protection terminal shall provide at
least one number potential free change over contact of the following rating
for alarm purposes.
Rated voltage :250volts DC
Rated current :0.1ADC.
Other Parameters :as per IEC-255-0-20
8.8 Frequency shift of coded signal protection equipment shall have atleast two
channels. In order to ensure full availability of PLC protections channel,
arrangement of parallel circuiting of these tow channels as main and stand
by channels shall be made. This arrangement is generally shown in relevant
specification drawing. Each arrangement shall be developed by the
successful Bidder in co-ordination with protective relay Contractor. The
parallel wiring should however retain the concept of two protection channels
of each type of protection with each backing up the other 100% during
normal operation and also permit testing without affecting the other. The
contractor shall submit drawings showing Inter-connection between PLCC
and protection panels for approval by the HVPNL.

293
8.9 It has to be ensured that under no circumstances protection channel should
share the power. Each protection channel shall be able to transmit power for
which system is designed. For example, a 20 W PLC terminal shall transmit
20 Watt (Max.) for protection channel alone in the event of fault. Speech and
superimposed data channels, in the same protection terminal must get
disconnected momentarily during the operation of protection channels.
8.10 The equipment shall be constructed such that in permissive line protection
system, operational reliability of the protection channel may be checked over
the carrier link by means of a loop test. It shall be possible to carry out the
above test from either end of the carrier link. During healthy condition of the
transmission line, the loop test shall not initiate a tripping command. In the
event of a system fault, while loop test is in progress, protection signal shall
over-ride the test signal.
8.11 The equipment shall be complete with built in counters for counting the
number of trip commands sent and number of trip commands received.
8.12 Contractor shall develop drawings showing inter-connection between

protection panels and PLCC panels and submit the drawings for HVPNLs
approval.
8.13 The voice frequency transmission equipment shall be suitable for 48V (+)
15% and (-)10% DC power supply.
9.
DOCUMENTATION
1. The successful bidder shall submit six sets of following drawings for HVPNL
approval:-
2. Outline general arrangement
3. Name and rating plate
4. Face plan
5. Wiring Diagram
6. Terminal connectors
7. Block Diagram
8. Terminal plan
9. Any other drawing required to complete the equipment like bird barrier etc.
NOTE: All above drawings should be a minimum space (14x10cm) for stamping
the approval of drawings by HVPNL.
10. ELECTRONIC PRIVATE AUTOMATIC EXCHANGE (EPAX)
10.1 The Electronic private Automatic Exchange (EPAX) wherever specified shall
be provided with 24 subscriber lines and 8 trunk lines. The trunk lines shall
be connected to PLCC channel (speech panels as existing in HVPNL i.e.
WSI, BPL, ABB make). The exchange will have its own ringing current and
tone generator etc. The exchange shall be suitable for working on 48 VDC
Power supply (Positive pole state & of modular construction and shall have
multiple switching lines (minimum 4 routes). It shall be programmable, either
to debar or provide over-riding facility to certain subscribers.
10.2 EPAX shall also be provided with two(2) additional interface units and
operate exclusively with HVPNLs leased subscriber lines of Department of
Telecommunication (DOT) and compatible with 2 wires full duplex, voice
grade mode of operation. The DOT leased lines shall be coordinated by the
HVPNL with the leasing authority (DOT).

294
10.3 The technology of the equipment supplied by the contractor must conform to
C-DOT version.
11. TELEPHONE SET:

The instrument should be sturdy & compact in form. It should have
Tone/Pulse facility, flash and pause facility, last number redialing, visual
ringing indication, ring volume control and fast dialing facility. It should be
compatible with different types of switching units used in conjunction with
PLCC system in HVPNL and also with the DOT line. It should be able to be
feed from exchange with F 48 V, 2x200 ohm feed bridge or 56 V 2x400
ohms feed bridge.

295
SECTION-10
CHAPTER-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR LINE TRAPS

1. LINE TRAP:
1.1 General:
The manufacturer whose line trap are offered should have designed,
manufactured and tested as per IS/IEC or equivalent standard and supplied
the line traps for the specified voltage and fault level.
All the equipment covered under the package shall conform to the
requirements of the latest edition of the relevant IEC/IS specifications or
equivalent National Standards, except to the extent modified by this
specification and shall also be in accordance with requirements under
section I & II.
1.2 Location of equipment:
The line traps as specified shall be installed at the respective ends of the
transmission lines.
1.3 Line trap requirements:
Line traps shall be inserted into Extra-high voltage transmission line to

prevent undue loss of carrier signal for all power system conditions. Its
impedance shall be negligible at power frequency (50Hz) so as not to disturb
power transmission but shall be relatively high over the frequency band
appropriate to carrier transmission.
Line trap shall consist of a main coil designed to carry continuously the rated
current without exceeding the limit of temperature rise. It shall be
supplemented with a protective device and tuning device.
Line trap shall be broad band tuned for its entire carrier frequency range
form 50 to 500KHz. Resistive component of impedance of the line trap within
its carrier frequency blocking range shall not be less than 570 ohms.
Line trap shall be provided with a protective device in the form of surge
arrestors which shall be designed and arranged such that neither significant
alteration in its protective function nor physical damage shall result from
either temperature rise or the magnetic field of the main coil at continuous
rated current or rated short time current. The protective device shall neither
enter into operation nor remain in operation, following transient actuation by
the power frequency voltage developed across the line trap by the rated
short time current. The protective device shall be shunt connected to the
main coil and tuning device.
The lightning arrestor shall be station class current limiting active gap type.
Its rated discharge current shall be 10KA.
The lightning arrestor provided with the line trap of each rating shall fully
comply with the requirements of IEC-99-4. It shall conform to type tests as
applicable and type test certificate for the same shall the submitted by the
bidder.

296
The lightning arrestor provided with the line trap shall be subject to the
routine and acceptance tests as per IEC-99-4.
Line trap shall be equipped with the bird barriers.
Line trap shall conform to IEC-353 (latest) fulfilling the all technical
requirements as follows:
Technical Parameter 220kV 132kV line

line
Rated power frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz
Rated system voltage 220kV 132kV
Highest system voltage 245kV 145kV
Rated continuous, current at 50 degree 1250A 630A

C ambient.
Rated short time current for 1 second 31.5KA 16KA

Type of tuning ---------- Broad band
Rated blocking band-width to be indicated by bidder
Minimum resistive component of impedance --------- 570 Ohms

within the rated blocking band-width
Rated inductance of main coil (mH) 1.0 1.0
Radio interference voltage Not more than 500 micro volt at 187 kV (rms)
The Bidder shall indicate continuous current rating of the line trap at 65 deg.
C ambient.
The line trap shall conform in type tests and shall be subjected to routine
tests as per IEC-353, as per following details:
TYPE TEST:
The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven years old
reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited
laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or
i) Short time current test.
ii) Power frequency voltage test on tuning device.
iii) Impulse voltage test.
iv) Temperature rise test
v) Measurement of radio influence voltage
vi) Measurement of the rated inductance of the main coil
vii) Measurement of power frequency inductance of the mail coil
viii) Measurement of blocking resistance and blocking impedance
ix) Measurement of tapping loss and tapping loss based on the blocking resistance
x) Measurement of loss at power frequency.
Routine Test:

297
ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant IS-8793: 1995
shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative,
unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL.
i) Power frequency voltage test on tuning device.

ii) Measurement of the rated inductance of the main coil
iii) Measurement of blocking resistance and blocking impedance
iv) Measurement of tapping loss and tapping loss based on the blocking resistance
1.4 LINE TRAP MOUNTING:
The line trap shall be suitable for outdoor suspension mounting and shall be
mechanically strong enough to withstand the stresses due to maximum wind
pressure of 260kg/Square meter.
Contractor shall be required to co-ordinate the mounting arrangement with

the existing arrangement at different sub-stations. Non-magnetic suspension
hook/link of adequate length and tensile strength to provide necessary
magnetic clearance between the line trap and suspension hardware shall be
supplied by the Contractor.
The line trap shall be supplied compete with disc insulators and hardware
fittings. The disc insulators to be supplied with the line trap shall conform to
IS: 731/1971 with latest amendments. All hardware fittings associated with
these insulators shall conform to IS: 2486 (Part-I)/1971 (1st Revision), IS:
2486 (Part-II)/1971 (1st Revision), IS:2486 (Part-III)/1974 and IS:2486 (Part-
IV)/1981 with latest amendments & revision. Copies of test certificates of
type tests and routine tests as stipulated in the above quoted ISS shall be
furnished with tender.
1.5 LINE TRAP TERMINAL CONNECTORS:
The line traps shall be suitable for connecting to ACSR single/twin bundle
Zebra conductor as per layout requirements. Necessary connector shall be
supplied by the Contractor.
Terminal connectors shall conform to IS: 5561 and shall also comply with
requirements indicated in Section GTR.
Terminal connectors shall be suitable for either horizontal or vertical take off
the conductor.
Clamps/connectors shall be designed for the same current ratings as line

trap and temperature rise shall not exceed 0.5 deg.C over 50 deg C
ambient.
1.6 DOCUMENTATION
The successful bidder shall submit four sets of following drawings for
HVPNL approval:-
1. Outline general arrangement
2. Name and rating plate
3. line trap mounting arrangement

298
4. terminal connectors
5. Any other drawing required to complete the equipment like bird barrier etc.

299
SECTION-10
CHAPTER-3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR COUPLING DEVICE

1. COUPLING DEVICE:
1.1 The coupling devices shall be interposed between the capacitor voltage
transformer/coupling capacitor and coaxial line to the PLC transmitter/receiver and in
conjunction with the capacitor voltage transformer/coupling capacitor shall ensure:
a) Efficient transmission of carrier frequency signals between the carrier frequency

connection and the power line.
b) Safety of personnel and protection of the low voltage parts and installation, against
the effects of power frequency voltage and transient over voltage.
The coupling device, in conjunction with the CVT/CC shall form and electric filter of
band pass type.
a) It shall match characteristic impedance of HT line to impedance of the carrier

frequency connection. Impedance matching between power line and the carrier
frequency connection may be done by a transformer or an auto-transformer.
b) Galvanic isolation between primary and secondary terminals of the coupling device
shall be performed by the above mentioned transformer.
c) Power frequency currents derived by the CVT may be drained to the earth by a
separate inductance termed drain coil of suitable rating or through primary of the
above transformer.
d) Voltage surges coming from the power line at the terminals of the coupling device
shall be limited by a non-linear surge arrester of suitable rating in the primary side.
Requirement of a gas type voltage arrester in secondary side of the coupling device
shall have to be fully justified.
The surges Arrester shall have power frequency spark over voltage co-ordinated with
the equipment ahead of it.
e) For direct and efficient earthing of its primary terminals, the coupling device shall be
equipped with an earthing switch. The coupling device shall be designed such that it
shall not be possible to remove the cover before the earthing switch is operated to
the earthed position. Further the Earth Switch shall be available for earthing of CVT-
HT terminals, when the coupling filter units are removed from circuit for
maintenance/replacement. The design shall take due regard of requirements for
safety in accordance with the Indian Electricity Rules.
1.2 Two numbers phase to earth type coupling filters shall be used to achieve in secure
phase to phase / Inter-circuit coupling. Connection between secondaries of the two
phases to earth type coupling device shall be through a balancing transformer/hybrid
such that reliable communication shall be ensured even when one of the coupled
phase to earthed or open circuited on the line side.
Coupling device shall conform to IEC-481/IS-8997 and IS-8998 shall have the
following carrier frequency characteristics as applicable to a phase to earth type
coupling device.
a) Nominal line side 400 ohms for 220kV line Ph-E &
impedance 600 ohms for Ph-Ph

300
b) Nominal line 150 ohms (balanced)
side impedance
c) Composite loss Not more than 2 dB
d) Return loss Not less than 12 dB
e) Band width shall suit the frequency plan between 40

and 500 KHz
f) Nominal peak envelope Not less than 650 Watt.

Power (for inter-modulation product 80 dB
down)
The coupling device shall be suitable for outdoor mounting. Temperature of metallic
equipment mounted out door is expected to rise upto 65o C during the maximum
ambient temperature of 50o C specified. The equipment offered by the Bidder shall
operate satisfactorily under these conditions.
The elements of coupling device shall be fitted on a base plate and enclosed in a
metal box.
The HT Terminal of coupling device shall be connected to HF terminal of the CVT by

means of 6mm Sq. copper wire with suitable lugs & taped with 11kV insulation by the
contractor.
Coupling device shall have at least two terminals for carrier equipment connection.
Bidder shall confirm that such a parallel connection to coupling device directly will not
result in any additional attenuation.
The coupling device including the drainage coil, surge arrestor and earthing switch
shall conform to type tests and shall be subjected to routine tests as per IEC-
481/IS:8998.
1.3 TESTS:
1.3.1 Type Tests

1.3.2 Routine Tests
1.3.3 Acceptance Tests

All acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant IS:8998 shall be carried out by the
Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the
HVPNL.

301
SECTION-10
CHAPTER-4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 48 VOLTS 300/120AH SMPS BASED
BATTERY CHARGER SUITABLE FOR VRLA MAINTENANCE FREE
BATTERY BANK
2. SCOPE:
This specification provides for design, Engineering, manufacture, stage testing,
inspection and testing before dispatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at site FOR
destination of 48 Volts 300/120AH SMPS based battery charger suitable for indoor
installation, complete with all fittings accessories and associated auxiliary equipment
mandatory which are required for efficient and trouble free operation as per specified
here under.
It is not the intent to specify completely all the details of design and construction of
equipment. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to the high standard
purchaser. The equipment offered shall be complete in all component necessary for
its effective and trouble free operation along with associated equipment interlocks
protection scheme etc. Such components shall be deemed to be within the scope of
supply irrespective of whether those are specially brought out in this Specification
and or the commercial order or not. All similar parts particularly movable ones shall
be interchangeable.

The equipment to be supplied against the specification shall be suitable for satisfactory
continuous operation under the following tropical conditions:
Max. ambient air temperature 500 C
Max. daily average ambient temperature 450 C
Max. yearly weighted ambient temperature 350 C
Min. air temperature (-) 50 C
Max. humidity 100%
Min. relative humidity 26 %
Average number of thunder storm days per annum 40
Average annual rain fall 15 cm to 100 cm.
Number of months during which tropical monsoon 4 months (June to
conditions prevail altitude above MSL Sept). Varies from 61 meters to 815.00
mtrs.
Average number of rainly days per annum. 120 days
Seismic level (Horizontal acceleration) 0.3g.
Degree of pollution Heavy
Intensity of solar radiation 1.0 KW/sq.m.
Max. Wind load 195 kg/sq.m.
1.03 STANDARD:
All material and equipment shall comply in all respect with requirement of the latest addition
of the relevant IS/IEC/TEC/RDSO. A set of standards adopted, translated in English, if it is in
language other than English, shall also be enclosed with the tender, to enable due
comparison, wherever a standard is specially mentioned in these specification. It is
understood that the corresponding standard amongst the sources mentioned above shall also
apply.
1.04 MANUFACTURE AND WORKMANSHIP:
302
All the material used in the construction of the equipment shall be of the best quality
obtainable of their respective kinds and whole of the work shall be of the highest class, well
finished and of approved design and make. Casting shall be free from blow holes, flaws and
of the true form and dimensions.
1.05 DUTY AND GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS:
The power for the charging apparatus shall be given through an independents 4-core cable
connection from an A.C. 50 cycles 3 phase 415 10% volts switchboard fed from a Station
Transformer.
1.06 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT:
The battery chargers of 48V/25Amp. in N+1 configuration with ultimate capacity 50Amp/75
Amp/100Amp shall be of SMPS type with positive earth. The system shall consist of a
Distribution/Switching/Alarms arrangement (DSA) and Float Rectifier-cum-Chargers
(FR/FCs) in a rack. It shall employ modular configuration for flexible provision of DC
Power. It shall employ menu driven Micro Processor Controlled Techniques for DSA as well
as module for control, monitoring and alarm to achieve better reliability of the system. The
SMPS battery chargers shall be capable of continuous operation with float voltage 2.23 to
2.25 Volts per cell (at 27 Deg. C) and 2.3 Volt per cell (at 27 Deg C) for charge voltage while
supplying the constant DC load
1.06.1 The SMPS battery chargers shall have constant voltage characteristics throughout the range
(from zero to full load) at the floating value of the voltage so as to keep the maintenance free
type VRLA batteries fully charged but without harmful overcharge.
The system shall employ a modular configuration to provide flexibility in view the future
load requirements of DC power. The modules shall be accommodated in a rack.
Distribution/Switching/Alarm (DSA) shall be provided in first rack or in a separate rack as
per manufacturers design for the ultimate system capacity. All factory wiring for the rack
shall be for the ultimate capacity so that only plugging of FR/FC module shall enhance the
DC power plant output.
1.06.2 Principal Parameters: -
Input Nominal Voltage i) 230 Volt +/-10% AC single phase for module of
25Amp.For ultimate capacity of 50Amp
ii) System rack having ultimate capacity of 75 Amp
and 125Amp will be provided AC Three phase
input power supply and each module shall operate
on individual phase of three-phase AC input
power supply.
Input Voltage Range 165V to 260 V AC
Frequency 48Hz to 52Hz
Power factor >0.98 at 50% and above load
Efficiency >0.90 at 50% and above load
Soft Start time 10 sec Min output current ramp up
Output Voltage adj. 48V to 56V DC
Current limit adjustable
For 50Amps SMPS 5 to 50A
Current limit adjustable
For 25Amps SMPS 5 to 25A
Regulation:
1) Output voltage +/-5% of DC output voltage for any load of 25% to 100%
over shoot/under shoot
when charger is
switched on +/-5% of DC output voltage for any load of 25% to 100%
2) DC output
voltage over shoot for
a step change in AC
303
voltage 165V to 260V +/-5% of DC output voltage for any load of 25% to 100%
single phase
3) DC output
voltage for a step load
change of 25% to
100%
Ripple <200mV RMS
Load Sharing Better than +/-5% active current sharing at full load
Cooling Convection
1.07. Main Features of SMPS Charger
1.07.1 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES:
The rack structure shall be made up of rigid frame work of steel profiles and rear door may be
of hinged or removable type. The rear door shall be provided with ventilation arrangement.
Alternate design of aluminum and other rigid structure meeting the requirements are also
permitted.
The rack shall be free of sharp edges or sharp corners. The rack shall be designed for easy
maintenance & installation. The rack mounting arrangement shall be such as to provide easy
access from rear and top for installation and maintenance.
The individual FR/FC module shall be easily mounted to/removed from the front side of the
rack. The FR/FC module shall be designed to slide in to the rack on a suitable mechanical
arrangement. The associated AC input, DC output connections, control/systems & interface
cable connecting the modules shall be connected /disconnected easily without causing any
interruption in the supply and damage to load or other working module.
Proper thermal engineering of hardware design shall be done by the manufacturer so as to
ensure the uninterrupted use of the equipment. The rack complete with all panels fitted shall
be designed to allow cooling by natural convection.
With the doors in position, all the common visual alarms and meters shall be clearly visible.
However the fixtures on the door shall not restrict the movement of door in any way.
The FR/FC modules shall be cooled by natural convection. AC input to FR/FC shall be
through locking type arrangement. DC output shall be through hot plug in connector on the
FR/FC side and through lugged termination on the bus bar/termination end. Control alarm
and mentoring connection shall be through connectors. The FR/FC module shall be
removable from the rack only. All AC input, DC output & alarm/control/monitoring cables
interconnecting the modules and rack shall be easily disconnected by plugs or connectors.
AC Terminations
The input terminal should be single phase or three phases as the case may be cleared marked
as R Y B and N and for AC three phase, L and N for AC single phase.
AC input termination shall be suitably protected against the accidental touch/contact with the
working staff for their protection and shall also have clear and prominent be Danger
marking. Screening shall be provided between AC and DC components to prevent accidents.
The AC input connection to the rectifier module shall be by means of locking type plug and
socket arrangement. All the connection between distribution and FR/FC shall be through
proper rated cables only. Fuses and circuit breakers for each FR/FC shall be easily accessible
and properly rated. Proper termination for the AC input of the circuit breakers and its output to the FR/FC.
The system racks having ultimate capacity of 100 Amp. will be provided AC three phase
input power supply and each module shall operate on individual phase of three phase AC
input power supply.
DC Terminations
The output of each rectifier in the negative load shall be taken through full rated ISI marked
MCBs. All the AC, DC control & alarm cabling shall be supplied with the rack.
All DC +ve and - ve leads shall be clearly marked.
Wiring
All insulated conductors except those within the confines of a printed circuit board assembly
shall be of the rating enough to withstand the maximum current and voltage during fault and
304
overload. All the wires and cables used shall be fire retardant as per IS 1554 with amendment
I (June 94).
All wiring shall be neatly secured in position and accurately supported. Where wires pass
through any part of metal or cover the holes through which they pass shall be suitably bushed.
Earthing: -
Two power earth terminals shall be provided in the frame of the system.
Mounting off component & layout:
Components mounting and fixing methods shall be secured. Suitable mechanical structure/
arrangement for holding modules in position shall be provided so that the module is held
firmly by sliding through it.
The FR/FC modules shall be cooled convection. AC input to FR/FC shall be through locking
type arrangement. DC out put shall be through hot plug in connector on the FR/FC side and
through lugged termination on the bus-bar termination end. Control, alarm and monitoring
connections shall be through connectors.
The FR/FC module shall be removable from the front of the rack only. All AC input
1.07.02 Distribution, Switching, Control, alarm & Monitoring (DSA)
The Distribution Switching sub - system of DSA shall preferably be in the modular from
whereas control, alarm &, monitoring sub-system shall only be modular. The Controller must
be Microprocessor based. The distribution switching sub-system 'may be accommodated in a
rack with other FR/FCs or in separate rack. These sub systems shall be rack mountable. DSA
shall preferably be housed in the upper portion of the rack above the FR/FC modules. The
unit shall be equipped to meet the ultimate system capacity.
1.07.03. Battery Temperature Compensation.
The charger shall be provided with the appropriate circuitry to interface with the temperature
probe assembly. With the probe, the charger shall automatically compensate gassing and
constant voltage setting inversely proportional to the probes temp/ battery ambient temp., so
that over charging at high temperature and under charging at low temperature can be
prevented.
1.07.04 Current Limiting (Voltage Drop)
Current Limiting (Voltage" Drop) shall be provided for float/ charge operation. The
float/charge limiting shall be continuously adjustable between 50% to 100% of rated out put
current for out put voltages range of 44.4 to 56 volt. For test purposes upper limit of 100%
+5% and lower limit of 50% - 5% shall be acceptable. The float and charge current limit
adjustment shall be provided on the front panel of the rectifier module. The FR/FC modules
shall be fully protected against short circuit. It shall be ensured that short circuit does not lead
to any fire hazard.
1.07.5 Fuses
All fuses shall be HRC Link type. Fuses shall be mounted on fuse carriers which are in turn
mounted on fuse bases. Wherever it is not possible to mount fuses on carriers, fuses shall be
directly mounted on plug-in type base. In such case one insulated fuse pulling handle shall be
supplied for each charger. Fuse rating shall be chosen by the Bidder depending on the circuit
requirement. All fuses in the chargers shall be monitored. Fuse failure annunciation shall be
provided on the failure of any fuse.
1.07.6 Blocking Arrangements
Blocking arrangement shall be provided in the positive pole of the out put circuit of the
charger to prevent current flow fr9m the DC battery into the charger.
1.07.7 Monitoring, Alarm and Indicating Lamps.
The visual indications/ display such as LEDs, LCDs or a combination of both shall be
provided on each FR/FC module to indicate:
(A) Functional indications:
The following functional indications shall be provided on FR/FC and DSA:
a) Mains available.
b) FR/FC on Auto Float.
305
c) FR/FC on Auto charge.
Note: The functional indication (a) shall be provided on both DSA & FR/FC module. While b and c
may be provided either on DSA or both FR/FC & DSA.
(B) Alarm indications
(i) On FR/FC
(a) FR/FC over voltage, under voltage or output fail.
(b) FR/FC over load (voltage drop)
Functional indications shall be extended as status and alarm. FR/FC fail to distribution /
switching / control & alarm unit.
(ii) On DSA
a) Load voltage high (above 56v /low (below 45.6 v)
b) FR/FC fail
c) Mains out of range
d) System Over Load
e) Mains ON/Battery Discharge
f) Temp. Compensation fail
g) Battery Fail or No Battery
h) Battery Isolated from the load
All alarm circuits shall be provided with suitable delay to ensure that they do not operate to
transient. All the protection /alarm shall be within tolerance of O.25v in case of DC voltage
and 10/0 in case of current. For AC voltage it shall be +/- 5V.
Every alarm, condition shall be accompanied with an audio alarm with audio cut off facility.
Potential free contacts two (one for alarm and one redundant) shall be provided for extension
of alarms to centralized display. - .
1.07.8 Radio Interference

The equipment shall be efficiently screened against interference to radio and also other
communication equipment, which may be installed in the same building. All sources of noise
shall be filtered if necessary with suppressors generally in accordant with relevant standards.
1.07.9 Name plates and marking

The name plates shall be while with Black engraved letters. On top of each charger, on front
as well as rear sides, larger and bold name plates shall be provided to identify the charger.
Name plates with full and clear inscriptions shall also be provided on and inside of the panels
for identification of the various equipments and ease of operation and maintenance.
An etched, engraved or anodizer name plate shall be fitted on each $MPS battery charger unit
having following details inscribed.
Manufacture's name.
P.O . No. & date.
S.No. of SMPS unit
Rating of SMPS charger
Input voltage of SMPS charger
Output voltage of SMPS charger
Year of Manufacture
8.0 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DESIGNS:
The contractor shall assume full responsibility for co-ordinate and adequate design and shall
conform to the best engineering practice for the operating conditions specified. In case the
equipment covered by this specification is to be co-ordinate with other equipment, the
contractor shall furnish complete information and data as may be desired by the purchaser.

306
9.0 TESTS & INSPECTION:
The tenderer must furnish test reports carried out on one of the SMPS battery charge unit
which shall pass all the prescribed type tests for conformity of relevant standards. These type
test reports must be issued by a Govt. approved / Govt. recognized/ a Govt. accredited
laboratory and must not be older than 7 years from the date of opening of tender.
Routine/ acceptance tests shall also be carried out on each SMPS Battery Charger as per
specification. Following type tests shall be carried out for compliance of specification
requirements:
TYPE TESTS:
(I) Visual Inspection
(II) Insulation Resistance Test
(III) Applied high Voltage test.
(IV) Performance test.
(V) Test for protection device.
(VI) Burn in test.
(VII) Climatic test.
(VIII) Vibration test.
9.1 ROUTINE & ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

On each of the SMPS battery chargers following routine and acceptance tests shall be carried
out at manufacturer's works before dispatch.
(I) Visual Inspection
(II) Insulation Resistance Test
(III) Applied high Voltage test.
(IV) Performance test.
(V) Test for protection device & other tests shall be carried out as per
requirement of GTP in the presence of inspecting officer.
9.2 INSPECTION:
The inspection of the equipments shall be carried out by the purchaser's representatives in
accordance to the relevant standards.
a) The purchaser shall have access at all times to the works and all other places
of manufacture, where the equipments are being manufactured and; the
supplier shall provide all facilities for unrestricted inspection of the Supplier's
works, raw materials, manufacture of the material and for conducting
necessary tests at any stage.
b) The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance about the
manufacturing program so, that arrangements could be made for inspection.
c) No equipments shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture unless the
material has been satisfactorily inspected, tested and cleared.
d) Inspection and acceptance of any quantity of equipment shall in no way
relieve the Supplier from his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of
this specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if such
equipment is later found to be defective.
9.3 TESTS AT SITE: -

The purchaser reserves the right to conduct all the tests on the equipment after arrival at site
and the supplier shall guarantee test certificate figures under actual service conditions.
10. DRAWINGS, LITERATURE AND MANUALS:

In addition to any other drawings which the tenderer may like to submit lo show the
307
arrangement and merits of the offered equipments. The following drawings shall be supplied
with the tender.
i. General installation layout of SMPS equipments showing position of all
associated equipments.
ii. Detailed dimensional drawings and descriptive literatures of all the
associated equipments separately.
iii. Circuit wiring diagram and schematic diagram.
iv. Literature/ pamphlets / manuals of SMPS and its associated equipments.
The successful tenderer shall within four weeks of placement of order, submit four sets of
final version of all the drawings of the SMPS Battery Charger for purchasers approval. The
purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on drawings to the supplier within a
period of four weeks. The supplier shall if necessary modify the drawings and resubmit three
copies of modified drawings for purchasers approval within two weeks from the purchasers
comment, which will be approved within 15 days. After receipt of purchasers approval the
supplier shall submit four sets of drawings and literature containing erection, operating and
maintenance instructions per equipment. A set of reproducibles of the approved drawing too
will be supplied for the purchaser use.
11. PACKING & MARKING

i. All SMPS equipments shall be packed in strong seasoned wooden crates to
avoid handling problem.
ii. The packing shall be of sufficient strength to withstand rough handling during
transit, strong at site and subsequent handling in the field.
iii. Suitable cushioning, protective padding, or dunnage or spacers shall be
provided to prevent damage or deformation during transit and handling.
iv. All packing cases shall be marked legibly with the appropriate caution symbol
and correctly so as to ensure safe arrival at their destination and avoid
dispatched on account of faulty packing and faulty or illegible markings
stenciled on it-in indelible ink. Whenever necessary, proper arrangement for
lifting, such as lifting hooks etc. shall be provided. Any material found short
inside the packing cases shall be supplied by supplier without any extra cost.
v. Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing
the following information:
b) Details of consignment.
c) Destination.
e) Sign showing upper/lower side of the crate.
f) Handling and unpacking instruction.
All gauges, meters, instruments etc. shall have dials or scales calibrated in metric system of
units. All name plates, instruction plate, warning signs and any marking what-so-ever on the
equipment and its parts and accessories shall be in Hindi-English Language, using idioms,
words and meaning as in current use in India.
In order to facilitate sorting and erection at site every part of the plant and equipment shall be
suitably marked.
12. PLACE OF MANUFACTURE AND INSPECTION:

The tenderer shall state in his tender the place(s) of manufacture, testing and inspection of the
various portions of the work included in the tender. The purchaser or his duly authorised
agent shall have access to the contractor's or sub contractor's work at any time during
working hours for the purpose of inspecting the manufacture and testing of materials,
equipment and completed plant and the contractor shall provide the necessary facilities for
inspection.

308
13. DEPARTURE FROM SPECIFICATION:
Should the tendered wish to depart from provision of this specification either on account of a
manufacturing practice or for any other reasons, he will draw special attention to the
proposed points of departure in his tender and submit such full information, drawings &
specifications as will enable the merit of his proposal to be appreciated.

309
APPENDIX A
Battery Charger:
The Battery Charging equipment shall be housed in a sheet steel cabin finished in stove
enameled light grey color conforming to shade of 631 of IS-5 specification. The charger
cabin shall have thickness of 18 gauge or better with adequate ventilation. The minimum size
of cubical should be 585mm Width, 500mm depth and 560mm Height. The rack shall be free
of sharp edges or sharp corners. The rack shall be designed for easy maintenance &
installation. The rack mounting arrangement shall be such as to provide easy access from rear
and top for installation and maintenance. Two power earth terminals shall be provided in the
frame of the system to provide effective earthing to the system.
The individual Rectifier module shall be easily mounted to/removed from the front side of the
rack. The Rectifier module shall be designed to slide in to the rack on a suitable mechanical
arrangement. The associated AC input, DC output connections, control/systems & interface
cable connecting the modules shall be connected /disconnected easily without causing any
interruption in the supply and damage to load or other working module. There should be
auto/manual change over between float and boost charger.
Charger Section:
The charger should be suitable for operation from single (230 30% volts, 50Hz) or 3 phase
(415 30% volts, 50Hz) AC supply as per the system ultimate capacity and suitable for
charging 24 cell at 2.16 to 2.40 per cell while simultaneously supplying a continuous load as
per requirement at an ambient temp. of 45C. The output of charger should be stabilized
within 1% of the charging voltage. There should be individual MCB for each module and
complete system. The charger section shall comprise of the following items:
S No. Item Description Qty
1. Cabinet 1
2. Hot Swap Rectifiers Modules 25A/48V N+1 ( N = Load Current +
Battery Charging Current)
The rectifier Modules shall be hot swappable with Individual Alarm Indications for Over
Voltage/ Under Voltage or Output Fail.
3 Dropping Diode
During the Boost charging the full battery voltage should not be reflected on the bus bars, that
is, it should be ensured that the constant voltage is available on DC bus bars irrespective of
the fact whether the battery is on float or on boost charge and at same time all battery cell
should be equally charged. There should be auto/manual change over between float and boost
charger.
4 Voltage monitoring Card 1
5 AC Contactor 1
6 DC Contactor 1
7 Low Voltage Detection Card 1
8 MCB 10A 4
9 MCB 64A 2
10 Lightening Protection Device Class C 1
11 Battery temperature Compensation Probe 2m
12 Microprocessor based Controller 1 No
The controller should be mounted so that it is front accessible , front monitored and Front
Controlled. It shall be installed in such a manner that the LCD panel is visible without
opening and Lock / Door of the unit. The controller should have the following facilities:
A. Metering :
a) Load Voltage.
b) Load Current.
c) Battery Voltage.
d) Battery Current.
e) Battery Temp.
f) Voltage and current of Individual module.
310
B. Alarms and Indications :
a) Load voltage high.
b) Single Rectifier alarm
c) Multiple Rectifier alarm
d) Mains out of range
e) System Over Load
f) Mains ON/Battery Discharge
g) Temp. Compensation fail
h) Battery Fail or No Battery
i) Battery Isolated from the load
All alarm circuits shall be provided with suitable delay to ensure that they do not operate to
transient. All the protection /alarm shall be within tolerance of O.25v in case of DC voltage
and 10/0 in case of current. For AC voltage it shall be +/- 5V.
Every alarm, condition shall be accompanied with an audio alarm with audio cut off facility.
C. Functional Indications:
a) Mains available.
b) Rectifier on Auto Float.
c) Rectifier on Auto Charge.
d) Alarm to indicate general alarm condition
13. Potential free contacts:
Potential free contacts should be provided for extension of alarms to centralized display.
a) Mains out of range.
b) Single Rectifier alarm
c) Multiple Rectifier alarm
d) Communication Error.
e) System Over Load.
f) System voltage high.
g) System voltage low.
All the components should be of best quality and from reputed manufacturers.
The layout of components, wiring workmanship reliability etc. shall be of best
quality. Adequate space should be provided within the charger section and
Distribution, Switching, Control, alarm & Monitoring section for easy
accessibility of MCB, Fuses, Alarms, protection devices etc. The charging
equipment should be complete with the various component listed above but
necessarily limited to the same. The charger shall also be complete with
wiring, glands and fixing bolts.

311
SECTION-10
CHAPTER-5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF H.F.CABLE (150 OHMS BALANCED) FOR

CONNECTING POWER LINE CARRIER COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
WITH THE ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT FOR HVPN CARRIER NETWORK
1. GENERAL:
High frequency cable shall connect the coupling device installed in the
switchyard to the PLC terminal installed indoor. The high frequency cable to
be offered by the bidder shall be suitable for being laid directly in trenches or
in ducts.
The cable shall be tinned copper braided and steel armoured and its outer
covering shall be protected against attack by termites. Bidder shall offer his
comments on method employed by him for earthing of screen and submit full
justification for the same with due regard to safety requirements.
1.1 SCOPE:-
1.1.1 This specification covers details of H.F. Cable (150 Ohms BALANCED)
required for connecting Power Line carrier Communication terminals with the
associated equipment for HVPN carrier Network.
1.1.2 The scope of supply shall Include design, manufacture, testing at

manufacturers works before despatch and delivery of the H.F. Cable for use
on Power Line carrier Communication equipment in HVPN.
1.2 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:-

1.2.1 The EHV grid substations (66kV and above) where the HF Cable is required
to be installed are located in the level plains of Haryana. The climatic
conditions are of extreme nature varying from extreme cold to dry and tropical
humidity to hot.
1.2.2 The HF Cable is required to serve satisfactorily under the following climatic
conditions prevailing at site:-
i) Maximum ambient temperature : 50oC
ii) Minimum temperature : -2.5oC
iii) Relative humidity :
a) Maximum : 100%
b) Minimum : 26%
iv) Average Nos. of thunder
Storms days per annum : 45.
v) Average Nos. of rainy days per annum : 120 days
vi) Average rain fall per annum. : 900mm
vii) Average number of dust storms
days per annum : 35
viii) Attitude above mean sea level : less than1000
ix) Maximum temperature in the : 45oC.
shade.
x) Maximum wind pressure : 195 Kg/M2

312
1.2.3 The atmosphere is to be considered as laden with industrial and town gas
and dust in suspension during dry-months. Fog smoke and mild acid are also
present. Heavy lighting is also present during the months from June to
October. The H.F.Cable is exposed to sunshine, rain, Fog, Hail, Snow etc.
1.3 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:-
1.3.1 All materials used in the construction/manufacture of the H.F.Cable shall be

brand new and of the best quality obtainable of their respective kind and shall
confirm to their respective Indian Standards or other equivalent International
recognized standards whenever applicable. The successful bidder shall
assume full reasonability for coordinated and adequate design.
1.3.2 The workmanship for HF Cable shall be of the highest grade and the entire
construction in accordance with the best modern engineering practice. The
HF Cable shall be designed to ensure satisfactory operation under the
atmospheric conditions prevailing at site.
1.4 STANDARDS:
1.4.1 The HF Cable and all its materials covered by this specification shall unless
otherwise stated complete in all respects with the requirements of the latest edition of IS-5026
and IS-11967 Part-II/Sec-3.
1.5 DEPARTURE FROM SPECIFICATION:-

Should the bidder wish to depart from the provisions of this specifications
either on account of manufacturing practice for any other reasons he shall
draw special attention to the proposed points of departure a separate
sheet(s) in his tender as per Annexure-III of this specification and shall submit
such full information, drawings and specification so that the merits of his
proposal may be fully understood. This specification shall be held binding
unless the departures have been fully recorded as required above.
1.6 DOCUMENTATION:-
1.6.1 The successful bidder shall submit four sets of drawings for HVPNL approval.
1. Drawing showing the inside/inner of the HF Cable and dimensions of

its various components and structures including its weight.
2. Any other drawing to explain details and merits shall also be
submitted.
NOTE: All above drawings should be a minimum space (14x10cm) for

stamping the approval of drawings by HVPNL.
1.7 TROPICAL TREATMENT:-
1.7.1 The H.F.Cable can be subjected during the service to extremely severe
climatic conditions detailed under Sr. No. 1.2 of this specification. All
corrodible parts and surfaces shall be provided with such protective finishes
so that no part of the installed H.F.Cable shall be injuriously affected by the
atmospheric conditions. The H.F.Cable, if required, may be given special
treatments for tropical conditions.
313
1.7.2 All part of the H.F.Cable that are likely to develop corrosion under normal
working conditions shall be effectively protected against corrosion by
standard methods to achieve durable results.
1.8 BIDDERS EXPERIENCE:-
1.8.1 The bidder (s) shall clearly state in their experience and capability to
undertake design, manufacture, testing and supply of the items similar to that
covered in this specification giving complete information about their
establishment i.e. design office, working personnel, plant and machinery and
testing facilities available at the manufacturers works. Details of
collaboration, if any, with other renowned experienced manufacturers shall be
stated in the tender.
1.8.2 The bidder shall supply list of purchase orders of similar item executed by
them during the past, giving the name of the purchase, year of supply and
place of installation of the item.
1.8.3 Information regarding satisfactory services/operation of the equipment

supplied in the past be also furnished with the tender.
1.9 RESPONSIBILITY OF DESIGN:-
The successful bidder shall assume full responsibility for adequate design for
the duty in view to ensure trouble free long service and tropical conditions
and shall use such arrangement and material as to confirm to the best
engineering practice for the operating conditions specified.
Impedance of the cable shall be such as to match the impedance of the PLC
terminal on one side and to that of the coupling device on the other side over
the entire carrier frequency range of 40-500 kHz. The H.F.Cable (150 ohms
balanced) shall meet the following parameters:-
1. Overall diameter of H.F.Cable shall be between 20-25 mm.

2. The mutual capacitance at 1 kHz of the H.F.Cable be 34 pf
(Nominal)/meter.
3. Conductor resistance of cable shall not exceed 12.8 ohm per km at
20oC & dia to be 1.4mm.
4. The H.F.Cable shall have bending radius of 20 times the overall
diameter of the cable.
5. Loop resistance of H.F.Cable will not exceed 30 ohms per km at
20oC.
6. Withstand test Voltage between conductor and outer sheath for one
minute to be 4kV.
7. The attenuation per km of the cable at various frequencies in the
range of 10 to 500 kHz shall remain in the range of 1 to 5.1 dB/km.
8. H.F.Cable will be with semi spaced dielectric, polythene string and
tube and annealed tinned braided copper wire with 90% coverage,
polythene inner sheath, GI wire braided armoring and overall PVC
sheathed, preferably grey. The protective armoring provided in the HF
cable shall consist of 0.3 mm (approx) dia of standard GI wire braiding
with 70% coverage.

314
1.10 TESTS:-
Type Tests:
accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and
be submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as schedule
given in Bar Chart.
i) Corona extinction voltage

ii) Characteristic impedance Attenuation (insertion loss)
iii) Structural return loss
iv) Capacitance
v) Capacitance Stability
vi) Capacitance unbalance
vii) Transmission unbalance
viii) Mechanically induced noise Voltage
ix) Time delay
x) Ageing stability
xi) Stress-crack resistance
xii) Outer conductor integrity
xiii) Screening efficiency
xiv) Cold bend
xv) Flow
xvi) Dimensional stability
xvii) Contamination
xviii) Bendability
xix) Flammability
xx) Resistance to fluids
xxi) Solderability Weight
ROUTINE TESTS:
ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant ISS:11967 (Part-
2/Sec-3), shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL
representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL.
i) Visual and mechanical inspection
ii) Physical dimensions
Iii Marking
iv) Workmanship
v) Characteristic impedance Attenuation (insertion loss)
vi) Structural return loss
vii) Corona extinction voltage
viii) Capacitance
ix) Capacitance unbalance

315
x) Transmission unbalance
xi) Mechanically induced noise voltage
xii) Time delay
xiii) Cold dend
xiv) Contamination
xv) Resistance of fluids
xvi) Solderability Weight
1.11 INSPECTION:-
H.F.Cable shall be inspected by the authorised representative of the HVPNL at

manufacturers premises and acceptance test shall be carried out in accordance
with this specification. Inspection report alongwith the routine test certificates
shall be forwarded to the HVPNL for approval before despatch
1.12 PACKING AND DESPATCH :-
1.12.1 After approval of the Inspection/Test Certificates, the H.F.Cable will be

despatched as per the despatch instructions issued by the HVPNL.
1.12.2 The H.F.Cable shall be suitably packed in drum lengths of 500 meters with +
5% tolerance in drum lengths and total ordered quantity for transportation
direct to the consignee and the Contractor shall be responsible for all
damages and losses due to improper packing.
1.13 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:-
1.13.1 The bidders shall furnish with his offer Guaranteed Technical Particulars of
the HF Cable offered as per Annexure-I of this specification alongwith his
comments where his specification do not meet or exceed the requirements
laid down in this specification. These guaranteed technical particulars should
be supported by the published literature of the bidder.
1.13.2 Any other additional technical particulars may be supplied by the bidder
which he may like to give to prove the merits of the HF Cable offered by him.
Tenders without Guaranteed Technical Particulars may not be considered.

316
317

Technical Specification PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Technical Specification PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

CONTENTS

BID DOCUMENT NO.: REC-138 VOLUME-II

FOR 220 kV SUB-STATION MATERIAL

SECTION-10 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF PLCC EQUIPMENT

Sr. No. Name of Substation Nearest Rail Head

i) Location In the state of Haryana

Sr. No. NAME OF SUB STATION GELO DRAWING NO.

7CX2.5mm2, 3CX2.5mm2 including

7CX2.5mm2, 3CX2.5mm2 including

G:\REC-138 New\Technical specification 21.04.15.doc CT-9

2.0 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS

2.4 Wherever a material or article is specified or defined by the name of a particular

3.1 The works covered by the specification shall be designed, engineered,

3.7 Other internationally accepted standards which ensure equivalent or better

4.5 The equipment shall also comply to the following:

b) To facilitate erection of equipment, all items to be assembled as site shall

c) All piping, if any between equipment control cabinet operating mechanism

5.0 ENGINEERING DATA

G:\REC-138 New\Technical specification 21.04.15.doc CT-12

6.1 LIST OF DOCUMENTS

G:\REC-138 New\Technical specification 21.04.15.doc CT-13

6.5 APPROVAL PROCEDURE

i) Approval/comments/by Within 4 weeks of receipt.

ii) Resubmission Within 3 (three) weeks

iii) Approval or comments Within 3 weeks of receipt of

iv) Furnishing of distribution 3 weeks from the date of last

6.7 OTHER REQUIREMENTS OF DOCUMENTATION

7.0 COLOUR SCHEME AND CODES

- Finishing colour of Outdoor equipment.

- Finishing colour of all cubicals.

- Finishing colour of various auxiliary system equipment including piping.

- Finishing colour of various building items.

G:\REC-138 New\Technical specification 21.04.15.doc CT-15

G:\REC-138 New\Technical specification 21.04.15.doc CT-16

8.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

8.2 PROVISION FOR EXPOSURE TO HOT HUMID CLIMATE

8.2.1 SPACE HEATERS

8.2.1.2 One or more adequately rated permanently or thermostatically connected

8.2.2 FUNGISTATIC VARNISH

8.2.3 VENTILATION OPENING

In order to ensure adequate ventilation, compartments shall have ventilation

8.2.4 DEGREE OF PROTECTION

b) Installed indoor in air conditioned area :1-31

c) Installed in covered are : 1 52

d) Installed indoor in non-airconditioned area where possibility of entry of

G:\REC-138 New\Technical specification 21.04.15.doc CT-19

G:\REC-138 New\Technical specification 21.04.15.doc CT-20

9.1 Each main and auxiliary item of substation is to be permanently attached to it in a

10. FIRST FILL OF CONSUMABLE, OIL AND LUBRICANT

12. QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME

G:\REC-138 New\Technical specification 21.04.15.doc CT-21

b) Qualification data for bidder's key personnel:

c) Documentation control System:

d) The procedure for purchases of material, parts components and selection

e) System for shop manufacturing and ,site erection control including

f) Control and non-conforming items and system for corrective actions:

h) Control of calibration and testing of measuring instruments and field

i) System for indication and appraisal of inspection status:

j) System for quality audits:

k) System for authorising release of manufactured product to the Purchaser:

l) System for maintenance of records:

m) System for handling storage and delivery: and

The Employer or his duly authorised representative reserves the right to